. I. Crow ley 
 University of Maine 
 Orono, Maine
 
 SANSKRIT READER: 
 
 WITH VOCABULARY AND NOTES 
 
 BY 
 
 CHARLES ROCKWELL LANMAN 
 
 CORRESPONDING MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE OF FRANCE (ACADEMIE DES INSCRIPTIONS 
 ET BELLES-LETTRES), ETC., PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT AT HARVARD UNIVERSITY 
 
 FIRST EDITION, SIXTH ISSUE 
 
 BOSTON 
 
 GINN AND COMPANY 
 1912
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1888, by 
 
 C. R. LANMAN, 
 in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 
 
 TYPOGRAPHY OF THE TEXT BY TYPOGRAPHY OF THE 
 
 GEBRUDER UNGER, VOCABULARY AND NOTES BY 
 
 SCHONEBERGER STRASSE, 17A, J. 8. GUSHING & CO., 
 
 BERLIN, SW. BOSTON, MASS.
 
 Annsx 
 
 PK 
 
 TO MY TEACHERS, 
 
 WILLIAM DWIGHT WHITNEY 
 
 OF YALE COLLEGE, 
 
 ALBRECHT WEBER 
 OF THE UNIVERSITY OF BERLIN, 
 
 AND 
 
 RUDOLF ROTH 
 OF THE UNIVERSITY OF TUBINGEN, 
 
 IN TOKEN OF THANKS AND AFFECTION. 
 
 2047520
 
 PKEFACE. 
 
 THE results of comparative philology are now so generally incorporated 
 into our modern classical grammars, lexicons, and text-books, that even a 
 slight knowledge of Sanskrit, if it be accurate so far as it goes, is of great 
 service to the classical teacher in making his instruction interesting and 
 effective. As independent disciplines, moreover, Sanskrit and comparative 
 philology, and the literatures and religions of India, are constantly gaining 
 in importance, so that, for example, Sanskrit is now taught at all but one of 
 the twenty universities of the German Empire. 
 
 The design of this work, then, is twofold. In the first place, it is to 
 serve as an introduction to these subjects for the students of our colleges 
 and universities. The excellent Chrestomathy of BOEHTLINGK has no 
 vocabulary ; and few persons can be expected to buy the costly dictionaiy 
 of WILLIAMS or that of BOEHTLINGK AND ROTH, at the outset, when the} 7 
 are uncertain whether Sanskrit will be of sufficient interest or use to them 
 to warrant their continuing its study. What the beginner needs is an 
 elementary work comprehending both text and vocabulary in a single 
 volume. And accordingly, this Reader is meant to furnish ample material 
 for about fifty weeks' reading, in a course of three hours a week, and, 
 with the text, the appropriate lexical apparatus. The Reader is made as 
 a companion- volume to WHITNEY'S Sanskrit Grammar, and these two books 
 supply all that is needed for the first year's study. 
 
 This Reader is designed, in the second place, to render a knowledge of 
 Sanskrit accessible to the classical teachers of high-schools, academies, and 
 colleges. These teachers, if they pursue this study at all, usually do so 
 without the aid of an instructor. And it is especially the requirements of 
 unaided private study that I have taken constant pains to meet. I state this 
 fact thus explicitly, because, both here at Cambridge, and during my con- 
 nection with the Johns Hopkins University (where the plan for this work 
 was formed) , numerous inquiries for such a book have been addressed to me 
 by persons very remote from any of the higher institutions of learning. 
 
 If, incidentally, this work should help to correct some of the false 
 notions which are prevalent respecting the relations of Sanskrit to other 
 languages of the Indo-European family, and to save the literature from
 
 undue depreciation and from exaggerated praise, it will have served a 
 worthy object. 
 
 So cumbrous or so meagre have been hitherto the appliances for acquiring 
 even a moderate knowledge of Sanskrit, that classical students, when seeking 
 such knowledge as an auxiliary to their special work, have found the labor 
 discouragingl}' great. These students unquestionably have a legitimate and 
 sufficient reason for undertaking Sanskrit, and I venture to hope that the 
 difficulties of the beginning (see p. xv) have been so materially lessened 
 that they will now find even a modicum of Sanskrit well worth the trouble of 
 attainment. 
 
 In making my selections 1 from the various Sanskrit writings, I have had 
 two practical aims in view : first, to provide abundant material for thorough 
 drill in the language of the classical period ; and, secondly, to furnish a 
 brief introduction to the works of the Vedic period, Mantra, Brahmana, 
 and Sutra. Accordingly I have not sought to give any thing new, but 
 rather that which is best suited for beginners. The easy Nala is the 
 Xenophon's Anabasis of Sanskrit students, and quotations from it appear 
 very often in the grammars. And the first five chapters here given form a 
 complete story. For an elementary reader, the Hitopadea is unrivalled, 
 and to leave it out would have been an inexcusable omission, unless, indeed, 
 its place were taken by the Panchatantra. From this latter work I attempted 
 to prepare some selections ; but the text is in so unsatisfactory a condition, 
 that I relinquished the plan. And so, although the Hitopadega has been 
 printed very often, I have given a considerable part 2 of it here, choosing the 
 fables on the ground of their intrinsic excellence and their interest as 
 originals of well-known occidental stories. 3 For similar reasons the six 
 tales from the Katha-sarit-sagara were selected. On account of their easy 
 style and simple narrative, they furnish admirable matter for exercise in rapid 
 reading. The selections from " Manu" are so made as to illustrate some of 
 the most important and interesting matters of Hindu custom and belief. 4 
 
 Among the Vedic hymns (or Mantra-material) are, first, some of the 
 easiest 5 ; then some taken on account of their poetic 6 or dramatic 7 merit, or 
 
 1 These include 68 pages of classical San- which was appealed to as scriptural author- 
 skrit and 37 pages of Vedic Sanskrit. ity for the practice of widow-burning. Com- 
 
 2 Nineteen fables : there are forty-three pare also the notes on 28 28 , 57 3 , and 65 9 ff., 
 in all. with those on 65 6 , 91 16 , and 97 2 respec- 
 
 8 See the introductions to the fables in tively. 
 
 the Notes. 5 Such are selections xxxi. (Rigveda i.l), 
 
 4 Compare the table of contents. The xxxiii., xxxviii., xxxix., xli., xlv.,xlvi., andlix. 
 
 text-selections are intended to be mutually 6 Selection xxxii. is the best, 
 
 illustrative as far as may be. Thus the 7 Selections xxxv., xxxvii., and Ivi. are in 
 
 passage 64 8 ff. is given for its interesting dramatic form (see WHITNEY, page xviii). 
 
 bearing on Rigveda x.18.7 (86 n ), the verse and are among the most difficult.
 
 [v] 
 
 their ethical interest l ; and finally some taken because of their historical im- 
 portance. 2 For the most part, a repetition of the hymns given by DELBRUECK 
 and by BOEHTLINGK in their Chrestomathies has been avoided. The 
 Brahmana pieces are chosen in such a way as to show the relation of this 
 kind of literature to the hymns or Mantras. 3 The selections from the 
 Grihya-sutras are the two most interesting chapters of Indian private 
 antiquities, the wedding and the burial service. These texts are, to a 
 certain extent, rubrics, and prescribe that numerous specified stanzas of 
 the Rigveda be repeated at these ceremonials. Care has therefore been 
 taken that all the stanzas here cited by their first words should be given 
 in full among the selections from the hymns. 4 
 
 Concerning the text, little need be said. It would have been either 
 folly or idle pretense to make elaborate text-studies for the short extracts 
 of which the Reader is composed. 5 I have accordingly contented myself, 
 in the main, with reprinting the text of the best editions. Misprints have 
 of course been corrected, and I have endeavored to make the orthography 
 conformable to the best standard 6 and consistent throughout. 7 Of some 
 slight emendations, due mention will be made in the Notes. For the Nala, 
 I followed the edition of BUEHLER in his Third Book of Sanskrit 8 ; for 
 the Hitopadega, the text of BOEHTLINGK in the second edition of his 
 Chrestomathy, 8 and MUELLER ; for the Katha-sarit-sagara, BROCKIIAUS ; 
 and for " Manu," LOISELEUR DESLONGCHAMPS. I regret that the results 
 of the studies of BUEHLER, BURNELL, HOPKINS, and JOLLY on the text of 
 " Manu" are not yet available. 
 
 1 Such are the Varuna-hymns, selections from Rigveda x. 9, 14, 16, 17, 18, 53, 154, 
 xliii.-xlv. and 155 (selections xlix.ff.), and i. 97 (selec- 
 
 2 Such are the hymns for the dead and tion xxxiv.). This last hymn is mere trash, 
 the wedding-hymn ; likewise selection xxxvii., and would not have been included among 
 and selection xxxvi. (which contains the the texts, had not A9walayana (at iv.6.18) 
 Savitri). Selection Ixii. is the Maitrayani prescribed that it be used as a burial-hymn ; 
 version of the Hiranya-garbha hymn, Eig- but I could not allow room for the " Sun- 
 veda x. 121, and is given partly in order that hymns" (sauryani) and the "Blessings" 
 those who possess copies of the Rigveda (svasty-ayanani), which are also mentioned 
 may study the two versions comparatively, at iv.6.18. 
 
 3 Thus the Brahmana selections Ixvi., 5 See A. WEBER, Indische Studien, ii. 151. 
 Ixvii., Ixviii., and Ixxii. stand in connection G Especially in the use of anusvara and of 
 with the Mantra selections Ivi., xlvii., Ixii., the nasal mutes, of b and of 5. I have 
 and xlvi. respectively. written ccb. where WHITNEY (see 227) 
 
 4 The stanzas required for the wedding writes ch. 
 
 ceremonial are given in selections Iviii., Ivii., 7 But some of the interesting orthograph- 
 
 and lv. From this the student will see why ical peculiarities of the Maitrayani Sanhita 
 
 there are some selections consisting of only I have allowed to stand, 
 
 one or two stanzas. The burial-stanzas are 8 See the " Brief List," page xvii.
 
 [vi] 
 
 It is a pleasant duty to acknowledge my thanks to BOEHTLINGK, who, in 
 a way no less generous than unexpected, volunteered to look over all the 
 proofs of the classical part of the text. For the well-established and well- 
 edited Vedic texts, such help was of course not needed. 
 
 For the Rigveda, AUFRECHT'S second edition was made the standard. 
 For the selections from the Maitrayanl Sanhita, I am indebted to the kind- 
 ness of its editor, 1 Dr. LEOPOLD VON SCHBOEDER, of Dorpat. The extracts 
 from the Brahmanas naturally follow the editions of WEBER and AUFRECHT. 
 The chapters from Acwalayana are a reprint from STENZLER'S edition, witt 
 some unimportant t} T pographical licenses. 
 
 The vocabulary, it is almost needless to say, is based on the great Lex- 
 icon of BOEHTLINGK AND ROTH. I should of course deviate from it only 
 with the utmost circumspection ; but I trust that I have not followed it 
 slavishly. 
 
 As for the extent of the vocabulary, it is designed to be complete for 
 the text given in the Reader, and also, it may be added, for the text in the 
 Appendix to the Grammar. 
 
 It is proper to mention here several matters touching the general plan of 
 the vocabulary. It is not a mere list of the actually occurring Sanskrit 
 words with their English equivalents. So far as possible, it aims to do with 
 thoroughness two things : 
 
 First, as regards the forms, To enable the student to trace every word 
 back to its root, by giving references to WHITNEY'S chapters (xvi. and 
 xvii.) on word- formation, and by giving the root itself, and, in the case of 
 secondary and tertiary derivatives, the intermediate forms, even when these 
 do not occur in the text at all. Thus, for the complete explanation of 
 mithyopacara (p. 217), are given, first, mithya, then the older form thereof, 
 mithuya, 2 then the adjective mlthu from which the adverb is derived, and 
 finally the root mith, although neither the adverbs nor the adjective nor 
 an}- verbal form of the root occurs in the text. In like manner, car + upa 
 is given solely on account of upacara. 
 
 Secondly, as regards the meanings, To enable the student to trace every 
 signification back to the radical idea, b}* giving not only the meaning 
 required for translating a particular passage, but also, if this is a secondary 
 or tertiary or later meaning, the intermediate meanings, and in their logical 
 order of development. Thus the only meanings of the word pada, as it 
 
 1 He gave them to me in manuscript, attention drawn to the peculiar form and 
 before he himself began printing. accent of the adverb and will find the ex- 
 
 2 By looking out the reference to 1112e planation thereof, 
 (under mithu), the student will have his
 
 [vii] 
 
 occurs in the text of this Reader, are ' foot' or ' leg,' in ten passages, and 
 'verse of a three- versed stanza,' in one passage (60 12 ). The history and 
 uses of the word may be clearly understood from BOEHTLINGK AND ROTH. 
 The original meaning ' foot ' was extended to that of ' leg ' ; then specialized 
 to the meaning ' limb of a quadruped ' ; then generalized to the meaning 
 'quarter' (as, conversely, the English word quarter is specialized to the 
 meaning 'fourth part of a quadruped, including a leg,' e.g., in quarter of 
 beef} ; once more it is specialized to the meaning ' quarter of a four- versed 
 stanza,' i.e. ' verse ' ; and then, at last, the use of the word is illogically 
 extended, and it is made to denote a verse of even a three- versed stanza. 
 To have given the meanings ' foot, leg, verse,' in three words, and perhaps 
 in the order ' verse, leg, foot,' would have sufficed, it is true, for the purpose 
 of making a translation ; but such translation demands of the student onl}' 
 the most thoughtless and mechanical labor. On the other hand, by in- 
 dicating briefly the development and connection of meanings, the attention 
 of the student is directed to the processes which are constantly going on 
 in the life and growth of language ; and thus, although Sanskrit is a dead 
 language, the study of Sanskrit may be made a study of life and growth. 
 
 The illustration of the transitions of meaning by analogies from the 
 English and other familiar tongues would, it seemed to me, greatly increase 
 the interest and usefulness of the vocabulary. And so, considerable space 
 has been devoted to this matter. Thus under vyama (p. 254, top) , ' a 
 stretch-out,' i.e. ' a fathom,' are adduced the closely parallel English fathom, 
 from Anglo-Saxon /ceSm, ' the extended arms,' and also opyvid and French 
 toise, both meaning ' fathom,' and of common origin respectively with 6/>eyw 
 and Latin tender e, ' stretch.' 1 
 
 In a book intended partly for persons whose chief interest in Sanskrit 
 is from the side of its relations to the classical languages and to our mother- 
 tongue, etymological comparisons are plainly called for. Accordingly, the 
 kindred words from the Greek, Latin, Anglo-Saxon, and English have been 
 given, 2 and alwa}*s along with their meanings. It is hoped that these com- 
 parisons, presenting, as they do, many familiar words with which the learner 
 can associate what is new and strange, will prove a useful aid to the mem- 
 ory. Et} T mology is a subject in which there is large room for reasonable 
 
 1 For other parallels, compare, for exam- to find how these words are parallel in 
 
 pie, abharana, barhis, bhavana, vanga, specialization and metaphor. On this sub- 
 
 varna. Sometimes the understanding of ject in general, compare CURTIUS, Grund- 
 
 the parallelism depends on a knowledge ziige b , pp. 111-116, and BRINKMANN, Die 
 
 of the etymology of an English word ; thus Metaphern, Bonn, 1878. 
 
 under root nud + vi, are adduced the Eng- 2 To give them without their meanings 
 
 lish di-vert, dis-port, and s-port, and a refer- and without showing the connection of 
 
 ence to SKEAT'S dictionary or to WEBSTER'S ideas is, for an elementary book, a useless 
 
 may be necessary for the student, in order task.
 
 [viii] 
 
 difference of opinion on matters of detail, and on such matters well-recognized 
 authorities often disagree. I have tried to use the standard works of refer- 
 ence in the light of the best and latest etymological criticism at my command, 
 and to distinguish with care between what is certain and what is mere conjec- 
 ture. In the revision of the greater part of my manuscript for the press, I 
 had the benefit of KLUGE'S valuable dictionary. 1 His acceptance of the cur- 
 rent comparisons has often given me assurance, and his sober judgment has 
 often confirmed me in scepticism or silence on doubtful points. In the 
 numerous cases where the undoubtedly allied words are too many to be 
 given in full, I have usually selected those forms which were the simplest 
 or the most interesting, or those whose kinship was clearest. 2 
 
 These comparisons include only genuinely cognate words, as distinguished 
 from borrowed words ; the latter have as a rule been excluded, or, if given, 
 have been characterized as borrowings. 3 Thus eras, Latin sen-ex, and 
 English sen-green are given on page 266, all as genuine cognates of sana; 
 the words senate, senator, senatorial, senescent, senile, senility, senior, sire, 
 sir, seigniorage, etc., are not mentioned, because they are not genuine 
 English cognates, but only more or less ancient borrowings or more or less 
 direct derivatives from the Latin. 4 So under the root srp (p. 276) are given 
 Latin serpens and reptilis, and it would be superfluous to add the borrowed 
 English serpent and reptile. 
 
 The accents of all words have been regularly marked in the headings of 
 the articles, so far as the accents are known from the occurrence of the 
 words in any accentuated texts of the literature. 5 But in addition to these 
 words, the verb-forms immediately following the root have been uniformly 
 accented, according to the rules, except in a few doubtful cases ; and a 
 number of compounds occurring on the pages of Nala have been accented, 
 
 1 Entitled Etymologisches Worterbuch der 6 For these accents I have relied on 
 deutschen Sprache. Strassburg, Karl J. BOEHTLINGK'S Sanskrit-Wdrterbuch in Kiirz- 
 Triibner. 1883. Royal 8. Price 10 Mark erer Fassung as far as it has appeared, i.e. 
 50 Pfennige. to the end of bh, and for the rest of the 
 
 2 Thus under sana (p. 266) might have alphabet, on the great thesaurus of BOEHT- 
 been given, in addition to Latin senex, the LINGK AND ROTH. There are many words 
 words senior, senectus, senilis, senesco, senator, accented in more than one way (e.g., rajya, 
 senatus, etc. ; but these are readily suggested rajyk, rajya, asana, asana, daridra, dar- 
 by senex. idra, daiva, daiva, bhuti, bhuti, vrsti, 
 
 8 Thus the interesting compound sene-schal vfsti, vend, v6nu) ; such have generally 
 
 is added under sana, not as a genuine Eng- been left unmarked ; but of a few common 
 
 lish cognate, but as a borrowing through words like manu, dvipad, pati, papa, and 
 
 the French from Continental Germanic, mati, the prevailing accent is given, espe- 
 
 where its first member is indeed a genuine cially, if (as in the case of bhrti or patrl) 
 
 cognate. the other accent is rare, or (as in the case 
 
 4 Compare note 2 , above. of gtiska) not authenticated.
 
 [ix] 
 
 according to the rules, in order to make more tangible the difference between 
 homonymous determinatives and possessives. 1 
 
 What form should be given to the headings of articles is often a question. 
 For denominative verbs, I have chosen the stem-form (e.g., mantraya rather 
 than mantray) ; to this is prefixed the root-sign (V), merely in order to 
 catch the eye ; the sign must not be understood as meaning that such stems 
 are in any wise co-ordinate with roots. The stems of the perfect active 
 participle and of the primar}' comparatives are given as ending in vans and 
 yans, but without any implication that these are theoretically better than the 
 weaker forms. Roots with medial or final ar or r are given in the latter 
 form, and so are the stems in ar or r. 2 
 
 The synopses of conjugational forms which follow each verbal root are 
 based on the collections, still in manuscript, made by Professor WHITNEY. 3 
 These were placed at my disposal by him with the greatest kindness. They 
 include all the verb-forms cited by the St. Petersburg Lexicon and BOEHT- 
 LINGK'S Abridgment, as occurring in the actual literature, besides very 
 extensive gleanings made independently by Professor WHITNEY from texts 
 represented in the Lexicon, 4 and from others published since its completion, 5 
 or even not yet published. 6 In the description and classification of the forms, 
 I have followed WHITNEY. It often happens that there are several forms in 
 actual use for the same tense ; in such cases, the commonest one has been 
 given, or else the one prescribed by the Hindu Root-book (dhatu-patha) , or 
 sometimes more than one form. Although in the case of many roots the 
 uorist is confined almost exclusively to the Vedic language, I have neverthe- 
 less given the aorist in such cases in order to fill out the conjugational 
 scheme, since this seemed desirable from a pedagogical point of view. For 
 pedagogical reasons, also, the secondary conjugations have been for the 
 most part omitted. Many roots which are conjugated regularly in only one 
 voice show forms of the other voice in the Epos, especially where the metre 
 demands them. It is very difficult to say just how far such forms should 
 be included, and my course in accepting or rejecting them has been, I fear, 
 not wholly consistent. 
 
 The Notes, which form the third part of this work, will be issued as soon 
 as is practicable. It is designed that they shall be as brief as possible, but 
 shall render ample assistance in the interpretation of difficult passages and 
 
 1 Compare bhimaparakrama and bhima- * For example, the C/atapatha and Aita- 
 parakrama, p. 206. reya Brahmanas. 
 
 2 See WHITNEY, 107 and 108, and com- 5 Especially GARBE'S edition of Apastam- 
 pare 370. ba's Qrauta Sutra, and VON SCHROEDEK'S 
 
 8 See Proceedings of the American Oriental Maitrayani. 
 Society for May, 1882, p. xiii. 6 The Jaiminiya Brahmana.
 
 M 
 
 the explanation of allusions to the antiquities of India. The plan includes 
 also concise literary introductions to the various selections. 
 
 An open acknowledgment of my thanks is due to the printers of the 
 vocabulary, Messrs. J. S. GUSHING & Co. They have performed their part 
 with such intelligence, accuracy, and skill as to merit most cordial 
 recognition. 
 
 In conclusion, I desire to make public expression of my gratitude to my 
 honored teacher, Professor WILLIAM D WIGHT WHITNEY, for his constant 
 interest in this undertaking and for his generous aid. I can only hope 
 that the book may do something to further the cause in which he has labored 
 long and devotedly, and that it ma} 7 help to enlarge the scope of classical 
 teaching, to quicken the interest in the history of our mother-tongue, and to 
 make Sanskrit study among us increasingly fruitful. 
 
 C. R. L. 
 
 HOLLIS HALL, HARVARD COLLEGE, 
 
 CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
 
 December, 1883. 
 
 NOTE TO THE FOURTH ISSUE (1903). 
 
 THE references to Whitney's Sanskrit Grammar which are given in Parts II. and 
 III. of this book are, I believe, absolutely correct throughout for the first edition 
 of the Grammar. The second edition of the Grammar did not appear until after the 
 plates for Parts II. and III. of the Reader were made. The section-numbers of 
 the second edition of the Grammar (see Whitney's Preface thereto) are substantially 
 unchanged from those of the first; but there are some slight alterations, notably 
 in the sequence from 98 to 108, and again in the sequence from 708 to 713 
 (whereby the references to the section on the important verb cru are thrown out 
 of gear). Occasionally, too, a statement has been taken from one section and put 
 into another and more appropriate section: thus the euphonic treatment of bhos 
 has been shifted from 176a to 174b. Moreover, the subsections are much 
 more thoroughly marked (with a, b, c, etc.) in the second edition. Users of the 
 second or third edition of the Grammar will often have to make a slight allowance 
 for these changes, seeking, for example, 844 8 under 844a, 371 12 under 371k, and 
 the like. It seemed hardly worth while to alter the plates to suit these changes ; 
 a little practical common sense will usually offset the apparent inaccuracy. Men- 
 tion of these matters has already been made by me below, in the Postscript, p. 405; 
 but as it seems usually to be overlooked there, I have thought it well to repeat the 
 mention in this more conspicuous place. C R L 
 
 JUNE, 1903.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Introductory suggestions xv 
 
 Brief list of books for students of Sanskrit ..... xvii 
 
 PART I. 
 
 A. From the Maha-bharata. 
 
 SELECTION 
 
 I. The story of Nala and Damayanti ....... 1 
 
 B. From the Hitopadec,a. 
 
 II. Preface and introduction 16 
 
 III. The old tiger and the traveller 20 
 
 IV. The deer and the crow, and the jackal ...... 23 
 
 V. The blind vulture, the birdlings, and the cat 27 
 
 VI. The ass, the dog, and the thief 30 
 
 VII. The lion, the mouse, and the cat 31 
 
 VIII. The crows and the serpent 31 
 
 IX. The lion, the old hare, and the well 32 
 
 X. The birds and the apes 33 
 
 XI. The ass in the tiger-skin 34 
 
 XII. The elephant, the hares, and the moon 35 
 
 XIII. The blue jackal 36 
 
 XIV. The two geese and the tortoise 37 
 
 XV. The three fishes 38 
 
 XVI. The herons, the serpent, and the ichneumons . . .39 
 XVII. The hermit, and the mouse that was changed to a tiger . . .40 
 
 XVIII. The heron, the fishes, and the crab 41 
 
 XIX. The Brahman and his jar 42 
 
 XX. The Brahman with the goat, and the three rogues . . . .43 
 
 XXI. The Brahman and his faithful ichneumon 44 
 
 C. From the Katha-sarit-sagara. 
 
 XXII. King Putraka and the seven-league boots 45 
 
 XXIII. Story of Mousey, the thrifty merchant 46 
 
 XXIV. King Qibi, the falcon, and the dove ....... 48 
 
 XXV. Story of Ahalya 48
 
 [xii] 
 
 SELECTION 
 
 XXVI. The king who didn't know his Sanskrit grammar . 
 XXVII. The pathetic history of the stories 
 
 XXVIII. D. From the Manava-dharmac.astra.* 
 
 PAGE 
 
 . 49 
 . 53 
 
 56 
 
 6. 
 
 The four ages of the world 
 
 . 58 
 59 
 
 
 
 d. 
 
 
 65 
 
 XXIX. 
 
 
 68 
 
 Riddle 
 
 
 XXX. 
 
 Riddle 
 
 
 68 
 
 
 KV. 
 
 E. From the Rigveda. 
 
 
 XXXI. 
 
 i. 1 
 
 
 69 
 
 XXXJJ. 
 
 L32 
 
 Indra slays the dragon 
 
 . 70 
 
 XXXIII. 
 
 i. 50 
 
 To Surya, the Sun-god 
 
 . 71 
 
 XXXIV. 
 
 i. 97 
 
 To Agni ......... 
 
 . 72 
 
 XXXV. 
 
 i. 165 
 
 Indra and the Maruts 
 
 . 73 
 
 XXXVI. 
 
 iii. 62 
 
 To Savitar ........ 
 
 . 74 
 
 XXXVII. 
 
 iv. 42 
 
 Indra contests the supremacy of Varuna 
 
 . 75 
 
 XXXVIII. 
 
 iv. 52 
 
 To Ushas, the Dawn-goddess 
 
 . 75 
 
 XXXIX. 
 
 v. 24 
 
 To Agni 
 
 . 76 
 
 XL. 
 
 v. 40 
 
 Indra and Atri, and the Sun eclipsed by the demon 
 
 . 76 
 
 XLI. 
 
 vii. 55 
 
 Magic spells to produce sleep 
 
 . 77 
 
 XLIL 
 
 vii. 56 
 
 To the Maruts or gods of the storm-winds . 
 
 . 77 
 
 XLIII. 
 
 vii. 86 
 
 To Varuna 
 
 . 78 
 
 XLIV. 
 
 vii. 88 
 
 To Varuna 
 
 . 79 
 
 XLV. 
 
 vii. 89 
 
 To Varuna 
 
 . 80 
 
 XLVI. 
 
 viii. 14 
 
 To Indra. Indra and Namuchi .... 
 
 . 80 
 
 XL VII. 
 
 viii. 85 
 
 Indra and the Maruts, and Vritra .... 
 
 . 82 
 
 XLVIH. 
 
 viii. 91 
 
 To Agni 
 
 . 82 
 
 XLIX. 
 
 x. 9 
 
 To the Waters 
 
 . 83 
 
 L. 
 
 x. 14 
 
 Funeral-hymn ....... 
 
 . 83 
 
 LI. 
 
 x. 16 
 
 Funeral-hymn 
 
 . 84 
 
 LII. 
 
 x. 17 
 
 Funeral-hymn ...... 
 
 . 85 
 
 LIII. 
 
 x. 18 
 
 Funeral-hymn 
 
 . 86 
 
 LIV. 
 
 x. 33 
 
 The aged priest to the young prince . . . 
 
 . 87 
 
 LV. 
 
 x. 40 
 
 Wedding-stanza 
 
 . 88 
 
 LVI. 
 
 x. 52 
 
 The gods install Agni as oblation-bearer . . 
 
 . 88 
 
 LVH. 
 
 x. 53 
 
 Burial and wedding-stanzas 
 
 . SD 
 
 Lvm. 
 
 x. 85 
 
 
 89 
 
 LIX. 
 
 x. 137 
 
 
 90 
 
 LX. 
 
 x. 154 
 
 
 91 
 
 LXL 
 
 x. 155 
 
 
 , 91 
 
 * For detailed synopsis, see Notea.
 
 [xiii] 
 
 F. From the Maitrayanl. 
 
 SELECTION PAGE 
 
 LXIL Hiranya-garbha. The god Ka or Who 91 
 
 LXIII. Legend of Yama and Yami. The creation of night . . .92 
 LXIV. Legend of the winged mountains ....... 92 
 
 LXV. The potency of the sacrifice ........ 93 
 
 G. Other Brahmana-pieces. 
 
 LXVI. Legend of Agni the oblation-bearer, and of the fish 93 
 
 LXVII. Legend of Indra and the Maruts, and Vritra ..... 94 
 
 LXVIII. Legend of Indra and the god Ka or Who 94 
 
 LXIX. The two kinds of deities, the gods and the Brahmans ... 94 
 
 LXX. Truth, untruth, and silence 95 
 
 LXXI. How the gods got immortality and how Death got his share . . 95 
 
 LXXII. Legend of Indra and Namuchi 97 
 
 LXXIIL Nirukta on KV. i.32.10, selection xxxii 97 
 
 H. From the Grihya-sutras. 
 
 LXXTV. Wedding-customs and the wedding-service 98 
 
 LXXV. The customs and ritual of cremation and burial . . 101 
 
 PART II. 
 
 Vocabulary Ill 
 
 Explanations and abbreviations ....... 289 
 
 List of abbreviations .... . , 293 
 
 PART III. 
 
 Notes .... c ..... . 297
 
 raTKODUCTOKY SUGGESTIONS. 
 
 IT is chiefly at the beginning that the difficulties of Sanskrit present them- 
 selves. The variety of forms, the strange alphabet, the peculiarities of word and 
 sentence combination, all these simultaneously confront the student at the very 
 outset. Accordingly, the plan followed with my classes, and for which provision 
 is here made, is to distribute these difficulties over the first few weeks of the 
 course. The common paradigms of nouns and verbs should first be learned. These 
 are given by the Grammar in transliteration. The reading of the first four pages 
 of the N"ala in Roman letters should then be taken up. The Reader gives these in 
 transliteration on an inset conveniently facing the same text in nagarl letters. The 
 student may thus become familiar with the form and sound of the vocables, without 
 being embarrassed by the alphabet and the running together of the words. Next, 
 the same familiar text should be read aloud over and over again in nagarl letters. 
 I am convinced that the easiest way to master the alphabet is to read frequently 
 in it words which one already knows. The next step will be the reading of 
 pages five to nine without the help of a transliteration, but with the aid given 
 by the typographical separation of the words, which has been carried out so far as 
 is practicable, though in violation of Indian usage. Finally, from this point on, 
 the reading may be continued without other help for the difficulties of euphonic 
 and graphic combination than is offered by the notes. 
 
 After finishing the Nala, the student should take up the Hitopade9a. Selec- 
 tions xvii., xx., and xi. are very easy and are good to begin with. The remaining 
 short ones from vi. to xxi. may then follow in order ; and finally the long selections 
 ii. to v. 
 
 It is recommended that the student use the stories from the Katha-sarit-sagara 
 for exercise in rapid reading, as soon as he has acquired a f ah vocabulary from what 
 precedes. The passages from " Manu " may be read as they stand. 
 
 Of the Vedic selections, the easiest are numbers xxxi. (Rigveda i. 1), xxxiii., 
 xxxviii., xxxix., xli., xlv., xlvi., and lix. ; and it is advisable to read these first 
 and in the order here mentioned. Selection xxxii., as being one of poetic merit and 
 not over-hard, may next be taken up, and after it, the Varuna-hymns, selections 
 xliii.-xliv. ; then the hymns in dramatic form, selections xxxv., xxxvii.,, and Ivi
 
 [xvi] 
 
 After these, selections xxxvi., xl., xlii., xlvii., xlviii., liv., and Ixii. may be rapidly 
 read. There will then remain the selections for the burial-service, xlix.-liii., ML, 
 lx., Ixi., and xxxiv., and those for the wedding, Iviii., Ivii., and Iv. These may 
 properly be read last, in order that they may be fresh in the mind when reading the 
 Sutras, where constant reference is made to them. 
 
 The Brahmana pieces may be read in the order in which they are printed ; but 
 selections Ixvi., Ixvii., Ixviii., and Ixxii. ought not to be taken up, unless selections 
 Ivi., xlvii., Ixii., and xlvi. have previously been studied. 
 
 It is very undesirable to attempt to read the Sutra chapters until one is familiar 
 with the burial and wedding stanzas just mentioned. It is advisable to write out a 
 translation of these chapters, and to insert therein each mantra in its proper place, 
 writing out the original of the mantra in full, and its translation, the latter also in 
 metre, if possible. 
 
 Since the synopses following each verbal root in the vocabulary represent the 
 great mass of all the forms in actual use (rather than those simply prescribed by the 
 grammarians), and so correspond to the "principal parts" of the Latin and Greek 
 verbs, the student should make it his duty to learn the synopsis for each root when 
 he first meets verbal forms of that root in the text. 
 
 Attention is called to the explanations and abbreviations (pages 289-294)} 
 these should be looked over carefully before using the vocabulary.
 
 A BRIEF LIST OF BOOKS FOR STUDENTS OF SANSKRIT, 
 
 THIS list has a purely practical aim, 1 and is restricted to a few of the 
 more important and useful books and 2 to such as are neither rare nor 
 out of print. It includes (a) a grammar, (6) readers, (c) dictionaries, 
 (d) classical works, books for the study (e) of the Rigveda and its litera- 
 ture, and (/) of the Atharvaveda, and last (g) some books on antiquities 
 and the history of the literature and the religions of India. 
 
 1. Whitney, William Dwight. A Sanskrit Grammar, including both the classical 
 
 language, and the older dialects, of Veda and Brahmana. Leipzig, Breitkopf 
 and Hartel. London, Trubner & Co. 1879. 8. Price (bound in cloth) 
 12 shillings. 
 
 This may be had in Boston of Ginn and Company. The work exists also in a German 
 translation, which may be had of the Leipzig publishers. 
 
 2. Biihler, Georg. Third Book of Sanskrit. With a glossary by Vishnu P. 
 
 Shastri Pandit. Second edition. Bombay. 1877. 12. 128 pages of text 
 and 97 of glossary. Price 9 annas. 
 
 This book can be procured from Trubner & Co. in London (price 3 shillings). It contains 
 the entire Story of Nala (26 chapters), Da^aratha's Death (Ramayana, ii. <>3-64), and four 
 stories from the Panchatantra. For beginners, the typography proves troublesome and the 
 glossary too meagre ; but the little volume is inexpensive and contains excellent material for 
 easy and rapid reading, and so is highly to be recommended to those who have finished the 
 classical part of this Reader and wish to continue their Sanskrit. For such students the glos- 
 sary would be quite sufficient. 
 
 3. Bohtlingk, Otto. Sanskrit-Chrestomathie. Zweite, ganzlich umgearbeitete 
 
 Auflage. St. Petersburg. 1877. Large 8. 372 pages. Price 4 Mark 
 80 Pfennigs. 
 
 This work and the two following are publications of the Russian Imperial Academy, and 
 should be ordered through the Academy's agent, Leopold Voss, of Leipzig. The volume contains 
 selections from the Veda (Mantra, Brahmana, and Sutra), from the Maha-bharata, Ramayana, 
 Vishnu-purana, Katha-sarit-sagara, Hitopade(;a, "Manu's Laws," and Panini's Grammar, and 
 from various other books ; a rich collection of proverbs ; the Vedanta-sara, a philosophical 
 treatise, in text and translation : and the entire drama, Ratnavali. The Vedic hymns are all 
 translated in the volume mentioned below, no. 15 ; and the notes show where many of the 
 other selections may be found translated. Like all publications of the Academy, this is sold 
 at an extremely low price. Since the book has no vocabulary, the student will at this point 
 need to get a dictionary. 
 
 1 Hence the prices are included. Both the Mark cent. The books will cost the American purchaser 
 
 and the shilling may be reckoned as a quarter of a somewhat more or less according to his facilities for 
 
 dollar. The prices given with the titles are pub- obtaining foreign books. 
 
 lishers' prices. To these prices, except when given - With perhaps one exception, no. 18, which can, 
 
 in dollars, should be added the duty, which is 25 per however, be had of second-hand dealers.
 
 [xviii] 
 
 4. Bohtlingk, Otto. Sanskrit- Wb'rterbuch in kurzerer Fassung. St. Petersburg. 
 
 1879-. 4. 
 
 To be ordered through Voss (see above). Parts I. to IV. have appeared, and reach to the 
 end of bh ; they cover 1167 pages, i.e. nigh two-thirds of the whole, and cost 34 Mark 80 
 Pfennige. The rest may be expected in the course of 1885. The manuscript is ready as 
 far as varna. The work is an abridgment of the following. 
 
 5. Bohtlingk, Otto, and Rudolph Roth. Sanskrit- Worterbuch. St. Petersburg. 
 
 1855-1875. Seven volumes. 4. Price 177 Mark 90 Pfennige. 
 
 To be ordered through Voss (see above). This work, which is often called the "St. Peters- 
 burg Lexicon," is by far the most important production of Sanskrit scholarship. To such as 
 wish to make any special study of the language and literature, it is absolutely indispensable. 
 
 6. Williams, Monier. A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, etymologically and philo- 
 
 logically arranged, with special reference to Greek, Latin, Gothic, German, 
 Anglo-Saxon, and other cognate Indo-European languages. London and 
 New York, Macmillan and Co. 1872. 4. 1186 pages. Price 94 shillings 
 6d. in England, or $24 in the United States. 
 
 This is the only dictionary of Sanskrit into English which approaches completeness. It is 
 in one compact and handy volume and is very convenient for reading works of the classical 
 period. Unfortunately, the common meanings of a word are not distinguished from those 
 which are seldom or never found. All Sanskrit words are given in transliteration, and the 
 roots and more important words in ndgarl letters also. 
 
 7. Williams, Monier. S'akuntala, a Sanskrit drama in seven acts, by Kalidasa. 
 
 Second edition. London and New York, Macmillan and Co. 1876. 8. 
 339 pages. Price 21 shillings in England, or $5.25 in the U.S. 
 
 This gives literal English translations of all the metrical passages, explanatory notes, and 
 the Sanskritization of the Prakrit passages, and all on the same page with the text of this, 
 the most famous of the plays. 
 
 8. Kielhorn, Franz, and Georg Buhler. Panchatantra. Edited with notes. 
 
 Bombay. 1868. 8. 
 
 The work constitutes numbers IV., III., and I. of the "Bombay Sanskrit Series." Number 
 IV. (comprehending book I.) appeared in a second edition in 1873. The book may be had of 
 Triibner & Co., London. The price of the entire work is 8 shillings ; but the first book may 
 be had separately for 3 shillings. The Panchatantra is easy and entertaining reading. It has 
 been admirably translated into German by Benfey : Pantschatantra. Leipzig, F. A. Brockhaus. 
 1859. 2 vpls. 8 '. Price 24 Mark. The translation is accompanied by a very valuable history 
 of fable-literature. 
 
 9. Delbriick, Berthold. Vedische Chrestomathie. Mit Anmerkungen und Glos- 
 
 sar. Halle, Buchhandlung des Waisenhauses. 1874. 8. Price 3 Mark. 
 
 This contains 47 hymns from the Rigveda. Of these, only five are repeated in this Reader. 
 Both text and glossary are in transliteration. On account of the small price of the book, its 
 mention may prove useful to such as do not wish to buy the two complete editions following 
 (numbers 11 and 12). 
 
 10. Windisch, Ernst. Zwolf Hymnen des Rigveda. Mit Sayana's Commentar. 
 Text. Worterbuch zu Sayana. Appendices. Leipzig, S. Hirzel. 1883. 8. 
 Price 5 Mark. 
 
 This gives the text, and the comment of the great scholiast, both in ndgarl letters. The 
 text is printed with the genuine accentuation (as in this Reader). The book serves a useful 
 purpose as introduction to the native Hindu or traditional exegesis of the Veda. The vocabu- 
 lary does not cover the hymns themselves ; but 
 the little book mentioned below, no. 15.
 
 [xix] 
 
 11. Aufrecht, Theodor. Die Hymnen des Rigveda. Herausgegeben. Zweite 
 
 Auflage. Bonn, Adolph Marcus. 1877. 2 volumes. 8. Price 20 Mark. 
 
 The entire sanhita text is given in transliteration, and extracts from the pada text at the 
 foot of each page. The exceedingly valuable appendix contains lists of the poets, divinities, 
 and metres, and a complete table of first lines of every stanza, with references to the concord- 
 ant texts of other Vedas. 
 
 12. Miiller, F. Max. The Hymns of the Rigveda, in the Samhita and Pada texts, 
 
 reprinted from the editio princeps. Second edition. London, Triibner & 
 Co. 1877. 2 volumes. 8. Price 32 shillings. 
 
 This edition gives the two texts complete on parallel pages and in nayarl letters. The 
 names of the poets, divinities, and metres are given at the beginning of each hymn. 
 
 13. Grassmann, Hermann. Wdrterbuch zum Rig-veda. Leipzig, F. A. Brockhaus. 
 
 1873 [-1875]. 8. Price 30 Mark. 
 
 This is not only a dictionary, but also a complete concordance to the Rigveda. It is a work 
 of wonderful industry, method, clearness, and accuracy. Aside from the St. Petersburg Lexi- 
 con, this dictionary stands next in importance, for Vedic students, after the Vedic text itself. 
 
 14. Grassmann, Hermann. Rig-veda. Uebersetzt und mit kritischen und erlau- 
 
 ternden Anmerkungen versehen. Leipzig, F. A. Brockhaus. 1876. 1877. 
 2 volumes. 8. Price 24 Mark. 
 
 This translation is entirely in metre, except for a few corrupt or difficult hymns. The 
 student can almost invariably see just what word Grassmann intended as the rendering of any 
 given word of the text. This work is especially useful as giving a convenient general view 
 of the contents of the Rigveda, and as enabling the student to grasp easily many matters 
 touching the metres, the arrangement, and the textual condition of the original. 
 
 15. Geldner, Karl, und Adolf Kagi. Siebenzig Lieder des Rigveda. Uebersetzt. 
 
 Mit Beitragen von R. Roth. Tubingen. H. Laupp'sche Buchhandlung. 
 1875. 12. Price 3 Mark. 
 
 Thirty-six of the seventy hymns of which this book gives metrical translations were 
 later incorporated by Bohtlingk into his Chrestomathy (no. 3, above). 
 
 16. Aufrecht, Theodor. Das Aitareya Brahmana. Mit Ausziigen aus dem Com- 
 
 mentare von Sayanacarya und anderen Beilagen herausgegeben. Bonn, 
 Adolph Marcus. 1879. 8. Price 11 Mark. 
 
 This Brahmana belongs to the Rigveda. The text is in transliteration. The translation of 
 Haug (London, Triibner & Co. 1863) would be of help ; but it is inaccurate and hard to get. 
 A good many passages are translated in volumes I., II., and V. of Muir (below, no. 26). Using 
 these as an introduction, and the St. Petersburg Lexicon for help in hard places, an advanced 
 student can make good progress with this text. 
 
 17. Stenzler, Adolf Friedrich. Indische Hausregeln. Sanskrit und deutsch heraus- 
 
 gegeben. I. A9valayana. Erstes Heft. Text. Leipzig. 1864. 8. Price 
 2 Mark. Zweites Heft. Uebersetzung. 1865. Price 3 Mark. 
 
 Published by the German Oriental Society, in volumes III. and IV. of the Abhandlungen 
 fur die Kunde des Morgenlandes. To be ordered through the Society's agent, F. A. Brockhaus, 
 In Leipzig. These are the Grihya-sutras belonging to the Rigveda. 
 
 18. Roth, R., und Whitney, "W. D. Atharva Veda Sanhita. Herausgegeben. 
 
 Erster Band. Text. Berlin, Ferd. Diimmler. 1856. Royal 8. Price 28 Mark 
 50 Pfennige. 
 
 This is the most important and interesting of the Vedas, after the Rik. It is full of magic 
 incantations and other products of curious superstitions.
 
 [xxj 
 
 19. Oarbe, Richard. Vaitana Sutra. The Ritual of the Atharvaveda. Edited with 
 
 critical notes and indices. London, Triibner & Co. 1878. 8. Price 5 shillings. 
 
 20. Garbe, Richard. Vaitana Sutra. Das Ritual des Atharvaveda. Aus dem San- 
 
 skrit iibersetzt und mit Auinerkungen versehen. London, Triibner & Co. 
 1878. 8. Price 5 shillings. 
 
 Since this is the only Qrauta-sutra published with translation, and since it is to be had 
 easily and cheaply, it is recommended as an introduction to the works of this class. 
 
 21. Weber, Albrecht. The history of Indian Literature. Translated from the 
 
 second German edition by John Mann and Theodor Zachariae. Second 
 edition. London, Triibner & Co. 1878. 8. Price 10 shillings 6 pence. 
 
 This is a systematic treatise covering both the Vedic and the classical Sanskrit literature. 
 It gives abundant and practical bibliographical information. As a guide and as a work of 
 reference it is of the utmost value. 
 
 22. Zimmer, Heinrich. Altindisches Leben. Die Cultur der vedischen Arier. 
 
 Nach den Samhita dargestellt. Berlin, Weidmannsche Buchhandlung. 1879. 
 8. Price 10 Mark. 
 
 Under the different categories geography, climate, minerals, plants, animals, agricul- 
 ture, commerce, dress, food, amusements, family relations, art, etc. the Vedic texts touching 
 these subjects are discussed, and the results deducible from them are put together in a very 
 readable and pleasant way. 
 
 23. Kagi, Adolf. Der Rigveda. Die alteste Literatur der Inder. Zweite, umgear- 
 
 beitete und erweiterte, mit vollstandigem Sach- und Wortregister versehene 
 Auflage. Leipzig, Otto Schulze. 1881. 12. Price 4 Mark. 
 
 This contains an account of the Vedic writings in general, descriptions of the gods in 
 language agreeing closely with the actual words of the original as cited in the notes, and 
 sketches of some of the more important phases of Vedic life and thought. The numerous notes 
 are highly useful as a guide to the already extensive literature of these subjects, and point out 
 many interesting parallels of custom, belief, and expression to be found in biblical and classi- 
 cal antiquity. 
 
 24. Earth, Auguste. The religions of India. Authorized translation by Rev. J. 
 
 Wood. London, Triibner & Co. 1882. 8. Price 16 shillings. 
 
 The subject is treated in five chapters corresponding to the five grand phases of religious 
 development in India : the Vedic religion ; Brahmanism (ritual, philosophic speculation, de- 
 cline) ; Buddhism ; Jainism ; and Hinduism (the sects and their great deities, Vishnuism 
 and 9ivaism, reforming sects, cultus). The copious references to the literature of the sub- 
 jects in hand add greatly to the value of the work. 
 
 25. Oldenberg, Hermann. Buddha; his life, his doctrine, his order. Translated 
 
 from the German by William Hoey. London, Williams and Norgate. 1882. 
 
 8. Price 18 shillings. 
 
 Oldenberg has recently finished editing (in five volumes) the Yinaya Pitakam, one of the 
 most important among the Buddhist sacred books. He has a wide and deep knowledge of the 
 original Pali sources, and in his use of them he is guided by rare critical acumen and good 
 common-sense. His account of Buddha's life, doctrine, and order contains the best results of 
 his studies and they are presented in an extremely attractive form. 
 
 26. Muir, John. Original Sanskrit texts on the origin and history of the people 
 
 of India, their religions and institutions. Collected, translated, and illus- 
 trated. London, Triibner & Co. 1872-1874. 5 volumes. 8. 
 
 The first four volumes have appeared in a second edition, and the second volume in a 
 third edition. The third volume costs 1(5 shillings. The price of each of the others is 21 shil- 
 lings. The first volume discusses the origin of caste. The fifth is devoted to the cosmogony, 
 mythology, religious ideas, life, and manners of the Indians in the Vedic age.
 
 PART I. 
 THE SANSKRIT TEXT.
 
 Transliterated Text of Sanskrit Reader. 
 
 [Page 1.] 
 atha nalopakhyanam. 
 
 brhadagva uvaca. 
 
 asid raja, nalo nama, virasenasuto ball, 
 upapanno gunair istai, rupavan, agvakovidah. 
 6 atisthan manujendranam murdhni devapatir yatlia, 
 upary upari sarvesam aditya iva tejasa ; 
 brahmanyo, vedavic, churo, niaadhesu mahipatih, 
 aksapriyah, satyavadi, mahan aksauhinipatih ; 
 ipsito naranarinam, udarah, samyatendriyah, 
 10 raksita, dhanvinam gresthah, saksad iva manuh svayam. 
 tathaivasid vidarbhesu bhimo, bhlmaparakramah, 
 ^urah, sarvagunair yuktah, prajakamah, sa caprajah. 
 sa prajarthe param yatnam akarot, susamahitah. 
 tarn abhyagacchad brahmarsir, damano nama, bharata. 
 15 tarn ssrbhimah, prajakamas, toaayam asa, dharmavit, 
 mahisya saha, rajendra, satkarena, suvarcasam. 
 tasmai prasanno damanah sabharyaya varam dadau, 
 
 [Page 3.] 
 
 tato 'ntariksago vacam vyajahara nalam tada: 
 
 hantavyo 'ami na te, raj an; karisyami tava priyam; 
 
 damayantisakage tvam kathayisyami, naiaadha, 
 
 yatha tvad anyam puruaam na sa mansyati KarM cit. 
 5 evam uktas tato hansam utaasarja mahipatih. 
 
 te tu hansah samutpatya vidarbhan agamans tatah. 
 
 vidarbhanagaiim gatva, damayantyas tadantike 
 
 nipetua te garutmantah, sa dadarca ca tan ganan. 
 
 sa, tan adbhutarupan vai drstva, sakhiganavrta, 
 10 hrata grabitum khagamans tvaramanopacakrame. 
 
 atha hansa visasrpuh aarvatah pramadavane. 
 
 ekaika^as tada kanyas tan hansan samupadravan. 
 
 damayanti tu yam hansam samupadhavad antike, 
 
 sa, manuslih giraih krtva, damayantim athabravit: 
 15 damayanti, nalo nama, nisadhesu mahipatih, 
 
 agvinoh sadrgo rape ; na samas tasya manuaah. 
 "" tasya vai yadi bharya tvam bhavetha, varavarnini, 
 
 saphalam te bhavej janma, rupam cedam, suinadhyame, 
 
 vayaih hi devagandharvamanasoragaraksasan 
 20 drstavanto; na casmabhir dratapurvas tathavidhah. 
 
 tvam capi ratnam narinam, naresu ca nalo varah ; 
 
 vigistaya vigistena samgamo gunavan bhavet. 
 
 evam ukta tu hansena damayanti, vigam pate.
 
 [Page 2.] 
 
 kanyaratnam, kumarang ca trin udaran, mahayagah, 
 damayantim, damam, dantam, damanam ca suvarcasam, 
 upapannan gunaih sarvair, bhiman, bhimaparakraman. 
 damayanti tu rupena, tejasa, yagasa, griya, 
 
 5 saubhagyena ca, lok|u yagah prapa, sumadhyama. 
 atha tarn, vayasi prapte, dasinarii samalamkrtam 
 gatam, gatari? sakhinam ca, paryupasac, chaclm iva. 
 tatra sma raj ate bhaimi, sarvabharanabhusita, 
 
 -^akhimadhye, 'navadyangi, vidyut saudamani yatha, 
 10 ativa rupasampanna, grir ivayatalocana. 
 
 na devesu, na yaksesu, tadrg rupavati kva cit, 
 manusesv api canyesu, drstapdrvatha va grata, 
 cittapramatbini bala devanam api sundari. 
 nalag ca naragardulo, lokesv apratimo bhuvi, 
 
 15 kandarpa iva rupena murtimau. abhavat svayam. 
 
 af** 
 
 tasyah samipe tu nalam pracagansuh kutuhalat, 
 naisadhasya samipe tu damayantim punah punah. 
 tayor adrstakamo 'bhiic chrnvatoh satatam gunan ; 
 anyonyam prati, kaunteya, sa vyavardhata hrcchayah. 
 20 agaknuvan nalah kamam tada dharayitum hrda, 
 antahpurasamipasthe vana aste raho gatah. 
 sa dadarga tato hansan jatarupapariskrtan ; 
 vane vicar atam tesam ekam jagraka paksinam. 
 
 [Page 4.] 
 
 abravit tatra tarn hansam : tvam apy evam nale vada. 
 tathety uktvandajah kanyam vidarbhasya, vigam pate, 
 punar agamya nisadhan, nale sarvam nyavedayat. 
 iti nalopakhyane prathamah sargah. 
 
 6 brhadagva uvaca. 
 
 damayanti tu, tac chrutva vaco hansasya, bharata, 
 tatah prabhrti na svastha nalam prati babhuva sa. 
 tatag cintapara, dma, vivarnavadana, krga, 
 _ babhuva damayanti tu, nihgvasaparama tada. 
 10 urdhvadrstir, dhyanapara, babhuvonmattadargana, 
 panduvarna ksanenatha, hrcchayavistacetana. 
 na gayyasanabhogesu ratim vindati karhi cit. 
 na naktam, na diva gete, ha heti rudati punah. 
 tato vidarbhapataye damayantyah sakhijanah 
 
 16 nyavedayat tam asvastham damayantim naregvare. 
 tac chrutva nrpatir bhimo damayantisakhiganat, 
 cintayam asa tat karyam sumahat svam siitam prati. 
 sa samiksya mahipalah svam sutam praptayauvanam, 
 apagyad atmana karyam damayantyah svayamvaram. 
 
 20 sa samnimantrayam asa mahipalan vigam patih: 
 anubhuyatam ! ayam, virah, svayamvara iti, prabho.
 
 1. 
 
 TRT 
 
 tit 
 
 15 W 
 
 n ^ || 
 
 n M II 
 
 : i
 
 W 
 
 NALA. I. 
 
 
 5 
 
 n so n 
 
 TTT ^r irra 
 
 n w \\ 
 
 10 ,, ^^ ^ - .. . 
 
 < "s. "v. r* ^ 
 
 \\<^\\ 
 
 C\ 
 
 ^rft? d n SB n 
 
 v9 
 
 is ^prt ^ ^c|iir 4-jlri^M ^?^^l ^I^H \\W\\ 
 
 : ^T: n sf n 
 
 * WfTrt 
 
 r: ntii
 
 NALA. I. 8 
 
 rFFft S^ffTftspff "^R ^TRfK ^ H^T I 
 
 S'fa ^T ft THR chR^lfa rR ftnR IRQ II 
 
 : FT ^5J ^ rTR 'TOR. II 3? II 
 
 FT 
 
 fFT ^ ^ J l*ilt rq^KUH-qsn II ^ II 
 f^TT 
 
 N rT^T ^RIT^ TTT^ f^TR 
 
 ^ ^ 5 ^ 
 "Pit ^T 
 
 fasri 
 
 !
 
 NALA. I. 
 
 lrf?T W^ ^T II 
 
 c\ 
 
 10 
 
 II ? II 
 
 ^r fi^rr ^ ?rr |f?r ^?ft "TO: 11 8 11 
 
 II M II 
 
 HrTT ITW II j II 
 
 11 1 n
 
 NALA. H. 
 
 ro ?Twt ^W 
 
 s9 \ 
 
 16 
 
 cT?f: 
 
 
 4 ^ m & i H, Kf -tfi^ifl riri *iVfil^ J 
 
 20 ^ 
 
 ff M^ifa ITR 
 
 II ^^ II
 
 NALA. IL 
 
 ff 
 
 10 
 
 TT5TT Pff^ T TJ^ 
 
 'fert T 
 
 i ^T <nHi<9iH ^THTO'R 
 
 20 
 
 11 ^ u 
 W?T: ^ TI^TO^T ^piwr* ^II^HI: i 
 
 : n ^M u 
 
 II ^<i II
 
 f *t i' 
 
 15 
 
 3 
 
 NALA. II. 
 
 II $0 II 
 
 ^fif 
 
 J II ^ II 
 
 so 
 
 ifir B 
 
 II ^ II 
 
 11 8 11 
 
 . n 
 
 rHl ^R If'TO: II t
 
 15 
 
 NALA, III. 
 
 HT 
 
 lftrTT ^5 WT 
 
 20 rtfl vrTTO N 
 
 n so 11 
 
 f *&l ^ ^TT^^FIrT I 
 
 II SS II 
 
 10 W^'r IRT ^iftR: ^T ^5TRT 11 S3 II 
 
 ^^ ^rft ^r 
 
 II <\$ II 
 
 rTT^TT ^f^faf "^T ^TTf ^^^rftT "fti 
 
 ftrftRrTT
 
 NALA. UI. 9 
 
 H 
 
 f ff ^ %SJT TT5TT 
 
 rf 
 
 TIT f^rfe 
 
 irf^fft 
 
 TIT 
 
 10 T^r^Nl ^Tf ^ itftw: 
 
 wt: a ? n 
 
 n<n"f<u H II S II 
 
 ^N ff 
 
 f? ^^r ^k Tnmf: ^ftTrrfirrrr: n ?
 
 10 NALA. IV. 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 
 HrPTPRT* 
 
 ^rr rt 
 
 15 Tj H<^M ^JT r 
 
 rfflt THTT 
 
 II II 
 
 ii 3 ii 
 
 3 H^ ^r 11 b 11
 
 NALA. IV. 11 
 
 *i*nPH Hfarll cfif : I 
 rT^TT H% f^41*rtl*i II ^^9 II 
 WITt ^l^ 
 
 10 
 
 TT5TT 
 
 ti*i*fi 
 
 15 n*iM^*wt 
 
 so 
 
 ii ^M ii 
 
 m irr^?T ^^TTR^ TST 11 a
 
 12 NALA. IV. 
 
 TR 
 
 : II ^Q II 
 
 
 ? II ?o II 
 \ 
 
 10 JJICT iwmi w H^Tr<jHKi: ii $<\ ii 
 
 II ^f?T H^lMI^R ^H^: ^7: II 8 II 
 
 TT5TT H^ II ^ M 
 
 15 
 
 N J *M ^TwR: ll ^ II 
 
 Tf? *i^ifti^T tin^^n H 5 II 
 
 20 ro^rcn i?**i!^^TJ ii 8 ii
 
 NALA. V. 13 
 
 : H M u 
 
 f^ftr u u 
 
 rfWt TW wHrt*! 
 TT^ft 
 
 H til 
 
 10 TfWr rTrH 
 
 f? ^1% ^WT rt rt 
 
 II SS II 
 
 f? ^rar^ft^t R^ f^rat ^ 
 
 TT^TRTO ^TTOT II ^ II 
 
 20 S iw TR UIVW<$+i*i^n II ^M II
 
 14 NALA. V. 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 
 ft 
 
 
 15 nfoft 
 
 *?*ftT5?T H H 
 
 IRMII 
 
 IRtll
 
 NALA. V. 15 
 
 tiT 5 ^rh^i ^faflTOfll' ^rt i 
 
 IRQ II 
 
 irrwr 
 
 M<fM<ri: iftm srp 
 
 c| 
 rj 
 
 10 
 
 80 
 
 J iftnt 
 
 w n 9^ 11 
 
 II 
 
 f: II5MII 
 
 15
 
 16 NALA. V. 
 
 BKii*iUi ^^fqi H<?5^ ^ II 80 ll 
 t ^Nvt fl^T^t ^? I 
 
 II ^ II 
 
 : n 
 
 : n 88 II 
 
 10 
 
 n 8M n 
 
 Cs^ Co 
 
 Ii II ^ dM: II 
 
 IL 
 
 TRt
 
 10 
 
 HITOPADEgA. I? 
 
 20 
 
 I 
 
 
 w "^ ^TT^T ^ w 
 
 
 THTT 
 f^nra vrfil 
 
 v 
 
 2
 
 18 HITOPADEQA. 
 
 10 sft 
 
 ff^fT ^T 
 sfq 
 
 sftr 
 
 : HIMH^frt II 
 
 i 
 
 15 
 
 : n 
 
 sr ftrafrr n 
 
 rlfd 
 
 
 * II 
 
 ff
 
 HITOPADEQA. 19 
 
 T I sffalH ff 
 
 10 
 
 
 TT^TT 
 
 20 ^?t sft 
 
 ^rrfw "^ 
 
 rtl<=N ^TtH^ ff TRfNi f^^ *1TO^ II 
 
 2*
 
 20 HTTOPADEgA. 
 
 ni. 
 
 sft 
 
 r[ ^ro ns^i qKH "^T 
 6 ri^rl'l 
 
 SHrt W^ft 
 
 f^5 5 ^rt^T^T^ ITff%: H^f 1^ I ?RT 
 
 i 
 i
 
 10 
 
 15 
 
 HITOPADEQA. 21 
 
 Cs 
 
 * i ^nr: 
 
 *jrfT ^rrra i *ront "fcrfsrt sf^f i THT: 
 
 I rf- 
 
 ^TrfT ^i ^ 
 
 : i 
 
 : H 
 
 BTV^T: u 
 20 ^nrt^ i i?^nn^ "^ ^ ^^ finrrftni t 
 
 II
 
 22 HITOPADEQA. 
 
 
 irf?ra 
 
 I Tff T MfrirTl S"% I 
 
 10 : 
 
 I rfHt WRT- 
 
 : 11 
 
 ii f^j ^ I 
 
 HR: ftrot ftRT ii 
 
 : I rT^T 
 
 20 ^Rt^i ^^ f? 
 
 
 f?
 
 HITOPADEgA. 23 
 
 n 
 
 * 
 
 jt 
 
 IV. 
 
 : i ^ 
 
 11 $rf TcJ^tftirf 5 I W 
 
 i 5\w i *j j *^H i ^ w i ^ i 
 
 10 csHmi ^ra^t S?Tt I -^ 
 
 I "SSinV 
 
 i 
 
 
 15 
 
 HWt S^T 
 
 t lrf?T 
 
 1 fniHfri i FT 
 
 : i *nt ft i 
 
 f*i ta k < si Mint I 
 
 
 20 
 
 ff ^t^n lift 'pt ^R^: a
 
 24 HITOPADEQA. 
 
 10 
 
 HI fid 
 
 ftr^iftr 
 i TTR^ i 
 
 fWrf j ll 
 
 15 
 
 20 
 
 : i 
 
 HT-
 
 HITOPADEgA. 
 
 W< 
 
 i nn^ i 
 
 I W^TT 
 
 : 1 I 
 I ?^ I 
 
 20 
 
 : n 
 
 : I rT^ST
 
 26 HITOPADEgA. 
 
 TW 
 
 20 iff 
 
 t iftiif 
 
 (n*ifH 
 
 10 
 
 f*1j$|) 
 
 rT^T 
 
 : I rTTT: 
 
 
 rnr: "rof Stir ^Mi ^ w\: 
 
 w^r
 
 HITOPADEgA. 27 
 
 fa*i iftfefa: 
 
 ^M Hiiq M I H M I 
 
 5 
 
 rfn 
 
 v. 
 Hr* 
 
 : IT- 
 
 r rT^ft^TR ns^j^iRiH: "qft 
 R f^rfNft 
 
 16 
 
 I 
 
 I 57 "rt S TRT 
 
 tt S^ft I hnni rfr^TI^W[ | rf ITf 
 
 20
 
 28 HITOPADEgA. 
 
 m: i 
 
 f ft"i''5*il'fri'i 
 
 TT^T 
 
 1 d*uif 
 
 d*uin 
 
 ^Trft 
 
 15 
 
 f? ^T 
 
 30 '^t S^?t I ^RT^TO f? ^I 
 
 : II 
 
 "^fif*
 
 HITOPADEgA. 29 
 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 
 S? 
 
 : I 
 
 15 ^TRK^tR? ^TfiTTftT H: ^t^l?ff^^ H ( Rd wril 
 MHK<*TT 
 
 ff ^m fd^f 'jvt ^f^^: n
 
 30 HITOPADEgA. 
 
 VI. 
 
 
 fir m+nii: ^ 
 
 Ht 
 
 : i f^rr 
 
 10 CT HrT I nTt I 
 
 : I 
 
 rt<H*rtt ^Tlftn f W 1T ^ffa Uftre: I cT 
 
 : i w 
 
 : 11 
 
 : 11 
 
 TTrT: 
 
 20
 
 HITOPADEQA. 31' 
 
 VII. 
 
 \ rf^ZT H 
 
 
 : i 
 
 r 
 
 10 ^ic ^r fa:*Rffr I TOT^ "ftift 
 
 ^JWrf?T rf^T H^T 
 
 irrcff 
 
 I ^RnTt H "ftlft 
 
 15 ^ 
 
 VIII. IX. 
 
 J I
 
 32 IIITOPADEgA. 
 
 fn I WrT* 
 
 tt ft 
 
 i c^rmro r?^: i 
 
 * wfrit 
 
 i ra i * rrsiTt i ^rr ^rr 
 
 I 
 
 10 tRq <fe<3<$ rTFT 
 
 t n 
 
 I <mw* ^^^ri I 
 
 f^r: i ^ 
 
 t wfi yRg i rTfn i^jfir 
 i 
 
 : uro i TRT: Ft 
 
 o 
 
 
 I rfiT: ftift 
 
 i irT^ f^^sirrnHt sft
 
 HITOPADEgA, 33 
 
 i fijf : ulM*u^ i w^t n^T *it 
 
 friyfri I rTrf : 
 
 I ^^ii'irq "P^?5 t5*T*?^15T rf^-^iM^ cT 
 
 i irwt s^tt 
 
 HW: I ^TFt Sf s( 411*1 1 
 
 I ^ri *TRT I ^^THt ff? 
 
 ^ M I 
 
 cfiTWT ^Hcnti<u TORnrf fHHifnrf: II 
 
 20
 
 34 HITOPADEgA. 
 
 s? 
 
 10 fat 
 
 XI. 
 
 ^TR? T5f^: I rT^T 
 
 %Trfi 
 
 j r^fhrfirfiT 
 
 10
 
 HITOPADEgA. 35 
 
 : II 
 
 XII. 
 
 : i ?rwt 
 
 rTT* I 
 
 10 . 
 
 imt 
 
 'nrr ^v?: i ^?r usTR H i 
 
 I 
 
 : i 
 15 ^^ r Tn?n?^r ^ 11 
 
 ^rfff HZRFT ^TT^ I R^^ I JT* 
 
 20 
 
 : i nTRT i 
 
 i 
 
 ff ^r^: II
 
 36 HITOPADEQA. 
 
 i sr i 
 
 20 
 
 ^fcf CT ^t^i H ^TTf ^f?T TJ%fe I 
 
 "fir 
 
 S? 
 
 10 sqq5)H Tlfrf f ftf%: B 
 
 XIII. 
 
 H j i<lHrrt 
 
 1* ^T M<r<|^: I 
 
 i 
 
 : i ?rwt
 
 HITOPADEgA. 37 
 
 I rfrt^H f^ 
 
 
 i irat s^ft 
 
 t I rfiTt f^^^Tt 1 II <$"R <=!<$) 
 
 <=!<$ <w 
 
 rr 
 10 HNl^HlfM ^r^: 
 
 ff 
 
 XIV. XV. XVI. 
 
 *> ^ra ^RHV IrM^lfiWR ^R: I 
 
 : I 
 
 sfir 
 
 16 fkt ^ ^ ^ft^ "^ "finrRTf?! ft^t ftg: i
 
 38 HITOPADEgA. 
 
 i *jf<r i 
 
 TRT <*H I tttl^rn I gT^rf TTRH I 
 
 I 
 I rHIT 
 
 
 irrStftr 
 
 II 
 : I n^*nrl I : qi^qn I 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 : i 
 > irf^Rr: i ^^f^r^ *fNft: in^t ^MiMif<ri: i 

 
 10 
 
 HITOPADEQA. 39 
 
 : I 
 
 I ?TfT: 
 
 I Ht: I 
 
 <H SHI SU I 
 
 : I 
 
 <?t% f%\ f^f ^^T^ 1 ^ I rT- 
 20 <l=hiW ^?f^ iTO^t ^ift? rf^T 
 
 v9 
 
 ; fjrf 
 
 HfT
 
 40 HITOPADEQA. 
 
 80 
 
 : I 
 t ffrRTRTRT 
 
 15 
 "ft?: i ^nr: 
 
 XVII. 
 
 10 VR ^f^qi^i^qi: ^raWsisjiTl ^' I HKt 
 
 ^rr: i rt 
 
 ' I 
 
 : I 
 
 
 : I ^{W Sf
 
 HITOPADEgA. 41 
 
 f 
 TTRT gfit ?nt 
 
 XYIII. 
 
 I 
 
 frlfrt I 
 
 ff ^ 
 
 I 
 
 ^Tl fi^rfa nwn^ ^ft^T ferr: i 
 
 5 
 
 f?T H'tllHi-ri 
 *i**Tnfi5rt 1 1 
 
 I ^?f 5tir^i*ii< sl TTT w: I 
 I 
 
 15 *fi^TT ^3R: I ^ ^fi I ^^"Ri ^T iSMl*^ I 
 K 
 
 90 "R I Ht ^^5 I UTOft WW 5TO I rflTt "^^t 
 
 it ^ft^T ^T^ VrHH I
 
 42 HITOPADEQA. 
 
 WTrf g 
 ff 
 
 nrr: 
 
 10 
 
 XIX. 
 
 ftWT 
 
 I 
 
 Sf 

 
 HITOPADEgA. 43 
 
 I rTWt *TR!OT$y*.i^i i* mgj*HitiX<u 
 
 iVTfi RT *R Uf 
 
 u 
 
 XK. 
 
 vn*m<Hsj: 
 
 I HrT^f 
 
 "ferfT* I 
 
 10 i^<rrn i Ni^ii! i 
 
 TR ^T I *i^Ml S I 
 
 I 
 
 : I 
 
 15 ril^H K^t^: i ^t wr^nir i f^ftrfw 
 
 I rt^icfti^ fH 
 
 ^PJf ^ I B ^TPTt t^fift^T ^ 
 
 : I ^TW S? 
 
 *TSTT u
 
 44 HITOPADEgA. 
 
 15 
 
 XXI. 
 
 : I cT^T 
 
 WIT nwr 
 
 10 <=i^i*( 'i^ii I rf^TT ^T B W^ HrT* I 
 
 Sl 
 
 J TrTt I 
 
 20 ^ fT^T TTO ^T ig<!9itlU II
 
 KATHASARITSAGARA. 45 
 
 H 
 
 XXII. 
 
 fi 
 
 i rT^W "^Tftj ^TT 
 
 10 f^RH^? Htiwnw 
 
 n 
 
 ff TTfl I 
 f?Tf?T II 
 
 15 
 
 Ft 
 
 S^rTrTK W II
 
 46 KATHASARITSAGARA. 
 
 XXIH. 
 
 t ftfiTT 
 
 Sf 
 
 TTOT 
 
 10 
 
 rf^I 
 
 20 fir wfe^rnn ^r sftr 
 
 11*1 c 
 
 : 11 
 
 * II 
 
 lrtURTf 
 ff "R^^T ^t IR^^rt II
 
 KATHASARITSAGARA. 47 
 
 T Ti^T ^RT^l ^T'RTlJ II 
 ^ ^TTfTT J TrTT"2rTOt 
 
 I) 
 10 f^^trRRt rfTfa ^fti^T BTFrf^T 
 
 ITRI 
 
 15 
 
 20 f<^X' iftsttf i ** ^t Sft ^T ^PH F^nT^Trf* II
 
 48 KATHASARITSAGARA. 
 
 XXIV. 
 
 <T^T*J?iHt5fl 
 
 10 
 
 TT^T 
 
 rT^T WRf 
 
 15 rTTft ^W rp 
 
 XXV. 
 
 : II 
 
 H 
 : H
 
 KATHASARITSAGARA. 49 
 
 ^H'cg'<*Hsjn' 
 
 'f*F: 
 
 t ff 
 
 IT 
 
 5 
 
 : ftenrr s%fw ^t s^^g^n^^ jfnm: 11 
 
 f*RT 4HrMi^<lRpn ^rr rt iTHi^^rfini u 
 
 10 **HT rl^HK i^l Pc^U^H rfKt ^ft: I 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 15 ^T ^n wWR ^T^5 rMHn II 
 
 XXVI. 
 
 TT5TT 
 
 s^rftwf ^^^fe ^rrftf^ro: u 
 
 20 ->
 
 50 KATHASAR1TSAGARA. 
 
 5 rf r^T +Tk<;iii*M*ri 
 
 ^TT 
 
 
 10 
 
 I B n 11^11*11 
 
 f^i 
 
 "^TT 
 
 C 
 
 20 f^^rrf^fif Wnrf: ^Tt: tift^Tt SVRrt II 
 Sf ^J^"c|^T ^ ^Trf^fft ^*i^0 rTR. I 
 
 TTR: v^iif "^TRR: 11 
 
 : U
 
 KATHASAR1TSAGARA. 51 
 
 ^$ cfiTt 
 
 10 
 
 fVSnT 
 
 ^rr 
 
 : *r i=nTT ^R: 
 
 C* 
 
 ^fif II 
 
 : II 
 
 20 
 
 dirt 
 
 ^. f ^S. > A * ^^S 
 
 L: H
 
 52 KATHASARITSAUARA. 
 
 20 
 
 
 WFt 
 
 fn^ ftrwr 
 
 1 
 
 c> 
 
 11 
 
 rft 
 
 w 
 
 II 
 
 ITft faftj 
 
 wtftnr* i
 
 KATHASARITSAGARA. 53 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 II 
 
 FT 
 
 : u 
 
 10 rfRTji ^fiTT^rft?^ r*^<*i u 
 
 rTT 
 
 rTT 
 
 15 irf?f^f
 
 54 KATHASARITSAGARA. 
 
 rTrT* 
 
 15 
 
 20 
 
 fft R!llHf*ri4 
 
 rft ^T ift 
 
 "^ftft (\*4*T|t 
 
 fTt
 
 KATHASARITSAGARA. 55 
 
 10 
 
 is ^j i TI v M^J \' 
 
 
 
 20 Wi I WRrfTt rt 
 rft ^ret 
 
 ri 
 
 * II 
 
 'TO ^W ^RiT ^fff 
 
 ^^i it^fir^ TJTOT 
 
 * H
 
 56 KATHASARITSAGARA. 
 
 ifa Js 
 
 ^: ITR 
 
 rTT 
 
 10 
 
 15 
 
 Wt 
 
 XXVIII. 
 
 ! H 
 
 fH<ii"<i iSHirn^- 5 ! ^^R^ 'TrTT 
 
 >3 
 
 ii sfir ^rmfwrnt S^HWIW: \\ 
 
 : ii M ii n ^rarr i u 
 
 C\ N
 
 MANAVA DHARMAQASTRA. I. 57 
 
 iitn 
 
 ?TRT ^fir ^t^nr wot 
 
 ins 11 
 
 10 i<i^HmnMH ***M i <ii!sHnil ^rr 11 s^ 11 
 
 15 fRT w
 
 58 MANAYA DHARMAgASTRA. I. II. 
 
 3 7 TRT H 
 
 : t^tnftu <=IHLM H ^irt 
 
 v9 C 
 
 15 
 
 g 
 
 fTTri 
 
 
 rTRfft 
 
 10 : \ 
 
 ^rer ^ wr^nor* ^WT: n
 
 15 
 
 MANAVA DHARMAgASTRA. II. 59 
 
 II 
 
 it 
 
 10 T?^ f?rft HfW ^rr JT^% ^rr *wrfN?t 119011 
 
 ft^Trft^t 
 
 "9MH
 
 60 MANAVA DHARMAQASTRA. H. 
 
 fv lltftH 
 
 c|l|4<HW43<!J ^ 
 
 10 ^RR xiinK ^ *iHK 
 
 swr: Frrr: fli u^mn: \\$<3\\ 
 
 15 ^M<<=lt ^Mii*n 5^ US til 
 
 ITRTT ^rshlHF?fT ^Rt wf^ W*rfff I 
 
 R oil 
 
 TT^I 
 
 20 
 
 FT
 
 MANAVA DHARMAQASTRA. II. III. 61 
 
 f^ift 
 
 f^ir* 
 
 
 10 
 
 W ^IT 
 
 rft 
 
 is 
 
 sft f^wt i^i ftm ^rfir ^H: u 
 
 j^^rr ^fir ft^srr^ gr^R ^ft?j^ TTR. H 
 
 20 
 
 * ftrwi ^rfrr woz* \
 
 62 MANAVA DHARMAgASTRA. in. IV. 
 
 err a s n ii^wr 911 
 
 10 
 
 15 
 
 20 
 
 *]f WTWHTRrt II ^ II 
 TT UrftrT 
 
 fi^St HT^t ^R^f ^jWiPctmn n 6 n 
 
 IIMOII
 
 MANAMA DHARMAQASTRA. IV. V. 63 
 
 : IIMQII 
 
 
 10 ^ 3 
 
 
 n 
 
 IT^T ^ 5rni IR8o|| 
 
 20 V*faj ff 
 
 n^ft^^ TraTTfirrsi^nnt. i 
 
 M II
 
 64 MANAVA DHARMAQASTRA. V. VI. 
 
 
 rTTfrjf?t 
 
 ni *n,<uir^j|rr 
 
 15 
 
 >a 'v 
 
 HFT 
 
 : II MM II 
 
 5 Hr*ilfa *|%l^lrHrql P^ "^TFT H 
 
 ? ^ n a 
 
 20
 
 MANAVA DHARMAgASTRA. VI. XL XU. 65 
 
 'MT 
 
 ff ^TT 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 11 8 H 
 
 I 
 
 HMD 
 
 ii ff ii 
 
 20 "2TRT TRT W ^RH 3TRR "^ ^rr^n^ II bll 
 
 : I 
 I fit if
 
 66 MANAVA DHARMAgASTRA. XII. 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 
 : \\ 
 : ITRT *? ifHt 
 
 rffltfa H TJ5WI 
 
 f^f^vr T rf?r: u 80 11 
 
 3 fas^r j Tinii<*t j rf?r: 11
 
 MANAYA DHARMAQASTRA. XH. 67 
 
 nfir: n 
 
 r 
 J TfrT: 
 
 nfif : n 88 n 
 
 J Tfw: 
 
 ^rtff ?TT: i 
 
 10 JS ^^ft nf?f: II 8 II 
 
 : n ^9 n 
 
 r 
 
 H^nifiir "^ %TT^ n^nrr ^ifw*^ J rfif n 
 
 15 
 
 : II MO II 
 
 ^ <u in 
 20 ^<!ii^u^WM "^ M^I w^s;f?f n MM n
 
 68 MANAVA DHARMAgASTRA. XII. 
 
 n 11 
 
 i fifq*4*i<jniM H *!<?qn! n 
 
 10 in 
 
 ?rr: 
 
 c> 
 
 T ^ II ^f II 
 
 vrfwt ^RT: i 
 
 15 vrfwt 
 
 XXIX. XXX. 
 
 : u 
 
 ) ^^: farRTsJT R ^fem U
 
 VEDA. 
 
 XXXI. RIGVEDA I. 1. 
 
 IRII 
 
 Rt H=iHirt: 
 
 
 ii M ii 
 
 : n 11
 
 70 VEDA. 
 
 XXXII. RTGVEDA I. 32 
 
 i 3 ^HSifii! u "sff ^ ^rrft 
 
 IT "^^IT ^^HrHdMr*! II ^ II 
 fulfll!] Freret ^5| ^q rffT^ I 
 
 : IRII 
 
 11 3 n 
 
 J iftfT 
 
 10 
 
 "^TRT 
 
 15 
 
 -^_^5 - - - 
 
 I b II 
 
 20 c^^J f;lf ftf
 
 VEDA. 71 
 
 HI^TR 
 
 5 
 
 wr 
 
 XXXIII. RIGVEDA I. 50 
 10 ^ RT 5TT rf 
 
 II <* II 
 
 ft TOT% ^fff 
 
 srntarr r^Rt ^n 11511 
 
 ii 8 ii 
 
 II M II 
 
 20 

 
 72 VEDA. 
 
 Mr 
 
 5 iPqi -qiU II bll 
 
 r: ii en 
 
 XXXIV. RIGVEDA I. 97. 
 
 ii ^ ii 
 
 ii 9 ii 
 
 f? 
 
 ^ 
 20 fi^rt 
 
 
 n mi
 
 VEDA. 73 
 
 XXXV. RIGVEDA I. 165, 
 : *W)dbi: *nTRIT 
 
 HSU 
 
 wrftr 
 
 ^r *T5fiTt liinL ^R HfT TR^TT fhjTTO II ^ II 
 
 iii f%\ ?r ^sn i 
 fft^t ^ ^r"^ H?II 
 
 10 ^rrftr ^ ^rrf^: ^t ^ffw: ^*t ^rfw wjat ^ 
 irfrt ^ 
 
 f? ^ ^t imn 
 FTT "^ 
 
 u $ 11 
 
 rfft 
 
 t II b II
 
 74 VEDA. 
 
 5? irnrt 
 
 nfit 
 
 U ^TrR ^ 
 
 ^JTT 
 
 10 
 
 II SM II 
 
 XXXVI. RIGVEDA HI. 62. 
 
 15 
 
 4:
 
 VEDA. 75 
 
 XXXVII. RIGVEDA IV. 42. 
 f flrTT TT 
 
 
 sfirf *rsn?T ^T!!^ TT Wrfa t^TO^t ^: n ^ 
 
 THRTT vR^ra 1 1 
 
 : II ^ II 
 
 5 
 
 10 <iy|w^ll *i^<mi rr irfT: II M II 
 
 rTT 
 
 rTf rTT IT 
 
 15 irfn 
 
 XXXVIII. RIGVEDA IV. 52. 
 
 n ^ n 
 
 HTrTT 
 
 
 
 : IRH
 
 76 VEDA. 
 
 r fftr^ ii ? ii 
 
 i^T 
 
 II 8 II 
 
 ufir 
 
 \\\\ 
 
 ^rf w^rtftr 
 
 n s n 
 
 XXXIX. RIGVEDA V. 24. 
 
 10 : n ^ n 
 
 : n * u 
 
 11 9 N 
 : n n 
 
 XL. RIGVEDA V. 40. 
 
 i*irHT 
 
 15 
 
 7R ^tlH^ ^3TT |^t f^WT ft? 
 
 TT^T ti\9 n
 
 YEDA. 77 
 
 XLI. RIGVEDA VII. 55. 
 
 ft 
 
 triLii J l'MTWr: 
 
 ft? ^i? a ^ ii 
 
 ^ ft J 
 
 10 JTCJ HTrTT B^ ftTT 
 
 : ii M ii 
 
 rT^T II 
 
 XLII. RIGVEDA VH. 56.
 
 78 VEDA. 
 
 irftr ^ ^ ^TS? f^ firet 5rfM*i ii * ii 
 
 20 
 
 
 f^ilT 
 
 : PSRT ^R 
 
 t ftro ^R 
 
 XLHT. RIGYEDA VH. 86. 
 
 10 vhr rtei ^rfrr ft f^r 
 
 IT HIMM "ri flTTT 
 
 rir*i<l 
 
 15 WW' y<lli| ? H T fT II 3 II 
 
 sr 
 
 : *n gtr
 
 VEDA. 79 
 
 w*(Vrtl II If II 
 
 XLIV. RIGYEDA YIT. 88. 
 
 iret nfft ^TR 
 
 11 s n 
 
 sft ITT ^^it 
 
 10 ^?T *l ^iU^f ^TT U 
 
 f 
 
 n8H 
 
 _ HTT'fi? ^ ^T^IT ^^j: ^Rf ^^^t JTT 
 
 15 ^prf ^RT "sp^ ^JTIT^: fl^^K 1PTOT ' II M II 
 
 f^I "5RT f^IT 
 
 ^TrT
 
 80 VEDA. 
 
 XLV. RTGVEDA VII. 89. 
 
 
 5 ^: ^W hTrTT ITrfW 
 
 XLVI. RIGVEDA VIII. 14. 
 
 n ^ ii 
 
 Mr) 
 
 15 
 
 u 8 n
 
 ff 
 
 15 
 
 20 
 
 VEDA. 81 
 
 f^rar 
 
 t if? ?f 
 
 n Q n 
 
 10 
 
 H W II 
 
 ftit 
 
 6
 
 82 VEDA. 
 
 XL VII. RIGVEDA VHI. 85. 
 
 i W 
 
 irfn 
 
 rTT 
 
 XLVIII. RIGVEDA VITI. 91. 
 
 10 
 
 15 
 
 : H ^^ H 
 
 >H nbn
 
 VEDA. 83 
 
 XLIX. RIGVEDA X. 9. 
 
 TJSI'R 
 
 : IRII 
 J i*4m 
 
 L. RIGVEDA X. U. 
 t^ TRrff 
 
 II ^ II 
 
 J TT^ 
 
 R: i^T ftnri: ift^RT ^f^Ri: tiwr^ ^r?T ^n: IRII 
 
 _ Cv _ _v3_ _ _ _ _ vj* 
 
 irff 
 
 <[5fWl 
 
 15 ^vfa H ftr ^f WTHt S-OT w ftmu 
 
 6*
 
 84 VEDA. 
 
 <M*Hfod ^imi 3SRTJH ^ vff ii 
 
 LI. RIGVEDA X. 16. 
 
 : II <* II 
 
 i*i i ^n n^rrTT u ^ 11 
 
 Tr*1irHI ^Tt ^ *T*Si TjftRt* "^ ^WTI 
 
 : II 
 
 10 ^r^t m^r^r^n it rhi^r rt W ^tf^^RH it w ^rPI: 
 
 : u M a 
 
 15 ri^g^i Ww jsi<u ^ 
 
 
 u $ u 
 
 ITT 
 
 II til 
 20 ^OTTCTrraJ n ff? TJffftr ?t
 
 VEDA. 85 
 
 f 
 
 ^T 
 
 II iO II 
 
 ftr: 
 
 in8n 
 
 LIT. RIGVEDA X. 17. 
 
 
 15 
 
 : 11911 
 
 
 20 
 
 ^ *rtr:
 
 86 VEDA. 
 
 HMII 
 
 15 
 
 ftn??R 
 
 LHL RIGYEDA X. 18. 
 T 5 ^ "^^ ^T ^Trf^t 
 
 ri 
 
 f^r 
 
 
 cl II b II 
 30 
 
 ^PTTO iT ?BT ^T W: HW ^TRT: II?!! 
 
 10 
 
 : 3^-41 <ft^5 ^VHT TT!K^ n 8 ii 
 
 II M II
 
 VEDA. 87 
 
 r^fi-T? ^RT 5^HT f^rr ^T 
 
 TJTTJ 
 
 f? 
 
 W I J?TOT 
 
 t PMriil 
 
 C\ 
 
 10 
 
 LIV. RIGVEDA X. 33. 
 
 THTR 
 
 ^ fwt 
 ii M n 
 
 H
 
 88 VEDA. 
 
 Uti II til 
 ^rt 
 
 fir %w n e 11 
 
 LV. RIGVEDA X. 40. 10. 
 
 LYI. RIGVEDA X. 52. 
 
 
 ftnr ^ft ^^fhrrNpsr "^rr Tr^fTt ITT 
 
 10 
 
 15 
 
 TTT
 
 VEDA. 89 
 
 LYII. RIGVEDA X. 53. 
 WnT ri*N*lul H 
 
 _ N 
 
 LVIII. RIGVEDA X. 85. ae, 24-se, 32-33, 27, 43-47. 
 
 I? fT 
 
 v3 _ _ _ _ 
 
 sfisrt 
 
 10 ijji^ T: ^T ^FH^?T IRM II 
 
 T t^T H lffTT 
 
 15 
 
 *WF*ITOI ^T^T^W f^r ^trfR n 99 n 
 ftni 
 
 : inrt
 
 90 VEDA. 
 
 4 fr 
 
 
 11 11 
 
 VTrfT 
 
 LIX. RIGVEDA X. 137. 
 
 10 
 
 : 11 <\ \\ 
 ^rrw ^ 
 
 15 
 
 4 ff 
 
 TO ^ n? 11 11 
 
 ni T ^rn *FMM*HMT ^r( II M U 
 
 20
 
 VEDA. 91 
 
 <JlMnj HM 
 T fsiifT 
 
 i^T WWt 
 
 10 
 
 LX. RIGVEDA X. 154. 
 
 If^Rf 
 
 ratfTnt ii 8 H 
 11 M 11 
 
 LXI. RIGVEDA X. 155. 
 
 16 ^EchffiT ^^: ^ ^RT W ^Hlfif IIMH 
 
 LXn. MAITRAYANI SANH1TA U. 13. 23
 
 92 VEDA. 
 
 10 
 
 tnrr 
 
 Cs 
 
 
 
 11311 
 
 ^ter irf^r: ^N ^ft: 
 
 n s 11 
 
 LXin. MAITRAYANI SANHITA 1. 5. 12. 
 
 i ?r rr ^n inWinR i rtr 
 
 15 iJ^M^rrH | d c(l ^PRflffff I 
 
 rhr: ^^R^H^RI i ?rrf: 
 
 LX1V. MAITRAYANI SANHITA I. 10. 13. 
 
 m: i
 
 BRAHMANA. 93 
 
 I W MilMM^IUrt 
 
 rtff ftr 
 
 f 71 I 3f IJ^T ^flF 4 ^ iftFWT 
 
 LXV. MA1TRAYANI SANHITA II. 1. 12. 
 
 I if" "4l 
 
 r^ 
 
 ^m^T ^IM^Iri I 
 
 10 3 i 
 
 ff ^ 
 
 I 
 
 LXYI. TAITTIRIYA SANHITA II. 6. 6. 
 
 f ^ 
 
 Ft 
 
 i H fn^iNH i Ft si?: 
 i ?r 
 
 FT nHiH ^f?f i n^u^rw finrr fti^r wfiTfT i ^r- 
 
 f? I rfF^f^H I H^sM R ^TF "^^f 1^ Ft
 
 94 BRAHMANA. 
 
 10 
 
 :iTftfv 
 
 LXVH. AITAREYA BRAHMANA III. 20. 
 
 i w^fir i rt f^^Ti ^H^I i 
 
 rTT 
 
 ^rff 
 
 LXVHI. AITAREYA BRAHMANA III. 21. 
 
 S^fflfrf I K^n^%xr ^m^trt I rTWt 
 
 LXIX. QATAPATHA BRAHMANA II. 2. 2.
 
 BRAHMANA. 95 
 
 t ivr 
 
 
 rT 
 
 LXX. QATAPATHA BRAHMANA II. 2. 2. 
 IT 
 
 Cs C\ 
 
 nen 
 
 "^T ^ 
 
 IROII 
 
 LXXI. QATAPATHA BRAHMANA X. 4. 3 
 15 
 
 3: 
 
 "TO 
 
 : f^wtfir i *rf l^Ttfif a s 
 
 ff T^T^T*15) <l -=1 WRTtJt S^rf T^fh I
 
 96 BRAHMANA, 
 
 
 IR II 
 
 ^f5 ^t S^^^KHMI^I^M! s*t 
 
 II II 7T 
 
 I H 
 rii*inn*iM(VX II 8 II W TvqfM r^fWt I 
 
 c> 
 
 10 r** I ?f?T ^ Hc||*riHHM(\fl II Mil TT 
 
 T II 9 II 
 
 Ml 
 
 15 ^fi? ^ ^far ^ uiHifn ' 
 
 I ^ ? rPR TT ^i? ^V: I rT^t 
 
 ^T'JfTT ^TF^* II b II *f *j 
 
 T 
 
 20 ^rr ^n?n nfci'iin^^ ^t TT^T *rprf nf^nftfff i ^ ft 
 
 ^fff I
 
 BRAHMANA. 
 
 f ^ HT f^rar 
 
 moil 
 
 LXXII. QATAPATHA BRAHMANA XII. 7. 3. 
 
 *) 
 
 fen 
 
 10 ^i ftrt^fJr i 
 
 i 
 
 "fe^T 
 
 fw ftR 
 
 Cs 
 
 LXXIII. NIRUKTA II. 16. 
 15 ^ Id T1M 1*1 M N^J^lV^THl Mirqt?q I KHU*I 
 
 : i 
 
 7
 
 98 SUTRA. 
 
 *' I 
 
 i H <f 
 
 
 LXXIV. AgVALAYANA'S GRIHYASUTRA I. 5, 7, 8. 
 
 Trffffis'rii i 
 
 10 
 
 Hll(rfl(d 
 
 g*lrft 
 
 II Mil 
 
 rrNt ^rT IT- 
 
 n i ** 
 
 : i i
 
 15 
 
 C\ 
 
 20 
 
 T? 
 
 SUTRA. 99 
 
 *TT r* 5RT 
 
 "feRT 
 
 MdHi<<ii) Sffcrfrre ^rRrrf: II 
 
 ^TrTT ^Tff^T ^TT 
 
 10 
 
 ifirt R^rrrf RTTTW: ^=11^1 n 
 
 
 Wffft * RftlTfTrT: I w \ 
 
 Rt f^ft? 
 
 7*
 
 100 SUTRA. 
 
 : 11 
 
 irfT IT 
 sip 
 
 inr rrr 1^1 11^9 n 
 
 THTRT 
 
 lH ^ 
 
 131 ifN 
 
 rf* U^Tt IR^TT 
 
 20 
 
 ^fif ^T: 
 
 FTTrTT
 
 SUTRA. 101 
 
 4HJftiT Hl lib II 
 
 LXXY. AgVALAYANA'S GRIHYASUTRA IV. 16. 
 
 Tftt ^Mrt^rH i^l l^iHH<iRin 1*11 
 
 HI ^t*f n *TOT 
 
 l*m*rTl 
 
 c 
 
 10 ?T Hl 
 
 HI 
 
 f f^ftj ^f^^FT^TFTT "^T 
 
 rr 
 
 i ^ i 
 
 w \**\ 
 
 HI 
 
 1 T TTK Hi 
 
 ^l^chl^^PTi 1^1 ^H^Jl S*iirqi 
 
 20
 
 102 SUTRA. 
 
 ^fa ft ^ 
 
 l fn^nfn I ^ I 
 
 is 
 
 20 
 
 10 rr rnr^T ^iwit 1^1 IR n
 
 SUTRA. 103 
 
 *TT f^f 
 
 5 fij *HJ|fU*uft ^f^T^ cJl^l^ M l^fri 1^1 II 9 II 
 
 10 131 
 
 : 1^1 4'iHi>n 
 
 
 I M I rf ^TRT^TT^R^ Wf Sf? 
 
 coln^nVf?T f f^^R^ I ^ I 
 
 15 ^llH+ll^ HH ^l^|cfc||*| ^ft M I ^ 1 
 
 fliHI 1 *!' 
 
 20
 
 104 SUTRA. 
 
 10 
 
 15 
 
 : I M 
 
 n M a 
 
 20 ^TT : shMl^r IT Wf c^H 1^1 r *^- 
 
 rr f^: 
 
 1 H
 
 15 
 
 20 
 
 SUTRA. 105 
 
 t^rf 
 
 v3 
 
 V ^ 
 
 10 
 
 ^ff ^VrTT 

 
 106 SUTRA. 
 
 GEBRUDER UNGER, BERLIN, SW-
 
 PART E. 
 SANSKRIT-ENGLISH VOOABULAET.
 
 [.For Explanations and Abbreviations, see pages 289-294.] 
 
 [111] 
 
 [agni 
 
 1 a, pron. root, see idam and 502. 
 
 2 a , negative prefix, see an. 
 
 anga, m. (that which one gets, i.e.) one's 
 portion ; and so, generalized, portion, part. 
 [Vlag, 'get.'] 
 
 angii, m. juicy internodium or shoot of the 
 Soma-plant ; and so, shooting ray (of 
 light). 
 
 ahQumant, a. rich in beams, radiant ; as 
 m. the sun, 16*. [angii, 1235b.] 
 
 a n s a , m. shoulder, [perhaps, ' the strong ' 
 (part), Vam, 1197a: cf. 3>/j.-os, Lat. um-erus, 
 Goth, amsa, 'shoulder.'] 
 
 a-kasmat, adv. without any "wherefore "; 
 without apparent cause ; unexpectedly ; 
 accidentally. 
 
 akasmad-agantu, m. an accidental ar- 
 rival, a chance comer. 
 
 a-kara, m. the sound or letter a. [Whit- 
 ney, 18.] 
 
 a-karana, n. lack of cause; -am, adv. 
 causelessly. 
 
 a-kirti,/. non-fame, disgrace. 
 
 akirti-kara, a. causing disgrace, dis- 
 graceful. 
 
 a-krta, a. not done; uncooked. 
 
 aktii, m. I. ointment; 2. light, beam 
 of light; -3. night, [for 2, cf. cutris, 
 ' beam.'] 
 
 a - k r i y a m a n a , a. not being accomplished. 
 [Vlkr, 'do,' 770c.] 
 
 a-krura, a. not harsh. 
 
 1 aksa, n. for aksan at end ofcpds [1315a]. 
 
 2 aksa, m. a die for playing, [named, 
 perhaps, from its 'eyes' (1 aksa) or 
 ' spots.'] 
 
 aksa, m. axle. [cf. &tav, Lat. axis, AS. 
 eax, Eng. axe (i.e. 'axle'), and axle.'] 
 
 a-ksata, a. unhurt, uninjured; unbroken-, 
 
 as m. pi. unbroken or unhusked grains, 
 
 esp. of barley, 
 aksata-kesara, a. having an uninjured 
 
 mane, 
 aksata-deha, a. having an unhurt or 
 
 perfect body, 
 aksan [431], n. eye. [cf. uir-unr-a, 'have 
 
 seen,' dty, ' eye ' ; otrcre, *bic-je, ' eyes ' ; Lat. 
 
 oc-ulus, 'eye'; the kinship of AS. edge, 
 
 Eng. eye, remains to be proved : cf. Viks.] 
 aksa-priya, a. beloved of the dice, i.e. 
 
 lucky at gaming. 
 a-ksama, a. not equal to a thing ; unable, 
 
 w. inf. 
 
 a-ksaya, a. imperishable. 
 aksayatva,n. imperishability, [aksaya.] 
 a-ksara, a. imperishable; as n. word; 
 
 syllable; the sacred syllable, om, GO 14 ; 
 
 sound, letter, 61 4 . 
 aksara-nyasa, m. the commitment to 
 
 letters, the writing. 
 a-ksara, a. not pungent. 
 aksaralavana, n. that which is not pun- 
 gent and not salt, [alavana : 1253b.] 
 aksaralavanagin, a. eating that which 
 
 is not pungent and not salt, abstaining 
 
 from seasoned and salted food, [agin.] 
 aksi [431], n. eye; see aksan. 
 aksauhini,/ a complete army. 
 aksauhinl-pati, m. master of an army; 
 
 general. 
 
 a-khila, a. without a gap, entire ; all. 
 a - g a d a , a. not having disease, well, healthy, 
 
 whole ; wholesome ; as m. medicine. 
 a gar a, m. n. house, 
 agni, m. fire; esp. a sacred fire; the god 
 
 of fire, Agni, mediator between men and
 
 agnikunda] 
 
 [112] 
 
 gods, messenger who carries the sacrifice 
 to them, protector from the terrors and 
 spirits of darkness, and keeper of house 
 and hearth, [perhaps, ' the quickly mov- 
 ing or agile one,' V aj, 1158 : cf . Lat. ignis, 
 ' fire/ agilis, ' agile '; akin, poss., is aty\ri, 
 ' flashing light.'] 
 
 agni-kunda, n. round hole hi the ground 
 for the sacred fire. 
 
 agni-vela,^ fire-hour, time for kindling 
 the sacred fire ; afternoon. 
 
 agni-hotra, n. fire-sacrifice (a burnt- 
 offering of fresh milk). 
 
 agnihotra-havani, /. fire-sacrifice 
 ladle. 
 
 agny-adh6ya, n. placing or setting up 
 of the sacred fire, [acct, 1272.] 
 
 agr a, n. 1. front ; agre, in front, before, 
 in presence of, w. gen.; 2. beginning; 
 agre, in the beginning, in the first place, 
 first; 3. tip, end. [perhaps, 'that 
 which goes before, leader,' V aj : cf . &yu, 
 'lead,' ffTpar-rryos, 'army-leader.'] 
 
 agratas, adv. in front [1098c 3 ]; before 
 (one's self) ; w. kr, place in front, cause 
 to lead, [agra, 1098b.] 
 
 agrya, a. foremost, best, [agra, 1212c.] 
 
 agha, a. distressful, harmful ; as n. harm, 
 trouble, evil; sin; sorrow, [like anhii, 
 ' narrow,' and anhas, ' distress,' from 
 v- angh or anh, ' straiten ' : cf . KX OS > ' dis- 
 tress ' ; &yx.a>, Lat. ango, ' strangle ' ; AS. 
 ange, ' anxious,' Ger. enge, ' narrow,' Angst, 
 ' distress ' : for connection of mgs, cf . Eng. 
 straiten, ' to narrow ' and ' to distress.'] 
 
 V agha y a (aghayati). harm; plan mis- 
 chief, [agha, 1059b.] 
 
 a-ghoracaksus, a. not evil-eyed. 
 
 d-ghnya, m. bull (the animal that is 
 ' hard to overcome,' or more exactly, ' not 
 to be slain'). 
 
 & g h n y a , f. cow. [formed as a pendant 
 to aghnya.] 
 
 anka, m. 1. the bend at the groin made 
 by taking a sitting position, lap; 2. the 
 bend just above the hip (where babes, sit- 
 ting astride, are carried by Hindu women 
 see aroha) ; 3. hook; 4. (like Eng. 
 pot-hook) mark, sign. [Vane: for 1, cf. 
 v, 'bend in arm or wall or shore'; for 
 
 3, cf . oyxos, Lat. uncus, AS. ongel, ' hook ' ; 
 cf. Eng. angle, not a borrowed word.] 
 
 V ankhaya (ankhayati [1056, 1067]). 
 hook on, grapple, [from anka, ' hook,' 
 despite the aspiration.] 
 + pari, clasp, embrace. 
 
 V ang. move, in derivs. 
 
 a n g a , asseverative particle, yad anga, just 
 when ; te anga, they only. 
 
 anga, n. limb, member; by synecdoche, 
 body, person, form. [Vang: for mg, cf. 
 angiili, angiistha.] 
 
 a n g a n a , n. court, [orig., perhaps, ' gang- 
 way,' ^ang.] 
 
 ang ana, f. a (fair) form, i.e. a woman, 
 [anga.] 
 
 angara, m. coal. 
 
 angiras,7n. 1. orig., probably, messenger ; 
 esp. messenger between gods and men ; 6^ 
 eminence, Agni; 2. as pi. Angirases, a 
 name applied by the Hindus to a certain race 
 among their forefathers (perhaps because 
 their intercourse with the gods was con- 
 ceived as very intimate), these forefathers 
 being regarded as half divine ; 3. as s. 
 the (mythical) ancestor of the Angirases. 
 
 angiili, f. finger. [Vang, 1191: for mg, 
 cf. anga.] 
 
 angustha, m. thumb, [for mg, cf. anga.] 
 
 V ac or a no (acati, aiicati ; akna, ancita ; 
 -acya). bend. [cf. anka and vbl anc.] 
 + a. bend. 
 
 a -car a, a. not moving; as subst. plant (as 
 distinguished from animals). 
 
 a-cala, a. immovable; as m. mountain. 
 
 a-cit, a. not knowing; unwise; foolish. 
 
 a-citti, f. unwisdom; folly. 
 
 a-citva, grd. without piling. [Vlci.] 
 
 a-cintya, a. incomprehensible. 
 
 accha, vbl prefix, to, unto; hither; w. VV 
 2 nag, ya, vah, vrt ; often accha, 248a. 
 
 V aj fajati, -te). drive. [orig. 'put in 
 motion ' : cf . Lat. ago, ' lead, drive ' ; &y<a, 
 'lead': cf. also agra, ajira, aji.] 
 + ud, drive out. 
 
 a j a , m. he-goat, [prob. ' the agile one,' 
 V aj : cf . af, ' goat.'] 
 
 a-jara, a. not aging; ageless. 
 
 aj aramaravat, adv. as if ageless and 
 immortal, [ajara-amara, 1107, 1257.]
 
 [113] 
 
 [atra 
 
 a-jasra, a. not dying out; perpetual 
 (of fire). 
 
 aja,/. she-goat, [see aja.] 
 
 a-jata, a. unborn. 
 
 ajina, m. goat-skin; pelt, [aja: cf . alyls, 
 ' goat-skin, Aegis,' w. aff , ' goat.'] 
 
 ajira, a. agile, swift. [Vaj, 1188e: cf. 
 Lat. agilis, ' agile.'] 
 
 V ajiraya (ajirayate). be swift; press 
 swiftly onward, [ajira, 1059b.] 
 
 a-jna, a. not knowing, ignorant; foolish; 
 as m. fool. 
 
 a - j L at a , a. unknown. [Vjna : cf . &-yv<aros, 
 Lat. i-gnotus, Eng. un-couth, ' unknown.'] 
 
 ajnata-kulagila, a. whose family and 
 character are unknown. 
 
 a-jnatva, grd. without knowing. 
 
 a-jnana, n. ignorance; -at and -atas, 
 out of ignorance. 
 
 V anc, see Vac. 
 
 anc, as vbl at end of cpds [see 407-9], 
 turning, directed ; e.g. ud-anc, directed 
 upward. [for ing, cf. Eng. -ward (in 
 to-ward, etc.), which is akin w. Vvrt, 
 ' turn.'] 
 
 V arij or aj (anakti, ankte; anaiija, anaje 
 [788]; anjit; akta; aktva; -anjya, -ajya). 
 1. smear; anoint; 2. adorn, [cf. aktu: 
 cf . Lat. ungo, ' anoint.'] 
 + a , anoint. 
 
 + v i , 1. anoint ; 2. adorn ; and so, bring 
 to notice ; vyakta : adorned, fair ; mani- 
 fest ; caws, make clear or manifest. 
 + s a m , 1. anoint; 2. adorn; 3. unite 
 by anointing, 89 19 ; 4. generalized, unite 
 with, take to one's self (e.g. food), 88 10 . 
 
 an j all, m. the two hollowed and open 
 hands placed side by side ; the hands so 
 placed and raised to the forehead, i.e. a 
 gesture of reverent salutation; a double 
 handful (as measure). 
 
 aiijas, adv. quickly, suddenly, [prob. adv. 
 ace. or instr. of an obsolete subst. anjas, 
 ' a slippery way or a gliding motion,' V anj .] 
 
 V at (atati, -te ; atisyati; atita ; atitva). 
 wander about, [cf. Vat.] 
 
 at an I, f. the notched end of a bow. 
 
 a t a v I , / forest, [perhaps, ' roaming-place,' 
 Vat.] 
 
 anda, n. egg. 
 
 anda-ja, a. egg-born; as m. bird. 
 V at (atati, -te; atita). wander about, [cf. 
 Vat.] 
 
 a-tandrita, a. unwearied. 
 
 atas, adv. 1. (as abl. ofpron. root a [1098], 
 and synonymous w. asmat) from it; .so 22 9 , 
 sc. pankat ; ato ' nya, other than it, 68 12 ; 
 -2. from this (place), 83 15 ; -3. from this 
 (time), 96 21 ; cf. iirdhvam; then, 40 16 ; -4. 
 from this (cause), 35 10 ; therefore, 27 3 , etc.; 
 w. correl. yatas, 36 8 ; hence ; and so, 39 4 , 
 42 21 ; so then, 73 12 . [pron. root a, 502.] 
 
 dti, adv. across, beyond, past, over, as vbl 
 prefix; in cpds, to excess, excessive, see 
 1289b ; as prep, beyond, over. [cf . K-n, 
 ' further, besides ' ; Lat. et, ' besides, and.'] 
 
 atikrama, m. act of overstepping or over- 
 coming. [Vkram + ati.] 
 
 atithi, m. guest, ['wanderer,' Vat.] 
 
 ati-durvrtta, a. excessively wicked. 
 
 ati-dura, a. very far or distant; as n. 
 great distance. 
 
 ati-bhara, m. excessive burden. 
 
 ati-laulya, n. excessive greediness. 
 
 ati-vrsti,yi excessive rain. 
 
 a-tisthant, a. not standing; restless. 
 [Vstha.] 
 
 ati-samcaya,m. excessive accumulation. 
 
 ati-samnidhana, n. excessive nearness. 
 
 atlndriya, a. transcending the senses ; as 
 n. soul, spirit, [ati + indriya, 1310a.] 
 
 ativa, adv. exceedingly; very, [ati + iva.] 
 
 a-tyajya, a. not to be abandoned. 
 
 aty-ugra, a. extraordinary. ['exces- 
 sively strong.'] 
 
 atyugra-punyapapa, a. extraordinar- 
 ily good and bad ; as n. pi. extraordinarily 
 good and bad deeds. 
 
 atra (atra, 248a), adv. 1. (asloc.ofpron. 
 root a [1099 4 ], and synonymous w. asmin) 
 substantively : in it, 97 10 ; in this case, 31 5 ; 
 in that case, 18 n ; on this point, 29 2 ; 
 adjectiv ely : w. antare: in this interim, 
 meantime, 24 19 , 45 2 , 50 22 , 55 4 ; on this 
 occasion, at this juncture, 19 n ; atra 
 sarasi, in this pool ; 2. in this or that 
 (place); here, 25 16 ; there, 33 5 , 89*; in 
 that world (opp. to 'in this world'), 
 87 !' 7 ' 9 ; -3. in that (time), then, 56. 
 [pron. root a, 502.]
 
 atri] 
 
 [114] 
 
 Atri, m. Atri, name of a famous Rishi. 
 
 atha (atha, 248a), adv. expresses a sequence, 
 temporal or resultant : then ; so ; so then ; 
 accordingly; thereupon; 1. temporal: 
 e.g. ati drava, atha upehi, run past, and 
 then go unto , 83 18 ; in apodosis after 
 yada, 84 5 ' 6 - 7 , 96 22 ; 2. resultant: e.g. ma- 
 rudbhih sakhyam te astu, atha jayasi, 
 make friends with the Maruts, and then 
 (if thou dost) thou shalt conquer, 82 2 N. ; 
 
 3. very frequent as a simple continuative : 
 now; so; then; usually at beginning of sen- 
 tence (e.g. 20 1 ) or cloka (e.g. 2 6 ); sometimes 
 within the cloka (e.g. 3 14 ); exceptionally at 
 the end, 13 9 ; at beginning of section or book, 
 now, 98 16 ; here beginneth (cf. Hi), I 1 ; 
 sometimes much attenuated in meaning ; often 
 almost equivalent to a capital letter, to mark 
 the beginning of a new clause, e.g. 94 18 ; con- 
 necting parts of sentence, 4 n ; 4. pleonas- 
 tically w. tatas, 13 9 ; mere verse-filler, 10 19 ; 
 
 5. atho, i.e. atha u, and also, 90 16 ; 6. 
 serving as a point d'appui for an enclitic, 
 which may thus precede its word : e.g. devo, 
 ' tha va yaksas, a god or a Yaksha, instead 
 of devo, yakso va, 8 18 ; so 2 12 ; in this use, 
 va : atha va : : que : atque ; cf. 27 21 ; cf. 
 va; 7. atha va, or rather, 26 7 N. [pron. 
 root a, 1101, 502; later form of adha 
 (which is more common in the Veda) : cf. 
 Lat. at, ' then, further, but.'] 
 
 V ad (atti; atsyati; attum). eat; consume, 
 [cf . 8eo, Lat. edo, AS. etan, Eng. eat : cf . 
 anna.] 
 
 ad, vbl. eating, consuming, in cpds. 
 
 a d a , a. eating, in cpds. [vf ad.] 
 
 a-danstrin, a. without tusks or large 
 teeth. 
 
 a-datta, a. not given. 
 
 a-dantajata, a. not having teethed, 
 ['not having grown teeth,' for a-jata- 
 danta.] 
 
 adds [501], pron. yon, yonder, that, that 
 there, in opposition to the one here or just 
 mentioned.- e.g. asau, 22 7 , that one (the 
 traveller last mentioned at 20 19 ) ; so 31 10 ; 
 asav amutra, ayam asmin, that one in 
 that world, this one in this, 103 7 ; that one 
 (correl. ya), 7 6 , 37 n ; as designation of per- 
 sons not to be named, so-and-so, N. or M. ; 
 
 asav aliam. I am so-and-so, 61 14 ; 60 21 ; 
 103 5 ; follows at a distance the word to 
 which it refers, thus emphasizing it, 23 1 . 
 [see 501 and 503.] 
 
 aditi, a. without bond or limit; infinite; as 
 f. infinity, the endless heaven, 79 19 ; infin- 
 ity, personified as a goddess, Aditi, 75 8 . 
 [apparently a -f *diti, acct, 1304a 2 : diti, 
 'bond,' would be a reg. deriv. of \/3da, 
 'bind,' but does not occur as such, 
 although there is a word diti, q.v., of 
 quite different rug and origin.] 
 
 a -din a, a. not depressed. 
 
 adinatman, a. with cheerful spirit, un- 
 daunted, [atman.] 
 
 a-durmangala,/. -I, a. bringing no bad 
 luck. [for declension, cf. sumangala, 
 -gali, and 355b.] 
 
 a-dfsta, a. unseen, unnoticed. [Vdrg.] 
 
 adrsta-kama, m. love for one not yet 
 seen. 
 
 a-deva, m. non-god, who is no god. [1288a 4 .] 
 
 adbhis, see 393. 
 
 adbhuta, a. wonderful; as n. wonder, 
 [despite anatidbhuta, prob. from at(i)- 
 bhuta, ' transcending what has existed/ 
 1310a : cf. ambara.] 
 
 adbhuta-rupa, a. having wonderful 
 beauty. 
 
 adya, adv. to-day; adya nii, in this night 
 (just past), 61 8 ; now; adya yavat, until 
 now ; adya^arabhya, from now on. [per- 
 haps from *a-dyavi, ' on this day,' 1122f, 
 see dyu : cf . Lat. ho-die, ' to-day.'] 
 
 a-dravya, n. non-thing, unworthy object. 
 
 adri, m. rock; stone; esp. Soma-stone (for 
 bruising the Soma) ; missile stone. 
 
 adrivant, a. having or armed with the 
 hurling-stone. 
 
 adha (adha, 248a), Vedic adv. expressing a 
 sequence : then, so, 79 8 ; so then, 89 18 ; 
 adha yad, just then when, 76 14 ; (then, 
 i.e. besides, i.e.) and, 77 18 , 78 6 . [1104 8 : 
 cf. atha.] 
 
 a-dhanya, a. not rich; poor. 
 
 adhama [525], a. lowest; worst, [cf. adhas 
 and 474 : cf . Lat. infimus, ' lowest.'] 
 
 adhara [525], a. lower, [cf. adhas and 
 474: cf. Lat. inferus, 'lower'; Eng. under.'] 
 
 a-dharma, m. unrighteousness.
 
 [115] 
 
 [anamayitnu 
 
 adhah-gayin, a. lying low, i.e. sleeping 
 on the ground. 
 
 ad has, adv. below; down. 
 
 adhastat, adv. below; as prep., iv. gen. 
 [1130], under, [adhas, HOOb.j 
 
 ad hi, adv. over, besides, in addition, 96 16 ; 
 as prep, above, over, on; w. instr. (of snii 
 only), away over, 79 u ; w. abl. from, out 
 of, 103*; w. loc.: over, 90 7 ; on, 70 13 ,92 n . 
 
 adhika, a. (like Eng. over in adj. uses) ad- 
 ditional ; surpassing the usual measure, 
 superior, extraordinary; as n. surplus, 
 [adhi, 1222a.] 
 
 adhika-rupavant, a. surpassingly or 
 most beautiful. 
 
 adhikanuraga, m. superior affection or 
 most affection, [anuraga.] 
 
 adhikara, m. authority; office; duties of 
 office. [\f 1 kr + adhi, ' put over or in 
 office.'] 
 
 adhij ya, a. having the bow-string up or on, 
 i.e. strung. [2jya, 1305.] 
 
 adhi -pa, m. lord; ruler, ['over-keeper,' 
 1289a : cf. 354.] 
 
 adhi-pati, m. over-lord; sovereign. 
 [1289a.] 
 
 adhi-pa [352], m. lord, ['over-keeper,' 
 1289a.] 
 
 adhisthana, n. standing-place; (of the 
 soul) a dwelling-place or manifestation. 
 [\lstha + adhi.] 
 
 adhuna, adv. now. 
 
 adho-nivita, a. having the sacred cord 
 (worn) low. [adhas.] 
 
 adhyayana, n. reading; study, esp. of the 
 Veda. [Vi + adhi, 1150. la.] 
 
 adhyaya, m. reading; study, esp. of the 
 Veda; (like Eng. lesson), lectio, chapter, 
 66 16 , 58 15 , etc. [\| i + adhi, 1 148. 2.] 
 
 adhvara, m. religious or liturgical ser- 
 vice ; sacrifice, esp. Soma-sacrifice. 
 
 V adhvarya (adhvaryati). perform sac- 
 rifice, [adhvara, 1059d.] 
 
 adhvaryii, m. priest, who did the actual 
 work of the sacrifice, and appears in the 
 oldest period as companion of the hotr 
 see rtvij. [V adhvarya, 1178h.] 
 
 an, before consonants a, negative prefix. 
 [1121a; acct, 1288a, 1304a: cf. w-, a-, 
 Lat. in-, Eng. un-.] 
 
 V an (aniti [631]; ana; anisus ; anisyati ; 
 anita; anitum; -anya). breathe, blow; 
 live, [cf . anila, &ve/*os, Lat. anima, ' cur- 
 rent of air ' ; Goth, an-an, ' breathe.'] 
 + p r a , breathe. 
 
 ana, pron. stem, see iclam. 
 
 an-agha, a. faultless. 
 
 an a (I v ah [404], m. bull, ['cart-drawing/ 
 anas + vah.] 
 
 an-adhigata, a. un-studied. 
 
 an-anusthana, n. non-observance, neg- 
 lect. 
 
 an-antara, 1. a. having no interval; 
 immediately adjoining; -am, ado. imme- 
 diately afterwards, afterwards ; thereupon ; 
 2. as n. non-interval, in sam-. 
 
 an-amiva, a. without sickness or trouble, 
 well ; as n. weal, [amiva, 1304a.] 
 
 an-arghya, a. not to be priced, priceless. 
 
 anarghyatva, n. pricelessness. [1239.] 
 
 an-artha, m. non-advantage; disadvan- 
 tage. 
 
 anala, m. fire. 
 
 an-avadya, a. not un-praiseworthy ; 
 blameless, faultless. 
 
 anavadyanga,_/. -I, a. having a faultless 
 body, [anga.] 
 
 an-aveksa, a. without any looking 
 around ; -am, adv. without looking around, 
 [aveksa.] 
 
 an-aveksamana, a. not looking around. 
 [V Iks + ava.] 
 
 an-agru,a. without tears, [agru, 1304a.] 
 
 a-nasta, a. not lost. [\/lnag.] 
 
 anasta-pagu, a. who loses nothing from 
 his herd. [prop. ' having a not lost herd.'] 
 
 anas, n. cart for heavy burden, [cf. Lat. 
 onus, 'burden.'] 
 
 an-agata, a. not arrived; not (yet) come, 
 impending, future, [\lgarn. + a.] 
 
 anagatavant, a. having to do with the 
 future. [1233.] 
 
 anagata-vidhatr, m. arranger for the 
 future ; Forethought, name of a fish. 
 
 aii-agas, a. without sin. [acct, 1304a 2 ]. 
 
 an-adhrsyd, a. un-approachable. [acct, 
 1285.] 
 
 an-amayA, a. without disease, healthy; 
 as n. health. 
 
 an-amayitnii, a. not sickening; healing.
 
 anayudha] 
 
 [116] 
 
 an-ayudha, a. weaponless; defenceless. 
 
 [ayudha, 1304a.] 
 an-aruhya, yrd. without going into 
 
 ( danger) . [V ruh + a.] 
 anil a, m. wind. [Van, 1189.] 
 a-nivigamana, a. not going to rest. 
 
 [acct, 1283.] 
 a-nivegana, a. having no resting-place, 
 
 unsettled, [nivegana, 1304a.] 
 an-ista, a. undesired; disagreeable; un- 
 
 approved, unlawful. [V 1 is.] 
 anista-cintana, n. the thinking about 
 
 something unlawful. 
 
 an-istva,<7rJ. without sacrificing. [Vyaj.] 
 anika, n. 1. face; 2. Jig. appearance; 
 
 3. of a hatchet (face, i.e.), sharp edge; 
 
 4. front, and so, by synecdoche, troop. 
 
 [so Lat. acies has mgs 3 and 4.] 
 a-nitijna, a. not knowing discreet con- 
 duct, 
 anu, prep, after, along, toward; w. ace. 
 
 along or over ; after, i.e. according to. 
 anugati,/. a going after. [V gam + anu.] 
 an u car a, a. going after; as m. attendant; 
 
 companion. [\l car + anu.] 
 anu- jivin, a. living upon, dependent; as 
 
 m. a dependent. [V jiv + anu.] 
 anu-tta, ppl. see VI da + anu. 
 a-nutta, a. un-moved, i.e. invincible. 
 
 [Vnud.] 
 anuttama, a. most highest; best, most 
 
 excellent; supreme. [lit. 'most best,' 
 
 formal superl. to anuttara, which is itself 
 
 logically a superl.] 
 an-uttara, a. not having a superior, i.e. 
 
 best, [for mg, cf. nihgreyasa.] 
 an-udita, a. not arisen. [Vi + ud.] 
 an-udyoga, m. non-exertion, 
 anunaya, m. conciliation. [Vni + anu.] 
 an-upakarin, a. not doing or unable to 
 
 do a friendly service. 
 
 anu-purva, a. following the one preced- 
 ing, one after another ; -am, adv. in regular 
 
 order. [1310a.] 
 anumati,/. approbation; favor (of gods 
 
 to the pious) ; personified, Grace. [Vman 
 
 + anu.] 
 anumana, n. the forming of a conception. 
 
 [V 1 ma + anu, ' conceive.'] 
 anur a ga, m. affection. [Vraj+anu.] 
 
 anurodha, m. regard. [V 1 rudh + anu.] 
 
 anurodhin, a. having (some) regard for. 
 [V 1 rudh + anu.] 
 
 an-ulbana, a. not lumpy; smooth or per- 
 fect (of a weft). [1288a 4 .] 
 
 anuvrtti, f. sequence, and so, continu- 
 ance. [V vrt + anu.] 
 
 anu-vrata, a. acting according to the 
 will or command (of another), obedient; 
 devoted to, w. ace. [272], 6 16 , 100 4 . [1310a : 
 cf. apavrata.] 
 
 anugaya, m. repentance, [perhaps 'that 
 which lies down after one or follows one 
 to his bed': Vgi +anu.] 
 
 anusthana, n. devotion to, observance. 
 [V stha + anu.] 
 
 anustheya, yrdv. to be accomplished, 
 [see Vstha + anu, and 963a.] 
 
 anusarana, n. a going after, a searching. 
 [V sr + anu.] 
 
 anustarana, a. strewing over, covering 
 over; f. anustaranl (sc. go), a cow, 
 slaughtered at the funeral ceremony, and 
 the pieces of which are used for covering 
 over the corpse, limb by limb. [V str + 
 anu.] 
 
 a n u can a, see 807 and 784. 
 
 an-rta, a. untrue; anrta, n. untruth; 
 wrong, [rta, 1288a.] 
 
 an-eka, a. not one, i.e. more than one; 
 many. 
 
 anekadha, adv. many times. [1104.] 
 
 anekagas, adv. in large numbers. [1106.] 
 
 a-nedya, a. not to be blamed; blame- 
 less, [acct, 1285a.] 
 
 an-enas, a. free from guilt. [enas, 
 1304a.] 
 
 an-omkrta, a. not having om uttered, i.e. 
 unaccompanied by om. [see omkrta.] 
 
 ant a, m. 1. vicinity, proximity; 2. 
 border; limit; end. [see anti: cf. Eng. 
 end.~\ 
 
 antah-pura, n. inner stronghold or 
 citadel; inner apartment of the royal 
 citadel, gynaeceum, harem, 2 21 . [antar, 
 1289a.] 
 
 dntaka, m. ender (death). [anta, 
 1222a.] 
 
 anta-kara, a. end-making; as m. de- 
 stroyer.
 
 [117] 
 
 [anvita 
 
 .4 u tarn a, a. nearest, very near; as m. in- 
 timate, companion, [see anta, mg 1, and 
 474 : cf . Lat. intumus, ' inmost.'] 
 
 antar, adv. inward, inwardly, within; 
 prep., w. loc. : between, among, within ; 
 along with, 78 12 ; cf. Mi, gam, dha. [cf. 
 Lat. inter, 'between.'] 
 
 1 antara, a. very near, only in V. and B. 
 [see anta, mg 1, and 474.] 
 
 2 antara, a. inner; as n. 1. the interior, 
 middle ; jala^antare, in the middle of the 
 water = in the water, 50 7 ; vana^antara- 
 samcarin, wandering in the forest, 49 13 ; 
 
 2. interval see atra; 3. distance be- 
 tween two things; the difference, 29 7 ; 
 
 4. difference, at end of cpds [1302c5]: 
 -antara, that which has a difference 
 of -, i.e. another -, 33 l , 38 12 - 23 , 43 6 ; -5. 
 occasion, juncture, 19 u . [antar: cf. 
 fVTfpa, ' inwards, guts.'] 
 
 antar-atman, m. the in(-dwelling) soul; 
 heart. [1289.] 
 
 antari-ksa, n. the atmosphere, see 92 9 N. 
 [' lying or situate in the middle ' between 
 heaven and earth : antar + ksa : for mg, 
 cf. rb fj.effrjyv, as used of the aerial space 
 traversed by Iris.] 
 
 antariksa-ga, a. moving in the air ; as 
 m. bird, [for mg, cf. khaga.] 
 
 antariksa-loka, m. atmosphere-world 
 [1280b] ; the atmosphere, regarded as a 
 separate world. 
 
 antar-gata, a. gone within, i.e. being 
 within ; hidden. 
 
 antardhana, n. abiding; disappearance; 
 w. i, disappear. [V 1 dha + antar, q.v.] 
 
 a n t a r - 1 a j j a , /. inward shame. [1289. ] 
 
 antar-vedi, a. situate within the sacri- 
 ficial bed ; -di, adv. within the sacrificial 
 spot. [1310a.] 
 
 anti, adv. opposite, in front, before; near. 
 [see anta : cf . avrl, ' opposite,' &vra, ' face 
 to face'; Lat. ante, 'before'; antlcus, 
 'former, ancient'; AS. and-swaru, Eng. 
 an-swer.] 
 
 1 antika, n. neighborhood or presence; 
 used like samipa, q.v. [anti.] 
 
 2 antika, for anta at end of cpds, 1222, 
 1307 ; grahana^antika, having acquisition 
 as its conclusion. 
 
 antima, a. last. [anti, 474: for mg 
 (' endmost "? ), cf. anta 2, and antya.] 
 
 ante-vasfn, m. pupil, [lit. 'abiding in 
 the vicinity,' 1250c.] 
 
 antya, a. being at the end, last; lowest; 
 of lowest caste, [anta.] 
 
 antya-jati, a. having lowest birth. 
 
 antyajatita,yi condition of having low- 
 est birth. [1237.] 
 
 antya-stri, f. woman of lowest caste. 
 
 a iid. ha, a. blind; blinding (of darkness). 
 
 and has, n. darkness, [cf. andha.] 
 
 anna, n. food ; esp. rice, usually boiled, the 
 chief food of the Hindus; grain. [Vad, 
 1177a: cf. eJSap, Lat. esca, *ed-ca, 'food'; 
 ador, ' spelt ' ; AS. dta, Eng. oat.~\ 
 
 anna-pragana, n. rice-feeding, the first 
 feeding of an infant with rice. 
 
 anna-rasa, n. food and drink. [1253b.] 
 
 annavant, a. provided with food, 
 [anna.] 
 
 any a [523], pron. a. another, other, else; 
 anyac ca, and another thing, i.e. again, 
 see ca 3 ; other than, different from, w. abl., 
 3 4 , 24 19 , 68 12 , 104 u ; otiose, 2 12 ; yad an- 
 yat kim cana, whatever else, 9 16 ; anya 
 or eka anya, the one the other, 90 13 , 
 29 8 . [cf. evioi, 'some'; Goth. an-\>ar, 
 'other,' Eng. other, .] 
 
 anyatama, a. one of several, some one. 
 [anya, 525 3 .] 
 
 any at as, adv. from another direction 
 [1098b], otherwise; elsewhere [1098c 3 ], 
 to another place, [anya.] 
 
 any at ha, adv. otherwise, 18 9 ; w. bhu, 
 become otherwise, suffer change, 17 5 ; 
 otherwise than ,it really is, falsely, 35 20 ; 
 otherwise (i.e. if not), 48 8 . [anya.] 
 
 anya-hrada, m. another pool. 
 
 anye-dyus, adv. on the next day. 
 ['altero die': 1250c.] 
 
 anyonya, pron. a. one the other, for 
 any 6 'nya [175a], the first part being a 
 crystallized nom. s. m. [1314c] ; w. value of 
 gen., anyonyam prati hrcchaya = anyas- 
 ya^anyam prati h., love of one towards 
 the other, 2 19 . [see paraspara.] 
 
 an vane [409c], a. directed after, following 
 after, being behind, [ami + anc.] 
 
 anvita, see Vi + anu.
 
 ap] 
 
 [118] 
 
 ap [393], f. plurale tantum. water; waters. 
 
 [unrelated to Lat. aqua, 'water/ Goth. 
 
 ahva, ' stream.'] 
 a p a , prep, away, forth, off ; opp. of lipa, 
 
 see VV i, kr. [cf . air6, Lat. a&, ' from ' ; 
 
 Eng. off", of.] 
 
 apakara, m. injury. [Vlkr + apa.] 
 apakarin, a. injuring, [do.] 
 apacara, m. going off; absence. [Vcar 
 
 + apa.] 
 d-patighni, a. f. not husband-slaying. 
 
 [402 : acct, 1288a.] 
 apatya, n. offspring; child; young (of 
 
 animals), [apa, 'off,' 1245b.] 
 a -pad [391], a. footless. [cf. &iro5-es, 
 
 'halt': 1304a.] 
 a p a b h r a s t a , . fallen off ; deviating ( from 
 
 good grammar) ; provincial. [Vbhrang + 
 
 apa.] 
 ap a ra [525], pron. a. hinder, opp. o/purva ; 
 
 following a former one (purva), 86 13 ; 
 
 later ; westerly, opp. to purva cf. pranc ; 
 
 a following one, i.e. an other ; aparaih ca, 
 
 and another thing, and further, see ca 3 ; 
 
 apari [cf. 355b], f. pi. the future 
 
 (days), the future, [lit. 'remoter,' fr. apa, 
 
 474.] 
 a-paranmukha, a. not having an averted 
 
 face, i.e. not turning the back, 5 19 . 
 a-parajita, a. unconquered; w. dig, the 
 
 northeast quarter, 99 23 N. [Vji.] 
 aparadha, m. sin. [s radh apa.] 
 a-parijata, a. not completely grown (of 
 
 an embryo), i.e. prematurely born, still- 
 born, [see pari-jata and ref.] 
 a-pariniya, grd. without any leading 
 
 around. [VnL] 
 a-parimita, a. unmeasured, unlimited. 
 
 [v/lma.] 
 apa-vrata, a. disobedient; stubborn. 
 
 ['away from command,' 1310a: cf. dnu- 
 
 vrata.] 
 apas, see ap. 
 a p a s , n. work, [perhaps from V *ap, ' reach, 
 
 take hold of see Vap: cf. Lat. opus, 
 
 ' work.'] 
 a pay a, m. a going away; what takes one 
 
 from the mark (cf. upaya) ; danger ; 
 
 disadvantage ; diminution. [Vi + apa, 
 
 1148. la : for mg, cf. Eng. untoward.] 
 
 a -par a, a. boundless, [para: acct, 1304a.] 
 dpi, indecl. unto, close upon or on; 1. 
 prep, to, w. Vgam; 2. adv. (thereto, be- 
 sides, i.e.) further, also; connecting clauses 
 (63 23 ) or words (65 11 ) ; connecting sentences, 
 api ca, and besides, 29 9 , see ca 3 ; api 
 
 api, both and, 54 23 ; % ca api, 
 and, 5 12 , 26 5 ; ca, capi, both and 
 also, 12 1 ;,' caiva, capi, 65 15 ; capi, 
 
 ca, 3 21 , 16"; capi, ca, ca, 16 6 , 
 60 10 ; na , na_api % neither , nor , 
 9 9 ; na , na capi, 22 v - ; na , na , api 
 ca, neither , nor , nor also , 2 12 ; , 
 
 va, va^api, either , or , or even , 
 62 2 ; 3. also, too, immediately following 
 the emphasized word, 6 12 , II 3 , 21 18 , 24 21 ; 
 mam api, me too, 41 20 ; 4. even, imme- 
 diately following the emphasized word, and 
 often marking a circumstance under which a 
 thing is true where this is not to be expected : 
 e.g. 2 13 , 28 7 - 18 , 33 19 ; tatha^api, so even, i.e. 
 nevertheless, 21 u ; concessively, although, 
 29 \ 21", 61 1 ' 6 ; w. na, not even, 19 15 ; w. 
 indefinites, kada cid api na, not ever at 
 all, 31 w , 32 s ; -5. but, immediately follow- 
 ing a new subject, after change of subject, 
 6 15 , 28 21 , 32 22 , 41 .; -6. at least, 
 28 9 ' U ; 7. converts an interr. into an indef. 
 [507]; so ka, 17 n , etc.; katham, 51 *. 
 [cf . M, ' on, upon ' ; perhaps Lat. op-, ob-, 
 'unto, on.'] 
 
 a-pidayant, a. non-oppressing. [Vpid.] 
 
 a-purv4, a. having no predecessor; un- 
 precedented ; incomparable. [purva : 
 acct, 1304a.] 
 
 apeksa,/ regard; expectation. [Viks + 
 apa.] 
 
 a-praja, a. having no offspring, childless, 
 [praja, 367b.] 
 
 a-prajnata, a. undistinguished or not 
 clearly to be known. [Vjna.] 
 
 a-pratarkya, a. un-imaginable. 
 
 a-pratima, a. without match or equal; 
 unequalled, [pratima, 367b.] 
 
 a -prat it a, a. not gone against; not with- 
 stood; invincible. [Vi + prati.] 
 
 a-pratta, a. not given (in marriage). 
 [Vlda + pra, 1087e.] 
 
 a-prayucchant, a. not heedless; watch- 
 ful. [V2 yu + pra, q.v.]
 
 [119] 
 
 [amimarisya 
 
 a-priya, a. not dear; disliked; disagree- 
 able. 
 
 apsaras,yi one of a class of semi-divine 
 beings, wires of the Gandharvas ; an Ap- 
 saras, 67 12 N. [1151. 2d.] 
 
 a-buddhimant, a. unwise; foolish. 
 
 abda, m. lit. water-giving; (then, perhaps, 
 rainy season, and so) year, [ap + da, but 
 w. irreg. acct, 1269 : for rag, see varsa.] 
 
 a-bhaksya, a. not to be eaten; as n. 
 that which ought not to be eaten. 
 
 a-bhaya, a. dangerless ; as n. safety; 
 feeling of safety; superl. greatest safety. 
 [bhaya: acct, 1304a 2 .] 
 
 a-bhava, m. non-existence; absence; lack. 
 
 a-bhavin, a. not about to be, not destined 
 to be. 
 
 abhi, adv. to, unto; against; frequent as 
 vbl prefix ; as prep, unto, w. ace. [cf . a/*4>/, 
 ' around ' ; Lat. ambi-, amb-, ' on both sides, 
 around ' ; AS. ymbe, Ger. um, ' around ' ; 
 for mg, cf. abhitas.] 
 
 abhijna, a. knowing, acquainted with. 
 [Vjfia + abhi, 333.] 
 
 abhitas, adv. on both sides; on all sides, 
 101 10 ; around ; near, [abhi.] 
 
 abhidroha, m. offense. [Vdruh + abhi.] 
 
 abhidha,/. name ; cf. akhya. [V 1 dha + 
 abhi, q.v.] 
 
 abhidhana, n. name; designation, [do.] 
 
 abhidhyana, n. the thinking upon. 
 [Vdhya + abhi.] 
 
 abhinivega, m. inclination towards. 
 [Vvig + abhi-ni.] 
 
 abhibhasin, a. addressing. [\fbhas + 
 abhi, 1183 3 .] 
 
 abhibhuti,/. superiority; as a. [1157.2], 
 superior. [V bhu + abhi.] 
 
 abhibhuty-ojas, a. having superior 
 might. 
 
 abhimati,/! hostile plot; concrete, plot- 
 ter, foe. [Vman + abhi, 1157. Id : a 
 irreg.'] 
 
 abhi-mukha, a. having the face towards ; 
 facing ; turned towards. [1305.] 
 
 abhivada, m. salutation; at 60 22 , signifi- 
 cation. [Vvad + abhi.] 
 
 abhivadana, n. salutation, [do.] 
 
 abhivadin, a. signifying, [do.] 
 
 abhivadya, grdv. to be saluted, [do.] 
 
 abhi-giras, a. having the head towards, 
 
 w. ace. [1305.] 
 
 a-bhita, a. fearless; -vat [1107], fear- 
 lessly, 
 abhipsu, a. desirous of obtaining, w. ace. 
 
 [s/ap + abhi, 1178f, 1038.] 
 abhy-adhika, a. additional; more, 
 abhy-antara, a. situated in the inside 
 
 [1310a]; as n. interior ; interval, 
 abhy-atma, a. directed towards one's 
 
 self [1310a] ; -am, adv. towards one's 
 
 self [ISlOd]. 
 
 abhyasa, m. study. [V 2 as + abhi, q.v.] 
 abhra, n. rain-cloud, [cf. o/j.Bpos, 'rain'; 
 
 Lat. imber, ' rain ' : cf . ambhas and ambu, 
 
 ' water.'] 
 
 abhravakagika, a. (having, i.e.) afford- 
 ing an opportunity for the rain, exposing 
 
 one's self to the rain, [abhra + avakaga, 
 
 1307.] 
 V am (amiti [634] ; ame; amayati). press 
 
 on violently; harm; cans. [1041 2 ], harm; 
 
 be sick. [cf. ansa.] 
 
 a ma, pron. this; he. [503*: cf. ama.l 
 a-mantii, a. without intention, [mantu: 
 
 1304a.] 
 a-mara, a. deathless; immortal; as m. an 
 
 immortal, a god; -vat [1107], adv. like a 
 
 god. [mara: 1304a !! end.] 
 amarottama, a. chief of gods. [uttama.J 
 amaropama, a. like a god. [upama, 
 
 367b.] 
 
 a-martya, a. immortal, 
 a-marsa, m. non-endurance; impatience; 
 
 anger. 
 
 a-mahatman, a. not high-minded, 
 a ma, adv. at home, chez soi; ama kr, keep 
 
 by one. [ama, 1112a and e.] 
 amatya, m. inmate of the same house, 
 
 relative, [ama, 1245b.] 
 a-maya,,/! no guile; sincerity, 
 ama-vasa, m. a dwelling (of the moon) 
 
 at home (i.e. with the sun). 
 amavasya, a. of amavasa ; f. -a, w. or 
 
 without ratri, the night of amavasa, i.e. 
 
 night of new moon. [1212d4.] 
 a-mithuna, a. not forming pairs (of both 
 
 sexes). 
 a-mimansya, a. not to be called in 
 
 question.
 
 amiva] 
 
 [120] 
 
 am iv, a, n., but generally -a, f. plague, dis- 
 tress ; as m. tormenting spirit. [V am.] 
 
 amlva-catana, /. -I, a. driving away 
 disease. [1271.] 
 
 amiva-han [402], a. slaying the torment- 
 ing spirits. 
 
 a mil, pron. root, see adas. [503 2 .] 
 
 a m u t a s , adv. from there, opp. of itas ; 
 there, [amu.] 
 
 amiitra, adv. there; in the other world, 
 opp. of iha or asnxin (loke). [amii.] 
 
 amuya, adv. so. [amii, 1112a, e end.] 
 
 a-mfta, a. immortal; as subst. an immor- 
 tal; as n. immortality; the drink of im- 
 mortality, apfrpoffia. ['not dead,' mrta, 
 1284a : cf . &-fj.&poTos, ' immortal.'] 
 
 amrtatva, n. immortality, [amrta.] 
 
 ambara, n. garment; sky. [prob. 'cover- 
 ing, envelope,' Vlvr + anu, for an(u)- 
 vara: cf. adbhuta.] 
 
 ambu, n. water, [see abhra.] 
 
 ambu-ja, a. water-born; as n. lotus. 
 
 ambhas, n. water, [see abhra.] 
 
 ay a, a. subst. going, a going. [Vi, 1148. lab.] 
 
 ay ana, n. a going; place of going, way; 
 course; esp. course (of the sun from one 
 solstice to the other), i.e. half-year. [Vi, 
 1150. la.] 
 
 ay as, n. metal; iron. [cf. Old Lat. ais, 
 gen. ais-is, Lat. aes, ' metal, bronze ' ; AS. 
 dr, 'bronze/ Eng. ore; perhaps AS. tsern, 
 iren, Eng. iron, ' f errum, f erreus.'] 
 
 ayasmaya, a. iron, [see maya.] 
 
 a-yiij, a. not paired; in uneven numbers, 
 [cf. S-fv|, 'unyoked.'] 
 
 a-yuj a, a. not paired, uneven, [cf. &-vyos, 
 'unpaired'; also vya t> &Cvya, the game 
 ' even or odd.'] 
 
 a-yuddha, n. no fight. [1288a.] 
 
 a-yoddhf.m. non-fighter, coward. [1288a 4 .] 
 
 ara, m. spoke, [vfr, caus. 'fit in.'] 
 
 arana, a. distant, strange. 
 
 a r a n i , f. piece of wood for kindling fire 
 by attrition. 
 
 aranya, n. wilderness, forest, ['strange 
 land,' fr. arana.] 
 
 aranya-rajya, n. forest-sovereignty. 
 
 aranya-vasin, a. dwelling in the forest. 
 
 aranyani, / wilderness, [aranya, cf. 
 1223b.] 
 
 a -rap as, a. without infirmity; whole, 
 [rapaa, 1304a.] 
 
 aram, adv. so as to fit or suit, ready, at 
 hand, enough; w. kr, make ready, serve, 
 79 2 ; w. gam, attend upon. [adv. ace. of 
 ara, Vr, lllld: cf. alam.j 
 
 a-rati, f. non-favor; malignity; personi- 
 fied, pi., malign hags, [acct, 1288a.] 
 
 arf [343d], a. 1. eager, esp. in one's re- 
 lations to the gods, and so, pious; 2. 
 greedy; 3. hostile; as m. enemy. [\/r, 
 ' go for ' : cf . arya.] 
 
 a-riata, a. unharmed. [Vris: acct, 1284.] 
 
 aristatati, f. unharmedness, health, 
 [ariata, 1238.] 
 
 aruna, a. ruddy; as m. Aruna, name of a 
 teacher, 95 u . [cf. aruaa.] 
 
 a-rundhatf,/ Arundhati, name of the 
 faint star Alkor in Ursa Major, conceived 
 as consort of the Seven Rishis. [ V rudh, 
 691 : acct, 1283a.] 
 
 aruaa,/. arual, a. ruddy, [see 362b 2 : cf. 
 aruna.] 
 
 are, word of address. Ah! [voc. of ari, 
 1135c : cf. re.] 
 
 a-roga, a. not having disease, diseaseless. 
 
 arka, m. the sun. [<Jrc, 21(3.1.] 
 
 argha, m. worth, price. [\/arh.] 
 
 arghya, a. of price or that may be priced, 
 [argha, 1212.] 
 
 \1 arc, see Vrc. 
 
 arcis, n. flame. [Vrc, 1153.] 
 
 V arj , see V2rj. 
 
 arjana, n. acquisition. [V2rj, 'get.'] 
 
 arjuna, a. silver-white. [V3rj, q.v.] 
 
 art ha, m. 1. aim, object, purpose, er- 
 rand, sake; artham and arthe [1302c4], 
 for the sake of, on account of, for, esp. 
 frequent at end of cpds ; 2. (object, i.e.) 
 thing, matter, affair, cause, business ; 3. 
 (object, i.e.) advantage, profit (w. instr.), 
 wealth, property; 4. aim, intent, mean- 
 ing, 59 15 . ['that which one goes for,' Vr, 
 1163.] 
 
 artha-tattva, n. true state of the mat- 
 ter or case. 
 
 \f art hay a (arthayate, -ti). seek for an 
 object, [artha, 1067.] 
 a bhi, ask, entreat. 
 + p r a , desire, sue for.
 
 [121] 
 
 [avasana 
 
 artha rj ana, n. acquisition of an object, 
 [arjana.] 
 
 art hin, a. having an object, desiring, 
 seeking; (begging, i.e.) needy, [artha.] 
 
 arthya, a. wealthy, [artha.] 
 
 ardha, a. half; as m. the half. 
 
 ardharca, m. half -stanza, [ardha + rca.] 
 
 ardhika, a. amounting to half, [ardha.] 
 
 arpana, n. the sending, consignment, en- 
 trusting, [caus. of Vr.] 
 
 arbuda, n. a hundred millions. 
 
 arbuda-gikhara, m. Million-peaks, 
 name of a mountain. 
 
 arya, a. faithful; attached, kindly, 79 3 . 
 [' going eagerly to,' Vr : cf. arya.] 
 
 arya man [426a], m. bosom-friend, esp. a 
 bridegroom's friend, irapavvfj.<t>ios ; Arya- 
 man, name of an Aditya (invoked at the 
 wedding, and often with play upon the 
 appellative mg of the word), [arya.] 
 
 arvak-kalika, a. belonging to hither 
 or nearer time, posterior ; -ta, f. posteri- 
 ority, [arvanc (1249a) + kala, 1222c2.] 
 
 arvanc [409a], a. directed hitherwards; 
 w. kr, bring hither ; w. nud, thrust hither, 
 i.e. downwards. 
 
 V arh (arhati, -te; arhayati). deserve; 
 have a right to ; w. inf., be able ; w. inf., 
 as a weak imperative, 7 17 ; caus. give a 
 right to, present with. 
 
 arha, a. deserving; worthy; fit. [Varh.] 
 
 a-laksana, a. without any characteristic 
 mark ; without special mark, i.e. plain, 
 unornamented. [laksana.] 
 
 a-laksita, a. unnoticed. [Vlaksaya.] 
 
 a-labhamana, a. not catching. 
 
 a 1 a m , adv. enough ; sometimes equiv, to an 
 adj., adequate, fitting, ready; w. instr. 
 enough with, have done with ; w. Rr, 
 make ready, adorn ; sv-alamkrta, well 
 adorned; sam-alamkrta, well (samz'ntens., 
 1077b) adorned, [later form of aram.] 
 
 a-lavana, a. not salt. 
 
 a-lasa, a. not lively; without energy; 
 slothful; tired. 
 
 a-lobha, m. non-greed; absence of cu- 
 pidity. 
 
 alpa, a. small. 
 
 alpa-dhi, a. small-minded, of small in- 
 telligence. 
 
 alpagas, adv. to a small degree, [alpa.] 
 
 V av (avati ; ava; avit; avisyati; uta; 
 -avya). 1. set a-going; 2. further, 
 favor, wish well ; 3. refresh ; 4. have 
 pleasure in (ace.), [cf. Lat. avere, 'have 
 pleasure in,' ave, ' hail.'] 
 + p r a , show forth favor ; then, be atten- 
 tive or heedful (as, conversely, in Eng. at- 
 tention Aas come to mean ' act of kindness 
 or courtesy'). 
 
 ava, vU prefix, down; off. 
 
 avaka, f. grassy swamp-plant, Blyxa 
 octandra Richard. 
 
 avakaga, m. 1. open place; 2. (place, 
 and so) opportunity. [Vka t- ava.] 
 
 avajna, f. contempt. [Vjfia I- ava : for 
 mg, cf . avamana.] 
 
 avatar a, m. descent, esp. of supernatural 
 beings to the earth ; an epiphany ; in- 
 carnation, Anglo-Indian avatar. [Vtr + 
 ava.] 
 
 avatta, see 1087e. 
 
 avadana, n. cutting off. [V2da + ava.] 
 
 a-vadya, a. un-praiseworthy ; as n. imper- 
 fection. [1285.] 
 
 V avadhiraya (avadhlrayati). despise; 
 reject. 
 
 a-vadhya, a. not to be harmed, inviola- 
 ble, [vadhya, 1285.] 
 
 avadhya-bhava, m. inviolability, 35 21 . 
 
 avanata-kaya, a. with bent down body, 
 34 17 . [Vnam.] 
 
 avamana, m. contempt; self-contempt, 
 50 u . [Vman + ava : for mg, cf. avajna.] 
 
 avalambitavya, grdv. to be held on to. 
 [V lamb + ava.] 
 
 a-vaga, a. not willing or submissive; un- 
 controlled, [vaga: acct, 1288a 4 .] 
 
 avagyam, adv. necessarily, surely, [fr. 
 an unused adj. a-vaya, 'unyielding.'] 
 
 avas, n. furtherance ; grace. [\/av.] 
 
 avas, adv. downwards; w. abl. [1128], down 
 from. [cf. ava.] 
 
 a v a s a , n. refreshment, nourishment. [V av, 
 mg3.] 
 
 avasara, m. occasion. [Vsr + ava: for 
 mg, cf. Lat. casus, ' occasion,' w. cadcre, 
 ' fall,' and Ger. Fall, ' case, instance,' w. 
 fallen, 'fall.'] 
 
 avasana, n. place of rest. [^Jsa + ava.]
 
 avastha] 
 
 [122] 
 
 avastha, f. state, condition. [V stha - 
 ava t for mg, cf. Lat. status w. stare.'] 
 
 a-vahant, a. not flowing, standing. 
 [V vah, mg 4.] 
 
 a-vacya, a. not to be spoken to. 
 
 4 vane [409a], a. directed downwards; ace. 
 s. n. avak, adv. downwards, in depth. 
 
 avi, m. sheep; as f. ewe. [cf. 6is, *uFis, 
 Lat. ovis, ' sheep ' ; Eng. ewe.'} 
 
 a-vicchindant, a. not severing. [Vchid.] 
 
 a-vicchinna, a. not severed, continuous, 
 [do.] 
 
 a-vijnaya,gfrc?. without discerning. [Vjna.] 
 
 a-vijneya, a. unknowable, [do.] 
 
 a-vidasin, a. not drying up, perennial. 
 [Vdas.] 
 
 a-vidvans, a. unwise; as TO. fool, [acct, 
 1288a.] 
 
 a-vidhava, f. not widow, [vidhava: 
 acct, 1288a 4 .] 
 
 a-vidhanatas, adv. not according to 
 regulation. 
 
 a-vipluta, a. not dishonored; unsullied. 
 [Vplu + vi, q.v.] 
 
 a-viveka, a. without discrimination. 
 
 avivekata,/ lack of judgment. [1237.] 
 
 a-viganka, a. without hesitation, unhesi- 
 tating, [viganka, 334 2 , 1304a.] 
 
 a-visaya, m. a non-province; something 
 out of one's line or that one has no busi- 
 ness to do ; unlawful thing. 
 
 a-vrka, a. not harmful; -am, adv. harm- 
 lessly, lovingly, [vf ka : acct, 1288a *.] 
 
 aveksa, /. a looking around. [Viks + 
 ava, 1149 3 .] 
 
 a-vyakta, a. not manifest; as TO. The 
 All-soul, 67". [Vanj.] 
 
 a-vyaya, a. imperishable; not subject to 
 change; unbroken. [1288a.] 
 
 V lag, orig. ang (agn6ti, agnute ; ananca, 
 anag [788 4 ] ; asta ; asti ; agitum). 
 reach ; attain ; obtain, get. [cf . iroS-Tji/e/c- 
 fis, ' reaching to the feet ' ; tfy-ryK-a, ' car- 
 ried': see also the closely related V2nag.] 
 + upa, attain to. 
 
 \f 2ag (agnati; aga; agit; agisyati; agi- 
 ta; agitum ; agitva ; -agya). partake of ; 
 taste ; eat. [a specialization of V 1 ag : 
 cf. &K-O\OS, 'bit': for mg, cf. bhaks.] 
 + pra, partake of; cas. feed. 
 
 1 a-gaknuvant, a. not being able. [Vgak.] 
 
 a-gakya, a. impossible. 
 
 a-ganka, a. without hesitation, [ganka: 
 cf. aviganka.] 
 
 agana, n. food. [V2ag.] 
 
 a-guci, a. impure. 
 
 a-gabha, a. disagreeable. 
 
 a-geva, a. not dear; hostile. [geva: 
 acct, 1288a,] 
 
 a-gesa, a. without remainder, entire; -tas, 
 adv. entirely, without exception. 
 
 a g man, TO. 1. stone; 2. thunderbolt; 
 3. vault of heaven, 79 9 . [cf. aK^iav, 
 ' anvil, thunderbolt ' ; kinship w. Eng. 
 hammer uncertain.] 
 
 agmanvant, a. stony, [agman.] 
 
 agru, n. tear. 
 
 a g v a , TO. horse ; agva, f. mare, steed, [cf . 
 TTTTTOS-, dialectic IKKOS, Lat. equus, Old Saxon 
 ehu, AS. eh, eoh, ' horse.'] 
 
 agva-kovida, a. well skilled in horses. 
 
 agva-medha, TO. horse-sacrifice. 
 
 agvin, a. horsed; as dual m. the A9vins, 
 gods of the morning light, 85 15 N. [agva.] 
 
 agvya, a. consisting of horses ; of a horse, 
 [agva : cf. 'hnrios, ' of a horse.'] 
 
 ast [483 3 ], num. eight, [cf. OKT<!>, Lat. 
 octo, AS. eahta, Eng. eight.] 
 
 a s t a md, a. eighth, [asta, 487 8 .] 
 
 asta-vidha, a. of eight sorts; eight-fold, 
 [vidha, 1302c 5.] 
 
 astanga, n. eight members. [anga, 
 1312.] 
 
 astanga-pata, TO. a fall on eight mem- 
 bers/ i.e. on hands, knees, feet, breast, 
 and face, i.e. a most profound obeisance. 
 
 asti,/^ attainment. [Vlag.] 
 
 V las (asti [636]; asa). -1. be, exist; be 
 present or on hand; take place, happen; 
 asti, asit, there is, there was, very frequent 
 at beg. of stories ; 2. be, w. predicate pos- 
 sessive gen., i.e. belong to; asti mama, 
 I have ; observe that Skt. has no verb for 
 ' have ' ; 3. most frequent as simple copula ; 
 further, w. ppls: e.g. prapto 'si, art thou 
 come, didst thou come, 9 1 ; hantavyo ' smi, 
 occidendus sum, 3 2 ; gepano 'smi, I have 
 sworn, 97 7 ; redundantly [303b 4 end] : e.g. 
 tatha^anusthite sati, it being thus per- 
 formed, 35"; so 37 13 , 39 16 - M ; prahrstah
 
 [123] 
 
 [ahata 
 
 san, being pleased, 48 12 ; 4. w. advs : 
 tusnim asit, kept silent; evam astu, so 
 be it ; w. pradus, see s.v. ; 5. become, 
 96 19 . [w. as-ti, s-anti, ' is, are,' cf . ftr-n, 
 ' is, exists,' fieri, Doric tv-ri, *'ivTi, ' are,' 
 Lat. es-t, s-unt, AS. is, #is-t, s-ind, ' is, are,' 
 Eng. is ; cognate are a-m, ar-t, are.] 
 
 \1 2 as (asyati, -te ; asa ; asisyati ; asta; 
 asitum ; asitva ; -asya). throw, cast, 
 shoot ; throw aside, [cf . asf, ' the bran- 
 dished ' sword j Lat. ensis, ' sword ' ; dlea, 
 *aslea, 'die,' like Ger. Wiirfel, 'die,' fr. 
 werfen, ' throw.'] 
 + vy-ati, throw over, cross. 
 + abhi, throw (one's self) upon, direct 
 (one's attention) to, study, [for rag, cf. 
 irpoaf^eiv without rbv vovv.~\ 
 + ni, throw down; deposit; commit. 
 + pari-ni, throw down over, stretch 
 over. 
 
 + nis, throw out; root out; destroy. 
 + vi, 1. cast asunder; cast or throw 
 away ; 2. break in pieces, 70 14 . 
 + s a m , cast or put together. 
 
 a-samhradayant, a. not causing to 
 rattle, [Vhrad.] 
 
 a-satyasamdha, a. unfaithful, treach- 
 erous. 
 
 a-sant, a. non-existing; as n. non-exist- 
 ence. 
 
 a-sapinda, a. related more distantly than 
 in the sixth generation, see sapinda. 
 
 a-samartha, a. unable. 
 
 a-sampatti,/. non-success. 
 
 a-sambaddha, a. un-connected, in-coher- 
 ent, w. same fig. mg as in Eng. [s/bandh.] 
 
 a-sambandha, a. not having relation- 
 ship. 
 
 a-sambhavya, a. unsupposable, impos- 
 sible. 
 
 a -sail a, a. impatient. 
 
 asu, m. vital spirit; vigorous life. [VI as.] 
 
 a-sutfp, a. insatiable. [1288a 4 .] 
 
 asu-tfp, a. life-robbing, [vbl of V2trp.] 
 
 asu-nlti, f. the leading or continuing of 
 life (in the other world); spirit-life; spirit- 
 world, [acct, 1274.] 
 
 a-sunva, a. not pressing (Soma), i.e. 
 indifferent to the gods, godless. [see 
 1148. 3b and 716.] 
 
 a sura, 1. a. spiritual (used of the gods, 
 and designating esp. the difference be- 
 tween celestial and mundane existence) ; 
 
 2. as m. a spirit of life, a god; asura 
 adeva, spirit that is no god, demon, 82 6 ; 
 
 3. later, demon (45 6 ), enemy of the 
 gods, an Asura, a not-god (as if the word 
 were a-sura whence, by popular ety- 
 mology, the pendant sura, 'god'), [asu- 
 ra, 1226 (cf. 1188f), and as-u fr. VI as, 
 1178b.] 
 
 asurya, a. godlike; as n. pi. godhead. 
 
 [asura, 1212d4.] 
 
 V asuya (asuyati). be impatient, 
 asuya,/. impatience. [Vasuya, 1149 6 .] 
 asrj [432], n. blood, 24 22 . [cf. Cyprian tap, 
 
 ' blood.'] 
 
 a sail, see 501 and adas. 
 asta, n. home; astam, w. i, gam, ya, go 
 
 home ; esp. of the sun [see 1092b], set. 
 
 [prob. V 1 as : for mg, cf . bhavana.] 
 asta-mauna, a. having thrown aside or 
 
 abandoned silence. [V2as.] 
 a,sii,f. being. [Vlas.] 
 asthan [431], n. bone. [cf. oareov, Lat 
 
 stem ossi-, *osti-, nom. os, ' bone.'] 
 a-sthavara, a. not standing, 
 asthi, see asthan. 
 
 a-sprgant, a. not touching. [Vsprg.] 
 as ma [494], prow. stem, we, us. [cf. rjfj.f'is, 
 
 Lesbian &fj.fj.es, 'we.'] 
 as mad, as stem in cpds [494], our; as pi. 
 
 majestaticus, my. 
 
 asmaka, a. of us; our. [asma, 516 4 .] 
 a-svapant, a. not sleeping. [Vsvap.] 
 a-svastha, a. not well, ill; not self-con- 
 tained, not master of one's self. 
 a-sveda, a. free from sweat. 
 V ah (attha, aha, ahathus, -tus, ahus 
 
 [801a]). say; call; ahus, they say. [cf. 
 
 Lat. aio, ' say,' ad-ag-ium, ' saw, proverb,' 
 
 nego, ' say no.'] 
 
 + pra, declare to be. 
 
 1 aha, assev. particle, certainly, of course; 
 namely, [pron. root a: cf. 1104 3 end.] 
 
 2 aha, for ahan in cpds. [1209a, 1315a.] 
 a-hata, a. 1. not beaten; 2. (since 
 
 Hindu washermen wet the clothes and 
 pound them with stones) unwashed, of a 
 garment, i.e. new. [Vhan.]
 
 ahan] 
 
 [124] 
 
 ahan, ahar, ahas [430a], n. day (as opp. 
 to night), e.g. 92 16 ; day. 
 
 a ham [491], pron. I. [cf. ly&, Lat. ego, 
 AS. ic, Eng. /: see 491 and ma etc.] 
 
 ahar, see ahan. 
 
 ahar-niga, n. day and night, wx^rifj-fpov ; 
 -am, adv. constantly, [niqa : 1253b.] 
 
 ahaly a, / Ahalya, Gautama's wife. 
 
 ahas, see ahan. 
 
 a-hasta, a. handless. [hasta, 1304a.] 
 
 ahaha, excl. of joy or sorrow. [1135a.] 
 
 a-harya, a. not liable to be stolen. 
 
 aharyatva, n. non-liability to be stolen. 
 [1239.] 
 
 a hi, m. serpent; esp. the dragon of the sky, 
 often identified w. the demon Vritra. [see 
 under agha : cf . ex is > I>at. anguis, ' ser- 
 pent ' ; fjx f ^ vs > ^ a *' anguilla, ' eel.'] 
 
 a-hinsa,/. non-injuring (any creature). 
 
 ahi-gopa [352], a. having the dragon as 
 their keeper. [1302 *.] 
 
 ahivat, adv. as a dragon. [1107.] 
 
 ahi-hatya, n. the slaying of the dragon; 
 the (victorious) fight with the dragon, 
 [acct, 1272a, 1213c.] 
 
 a-hrnana, a. not being angry. [V2hr.] 
 
 aho, excl. of astonishment, pleasant or un- 
 pleasant. [1135a : euphony, 138f.] 
 
 aho-ratra, n. day and night, vu 
 [ahas + ratri, 1253b : see ratra.] 
 
 a, adv. 1. hither, unto, as prefix w. verbs 
 of motion ; 2. conjunctively, thereto, be- 
 sides ; ca a, both and, 85 5 ; 3. as- 
 severatively, (up to, i.e.) quite, entirely, 
 73 *; 4. as prep., w. abl.: hither from, 
 all the way from ; ana* then [293c], all the 
 way to, until, 49 13 , 64", 103 M , 105 6 , 106 2 ; 
 as far as, 105 10 . [cf . Lat. a, ' from,' which 
 is not akin w. ab, 'from.'] 
 
 akara, m. 1. accumulation, abundance ; 
 2. mine. [V3kr + a, q.v.] 
 
 V akarnaya (akarnayati ; akarnita ; 
 akarnya). listen; give ear to; hear, 
 [denom. fr. the possessive adj. *akarna, 
 ' having the ear to, i.e. listening.'] 
 
 akarsaka, a. attractive; f. -ika 
 [1222d], Pleasanton, as name of a town. 
 [Vkrs + a.] 
 
 akarsikakhya, a. having the name 
 
 akarsika. [akhya.] 
 akara, m. make ; shape ; appearance. 
 
 [V 1 kr + a : cf . akrti.] 
 akaravant, a. like the Eng. shapely. 
 
 [akara.] 
 akaga, m Veda, m.; later, n. free or open 
 
 space; sky. [prop, 'outlook, clearness,' 
 
 Vkag + a.] 
 akula, a. 1. bestrewn, covered, filled; 
 
 2. fig. confused ; agitated. [V3kr + a, 
 
 q.v.] 
 V akulaya (akulayati). confuse; aku- 
 
 lita, at one's wit's end. [akula.] 
 ak ut a, n. intention. [Vku + a.] 
 akrti, f. make ; shape ; appearance. 
 
 [V 1 kr + a, 1157. Id : cf. akara.] 
 akhu, m. mold-warp ; mouse, ['burrower,' 
 
 Vkha + a, 1178a end.] 
 akhya, f. name; at end ofcpds, having 
 
 as name. [Vkhya + a.] 
 akhyana, n. tale. [Vkhya + a, 1150.] 
 agantavya, grdv. seeVgam T a. 
 agantu, m. arrival; and so, as in Eng., 
 
 person arriving. [V gam + a, 1161.] 
 a g a m a n a , n. a coming hither ; w. punar, 
 
 a returning. [V gam + a.] 
 a gas, n. sin. [orig., perhaps, 'a slip,' 
 
 V afij : cf . &yos, ' guilt ' : different is ayos, 
 
 aghrni, a. glowing, beaming. [V2ghr, 
 
 'glow/ -fa, 1158.] 
 angirasa, a. descended from Angiras. 
 
 [angiras, 1208a.] 
 acamana, n. the rmsing of the mouth. 
 
 [V cam -f a.] 
 acamaniya, m. dish for use in rinsing 
 
 the mouth, [acamana, 1215.] 
 a car a, m. walk and conversation; conduct; 
 
 usage ; observance. [V car + a.] 
 a car y a, m. teacher, esp. of the Veda. 
 
 [perhaps, ' the man of observances,' fr. 
 
 acara, 1212d 4.] 
 ajar as am, adv. to old age. [from the 
 
 phrase a jaras-am.] 
 ajarasaya, adv. to old age. [dat. (1113) 
 
 formed fr. the preceding, as if that were 
 
 ace. of ajarasa.] 
 aji, m. race; contest; battle. [Vaj, 1155. 
 
 cf. ay-wv, 'contest.']
 
 [125] 
 
 [Vap 
 
 & j n a , /. order ; command. [V jna + a.] 
 ajya, n. clarified butter (for anointing, 
 
 etc.); cf. ghrta. [Vanj fa, see 100 20 : 
 
 for mg, cf . Eng. noun smear, ' ointment,' 
 
 and verb smear.] 
 ajya-gesa, m. n. rest of the clarified 
 
 butter, 
 ajyahuti,/. oblation of clarified butter. 
 
 [ahuti.] 
 anjana, n. ointment. [Vanj + a: cf. Lat. 
 
 unguen, ' ointment.'] 
 adhya, a. wealthy; rich, [perhaps fr. 
 
 arthya.] 
 at, adv. thereupon; ad Id, then indeed. 
 
 [lit. 'from that,' abl. of a, 1114a.] 
 atithya, n. hospitality, [atithi, 'guest,' 
 
 1211.] 
 
 a t m a , for atman in cpds, 1249a 2 . 
 atmaka, for atman in mg 4 at end of cpds 
 
 [1222, 1307]; e.g. mara^atmaka, murder- 
 
 natured, murderous, 
 atman, m. 1. breath; 2. spirit; soul 
 
 (cf. 84 8 N.), as principle of life and feeling; 
 
 3. self ; very often so used as a simple 
 reflexive pron. [514] ; e.g., myself, 36 16 ; 
 thyself, 26 15 ; himself, 4 19 ; in genitive: 
 his, 17 16 ; her, 46 5 ; one's own, 21 18 , 58 22 ; 
 
 4. nature, character, peculiarity; esp. 
 at end of cpds, see atmaka ; 5. the 
 soul KO.T Qoxfy, the soul of the uni- 
 verse, 66 8 . [cf. a.vT/j.j)v, 'breath'; ar/j.6s, 
 ' vapor ' ; AS. wj>m, seftm, ' breath ' : for 
 mg, cf. irvtvfia and Lat. anima, 'breath, 
 spirit.'] 
 
 atma-paksa, m. one's own party. 
 
 atma-prabha, a. having his or their 
 own splendor, [prabha, 354.] 
 
 atma-bhava, m. the coming into exist- 
 ence of one's self. 
 
 atma-mansa, n. one's own flesh. 
 
 atmavat, adv. as one's self, [atma, i.e. 
 atman : 1107.] 
 
 atma-gakti, /. one's own power. 
 
 atma-gonita, n. one's own blood. 
 
 atma-samdeha, m. danger of one's self, 
 personal risk. 
 
 atma-hita, n. one's own welfare. 
 
 atmaupamya, n. likeness to one's self, 
 i.e. a putting one's self in another's place. 
 [aupamya.J 
 
 adara, m. respect, notice, care. [V2dr + 
 a, 'regard.'] 
 
 a cl ah an a, n. burning-place, place of cre- 
 mation. [V dah + a.] 
 
 ad ana, n. receiving. [Vlda + a, 'take,' 
 1150.] 
 
 adi, m. 1. in-ception, beginning, 60 8 ; 
 adim adatte, he makes a beginning; adav 
 eva, just before, just now; 2. esp. at end 
 of adj. cpds [see 1302c 1] : -adi, having 
 as the beginning, i.e. and so forth ; 
 or, the qualified noun being omitted, and 
 the adj. cpd being used as subst., and 
 so forth. [undoubtedly f r. V 1 da + a, 
 'take,' 'a taking hold of, i.e. beginning,' 
 1155. 2e: for mg, cf. Lat. in-cipere, Ger. 
 an-fangen, ' take hold of, begin.'] 
 
 adika, equiv. to adi in use 2. [1222, 1307.] 
 
 ad it y a, m. 1. son of Aditi, name ap- 
 plied to the gods of the heavenly light, 
 Varuna, Mitra, Aryaman, etc. ; 2. Adit- 
 ya, name of the sun-god, son of Aditi ; 
 the sun. [aditi, 1211.] 
 
 ad in, a. eating, devouring. [Vad, 1183 3 .] 
 
 adevana, n. gambling-place, 98 ' 3 . [VI diy , 
 ' play,' + a.] 
 
 adya, a. first; equiv. to adi in use 2. [adi, 
 1211.] 
 
 adhipatya, n. sovereignty, [adhipati, 
 1211 2 end.] 
 
 adhrsya, grdv. to be ventured against; 
 approachable. [Vdhrs + a, 963d.] 
 
 adheya, n. a placing, esp. of the sacred 
 fire. [V 1 dha + a, ' put,' 1213c.] 
 
 adhvaryava, n. service of sacrificing 
 priest, [adhvaryii, 1208c.] 
 
 anaduha, a. of a bull, taurine. [anaduh, 
 weak form of anadvah, 404 ; 1208a.] 
 
 anana, n. mouth; face. [prop, 'the 
 breather,' Van: cf. fyea-, 'face,' in irpoff- 
 i)vi)s and air-rivfjs, ' with face turned to- 
 wards,' ' with face averted ' : for mg, cf . 
 nay an a.] 
 
 V ap (apn6ti; apa ; apat ; apsyati ; apta ; 
 aptnm ; aptva ; -apya ; apyate ; ipsati 
 [1030]; apayati). reach; win; get; 
 bring upon one's self; apta: 1. having 
 reached ; extending over ; and so, ade- 
 quate, suitable, fit; 2. having reached, 
 i.e. being near or intimate, and so, as m.,
 
 apana] 
 
 [126] 
 
 a friend; Ipsita, whom or what one 
 
 desires to obtain, sought for, desired. 
 
 [prob. for a-ap, 108g, see apas: cf. tfirtos, 
 
 ' approachable, friendly ' ; Lat. ap-iscor, 
 
 'reach/ ap-ere, 'seize, fasten'; airrta (Va< 
 
 for air), 'fasten.'] 
 abhi, reach to a thing, attain; desid. 
 
 strive to win ; cans, cause to reach the 
 
 mark, i.e. carry out fully, 96 n . 
 
 + a v a , come upon, fall in with ; obtain, 
 
 acquire ; take upon one's self ; incur. 
 
 + pra, reach; arrive; come upon; catch; 
 
 win, obtain, get ; incur; prapta: reached, 
 
 found, caught, obtained ; reached, arrived, 
 
 having come ; cans, cause to arrive at, 
 
 bring to, 53"; prapamya, to be brought 
 
 to, 53 1& . 
 
 + vi, reach through, pervade, 66 9 . 
 apana, m. market. [Vpan + a.] 
 a p a d , f. misfortune, [lit. ' a getting into ' 
 
 (trouble), V pad + a: for specialization of 
 
 mg, cf . arti, and Eng. ac-cident, lit. ' a hap- 
 pening' (of trouble).] 
 apas, see ap. 
 api, m. friend, ['one who has reached or 
 
 stands near another' (cf. apta), Vap: cf. 
 
 tfirtos, s.v. ap.] 
 apta-daksina,a. having or accompanied 
 
 by suitable presents, [daksina, 334 2 .] 
 abdika, a. annual; -abclika, -ennial, 
 
 lasting years, [abda.] 
 abharana, n. ornament (jewels, etc.). 
 
 [' what is worn,' V bhr + a : for mg, cf . 
 
 <t>apos, ' garment,' w. <pfpw, and Ger. Tracht, 
 
 ' dress,' w. tragen, ' wear.'] 
 am a, a. raw. [cf. wfj.6s, 'raw'; Lat. am- 
 
 drus, 'bitter.'] 
 
 amay a, m. injury; disease, [caus. of v'am.] 
 amayitnu, a. sickening, [caus. of Vain, 
 
 1196b.] 
 
 amisa, n. flesh, [cf. ama and amis.] 
 amisagin, a. flesh-eating. [ain.] 
 amis, n. raw flesh ; flesh, [cf . ama.] 
 ara6da, a. gladdening; as m. fragrance. 
 
 [s mud + a.] 
 ayatana, n. foot-hold; resting-place; esp. 
 
 place of the sacred fire, fire-place. [Vyat 
 ^ +.] 
 ayata-locana, a. having long eyes. 
 
 [Vyam + a.] 
 
 ayasa, a. metallic, of iron; as n. metal, 
 iron, [ayas, 1208a.] 
 
 ay am a, m. like Eng. extent, i.e. length. 
 [Vyam + a, 'extend.'] 
 
 ayu, a. active, lively. [Vi, 1178a: prob. 
 akin are ^vs, tty'v-s, tvs, ' active, doughty, 
 mighty,' -, 'strongly,' e5, generalized, 
 'well': for mg of ayii, cf. the phrase 
 " full of go."] 
 
 ayudha, n. weapon. [Vyudh + a.] 
 
 ayusmant, a. having life or vitality; 
 long-lived; old. [ayus, 1235a.] 
 
 ayus, n. (activity, liveliness, and so) life; 
 vitality ; personified as a genius, Ayus, 85 18 ; 
 period or duration of life ; long life ; (like 
 Eng. life, i.e.) living creatures. [Vi, 1154, 
 cf . ay-ll : cf . al-wv, Lat. ae-vu-m, AS. sew, 
 &, ' life-time, time ' ; AS. dwa, d, Eng. aye, 
 ' ever ' ; AS. sef-re, Eng. ev-er.~] 
 
 aranyaka, a. pertaining to the wilder- 
 ness; as n. forest-treatise (to be read in 
 the solitude of the wilderness Whitney, 
 p. xvi.). [aranya, 1222e.] 
 
 aradhana, n. the gratifying, propitiation, 
 service. [V radh + a, caus.] 
 
 arogya, n. lit. diseaseless-ness, i.e. health, 
 [aroga.] 
 
 aroha, m. the swelling hips or buttocks of 
 a woman, [prop. ' the seat ' on which a 
 child is carried astride by its mother, 
 Vmh + a, 'get upon, take one's seat 
 upon ' : see anka and cf . the words of an 
 ogress, MBh., aruha mama Qronim, nes- 
 yami tvam vihayasa, ' get upon my hip, 
 I will carry thee through the air.'] 
 
 arta, a. visited, esp. by trouble ; afflicted; 
 stricken; distressed. [Vr + a, q.v. : for 
 mg, cf . American slang phrase gone for.] 
 
 arti,^ a visitation (of evil), i.e. trouble, 
 misfortune, see 93 15 N. [Vr + a: for mg. 
 cf. arta and apad.] 
 
 ardra, a. wet. 
 
 ardra-vasas, a. having wet garments. 
 
 arya, a. belonging to the faithful, i.e., as 
 m., man of one's own tribe, an Aryan, as 
 designation of a man of the Vedic Indian 
 tribes ; as aay. Aryan ; noble ; reverend 
 (used in respectful address), [arya, 1208f : 
 cf . Avestan airya, ' Aryan ' ; New Persian, 
 Iran, 'Persia'; Hdt. vii. 62, o M^Soi &co-
 
 [127] 
 
 [Vi 
 
 \eovro W\ai 'Aptoi; Keltic nom. m'w, ace. 
 en'nn, name of Ireland ; Eng. Ir-ish : cf . 
 ari, arya.] 
 
 alasya, n. sloth, [alasa.] 
 
 alasya-vacana, n. sloth-dictum, as 
 designation for the ignava ratio or fatal- 
 ist's argument. 
 
 alapa, m. talk; conversation. [Vlap + a.] 
 
 alokana, n. the beholding. [Vlok + a.] 
 
 ava, pron. stem, 491. 
 
 avis, adv. forth to sight, in view; w. kr, 
 make visible. [1078.] 
 
 a vft,/. a turning, [\fvrt-fa.] 
 
 aga, TO. food. [ V 2 ag, ' eat.'] 
 
 a gay a, m. lying-place; abode. [Vgi + a.] 
 
 a 9 a 8 , f. wish, hope, [gans + a .] 
 
 aga,/. hope, [younger form of agas.] 
 
 aga,y. region; quarter (of the sky), [spe- 
 cialized from 'place, objective point, that 
 which one reaches,' V 1 ag, ' reach.'] 
 
 agavant, a. hopeful, [aga.] 
 
 agin, a. eating, in cpds. [\[2ag, 1183 3 .] 
 
 agis [392], f. wish or prayer, esp. for good. 
 [v/gas + a, 639, 225 2 : cf. pragis.] 
 
 aglr-vada, m. expression of a (good) 
 wish, i.e. a benediction, [agis, cf. 392.] 
 
 a g I r v a d a bhidhanavant, a. containing a 
 designation of a benediction. [agir- 
 vada + abhidhana, 1233.] 
 
 a g u , a. swift. [cf . UKV-S, ' swift ' ; Lat. 
 oc-ior, ' swifter.'] 
 
 agcarya, n. wonder; prodigy. 
 
 a gram a, m. 1. (place of self-castiga- 
 tion, i.e.) hermitage; 2. stadium in a 
 Brahman's religious life (of which there 
 are four : that of the student or brahma- 
 carin, that of the householder or grha- 
 stha, that of the hermit or vanaprastha, 
 and that of the beggar or bhiksu), see 
 65 S N. [Vgram + a.] 
 
 agraya, m. that on which anything leans 
 or rests ; support ; refuge ; protection ; 
 authority. [V ri + a.] 
 
 agray a-bhuta, a. having become a pro- 
 tection, i.e., as m., protector. [1273c.] 
 
 a s , excl. of joy or of displeasure, ah ! 
 
 V as (aste [628], aslna [619 s ]; asam cakre; 
 asista ; asisy ate ; asita ; asitum ; asitva ; 
 -asya). 1. sit; seat one's self; settle 
 down, 93 J ; -2. abide; dwell, 85 19 ; stay; 
 
 remain ; continue, 64 u ; 3. w. ppl. 
 [1075c], continue (doing anything), keep 
 on, 32 u - 18 . [cf . TJO--TOI, ' sits ' ; Lat. anus, 
 *ds-nu-s, ' seat, buttocks ' ; Old Lat. asa, 
 Lat. dra, ' family-seat, hearth, altar.'] 
 + a d h i , take one's place in, i.e. visit, 49 16 ; 
 get into (shoes), i.e. put on, 45 1T . 
 + upa, sit by (in sign of readiness to 
 serve), wait upon (a command), 92 4 ; sit 
 by (expectantly), sit waiting for, 91 4 . 
 + pary-upa, sit around, surround, 2 7 . 
 
 a sana, n. sitting, 4 12 ; seat. [Vas.] 
 
 asara, m. (like Eng. colloq. a pour, i.e.) 
 pouring rain. [Vsr +a, 'run.'] 
 
 a sura, a. demonic; as m. demon, [asura, 
 1208f.] 
 
 as6cana, n. cavity (into which one pours). 
 [Vsic +a.] 
 
 asecanavantfCf. having a cavity, hollow, 
 [asecana.] 
 
 ahati,/. blow. [V ban + a, 1157 J and Id.] 
 
 a hands, a. swelling, fermenting, foaming. 
 
 ahavana, n. oblation. [Vhu + a.] 
 
 ahavaniya, a. of or for the oblation; ?r. 
 agni, oblation-fire ; as m., without agni, 
 oblation-fire (the one that receives the 
 oblation), see 102 2 N. [ahavana, 1215.] 
 
 ahara, m. the taking to one's self (of 
 food), eating; what one takes, i.e. food. 
 [Vhr + a.] 
 
 ahara-dana, n. giving of food. 
 
 ahara-parityaga, m. relinquishment 
 of food. 
 
 aharadi, n. food and so forth. [adi, 
 1302cl.] 
 
 ahararthin, a. seeking food, [arthin.] 
 
 ahitagni, a. having a set or established 
 fire ; as m. one who is keeping alive a 
 sacred fire, [ahita, \f 1 dha + a, ' set ' : 
 1299a.] 
 
 ahuti,/. oblation, offering (used both of 
 the act and of the thing offered) ; cf. the 
 later word homa. [\f hu + a : w. -huti, cf . 
 X'u-ffi-s, ' a pouring.'] 
 
 ahvana, n. call ; invitation. [Vhu or 
 hva + a.] 
 
 i, pron. root, see idam ana" 502 3 . 
 V i (eti [612]; iyaya, iyiis [783b 2 ]; esyati; 
 itd; eturn ; itva ; -itya). 1. go; go
 
 Vi] 
 
 [128] 
 
 to or towards ; come ; enter ; 2. move 
 on, 88 12 ; pass; 3. go to, i.e. attain (a 
 thing or condition) ; iyase [1021 2 ], goest 
 hither and thither, 90 15 ; -Imahe [1021 2 ], 
 (like Ger. an-gehen) we approach with 
 prayers, beseech, [w. i-mas, cf . f-/j.tv, Lat. 
 i-mus, ' we go ' ; Goth, i-ddja, AS. code, 
 'went'; radically akin, perhaps, is AS. 
 gdn (stem gd for *ga-i, ga- being the in- 
 separable prefix), Eng. go, Ger. gehen : see 
 also ayii, ayus.] 
 
 + ati, go beyond or past or over; over- 
 whelm; transcend; leave behind, get rid 
 of, 68 9 ; escape. 
 
 + adhi, come upon, notice; take notice, 
 87 18 ; middle adhite [612 note], go over 
 for one's self, repeat, learn, read ; ppl. 
 adhita : w. act. mg, learn-ed, 18 6 ; w. pass, 
 mg, learnt, 21 15 ; cans, adhyapayati 
 [1042e], cause to learn, teach. 
 + upa^adh.i, in upadhyaya. 
 + a n u , go along or after ; accompany ; 
 ppl. anvita, accompanied by, endowed or 
 filled or connected with. 
 sam-anu, the same. 
 + an tar, go within; retire, withdraw. 
 + a p a , go off ; slink away. 
 + abhi, go unto; become embodied in. 
 + ava, approach. 
 
 + a , come near or unto or hither ; w. 
 the adv. punar, go back. 
 + abhy-a, approach, go near. 
 + u p a_a , come unto. 
 - s a m - a , come near to together ; as- 
 semble. 
 
 + ud, go up, rise (of the sun). 
 + ttpa, go unto; fall to the lot of; 
 ppl. upeta, gone unto, attended by, pro- 
 vided with. 
 
 + sam-upa, come hither. 
 + n i , go into or in ; cf. nyaya. 
 + para, go away or forth; depart. 
 + anu-para, go forth along (a path). 
 + vi-para, go away separately. 
 + pari, circumambulate; walk round 
 (the fire). 
 
 + pra, 1. go forward or onward, 83 n ; 
 esp. go forth out of this world, and so (like 
 Eng. depart), die ; pretya, after dying, i.e. 
 in the other world (opp. of iha) ; preta, 
 
 dead; 2. come out, stick out, be prom- 
 inent. 
 
 + prati, go against, withstand; go back 
 to; recognize, 98 16 ; pratita, recognized, 
 approved. 
 
 + vi, go asunder; separate; disperse, 83 15 ; 
 spread one's self over, i.e. pervade, 72 2 ; 
 vita, at beg. of cpds, having departed , 
 i.e. free from . 
 + s am, come together ; assemble. 
 
 iccha,y; wish; desire; inclination. [VI is, 
 'seek': cf. AS. iesce, 'an asking.'] 
 
 ij, vbl. sacrificing, in rtv-ij. [Vyaj, 252.] 
 
 ijy ,,_/! sacrifice. [Vyaj, 252.] 
 
 itara [523], pron. a. other; the other; 
 another ; other than, i.e. different from, 
 w. abl. [pron. root i, 502 3 : cf. Lat. iterum, 
 ' another time.'] 
 
 it as, adv. 1. used like the abl. of a pron. 
 [1098c 2 ], 24 18 ; -2. from this (place), 
 from here; here; from this (world), 5 8 ; 
 itas tatas, here and there ; 3. from this 
 (time), now, 41 8 . [pron. root i, 502 3 .] 
 
 iti, adv. see 1102a. 1. in this way, thus; 
 so; iti deva akurvan, thus the gods did, 
 96 9 ; 2. used w. all kinds of quotations 
 made verbis ipsissimis : tatha^ity uktva, 
 upon saying " Yes," 4 2 ; sa prstavan kau 
 yuvam iti, he asked, "Who are ye," 45 5 ; 
 evam astu iti tau dhavitau, with the 
 words, "So be it," the two ran off, 45 16 ; 
 so EV., 85 12 ; so MS., 92 15 ; ity akarnya, 
 on hearing (so, i.e.) the preceding clokas, 
 17 16 ; cf. 18 10 ; 2a. designating something 
 as that which was, or under the circumstances 
 might have been said or thought or intended 
 or known, sometimes (46 1S ) preceding it, but 
 usually following it : martavyam iti, at the 
 thought, "I must die," 29 9 ; gardabho 
 'yam iti jnatva, recognizing (the fact), 
 " This is an ass," 34 20 ; 2b. interr. in 
 place of the exact quotation : In'm iti ; alleg- 
 ing or intending what, under what pretext, 
 with what intention, 30 4 , 41 5 ; 2c. used 
 in giving an authority: iti dharana, so (is) 
 the rule, 62 "; ity eke, so some folks 
 (say), 101 9 ; 2d. used in citing a Vedic 
 verse by its first word (60 13 ) or words (98 20 , 
 etc. ) ; 2e. at the end of a section or book 
 (cf. atha), here endeth, 4 4 ; 2f. w. verbs
 
 [129] 
 
 [iras 
 
 of naming, considering, etc., the predicate, 
 marked by iti, is nom., sometimes ace. 
 both constructions at 61 22 ; damayanti^iti 
 vigruta, known as or named " D.," 6 3 ; 
 3. used to include under one head or as 
 in a list several separate objects, 2 1 7 , 100 8 , 
 105 7 ; 4. evam superfluously added, 61 12 ; 
 iti doubled, 60 "; -5. iti ha = iti, 12 8 , 
 61 18 . [pron. root i, 1102a: cf. Lat. iti- 
 dem, 'just so.'] 
 
 itihasa, m. story, legend. [agglomera- 
 tion of iti ha asa, ' thus, indeed, it was ' : 
 1314b.] 
 
 ittha (V. only) and ittham, adv. in this 
 way ; so ; kim ta ittha, how does this 
 happen thee ? 73 8 . [adverbs made from 
 the ace. sing, neut., i-d, of the pron. root 
 i, see 1101 : cf. Lat. itd and item, 'so.'] 
 
 ity-adi, at end of possessive adj. cpds used 
 substantively, that which has " " as its 
 beginning, i.e. " " and so forth, [see 
 1302c 1 end.] 
 
 id, V. pel. just; exactly; even; emphasizing 
 the preceding word and to be rendered by 
 laying emphasis on that word. [ace. of 
 pron. root i, lllla: cf. Lat. i-d, 'it.'] 
 
 1 id am [501-2 forms made from four 
 stems, a and ana, i and ima, those from a 
 being often unaccented, see 74 9 N.], pron. 
 this, this here, rJSe, e.g. 20 9 , 86 10 , 87 8 ; 
 contrasted w. asau, ' that one,' 103 7 ; asmin 
 loke, in this world, 66 12 ; without loke and 
 contrasted w. amutra, 103 8 ; iclam vic,vam 
 bhuvanam, this whole world, 85 12 ; idam 
 sarvam, this entire (world), 63 21 ; so 66 19 ; 
 so idam, rb irav, 56 15> n ; iyam prthivi, 
 this earth, 10 10 ; iyam alone, this earth, 
 93 1 > 2 ; refers very often, like rdde, to some- 
 thing following (just as etad and TO.VTO. to 
 something preceding), e.g. 13 22 , 26 7 , 45 u , 
 51 6 ; occasionally refers to something imme- 
 diately preceding, e.g. 10", 24 9 , 74 12 , 79*; 
 joined w. pronouns : ko ' yam ayati, who 
 comes here ? 27 12 ; yo ' yam drc,yate, 
 which is seen here, 46 17 ; mam imam, me 
 here, 76 16 ; nom. to be rendered here is or 
 are, 56 l , 4 21 ; imau vatas, blow hither, 
 90 12 . [cf. Lat. i-d, Goth, i-ta, Ger. es, ' it.'] 
 
 2 idam, adv. now, 86 19 ; here, 80 9 , 96 9 . 
 [lllla: cf. 502.] 
 
 idanim, adv. now. [pron. root i, 1103b.] 
 
 V idh or indh (inddhe [694]; idhd [783b] ; 
 aindhista ; indhisyati ; iddha ; -idhya). 
 kindle, [cf . atO-ta, ' burn ' ; Lat. aed-e-s, 
 'fire-place, hearth, dwelling' (cf. stove and 
 Ger. Stube, ' room ') ; aestus, *aid-tu-s, 
 ' heat ' ; AS. ad, ' funeral pile ' ; dst, Eng. 
 oast, ' kiln for drying hops or malt.'] 
 + sam, kindle, trans, and intrans. 
 
 idhma, m. fuel, [v/idh, 1166: for mg, cf. 
 Eng. kindlings.] 
 
 idhma-citi, /. fuel-pile. 
 
 V in (in-6-ti, prop. i-n6-ti [713]). drive; 
 force ; in enas. [cf . V inv.] 
 
 indra, m. Indra, name of a Vedic god; in 
 the later language, the best of its kind, 
 chief, prince, [none of the numerous 
 proposed derivations is satisfactory.] 
 
 indra-purogama, a. having Indra as 
 leader, preceded by Indra. [1302c2.] 
 
 indra-loka, m. Indra's world, heaven. 
 
 indra-gatru, a. having Indra as his 
 conqueror. [1302.] 
 
 indra-sena, f. Indra's missile weapon; 
 personified as his bride, RV. x. 102.2; 
 hence, name of a woman, see 16 n N. ; m. 
 -a, name of a man, formed as a mere pen- 
 dant to the fern, [indra + 1 sena.] 
 
 indragni, m. Indra and Agni. [indra + 
 agni : acct, 1255b.] 
 
 indra-brhaspati, m. Indra and Brihas- 
 pati. [acct, 1255a.] 
 
 indrayudha, n. Indra's weapon, the 
 rainbow, [ayudha. ] 
 
 indriya, a. belonging to Indra; as n. 
 
 1. the quality pertaining especially to 
 Indra, i.e. great might, power, 73 18 , 97 6 ; 
 
 2. in general, one of a man's powers, i.e. 
 a sense or organ of sense, [indra, 1214b.] 
 
 V indh, see idh. 
 
 V inv (invati). drive; send, [secondary 
 root from i, 749b, 716 : cf. in.] 
 
 ima, pron. stem, see idam. 
 
 iyacciram, adv. so long, [iyant (1249a) 
 + ciram.] 
 
 iyant [451], a. so great; so much. [fr. 
 pron. root i, 502.] 
 
 iras, n. ill-will; anger; assumed as basis of 
 'the following denom. [V r, ' go for ' in hos- 
 tile sense : cf . Lat. Ira, ' anger.'] 
 9
 
 Virasya] 
 
 [130] 
 
 V irasya (irasyati). be evil disposed. 
 [iras, 1058.] 
 
 irasya, /. ill-will ; wrath. [Virasya, 
 1149 6 : cf. irsya.] 
 
 frina, n. a run or runlet; gulch; gullied 
 and so desert land. [Vr, 1177b: for mg, 
 cf . Provincial Eng. run, ' brook.'] 
 
 iva, end. pel. 1. as; like; 2. used to 
 modify a strong expression, in a manner ; 
 so to speak, 56 16 ; as it were, I 10 ; perhaps; 
 almost, 34 13 ; 3. sometimes (like eva), 
 just, quite ; nacirad iva, right soon, 
 [pron. root i, 1102b.] 
 
 V lis (icchati [753]; iy6sa, isiis [783b] ; 
 aisit ; esisyati ; ista ; estum ; -isya). 
 seek ; desire ; esp. w. inf. [981 3 ] ; pass, be 
 desired; be approved or recognized, and 
 so pass for, 59 18 ; ista, desired, i.e. desir- 
 able, 1 *. [radical mg, ' go, go for,' V 2 is 
 being merely a causative of V 1 is : cf . 
 iptpos, *tfj./j.epos, ' desire ' ; w. iccha, ' desire,' 
 cf. AS. *dsce, 'petition,' whence dscian, 
 Ger. (h)eischen, Eng. ask: icchati for *is- 
 skati, cf. Vvanch.] 
 + anu, seek after. 
 
 + abhi, seek for; ppl. abhista, desired, 
 dear, 21 18 . 
 
 V 2 is (isayati [1042a 2 ]; also isyati [761c] ; 
 iyesa, isus [783b] ; isita ; isayitum ; 
 -isya). send; set in swift motion; im- 
 pel, 74 19 . [caus. of V 1 is, q-v.] 
 + pra, 1. presayati: send forth; send, 
 e.g. 9 10 ; 2. pr6syati : drive forth, impel ; 
 start up (e.g. game) ; praisam [970a] 
 aicchan, sought to start up, 93 16 ; and so 
 3. presyati: call upon or summon (tech- 
 nical term used of the chief priest's calling 
 upon another to begin a text or action), 
 103 6 . 
 
 is,/, refreshment; strength; vigor; w. urj, 
 drink and food, like Ger. Kraft und Saft. 
 
 is A, 1. m. = is [399]; 2. as a. vigorous, 
 fruitful. 
 
 Isu, m. f. arrow. [V2is, 'send': cf. 16s, 
 *la6s, ' arrow.'] 
 
 1 ista, see V 1 is, ' desire.' 
 
 2 ista, 1. offered; 2. as n. offering, 
 sacrifice, holy work. [Vyaj, 252.] 
 
 istaka, f. brick used in the sacred fire- 
 pile. [2 ista.] 
 
 ista-labha, m. acquisition of a desirable 
 object. [1 ista.] 
 
 ista-purtd, n. what is offered (to the 
 gods) and bestowed (upon them), i.e. what 
 a man offers to the gods for his benefit 
 after death, and so, by metonymy, such fruit 
 of these offerings as can come to him, 
 83 13 N. [2 ista, 247, 1253b.] 
 
 isti, f. sacrifice (simple offering of but- 
 ter, fruit, etc.), 101 6 . [Vyaj, 252, 
 1157. la.] 
 
 iha, adv. here, opp. of atra (87 l ) and 
 amutra (64 6 ) ; hither, 9 2 ; here on earth, 
 id has, 27 2 ; opp. o/pretya (Vi), 59 2 , 58 "; 
 in this book, 17 6 ; w. loc. [cf. 1099*], iha 
 samaye, in this case, 41 10 , 42 15 . [pron. 
 root i, llOOa.] 
 
 V Iks (iksate ; rksam cakre ; aiksista ; 
 
 iksisyate ; iksita ; iksitum ; iksitva ; 
 
 -iksya ; Iksyate). look; look at; see; 
 
 behold, [desid. of V*a, ' see,' contained in 
 
 ak-san, 'eye,' etc., 108g: see aksan.] 
 
 + a p a , look off to (like Ger. es absehen 
 
 auf ) ; regard ; expect. 
 
 + ava, look after; look after one's self, 
 
 i.e. look behind or around. 
 
 + u p a , w. two mgs, like Eng. overlook : 
 
 1. look over, i.e. inspect; and 2. (more 
 
 commonly) look beyond, i.e. neglect. 
 
 + nis, look out or after; contemplate. 
 
 + pari, look about one; investigate; 
 
 consider. 
 
 + vi, look; look on; viksita, beheld. 
 
 + s am, look upon; behold; perceive, 
 iksaka, m. beholder; spectator. [Viks, 
 
 1181.] 
 
 iksana, n. a look; glance. [Viks.] 
 V inkh (inkhati, -te ; inkhayati, -te 
 
 [1041 2 ]). move unsteadily. 
 
 + pr a, rock or pitch onward. 
 V id (lie, ilise, itte [628, 630] ; perf. ile ; 
 
 ilita). supplicate ; call upon ; praise. 
 
 [Whitney, 54.] 
 idya, grdv. to be praised. [Vid, 963 2 and 
 
 d : pronounced ilia, Whitney, 54.] 
 idfa, a. of this sort; such. [502 end, 
 
 and 518.]
 
 [131] 
 
 [ujjayini 
 
 Ip sit a, a. desired to be obtained ; desired, 
 [desid. of Vap, 1030.] 
 
 im, end. 1. as ace. s. of pron. root i, him, 
 her, it ; him, 79 7 ; 2. indef., ya im, 
 quicunque, RV. x. 125. 4 ; 3. ka im, who 
 pray? 77 18 ; 4. to avoid hiatus: between 
 atha and enam, 84 5 ' 6 . [see lllla and 
 502 end.] 
 
 V ir (irte [628]; irna; irayati, -te; irita). 
 set one's self in motion; cans, set in 
 motion ; cause to go forth, i.e. : 1. bring 
 into existence; 2. utter (a sound), 14 23 . 
 [near akin w. V r.] 
 
 + ud, rise up; cans, rouse; send out; 
 utter ; announce, 53 16 . 
 + sam-ud, cans, utter, declare. 
 + pra, cans, drive or steer onward (ship). 
 + s am, cans, bring together, i.e. into shape 
 or being; create, 75 6 ; samerire", estab- 
 lished (as an ordinance), instituerunt, 88 5 N. 
 
 Irsya, f. ill-will; envy; jealousy, [con- 
 tracted fr. irasya, q.v. : cf . girs-an and 
 giras.] 
 
 V ig (ige [628]; igisyati). own, be master 
 of, w. gen. [cf . AS. dg-an, ' possess,' Eng. 
 owe, ' possess ' (so Shakespere often), 
 'possess another's property, be in debt'; 
 thence the participial adj. dgen, Eng. adj. 
 own, ' proprius ' ; thence the denom. dgnian, 
 Eng. verb own; further, to ah, preterito- 
 present of dgan, is formed a secondary 
 past tense, dhte, 'possessed,' Eng. ought, 
 'possessed' (so Spenser), 'was under obli- 
 gation.'] 
 
 iga, 7?i. master; lord, [Vig.] 
 
 i g v a r a , m. master ; lord ; prince ; rich 
 man, 22 2 . [Vig, 1171a.] 
 
 Vis (Isate ; ise; isita). hasten from, flee 
 before, w. abl. [if not desid. of Vi 
 end), perhaps akin w. VI is, orig. 'go.'] 
 
 u , Vedic end. copula. 1. and ; also ; fur- 
 ther; used in one (oftenest the latter) of two 
 douses or sentences containing things alike 
 or slightly contrasted (e.g. 78 u , 79 9 ), esp. in 
 anaphora (e.g. 79 5 , 90 9 ) ; 2. now, straight- 
 way, w. verbs present and past and w. im- 
 peratives or imperative subjunctives, 71 10 , 
 85 15 , 85 5 , 87 8 ; often followed by sii, right 
 
 soon; pragrhya [see 1122a 2 , 138c] when 
 combined with atha (90 16 ), lipa (78 u ), ma 
 (87 9 ) ; for 83 9 and 84", see notes ; -3. in 
 classical Skt. only w. (atha, kim, and) na, 
 and not, 2 1 14 , 27 n . 
 
 u-kara, m. the sound u. [Whitney, 18.] 
 
 ukta, see Vvac. 
 
 ukti, f. expression; declaration, 53 16 . 
 [Vvac, 1157. la.] 
 
 uktha, n. utterance, esp. of devotion; 
 praise ; hymn of praise ; invocation. 
 [Vvac, 1163a.] 
 
 uktha-vardhana, a. strengthening,^, 
 refreshing or delighting one's self with 
 hymns of praise, [acct, 1271.] 
 
 V uks [252] or vaks (uksati, -te ; atiksit; 
 uksisyati; uksita ; -liksya). sprinkle; 
 besprinkle ; drop, intrans., 75 7 . [secondary 
 form (108g end) of V *uj or ug: cf. vy-pos, 
 'wet'; Lat. uvens (*ugvens) caelum, 'the 
 dropping sky ' ; w. uksan, ' besprinkler, 
 impregnator, bull,' cf . Goth, auhsa, ' bull,' 
 Eng. ox, and for mg, Vvrs.] 
 + p r a , sprinkle before one by way of 
 consecration. 
 
 ugra, a. mighty; exceedingly strong; ter- 
 rible. [Vvaj, 252, 1188; see 6jas.] 
 
 ugra-gasana, a. having a terrible way 
 of ruling ; as m. a, strict ruler. [1298a.] 
 
 V uc (licyati [only w. preps] ; uv6ca [783b], 
 ucivans [803]; ucita). be pleased; be 
 wonted ; ucitd : 1. with which one is 
 pleased ; proper ; suitable ; 2. accus- 
 tomed. 
 
 ucca, a. lofty; uccais, adv. [1112c], high; 
 of sound, loud. [fr. ucca, adv. instr. 
 (1112e) of lidanc.] 
 
 u c c a y a , m. heap, pile, collection. [V 1 ci + 
 ud, ' heap up.'] 
 
 u c car a, m. evacuation ; excrement. [Vcar 
 + ud.] 
 
 uccavaca, a. high and low; various; 
 diverse, [ud + ca w. ava + ca, 1314b.] 
 
 ucchista, ppl. left; as n. leavings, esp. 
 of a sacrifice or of food. [V gis + ud.] 
 
 ucchedin, a. destroying. [Vchid + ud.] 
 
 ujjayini, /. Oujein, name of a city, 
 Ptolemy's 'O^vrj. [fern, of ujjayin, 'vic- 
 torious,' Vji + ud, 1183 3 : of like mg are 
 NtKo-TroA.(j and Cairo.'] 
 
 9*
 
 Vunch] 
 
 [132] 
 
 V unch (linchati, unchati ; unchitum). 
 sweep together, glean, [for *unsk, *vansk, 
 orig. ' wipe, or whisk, i.e. sweep ' : cf . AS. 
 wascan, 'wash,' Eng. wash and whisk.~\ 
 + p r a , wash away ; wipe out, 23 2 . 
 
 tin gist a, same as ucchista. 
 
 uta, conj. and; also; even; connecting 
 words, clauses, and sentences ; repeated : 
 uta uta (uta), both and (and) ; 
 at beg. of verse, 78 12 ; uta va : or even, 
 87 20 ; or, 84 u (cf. atha, 6) ; apy uta, also. 
 
 utkarsa, m. elevation, [v/krs + ud.] 
 
 uttama, a. 1. up-most; highest; best, 
 esp. at end ofcpds; excellent; chief; 2. 
 (out-most, i.e.) ut-most; extreme; last (see 
 67 6 x. ) , 99 20 . [lid, ' up, out,' 473.] 
 
 uttamagandhadhya, a. rich in ex- 
 cellent odors, 15 19 . [uttama-gandha + 
 adhya.] 
 
 uttamadhama madhy ama, a . highest 
 and lowest and midmost ; best and worst 
 and middling. [uttama + adhama + 
 madhyama, 1257.] 
 
 uttara [525 2 ], a. upper; higher; 1. being 
 above, (opp. adhara) 70 18 ; having the 
 upper hand, victorious, 81 2l ; 2. north- 
 ern (on account of the Himalayas, cf. 
 udanc) ; a^uttarasmat, as far as the 
 north (side), 105 10 ; 3. the left (because 
 in prayer the face is turned eastward: 
 cf. daksina), 99 22 ; 4. (like Sffrepos) the 
 latter (opp. purva) ; later ; following, 
 99 22 ; -am, as adv. finally, last, 104 12 ; -5. 
 as neuter subst. the final element of a 
 phrase of salutation, 60 3 ; 6. answer, 
 retort, [ud, 473: cf. Sarrepos, 'latter'; 
 Eng. comp. ut-ter, 'outer.'] 
 
 uttaratas, adv. northward; to the north 
 of; w. gen. [1130], 105 13 . [uttara.] 
 
 uttara-dayaka, a. giving answer ; con- 
 tradicting. 
 
 uttara-pagcima, a. north-westerly. 
 
 uttara-purastat, adv. north-east of; 
 w. gen., 1130. 
 
 uttara-loman,a. having the hair above, 
 with the hairy side up. 
 
 uttara, adv. northerly, [uttara, 1112e, 
 330 4 .] 
 
 uttara-patha, n. the northerly way; 
 the north country. 
 
 uttar ena, adv. northerly; north of, w. 
 
 ace. [1129], 102 5 . [uttara, 1112c.] 
 uttarottara, 1. a. higher and higher 
 
 [1260]; -am, as adv. more and more, 24 3 ; 
 
 2. as n. answer to an answer [1264]; 
 wordy talk, 24 9 . [uttara + uttara.] 
 
 uttha, see 233a. 
 
 utpala, n. a Nymphaea, i.e. water-lily or 
 lotus. [Vpat + ud.] 
 
 utpadana, n. procreation. [caus. of 
 V pad + ud.] 
 
 utphulla, a. wide open. [Vphal + ud, 
 958.] 
 
 utsava, m. 1. an undertaking, begin- 
 ning; 2. feast-day, festival, 25 4 , 49 16 . 
 [\/2su + ud, 'set a-going'; but the devel- 
 opment of 2 from 1 is not clear.] 
 
 li d , prefix, never used alone ; up, up forth, 
 out. [cf. AS. ut, Eng. out: see uttara, 
 uttama.] 
 
 N/ ud or und (unatti; unna, utta; -lidya). 
 
 1. spring; boil or bubble up; flow; 2. 
 wet, bathe, [cf . Lat. und-a, ' wave ' ; w. 
 ud-an, 'water,' cf. v8-cap, Eng. wat-er ; w. 
 ud-ra, 'otter,' cf. SS-pa, 'water-snake/ 
 Eng. otter.'] 
 
 -t-s am, flow together; wet. 
 uda, n. water. [Vud.] 
 udaka [432], n. water. [Vud.] 
 uda-kumbha, m. water-jar; jar with 
 
 water, 
 udag-ayana, n. north-course (of the 
 
 sun), or the half-year from the winter to 
 
 the summer solstice, [udanc.] 
 lidagdaga, a. having the seams upward. 
 
 [udanc + daa, ' fringe, border, seam.'] 
 udan-mukha, a. having the face to the 
 
 north, [udanc, 1249a, 161.] 
 udanc [409b], a. directed upward; directed 
 
 northward (on account of the Himalayas), 
 
 cf. uttara), northerly ; in cpds, udak, 
 
 1249a. [ud + afic, 407.] 
 udaya, m. a going up; rising (of the sun). 
 
 [Vi (1148.1a)+ud.] 
 udara, n. belly, [orig., perhaps, 'rising, 
 
 swelling,' V r + ud : for mg, cf . the relation 
 
 of belly to AS. belgan, ' swell.'] 
 udara, a. (like Eng. exalted, i.e.) noble, 
 
 excellent. [\'r + ud, 'rise.'] 
 udara-carita, a. of noble behavior.
 
 [133] 
 
 [upastha 
 
 u d i t A, , see V vad ; ud-ita, see V i. 
 
 lidici, see407 3 , 409b. 
 
 udumbala, a. brown. 
 
 u d d i 5 y a , at, towards, see V dig. 
 
 uddhata, see 163 and \ h.-ui. 
 
 lidbahuka, a. having the arms out or 
 extended, [ud + bahu, 1305, 1307.] 
 
 udya, grdv. to be spoken or pronounced. 
 [Vvad, 1213c end, cf. 963c.] 
 
 udyama, m. raising (of the hands to 
 work) ; exertion. [Vyam + ud.] 
 
 udyana, n. 1. a walking out; 2. (place 
 for walking out, i.e.) garden, park. [Vya 
 + ud, 1150.] 
 
 udyoga, m. undertaking; exertion. [Vyuj 
 + ud, 216. 1.] 
 
 udyogin, a. active ; energetic, [udyoga.] 
 
 udvigna-manas, a. having a terrified 
 mind, distressed. [Vvij.] 
 
 unmatta-dargana, a. having a frantic 
 look. [Vmad + ud.] 
 
 unmarga, m. by-way, evil way. [ud -f 
 marga.] 
 
 unmarga-gamin, a. going in evil 
 ways. 
 
 lip a, 1. vbl prefix, to, unto, toward; opp. 
 of apa ; 2. prep., w. ace., unto, 81 15 ; 
 iv. loc., in, 77 5 ; 3. in noun cpds [1289b], 
 denoting something near, accessory, or subor- 
 dinate, [cf . inr6, Lat. s-ub, ' under.'] 
 
 upakanisthika (sc. anguli), a. f. next 
 to the little, i.e. the third (finger), [upa 
 (mg 3) + kanisthaka, 1222d.] 
 
 upakartr, m. one who does kindness; 
 benefactor. [V 1 kr + upa, q.v.] 
 
 u p a k a ra , m. friendly service ; kindness. 
 [V 1 kr + upa, q.v.] 
 
 upakaraka, a. doing friendly service. 
 [upakara.] 
 
 upakarin, a. the same ; as m. benefactor. 
 [Vlkr + upa, q.v.] 
 
 up a car a, m. a coming to or waiting up- 
 on ; pregnantly, (polite) attention ; (cor- 
 rect) procedure, i.e. duty. [V car + upa.] 
 
 upatya, a. lying under, [upa, 1245b : cf . 
 vir-Tio-s, ' lying under, supine.'] 
 
 upatyaka,/. land lying at the foot (of a 
 mountain), [upatya.] 
 
 upadega, m. a pointing out to, a direc- 
 tion; instruction; advice. [V dig + upa.] 
 
 upadegin, a. giving (good) instruction. 
 [Vdig + upa.] 
 
 upadestavya, grdv. to be taught, [do.] 
 
 upanayaiia, n. investiture. [technical 
 term, see Vni-+upa.] 
 
 upapf c, a. clinging close to, w. gen. [Vprc 
 + upa.] 
 
 upabhft, f. wooden cup (used in sacri- 
 fices), see sruc. [' td-bringer,' Vbhr (383b) 
 + upa.] 
 
 upabhoga, m. enjoyment; eating. [V2 
 bhuj + upa, q.v.] 
 
 up am a, a. highest, [upa, 474.] 
 
 upama-gravas,a. having highest glory; 
 as m. Upama9ravas, a name like MeyuTro- 
 K\TJS or "T\j/i-K\rjs. 
 
 u p a m a , f. comparison, image ; and so like- 
 ness, resemblance; at end of cpds, having 
 likeness with , like . [VI ma + upa, 
 ' compare.'] 
 
 upamartha, m. purpose of an image; 
 -ena, figuratively, [artha.] 
 
 upayoga, m. ap-plication ; use; utility. 
 [Vyuj +upa.] 
 
 upari, adv. above; as prep., w. gen. [1130], 
 above; at end of cpd [1314f], upon, 39 16 . 
 [cf. vwfip, #vTTfpi, Lat. s-uper, ' over.'] 
 
 li p a 1 a , f. upper mill-stone ; cf. drsad. 
 
 upavancana, n. a tottering unto, a fal- 
 tering approach, [vlvanc +upa.] 
 
 upavana, n. small forest, i.e. grove, [upa 
 (mg 3) + vana.] 
 
 lipavlta, ppl. wound about, esp. with the 
 sacred cord; as n. [1176a], the being sur- 
 rounded with the sacred cord ; the cord 
 itself. [V vya + upa, 954c.] 
 
 upavega, m. a sitting down. [Vvig + 
 upa.] 
 
 dpavegi, m. Upave9i, name of a man. 
 
 upagama, m. stopping; cessation. [V2gam 
 + upa, ' stop.'] 
 
 upasamgrahana, n. the clasping and 
 taking to one's self (the feet of another), 
 as sign of great respect. [Vgrah + upa- 
 sam.] 
 
 upaseva,/. a serving; a being devoted 
 to. [Vsev + upa.] 
 
 upasevin, a. serving; revering. [Vsev 
 + upa.] 
 
 upastha, ///. lap, groin.
 
 upakhyana] 
 
 [134] 
 
 upakhyana, n. subordinate tale ; episode, 
 I 1 , [upa (mg 3) + akhyana.] 
 
 up ad an a, n. the taking to one's self; 
 appropriation. [V 1 da + upa^a, ' take.'] 
 
 npadhyaya,m. teacher. [Vi + upa^adhi.] 
 
 upanah, f. sandal; shoe, ['under-bond,' 
 Vnah + upa (247): for mg, cf. uW-Sr^a, 
 ' sandal.'] 
 
 up ant a, n. proximity to the end; edge; 
 immediate neighborhood, [upa (mg 3) + 
 anta.] 
 
 up ay a, m. approach; that by which one 
 reaches an aim ; means ; expedient, 39 * ; 
 stratagem ; advantage, 39 6 . [Vi + upa, 
 1148. la: for mg, cf. Eng. to-ward, as an 
 adj.] 
 
 upayana, n. approach. [Vi + upa, 
 1150. la.] 
 
 upara, m. transgression. [Vr + upa.] 
 
 upeksa, /. overlooking; neglect, [Vflts 
 -f upa.] 
 
 up o sit a, ppl. having abstained (i.e. from 
 food), having fasted; as n. [1176a], fast- 
 ing. [V3vas +upa, q.v.] 
 
 V ubh (ubhnati, umbhati [758]; ubdhd; 
 -ubhya). unite; couple, [cf. ubha.] 
 + a p a , bind, fetter. 
 
 ubha, a. both. [cf. /*<&>, Lat. ambo, AS. 
 nom. fern. neut. bd, Goth. nom. neut. ba, 
 nom. masc. bai, w. dental extension, bajo\>s, 
 all meaning ' both,' Eng. bo-th : orig., per- 
 haps, 'couple,' and akin w. Vubh.] 
 
 ubhaya [525 *], a. of both sorts; both, 
 [ubha.] 
 
 ubhaya-kama, a. desirous of both. 
 
 ubhayatas, adv. from both sides; in 
 both cases, [ubhaya, acct !] 
 
 ubhayatah-sasya, n. having a crop 
 at both times, i.e. bearing two crops a 
 year. 
 
 ura-ga, m. serpent, ['breast-going,' ura 
 for uras : for mg, cf . khaga.] 
 
 liras, n. breast, [perhaps, 'a cover/ from 
 VI vr, 'cover,' 1151. Ib, w. a specialization 
 like that in Eng. chest, ' thorax.'] 
 
 urii, f. urvi, a. (prop, encompassing, and 
 so, like Eng. capacious) extensive, wide, 
 great; as n. (like Ger. das Weite) the dis- 
 tance. [Vlvr, 'encompass,' 1178a: cf. 
 tvpv-!, 'wide.'] 
 
 uru-vyacas, a. having wide embrace, 
 wide extending, [acct, 1298b.] 
 
 V urusya (urusyati). to distance, i.e. 
 escape ; put another in the distance, i.e. 
 save, [urti, 'the distance,' 1061 2 .] 
 
 uru-nasa, n. having broad snouts, [uni 
 (247) + nas, 193, 1315c : acct, 1298b.] 
 
 ulukhala, n. a mortar. 
 
 ulba ana* lilva, n. enveloping membrane 
 of an embryo, [for *ur-va, V 1 vr, ' en- 
 close,' 1190- cf. Lat. vol-va, 'covering, 
 womb.'] 
 
 ulbana, a. lumpy, knotty, thick, massy, 
 [ulba, for *urva, hence n, 189.] 
 
 V us (6sati ; uv6sa; auslt ; usta). burn, 
 [for cognates, see the collateral form 
 V 1 vas, ' light up,' also usas, usra, etc. : 
 cf . fva>, ' singe ' ; ouo>, ' kindle ' ; Lat. ur-o, 
 'burn,' and ustus = usta-s ; AS. ys-le, 
 'glowing ashes.'] 
 
 usas [415b], f. morning-red ; dawn ; per- 
 sonified, Dawn. [V 1 vas, ' light up, dawn,' 
 252 : cf. i)<as, Aeolic aScas, Lat. aurora, 
 *ausos-a, 'dawn'; radically cognate also 
 is Eng. eas-t, ' the point where day breaks': 
 see us and usra.] 
 
 ustra, m. camel. 
 
 usna, a. hot. [Vus, 1177a.] 
 
 usra, a. bright; of or pertaining to the 
 dawn ; as /., usra, dawn. [V 1 vas, ' light 
 up/. 252, 1188, 181a : w. us-ra, cf. Old 
 Germanic Aus-t-ro, a goddess of the (year- 
 dawn, i.e.) spring-light, and AS. Eos-t-ra, 
 the name of whose festival, caster, 'Easter- 
 day/ occurring in April, was transferred 
 to the Christian festival that replaced it ; 
 for t between s and r, see under svasr: 
 see us and usas.] 
 
 utl,y. furtherance, help, blessing; refresh- 
 ment, food. [Vav, 1157.] 
 
 udhan, udhar, udhas [430b], n. udder, 
 [cf. oJflap, Lat. iiber, AS. uder, Eng. 
 udder.~\ 
 
 tin a, a. lacking, [cf. ffivis, 'bereft'; AS. 
 wan, ' lacking/ wanian, ' decrease/ Eng. 
 wane.] 
 
 urti, m. thigh, [prob. 'the thick' of the 
 leg, from urii.]
 
 [135] 
 
 [rna 
 
 u r j , f. sap ; strength ; vigor ; nourishment. 
 
 [\[*varj, 'swell with, be full of: cf. opydca, 
 
 'swell with, abound'; Lat. virga, 'swelling 
 
 twig.'] 
 urn a, n., and wcna,,f. wool, ['cover,' Vlvr, 
 
 'cover' (cf. 712): cf. tlpos, tt-Fp-os, Lat. 
 
 vellus, Goth, vulla, Eng. woo/.] 
 urna-mradas, a. having the softness of 
 
 wool, soft as wool. 
 
 urna-stuka,y! braid or plait of wool. 
 V urnu, see 712, and Vlvr. 
 urdhva, a. tending upwards; upright; 
 
 elevated ; -am, as adv., upwards ; over ; 
 
 beyond; after, w. abl, [1128]; ata urdh- 
 
 vam, from now on. [cf. Lat. arduus, 
 
 ' lofty.'] 
 urdhva-drsti, a. having an upward 
 
 gaze. [1298.] 
 
 urmi, m. wave. [lit. 'roller, rolling bil- 
 low,' V*VT, ' roll, turn hither and thither ' : 
 
 cf. ZAAco, *FI-F\-O>, Lat. volvo, ' roll ' ; Ger. 
 
 Welle, ' wave.'] 
 V luh (uhati; auhlt; udha, uhita ; uhi- 
 
 tum ; -uhya). remove. 
 V 2uh (6hate [745a]; uh6; aiihit, aiihista; 
 
 uhitum; -uhya). notice. 
 
 + a p i , grasp ; understand, 88 10 . 
 
 V r (iyarti [643c] ; rn6ti ; rcchati [753 
 end, 608] ; ara [783a 2 ] ; arat; arisyati ; 
 rta ; rtva ; -ftya ; arpayati [1042d]). 
 move, as trans, and as intrans. ; 1. rise, 
 73 10 ; come upon or unto, reach, attain ; 
 2. raise (e.g. dust); cans, send; put; 
 fasten ; fit in. [w. r-n6-ti, cf . up-vvcn, 
 ' rouses ' ; cf . Lat. or-ior, ' rise,' or-tus, 
 ' risen ' ; S>p-ro, ' rose,' = ar-ta, 3d sing. 
 aor. mid. ; w. r-ccha-ti, cf. fy-xe-rcu, 
 ' goes,' also i\-8e?p, ' go ' ; w. caus., cf . 
 ap-api(TK<a, ' fit,' Lat. ar-tu-s, ' well-fitted, 
 close, narrow ' ; see also rta.] 
 + a, 1. get into (trouble), 93 15 x.; 2. 
 (like the American go for, 'treat harshly 
 by word or deed ') visit with trouble ; ppl. 
 arta, visited by trouble, distressed. 
 + ud, rise ; raise. 
 
 + u p a , go against, transgress, [for mg, 
 cf. rna.] 
 
 + nis, (go forth, i.e.) dissolve connection 
 with. 
 
 + sam, come together, meet; go along 
 with, 73 9 ; caus. send; deliver to; con- 
 sign, entrust. 
 
 rkti, /. praise, in su-v-rkti. [Vrc.J 
 
 rg-veda, TO. the Rigveda (each stanza of 
 which is called an re in distinction from 
 a yajus and a saman). 
 
 V re (arcati; anarca, anrce [788]; arcis- 
 yati ; arcita ; arcitum ; arcitva ; -arcya ; 
 arcayati). 1. beam; 2. praise; sing 
 (praise); sing (of the winds); honor; 
 caus. [1041 2 ], salute, [cf. arka.] 
 
 fc, /. 1. hymn of praise; esp. a stanza 
 that is spoken, as distinguished from one 
 that is sung (saman) or from a sacrificial 
 formula (yajus); 2. stanza or text to 
 which a certain rite or explanation has 
 reference, 98 5 ; 3. the collection of re's, 
 the Rigveda, 57 ", 63 3 . [V re.] 
 
 rca, for re, at end ofcpds [1209a, 1315c]. 
 
 v/ Irj or rnj (rnjati, -te ; fjyati, -te). 
 reach out, esp. in a straight direction 
 (and so, the opp. of Vvrj, 'bend, turn,' q.v. 
 and see rju), stretch out, intrans. ; press 
 on; with this root, compare the root raj, 
 mg 1. [cf . opey-co, ' reach out ' ; Lat. 
 reg-ere, ' direct ' ; Eng. right, ' straight, not 
 wrong.'] 
 
 V 2rj (arjati; arjayati [1041 2 ]; arjita). 
 reach, and so, get or obtain, [the same 
 as Vlrj, but w. another conjugation and 
 w. trans, mg : for mg, cf . Eng. reach, in- 
 trans., w. reach, trans., and Ger. langen 
 and erlangen.] 
 
 V3rj, in rj-rd, 'ruddy,' arj-una, 'silver- 
 white ' ; see also the root raj and root raj, 
 mg 2. [cf . apy-6s, ' bright ' ; Lat. arguo, 
 ' make clear ' ; w. rajata, ' silver,' cf . 
 apyvpos, Lat. argentum, ' silver.'] 
 
 rjisa, a. on-rushing. [Vlrj, 1197b.] 
 
 rjisin, a. on-rushing, [rjisa, 1230a.] 
 
 rjii, a. straight, right, opp. of vrjina, 
 ' crooked, wrong.' [Vlrj, 1178a.] 
 
 sf rnj, see Vlrj. 
 
 rna, a. (having gone against or trans- 
 gressed, and so) guilty; as n. [1176a and 
 1177], guilt; debt, 25 2 . [Vr: cf. Lat. 
 reus, 'guilty' : for mg, cf. upara.]
 
 rta] 
 
 [136] 
 
 rta, a. fit, right; true; as w. [1176a], 1. 
 established order; esp. eternal or divine 
 order; 2. order in sacred things, sacred 
 custom, pious work, 69 15 , 74 9 ; rtasya 
 yoni or sadana, central place of sacred 
 work or belief : in this world, the altar, 
 89 8 ; in the other world, the holy of holies, 
 75 7 ; -3. truth, 98 8 - 9 ; -rtena, rightly, 
 [prop, 'fitted, made firm,' Vr: for form 
 and mg, cf . Lat. ra-tu-s, ' settled.'] 
 
 rta-sap [387a], a. following after right, 
 righteous. 
 
 rta van, f. -vari, a. true to established 
 order (of regularly recurring natural phe- 
 nomena, e.g. dawn), 75 17 ; true to sacred 
 law, pious (Manes), 91 10 ; holy, sacred 
 (god), 75 8 . [rta, 247 : for fern., 435, 
 1171 2 .] 
 
 rta-vfdh, a. rejoicing in right, holy 
 (Manes), [rta, 247.] 
 
 r t u , m. 1. a fixed and settled time ; esp. 
 time for sacrificing; 2. time of year, 
 i.e. season; 3. the menses. [Vr, 1161a: 
 cf . aprv-oa, ' fit together, prepare ' ; Lat. 
 artu-s, 'joint.'] 
 
 rt6, prep, without ; except. [1128 end, 1129 
 end.] 
 
 rtv-ij, a. offering at the appointed time; 
 as m. priest ; in the ritual, pi., priests, of 
 whom there are four, h6tr, adhvaryti, 
 brahman, and udgatf. [rtii + ij.] 
 
 fddhi, f. welfare; blessedness. [Vrdh, 
 1157.] 
 
 V rdh (rdhn6ti; anardha, anrdhe [788]; 
 ardhiayate ; rddha ; rdhyate). thrive; 
 succeed ; prosper, both as intrans. and as 
 trans, [cf . M edh, radh : cf . &\6ofj.a.i, ' get 
 well.'] 
 
 sani , pass, be prospered, i.e. fulfilled. 
 
 V Irs (araati; anarsa [788]). flow; glide, 
 [cf . &ty-oppos, ' flowing back,' tra.\iv-op<Tos, 
 ' darting back.'] 
 
 V 2ra (rsati; rata). push; thrust. 
 
 fai, m. 1. singer of sacred songs, poet; 
 priestly singer ; regarded by later genera- 
 tions as a patriarchal saint or sage of the 
 olden time and as occupying a position 
 given in other lands to the heroes and 
 patriarchs; one of those inspired poets 
 who "saw" the Vedas, which were "re- 
 
 vealed " to them ; 2. sapta^rsayas : 
 the many Rishis ; later, the seven stars of 
 the Great Bear; 3. a Rishi, i.e. a person 
 renowned for piety and wisdom, 100"; 
 see note to 1 u . 
 
 r a t i , f. spear. [V 2 rs.] 
 
 rsva, a. lofty. 
 
 e, pron. root in eka, eta, ena, eva, evam. 
 eka [482a], num. 1. one; only; alone 
 
 (by one's self) ; alone (excluding every 
 
 one else); sole; single; solitary; advly 
 
 in cpds, solely; 2. one (of two or more) ; 
 
 the one, followed by anya, dvitiya, para ; 
 
 eke eke, some others ; eke, some 
 
 folks, some ; 3. later, a certain, quidam ; 
 
 or almost as an indef. article [482a 3 ], a or 
 
 an, 20 8 . [pron. root e.] 
 eka-tatpara, a. solely intent on, 45*. 
 ekatra, adv. in one place, [eka, 1099.] 
 eka da, adv. at one time, simultaneously, 
 
 at 37 9 ; elsewhere, at a certain time, i.e. 
 
 once upon a time, [eka, 1103.] 
 eka-dega, m. a certain place, and so, a 
 
 place or spot or part. 
 
 eka-nakaatra, n. lunar mansion con- 
 sisting of a single star or one whose name 
 
 occurs but once, see 104 8 N. [naksatra, 
 
 1312.] 
 eka-patni, f. wife of only one man, 
 
 faithful wife, [acct, 1267a.] 
 eka-pada, f. -I, a. having (i.e, taking) 
 
 one step, 
 eka-bhaksa, m. sole food; at end of 
 
 cpds [1298], having as sole food, eating 
 
 alone. 
 
 eka-mati, a. having one mind, unanimous . 
 eka-varna, a. having one color, not 
 
 brindled. 
 
 ekakin, a. solitary, [eka.] 
 ekanjali, m. one handful, [anjali.] 
 ekadaga, num. eleven. [eka + daga, 
 
 476 2 .] 
 
 ekadaga, a. eleventh, [ekadaga, 487 7 .] 
 ekanta, m. an end; a retired or secret 
 
 spot, [anta.] 
 
 ekapaya, m. diminution by one. [apaya.] 
 ekartha, m. one purpose, i.e. one and 
 
 the same purpose, [artha.] 
 ekaha, m. one day. [2 aha.]
 
 [137] 
 
 [aikamatya 
 
 ekaika, a. one by itself; one singly; 
 each one singly ; every single one. [eka 
 + eka.] 
 
 ekaikagas, adv. one by one; severally, 
 [ekaika, 1106.] 
 
 ekona, a. lacking one. [una, 477a.] 
 
 eta, see etad and cf. 499b with 497. 
 
 6ta, a. rushing; darting; as m. deer. [Vi, 
 1176c.] 
 
 etat-sama, a. equal to this. [1265.] 
 
 etat-samlpa, n. presence of this one. 
 [12(54.] 
 
 etad [499b], pron. this here, prop, referring 
 to something near the speaker (e.g. 18 8 , 19 u , 
 51 19 ) ; this ; refers almost always to what 
 precedes (e.g. 6 9 , 19 3 , 51 18 , 68 5 ), has just 
 happened (e.g. 20 n , 25 12>13 ), or has just 
 been mentioned (e.g. 7 5 , 25 18 , 28 n ), as being 
 nearer the speaker; very seldom 28 6 , 92 19 , 
 96 5 to what follows ; joined with other 
 pronouns: w. yad, 94 15 ; w. tad, 45 9 , 95 6 ; 
 w. aham to be supplied, 52 9 . [pron. root 
 e, 499b : in usage, etad : idam : : Tav- 
 ra : ra5e.] 
 
 etad-artham, adv. for this purpose ; 
 therefore. [499b 2 , 1302c 4 .] 
 
 e tar hi, adv. nowadays, [eta, 1103c.] 
 
 eta-drg, a. such; etadrk, ace. s. n., such 
 as I have, 82 ". [518.] 
 
 eta-drga, a. such ; et. yat, such 
 that. [518.] 
 
 etavant, a. thus much, 12 9 ; etavan 
 yena, so great that, 21 10 . [eta, 517.] 
 
 V e d h ( 6dhate ; edham cakre ; aidhista ; 
 edhita ; dhitum). thrive; prosper, 
 [ident. w. v'rdh, q.v. : cf. geha w. 
 grha.] 
 
 en a [500], end. pron. used only substantive- 
 ly ; unemphatic him, her, it, them. [pron. 
 root e.] 
 
 en as, n. sin. [perhaps, ' deed of violence,' 
 Vin.] 
 
 enasvant, a. sinful, [enas.] 
 
 en a, adv. in this way; here; para ena: 
 beyond here ; beyond, w. instr., RV. x. 
 125. 8 ; there ; yatra ena, whither 
 thither, [pron. root a, see idam, and cf. 
 502 2 andlll2a.] 
 
 eranda, m. Ricinus communis, i.e. castor- 
 oil plant or Palma Christi. 
 
 eva, adv. 1. in this way; so; in this sig- 
 nification Vedic only, its place being supplied 
 in post-Vedic l>y evam ; yatha eva, as 
 so, 86 13 ; eva^id, in very truth, 74 6 ; 
 
 2. just, exactly, etc., emphasizing the 
 preceding word; in this sense Vedic (69 5 , 
 85 J , 87 1 , 91 5 ) and post-Vedic; requires the 
 most various translations sometimes mere 
 stress of voice : precisely; no more nor less 
 than ; nothing short of ; no other than ; 
 merely ; quite ; without exception ; andha 
 eva, blind outright; vasudha^eva, the 
 whole earth ; mrtyur eva, sure deatli ; 
 musika eva krtas, was changed back to a 
 simple mouse ; cintayann eva, just while 
 he was thinking; uktam eva maya, just 
 what I told thee ; lokaih kimcid vak- 
 tavyam eva, folks will be sure to say 
 something ; eka eva, entirely alone ; pu- 
 mansa eva, only males ; in connection w. 
 pronouns and adverbs: etad eva, this very; 
 tatha^eva, all so, i.e. also ; na^eva, by no 
 means ; w. very attenuated mg in ca^eva, 
 and also, and eva ca, and also, the latter at 
 end of a cloka, 58 15 . [pron. root e, 1102b : 
 sometimes eva, 248a.] 
 
 evam-vld,a. knowing so or such, i.e. well 
 instructed, knowing what's what. 
 
 evamvidha, a. of such sort, such, [evam 
 (1306) +vidha, 1302c 5.] 
 
 evam, adv. in this way ; so ; post-Vedic, and 
 supplying the place of eva in my 1 ; used 
 first w. V vid : ya evam vidiis, who know 
 thus, have this knowledge, 97 1>3 ; yatha 
 evam, as so ; very frequent w. uktva 
 or grutva, upon saying or hearing this ; 
 evam ukta, thus addressed ; w. impers. 
 used ppl., 7 8 , 39 22 ; evam astu, so be it ; 
 ma^evam, not so ! yady evam, if that's 
 the case, 48 n ; evam, in that case, II 4 ; 
 evam, likewise, 103 7 ; refers back (e.g. 28 21 , 
 52 8 ), or forward (e.g. 31 5 , 37 8 , 50 6 ) ; used 
 superfluously w. iti, 61 12 ; as eguiv. to evam- 
 vidha, 15*. [pron. root e, 1102b.] 
 
 evam-bhuta, a. such, [see 1273c.] 
 
 eso, a Prakrit form for esas, 49 8 
 
 aikamatya, n. unanimity. [ekamati, 
 1211.]
 
 aitihasika] 
 
 [138] 
 
 aitihasika, m. teller of old legends, [iti- 
 
 hasa, 1222e 2.] 
 aindr abarhaspatya, a. belonging to 
 
 Indra and Brihaspati. [indrabfhaspati, 
 
 1204c.] 
 
 6kas, n. wonted place; home. [Vuc.] 
 
 om-krta, a. having an uttered om, accom- 
 panied by om. [the natural order would 
 require krtaum: order inverted to avoid 
 such an undeclinable stem.] 
 
 6jas, n. strength; power. [Vvaj oruj, 252, 
 cf. ug-ram 6j-as, 78 6 : cf. Lat. augus-tus, 
 ' mighty, i.e. august.'] 
 
 o jo-da [352], a. strength-giving. 
 
 o d a n a , m. n. grain boiled with milk ; por- 
 ridge. [Vud: for mg, cf. Eng. broth and 
 brew."] 
 
 opaga, m. top-knot; plume, [perhaps for 
 *ava-pac.a, V2pa.] 
 
 6m, a word of solemn asseveration and rev- 
 erent acknowledgment, somewhat like &/j.-fii>; 
 a sacred mystic syllable, uttered at the beg. 
 and end of Veda-reading ; cf. pranava. 
 [origin uncertain.] 
 
 6sadhi, later 6sadhi, /. herb; plant; a 
 simple. 
 
 aupamya, n. similitude; likeness, [upa- 
 
 ma, 1211.] 
 aupavegi, m. patronymic of Aruna. [lipa- 
 
 vegi (or upavega?) : cf. 1221.] 
 a u sad ha, a. consisting of herbs; as n. 
 
 herbs collectively ; simples ; medicine. 
 
 [6sadhi, 1208d.]' 
 
 I ka [504], pron. 1. interrogative, who, 
 what; used as subst. (7 6 - 7 ) or as adj. 
 (18 17 ); kim w. instr.: e.g. kim yuddhena, 
 what (is there) with fighting, what's the 
 use of fighting, 45 14 ; so 17 19 , 24 9 ; so ko 
 'rthas, 17 18 ; kim w. instr. and gen. : e.g. 
 nirujah kim ausaclhais, what has a well 
 man (to do) with medicines, 22 3 ; so 32 21 , 
 61 z ~* ; ka w. particles : ko nama, who in- 
 deed ; ko nu, who pray ; ko va, who pos- 
 sibly, 18 1; 
 
 2. indefinite, both adj. and subst., chiefly 
 in negative clauses and w. the particles [see 
 
 507] ca, cana, cid, api; 2 a. w. ma: ma 
 kasmai dhatam abhy amitrine nas, de- 
 liver us not over to any foe ; 2b. ka ca, 
 some, any, adj. or subst. ; kim ca, any- 
 thing; w. relative, yag (ca) kag ca, (and) 
 what soever, 68 10 ; 2c. w. ca na and 
 cana : ka ca na, also or even not any ; 
 esp. after a negative : na tarn gaknuvanti 
 vyahartum api, kim ca na, can not even 
 speak to him, not even anything, i.e. can 
 not even speak anything to him, 8 19 ; so 
 96 21 ; and so (the feeling for the negation in 
 cana in such collocations becoming lost), ka 
 cana means any, anything, cf. cana ; w. 
 relative, soever ; yat kimcana, whatsoever, 
 9 16 ; 2d. very often ka cid: any body or 
 thing; certain, 18 u ; often w. negative: e.g. 
 99. 2411 (twice with, twice without) ; kimcit 
 kimcid, each a little, 27 9 ; w. relative, ya 
 ka cid, whosoever, whatsoever, any soever, 
 21 n ; kani kani cid, any soever, 82 15 ; 
 2e. ka api, something, somebody, 17 n ; 
 some, a or an, a certain, 21 2 ; na ka api: 
 nothing, 39 21 ; no, no one", 20 10 ; 
 
 3. derivs of ka, see 505 ; 4. exclam- 
 atory, at beg. of cpds : cf., e.g., ka-purusa, 
 kim-prabhu, ku-drsti, ko-vida, and see 
 506, 1121e ; 5. for kim as adv., see kim. 
 [for the stem-forms ka, ki, ku, see 505 : 
 cf. Ionic /co-, Attic TO-, in K6-Qev, KUS, etc., 
 'whence, how'; ri-s, rl, Lat. qui-s, qui-d, 
 AS. hwa, hwas-t, Eng. who, wha-t ; w. ka- 
 tara, 'which of twain,' cf. it6-Tepo-s, Lat. 
 uter, AS. hwce-^er, Eng. whe-ther, ' which of 
 twain ' ; w. ka as indef ., cf . n-s, ' any one.'] 
 
 2 ka, m. Who, as name of a god, 94 15 - 16 N. 
 
 kansa, m. metallic vessel; as collective, 
 metallic implements. 
 
 kaksa,/. 1. region of the girth; 2. 
 girdle, cincture ; 3. (like French ceinture) 
 circular wall ; and so the enclosed court, 
 [cf. kankana : cf. Lat. cinc-tus, 'girded'; 
 for 1, cf. coxa, 'hip'; for 3, cf. canc-er, 
 ' fence.'] 
 
 kankana, n. ring-shaped ornament, brace- 
 let, [cf. kaksa.] 
 
 kankala, m. n. skeleton. 
 
 kaccid, see kad. 
 
 kaccha, m. border; shore; marsh-land ;. 
 the district Cutch.
 
 [139] 
 
 [2kara 
 
 kaccha-pa, m. tortoise, ['keeping, i.e. 
 inhabiting the marsh/ vbl 2 pa.] 
 
 kataka, m. n. dale. 
 
 kana, m. a small grain (as of dust or rice), 
 [cf. kanistha.] 
 
 kantaka, m. thorn. 
 
 kantaki-ksirin, m. pi. thorn-plants and 
 milk-plants. 
 
 kantakin, a. thorny; as m. thorn-plant, 
 [kantaka.] 
 
 k at ham, Vedic katha, interr. adv. how? 
 in what way ? katham etat, how's that ? 
 kathaih nu, how indeed ? katham cana, 
 in any wise soever (emphasizing a preced- 
 ing negation) ; katham api, somehow, [ka, 
 1101.] 
 
 \l kathaya (kathayati). tell ; talk about ; 
 pass, be called, pass for. [lit. ' tell the 
 how,' 'rb oiroas \tyeiv' : denom. fr. katham, 
 1058.] 
 
 1 katha, see katham. 
 
 2 katha,/. 1. story, tale, fable ; discus- 
 sion; 2. personified, Story, 56. [prop. 
 ' the how, TO oirtas,' 1 katha.] 
 
 katha-chala, n. cover or guise of a 
 fable. 
 
 katha-pitha,n. pedestal of Katha, name 
 of the first book of the Katha-sarit-sagara. 
 [2 katha, mg 2.] 
 
 kathavatara, m. incarnation of Katha. 
 [2 katha (mg 2) -j- avatara.] 
 
 katha-sarit-sagara, m. Story-stream- 
 ocean, title of Soma-deva's collection. 
 
 kad, interr. pel. nonne, num; w. cid, nonne, 
 num ; kaccid drsta, was she seen ? [crys- 
 tallized ace. s. n. of ka, lllla.] 
 
 kad a, adv. when? na kada cana, not at 
 any time soever, never ; kada cid, once on 
 a time, one day ; kada cid api na, never. 
 [ka, 1103.] 
 
 kadru, a. brown; kadru [355c], f. brown 
 Soma-vessel. 
 
 V kan or ka (cake; akanit). be glad. [cf. 
 v'kam and Vcan.] 
 
 kanaka, n. gold. 
 
 kanaka-sutra, n. gold cord or chain. 
 
 kanaka-stambha-r ucira, a. shining 
 with gold columns. 
 
 kanistha, a. smallest ; youngest, [cf . the 
 following words and kana and kanya.] 
 
 kanisthaka, a. smallest; f. -ika [1222d], 
 sc. anguli, the little finger, [kanistha.] 
 
 kanistha-prathama, a. having the 
 youngest as the first. 
 
 kanlyans, a. smaller; younger. [cf. 
 kanistha and 467 2 .] 
 
 kandara, n. cave, [perhaps 'great cleft/ 
 kain (see ka4) + dara.] 
 
 kandarpa, m. the god of love, [perhaps 
 'of great wantonness/ kam (see ka4) + 
 darpa.] 
 
 kanyaka,/ girl, [kanya, 1222b.] 
 
 kanya, f. girl; maiden; daughter, [cf. 
 kanistha.] 
 
 kanya-ratna, n. girl-jewel, excellent 
 maiden. 
 
 kapata, m. n. fraud. 
 
 kapata-prabandha, m. continued se- 
 ries of frauds; machination, plot. 
 
 kaparda, m. small shell used as a coin, 
 80 = 1 paua; -aka, m. the same. 
 
 kapala, n. 1. cup or dish, 102 13 ; 2. 
 cover or lid, 104 16 ; 3. cranium, [for 
 mg, cf . Lat. testa, ' earthen pot/ w. French 
 tete, 'head.'] 
 
 kap6ta, m. dove. 
 
 kam, pel. 1. emphasizing the preceding 
 word, 79 ; -2. interr. pel., 88 10 . [ka, 
 lllla : cf. kad, kim.] 
 
 V kam (cakame; kamisyate; kanta [955a] ; 
 kamayate, -ti [1041 2 ]). wish; will; de- 
 sire; love. [cf. v'kan and Vcan.] 
 
 kamandalu, m. water-jar. 
 
 V kamp (kampate ; cakampe ; kampita; 
 kampitum; -kampya). tremble or shake. 
 
 kambala, m. woolen cloth. 
 
 kambu, m. shell. 
 
 kambu-griva, m. Shell-neck (i.e. having 
 folds in the neck like a spiral shell), name 
 of a tortoise, [griva.] 
 
 1 kara, 1. a. doing; making or causing 
 or producing, at end of many cpds ; 2. as 
 m. the hand (lit. the busy one) ; 3. as m. 
 nomen actionis, the doing, performance, in 
 duskara, sukara. [V 1 kr : cf . Lat. cerus, 
 ' creator.'] 
 
 2 kara, m. ray, beam. [prob. same as 
 1 kara 2 : the rays of the heavenly bodies 
 are conceived as their hands and feet, cf. 
 pada 4.]
 
 karavarij 
 
 [140] 
 
 kara-vari, n. water from the hand, 
 karuna, a. mournful, pitiable; -a, f. pity, 
 karuna-para, a. compassionate. [1302b.] 
 karkata, m. crab; -aka, the same. 
 karna, m. ear. 
 karta, m. (earth-) cut, ditch. [Vkrt: see 
 
 garta.] 
 k a r t f , m. doer ; accomplisher ; officiating 
 
 priest, 101 . [Vlkr.] 
 kartavya, grdv. to be done or made, w. 
 
 the various mgs of \f 1 kr. [V 1 kr.] 
 k a r t a v y a t a , /. the to-be-done-ness ; -tarn 
 
 bruhi, tell me what I must do. [1237.] 
 karpura, m. n. camphor, 
 karpura-pata, m. Camphor-cloth, name 
 
 of a certain washerman, 
 karpura-vilasa, m. Camphor-joy (lit. 
 
 having pleasure in camphor), name of a 
 
 washerman. 
 
 karma, for karman in cpds, 1249a 2 . 
 karma-ccsta,/". deed-performance; ac- 
 tion, 
 karma-ja, a. deed-born, resulting from 
 
 the actions of a life. 
 
 karma-dosa, m. deed-sin, sinful deed, 
 karman, n. deed, work, action ; sacred 
 
 work (as sacrifice, ablution); rite, 59 l . 
 
 [Vlkr.] 
 kar hi, adv. when? karhi cid, at any time. 
 
 [ka, llOSc.] 
 V kal (kalayati). drive, [cf. Kf\f rat, ' urges 
 
 on ' ; &ov-ic6\os, ' cattle driver ' ; Lat. celer, 
 
 (like colloq. driving, i.e. ' hurrying ') ' swift.'] 
 - anu-sam, lead along after, 
 kal a, a. dumb; indistinct; -am, adv. gen- 
 tly, and so pleasantly (of humming), 
 kal ah a, m. strife, contention, 
 kal a, f. a small part, esp. a sixteenth, 
 kalpa, m. ordinance, precept; manner, 
 
 way ; etena kalpena, in this way. 
 kalmasa, n. spot, stain; Jig., as in Eng., 
 
 sin. 
 kalmasa-dhvansa-karin, a. sin-de- 
 
 struction-causing, preventing the commis- 
 sion of crime, 
 k a 1 y a , a. well, healthy, [cf . ica\6s, ' fair ' : 
 
 prob. not akin are AS. hdl, Eng. hale, 
 
 whole.'} 
 kal y an a, /. -ani [355b], a. fair, lovely. 
 
 [kaly'a.] 
 
 kalyana-kataka, m.n. Fair-dale, name 
 
 of a place. 
 kavi, a. wise, possessed of insight (of gods, 
 
 esp. Agni) ; as m. wise man, seer, sage ; 
 
 poet; pi. wise men of eld (whose spirits 
 
 hover about the sun), 91 12 . [prop, 'seer,' 
 
 Vkii, 'see,' for *sku: cf. BuoaKdos, *-<TKOFO-S, 
 
 ' inspecting the sacrifice ' ; Lat. cav-ere, 
 
 ' look out, be cautious ' ; Ger. schauen, AS. 
 
 scedwian, 'look,' Eng. show, 'cause to look 
 
 at.'] 
 kavi-kratu, a. having the power or in- 
 
 sight (kratu) of a wise one ; intelligent. 
 
 [1296.] 
 V kas (kasati; kasta ; kasayati). move. 
 
 + vi, move asunder; open; bloom; caus. 
 
 pass, be made to bloom. 
 kas mat, adv. why? wherefore? [ka, 
 
 kansya, a. brazen; as n. brass, [kansa.] 
 kaka, m. crow; f- kaki, crow-hen; cf. 
 
 vayasa, 'crow.' 
 V kanks (kanksati, -te ; cakanksa ; 
 
 kanksita). desire, long for. [desid. of 
 
 \ kam, but reduplicated somewhat like an 
 
 intens. (1002), *kam-ka(m)-s.] 
 kaca, m. glass. 
 kaca-mani, m. rock-crystal, quartz, [lit. 
 
 ' glass-jewel.'] 
 kancana, n. gold. 
 kana, a. one-eyed; perforated (of the 
 
 eye), blind. 
 kana-bhuti, m. Kanabhuti, name of a 
 
 Yaksha, see 53 3 N. [lit. ' Blind-luck.'] 
 kanda, m. n. section; joint of a stalk 
 
 from one knot to another ; arrow. 
 kantara, m. n. great or primeval forest. 
 kanti, f. loveliness. [Vkam, 1157, cf. 
 
 955a.] 
 ka-purusa, m. miserable man, coward. 
 
 [see Ika4, and 506.] 
 kam a, m. wish, desire, longing; love; at 
 
 end of possessive cpds [1296], having desire 
 
 for , desirous of ; kaniain, see s.v. 
 
 [V kam.] 
 kama-duh (-dhuk, -duham, -dhugbhis, 
 
 etc. [155]), 1. a. yielding wishes, grant- 
 
 ing every wish ; 2. as f., sc. dhenu, the 
 
 fabulous Wonder-cow.' [for 2, cf. the 
 
 horn of Amalthea.]
 
 [141] 
 
 [Vkirtaya 
 
 k jtm am, adv. at will; if you please; 
 
 kamam tu na tu, if she please, , but 
 
 by no means , 64 12 . [kama, llllb.] 
 kamin, a. subst. affectionate (spouse). 
 
 [kama. ] 
 kamini-sakha, a. in the company of 
 
 his wives, [see sakha.] 
 kaya, m. body. [Vlci, 'build,' Whitney 
 
 43 : for mg, cf . 5e'/*as, ' body, form/ and 
 
 Sffjica, ' build,' and Eng. noun build, as used 
 
 of ' a man's figure.'] 
 kayika, a. corporeal; performed by the 
 
 body, [kaya.] 
 kara, a. making; as m. maker; deed, 
 
 action; sound, [\llkr.] 
 k a r a n a , n. that which makes or occasions ; 
 
 cause, 57 7 ; occasion; reason; sake, 10 1 ; 
 
 ground for a judgment, 22 n . [Vlkr.] 
 karin, a. causing, [do.] 
 karii, m. praiser, poet, singer. [V2kr, 
 
 ' mention with praise.'] 
 karttikeya, m. metronymic of Skanda, 
 
 god of war (so called because he was 
 
 nourished by the Pleiads, krttikas) : cf. 
 
 kumara and svamikumara. [ krttika. 
 
 1216.] 
 karya, grdv. to be done, faciendus, w. the 
 
 various shades of mg belonging to V 1 kr ; 
 
 requiring to be instituted, 4 19 ; requiring 
 
 to be shown; as n. what is to be done; 
 
 business ; work ; matter, 4 n ; affair ; duty ; 
 
 emergency. [V 1 kr, 963b.] 
 karya-kala, m. time for action, 
 karya-hantr, m. business-destroyer, 
 
 mar-plot, 
 karyaksama, a. unequal to or unfit for 
 
 work, [aksama.] 
 
 kala, m. 1. the right or proper or ap- 
 pointed time ; 2. time in general ; 3. 
 
 Time, as the destroyer, i.e. Death, 
 kala-paga, m. snare of Death, 
 kavya, n. poetry; poem, [kavi.] 
 kavyagastra-vinoda, m. entertainment 
 
 with poetry and science, [kavya-gastra, 
 
 1252.] 
 V kag (karate; cakag ; kagita ; -kagya). 
 
 be visible ; shine. 
 
 + ava, be visible, lie open. 
 
 + a , look on. 
 
 + pra, shine out; become clear. 
 
 kaga, m. visibility, in sakaga. [Vkag.] 
 kastha, n. stick of wood; log. 
 kastha-ccheda, m. dearth of wood. 
 
 [227.] 
 
 kastha-bharika, m. wood-carrier, 
 kastha, / race-course; course; track of 
 
 the winds and clouds in the sky. 
 kasthika, m. woodman, [kastha.] 
 ki, cf. Ika 4, ana* 504. 
 kim-suhrd, m. a bad friend, [see 1 ka 4, 
 
 and 506.] 
 kit ava, m. gambler; f. -vi, as a., addicted 
 
 to gaming, [poss. kim + tava, ' what of 
 
 thee ? ' ' what is thy stake ? '] 
 kim, 1. as nom.acc.s.n. to kd, see Ika; 
 
 -2. as interr. adv. [lllla], how? 73 8 - 
 
 why? 18 10 ; 3. as interr. pel.: num; kim 
 
 aham ajnas, am I a fool? 39 21 ; an, 78 13 , 
 
 4. in connection w. other pels: kim ca, 
 
 moreover, see ca 3 ; kim tu, however, 20 12 ; 
 
 kim cana, somewhat, 46 9 ; kim punar, 
 
 how much more (or less)? 17 15 . [see 
 
 under 1 ka.] 
 kim- art ha, a. having what as object; 
 
 kimartham, as adv. why ? [1302c4.] 
 kim-prabhu, m. a bad master, [see 
 
 Ika 4, and 506.] 
 
 kim-bhrtya, m. a bad servant, [do.] 
 kiyad-dura, n. small distance; -re, as 
 
 adv. [1116], a little way. [kiyant.] 
 kiyant [451], pron. a. 1. how great? 
 
 how much? what sort of a? 45 10 ; 2. 
 
 (how great, in a derogatory sense, i.e.) not 
 
 great ; small, 46 l . [1 ka or ki, 505, 
 
 1172 2 .] 
 
 kiyambu, n. water-lily, perhaps, [cf.ambu.] 
 kila, kila [248a], adv. indeed, emphasizing 
 
 the foregoing word. 
 kis, interr. pel. so at 88 10 . [Ika, 504 2 : 
 
 see 1117: cf. nakis.] 
 kit a, m. worm; caterpillar, 
 kidrg-vyapara, m. what business. 
 
 [kidrg, 145.] 
 kidrgvyaparavant, a. having what 
 
 business. [1233.] 
 
 kidfg, a. of what sort? [see 518.] 
 klri, m. praiser. [V2kr.] 
 V kirtaya (kirtayati [1056, 1067]; pass. 
 
 kirtyate). 1. make mention of; tell; 
 
 -2. repeat; call, [kirti, 1061 '.]
 
 kirti] 
 
 [142] 
 
 + pari, tell around, announce. 
 
 + s am, announce, 
 kirti,/. mention; esp. good report, fame. 
 
 [V2kr.] 
 
 ku, see Ika4, and 504. 
 kukkura, m. dog. [younger form of 
 
 the onomatopoetic kurkura.] 
 kutumba, n. household; family; -aka, 
 
 the same. 
 
 kuttani,/. bawd. 
 k uncla, n. round vessel; round hole in 
 
 the ground (for water or sacred fire), 
 kundala, n. ring, esp. ear-ring. [cf. 
 
 kunda and 1227.] 
 kiitas, adv. from what place? whence? 
 
 wherefore? why? how? 19 ". [Ika or 
 
 ku, 505.] 
 
 kutuhala, n. 1. interest felt in some- 
 thing extraordinary ; eagerness ; -at, as 
 
 adv. [1114b], eagerly; 2. interest caused 
 
 by something remarkable, 56 u . 
 kiitra, adv. where 1 ? whither? [Ika or 
 
 ku, 505.] 
 
 ku-drsti, f. a bad or false view; hete- 
 rodox philosophy. [see 1 kd, 4, and 
 
 506.] 
 kunti,/ Kunti, one of the two wives of 
 
 Pandu. 
 V kup (kupyati ; cuk6pa; kupita). 1. 
 
 become moved or agitated ; boil ; and so 
 
 2. Jig., as in Eng., be angry ; boil with 
 
 rage. 
 
 + p r a , the same. 
 kumara, m. 1. new-born child; boy; 
 
 youth, 51 10 ; -2. The Youth, epithet of 
 
 Skanda, the eternally youthful god of 
 
 war see karttikeya ; f. -ri, girl. [cf. 
 
 sukumara.] 
 kumara-datta, m. name of a man. 
 
 [' given by the god Kumara.'] 
 kumbha, m. jar; pot; urn. [cf. Ki5/xr?, 
 
 ' vessel.'] 
 
 kumbha-kara, m. pot-maker, potter, 
 kumbhika,/ pitcher, [kumbha.] 
 kuru, m. as pi. the Kurus, a people of 
 
 India ; as sing. Kuru, the ancestor of that 
 
 people, 
 kuru-gravana, m. name of a prince. 
 
 [lit. ' glory of the Kurus,' like nv6o-K\rjs : 
 
 acct, 1271.] 
 
 kill a, n. 1. herd or large number or 
 swarm (of quadrupeds, birds, insects) ; 
 
 2. race ; family ; and so, as in Eng., 
 good family, noble stock. [V3kr, q.v. : 
 cf. akula.J 
 
 kula-gila, n. family and character. 
 [1253b.] 
 
 kiilala, m. potter. 
 
 kii-liga, m. axe. [perhaps ' cutting 
 well,' see Ika 4, and 506.] 
 
 kulina, a. of good family, [kula, 1223d.] 
 
 kulira, m. crab. 
 
 kugd, m. grass; esp. the sacred grass, Poa 
 cynosuroides, with long stalks and numer- 
 ous pointed leaves. 
 
 kuga-pifij ula, n. tuft or bunch of Ku?a. 
 
 k u a la, 1. a. in good condition; equal 
 to or fit for a task ; able ; clever, 46 18 ; 
 
 2. as n. welfare, well-being ; kugalam 
 te, hail to thee. 
 
 kugalin,a. well; prosperous. [kuala 2.J 
 
 kuga-hasta, a. having Ku9a in the 
 hand. [1303.] 
 
 V ku (kuvate). found only w. a, and per- 
 haps meaning see, look. [prob. for #sku, 
 see under kavi.] 
 
 + a , look forward to, i.e. intend, [see 
 akuta.] 
 
 kuta, 1. n. horn; 2. m. n. peak, [for 
 mg 2, cf. the Swiss peak-names, Schreck- 
 horn, Wetter-horn, etc.] 
 
 kup a, m. cave, hole; well. [cf. KUTTTJ, 
 ' cave, hut/ Lat. cupa, ' vat,' ' niche for 
 the dead,' borrowed Eng. coop, ' vat/ 
 whence cooper.^ 
 
 kurma, m. tortoise. 
 
 V Ikr (Vedic, krn6ti, krnute [715]; later, 
 kar6ti, kurute [714]; cakara, cakre; V. 
 akar, akrta [831, 834a]; later, akarsit; 
 karisyati ; krta ; kartum ; krtva ; -kftya ; 
 kriyate ; cikirsati; karayati, -te). do, 
 make, in the various meanings and uses of 
 these words; thus, 
 
 1. perform, 59 21 ; accomplish; cause; 
 effect ; prepare, 83 15 ; undertake, 52 2 ; 
 commit, 29 12 ; show: e.g. honor, 5 6 ; fami- 
 liarity, 9 n ; compassion, 21 19 ; love, 42 18 ; 
 favor, 52 21 ; contempt, 54 16 ; attend to : 
 an affair, II 4 ; engage in: trade, 46 n ; a 
 quarrel, 42 19 ; 2. do something (good or
 
 [143] 
 
 Lkrta 
 
 bad) for a person (yen.), 3 2 , 9 15 ; -3. 
 make or procure for another, 82 4 ; grant ; 
 
 middle: get for one's self; assume: 
 human voice, 3 u ; take on : form or shape, 
 48 3 , 49 6 ; 4. execute; follow: advice, 
 40 7 ; 5. work over, prepare : food, 68 3 ; 
 
 6. accomplish; be good for, 18 5 ; 7. 
 make : a sound, 26 n ; utter : the syllable 
 
 om, 60 8 ' 9 ; 
 
 8. (like Eng. do in don, doff) put in 
 or on; w. loc., 81 >, 43 6 ; set, 105 U ; w. 
 adverbs : see agratas, ama, avis, tiras, 
 puras, bahis ; 9. make a person (ace.) 
 to be something (ace.), 79 12 ; transform 
 into, 40 13 ff . ; render, w. factitive predicate 
 ace., 18 8 ; w. the predicate in composition 
 [1094]: e.g. sajji-kr, make ready, 34 17 ; 
 10. w. adv. in -dha, divide in parts, 
 57 10 ; 11. do, go to work, proceed, 37 8 ; 
 pass, impers., 30 16 ; 12. do, esp. sacred 
 work ; with karma, 97 2 ; without karma 
 (like pefciv Off and facere), to sacrifice, 
 93 12 _ see also krta. 
 
 desid. desire to perform; ppl. [1037], 
 cikirsita, that which is sought to be done, 
 intention. 
 
 cans, cause to do or make or be done 
 or made ; see to it that a thing takes 
 place, 16 1 ; pass, tena sa pranamam 
 karitas, by him he was caused to make 
 obeisance, 36 7 ; caws, equiv. to simple verb, 
 265. 
 
 [cf. ai>To-Kpd-T<ap, ' self-actor, indepen- 
 dent ' ; Kp6-vos, an old harvest-god, ' Per- 
 ficus, the Completer, Ilipener ' ; Lat. cer-us, 
 ' creator ' ; Kpaivu, ' accomplish ' ; Lat. 
 credre, ' create ' : see kratu : orig. root- 
 form, perhaps, skr, 1087d.] 
 + ad hi, put over; put in office. 
 + a p a , put off ; injure, opp. of upakr. 
 + a ram or alam, see these words. 
 + a , bring hither, 74 10 ; prepare, fashion, 
 make. 
 
 + v y - a , separate, analyse. 
 + up a, bring something to some one; do 
 a service, act as an auxiliary, opp. of 
 apakr. [w. the use of upa, cf. that of sub 
 in subvenire, ' aid.'] 
 
 + pari, (poss. surround, deck, and so) 
 make ready ; adorn. 
 
 + pra, 1. carry forward, accomplish; 
 effectuate, cause ; 2. mid. set before ; 
 put before one, i.e. make the subject of 
 discussion or treatment ; w, buddhim, put 
 a plan before one's self, i.e. decide. 
 + prati, work against, counteract. 
 + sam, 1. put together; conficere, 
 prepare ; 2. treat according to the 
 sacred usages, administer a sacrament 
 to, see samskara; consecrate, 106 3 ; 3. 
 adorn. 
 
 V 2kr (akarit; intens. carkarti). mention 
 with praise. 
 
 V 3kr (kirati [242]; cakara, cakre; akarit; 
 karisyati; kirnd [957b] ; -kirya). pour 
 out or scatter abundantly (e.g. hail-stones) ; 
 cast forth (missiles); strew; cover or fill 
 with. [cf. kula, ' swarm.'] 
 + vy-ati, pass, be scattered in various 
 directions; be brought to confusion, [cf. 
 vyatikara, 'disaster.'] 
 + ava, strew (loose earth); throw in. 
 + a, scatter abundantly ; cover over, fill ; 
 aklrna, bestrown, covered, [cf. akara, 
 'abundance, mine/ akula, 'full.'] 
 + sam-a, bestrew; cover. 
 
 krcchra, a. distressful; troublesome; as 
 n. trouble. 
 
 krcchra-karman, n. hard work; drudg- 
 ery. 
 
 V krt (krntati, -te [758] ; cakarta ; akrtat; 
 kartisyati, kartsyati ; krtta ; -kftya ; 
 krtyate). cut; cut off. [cf. kata (for 
 karta, 'cut, depression in the head,' i.e.), 
 'temple,' and Kpdr-cupos, 'temple'; Lat. 
 curt-us, 'docked, short.'] 
 + ud, cut out or off; cut up, butcher. 
 
 1 krt, vbl in cpds. making; doing; caus- 
 ing; as m. maker. [Vlkr, 1147c.] 
 
 2 krt, a time, in sa-krt. [perhaps fr. 
 Vlkr, 'a doing, a time': cf. kftu, 'a 
 time.'] 
 
 krta, a. 1. made; done; 2. prepared; 
 3. attained, 4. well done, and so, 
 good; 5. as n. deed; 6. (perhaps 
 made, i.e. won) and so, the side of the 
 die marked with four spots, the lucky 
 or winning one ; 7. the golden age, 
 name of the first yuga, see 58 2 N. 
 [Vlkr.]
 
 krtakrtya] 
 
 [144] 
 
 krta-krtya, a. having one's duty done 
 
 or end attained, 
 krtakrtyata, f. condition of having 
 
 performed one's duty. [1237.] 
 krta-buddhi, a. having a made-up 
 
 mind, of resolute character. 
 krta-mauna, a. having a kept silence, 
 
 silent, 
 krta-samketa, a. having an agreement 
 
 made, agreed upon as a rendezvous, 
 krtanjali, a. having a made gesture of 
 
 reverence, with reverent gesture, [anjali.] 
 krtanna, n. prepared or cooked food. 
 
 [anna.] 
 krtavajna, a. having contempt (done, 
 
 i.e.) shown to one, disdained, [avajna.] 
 kfti, f. 1. the doing, the production; 
 
 2. a production, literary work, [v'lkr.] 
 kftu, a doing, a time; only in ace. pi. 
 
 -krtvas, and that at the end of cpds. 
 
 [Vlkr, 1105 .] 
 krte, as prep, on account of, for the sake 
 
 of, for, w. gen. [1130] or in composition. 
 
 [loc. of krta, lit. 'in the matter of (cf. 
 
 mg 5), 1116.] 
 kftti, f. pelt, hide. [Vkrt: for mg, cf. 
 
 Sfp/j.a, ' hide/ and Seipw, ' flay.'] 
 kfttika, f. pi. the Pleiads, [cf. krtti : 
 
 perhaps the constellation was conceived 
 
 as having the shape of a pelt.] 
 krtya, grdv. to be done; as n. that which 
 
 ought to be done or is to be done, and so, 
 
 duty, purpose, end; f. -a, action, deed. 
 
 [v'lkr, 963beni] 
 krtvas, adv. times; see krtu. 
 krtsnd, a. whole; entire. 
 V krp (kfpate [745b]). mourn, lament, 
 krpa,/. pity, compassion. [Vkrp.] 
 kfmi, m. worm. 
 V kr (kfgyati [761a] ; cakarga; krgita). 
 
 grow lean. [cf. KO\OK-O.VOS, 'long lank 
 
 person/ /co\ooWs, #KO\OK-JOS, ' colossus ' ; 
 
 Old Lat. crac-entes, Lat. grac-iles, 'lean, 
 
 slender.'] 
 
 krc_a, a. lean, haggard. [Vkrg, 958.] 
 V krs (karsati; krsati; cakarsa ; akrk- 
 
 sat; karaisyati; kraksyati, -te; krsta; 
 
 krastum ; krstva ; -kfsya). 1. kars- 
 ati : tug, draw, pull; 2. krsati: draw 
 
 furrows ; plough. 
 
 + a, draw on, attract; draw from (a 
 
 source). 
 
 + u d , pull up, elevate. 
 
 + pra, draw forward, place in front. 
 
 krsti, /. pi. people, folk. [Vkrs, mg 2: 
 orig. ' tillages, tilled lands/ then ' settle- 
 ment, community.'] 
 
 krsna, a. black, dark; w. paksa, the dark 
 half of the lunar month, from full to new 
 moon; as m., sc. paksa, the dark lunar 
 fortnight. 
 
 kfsna, m. the black antelope. 
 
 krsna-paksa, m. the dark lunar fort- 
 night. 
 
 krsna-sarpa, m. a very poisonous black 
 Cobra, Coluber Xaga. 
 
 krsnajina, n. skin of the black antelope, 
 [ajina.] 
 
 ',' krsnaya(krsnayate). blacken, [krsna, 
 1059b.] 
 
 v' kip (kalpate; caklp6 [786]; kalpsyate ; 
 klpta ; kalpayati, -te). be in order; be 
 suitable or serviceable to ; help ; klpta, 
 in order, fixed, settled; caus. put in 
 order; ordain; arrange; dispose; fix (in 
 the manifold applications of this word as 
 used colloquially). [prob. not akin are 
 Goth, hilpan, Eng. help.~\ 
 + upa, caus. prepare; furnish; provide. 
 + sam, caws, arrange together; deter- 
 mine ; will ; purpose. 
 
 klpta-ke^anakhagmagru, a. having hair 
 and nails and beard in order, i.e. trimmed. 
 [kea-nakha-gmacru, 1252.] 
 
 klptanta, having its end prescribed; 
 limited, [anta.] 
 
 k6ta, m. intention; desire; will, [v'cit, 
 ' look, be intent upon.'] 
 
 ketu, m. brightness; pi. beams. [Vcit, 
 ' look, appear, shine ' : cf . Goth, haidu-s, 
 ('appearance, manner/ i.e.) 'way/ AS. 
 had, ' way, manner, condition/ Eng. -hood, 
 -head (as in maidenhood, godhead), Ger. 
 -heit : cf. under maya.] 
 
 k 6 v a 1 a , a. exclusive ; excluding all else ; 
 alone ; -am, adv. only. 
 
 ke"qa, m. hair (of the head); mane, [see 
 kesara.] 
 
 kega-paksa, m. du. the two sides of 
 the hair of the head ; the temples.
 
 [Uo] 
 
 [Vkri 
 
 k e g a - gmagru-loma-nakha, n. pi. hair of 
 the head, beard, hair of the body, and 
 nails. [1253a.] 
 
 keg ant a, m. hair-end; long hair hanging 
 down ; locks. 
 
 kegfn, a. maned, with flowing mane, 
 [kega.] 
 
 kesara, m. hair; mane. [written also 
 kegara, cf . kega : cf . Lat. caesaries, ' hair, 
 mane/ but not Eng. hair.'] 
 
 kesaragra, n. ends of a mane, [agra.] 
 
 kaivarta, m. fisher. 
 
 kotara, n. hollow of a tree. 
 
 kotta, m. fort. 
 
 ko-danda, in. bow (of an archer), ['good- 
 stick,' see Ika4, and 506.] 
 
 kodandatani, f. the notched end of a 
 bow. [atani.] 
 
 kopa, m. anger; -at, adv. [1114b], angrily. 
 [Vkup.] 
 
 kopakula, a. full of anger, [akula.] 
 
 kolahala, m. n. uproar, confused cry. 
 [onomatopoetic.] 
 
 ko-vida, a. well knowing or skilled, [see 
 Ika4, and 506.] 
 
 kautuka, n. curiosity, eagerness; -at, 
 adv. [1114b], eagerly. 
 
 kaunteya, m. son of Kunti, i.e. king 
 Yudhishthira. [metronymic, 1216.] 
 
 kauravya, m. descendant of Kuru, i.e. 
 Yudhishthira. [patronymic, 1211 : cf. 
 1208c.] 
 
 kaulala, n. pottery, [kiilala.] 
 
 kaugala, n. cleverness; ability, [kugala.] 
 
 kratu, m. power, whether of body or of 
 mind or of both: 1. might, 73 n ; 2. 
 will, 75 ' 2 ; understanding, 80 5 cf. daksa ; 
 inspiration, insight, esp. for sacred songs 
 and acts; 3. sacred deed, sacrifice, 16 7 ; 
 ceremony, cf. yajnakratu. [Vlkr, 'do, 
 effect,' 1161 : orig. sense of word in mgs 1 
 and 2 was prob. ' an effecting, a power to 
 do or carry out': for mg 3, see \flkrl2 : 
 cf . uparvs, ' mighty,' AS. heard, ' strong, 
 hard,' Eng. hard.~] 
 
 \! kram (kramati [745d], kramate ; ca- 
 krama, cakram6 ; akramit ; kramisyati, 
 -te, kransyate ; kranta [955a] ; krami- 
 tum, krantum ; kramitva, krantva ; 
 -kramya ; kramyate ; kramdyati, kram- 
 
 ayati [1042c 2 mid.]), step; go; go to- 
 wards. 
 
 + ati, step beyond; excel; overcome. 
 
 4 sam-ati, excel, [sam intens., 1077b 
 
 end.] 
 
 + a, step near to; come upon; attack; 
 
 overpower. 
 
 + ud, go out; depart (of the vital spirit); 
 
 cans, cause to disembark. 
 
 + abhy-ud, caws, cause to step out. 
 
 + up a, step unto; approach, 3 10 . 
 
 + nis, go out. 
 
 + para, step forth; advance boldly; 
 
 and so, show one's strength or courage. 
 
 [hence parakrama, ' valor ' : cf . kram + 
 
 vi.] 
 
 + pari, go around, circumambulate. 
 
 + pra, step forward; set out; start 
 
 from. 
 
 + vi, move away or on; proceed; attack 
 
 boldly ; and so, show one's courage. 
 
 [hence vikrama, ' valor ' : cf . kram + 
 
 para.] 
 
 -fsam, come together; approach; enter 
 
 (a zodiacal sign, said of the sun). 
 krama, m. 1. step; regular progress or 
 
 order; -ena, -at, gradatim, cf. yathakra- 
 
 mam; 2. procedure; method; way, 36 21 . 
 
 [V kram.] 
 kramagas, adv. step by step; gradually; 
 
 in order. [1106.] 
 kravya, n. raw flesh; corpse; carrion. 
 
 [v'*kru, which perhaps means 'coagulate, 
 
 become stiff ' : w. kravis, ' raw flesh,' cf . 
 
 Kpeas, *KpeFas, ' flesh ' ; w. kru-ra, ' bloody, 
 
 raw,' cf . Lat. cru-dus, ' bloody, raw,' cruor, 
 
 ' blood ' ; cf . AS. hrdw, ' corpse ' ; Eng. raw, 
 
 Ger. roh, 'raw.'] 
 kravy a- vahana, a. carrying off the 
 
 corpses. 
 
 kravyad, a. consuming corpses, [ad.] 
 kravyada, a. the same, [ada.] 
 k r i y a , f. action ; performance ; doings ; 
 
 labor, pains. [V 1 kr, 1213d.] 
 \/ kri (krmati, krmlte; kresyati; krita; 
 
 kretum; kritva; -kriya). buy, ic. instr. 
 
 [281b] of price, [perhaps akin w. Vlkr, 
 
 and so meaning ' do business, trade.'] 
 
 ~ u p a , buy. 
 
 vi, sell; sell for (instr.). 
 
 10
 
 Vkrid] 
 
 [146] 
 
 V krid (kridati, -te; cikrida, cikride; 
 kridisyati; kridita; kriditum; -kridya). 
 play, sport. 
 
 kr Id a, /. play, sport. [Vkrid.] 
 
 kritotpanna, a. bought or on hand (of 
 food), [utpanna, Vpad.] 
 
 V krudh (krudhyati, -te[761]; cukr6dha; 
 akrudhat ; kruddha ; kr6ddhum ; krud- 
 dhva). be angry. 
 
 krudh, /. anger. 
 
 krudhmi or krudhmin, a. wrathful. 
 [V krudh: cf. 1167 and 1231: paroxytone.] 
 
 V krug (kr6gati ; cukr6ga ; akruksat ; 
 krusta; kr6stum ; -kriigya). cry out; 
 call ; howl, [cf . Kpav-rf, ' cr y/ f r *KpavK-r) : 
 for y in place of K, cf '. r-fiyavov, ' crucible,' 
 w. rtj/cw, ' melt.'] 
 
 krura, a. bloody; raw; fig. harsh, [see 
 under kravya.] 
 
 kroda, m. 1. breast, bosom; 2. in- 
 terior, [for mg 2, cf. garbha2.] 
 
 kr6dha, m. anger. [V krudh.] 
 
 kr6ga, m. call; calling distance; Anglo- 
 Indian a Kos. [Vkrng.] 
 
 kr ogamatr avasthita, a. stationed at 
 the distance of a Kos. [kroga-matra -f 
 avasthita.] 
 
 V klig (kligyate, -ti ; ciklega ; klista ; 
 klestum; -kligya). be distressed. 
 
 klega, m. pain; trouble. [Vklig.] 
 
 kv&, V. kua, adv. 1. where? whither? 
 kua babhuvus, what has become of ? 2. 
 kva cid : anywhere ; in any case, ever, 
 27 20 ; w. na, never. [ Ika, 505.] 
 
 k s a , as collateral form of V 1 ksi in ksa-tra, 
 and as vbl of the same, w. the mg ' abiding, 
 situate,' in antari-ksa. 
 
 ksana, m. instant; moment; -ena, -at. 
 as advs [1112b, 1114b], instantly, [prob. 
 ' the time of a glance,' a shortened form 
 of Iks-ana, ' glance ' : for mg, cf . Eng. 
 "in the twinkling of an eye," and Ger. 
 Augen-blick, ' glance of an eye, i.e. mo- 
 ment.'] 
 
 ksanika,/. -I, a. momentary, [ksana.] 
 
 k s a t , ppl. of V ksan. 
 
 ksatra, n. 1. rule, dominion, power, 
 86 M ; 2. later, the temporal power, im- 
 perium (as distinguished from the spirit- 
 ual power, brahman, 'sacerdotium') ; the 
 
 second or princely caste or a member of 
 it. [from ksa = v 1 ksi 2 : cf . ksatra-pa, 
 ' governor of a dominion, satrap,' and the 
 borrowed ffarpd-injs.l 
 
 ksatra-bandhu, m. one who belongs to 
 the ksatra or second caste. 
 
 ksatriya, m. 1. ruler, 75 l ; 2. one 
 who belongs to the ksatra or princely 
 caste, a Kshatriya, 57 16 N. [ksatra, 1214a.] 
 
 V ksan (ksan6ti, ksanut< ; aksanista ; 
 ksata). harm ; hurt ; break, [closely 
 akin w. V 2 ksi, q.v.] 
 
 ksantavya, grdv. to be put up with or 
 pardoned. [Vksam, 212.] 
 
 ksa pa, /. night. [cf. oW, 'cover,' 
 <//e'4>os, ' darkness ' : for ^, cf . V ksar.] 
 
 ksapaha, n. a night and day, wxd-fi/J-fpov. 
 [2 aha, 1253b.] 
 
 v' ksam (ksamate, -ti; caksame; ksam- 
 isyate, ksansyate ; ksanta [955a] ; ksan- 
 tum ; ksamyate). 1. be patient; en- 
 dure ; put up with ; ksanta, patient ; 2. 
 forgive ; pardon. 
 
 ksa ma, a. patient; bearing or enduring; 
 ana" so, equal to a thing, able, [v'ksam.] 
 
 ksama,y. patience; long-suffering, [do.] 
 
 1 ksaya, m. dwelling-place. [VI ksi.] 
 
 2 ksaya, m. destruction; decay. [\'2ksi.] 
 V ksar (ksarati, -te ; caksara ; aksar 
 
 [890]; ksaritd). -1. flow; -2. liquefy; 
 
 melt away ; and so, perish, [for *skar : 
 
 cf. tyeipca (tffireipw) = <p6eip<a, ' destroy,' 
 
 4-<p0dp-r), ' perished ' : for i^, cf . ksapa, 
 
 ksiti: foT<p0, cf. 2 ksi.] 
 ksar a, a. perishable. [Vksar.] 
 V ksa (ksayati [761dl]; ksana). burn, 
 ksara, a. pungent; saline. [v'ksa: cf. 
 
 i)p6-s, 'dry': for mg, cf. Eng. caustic, lit. 
 
 ' burning,' fig. ' pungent.'] 
 V Ik si, with two meanings, 'dwell,' and 
 
 ' rule,' attaching themselves to the steins ksi 
 
 and ksaya respectively ; thus, 
 
 1. kse-ti, 3d pi. ksi-y-anti : abide or 
 while or dwell, esp. in quiet and safety, 
 79 18 ; inhabit, [cf. ksiti, 1 ksaya, ksetra, 
 ksema 1, ' dwelling-place ' ; a^(pi-Kri-ovts, 
 'dwelling around,' Kri-ai-s, 'settlement.'] 
 + up a, rest on, be dependent on. 
 
 2. ksaya-ti : pos-sess , be-sitzen ; be 
 master of; rule, 71 9 . [cf. ksema 2, 'pos-
 
 [147] 
 
 [khala 
 
 session ' ; K'-/cTrj-yuai, ' am master of,' KTO- 
 ofiai, 'get.'] 
 
 [cf. the collateral form ksa : for con- 
 nection of 1 and 2, cf. the relation of Lat. 
 sedere, ' sit,' and pos-sidere, ' be master of,' 
 and of Ger. sitzen, ' sit,' and be-sitsen, ' be 
 master of.'] 
 
 l/ 2k si (ksinati, later ksin6ti; aksesta; 
 ksita, ksind ; -ksiya ; kslyate ; ksapa- 
 yati [1042e]). destroy; make an end of; 
 exhaust ; pass, wane ; ksina, ruined, 
 lost ; caus. weaken, [cf . <pOtvw, *<t>Qwvia, 
 ' perish, wane,' <t>6l-pei>os, ' dead ' : for <f>0, 
 cf. ksar : w. the secondary ksa-n, cf. 
 KTa.-fj.evos, 'slain,' Kreivu, *Krev-jta, 'slay.'] 
 + apa, pass, be afflicted, suffer loss. 
 
 k s i t , i-bl. inhabiter or ruler, at end of cpds. 
 [v'lksi 1 and 2: see 1147c.] 
 
 ksitf, f. dwelling, abode, 79 18 ; piece of 
 ground or land; the earth, the ground. 
 [V 1 ksi 1 : cf . Krl-ffi-s, ' settlement.'] 
 
 ksiti, f. destruction. [V2ksi: cf. tyi-ai-s 
 = <f>diffts, ' decay ' : for fy, cf. ksar.] 
 
 V ksip (ksipati, -te ; ciksepa, ciksipe ; 
 ksepsyati, -te; ksipta; kseptum; ksip- 
 tva ; -ksipya; ksepayati). dart; cast; 
 throw , caus. cause to fly or burst, 84 4 . 
 + a, 1. throw at; 2. fig. (like Eng. 
 fling, make flings at), deride, put to shame, 
 8 10 ; 3. draw towards one's self, call out 
 (a person to vindicate himself), 55 6 . 
 + ni, throw down (one's self, one's body). 
 + vi-ni, lay down separately or orderly. 
 + sam, dash together in a heap; de- 
 stroy. 
 
 ksipta-laguda, a. having the cudgel 
 thrown. 
 
 ksipra, a. darting ; quick ; -am, adv. 
 quickly. [Vksip.] 
 
 ksira, n, milk. [prob. Vksar.] 
 
 ksirin, a. milky ; as m. milk-plant, 
 [ksira.] 
 
 ksirodaka, n. milk and water, [udaka: 
 1253b.] 
 
 V ksud (ks6dati, -te ; cuks6da; ksunna; 
 -ksudya). shatter; stamp upon; grind 
 small. 
 
 ksudra, a. small, [\lksud.] 
 
 ksudra-buddhi, m. Small-wit, name of 
 a jackal. [1298.] 
 
 ksud-vyadhi, m. hunger and disease. 
 [ksudh: 1253a.] 
 
 V ksudh (ksddhyati ; ksudhita). be 
 hungry ; ksudhita, hungry. 
 
 ksudh,/. hunger. [ V ksudh, 383a.] 
 
 k s u d h a , f. hunger. [V ksudh.] 
 
 ksudharta, a. distressed with hunger, 
 [ksudha + arta.] 
 
 ksetra, n. dwelling-place, 87 n ; piece of 
 ground; field. [Vlksil.] 
 
 ksetra-pati, m. master of a field; 
 farmer. 
 
 ks6ma, m. 1. abode; place of rest; 
 security; well-being, 61 8 ; 2. possession; 
 kseme yoge, in possession in acquisi- 
 tion, i.e. in the enjoyment of what we 
 have got and in the getting of more, 
 [v/lksil and 2: for *ske-ma, 1166: cf. 
 Goth, haim-s, ' village ' ; A.S. ham, Eng. 
 home, and -ham in place-names; perhaps 
 also Ktafj.il (if for K^JUTJ"?), 'village.'] 
 
 kha, n. 1. hole; hollow; 2. opening; 
 
 3. hole in the hub of a wheel ; 4. void 
 space; the sky. [Vkhan, cf. 333.] 
 
 kha-ga, 1. a. moving in the sky, flying; 
 
 2. as m. bird, [for mg 2, cf. antariksa- 
 ga and kha-gama, 'bird,' ura-ga and 
 bhujam-gama, ' snake,' and turam-ga, 
 ' horse.'] 
 
 kha-gama, the same. 
 khanda, a. broken; as m. a break, sec- 
 tion, piece ; khandaka, m. lump-sugar. 
 
 [hence, prob., through the Persian, Arabic, 
 
 Italian, and French, the Eng. candy. ,] 
 V khandaya (khandayati). break; 
 
 khandita, broken (of a command). 
 
 [khanda, 1055.] 
 V khan or kha (khanati, -te ; cakhana, 
 
 cakhnus ; akhan [890] ; khanisyati ; 
 
 khata ; khanitum ; khanitva, khatva ; 
 
 -khaya; khanyate, khayate ; khanayati). 
 
 dig ; caus. cause to be dug. [if for *skan, 
 
 cf . Lat. can-alls, ' ditch, canal.'] 
 
 + a , dig, burrow, in akhu. 
 khara, a. harsh; as m. ass (so called from 
 
 his harsh bray), 67 19 . 
 khala, m. 1. threshing-floor; 2. a 
 
 mean, low-lived fellow. [the tertium 
 10*
 
 khalu] 
 
 [148] 
 
 comparationis for 1 and 2 is perhaps 
 ' dirt.'] 
 
 khalu, pel. 1. now (confirmative) ; atha 
 khalu, now; 2. indeed (emphasizing the 
 preceding word), 55 s ; 3. to be sure (con- 
 cessive), 98 3 . 
 
 V kha, see khan. 
 
 V khad (khadati; cakhada; khadisyate ; 
 khadita ; khaditum ; khaditva ; khad- 
 yate; khadayati). chew; bite; eat, esp. 
 of animals; feed on, 24 16 ; devour, 2 1 11 ; 
 khadita, eaten, 23 3 , etc. [if for *skand 
 or sknd, cf. Kvifa, V/cvtS, 'bite, sting,' 
 Ki/i5ij, ' nettle,' but not Eng. nettle.'] 
 
 khaditavya, grdv. edendus. [vkhad.] 
 
 V khid (khidati; khinna; -khidya). de- 
 press, but only fig. 
 + u d , pull out. 
 
 khila, 1. . piece of waste land between 
 cultivated fields ; a bare spot ; 2. a 
 gap. 
 
 khu, a Prakrit form for khalu. 
 
 khe-cara, a. moving in the sky. [kha, 
 1250c.] 
 
 khecaratva, n. power of flying (by 
 magic). [1239.] 
 
 kheda, m. depression, sorrow. [Vkhid.] 
 
 kheda-vaga, a. having depression as 
 one's controlling influence, under the do- 
 minion of sorrow. 
 
 V khya (khyati; cakhyau; akhyat [847]; 
 khyasyati ; khyata ; khyatum ; -khyaya ; 
 khyayate ; khyapayati, -te [1042d]). 
 simple verb only in pass, and caus. pass. 
 be well known ; be talked of ; caus. 
 make known, [orig. mg, perhaps, 'shine, 
 appear or look (intrans.), see (trans.)'.] 
 + abhi, look at; behold, 78 13 . 
 -fa, 1. show, tell; narrate, 55 19 ; 2. 
 designate, name ; caus. : act. tell ; mid. 
 have told to one's self, 105 7 . 
 + praty-a, (lit. show back, i.e.) turn 
 away, repulse, reject, 9 20 ; refuse, [the 
 Ger. zuriick-weisen has just the same 
 mgs.] 
 
 + v y - a , show to discriminately, i.e. ex- 
 plain. 
 
 + s a m , tell together, i.e. reckon up. 
 -pari-sam, reckon up completely, 
 
 khyati, f. the being well known; fame; 
 khyatim gam, become famous. [Vkhya.] 
 
 g a , vbl. going, in many cpds ; situate, e.g. 
 in madhyaga ; as m. nomen actionis, the 
 going, in durga, suga. [v'gam, cf. 333.] 
 
 gagana, n. sky. 
 
 gang a, f. the Ganges. [fr. \'gam^=ga, 
 w. intens. reduplication, 1002b.] 
 
 g a j a , m. elephant. 
 
 gaja-yutha, m. herd of elephants. 
 
 gajendra, m. a great elephant. [see 
 indra.] 
 
 gana, m. 1. troop, (of Maruts) 90 18 ; 
 crowd, (of friends) 3 9 ; host (of stars) ; 
 flock, (of birds) 3 8 ; 2. pi. troop-deities, 
 inferior deities which regularly appear not 
 singly, but in troops, 67 n ; esp. those that 
 compose the retinue of Qiva ; then, as sing., 
 a single one of Qiva's attendants, a Gana, 
 55 20 ; 3. a number. 
 
 ganana, /. a numbering, calculation, tak- 
 ing into account, ['' ganaya.] 
 
 v' ganaya (ganayati). number, calculate, 
 [gana, 1055.] 
 
 ganita, ppl. calculated; as n. [1176a], 
 calculation, arithmetic, [v ganaya.] 
 
 gata, ppl. 1. gone, 2 21 ; departed; ?<-. inf. 
 snatum gata, gone to bathe, 44 2 ; so 41 2 ; 
 2. often at beg. of cpds, see these ; 3. 
 gone to: w. ace. 5, 15 20 ; w. prati ana" 
 ace., 23 15 ; 4. (having arrived at, i.e.) 
 situated in : w. ace., 62 15 ; w. loc., 5 u ; in 
 cpd, e.g. svahasta-gata, situated on my 
 own hand; 5. gone to a condition, see 
 Vgam4; attained to, (fame) 56 12 ; -con- 
 ditioned, in durgata, sugata. [v'gam, 
 954d.] 
 
 gata-prana, a. whose breath is gone, 
 dead. 
 
 gata-samkalpa, a. whose purpose or 
 will for the moment is gone, purposeless. 
 [1299.] 
 
 gatanugati, f. the going after him who 
 has gone (before), the following in the 
 old ruts, [anugati.] 
 
 gatanugatika, a. addicted to following 
 in the old ruts, [gatanugati, 1222a.] 
 
 g a t a s u , a. whose life is gone, [asu.]
 
 [149] 
 
 [garbha 
 
 gati, /. 1. a going, way of going, ability 
 to go; 2. progress, 18 18 ; eventus, issue, 
 20 13 ; 3. way of escape, refuge, 52 15 ; 
 
 4. the way or course esp. of the soul 
 through different bodies, metempsychosis ; 
 and so, a condition of the soul during thesL 
 transmigrations, a man's lot or fate, 53 lv , 
 65 10 ,G6 6 ,66 21 ff. [Vgam, 1157: cf. ySo-o-i-:. 
 'going, power to go.'] 
 
 V gad (gadati; jagada; gadisyate; gad- 
 ita; gaditum; -gadya). speak. 
 + n i , say. 
 
 gad a, m. disease. 
 
 gantavya, grdv. eundum, used impers. 
 [Vgam.] 
 
 g and ha, m. smell ; pi., w. gubha, per- 
 fumes. 
 
 gandharva, ?. 1. orig., perhaps, the 
 deity of the moon, the Gandharva; 2. 
 in Epos, pi. Gandharvas, heavenly singers 
 belonging to Indra's court ; as sing, one of 
 these, a Gandharva. 
 
 gabhira ( V., later) gambhira, a. deep. 
 
 V gam (gacchati, -te [747, G08] ; jagama, 
 jagme ; V. agan [833], later agamat ; 
 gamisyati, -te ; gata ; gantum ; gatva ; 
 -gatya, -gamy a ; gamy ate ; jfgamisati ; 
 gamayati, -te). 1. go, move; go to, 
 3 6 ; go towards ; go away, 28 n , 36 6 ; come ; 
 w. pratipam, go wrong ; 2. go by, pass 
 (intrans.): of time, 20 3 ; of days, 29 13 ; 
 
 3. come unto, i.e. arrive at, w. ace., 3 7 , 
 84 7 ; reach, w. loc., 69 8 ; come into, w. loc., 
 71 6 ; get at, 95 19 ; 4. go to a state or 
 condition : w. pancatvam, go to dissolu- 
 tion, i.e. die, 32 21 , etc. ; so to destruction, 
 29 6 ; despondency, 44 18 ; w. nijaiii gatim, 
 (went) to his own proper condition, i.e. 
 became a Yaksha once more, 53 12 ; 5. 
 manasa gam, (go with the mind, i.e.) per- 
 ceive, 15 10 . 
 
 [cf. fialvca (*0avjw, *yFf/jj<a), 'go'; Lat. 
 vSnio, #gv&mio, 'come'; AS. cum-an, Eng. 
 come ; for the kw which is to be expected 
 in Germanic as answering to the old gv, 
 cf . Ger. be-quem, Old Eng. cweme, ' con-ve- 
 nient, fit, pleasant': cf. gaccha and &daK, 
 'go thou'; gata-s, 'gone,' and PUTO-S, 
 '(gone over, i.e.) passable'; gati-3 and 
 jScuri-?, 'a going': see also v'ga.] 
 
 + adhi, 1. go to; attain; 2. get at, 
 learn, study, read cf. Vi + adhi. 
 + anu, go after, follow. 
 -i- antar, go within, enter. 
 i- a pi, go unto, join, 91 5 ff. 
 + abhi, go unto, 1 u ; go. 
 + a ram, see s.v. 
 lava, come down. 
 
 -i-a, 1. go to, 6 10 ; come to; come 
 hither, 5 2 ' 2 , 10 2S ; 2. return (52 22 ), ?<SM- 
 allij w. punar, 4 3 , etc. ; agata : 1. ar- 
 rived, come, 7 9 ; w. inf. c,rotum agata, 
 come to hear, 28 5 ; so 27 10 ; arrived (as 
 guest), 28 7 ; -2. returned, 24 17 ; -3. 
 having gone to a condition, e.g. death, 
 46 3 ; agantavyam, grdv., as impers. 
 pass. w. anena, this one will come hither ; 
 -=- desid. desire to return, 101 5 . 
 + abhy-a, come unto, visit; abhyagata, 
 as subst. guest. 
 + upa_a, approach. 
 + sam-upa_a, go to together. 
 + sam-a, assemble; meet, 61 8 . 
 + u d , go out, proceed from. 
 + u p a , go unto, approach. 
 + nis, proceed from (abl.), 51 n ; nirgata, 
 departed. 
 
 + prati, come back, return. 
 + vi, go asunder; vigata, gone, vanished. 
 + s a m , mid. come together, meet ; unite 
 one's self with; and so, come to enjoy; 
 cans, assemble, as trans. 
 
 gam a, a. going, at end ofcpds. [v'gam.] 
 
 gambhira, a. deep; cf. gabhira. 
 
 garut, n. wing. 
 
 garutmant, a. winged; as m. bird, [for 
 mg, cf. paksin.] 
 
 v g ar J (garjati; jagarja; garjita ; garj- 
 itva; -garjya). roar. 
 
 garj ana, n. roar. 
 
 garta, m. (earth-) cut, ditch. [younger 
 form of karta, q.v.] 
 
 gardabha, m. ass; -i,/. she-ass. [1199.] 
 
 garbha, m. 1. uterus concipiens, the 
 conceiving womb ; abde garbhad eka- 
 dage, in the eleventh year from (the 
 womb, i.e.) conception; 2. (as in Mil- 
 ton's Earth's inmost womb) the interior, 
 inside, 34 5 , 43 2 , cf. kroda ; at end of cpds, 
 having in the interior, containing , cf.
 
 garbhavant] 
 
 [150] 
 
 padmagarbha; 3. conceptum, fruit of 
 the womb; garbham dadhanas, conceiv- 
 ing fruit, 92 12 ; embryo, 46 5 , 93 7 ; scion; 
 and so 4. a new-born child. [Vgrabh, 
 ' concipere ' : with garbha in mg 1, cf . 
 Sf\<(>vs and 8o\<pds, 'womb,' a-Se\<(>6s and 
 a.-Se\<f>e-i6-s (= sa-garbh-ya-s), 'of the 
 same womb, i.e. brother'; in mg 3, cf. 
 PpeQos, ' embryo,' and Eng. calf in moon- 
 calf: in mg 4, cf. Goth. Icalbo, Eng. calf.'} 
 
 garbhavant, a., in fern, only, pregnant. 
 [garbha 3: see 1233.] 
 
 garbha-stha, a. being in the womb, un- 
 born. 
 
 V garb, (garhate ; jagarhe ; garhita; 
 garhitum; -garhya). blame, reproach; 
 garhita, despised. 
 
 V gal (galati; galita). -1. drip; -2. fall; 
 galita, fallen out, gone (claws, teeth, 
 eyes), [hence Jala, 'water': cf. V/3a\ in 
 interns, mg, e.g. norap.'bs els a\a /SaAAcop, 
 'river flowing into the sea'; Ger. quellen, 
 'flow, spring,' Quelle, 'fountain.'] 
 
 gava, equiv. of go, 'bull, cow, beeve,' in 
 cpds. [see 1209a.] 
 
 gavyuti,/. pasture-land ; generalized, ter- 
 ritory, abiding-place, [lit. 'having food 
 for cattle,' g6 + utf , see go 4: the y is 
 euphonic, cf. 258.] 
 
 V ga (jigati ; agat). go; come, [collat- 
 eral form of gam, q.v. : w. jfgati, cf . La- 
 conic &ifidri, 'strides'; w. agat, cf. &ri, 
 ' went.'] 
 
 + a b h i , go unto ; w. gramam, become 
 weary. 
 
 gatu, m. 1. motion, movement, course; 
 2. progress ; equiv. to the Eng. -fare in 
 wel-fare (for mg, cf. verb fare, ' get on, 
 go') see sugatuya; 3. (place of re- 
 course, i.e.) refuge, abiding-place, 83 9 . 
 [Vga, 'go,' 1161.] 
 
 ga.tr a, n. 1. (means of moving, i.e.) a 
 limb of the body ; 2. by synecdoche, the 
 body. [Vga, 'move,' 1185a.] 
 
 gamin, a. going, going upon, going to. 
 [Vgam, 1183 3 .] 
 
 garbha, a. relating to the embryo or to 
 pregnancy (of sacrifices), [garbha, 1208f.] 
 
 garbhika, a. relating to the womb, pre- 
 natal, [garbha, 1222e2.] 
 
 garhapatya, 1. a. pertaining to the 
 householder; as m., sc. agni, the house- 
 holder's fire, 102 2 N. ; 2. as n. the being 
 head of the house, 89 6 ; the housekeeping, 
 89 17 . [grhapati, 1211.] 
 
 gir [392], / 1. invocation, praise, 74 12 ; 
 
 2. sing, and pi. speech, words, 87 16 , 49 9 ; 
 - 3. voice, 3 ". [V 1 gr, 242 ' 3 .] 
 
 giri, m. mountain, 55 8 . 
 
 V gu (intens. j6guve [1007 3 ]). cause to 
 sound, proclaim, [cf . y6os, /3o-fi, ' cry ' ; 
 Lat. bovare, ' howl.'] 
 
 gun a, m. 1. a single thread of a cord; 
 a string ; esp. bow-string ; 2. quality ; 
 adscititious quality, as distinguished from 
 the real nature (svabhava, 'ingenium'), 
 22 20 ; 3. as philosophical technical term, 
 one of the three pervading qualities of all 
 nature, to wit, sattva, 'goodness,' rajas, 
 ' passion,' and tamas, ' darkness,' 66 8 ff . ; 
 
 4. as specialization ofmg 2, a good qual- 
 ity, virtue, 1 4> 12 , etc. ; excellence, [for 
 play on ings 1 and 4, see nirguna and 
 18 5 .] 
 
 guna-deva, m. Gunadeva, a pupil of 
 Gunadhya. [lit. 'having virtue as his 
 god,' 1302.] 
 
 gunavant, a. virtuous, 18*; excellent, 
 3 22 . [1233.] 
 
 gunagalin, a. possessing virtues, excel- 
 lent, [see galin.] 
 
 gunadhya, m. Gunadhya, see 53 3 N. [lit. 
 ' rich in virtue,' adhya.] 
 
 gunanvita, a. endowed with excellence ; 
 (of an asterism) lucky, [anvita, Vi.] 
 
 gunin, a. virtuous, excellent, [guna.] 
 
 V gup (jug6pa; gopsyati; gupita, gupta ; 
 g6pitum, g6ptum; gupyate; jugupsate, 
 -ti). keep; guard; desid. seek to keep 
 one's self from, i.e. shun, detest ; ppl. 
 jugupsita, detested, inspiring aversion, 
 59 12 . [prob. a secondary root, originating 
 in the denom. verb-stem gopaya : see this 
 and go-pa.] 
 
 guru, a. 1. heavy; and so 2. fig. (like 
 Eng. weighty), important; 3. worthy of 
 honor, 28 13 ; 4. as m. the one to be 
 honored /car' f^o-^v, the teacher or Guru, 
 60 4 ff. ; loc. gurau: in the house of the 
 Guru, 61 23 ; in case of a Guru, 104 4 . [cf.
 
 [151] 
 
 [gopa 
 
 the comp. garlyans : cf. ftapvs, Lat. gravis, 
 *garu-i-s, Goth, kaurus, ' heavy.'] 
 
 v' guh (guhati [745c] ; juguha [793f], 
 juguhe ; aghuksat [910, 155] ; gudha 
 [222 3 ]; guhitum; -giihya). hide; gulha, 
 hidden, 76 15 . 
 
 + apa, hide (trans.) away from, w. abl., 
 85 u ; put away, get rid of, 77 1 . 
 
 giih, /. hiding-place; instr. guha: used as 
 ach-. guha [1112e], in secret. [Vguh.] 
 
 giiha,/. hiding-place; cavern, [do.] 
 
 giihya, grdv. cclandus ; secret, hidden, 
 [do.] 
 
 guhyaka, m. one of a class of demigods, 
 who, like the Yakshas, wait on Kubera, 
 god of wealth, and, dwelling in mountain 
 caverns (guha), keep his treasures, [so 
 named from their living in caverns or 
 hidden places : 1222.] 
 
 V Igr (grnati, grmte; jagara; garisyati; 
 girna[957b]; -glrya). 1. invoke, call; 
 2. salute, praise; 3. speak out, say. 
 [cf . gir, ' speech, voice ' ; yypvs, ' speech, 
 voice ' ; Doric yapvev, ' speak ' ; Lat. garrio, 
 ' talk ' ; Eng. call.'] 
 + sam, chime in with, agree. 
 
 V 2gr (girati ; jagara; agaiit ; girnd 
 [957b] ; -girya). swallow. [cf. &opd, 
 ' food,' j3i-/3p(a-(rK<i>, ' eat/ Sy/jio-fidp-o-s, 
 ' folk-devouring ' ; Lat. carni-vffr-us, ' flesh- 
 eating,' de-vordre, ' swallow down, de- 
 vour.'] 
 
 + ni, swallow down; devour (the sun in 
 an eclipse), 76 16 see Vgras. 
 
 V 3gr (nor. ajigar [867]; intens. jagarti 
 [1006]; caws, jagarayati). 1. intens. be 
 awake; wake, intrans.; jagrhi [1011], be 
 thou watchful, have a care for, w. dat., 
 89 n ; wake up, intrans., 30 16 ; 2. caws, 
 wake, trans., 30 5 . [for the history of the 
 word, see 1020 : for 1, cf . t-yp-f)-yop-a, ' am 
 awake,' e-yp-ero, 'awoke' (intrans.); for 
 2, cf. tyflpca, 'wake' (trans.).] 
 
 gftsa, a. clever; wise. 
 
 V grdh (gfdhyati; jagardha ; agrdhat ; 
 gardhisyati ; grddha; grddhva). 1. 
 take long strides ; 2. be eager or greedy 
 for. [for *ghrdh : cf. Eng. greedy.] 
 
 gfdhra, 1. a. greedy; 2. m. vulture. 
 [\/grdh, 1188a: the Ger. offers an exact 
 
 parallel : Geier, ' vulture,' is prop. ' the 
 greedy (bird),' from Gier, 'greediness.'] 
 
 grdhra-kuta, m. Vulture-peak, a moun- 
 tain in Magadha. 
 
 grha, in V., m. ; later, m. in pi. ; otherwise, 
 n. house, 28 7 , 79 15 ; w. mrnmaya, house 
 of earth, the grave ; grham gam, go home, 
 52 10 ; so 40 3 , 68 n ; as pi. the house as con- 
 sisting of various rooms and buildings, 
 89 12 ; mansions, 87 7 . ['that which re- 
 ceives one,' V grah : cf . geha.] 
 
 grha-pati, m. master of the house, [acct, 
 1267a.] 
 
 grha-patni, f. mistress of the house, 
 '[do.] 
 
 grha-stha, a. abiding in a house; as m. 
 householder or Brahman in the second 
 stage of his religious life, see agrama. 
 
 grhagrama, m. house-stage, second stage 
 in a Brahman's life, see a^rama. 
 
 geha, n. house, [ident. w. grha: cf. the 
 ident. Wrdh and edh.] 
 
 g6 [361c], m.f. 1. a beef in its old sense 
 of bull or cow ; pi. beeves, kine, cattle ; 
 the Vedic type or symbol of all welfare 
 and blessing and riches (e.g. 80 IB ), like 
 " milk and honey " with the Hebrews ; 2. 
 beef in the derived and now usual sense oj 
 flesh; pi. pieces of flesh, 84 16 ; -3. (the 
 milch cow of kings, i.e.) the earth, 63 7 ; 
 
 4. observe that gavyiiti, gotra, gopa, 
 gopati, gomaya, and many other cpds of 
 go lose their special reference to cattle and 
 take a more general mg. [cf. /3ovs, stem 
 OF, ' a beef, ox, cow ' ; Lat. 6os, stem bov, 
 'ox, cow'; AS. cu, Eng. cow.] 
 
 go-ghna, a. kine-killing ; as m. co.w- 
 
 slaycr. 
 g6tama, m. Gotama, a Vedic seer of the 
 
 tribe of Angiras. 
 gotra, n. 1. cow-stall, cattle-pen; 2. 
 
 perhaps, pen of cattle, and so 3. group 
 
 in general (see go4) ; 4. esp. family, 19 16 ; 
 
 5. family name, 103 19 , see naman2. 
 [from go : mgs 2 and 3 are not authenti- 
 cated by the literature.] 
 
 gotra-ja, a. born in the family; as m. a 
 
 relative, 
 go-pa, m. 1. cow-keeper, cow-herd; 2. 
 
 keeper in general (see go 4). [2 pa.]
 
 gopati] 
 
 [152] 
 
 g6-pati, m. 1. lord of kine; 2. lord 
 in general (see go 4). [acct, 1267a.] 
 
 V gopaya (gopayati, -te). be keeper, 
 keep, [gopa, 1055.] 
 
 go -pa [351], m. 1. cow-keeper; 2. 
 keeper in general (see go 4), 85 16 ; protec- 
 tor, 69 15 . [2 pa.] 
 
 V gopaya (gopayati, -te). be keeper; 
 keep, 91 12 . [gopa, 1055.] 
 
 gomaya, 1. a. bovine; as n. 2. cow- 
 dung, 103 22 ; 3. dung in general (see 
 go 4) ; w. anaduha, dung of a steer, 
 105 3 - 20 . [see maya.] 
 
 go - y u k t a , a. yoked with cattle ; w . cakra, 
 wagon drawn by cattle. [Vyuj.] 
 
 go-raksaka, m. cattle-keeper, cow-herd. 
 
 g6-sakhi [343a], a. having cattle as com- 
 panions, rich in cattle, [sakhi, 186.] 
 
 go-stha, m. cow-stall, byre, [stha, 186.] 
 
 gaunika, f. -I, a. standing in relation to 
 the three guna's, see guna 3. [guna, 
 1222e2.] 
 
 gautama, m. patronymic from Gotama; 
 Gautama, name of various men. [g6tama, 
 1208f.] 
 
 V grath or granth (grathnati; granthi- 
 syati; grathita; -grathya). 1. string 
 together, connect; 2. put together, i.e. 
 corn-pose (a literary work), [for mgs, cf. 
 Lat. com-ponere, ' put together, compose ' ; 
 also serere, 'connect, entwine/ w. sermo, 
 ' discourse.'] 
 
 granth a, m. 1. (a string of words, i.e.) 
 verse or couplet, 53 6 , etc ; 2. a corn-posi- 
 tion, book, work, 17 8 . [V granth : for mgs, 
 see under grath, and for 1, cf. Lat. serere 
 w. series, 'row, string.'] 
 
 granthfn, a. subst. having books, bookish, 
 book-reader, [grantha.] 
 
 V grabh, in Rigveda; later, grah. 
 
 from grabh : grbhnati, grbhnite ; 
 jagrabha, jagrbh6; agrabhlt, agrabblsta 
 [900]; grbhita; grbhltva; -gfbhya. 
 
 from grah: grhnati; jagrahajagrhe; 
 agrahit, agrahista [900]; grahisyati, -te; 
 grhlt& ; grahitum ; grhitva ; -gf hya ; 
 grhyate ; grahayati, -te. 
 
 1. grasp ; seize with the hand ; hold ; 
 take ; w. hastam or panim, take the hand 
 (of the bride at the v.-edding), 89 5 ; take 
 
 hold on (loc.), 14 18 ; grhita ke^esu, seized 
 by the hair ; used of a rabbit taking, i.e. 
 leading with him a lion, 33*; 2. take 
 possession of, take, 46 22 ; get, 44 5 ; 3. 
 receive, accept, 20 10 , 56 1 ; 4. of fluids, 
 take in the ladle, 94 1 ; 5. of names, take 
 upon the lips, mention, 64 13 , 103 19 ; 6. 
 fig., as in Eng., grasp, i.e. perceive, know ; 
 
 7. get, learn; caus. cause to learn. 
 [see under garbha: connection w. Eng. 
 gripe, Ger. greifen, exceedingly doubtful.] 
 + pari, 1. hold on both sides; and so 
 
 2. become master of ; master, overcome, 
 surpass. 
 
 + prati, take hold of, 59 23 ; accept. 
 + vi, 1. hold asunder; separate ; make 
 a division; and so 2. quarrel; fight. 
 + s am, hold together, clasp. 
 + upa-sam, clasp with the hands. 
 V gras (grasate ; jagrase ; agrasit; gras- 
 isyate ; grasta ; grasitva ; grasyate ; 
 grasayati). 1. swallow; devour, 10 10 ; 
 
 2. of the demon Rahu, who swallows, 
 i.e. eclipses sun and moon, 23 *. [perhaps 
 akin w. V 2 gr, ' swallow.'] 
 
 V grah, see grabh. 
 
 graha, m. seizure (with a claw, i.e.), bite. 
 
 [Vgrah.] 
 grab, an a, n. the grasping, i.e. acquisition. 
 
 [Vgrah 6, 7.] 
 grabh a, a. subst. grasping, grasper. 
 
 [v 1 grabh.] 
 grama, m. 1. inhabited place, hamlet, 
 
 village, see 98 16 N. ; 2. the inhabitants, 
 
 community, 
 grama-kama, a. having desire for the 
 
 village, fond of abiding in the village. 
 gravan, m. stone; esp. stone for pressing 
 
 the Soma. 
 g r a h a , a. subst . grasping, grasper, in cpds. 
 
 [Vgrah.] 
 grahya, grdv. to be grasped; perceivable. 
 
 [do.] 
 griva, /. nape of the neck; neck, [for 
 
 #ga e rva : cf. Aeolic Seppa, #5epFa, Epic 
 
 Sfipil, 'throat, neck.'] 
 gnsnia, m. summer. 
 
 g h a , form of ghan, i.e. han, in cpds. [1143c, 
 333.]
 
 [153] 
 
 [caksus 
 
 ghat a, m. a jar. 
 
 g liana, m. 1. slayer; 2. slaughter; 
 3. a compacted mass, lump ; 4. cloud. 
 [\( ghan, i.e. ban : cf . <p6vo-s, ' slaughter.'] 
 
 g bar ma, m. warmth, heat. [\/2ghr: cf. 
 6ipfjLo-s, for #(j)opij.6s, li&t.formus, 'warm.'] 
 
 V gnus (gh6sati, -te ; jugh6sa ; ghusta ; 
 -ghusya ; ghosayati). sound ; make a 
 noise. 
 
 V Ighi (jigharti; ghrta; gharayati). be- 
 sprinkle; be-drop; drip (trans.); ghrta, 
 see s.v. 
 
 + praty-abhi, cans, sprinkle over re- 
 peatedly. 
 + vy-a, sprinkle here and there. 
 
 V 2ghr, glow, be warm, in a-ghrni, 'glow- 
 ing,' and gharma, tj.v. 
 
 ghrta, H. 1. butter, clarified and then 
 hardened, Anglo-Indian ghee, much used 
 for culinary (cf. 68 *) and religious (cf. 
 88 ") purposes : cf. ajya, 'butter in a 
 melted state ' ; 2. butter or fat in general, 
 also as symbol of fruitfulness and abun- 
 dance. [Vlghr, 'drip,' 1176a: for mg, cf. 
 Eng. dripping, 'fat which falls in drops 
 from meat in roasting.'] 
 
 ghrta-pagu, m. sacrificial beast made 
 of ghee. 
 
 ghrta-gciit, a. dripping with (ghee, i.e.) 
 fatness. 
 
 ghor&, a. awful; dreadful; horrid. 
 
 ghor a- caksus, a. having an evil eye. 
 
 ghorakrti, a. having an awful form, 
 [akrtij 
 
 gh6sa, m. noise. [Vghus.] 
 
 ghna, a. killing; destroying; removing. 
 [\f ghan, i.e. han : see 21(3. 9.] 
 
 ghnya, grdv. to be slain, in aghnya. [do.] 
 
 V ghra (jighrati [749a]; jaghraii; ghrata; 
 -ghraya; ghrayate; ghrapayati [1042d]). 
 smell ; snuff at. 
 
 c a , end. con/, and, also, re, que ; 1 a. is 
 
 found, esp. in the older literature, with both 
 parts to be connected (e.g. 71 5 ' 7 , 97 7 ' 11 ; so 
 13 5 , 16 12 , 17 3 , 19 10 , 38 7 , 9 2 ); or only ivith 
 the latter, as is oftenest the case in the later 
 language (e.g. 2 1 - 7 , 3 8 , 8 8 ; 82 8 , 84 16 ; 98 16 ) ; 
 1 b. in case of three or more parts to be 
 
 connected, ca occurs: with the last only (e.g. 
 three parts, 13 2 , 17 2 , 31 , 44 ; 71 8 , 72 10 , 
 83 15 ; 106 5 ; /our parts, 2 2 , 17 7 , 28 10 ; Jive 
 parts, 2 5 , 21 5 , 25 3 ) ; with the last two (7 6 - 7 , 
 22 5 , 37 15 , 45 7 ; 77 12 ) ; sometimes after each, 
 (29 S> *); very rarely after the jirst of a scries 
 (26 6 ; 21 22 ); various irregulcf combinations 
 on page 67 passim ; see a/so 21 20 N. ; 
 
 2. variously combined : w. eva (e.g. 
 13 21 ; 9 16 , II 9 , 14 15 ; 5 9 , 12 5 , 14 2 - 8 - 20 , 15 16 , 
 25 4 ; 30 u ), and w. api (see examples under 
 api) ; ca, tatha, ca, both , like- 
 wise , and, 10 8 ' 9 ; ca, a, both , 
 and , 85 5 ; sa ca, often at beg. of clause 
 (e.g. 24 23 ; so 34 1S ; 41 7 ); -3. anyac ca, 
 api ca, kim ca, tatha ca, joining two prov- 
 erbs of like drift, moreover, further, like- 
 wise ; 
 
 4. otiose, 6 9 ; 5. connecting things 
 contrasted: but, 8 16 , 17 20 , 18 '- :1 , 19 2 ; and 
 yet, I 12 , 3 20 ; 6. (even, concessively, i.e.) 
 though, 26 12 ; 7. (like Eng. and or an, 
 and Icelandic encla, 'moreover,' 'if') if 
 see ced ; 8. iv. interrogatives, rendering 
 them indef., see ka, kim. 
 
 [cf. re, 'and'; Lat. que, 'and'; Goth, -h 
 and Ger. -ch in ni-h and no-ch, the exact 
 equivalents of Lat. ne-que, 'and not, nor': 
 for ca8, cf. -re and -Ka in TTO-TE and Doric 
 TTO-KU, ' at any time ' ; Lat. quis-nue, ' any, 
 each.'] 
 
 cakra, n. 1. wheel; chariot-wheel, wagon- 
 wheel; 2. by synecdoche, wagon, in pitha- 
 cakra. [prob. reduplicated form, ca-kra, 
 fr. \/*kr or *kl, 'roll,' cf. KU\LW, 'roll': w. 
 ca-kra, cf. KV-K\OS, #KF6-/cAos, AS. hweohl, 
 hwedl, Eng. wheel. ] 
 
 V caks (caste [628]; cacakse; castum; 
 -caksya). 1. appear; 2. look upon, 
 behold; 3. (cause to appear, i.e.) an- 
 nounce, tell, [reduplicated form of v'ka, 
 see 675 and lOSg 1 end.] 
 + a, 1. look on; 2. show, tell, 63 l . 
 + vi, appear far and wide, shine. 
 + sam, look upon, consider. 
 
 caksas, 1. perhaps adj. beholding, see 
 1296 3 end; -2. n. look; eye. [Vcaks.] 
 
 caksuh-plda, f. eye-ache. 
 
 cdksusmant, a. possessing eyes. [1235.] 
 
 cdksus, n. eye. [Vcaks. 1154.1
 
 cancala] 
 
 [154] 
 
 cancala, a. moving to and fro; trembling, 
 [v/cal, 1148.4, w. in tens, reduplication, cf. 
 1002b : cf . Kiy-Ka\-os, ' wag-tail ' ; Lat. 
 quer-quer-us, ' shaking with fever chills.'] 
 
 c a n c u , f. beak, bill. 
 
 canaka, m. chick-pea. 
 
 canda, a. impetuous; wrathful. 
 
 candala, m. a Chandala or man of the 
 most despised class of society (born of 
 C, udra father and Brahman mother), [cf. 
 canda.] 
 
 V cat (catant; catta; caus. catayati). get 
 off ; hide ; caus. drive away. 
 
 catasr, fern, to catur. 
 
 catur [482d], num. four. [w. catvaras, cf. 
 rerrapes, Lat. quattuor, Goth, fidvor, AS. 
 feower, ~Eng.four.~] 
 
 catur-aksa, a. four-eyed, [see 1300b.] 
 
 caturtha, /. -i, a. fourth; -am, adv. the 
 fourth time, [catur, 487 5 .] 
 
 catur-yuga, n. the four ages. [1312.] 
 
 catur-varga, m. group of four. 
 
 catur-vidha,a. of four kinds; four-fold, 
 [vidha, 1302c5.] 
 
 catustaya, a. of four; as n. a collection 
 of four, a quaternion, [catur, 178 : 1245a.] 
 
 catus-patha, m. n. place where four 
 ways meet, quadrivium. [catur, 178, 187 : 
 1312.] 
 
 cat us-pad, a. quadruped; as n. s. collec- 
 tively, the four-footed beasts, [catur, 178 : 
 1300.] 
 
 catus-pada, f. -I, a. having (taken) four 
 steps. 
 
 catvara, m. n. quadrivium. [catiir.] 
 
 catvar, strong form of catur, q.v. 
 
 V can (acanit). be glad in ; gladden, [col- 
 lateral form of Vkan: cf. v'kan, kama, 
 caru.] 
 
 can a, adv., immediately following the em- 
 phasized word. 1. not even; svapna 
 cana, not even sleep, 79 * ; 2. w. pre- 
 ceding negation, even ; na devanam ati 
 vratam, gatatma cana, jivati, not beyond 
 the decree of the gods, (not) even if hun- 
 dred-lived, does one live, 88 *; hence, the 
 feeling for the negation in cana in such col- 
 locations becoming faint, 3. even, at all, 
 
 w. interrogatives, emphasizing their indefinite 
 sense ; na kim cana, not any thing even 
 
 or at all, 8 19 ; see esp. 1 ka 2c, also katham, 
 kada, and kim. [cf. Lat. -quam and -can- 
 in quisquam, quicunque, ' any one ' ; Goth. 
 -hun in ni hvas-hun, ' not any one.'] 
 
 candra, a. shining, shimmering; as m. the 
 moon ; the moon-god, [for c_candra, q.v.] 
 
 candramas, m. the moon; the moon-god, 
 [orig. a descriptive cpd, stem candra-mas 
 (383d 6), nom. candra-mas, and so with 
 long a throughout, but transferred to the 
 as-declension (cf. 418).] 
 
 candra-varna, a. of shining hue. . 
 
 V cam, sip, only with a. 
 
 + a (acamati [745d]; acacama; acanta 
 [955a] ; acamya ; acamayati). sip (water), 
 i.e. rinse the mouth. 
 
 camasa, m. beaker; cup, made of wood, 
 square, and with handle. [Vcam, cf 
 1197.] 
 
 campaka, m. Michelia Champaka, a tree 
 with strong-smelling yellow blossom. 
 
 campakavant, a. abounding in Cham- 
 paka trees ; as f. Champakavati, name of 
 a forest. [1233.] 
 
 V car (carati, -te; cacara, cerus, cere; 
 acarit, acarista ; carisyati ; carita ; car- 
 itum; caritva; -carya; caryate ; cara- 
 yati, -te). 1. move, 77 12 ; go; wander; 
 wander about ; used of men, beasts, waters, 
 heavenly bodies; 2. (like Eng. proceed 
 cf. Lat. pro-cedere, ' go on ') act ; w. ppl. 
 [1075b], go on, i.e. keep on (doing a thing), 
 96 u ; 3. (like Eng. go about, i.e.) under- 
 take, set about; bhaiksam car, go beg- 
 ging, beg; undergo (troubles), 88 12 ; per- 
 form (a vow, duty) ; observe (silence) ; 
 commit (offense or injustice), 80 9 , 63 7 ; 
 sasyam car, feed on corn, 34 16 ; carita, 
 see s.v. [cf. vfpi-Te\-\o/LLfv<ai/ tviavriav, ' as 
 years go round,' and Trfpi--ir\-o/^fi/uv eVzv- 
 TUV, ' as years went round,' with T before 
 a palatal and ir before a non-palatal ; also 
 ird\-os, Milton's ' turning sphere ' : see 
 also car + ud, and the younger collateral 
 form cal, and under cancala : akin is also 
 Vkal.] 
 
 -f a n u move along after, follow. 
 + a p a , go off, be absent. 
 + abhi, go against, trespass against; esp 
 be unfaithful (of a wife).
 
 [155] 
 
 [Vcit 
 
 + a, 1. move unto, approach, 86 3 ; 2. 
 go to (an undertaking), set about; and so, 
 do, 10 6 , 64 ", 66 u ; practice (virtue); per- 
 form (vow); follow (rule); 3. proceed, 
 conduct one's self, cf. acara, ' conduct.' 
 + ucl-a, rise up out of (abl.), 77 14 , of the 
 moon. 
 
 + sam-a, proceed; do; perpetrate. 
 + ud, go up, rise, of the sun; cans, cause 
 to go out, evacuate, cf. uccara, ' evacua- 
 tion.' [cf. suryam uc-carantam w. tf\iov 
 ava-Tf '\\ovra, ' the rising sun.'] 
 + upa, 1. come to; 2. come to, esp. 
 in order to serve, and so, attend, wait upon 
 politely; 3. proceed with, undertake. 
 + p a r a , move away from, 86 3 . 
 + vi, move in different directions, spread 
 over; of waters, overwhelm ; wander about; 
 caws, cause to go hither and thither in 
 thought, balance, ponder. 
 + s am, go, walk, wander. 
 
 car a, . moving; as subst. animal (as dis- 
 tinguished from plant). [Vcar.] 
 
 car ana, 1. m. n. foot; 2. as n. a wan- 
 dering. [V car : for 1, cf . nayana.] 
 
 carita, 1. ppl. done; 2. as n. sing. 
 [1176a], (like Ger. Wandel and Enrj. walk) 
 behavior; proceedings; deeds. [Vcar.] 
 
 carita-vrata, a. having his (marital) 
 duty performed. 
 
 care a, f. a going over, repetition (of a 
 word in a school-boy's Veda-recitation) ; 
 a troubling one's self about, [perhaps fr. 
 V car.] 
 
 carman, n. skin; pelt. 
 
 carya, grdv.io be accomplished; f. -a, 
 (like Eng. walk) way of life; a perform- 
 ing, busying one's self with. [V car.] 
 
 V carv (carvita, curna; carvitum). chew, 
 crush with the teeth. 
 
 carsani, a. active, busy; as f. pi. busy 
 mortals, men, folk. [Vcar, 1159b end.] 
 
 V cal (calati ; cacala, celiis ; calisyati ; 
 calitA ; calitum). move ; start off. 
 [younger form of Vcar, q.v. : cf. Kf\-eu6os, 
 Lat. cal-lis, 'path.'] 
 
 cal a, a. moving. [Veal.] 
 
 candala, m. a Chandala. [see candala 
 and 1208f.] 
 
 catana, a. driving away. [Vcat, caus.] 
 
 caturmasya, n. a sacrifice to be made 
 every four months, i.e. at the beginning 
 of each of the three seasons, [catur + 
 masa, 1211.] 
 
 candrayana, n. with or without vrata, 
 the Chandrayana observance or lunar 
 penance, 65 6 N. [lit. 'connected o?- ac- 
 cording with the moon's course,' candra 
 + ay ana.] 
 
 carana, m. wanderer; csp. wandering 
 player or singer, [carana.] 
 
 car in, a. moving; observing; busying one's 
 self with. [ J car.] 
 
 caru, a. gladsome; dear; pleasant; fair. 
 [Vcan, q.v., 1192: cf. Lat. cd-rus, 'dear.'] 
 
 caru-hasin, a. sweetly laughing. 
 
 V lei (cin6ti, cinute ; cikye' [787]; acet ; 
 cesyati, -te ; cita ; cetum ; citva ; -citya ; 
 ciyate). 1. arrange in order; pile up; 
 build ; construct, esp. the sacrificial altar ; 
 active, if the priest builds for others,- middle, 
 if the sacrijicer builds for himself; 2. 
 gather together, collect ; get possession 
 of. 
 
 + ud, heap up, collect. 
 + sam, gather together, collect; accumu- 
 late. 
 
 V 2ci (cayati, -te). 1. hate; 2. avenge, 
 take vengeance on, punish, [cf. Arcadian 
 airv-reita, Attic O.TTO-TLVUI, ' pay off,' cnrorivo- 
 /nai, ' get paid to myself, take vengeance, 
 punish,' -iroiv-fi, 'penalty.'] 
 
 V 3ci (ciketi; cikaya, cikyiis [~$~]; acet; 
 cesyati; cetum; -citya; ciyate). 1 
 notice, observe; 2. look, investigate, 
 [cf. Vcit.] 
 
 + nis, (search out, i.e.) ascertain; deter- 
 mine ; consider as certain or settled. 
 + vi-nis, (look out this way and that, 
 i.e.) ponder, consider, 13 19 . 
 + pari, investigate thoroughly, find out. 
 
 cikitii, prob. f. understanding. [Vcit, 
 1178c.] 
 
 cikitvit, adv. with understanding, [ci- 
 kitii, 1109.] 
 
 V cit (cetati, -te ; ciketa, cikite; acait ; 
 citta ; cetayati, -te). 1. look at, notice ; 
 observe ; consider ; 2. be intent upon, 
 intend; 3. understand, know; perfect, 
 ciketa, has understood, knows ; cikitvans,
 
 cit] 
 
 [156] 
 
 wise ; caus. make to know, instruct, 
 [extension of V3ci: the Vcit shows an 
 intrans. aspect, 'be noticeable or bright,' 
 in ketu : cf . V cint.] 
 + pr a , know. 
 
 cit, vbl. knowing. [V cit, 383a.] 
 
 citi,/pile. [VI ci.] 
 
 citta, n. notice; thought; mind. [lit. 
 'noticed,' Vcit, see 1176a.] 
 
 citta-pramathin, a. disturbing the 
 mind. 
 
 citti, f. understanding; wisdom. [Vcit.] 
 
 citra, a. 1. noticeable, excellent; 2. 
 clear; bright; bright-colored; of sounds, 
 clear, i.e. loud ; 3. variegated, 10 8 ; 
 varied ; 4. as n. a bright-colored thing, 
 a picture. [V cit, 1188.] 
 
 citra-gravas, a. whose praise is loud or 
 whose fame is excellent. 
 
 citra-stha, a, being in a picture ; 
 painted. 
 
 citranga, m. Dapple-coat, name of a deer. 
 [' having a variegated or mottled body ' : 
 anga.] 
 
 cid, end. pel. 1. emphasizes, sometimes 
 very gently, the preceding word : even, 
 78W.15. j ust> 74 2 ? 794. yg cid, what 
 very ones, 70 16 ; at least, 79 M ; 2. gen- 
 eralizes a pron. : y6 cid tang cid, what- 
 soever , unto all those, 91 10 ; so far 
 Vedic ; 3. in classical Skt., very common 
 w. an interr., rendering it indef. : kag cid, 
 a certain; na ka cid, not any; see ka, 
 kad, kada, karhi, kva. [ace. s. n. of 
 pron. root ka, ki (505), w. palatalization: 
 lllla.] 
 
 V cint (cintayati, -te ; cintayam asa ; 
 cintayisyati ; cintita ; cintayitva ; -cint- 
 ya). 1. think, reflect, have a certain 
 thought; 2. set one's thoughts upon, 
 think upon or of, consider, turn one's at- 
 tention to ; 3. call attention to ; make 
 an observation, 35 9 . [younger form of 
 Vcit: cf. 255 and 240.] 
 + vi, reflect. 
 + s a m , think to one's self. 
 
 cintana, n. a thinking upon. [Vcint.] 
 
 cint a, f. 1. thought; 2. esp. (like 
 ft.epip.va), anxious or sad thought; sorrow; 
 -3. plans, 43 s . [Vcint.] 
 
 cinta-para, a. having sad thought as 
 one's chief thing, sunk in sad thought. 
 [1302b.] 
 
 cintavisa-ghna,a. destroying the poi- 
 son of sorrow. 
 
 cintitopasthita, a. which approached 
 as soon as thought of. [lit. ' thought of 
 and (immediately) at hand,' cintita + 
 upasthita, 1257.] 
 
 cintya, grdv. to be thought of, compre- 
 hensible. [V cint.] 
 
 cir, a. long, of time; -am, -at, as adverbs 
 [llllc, 1114c], long, for a long time. 
 
 cira-mitra, n. an old friend. 
 
 clt-kara, m. the sound cit, i.e. the bray- 
 ing of an ass. [cit, onomatopoetic.] 
 
 cira, n. strip of bark or cloth; rag. 
 
 V cud (c6dati, -te ; acodit ; codayati, 
 -te). drive on; speed; excite; caus. the 
 same. 
 + pra, caus. drive on; further; inspire. 
 
 V cur (corayati). steal. 
 
 cur a,/ theft. [Vcur.] 
 
 cud a, f. tuft of hair left on the crown 
 of a child's head after the ceremony of 
 tonsure. 
 
 cuda-karman, n. ceremony of tonsure, 
 59 19 . 
 
 curna, m. n. meal, powder, [v'carv: for 
 mg, cf. pista.] 
 
 V curnaya (curnayati). powder, crush 
 fine ; crush ; smash, [curna, 1055.] 
 
 V crt (crtati; cacarta ; crtta ; -cftya). 
 fasten together. 
 + pra, loosen, untie. 
 
 cetana, a. noticing; cetana, f. conscious- 
 ness; mind. [Vcit.] 
 
 c6tas, n. consciousness; mind; heart. 
 [Vcit.] 
 
 c e d , adv. never at beg. of sentence, claiise, 
 or half-verse, if ; apodosis, if it follows, 
 marked by tad (37 4 ), tatas (52 5 ), or not 
 marked (32 21 , etc.), or marked by -na, if 
 negative (18 9 ); na ced, if not, 52 8 ; no ced, 
 forms a shortened but complete clause, and if 
 not, 27 ". [ca + id, 1133 5 : see ca 7.] 
 
 V cest (cestati, -te ; cic&sta ; cestita ; 
 cestitum; cestitva). move the limbs; 
 bestir one's self ; be active ; act. 
 
 c e s t a , f. activity ; performance. [V cest.]
 
 [157] 
 
 [Vjan 
 
 cestita, ppl. performed; as n. s. [1176a], 
 
 deeds. [V cest.] 
 c6dana, n. an impelling; order; precept. 
 
 [Vend.] 
 
 cauda, n. ceremony of tonsure, [cuda.] 
 caura, m. thief, [cura.] 
 V cyu (cyavati, -te ; cucyuve; acyosta ; 
 
 cyosyate; cyuta; cyavitum; cyavayati). 
 
 1. move, bestir one's self; 2. go off, 
 disappear ; 3. come to nought, 68 12 ; 
 
 4. fall (from, all.), 51 9 ; 5. set agoing, 
 undertake, moliri, 74 3 . [akin, perhaps, 
 are f-trcreva, ' impelled/ and Sopv-acroos, 
 ' lance-brandishing.'] 
 
 + pra, cans, move or lead onward. 
 
 V Ichad (channa; chadayati; chadayam 
 cakre; chadita; chadayitva ; -chadya). 
 cover ; cover over. 
 + a , cover over ; conceal, 25 10 . 
 + pari, envelope, cover over. 
 + pra, cover; clothe one's self with 
 (instr.). 
 
 V 2 chad or chand (chantti; cacchanda ; 
 acchan [890 2 ] ; chadayati [mgs 1, 2]; 
 chandayati [mg 31 ; chandayam asa ; 
 chandita). 1. appear, seem; 2. seem 
 good to, please; 3. (please a person, 
 ace., with a thing, instr., i.e.) offer a per- 
 son, ace., a thing, instr. [prob. ident. w. 
 \[ gcand.] 
 
 chand a, m. pleasure; will. [V 2 chad.] 
 
 chala, m. n. (perhaps cover, i.e.) guise, 
 disguise ; pretence, deceit, [perhaps fr. 
 VI chad.] 
 
 chaga, m. goat. [for *skaga: cf. Ger- 
 manic skepo-, for #skeqo-, Ger. Schaf, AS. 
 scedp, Eng. sheep.~] 
 
 chaya, f. shade ; shadow ; image, [cf. 
 ffKid, ' shadow.'] 
 
 chaya-dvitiya, a. having one's shadow 
 as second, accompanied by one's shadow. 
 [1302b.] 
 
 C chid (chinatti; ciccheda; acchaitsit ; 
 chetsyati ; chinnA ; chettum ; chittva ; 
 -chidya ; chidyate). 1. cut off; hew 
 down ; sever ; cut in two ; nibble ; 2. 
 divide. [cf. o-x''^! Vo-xiS, 'split'; Lat. 
 scindo, scidi, 'cut'; AS. sceddan, 'divide,' 
 
 Eng. water-sAec?, ' the divide between two 
 
 valleys.'] 
 
 + ud, 1. cutout; 2. destroy ; pass. 
 
 be cut off, fail, be lacking. 
 
 + vi, cut asunder; sever. 
 chidra, n. hole ; defect ; weak spot. 
 
 [v'chid.] 
 
 chucchundari, m. musk-rat, 
 cheda, m. cut; cutting off; failure, dearth 
 
 [\lchid.] 
 
 ja, i'bl. born; born from; occasioned or 
 
 produced by; only in cpds. [vjan, 333: 
 
 cf. ja, the older form, 354.] 
 jagat [450d], a. movable; as n. all that 
 
 moves, men and beasts, [v'gam: cf. 383b 3 
 
 end.] 
 
 jaghana, m. n. the hinder parts, the but- 
 tocks, 
 jaghanya, a. hindermost ; last; lowest 
 
 or worst, [jaghana, 1212d -4.] 
 jangama, a. movable; as subst. all that 
 
 moves, equiv. to the ancient jagat. [Vgam, 
 
 1148.4, cf. 1002b.] 
 j a n g h a , f. lower half of the leg, from 
 
 knee to ankle ; shin. [prob. fr. v' 1 ha, 
 
 'move/ 1148.4, cf. 1002b.] 
 j at a, f. matted hair ; tangled locks. 
 jathara, n. belly; womb. [akin are 
 
 Goth. ~kil\>ei, 'womb/ AS. did, Eng. 
 
 child.-] 
 V jan (jayate [772]; jajana, jajne[794d]; 
 
 ajanista ; janisyati, -te ; jata ; janayati, 
 
 -te ; ajljanat). see 761b end, and 772. 
 
 1. transitive, janayati and active forms : 
 beget ; bring forth ; generate or produce ; 
 
 2. intransitive, jayate and middle forms : 
 be born ; be produced ; come into being ; 
 be born again, 18 1 ; be, 86 2 ; jajne, natus 
 est, ortus est ; jajnanas, children ; for 
 jata, see s.v. [cf. ye-yov-ws, 'born/ e-yev- 
 ero, 'became'; Lat. genui, 'begat'; AS. 
 cennan, ' beget, bring forth ' ; AS. cy/m, 
 Eng. kin, ' race, family ' ; AS. c//n-iny, 
 Eng. king, 'the man of (noble) kin' for 
 mg, cf. kulina w. kula2: cf. also jana 
 and jani.] 
 
 + abhi, pass, be born unto, be destined 
 unto from birth.
 
 janaj 
 
 [158] 
 
 + a, caus. cause to be born for some one, 
 w. dot. 
 
 + upa, mid. be born, arise. 
 + pra, mid. be born; ca us. procreate. 
 + 8 am, mid. be produced; samjata, hav- 
 ing arisen. 
 
 jana, m. creature; man; person; in pi. 
 (e.g. 40 16 ), and collectively in sing. (e.g. 
 77 u ), folks; a people or race or tribe; 
 daivya jana, heavenly race, the gods. 
 [Vjan : cf. ytvos, Lat. genus, Eng. kin, 
 ' race.'] 
 
 jana-pada, m. ( tribe-place, i.e. ) district ; 
 community. 
 
 jani [343c], f. woman; wife. [Vjan: cf. 
 yw-fi, Eng. quean, 'woman': for mg, cf. 
 jaya.] 
 
 janitra, n. origin. [Vjan, 1185d.] 
 
 janitva, n. wifehood. [jani.] 
 
 janiman, n. production, creation. [Vjan, 
 1168.2a.] 
 
 jani,^ same as jani. 
 
 j a n u s , n. origin ; ingenium, nature ; crea- 
 tion. [Vjan, 1154 2 .] 
 
 jantu, m. creature; man. [Vjan.] 
 
 janman, n. birth; production; creature, 
 72 . [Vjan.] 
 
 V jap (japati; jajapa; ajapit; japisyati ; 
 japita, japta; japitum ; japitva, japtva). 
 say in under-tone ; mutter. 
 
 jamad-agni, m. Jamadagni, a Rishi, 
 friend of Vi9vamitra, and foe of Vasish- 
 tha. [jamant, unclear : see 1309 4 .] 
 
 jambuka, m. jackal. 
 
 j a r a , a. growing old, aging. [V jr.] 
 
 jarad-asti, a. long-lived, [jarant, see 
 1299b end.] 
 
 jarad-gava, m. Old-bull, name of a vul- 
 ture, [jarant.] 
 
 j*ar ad-das a, m. old slave or servant, 
 [jarant.] 
 
 jarant, ppl. aging ; old. [V jr : cf . ytpovr-a, 
 ' old man.'] 
 
 j a r a s , f. the growing old ; old age. [Vjr : 
 cf . "fftpas, ' old age.'] 
 
 jaritf, m. invoker; singer. 
 
 jala, n. water, [see V gal.] 
 
 jala-dhara, m. rain-cloud, [lit. 'water- 
 holder.'] 
 
 j a 1 a 9 a y a , ?. water-abode ; lake. [ac,aya.] 
 
 V jas (jasyati; jajasa ; jasayati). be ex- 
 hausted or tired to death ; caus. exhaust ; 
 quench. 
 
 jasra, a. dying out. [Vjas.] 
 
 ja [352], vbl. born, at end ofcpds. [Vjan or 
 ja : cf. ja, later form of ja.] 
 
 V j a g r , same as \ 3 gr, see 1020. 
 
 j a t a , ppl. born ; grown ; come into being, 
 present ; at beg. of cpds : arisen, existing, 
 manifest ; produced, aroused ; as n. a liv- 
 ing being ; birth. [Vjan, 955b.] 
 
 jata-karman, n. birth-ceremony. 
 
 jata-rupa, a. having native beauty; 
 splendid ; -pa, n. gold. 
 
 jata-vivasa, a. having arisen confi- 
 dence, inspired with confidence. 
 
 jata-vedas, m. Jatavedas, epithet of 
 Agni. [perhaps, 'having knowledge of 
 all beings, i.e. of gods and men,' or, better, 
 'having all beings or things as his pos- 
 session.'] 
 
 jata-samkalpa, a. having a purpose or 
 desire arisen, feeling a passion for another. 
 
 jatamarsa, a. having anger aroused, 
 vexed, [amarsa.] 
 
 jatavamana, a. having arisen contempt, 
 filled with self-contempt, [avamana.] 
 
 jati, f. birth; position or rank. [Vjan, 
 1157 '.] 
 
 jati-matra, M. mere rank, [see matra2, 
 and 1302c3.] 
 
 j atu, adv. at all, ever; na jatu, not at all. 
 [Vjan, lllld: development of mg unclear.] 
 
 jatersya, a. having jealousy aroused, 
 jealous, [irsya.] 
 
 janu, n. knee. [cf. y6w, Lat. genu, Eng. 
 knee, whence kneel. ~\ 
 
 jamadagnya, a. of Jamadagni ; as subst. 
 descendant of J. [Jamadagni, 1211.] 
 
 jaya,^ wife. [Vjan: for mg, cf. jani.] 
 
 jar a, m. paramour. 
 
 jala, n. net. 
 
 V Iji (jay ati > -te; jigaya, jigy6 [787]; 
 ajaisit, ajesta; jayisyati, -te ; jesyati, -te ; 
 jita; j6tum; jitva; -jitya). overpower; 
 conquer; win (battles); win by conquest 
 [cf. t'o, 'force,' &iaw, 'to force'; Lat. rir. 
 *gvis, ' force ' : cf . V jya.] 
 + u d , conquer ; be victorious. 
 + para, jxzss. be conquered.
 
 [159] 
 
 [Vjna 
 
 + vi, mid, be victor; conquer (con- 
 quests) ; subdue. 
 V2ji (jin6ti). enliven; quicken; hence 
 
 [716], v'jinv. [for *gvi: cf. &ios, 'life': 
 
 see also Vjiv.] 
 j i j n a s a , f. investigation. [' effort to find 
 
 out/ fr. desid. of Vjna, 1149 4 .] 
 jitapsaras, a. having the Apsarases 
 
 conquered, surpassing the Apsarases. 
 
 [apsaras.] 
 
 jitendriya, a. having the senses con- 
 quered, having the passions subdued. 
 
 [indriya.] 
 V jinv (jinvati; jijinva; jinvisyati ; jin- 
 
 vita). be lively, hasten; trans, quicken ; 
 
 speed onward, [secondary root fr. V2ji, 
 
 see 716.] 
 
 jivri, a. old. [for jirvi, Vjr, 1193 2 .] 
 jihva, f. tongue. 
 
 jihvagra, n. tip of the tongue, [agra.] 
 jimuta, in. thunder-cloud. 
 jlra, a. quick, [\f2ji, 1188: cf. Vjya.] 
 jira-danu, a. having swift drops, swift 
 
 dripping, i.e. well watered. 
 Vjiv (jivati, -te; jijlva, jijiv6 ; ajivit ; 
 
 jivisyati, -te ; jivita ; jivitum ; jivitva ; 
 
 -jivya ; jivayati). live; be alive; caus. 
 
 make alive, [see V2ji: cf. Lat. viv-ere, 
 
 ' live ' ; AS. cwicu, ' alive/ Eng. quick, 
 
 ' alive, lively.'] 
 
 + anu, live after, be dependent on, live 
 
 upon. 
 jiva, a. living; as m. the principle of life, 
 
 the individual soul, 66 4 . [Vjiv: cf. Lat. 
 
 vlvus, 'alive.'] 
 
 jivana, n. existence. [Vjiv.] 
 jivana-hetu, m. cause of existence, i.e. 
 
 means of subsistence. 
 jiva-pati or -patni, a. f. having one's 
 
 husband yet alive, 
 jiva-praja, a. having one's children yet 
 
 alive, [praja.] 
 jiva-loka, m. the world of the living (as 
 
 distinguished from that of the Manes), 
 
 86 18 , 23". 
 
 jivita, ppl. alive; as n. [1176a], life. [Vjiv.] 
 jivitavya, grdv. vivendum ; as n. impers., 
 
 see 999. [Vjiv.] 
 jivita^a,/. the wish for life, hope to save 
 
 one's life, [aga.] 
 
 jlvin, a. living. [Vjiv.] 
 
 V jus (jusate, -ti; juj6sa, jujus6; ajosista; 
 justa). taste, esp. with pleasure; relish; 
 take pleasure in or accept graciously, [cf. 
 yevo/*a.i, t ' taste'; Lat. gits-tits, 'taste'; AS. 
 ceosan, Eng. choose.] 
 
 j list a, a. acceptable. [ppl. of Vjus, w. 
 accent altered as in dhurta.] 
 
 juhu [356], f. sacrificial ladle for pouring 
 the melted butter into the fire, cf. sriic. 
 [Vhu, 1147b-.] 
 
 V ju (junati [728]; jujava [786 4 ]; jutd). 
 speed, intrans. and trans.; incite, inspire; 
 further, assist to. [cf. V2ji.] 
 
 Vjr ( F. jarati ; later, jiryati, -te ; jajara ; 
 ajarit ; jirna [957b]). decay; grow frail 
 or worn out or old. [cf . jarant, ' old/ and 
 ytpovr-a, 'old man'; jaraa and yrjpas, 
 'old age.'] 
 
 J6gii [352], a. loudly singing; praising, 
 [fr. intens. of Vgu, 1147b a , 1002a.] 
 
 J6sas, n. pleasure. [Vjus.] 
 
 jna, vbl. knowing, at end of cpds. [Vjfia, 
 333.] 
 
 V jna (janati, jamte [730]; jajnau, jajne ; 
 ajnasit [911], ajnasta; jnasyati, -te ; 
 jnatA ; jnatum ; jnatva ; -jfiaya ; jna- 
 yate ; jiiapayati, -te, jnapayati, -te 
 [1042d 2 ]; jnapta). know; have knowl- 
 edge of a person or thing ; recognize ; be- 
 come aware of ; learn ; notice, [cf . 6-7^01, 
 Lat. co-gnovit, 'knew'; AS. cann, 'have 
 learned, i.e. know, am able/ Eng. can; 
 AS. ge-cndican, Eng. know."] 
 + sam-anu, wholly acquiesce in ; ap- 
 prove ; give leave ; dismiss. 
 + abhi, recognize; know. 
 + praty-abhi, recognize. 
 + ava, look down upon ; despise. 
 + a, attend to, notice; caus. command. 
 + p a r i , carefully observe ; find out. 
 + pra, know; esp. know one's way or 
 bearings or how to go to work; prajnata, 
 clearly to be known, well known. 
 + p r a t i , recognize, allow ; promise ; 
 affirm. 
 
 + vi, distinguish; understand; know; 
 recognize; consider as; observe; find out; 
 pass, vijnayate, in stating a dogma, is 
 well known or recognized (by good author-
 
 jnati] 
 
 [160] 
 
 ities) ; caus. make any one know or un- 
 derstand ; make a representation to, with 
 a request or question or proposal ; memo- 
 rialize ; interrogate. 
 
 jnati, m. kinsman; relative. [Vjan: cf. 
 Kaffi-ymriTos, ' brother-born.'] 
 
 jnana, n. knowledge; wisdom; esp. knowl- 
 edge of the higher truths of religion and 
 philosophy. [Vjna, 1150.] 
 
 jnanin, a. wise; possessing jnana ; under- 
 standing (what one reads), 68 15 . [jnana.] 
 
 j n e y a , grdv. to be known or considered as. 
 
 [jfia-] 
 
 V jya or ji or jl (jinati; jijyau [785]; 
 ajyasit; jyasyati; jita). <; over- 
 power, [cf. 1 jya, 'power/ and Vlji, 
 ' overpower.'] 
 
 1 jya,/. superior power ; ftia. ; force. [ V jya : 
 cf . j8/a, ' force.'] 
 
 2 jya,/. bow-string, [cf. &i6s, 'bow.'] 
 jyayans, a. stronger or superior; older. 
 
 [comp. of jya, ' being strong or superior,' 
 
 thevblof Vjya, 470 2 - 3 .] 
 V jyut (jytttsAi; -jydtya). light, [fr. 
 
 Vdyut.] 
 j y e s t h a , later jyestha, a. best ; principal ; 
 
 first; oldest, [superl. of jya, the vbl of 
 
 V jya, 470 3 - see jyayans.] 
 jyestha-prathama, a. having the old- 
 est as the first. 
 jyotis-kft, a. light-making. [jyotis: 
 
 187.] 
 jy6tismant, a. full of light; light. 
 
 [jyotis: 184b.] 
 jy6tis, n. light (of sun, dawn, etc.); as pi. 
 
 the heavenly bodies ; stars. [V jynt.] 
 jy6tsna,/. moonlight, [jyotis: cf. 1195.] 
 j ray a s, n. stretch; expanse. [Vjri.] 
 Vjri (jrayati). perhaps, go, stride; used 
 
 only w. upa, stretch out to. 
 V jval (jvalati, -te ; jajvala ; ajvalit ; 
 
 jvalisyati ; jvalita ; -jvalya ; jvalayati, 
 
 jvalayati, -te). burn bright; flame; caus. 
 
 kindle, make to fiame. 
 
 + pra, caus. kindle. 
 
 jhat-iti, adv. with a jhat, as quick as one 
 could say " boo." [jhat, onomatopoetic : 
 seell02a 2 mid.] 
 
 jhalla, m. a cudgel-fighting athlete (de- 
 scended from outcast Kshatriyas). 
 
 thio, a Prakrit form for sthito. 
 
 V dhauk (dhaukate; dudhaukS ; dhauk- 
 itd; dhaukayati). approach; caws, bring 
 near. 
 + u p a , bring to ; provide. 
 
 t a [495], pron. he, she, it, they ; that, those ; 
 both subst. and adj., I 15 , 3 8 - 9 ; 1. correl. 
 of ya, which usually precedes [512], 3 14 , 
 9 18 , 10 5 , 22 5 , 29 15 , 32 10 , 70 16 , 77 13 ; but sa 
 ya, 17 22 , 33 16 , 73 9 ; otiose, 18 M , 20 u ; 
 
 2. in connection w. a pron. of the 1st or 2d 
 pers. : e.g. tarn tva Imahe, thee, who 
 art such a one (as aforesaid), we beseech, 
 i.e. therefore we beseech thee, 76 13 ; cf. 
 82 9 ; tebhyo nas bruhi, to us, who are 
 these (unsuccessful ones just described), 
 tell thou, i.e. do thou tell us then, 96 13 ; 
 similarly, w. a verb in the 1st or 2d pers., 
 whose subject is not expressed, 69 n , 73 2 , 
 76 12 - 17 , 83 l , 95 13 , 99*, 100*; -3. w. other 
 pronouns: tasya etasya, of this, 95 6 ; 
 yat tad tad, what (was) that , that, 
 57 7 ; ya ta, whoever, anybody, 18*; ya 
 ya ' ta ta, whoever that, 13 12 ; cf. 45 13 ; 
 
 4. attenuated in mg (like the Greek 6) to a 
 simple article: te devas, the gods, 92 u ; 
 sa bhimas, Bhima, 1 15 . [w. sa, sa, tad, 
 cf. 6, 7], TO, Goth, sa, so, />ata, AS. se, seo, 
 ^cet, 'he, she, it,' Eng. that; cf. also Lat. 
 is-tud, 'that.'] 
 
 V taks (taksati; tataksa, tatakse; ataka- 
 
 It; tasta; -taksya). hew; work (wood); 
 
 make (of wood or other material) ; fashion. 
 
 [cf . taks-an and TCKT-WV, ' carpenter ' ; 
 
 f-TfK-ov, 'produced'; Lat. tignum, 'log': 
 
 cf. Vtvaks and toka.] 
 taj-jivana, n. his subsistence, [tad.] 
 V tad (tadayati ; tadayam asa; tadita ; 
 
 -tadya). beat. 
 
 + p a r i , strike ; pelt, 
 tata, m. father. [cf. Terra, Lat. tata, 
 
 'papa': Eng. dad, though of similar 
 
 make, has of course no direct connection.]
 
 [161] 
 
 [tadvacana 
 
 tatas, adv. 1. (as abl. of pron. root ta 
 [1098], and synonymous w. tasmat) out of 
 it, 36 13 ; -2. from that (place), from 
 there, 103 15 ; thence ; there ; itas tatas, 
 here and there, hither and thither, 25 n , 
 2915,17. _3 f rom t h at (time), thereupon, 
 2 22 ; then, very often, e.g. II 11 , 20 u , 56 17 ; 
 correl. w. yad, 92 13 ; w. yada, 37 9 ; w. ced, 
 52 5 ; tatah prabhrti, from then on, 4 7 , 
 32 "; 4. therefore; 5. otiose, 47 n ; 
 5 2 ' 11 , II 16 ; then, w. otiose tada, 3 1 , 4 8 . 
 [pron. root ta, 497, 1098.] 
 
 tat-ksana, m. that moment; -am, adv. 
 in that moment, straightway, [tad.] 
 
 tat-tira, n. its bank, [tad.] 
 
 tattva, n. (that-ness, i.e.) essence, real 
 condition or state of a thing, [tad.] 
 
 tattva -jna, a. knowing the essence or 
 the truth or what's what. 
 
 tat-para, a. having that as highest ob- 
 ject ; given over to, intent upon, [tad.] 
 
 tat-pargva, n. his side, [tad.] 
 
 tat-prahrsta, a. pleased with that. 
 [tad.] 
 
 tzitra, adv. 1. (as synonymous w. loc. of 
 tad in all numbers and genders) in or among 
 or on this or these or them, 13 7 , 21 8 , 38 n , 
 57 '"; in this matter, 37 8 ; herein, 98 2 ; 
 -2. there, often, e.g. 2 8 , 5 6 ; thither, 6 6 , 
 II 14 , etc.; correl. w. yatra, 24 4 ; 3. on 
 that occasion, in that case, then, 4 1 , 14 22 , 
 40 1 . [pron. root ta, 497, 1099.] 
 
 tatra-stha, a. abiding there. 
 
 tat-samnidhana, n. his presence, 
 [tad.] 
 
 tat-sapatni,/. her co-wife, [tad.] 
 
 tat-samipe, adv. near him. [tad: see 
 samlpa.] 
 
 tat-sahacarin, a. accompanying him. 
 [tad.] 
 
 tatha, adv. 1. so, thus, II 4 , 24 16 ; in 
 this way, 99 20 ; w. yatha, yatha regularly 
 preceding: yatha tatha: as so, 21 1B , 
 61 6 , 77"; in order that thus, 30 16 , 37 7 ; 
 but tatha yatha, so as, 22 13 , 43 20 ; 
 yatha yatha tatha tatha, to what 
 degree to that degree, the more 
 the more, 48 14 ; yatha tatha, in one way 
 or another, 62 9 ; 2. particle of assent, so 
 be it, yes,4 2 , 8 6 , 48 12 , 94 5 ; that is so, 52 16 ; 
 
 3. so, in like manner, 19 8 ; or, simply 
 conjunctive, also, likewise, 10 8 , 12 13 , etc.; 
 tatha^eva, just so (cf. Middle Eng. al so, 
 i.e.), likewise, also, I 11 , 7 10 ; tatha ca, 18 20 , 
 see ca 3 ; 4. tatha^api, so even, even 
 under those circumstances, nevertheless, 
 21 . [pron. root ta, 497, 1101.] 
 
 t&tha-vidha, a. of such sort, in such 
 condition, [tatha ( 1306 ) + vidha, 1302c 5.] 
 
 tad, 1. as nom. ace. s. n. to ta, see ta ; used 
 also in cpds and derivatives, see 497 ; 2. 
 as adv. there ; yatra tad, where there, 
 103 18 ; -3. then, in that case, 27", 36 5 ; 
 ced tad, if then, 37 5 ; so yadi tad, 
 37 12 ; tad yad, then when, 71 2 ; sim- 
 ply continuative : tat ko vrtras, who then 
 is V., 97 19 ; so 24 2 ; 4. in this way, i.e. 
 therefore, accordingly, 18 8 , 19 13 - 22 , 27 u , 
 etc.; yad tad, since therefore, 17 6 ; 
 so yatas tad, 37 7 . [cf . 495.] 
 
 tad-anga, n. his person. 
 
 tad-anantara, a. immediately adjoin- 
 ing that; -am, adv. [1311], immediately 
 after that ; thereupon. 
 
 tad-abhimukha, a. turned towards 
 him; -am, adv. [1311], towards him. 
 
 tad-abhivadin, a. signifying that. 
 
 tad-ardhika, a. amounting to or lasting 
 half of that. 
 
 tada, adv. at that time; then, 2 20 ; in that 
 case ; often otiose in Epos, 3 7 ; so after 
 tatas, 3 1 , 4 9 ; yada tada, when then, 
 26 n ; yada yada tada tada, whenso- 
 ever then, 31 u ; yadi tada, if then, 
 25 9 . [pron. root ta, 497, 1103.] 
 
 tad-akrti, a. having the appearance of 
 them (i.e. of Picachas). 
 
 tad-ajna,y! his (the moon-god's) com- 
 mand. 
 
 tadahara-vartman, n. the way of that 
 food, [tad-ahara.] 
 
 tad-ipsita, a. desired by those two. 
 
 tadlya, a. pertaining to him, her, it, of 
 them; such, [tad, 497.] 
 
 tad-upadea, m. his advice. 
 
 tad-grha, n. his house. 
 
 tad-bhaya, m. fear of it or them. 
 
 tad-bhasa,/ that language. 
 
 tad-rasa, m. the essence of it. 
 
 tad-vacana, n. his words. 
 11
 
 tadvat] 
 
 [162] 
 
 tad -vat, adv. in this way, so; likewise, 
 [tad: 1107.] 
 
 tad-vid, a. knowing that; as m. connois- 
 seur or judge. 
 
 tad-vrksa, m. that tree. 
 
 tad-vrddhi,/. the interest of them. 
 
 V Itan (tan6ti, tanute ; tatana, tene 
 [794e] ; atanit ; tansyate ; tata ; tantum ; 
 tatva ; -tatya ; tayate [772]). 1. 
 stretch, trans, and intrans. ; extend, reach ; 
 spread over ; 2. continue, endure, 79 13 ; 
 3. stretch (a weft or a line); continue 
 (the line of a family) ; 4. metaphorically, 
 of sacrifice and supplication (which are 
 compared with a weft), perform, make, 
 [cf . rdvufuu, ' stretch ' ; Lat. tenere, ' hold,' 
 tendere, ' stretch ' ; AS. \>enian, Ger. dehnen, 
 ' stretch ' : see also tanu.] 
 + a, spread over; overspread (esp. with 
 light), beshine; stretch (a bow). 
 + pari, stretch around; surround; en- 
 velope. 
 
 + v i , stretch out ; spread out, cover ; 
 vitata, stretched, hung, dependent, 92". 
 + s am, hold together, intrans.; bind to- 
 gether ; make continuous ; samtata, (just 
 like Lat. con-tinens) uninterrupted. 
 
 V 2 tan (tanyati). resound. [cf. r6i>os, 
 ' tone ' ; Lat. tonare, ' thunder ' ; AS. noun 
 \>unor, ' thunder/ whence denom. verb 
 \ninrian, Eng. thunder; AS. \>unres dceg, 
 Eng. Thurs-day, 'day sacred to the Old 
 Germanic god of the thunder-storm, >onar 
 or Thor ' : see tanyatd, ' thunder.'] 
 
 tanu, f. [344 2 ] tanu, tanu, tanvi, a. thin, 
 tenuis, slender; tanu or tanu [decl. 356], 
 as subst. f. body, 56 3 , 89 18 ; person ; one's 
 own person, self, used like atman [514] as 
 reflexive pron., 73 12 , 78 12 ; outward form 
 or manifestation, 84 u . [prop, 'stretched 
 out, thin/ VI tan: cf. raw-, 'extended, 
 long/ in cpds ; Lat. tenuis, Eng. thin, Ger. 
 dtinn, 'thin.'] 
 
 tanu-trana, n. body-cover, 34 1T . 
 
 tanu-madhya, a. having a slender mid- 
 dle, i.e. slender-waisted. 
 
 tanu-tyaj, a. abandoning the body, risk- 
 ing life, brave. 
 
 tanti, f. cord; esp. a long line to which 
 calves are tethered by means of short 
 ropes ; tanti, the same. [V 1 tan.] 
 
 tantu, m. thread, 89 *; metaphorically, of 
 the thread, i.e. course, of a sacrifice. 
 [VI tan.] 
 
 tantra, n. thread; warp of a web; Jig. 
 fundamental doctrine ; division of a work. 
 [VI tan.] 
 
 V tand (tandate). relax, grow weary. 
 
 tandra,/ fatigue. [Vtand, 1188c.] 
 
 tandrita, a. wearied, only w. a-, [tand- 
 ra, 1176b.] 
 
 tannimittam, -ena, see nimitta. [tad.] 
 
 tanyatii, m. thunder. [v2tan.] 
 
 V tap (tapati, -te ; tatapa, tepe [794e] ; 
 atapsit ; tapsyati ; tapta ; taptum ; tap- 
 tva; -tapya; tapyate, tapyate [7Glb^). 
 1. be warm ; burn, intrans. ; 2. heat ; 
 make glowing; burn, trans.; 3. Jig. (like 
 Vuc), distress, pain ; 4. pass, suffer; 
 suffer voluntarily, castigate one's self, do 
 penance, [cf. Lat. tepere, AS. \>ejian, ' be 
 warm.'] 
 
 + upa, heat; become sick; sicken, used 
 impers., w. ace. of the person, 101 s . 
 - sam, heat ; pain. 
 
 tapah-prabhava, m. efficacy of devo- 
 tion. 
 
 tapas, n. 1. heat, fire; 2. voluntary 
 suffering (see tap 3, 4), self-castigation, 
 self-torture (64 21 ), mortification, asceti- 
 cism, devotion. [Vtap.] 
 
 tapasvant, a. full of devotion; pious. 
 [1233a.] 
 
 tapasvin, a. the same. [1232.] 
 
 tapo-ja, a. asceticism-born, whose ele- 
 ment is asceticism, [tapas.] 
 
 V tarn (tamyati, -te [763]; tatama; atam- 
 at; tant [955a]). become darkened, of 
 the eye ; become powerless, deadened, 
 stupefied, numb, or inactive, [orig. mg, 
 prob., 'be dark/ see tamas: cf. tamisra, 
 ' darkness/ Lat. tenebrae, ttemsrue, ' dark- 
 ness/ Old High Ger. dinstar, ' dark ' ; Old 
 High Ger. demar, 'dusk/ Ger. ddmmern, 
 ' become twilight/ but not Eng. dim.'] 
 
 tamas, n. 1. darkness; 2. spiritual 
 darkness, infatuation ; 3. darkness as 
 one of the three pervading qualities of all 
 ' existence, see gunaS. [Vtam.] 
 
 tamo-nistha, a. resting or founded on 
 darkness.
 
 [163] 
 
 [tiryaktva 
 
 tamo-nuda, a. darkness-dispelling. 
 
 tamo-bhiita, a. dark, enveloped in dark- 
 ness, [lit. ' become darkness,' tamas : 
 1273c.] 
 
 tar a, m. crossing, passage. [Vtr.] 
 
 taram-ga, m. wave; wave as subdivision 
 of a work entitled " ocean," 56 13 , cf. 45 ' x. 
 [lit. ' which goes crossing the water ' : 
 taram, grd of V tr, 995, cf . 1250a.] 
 
 tarani, a. pressing onward. [Vtr, 1159b.] 
 
 taru, m. tree. [prob. a modern form of 
 daru, q.v.] 
 
 taru-kotara, n. tree-hollow. 
 
 taruna, a. young; tender; -ka, n. sprout, 
 [cf . Tspriv, ' tender, fine.'] 
 
 taru-tale, under the tree, see tala. 
 
 V tark (tarkayati [1041 2 ] ; tarkayam 
 asa ; tarkayisyati ; tarkita ; tarkayitum ; 
 tarkayitva; -tarkya). 1. think over, 
 13 16 ; reflect, 13 13 ; -2. form an idea of. 
 [orig. mg, 'turn,' and so (like Lat. volvere 
 animo), 'turn over or revolve in one's 
 mind ' : cf . tarku, ' spindle ' ; rpeTr-co, Lat. 
 torqueo, ' turn ' ; Old High Ger. drahsil, 
 ' turner,' Ger. drechseln, ' turn.'] 
 + p r a , form a conception of. 
 
 tar hi, adv. at that time; then; yadi 
 tarhi, if then. [pron. root ta, 497, 1103c.] 
 
 tala, m. n. 1. surface; -tale, at end of 
 cpd, eouiv. simply to on, 6 17 , 46 n ; 2. the 
 surface or place under an object, e.g. a 
 tree ; -tale, at end of cpd, equiv. simply to 
 under, 34 l , 43 8 ; 3. sometimes otiose in 
 cpds, e.g. nabhas-tala, sky-surface, i.e. sky. 
 
 talpa, m. couch; bed. [for *star-pa, Vstr, 
 1201 * end : for mg, see under str.] 
 
 talpa-givan,/ -vari, a. lying on beds. 
 [1169.2*.] 
 
 tavisa, a. powerful. [Vtu, 1197b.] 
 
 taskara, m. robber. 
 
 t asm at, adv. from this (cause), hence; 
 therefore ; yad tasmat, since there- 
 fore. [pr6n. root ta, 1114a.] 
 
 tat a, m. used in voc. s., to a father, but gen- 
 erally to a junior or an inferior, my dear. 
 [cf. tata.] 
 
 t a d i t n a , rtV then, [perhaps instr. ( 1 1 12d ) 
 of *taditna, and this f r. *tadi-tna, ' of that 
 time,' and this fr. *tadi (1245e), correl. of 
 yadi.] 
 
 tadfg, a. such, [see 518: for declension, 
 see dfg.] 
 
 t a elf 5 a, a. such, [see 518.] 
 
 tap asa, m. ascetic, [tapas.] 
 
 tamaaa, a. dark; pertaining to darkness 
 or the guna called tamas. [tamas.] 
 
 tayii, m. thief, [cf. stayii.] 
 
 tar a,/, star, [form of transition to the 
 a-declension (399) from tf, see under 
 stf.] 
 
 t a v a c - c h a t a , f. -I, a. having 07- embrac- 
 ing so many hundreds, [tavant (1249a) 
 r ata.] 
 
 tavat-krtvas, a dr. so many times, 
 [tavant, 1249a.] 
 
 tavant [457], 1. adj. so great; so much; 
 so many, 105 * ; extending so far, 101 9 ; 
 lasting so long, 58 9 ; correl. w. yavant, 
 101 9 , 105 4 ; 2. tavat, as adv. so much; 
 so far ; to such an extent, 95 u ; so long ; 
 for a while, 19 l ; yavat tavat : as long 
 as so long, 15 6 , 32 :i , 40 18 ; when then, 
 44 15 ; just as then, 22 7 ; tavat yavat, 
 so long as, 19 2 , 42 3 ; 3. at once; now, 
 24 20 , 34 6 , 53 17 ; -3a. w. 1st per s. pres. ind., 
 first, before doing any thing else, at once, 
 20 18 , 23 8 , 38"; - 3b. w. imperative: at 
 once, 24 23 ; tavat tatas or pagcat, first 
 then or afterwards, 27 18 , 38 4 ; 4. con- 
 cessively, iha samaye, tavat, in this case, 
 one must admit, 41 10 ; 5. emphasizing, 
 like eva, what precedes, 30 4 , 25 T . [pron. 
 root ta, 517.] 
 
 tigma, a. sharp. [Vtij, 216.5.] 
 
 V tij (tejayati; tejayam asa ; tejita). be 
 sharp, [orig. *stig : cf. arifa, ' prick/ 
 ffrly-fta., ' prick ' ; Lat. in-stlgdre, ' prick on ' ; 
 Eng. stick, 'to pierce.'] 
 
 tithi, m.f. a lunar day (of which there are 
 15 in a half-lunation). 
 
 tiras, 1. prep, through; across; 2. as 
 adv. crossways, sideways; aside; w. kr 
 [171 3 , 1078*], put aside, treat disrespect- 
 fully, scold. [V tr, ' cross ' : cf . Lat. trans, 
 ' across.'] 
 
 tiras-kara, . a scolding. [V kr + tiras : 
 171 :i .] 
 
 tiryaktva, n. condition of a beast, 
 [tiryak, middle stem of tiryanc, 1249a: 
 1239.] 
 
 11*
 
 tiryanc] 
 
 [164] 
 
 tiryanc [409d], 1. a. directed across; 
 horizontal; 2. as subst. m. n. beast (going 
 horizontally, as opposed to man, who walks 
 upright urdhva) ; 3. ace. s. n. tiryak, 
 as adv. across, [tiras or tir, w. ane, 409d : 
 tir, like tiras, is akin w. Vtr.] 
 
 til a, m. I. the sesame plant, Sesamum 
 indicum; 2. its seed, which is eaten, 
 and furnishes good oil. 
 
 tisr, fern, to tri, see 482c. 
 
 tir a, n. shore or bank. [prop, 'place of 
 crossing or going into the water,' Vtr.] 
 
 V tu (taviti [633]; tutava [786*]). have 
 power ; be strong, [orig. ' swell, grow ' : 
 cf. rv-\i], 'swelling, lump,' Corcyraean 
 rv-/j.o-s, ' mound ' ; AS. \>uma, ' the big 
 (finger),' Eng. thumb; further, tiim-ra, 
 ' fat, strong ' ; Lat. tum-ulus, ' mound,' 
 tum-or, 'swelling.'] 
 
 td., pel. never at beg. of sentence. 1. w. 
 imperative, pray; 2. in sooth, 78 10 ; 3. 
 but, 8 12 , 26 13 , 34 10 , etc. ; on the other hand, 
 20 * ; tu tu, on the one hand on the 
 other, 2 16 ' " ; so % tu, tu, 60 3 ; na tv 
 eva tu, but by no means, 63 10 , 64 3 ; ka- 
 mam tu na tu, see kamam ; kirn tu, 
 nevertheless, 39 5 ; 4. used loosely: as 
 equiv. to ca, 58 l ; often as a mere expletive 
 [1122a], e.^.4 9 , 64 13b . 
 
 tu, pron. root of2ndpers , see tvad. 
 
 tuc, / progeny, [cf. toka.] 
 
 V tud (tudati; tut6da; tunna). strike; 
 push, [cf . TiiSfvs, ' The Hammer, Martel ' ; 
 Lat. tundo, tu-tud-i, ' strike, struck ' ; Goth. 
 stautan, Ger. stossen, ' strike.'] 
 + a, strike at, pick at. 
 
 V tur (turati, -te). press onward swiftly 
 [subsidiary form of Vtr (242) and allied 
 w. Vtvar.] 
 
 1 turd, a. 1. swift, esp. of horses; -am, 
 as adv. swiftly, in turaihga ; 2. quick, 
 ready, willing, 78". [Vtur.] 
 
 2 tur a, a. strong, mighty, 78 9 . [Vtu, 
 1188.] 
 
 turamga, m. horse. ['swiftly going,' 
 turam + ga, see 1 tura : for mg, cf. 
 khaga.] 
 
 turiya, a. fourth, [for *ktur-ia : catiir, 
 487 5 , 1215.] 
 
 V tul (tolayati; tola yam asa ; tolayisyati; 
 
 tolita; -t61ya). 1. raise up; 2. esp. 
 raise up a thing so as to find its weight; 
 weigh ; 3. counterpoise ; 4. equal, 
 [orig. mg, ' bear, i.e. hold up ' : in the cog- 
 nates, the mg ' bear, i.e. endure ' appears : 
 cf. Lat. tul-i, ' endured ' ; Goth. \>u/-an, 
 Eng. thole, 'endure'; Ger. Ge-dul-d, 'en- 
 durance ' ; also e-rA.Tj-j', ' bore,' iroAu-rAd-s, 
 ' much enduring ' ; Lat. Idtus, *tla-tus, 
 ' borne.'] 
 
 t u 1 a , f. balance ; weight; equality. [Vtul: 
 cf. Anglo-Indian tola, about 180 grains 
 troy : cf . rd\avrov, ' balance, weight.'] 
 
 tulya, a. keeping the balance with ; equal 
 to; like, [tula, 1212d4 end.] 
 
 tulyakrti, a. having like appearance; 
 alike, [akrti.] 
 
 tuvl, a. in cpds. mighty; much; many. 
 [Vtu, 1155.] 
 
 tuvi-badha, a. distressing many (ene- 
 mies) or besetting (them) sore. 
 
 tdvismant, a. mighty, [tuvis.] 
 
 tuvis, n. in derivs. might. [Vtu, 1153.] 
 
 V tus (tiisyati, -te; tut6sa; tusta; t6s- 
 tum; -tiisya; tosayati). become quiet; 
 be satisfied or pleased ; cans, satisfy ; 
 gratify. 
 + sam, caus. satisfy. 
 
 tusti.y^ satisfaction. [Vtus.] 
 
 tusnim, adv. silently, in silence, [prob. 
 fr. an obsolete *tusna, 'silent,' Vtus, 
 HIM.] 
 
 V tr (tarati, -te; tirati, -te; tatara, teriis 
 [794e] ; atarit ; tarisyati, -te ; tirna ; tar- 
 tum ; tirtva ; -tirya ; tarayati). 1. cross 
 over (a water, the sky); 2. get across or 
 to the end ; get through, escape ; survive, 
 [cf. rtpfjiuv, Lat. terminus, ' boundary ' : 
 see Vtra and tiras : for treatment of root- 
 vowel, see 242.] 
 
 -fava, descend, esp. from heaven to 
 earth ; come down, esp. of divine beings 
 who become incarnate as men ; alight ; be- 
 take one's self to ; caus. take down or off. 
 + u d , come up out of the water. 
 + abhy-ud, come out of the water unto, 
 cross the water unto, 89*. 
 + pra, take to the water; start on. 
 -t-vi, cross through ; traverse. 
 
 tr, m. star, see sir.
 
 [165] 
 
 [trikala 
 
 t r c d , m. n. strophe of three stanzas, [tri + 
 
 're, 243, 1315c.] 
 trna , n. grass, [of. (6p6va = ) rp6va, 'flowers, 
 
 herbs ' ; Eng. thorn ; Ger. Dorn, ' thorn.'] 
 trtiya, a. third, [fr. tri, through trita, 
 
 243, 487 4 : cf. rpi-ros, Lat. ter-tius, Eng. 
 
 thir-d, Ger. dri-tte, ' third.'] 
 V t r d (trnatti, trntt6 ; tatarda, tatrde' ; 
 
 trnna; -tfdya). split; bore; open. 
 
 + anu, bore after (waters), release, make 
 
 flow. 
 V Itrp (tfpyati, -te [761a]; tatarpa; atrp- 
 
 at; trapsyati; trpta; -tfpya; tarpayati). 
 
 be satisfied; become content; cans, sat- 
 isfy, please ; nourish, [cf . repTrw, ' satisfy, 
 
 please,' rpe'^w, 'nourish.'] 
 
 + a , become content or glad. 
 V 2trp, steal, not actually occurring in vbl 
 
 forms, but rendered probable by the deriv. 
 
 trpu, ' thief,' the cpds asu- and pagu-trp, 
 
 and by the Avestan Vtrf, 'steal.' 
 V trs (tfsyati; tatarsa ; atrsat; trsita; 
 
 tarsayati). be thirsty. [cf. repa-opai, 
 
 'become dry'; Lat. torret, *tors-et, 'grows 
 
 dry, scorches ' ; Eng. noun thirs-t ; Ger. 
 
 dorr-et, ' grows dry ' ; also Lat. terra, *ters-a, 
 
 'the dry (land).'] 
 trsa,/. thirst, [v'trs.] 
 tfsna,/. thirst. [Vtrs, 1177a.] 
 tejas, n. 1. sharpness, edge; 2. tip of 
 
 flame or ray ; gleaming splendor, 1 6 ; fire ; 
 
 3. (splendor, i.e.) beauty of person, 8 10 ff.; 
 
 4. (like Eng. fire, i.e.) energy, vigor,power; 
 
 5. moral or magic power, 11 23 ; influence, 
 dignity, 95 8 ; majesty, I 6 , 2 4 . [Vtij: ob- 
 serve that a.K/j.-f) has mgs 1 and 4.] 
 
 t&na, adv. in that way, 47 1T ; so; therefore, 
 18 7 , etc.; yatas or yad or yena tena, 
 for the reason that , therefore, 30 8 , 57 6 , 
 64 9 . [pron. root ta, 1112a : of like deriva- 
 tion and mg is r<p.] 
 
 tail a, n. sesame oil. [tila, 1208fi end.] 
 
 toka, n. creation, progeny, [cf. Vtaks and 
 Vtvaks, and tiic.] 
 
 t o r a n a , n. arched portal ; arch. [' passage,' 
 Vtur, subsidiary form of Vtr, 'cross, pass.'] 
 
 tya [499a], pron. that; that well-known (like 
 Lat. ille). 
 
 tyakta-jivita, a. having life set aside, 
 risking one's life, brave. 
 
 tyaktajivita-yodhin, a. bravely fight- 
 ing. [1279.] 
 
 \f tyaj (tyajati, -te ; tatyaja, tatyaj6 ; 
 atyaksit; tyaksyati, -te; tyakt; tyak- 
 tum; tyaktva; -tyajya; tyajyate; tyaj- 
 ayati). 1. withdraw from ; leave in the 
 lurch ; abandon (dove, goat, tree) ; 2. re- 
 nounce (passions, use of a language) ; 
 relinquish (exertion) ; lay aside (a certain 
 form, an earthly body) ; set aside, i.e. risk 
 (life), [cf. <re&onai, 'shrink back from in 
 awe, revere.'] 
 
 + pari, leave to one's fate (a jackal); 
 abandon; leave (one's party); relinquish 
 or give up (play, food, affairs) ; pari- 
 tyakta, (abandoned by, i.e.) separated 
 from, 66 3 . 
 
 tyaj, vbl. abandoning, w. tanu-. [Vtyaj.] 
 
 tyajya, grdv. to be abandoned. [Vtyaj, 
 963c.] 
 
 tray a, a. triple, threefold, 57 13 ; as n. triad, 
 triplet, rpias. [tri, 489 *.] 
 
 V tras (trasati; tatrasa, tatrasiis, tresiia 
 [794e 2 ] ; atrasit ; trasisyati ; trasta). 
 tremble ; fear, [cf . rpew, TpeV-tre, ' tremble, 
 trembled '; Lat. terreo, ' affright '; a-trastas 
 and &-rpe<TTos, ' unterrified.'] 
 
 trasadasyu, m. Trasadasyu, a generous 
 prince, the favorite of the gods, and de- 
 scended from Purukutsa. [perhaps for 
 trasad-dasyu, ' affrighting the evil beings,' 
 see 1309 4 - v'tras.] 
 
 v' tra (trati, trate [628]; trayate [761c] ; 
 tatr6 ; atrasta ; trasyate ; trat& ; tra- 
 tum; tratva). protect; rescue; rescue 
 from, w. abl. [collateral form of Vtr 
 ('get through or across'), w. a caus. mg, 
 'bring through or across (trouble).'] 
 
 tratr, m. protector, saviour. [Vtra.] 
 
 trasa, m. terror. [Vtras.] 
 
 trasadasyava, m. descendant of Trasa- 
 dasyu, 87 12 . [trasadasyu, 1208c.] 
 
 tri [482c], num. three, [cf. rpris, rpia, Lat. 
 tres, tria, Eng. three, Ger. drei, ' three.'] 
 
 tringat [485], /. thirty, [cf. tri.] 
 
 trikadruka, m. pi. perhaps designation 
 of certain Soma-vessels, three in number, 
 [cf . tri and kadru.] 
 
 tri-kala, n. the three times, present, past 
 and future, [kala, masc. : 1312.]
 
 trikalajna] 
 
 [166] 
 
 trikala-jna, a. knowing present, past, 
 
 and future ; omniscient, 
 tri-daga [declined like kama, 330], m. pi. 
 
 the three times ten, the thirty, a name in 
 
 round numbers for the 33 deities ( 12 Adit- 
 
 yas, 8 Vasus, 11 Rudras, 2 A9vins), i.e. the 
 
 gods, [tri + daga, 477c : cf . tringat.] 
 tridagegvara, m. pi. lords of the gods, 
 
 i.e. the four chief gods, Indra, Agni, Va- 
 
 runa, and Yama. [Igvara.] 
 tri-diva,n. the triple or third i.e. highest 
 
 heaven, [div, 1315c : 1312 3 .] 
 tri-dhatu, a. having three parts, tri-par- 
 
 tite, threefold, [acct, 1300c.] 
 tri-pada, / -I, a. having (taken) three 
 
 steps. 
 tri-ratra, n. space of three nights, tri- 
 
 noctium. [ratri, 1316b, 1312 3 - 4 : cf. the 
 
 Eng. usage in sen-night, fort-night.] 
 tri-vidya,y. the three sciences, i.e. Vedas. 
 
 [1312 3 .] 
 tri-vidha, a. of three sorts, threefold. 
 
 [vidha, 1302c 5 : acct, 1300c.] 
 tri-vft, a. threefold, tri-partite. ['turn- 
 ing thrice, with three turns.'] 
 tri-veda, in cpds and derivs. the three 
 
 Vedas. [1312 3 .] 
 tri-aavana, a. pertaining to the three 
 
 Soma-pressings ; -am, adv. at morning, 
 
 noon, and evening, [savana.] 
 tris, adv. thrice, [see tri: cf. rpis, I^nt.ter, 
 
 *ters, ' thrice ' : Eng. thrice is a gen. form, 
 
 cognate in root only.] 
 traividya, n. study of the three Vedas. 
 
 [trividya.] 
 traivedika, a. relating to the three 
 
 Vedas. [triveda, 1222e2.] 
 try-adhiathana, a. having three mani- 
 festations. 
 
 tva, pron. stem qf2dpers., see tvad. 
 V tvaks, work, principally in derivs., and 
 
 ident. w. taka. 
 tvac, /. skin. 
 
 t v a j - j a r a , m. thy paramour, [tvad, 494.] 
 tvat, abl. of tva, and used in place of tva 
 
 in cpds : by Hindus written tvad, q.v. 
 
 [494.] 
 tvat-krte, for the sake of thee. [1314f, 
 
 1130 : tvat represents the stem tva, and 
 
 in gen. relation.] 
 
 tvad [491], so-called stem [494] of 2d pers. 
 pron. thou ; see tvat. [w. the real root tu, 
 cf. Doric TV, Lat. tu, AS. "Sii, Eng. thou, 
 Ger. du, ' thou.'] 
 
 V tvar (tvarate; tatvare; turna [cf. 957b], 
 tvarita; tvarayati). hasten; tvarita, 
 having hastened, in haste, [see Wtur, tr.] 
 
 tvara,/. haste. [Vtvar.] 
 
 tvastr, m. 1. wright, workman, 75 6 ; 
 
 2. Twashtar, the artificer of the gods 
 (70 s ), former of fruit of the womb, giver 
 of growth and long life (86 15 ), father of 
 Saranyu (85 12 ). [V tvaks, 221.] 
 
 tvavant, a. like thee. [tva, 517.] 
 tvastr a, m. descendant of Twashtar. 
 [tvastr.] 
 
 d a , vbl giving, in cpds. [V 1 da, 333, 354.] 
 
 V dang or dag (dagati [746]; dadanga ; 
 dagisyati ; dasta ; danstva ; -dagya). 
 bite. [cf. SaKvca, 'bite'; Goth, tahjan, 
 ' rend, tear.'] 
 
 danga, m. gad-fly. [Vdang.] 
 
 danatra, m. large tooth; tusk; fang. 
 [Vdang, 1185b.] 
 
 danstrin, a. having tusks or large teeth, 
 [danstra.] 
 
 V daks (dakaati, -te ; dadakae; dakaia- 
 yate). act. suit; mid. be able or dexterous 
 or strong, [cf. daksa and daksina.] 
 
 daksa, a. able, dexterous, strong; as m. 
 ability, faculty, strength, power; esp. spir- 
 itual power, will; daksa and kratu, will 
 and understanding (as faculties of the 
 manas, ' soul '). [V daks : cf . Sei6s, ' clever, 
 right,' and daksina.] 
 
 dakaina, a. 1. clever, able; and so 
 
 2. (as opp. to awkward, gauche), right, 
 of the hand, hasta, e.g. 102 n ; so pani, 
 60 5 ; foot, pada, 60 5 ; side, pargva, 102 12 ; 
 
 3. southern (because in prayer the face 
 is turned eastward: cf. uttara3), 105 8 ; 
 sc. agni, southern fire, 102 3 N. ; 4. as f., 
 daksina, sc. go, the able, i.e. fruitful cow, 
 milch cow; milch cow as the customary 
 reward for conducting a sacrifice ; then, 
 
 5. in general, any reward or present for 
 the sacrificing priest, see 106 5 ; so 95 2> 3 ; 
 
 see also adv. daksina. [Vdaka: cf. 
 
 , Lat. dexter, ' clever, right ' ; Goth.
 
 [167] 
 
 [Vday 
 
 taihsva, ' right hand ' : from daksina in 
 mg 3, comes Deccan, name of the country 
 south of Hindustan, lit. ' the South.'] 
 
 daksina-pacjcima, a. southwesterly. 
 
 daksina-purva [525*], a. southeasterly. 
 
 daksina, adv. southerly ; toward the 
 south, [daksina: acct, 1112e.] 
 
 daksinagni, m. the southern fire, 103 ' 2 , 
 cf. 102 2 N. 
 
 daksinapara [525 2 ], a. southwesterly, 
 [daksina + apara.] 
 
 daksina-pravana, a. sloping to the 
 south, [daksina, adv.] 
 
 daksinabhimukha,a. facing southerly, 
 [daksina (adv.) + abhimukha.] 
 
 daksinayana, n. south-course (of the 
 sun), or the half-year from the summer to 
 the winter solstice, [daksina -f ayana.] 
 
 daksinaranya, . the southern forest 
 (a forest in the Deccan). [daksina + 
 aranya.] 
 
 daksinavant, a. abounding in gifts to 
 the priests, i.e. (from the point of view of 
 the priests) pious, [daksina: see dak- 
 sina 5.] 
 
 dagdha, a. 1. burned; 2. pained, tor- 
 tured ; 3. wretched, good-for-nothing, 
 cursed, damned, [ppl. of V dah : for mg 2, 
 cf. Vcuc.] 
 
 dagdhodara, n. one's cursed belly, 
 [dagdha + udara.] 
 
 danda, m. stick; staff (of Brahman), 59 M ; 
 mace, 97 8 ; rod as symbol of dominion 
 and punishment, [cf . SevSpoy, ' tree.'] 
 
 danda-bhaya, m. fear of the rod. 
 
 <l and in, a. bearing a staff; as m. warder, 
 [danda.] 
 
 datta, a. given; as m. (a son) given (by 
 his parents to others for adoption) ; com- 
 mon at end of proper names, esp. of Vaiqyas. 
 [ppl. of Vlda, 955c.] 
 
 dadrh, a. firm; dadhfk, ace. s. n., as adv. 
 firmly. [Vdrh.] 
 
 dadhan [431], n. sour milk; curds, [orig., 
 perhaps, ' milk,' f r. V 2 dha.] 
 
 d a d h i , supplementary stem to dadhan. 
 
 dadhi-karna, m. Curd-ear, name of a 
 cat. ['having curd-ears, i.e. ears as white 
 as curds.'] 
 
 dadhfk, see dadrh. 
 
 dant [396], m. tooth. [cf. bUvra, Lat 
 dentem, Goth. tun\>us, AS. toft, Eng. tooth, 
 Old High Ger. zand, Ger. Zahn, 'tooth.'] 
 
 dant a, m. tooth, [dant, 399.] 
 
 V dabh or dambh (dabhati ; dadabha, 
 dadambha, debhus ; adabhat ; dabdha ; 
 dabdhum). harm with guile ; hurt ; deceive. 
 
 dabh a, m. deception. [Vdabh.] 
 
 Vdam (damyati [763] ; danta [955a] ; 
 damitva; -damya ; damayati). 1. be 
 tame ; 2. tame ; conquer ; become mas- 
 ter ; control. [cf . 8a/j.d(a, Lat. domdre, 
 ' tame ' ; Eng. tame, Ger. zahm, ' tame.'] 
 
 dam, n. house. [cf. 8, 'house': see 
 under dama.] 
 
 da ma, m. n. house, home. [cf. S6fj.os, Lat. 
 domus, ' house, home ' : it is not certain 
 whether dama comes from Vdam and so 
 means lit. 'the place where one is mas- 
 ter, one's Gebiet,' or whether it is to be 
 connected w. Sf/j.<a, 'build': in the latter 
 case, it would mean lit., like Ger. Ban, ' a 
 building,' and should be connected w. AS. 
 timber, *tem-ra, 'building-material, a build- 
 ing,' Eng. timber, 'building-material,' Ger. 
 Zimmer, 'building-material, a building, a 
 room.'] 
 
 dama, 1. a. conquering, at end ofcpds; 
 as m. 2. Dama, i.e. Victor, name of a 
 son of Bhima; 3. self-control. [Vdam: 
 cf. 'l-7nr6-Sa/j.os, 'Horse-tamer,' etc.] 
 
 da man a, 1. a. conquering, at end of 
 cpds ; 2. as m. Damaua, i.e. Vincent, name 
 of a priestly sage, and of a son of Bhima. 
 [Vdam: cf. Lat. dominus, 'master.'] 
 
 damayanti, f. Damayanti, i.e. Victoria, 
 name of Bhima's daughter. [' conquering 
 (men),'fr. Vdam, 1043.5.] 
 
 dam-pati, m. master of the house; as 
 dual, master and mistress, man and wife; 
 pair, [acct, 1267a.] 
 
 dambha, m. deception. [Vdabh.] 
 
 V day (day ate ; day am asa ; dayita). 
 1. part; allot; 2. take part in; sym- 
 pathize with ; have tender feeling for ; 
 love ; dayita, loved, dear ; as f., -ta, 
 wife. [for 1, cf. Kpta Saiero, 'parted, 
 carved the meat'; for 2, cf. Salerat faop, 
 'heart is divided or takes part in (?), i.e 
 sympathizes.']
 
 daya] 
 
 [168] 
 
 daya,/ sympathy ; compassion. [V day .] . 
 
 d a y a 1 u , a. compassionate, [daya, 1227 3 . ] 
 
 dayavant.a. compassionate, [daya.] 
 
 day it a, see Vday. 
 
 dara, m. cleft, hole. [VI dr.] 
 
 daridra, a. wandering about; mendicant; 
 poor ; as m. poor man. [fr. intens. of 
 Vldra, 'run about,' 1147b 2 : for mg, cf. 
 Eng. tramp, in its American sense of 
 ' vagrant beggar.'] 
 
 d a r p a , m. . vvildness ; wantonness ; impu- 
 dence; pride. [Vdrp.] 
 
 darbha, m. grass-tuft; grass used at sacri- 
 ficial ceremonies, esp. Ku9a-grass, Poa 
 cynosuroides. [Vdrbh.] 
 
 darga, m. sight; the moon when just be- 
 coming visible ; the new moon ; the day 
 or festival of new moon. [Vdrg.] 
 
 dargaka, a. 1. seeing; 2. (fr. caus.) 
 showing, making clear. [drg.] 
 
 dargata, a. to be seen; visible. [Vdrg, 
 1176e.] 
 
 dare, an a, a. seeing; as n. the beholding, 
 sight; the becoming visible, 103 20 ; ap- 
 pearance, 4 10 . [V drg.] 
 
 darga-purna-masa, dual in. new and 
 full moon ; the days and the festivals of 
 new and full moon. 
 
 d a g a [483 4 ], num. ten. [cf . Se'/ca, Lat. decem, 
 Goth, taihun, Eng. ten, Ger. zehn, 'ten'; 
 Eng. -teen in six-teen, etc.] 
 
 dagama, f. -i, a. tenth; dagaml, sc. tithi, 
 tenth day of a lunar half-month. [daga, 
 487 .] 
 
 daga-gata, n. ten hundred ; a thousand. 
 
 dagagakha, a. having ten branches, i.e. 
 fingers, [daga + gakha : acct, 1300a.] 
 
 daga, f. the threads projecting at the end 
 of a weft, fringe ; lamp-wick ; fig. wick of 
 life, course of life ; time of life. 
 
 dagaha, m. space of ten days, [daga + 
 2 aha, 1312 4 .] 
 
 V das (dasyati; dadasa ; adasat ; dasta ; 
 Hasayati). suffer lack, [cf . V das, dasyu : 
 also 8eo>, 'lack.'] 
 + vi, become exhausted. 
 
 dasyu, m. demon, foe of gods and men. 
 [cf. Vdas, dasa.] 
 
 V dah (dahati, -te ; dadaha, dehe; adhak 
 sit ; dhaksyati ; dagdha ; dagdhum ; 
 
 dagdhva ; -dahya; dahyate). 1. burn 
 with fire; burn; 2. pass.: be burned; 
 be pained or tortured; 3. dagdha, see 
 s.v. [for *dhagh : cf . Goth, dags, AS. dceg, 
 Eng. day, Old High Ger. tak, ' day.'] 
 + a , in adahana. 
 + vi, injure by burning, 84 17 . 
 + sam, consume. 
 
 V Ida (dadati, dadati [668]; dadau, dad6; 
 adat, ddita [884] ; dasyati, -te ; datta 
 [955c], -tta [1087e] ; datum ; dattva ; 
 -daya ; diyate [770b] ; ditsati [1030] ; 
 dapayati). give ; bestow ; grant ; impart ; 
 w. ace. of thing and dat. or gen., later also 
 loc., of person, 1 n , 23 20 , 21 n ; varam da, 
 grant a wish; gapaih da, (give, i.e.) pro- 
 nounce a curse ; saubhagyam da, (give, 
 i.e.) wish conjugal felicity; da, (give, i.e.) 
 sell, w. instr. of price, 47 4 ; uttaram da, 
 make answer ; graddham da, perform a 
 graddha, 44 3 , 104 n ; punar da, give back ; 
 desid. desire or be ready to give. [cf. 
 Si'SoiyUj, Lat. da-re, 'give.'] 
 + anu, (like Ger. nach-geben, 'yield,' and 
 so) grant, admit; ppl. anutta [1087e], ad- 
 mitted. 
 
 + a, take (opp. of give), 28 n ; grasp, 70 6 ; 
 adaya, having taken, equiv. to with. 
 + u p a_a, receive, appropriate. 
 -f p a r i , deliver over ; commit; entrust. 
 + pra, give; grant; impart (sciences); 
 ppl. f. pratta [1087e], given in marriage, 
 married. 
 
 V 2 da (dyati [761d3]; dad6; adat, adita 
 [884] ; dina [957a], -tta [1087e] ; -daya ; 
 dlyate). cut. [cf. Vday, daya.] 
 + ava, cut off, esp. a part of the sacri- 
 ficial cake ; ppl. avatta [1087e], as subst. 
 that which is cut off. 
 
 -f-sam-ava, cut in pieces and collect 
 them ; ppl. samavatta, as subst. gathered 
 pieces. 
 
 V 3 da (dyati[761d3]; dita[954c]; -daya; 
 diyate). bind. [cf. Sew, Si'Srjyui, 'bind.'] 
 
 da, vbl. giving, in cpds. [VI da.] 
 
 datavya, grdv. dandus. [Vlda.] 
 
 datr, m. giver; as a. [375 3 ], generous, 21 4 , 
 48*. [Vlda.] 
 
 dan a, n. giving, imparting; gift. [Vlda, 
 1150: cf. Lat. donum, 'gift.']
 
 [169] 
 
 dana-dharma, m. the virtuous practice 
 
 of alms-giving. 
 danava, m. child of Danu, a Danava, one 
 
 of a class of demons, foes of the gods ; 
 
 Titan. [Idanu, 1208c.] 
 
 1 danu, /. Danu, name of a demon, 70 18 . 
 
 2 danu, n. dripping fluid, drop, dew. 
 danta, a. tamed, mild; subdued (as to 
 
 one's passions) ; as subst. Danta, name of 
 a son of Bhlma. [ppl. of v dam, 955a.] 
 
 1 daman, n. a giving, gift. [\/lda, 1168.] 
 
 2 daman, n. bond. [V3da, 1168.] 
 dambhika, a. subst. deceitful, deceiver. 
 
 [dambha.] 
 
 1 day a, a. giving. [VI da.] 
 
 2 day a, m. portion, inheritance. [V2da: 
 cf. Scis, 'portion, meal.'] 
 
 d a y a k a , a. giving. [1 daya.] 
 
 dara[264 2 ], m. pi. wife. 
 
 daridrya, n. poverty, [daridra.] 
 
 daru, n. wood; log or billet of wood; stick. 
 [see the equiv. drii and taru : cf. 56pv, 
 ' wood, beam, shaft ' ; Spvs, ' tree, oak ' ; 
 Goth, triu, ' wood, tree ' ; Eng. tree, ' wood ' 
 (so Wyclif), ' a large woody plant' (usual 
 mg), 'a wooden bar' (in whiffle-free).] 
 
 da r una, a. hard; dreadful. 
 
 V dag (dagati; dadaga, dagvans [790b]). 
 grant, offer ; esp. serve or honor a god 
 with offerings ; dagvans, as subst. a pious 
 servant of a god, 69 u . [w. dadaga, cf. 
 SfSwKa, ' granted, gave ' ; e-Sco/c-a is an im- 
 perfect indicative without thematic vowel, 
 corresponding to #a-dag-am ; but both 
 Greek forms became connected in the 
 popular mind with 5i'5ayu, 'give.'] 
 
 V das (only with abhi, abhidasati). bear 
 ill-will to ; try to harm, [cf . V das, dasyu, 
 dasa.] 
 
 das a, m. 1. foe; esp. supernatural foe, 
 evil demon; 2. (in opp. to arya) foe of 
 .the gods, infidel ; used like Caffre and 
 Giaour; 3. (subdued foe, i.e.) servant, 
 slave, 79 2 ; dasi,/. female slave. [V das : 
 cf. \Jdas, dasyu.] 
 
 dasa-patni, a.f. having the demon for 
 their master, [acct, 1251b, 1295.] 
 
 diti, f. Diti, name of a deity without defi- 
 nite character, a mere pendant to aditi as 
 sura to asura, and formed by popular 
 
 etymology as sura from asura. [see 
 
 aditi and daitya.] 
 didfksu, a. desirous to see. [fr. desid. 
 
 of Vdrg, 1178f: acct!] 
 didyu, HI. missile, [see Vldivordyu, and 
 
 1147b 2 .] 
 didhisu,a. desirous to win; as m. suitor; 
 
 husband; esp. second husband, [fr. desid. 
 
 of Vldha, 1178f, 1028d.] 
 din a, 1. perhaps adj. clear, in su-dina; 
 
 2. as n. day. [perhaps ppl. of Vdi or 
 di, 'shine,' w. shifted acct.] 
 
 dina-traya,n. day-triad, triduum, space 
 
 of three days. 
 V div: there is no verbal root div in Sanskrit: 
 
 cf. noun div and W 1 and 2 div or diii. 
 div [361d], 7/1. 1. sky, heaven, e.g. 72 ' 2 ; 
 
 la. Heaven, personified as Father, e.g. 
 KV.vi. 51.5; Ib. duhita divas, of the 
 Dawn, daughter of the sky or of Heaven, 
 75 16 ; -2. day, e.g. 70 8 , 79 13 ; -3. observe 
 that div is sometimes fern, in Veda, so 92 1>s , 
 RV. x. 125. 7. 
 
 [w. gen. div-as, cf. the genitives Ai6s, 
 *AtF-6s, Lat. JSv-is, and AS. Tiw-cs in 
 Tiwes dozg, Eng. Tues-day : (Tiiv corre- 
 sponds to the old Germanic Tin, no longer 
 a god of the sky or bright day, but rather 
 a god of battle or fighting, the chief occu- 
 pation of our early forefathers:) w. nom. 
 dyaiis, cf. Zeus, *Aj-r)vs : w. voc. dyaus 
 pitar, cf. Zev Trdrtp, Lat Ju-piter, ' Heaven 
 Father ' : w. duhitar divas, cf . Ovyartp 
 Aids, &fj.&por' 'A.6dva, Oedipus Rex 159 : cf. 
 also 87os, ' heavenly ' ; Lat. nom. Diovi-s, 
 'god of heaven,' Jdv-em, 'Jove'; sub dio, 
 1 under the sky ' ; Eng. Tewes-ley, ' Tiw's 
 lea,' a place in Surrey.] 
 
 diva, n. heaven; day, in dive-dive, day by 
 day. [div, 1209a.] 
 
 diva, adv. by day. [f r. the instr. div-a, w. 
 shifted acct, 1112e.] 
 
 divaukas, m. caelicola, god. ['having 
 heaven as a dwelling ' : diva + okas.] 
 
 d ivy a, a. heavenly ; divine, [div.] 
 
 V dig (digati ; didega ; adiksat, adista 
 [883] ; deksyati ; dista ; ddstum ; -digya ; 
 digyate; degayati). point ; direct ; show, 
 [cf. Se'iKWfj.1, 'show'; Lat. dico, 'show, 
 tell'; AS. tdh, Ger. zieh, 'pointed out (as
 
 dig] 
 
 [170] 
 
 guilty), accused'; Ger. zeigen, 'show'; 
 also AS. tdh-te, ti&h-te, Eng. taught, ' showed, 
 instructed ' ; AS. tdcn, Eng. token.'] 
 -f apa, show; make a false show of. 
 + vy-apa, make a false show of. 
 + a , point out to, give a direction to, 
 direct. 
 
 + sam-a, point out to, direct; com- 
 mand. 
 
 + u d , point out ; aim towards ; uddicjya, 
 tr. ace., with an aiming towards, equiv. to 
 the prep, at, 26 22 . 
 
 + upa, show to, teach, instruct; give ad- 
 vice to, advise. 
 + pra, point out, designate; direct. 
 
 dig, f. just like Eng. point, i.e. cardinal 
 point, quarter of the heaven (N., E., S., 
 W.) ; astau digas, eight regions (N., E., 
 S., W., and NE., SB., SW., NW.), 57 . 
 [Vdic,, 'to point.'] 
 
 V dih (degdhi ; didihe ; digdha ; -dihya). 
 
 1. stroke, touch lightly ; 2. smear ; 
 
 3. besmear, pollute, [for *dhigh: cf. 
 ZOiyov, ' touched ' ; Lat. Jingo, ' form, fash- 
 ion, esp. with the hand in soft material ' ; 
 Goth, daigs, ' moulded mass of clay or 
 bread-paste'; Old Eng. dag, Eng. dough.] 
 + s am, pass, (be plastered together, be 
 indistinct, and so) be uncertain, doubtful. 
 
 V di (dideti [676] ; didaya [786 3 ], didi- 
 
 vans). shine, glance, gleam. 
 V diks (diksate; didiksa, didikse ; adiks- 
 
 ista ; diksisyate ; diksita ; diksitva ; 
 
 -diksya). consecrate one's self, esp. for 
 
 performing the Soma-sacrifice. [perhaps 
 
 desid. of V daks, ' make one's self suitable 
 
 or ready ' : 108g.] 
 d 1 1 i , f. glance, flame, actually occurring only 
 
 in su-diti. [vdi, 1157. la.] 
 dldivi, a. shining. [Vdi, 1193.] 
 din a, a. scanty; cast down, sad; wretched, 
 dinata, f. scantiness; smallness. [dina.] 
 dinar a, m. denarius, name of a certain 
 
 gold coin, [borrowed fr. Lat. denarius, a 
 
 silver coin worth ten asses."] 
 J dip (dipyate ; didipe ; dipta ; -dipya ; 
 
 dedipti ; dipayati, -te). blaze; flame; 
 
 caws, kindle ; intens. blaze brightly ; fig. be 
 
 radiant, [cf. Vdi.] 
 
 + ud, blaze up ; caws, cause to blaze up. 
 
 dirgha, a. long, in space and in time; 
 
 -am, as adv. ; comp. draghiyans, superl. 
 
 draghistha. [v ; dragh : cf . SoAixo's, ' long.'] 
 dirgha-karna, m. Long-ear, name of a 
 
 cat. 
 dirgha-rava, m. Long-yell or Far-howl, 
 
 name of a jackal. (Their howling is both 
 
 long-continued and far-reaching.) 
 dirgha-var na, m. a long vowel, 
 dirghavarnanta, a. having a long 
 
 vowel as final, [anta.] 
 V Idiv (dlvyati; dideva [240 3 ]; adevit ; 
 
 devisyati ; dyutd ; devitum ; -divya). 
 
 dice; play. [prop, diu, see 765 1 and 2 : 
 
 orig., perhaps, 'throw,' cf. didyu.] 
 
 + a , in adevana. 
 V 2div (devati [240 3 ] ; dyunA [957a] ; 
 
 devitum; devayati, -te). lament, [prop. 
 
 diu, see 765 l and 2 .] 
 
 + pari, moan, bemoan ; caus. the same. 
 duhkha, a. miserable; as n. misery, pain, 
 
 sorrow, [cf. sukha.] 
 
 duhkhita, a. pained, [duhkha, 1176b.] 
 ducchiina, f. calamity; harm, [dus + 
 
 Quna, 'mis-fortune, ill-luck,' 168 3 .] 
 V ducchunaya (ducchunayate). seek to 
 
 harm, [ducchuna, 1058.] 
 dur-, the form taken by dus before sonants. 
 dur-atikrama, a. hard to overcome. 
 
 [' having a hard conquest,' cf . 1304b.] 
 dur-atman, a. evil-minded; bad. 
 dur-ga, a. whose going is hard, hard to 
 
 go through or to, impassable; as n. diffi- 
 cult place ; danger. 
 
 dur-gata, a. ill-conditioned ; unfortunate. 
 dur-jana, m. evil person; scoundrel. 
 dur-danta, a. overcome with difficulty; 
 
 as m. Hard-to-tame (AUO-M'KTJTOJ), name of 
 
 a lion. 
 dur-nivara,a. whose warding-off is hard ; 
 
 hard to get rid of. 
 dur-bala,a. of (poor, i.e.) little strength; 
 
 feeble, 
 durbuddhi, a. of (bad, i.e.) small wit; 
 
 foolish. 
 dur-bhaga, a. ill-portioned, ill-favored; 
 
 -a, f. ugly woman, [acct, 1304b.] 
 dur-bhiksa, a. (time) having its alms- 
 getting hard, i.e. in which alms-getting is 
 
 hard ; as n. famine, [bhiksa.]
 
 [171] 
 
 [Vdrc 
 
 dur-mangala, a. of bad luck, bringing 
 bad luck. 
 
 dur-mati,/. ill-will. 
 
 dur-mada,a. badly intoxicated ; drunken, 
 [acct, 1304b.] 
 
 dur-vijneya, a. hard to distinguish. 
 
 dur-vipaka, m. evil issue (of one's des- 
 tiny). 
 
 dur-vrtta, a. of evil life, wicked. 
 
 V dul (dolayati ; dolita). heave upwards ; 
 swing, [cf. Vtul.] 
 
 diivas, n. gift ; oblation ; worship. 
 [V 1 du.j 
 
 d vivas, n. perhaps same as dtivas, but see 
 74 10 x. 
 
 V duvasya (duvasyati). reward with a 
 gift; honor or worship (a god) with an 
 offering, [diivas.] 
 
 + a. perhaps bring or entice hither by 
 worship, but see 74 10 N. 
 
 V dus (diisyati; adosit; dusta; dusayati 
 [1042a 2 ]). spoil, [see dus.] 
 
 dus-kara, a. whose performance is hard, 
 hard to be performed, [dus.] 
 
 dus-krta, n. evil deed ; sin. [dus.] 
 
 dust a, a. spoiled; bad, morally; cross, 
 [ppl. of V dus.] 
 
 dus, inseparable prefix, characterizing a thing 
 as evil, bad, hard ; forming w. action-nouns 
 cpds w. the same mg as if compounded w. a 
 future pass, ppl., e.g. dus-kara, ' having its 
 doing hard, i.e. difficult to be done.' [cf. 
 \ dus: also Svs-, 'mis-', see 225 2 .] 
 
 dus-tara, a. having its crossing hard, 
 hard to cross. 
 
 V duh (d6gdhi, dugdhe ; dud6ha, dudub.6; 
 adhuksat, -ata [918] ; dhoksyate ; dug- 
 dha ; d6gdhum ; dugdhva; dohayati). 
 1. milk; then, generalized 2. get the 
 goodoutof a thing; 3. extract; 4. give 
 milk ; 5. in general, give or yield any 
 good thing, 80 16 ; cans., like simple, milk, 
 extract. [for mg 2, cf. a^f\yeaQal nva, 
 'milk a person dry.'] 
 + nis , milk out of; extract from. 
 
 duh, rbl. yielding, in kama-duh. [v'duh.] 
 
 duhitf [373 3 ], f. daughter, [derivation 
 uncertain, 1182d: cf. Ouydrrip, Goth, dauh- 
 tar, Eng. daughter, Ger. Tochter, ' daugh- 
 ter.'] 
 
 V 1 d u , subsidiary form of^l da, in diivas, 
 duvasya. [cf. Wstha and ga w. their 
 equiv. collateral forms sthu and gu.] 
 
 V 2 du, go to a distance, in duta and dura, 
 [cf . $fvo/j.ai, ' am at a distance from some- 
 thing, fall short of.'] 
 
 dudabha, a. hard to deceive, ['whose 
 deceiving is hard ' : for duzdabha, i.e. 
 dus + dabha, 199b 3 .] 
 
 duta, m. messenger ; ambassador, envoy, 
 [V2dii, 1176a.] 
 
 dura, a. far; as n. the distance; case- 
 forms as adverbs: -am, to a distance, far 
 away ; -e, in the distance, afar ; at or from 
 a distance; -at, from afar. [v2du, 1188.] 
 
 duri-kr (durikaroti). put far away; 
 send off. [dura, 1094.] 
 
 durva,_/. millet-grass, Panicum Dactylon. 
 
 dulabha, same as dudabha, Whitney 54. 
 
 V Idr (drnati ; dadara, dadre ; adarsit ; 
 dirna; -dirya; diryate; dardarti [1002b] ; 
 darayati, darayati). burst, trans, and 
 intrans. ; cans, and intens.: split; tear, 
 w. gen. [cf . Sepca, Sfipw, ' flay ' ; AS. teran, 
 Eng. tear, Ger. zerren, ' tear, rend,'] 
 
 V 2dr (driyate ; adrta ; drta ; -drtya). 
 used only w. a, see 773. [cf. V5eA in Sfv- 
 Si\\o>, ' glance at ' ; AS. tilian, ' be intent 
 upon, attend to, esp. the earth, i.e. till (the 
 soil),' Eng. till; Ger. zielen, 'aim at'; AS. 
 eorlS-tilia, ' earth-tiller.'] 
 + a, (look at, i.e.] regard; pass, be re- 
 garded, i.e. respected. 
 
 drdha, see Vdrh and 224a. 
 
 drti, m. bag of leather; bellows, [v'ldr: 
 for mg, cf . Sfp/j.a, ' skin bag or bottle.'] 
 
 V drp (drpyati; adrpat; darpisyati, drap- 
 syati ; drpta ; darpayati). be crazed, 
 wild, proud, insolent, or arrogant. 
 
 V drbh (drbhati ; drbdhd). make into 
 tufts. 
 
 V drg (dadirga, dadrge; adraksit, adrsta; 
 draksyati, -te ; drsta ; drastum ; drstva ; 
 -dfgya; drgyate; didrksate; dargayati). 
 see ; behold ; pass, be seen ; be or become 
 visible; appear; caus. cause (a person, 
 ace., 33 3 ) to see (a thing, ace., 33 6 , 35 7 , 
 36 7 ); show (w. gen. 63 2 ); w. atmanam, 
 show one's self, appear, pretend to be (e.g. 
 frightened, 41 4 ). [present forms supplied
 
 [172] 
 
 by \f 1 pa, q.v. : w. dadarga, cf . 
 
 ' saw ' : cf . Goth, ga-tarh-jan, ' make a show 
 
 of.'] 
 
 + prati, pass, appear over against one 
 
 or before one's eyes. 
 
 -f v i , pass, be seen far and wide. 
 
 + s am, behold; caws, show; w. atmanam, 
 
 show one's self, appear, pretend to be (e.g. 
 
 dead). 
 df [218 3 , drk, dram, drgbhyam], 1. vbl. 
 
 seeing, looking ; 2. as f. the seeing ; 
 
 drgfi, as inf. [970a], for beholding ; 3. in 
 
 cpds [518], look, appearance. [Vdr.] 
 drga, m. the seeing; in cpds [518], look, 
 
 appearance, [do.] 
 drgi.y. the seeing; drc_aye, as inf. [970f], 
 
 for beholding, [do.] 
 dfgya, grdv. to be seen; worthy to be 
 
 seen, splendid. [Vdrg, 963d.] 
 d r s a d , f. stone ; esp. nether mill-stone, 
 drsad-upala, dual f. the nether and the 
 
 upper mill-stone. [1253a, 1258.] 
 drsta, ppl. o/Vdrg, q.v. 
 drsta-purva, a. seen previously, [equiv. 
 
 to purvam drsta, see 1291.] 
 df sti, /. 1. seeing; 2. sense of sight; 
 
 3. glance, look; 4. view. [Vdrg: cf. 
 
 8e'p|is, ' sense of sight.'] 
 Vdrh (dfnhati, -te [mg 1, cf. 758] ; dfhyati, 
 
 -te [mg2, see 767] ; adrnhit ; drdha [224a] ; 
 
 drnhayati). 1. act. make firm or steady 
 
 or enduring ; establish ; mid. be firm ; 
 
 drdha [1176a], firm; -2. be firm; -3. 
 
 caus. make stable, [cf . Old Lat. forc-tis, 
 
 ~La.t.fortis, 'strong.'] 
 
 drib. a, same as drdha, Vdrh, Whitney 54. 
 d e y a , grdv. to be given or granted. [V da, 
 
 963a.] 
 deva,/. devi, 1. a. heavenly, 74 14> 16> 18 , 
 
 92 T ; as subst. 2. god, goddess; 2a. pi. 
 
 the gods (in later times reckoned as 33, cf. 
 
 tridaca ) ; 2b. vfgve devas, all the gods ; 
 
 also all-gods (a term comprehending into 
 
 a class all the separate gods, cf. All-saints, 
 
 and see vigvadeva) ; 2c. devi, The God- 
 dess, i.e. (Diva's wife, Durga ; 2d. -deva, 
 
 at end of Brahman-names, having as god, 
 
 so, e.g., gunadeva ; 3. m. manusya-deva, 
 
 god among men, i.e. a Brahman, see 95 x ; 
 
 similarly, -4. m. king, 19 12 , 50 4 , 51*- 7 -"; 
 
 so used of a lion {32 15 ) or even of a jackal 
 (36 21 ); / queen, [perhaps fr. the noun 
 div (1209i): cf. Lat. deus, 'god': the al- 
 leged root div, 'shine,' has no existence.] 
 
 deva-kama, a. having love for the gods, 
 [acct, 1293 *, 1295.] 
 
 devata, f. godhead or divinity, both as 
 abstract and as concrete ; devata, instr., 
 with divinity (collective), i.e. among deities, 
 73 [1237.] 
 
 devat va, n. divinity, abstract only. [1239.] 
 
 deva-duta,m. messenger of the gods. 
 
 deva-daivatya, a. having the gods as 
 divinity, (of hymns) addressed to the 
 gods. 
 
 deva-pati, m. lord of the gods, i.e. Indra. 
 
 deva-pana, a. serving the gods for 
 drinking, [lit. ' god-drenching, i.e. gott- 
 trankend': acct, 1271, 1251c.] 
 
 deva-yana, n. path of the gods, on which 
 the intercourse between gods and men 
 takes place, [acct, 1271, 1251c.] 
 
 devara, m. husband's brother, [devf, 
 1209a.] 
 
 deva -raj a, m. king of the gods, i.e. Indra. 
 [rajan, 1315a.] 
 
 deva-linga, n. god-characteristic, mark 
 by which a god may be distinguished from 
 a man. 
 
 deva-garman, m. Deva9arman or God's- 
 joy, name of a certain Brahman, [of like 
 mg is f6-xapis.~\ 
 
 deva-samnidhi, m. presence of the gods. 
 
 deva-huti, f. invocation of the gods, 
 [acct, 1274.] 
 
 devi, see deva. 
 
 devi-krta, a. made by Durga. 
 
 devi-kotta, m. Goddess-fort, name of a 
 town. 
 
 devi-vinirmita, a. laid out by Durga. 
 [v'lma.] 
 
 devf [369 2 ], m. husband's brother, [cf. 
 Sa-np, Lat. levir, ' husband's brother.'] 
 
 dea, TO. 1. (point, i.e.) place, 41 18 ; 
 2. country, 24 5 , see 98 16 N. ; 3. place, 
 pregnantly, as in Eng., i.e. proper place, 
 22 5 ; 4. as in Eng., place or region of 
 the body, see muska-, skandha-. 
 ' point.'] 
 
 dialect of the country.
 
 [173] 
 
 [drugdha 
 
 destr, m. pointer, guide, instructor; /. 
 ddstri, Instructress, as a deity, 90 9 . [Vdi, 
 1182: cf. +SfiKTrip in SeiKr-fipios, 'pertain- 
 ing to one who shows.'] 
 
 deha, m.n. body; mentioned w. manas and 
 vac, 65 9 . [v'dih, 'stroke lightly so as to 
 mould or form/ and so, prob. ' the figure, 
 form, shape,' like the Lat. figura, ' shape, 
 form,' from the cognate ^Jig, Jingo : see 
 v/dih.] 
 
 dehin, a. connected with the body, 65 n ; 
 as m. a living being, man. [deha, 1230.] 
 
 daitya, m. descendant of Diti, q.v. ; a 
 Daitya or demon, [diti, 1211.] 
 
 d a i t y a - danava-mardana, m. Daitya-and- 
 Danava-crusher, epithet of Indra. 
 
 daiva, a. of the gods, 57 21 ; coming from 
 the gods ; divine ; as n. divine appoint- 
 ment, i.e. fate, 18 1Z , etc. [deva, 1208f.] 
 
 daivata, a. pertaining to a divinity; as n. 
 1. a divinity or, collectively, the divini- 
 ties, esp. that or those celebrated in any 
 Vedic hymn; -2. idol, 62 18 . [devata, 
 1208e.] 
 
 daivatya, at end of cpds, having as 
 divinity, addressed to , 63 5 . [devata, 
 1211.] 
 
 daivika, a. of the gods; divine, [deva, 
 1222e.] 
 
 daivya, a. of the gods; divine, [deva, 
 1211.] 
 
 dola, m. a swinging; f. dola, a dooly 
 (Anglo-Indian term), a little bamboo chair 
 slung on four men's shoulders, [V dul.] 
 
 V dolaya (dolayate). swing like a dooly ; 
 waver, [dola.] 
 
 dolayamana- mati, a. having a wavering 
 mind. [V dolaya.] 
 
 1 dosa, m. 1. fault, defect; bad con- 
 dition, 55 5 ; 2. sin, transgression, fault, 
 II 8 , 18 n , 65 21 ; dosam avap, incur a 
 transgression, 68 4 ; 3. harm; evil con- 
 sequence ; dosena, dosat, by or as a bad 
 consequence of, by, faute de, 23 21 , 35 2 . 
 [Vdus.] 
 
 2 dosa, m. evening, dark ; f. dosa, evening, 
 dark. 
 
 dosa-vastr, m. illuminer of the dark- 
 ness; or, as adj. [cf. 375 3 ], lighting up in 
 the dark. 
 
 dautya, n. message, [duta, 1211.] 
 dyava-prthivi, dual f. heaven and 
 
 earth, [div + prthivi, 1255 and a 2 .] 
 dyu, same as div, 361d. 
 V dyut (dy6tate ; didyut6 ; adyutat ; 
 
 dyotisyati ; dyutta ; -dyiitya). gleam; 
 
 lighten ; shine, [akin w. noun div, q.v. : 
 
 cf. also V jyut.] 
 
 + vi, lighten, 
 dyuti, /. sheen, 19 7 ; lustre; dignity. 
 
 [Vdyut.] 
 dyumant, a. heavenly, bright, splendid. 
 
 [fyd.] 
 
 dyuta, n. gambling. [VI div, 1176a.] 
 
 dy6, sa/e as div, 361d. 
 
 dravina, n. movable property (as opp. to 
 
 house and field), wealth. [Vdru, 1177b.] 
 dravya, n. 1. property; 2. in general, 
 
 thing, object ; 3. esp. worthy object. 
 
 [Vdru: see dravina.] 
 drastavya, grdv. to be seen. [Vdrg.] 
 V Idra (drati; dadraii ; adrasit; intens. 
 
 [1002c, 1024 2 ] daridrati). run ; intens. 
 
 run about, run hither and thither, [cf. 
 
 Si-Spd-ffK<a, ' run ' : see Vdru.] 
 
 + a p a , run off. [cf . cwro-Spaj/at, ' run 
 
 off.'] 
 V 2 d r a (drati ; dray ate ; dadraii ; adrasit ; 
 
 drasyati; drana). sleep, [cf. tSpaBov, 
 
 ' slept ' ; Lat. dormlre, ' sleep.'] 
 
 + ni, go to sleep; sleep. 
 V dragh, only in derivs. drag, draw; draw 
 
 out ; extend ; lengthen, [poss. for #dhragh 
 
 (cf. Vdhraj), and akin w. Eng. drag: but 
 
 see dirgha.] 
 draghiyans, a. longer, as comp. to dirgha. 
 
 [V dragh, 467.] 
 V dru (dravati, -te ; dudrava, dudruv6 ; 
 
 adudruvat [868] ; drosyati ; druta ; dr<5- 
 
 tum ; drutva ; -driitya). hasten; run ; 
 
 run away, flee, 94 7 . [ident. w. Vdram, 
 
 ' run,' and w. V 1 dra, q.v. : cf . eSpd/ie and 
 
 fSpd, 'ran.'] 
 
 + ati, run past or by ; escape. 
 
 + a , run unto, make an attack, charge, 
 
 94 5,6. 
 
 + u p a , run unto. 
 
 + sam-upa, run unto, rush at, 3 12 . 
 drii, m.n. wood, [see daru.] 
 drugdha, see V druh.
 
 druta] 
 
 [174] 
 
 druta, ppl. having hastened [952 2 ]; -am, 
 as adv. hastily, rapidly; quickly; imme- 
 diately. [Vdru.] 
 
 drum a, m. tree, [drti: cf. Spvfj.6s, 'a wood.'] 
 
 V d r u m a y a ( drumayate) . pass for a tree. 
 [drama, 1058, 1059b.] 
 
 V druh (dnihyati ; dudr6ha ; adruhat ; 
 dhroksyati ; drugdha ; dr6gdhum ; -druh- 
 ya). hurt (by deceit, wile, magic); strive 
 to harm ; ppl. drugdha : as m. one who 
 has striven to harm, hurtful foe ; as n. 
 misdeed, [if for *dhrugh, cf. Old High 
 Ger. triukan, Ger. be-trugen, ' deceive so as 
 to harm.'] 
 
 abhi, offend against. 
 
 dvd [482b], num. two. [cf. Svo, Lat. duo, 
 Eng. two.~\ 
 
 dvamdva, n. pair; quarrel, [dvam-dvam 
 is the repeated nom. s. n. of dva : cf . 
 1252 *.] 
 
 dvaya, a. twofold; of two sorts; as n. 
 couple, pair, [dva : cf . 8oi6s, ' double.'] 
 
 dvadaga [483*], cardinal, twelve, [dva 
 ilaca. 476 3 : cf. SudtSeica., Lat. duodecim, 
 ' twelve.'] 
 
 dvadaga, /. -i, ordinal, twelfth, dva- 
 dagi (sc. tithi), twelfth day of a lunar 
 half month, 59 9 . [dvadaga, 487 7 .] 
 
 dvadaga-ratra, n. space of twelve 
 nights, [dvadaga + ratri, 1315b, 1312 3 - *.] 
 
 dvadaga-sahasra, cardinal, n. twelve 
 thousand. [481.] 
 
 dvadagasahasra,. consisting of twelve 
 thousand, [dvadaga-sahasra, 1204c.] 
 
 dvar [388c], /. door, [perhaps 'the clos- 
 ure,' f r. V dvr, ' close,' for #dhvr : cf . 6vpa, 
 'door'; lot. for is, nom. s., 'door'; Eng. 
 door.~\ 
 
 dvar a, n. door, [dvar, q.v. . 399.] 
 
 d vara-paksa, m. side of the door. 
 
 dvi, form o/dva in composition and deriva- 
 tion. [475 .] 
 
 dvi-ja, a. twice-born; as m. member of 
 one of the three upper castes, re-born by 
 virtue of investiture (see Vni + upa), 60 2 , 
 68 2, 59 *, 62 7 ; in a narrower sense, a Brah- 
 man, 21 ", 43*, 55 , 64 16 . 
 
 dvi-janman, a. having double birth ; as 
 m. same as dvija ; man of one of the three 
 upper castes, 59 l . [acct, 1300c.] 
 
 dvi-jati, a. ana* as m. same as dvijan- 
 man ; man of one of the three upper 
 castes, 59 19 . 
 
 dvijottama, m. the highest of the twice- 
 born, i.e. a Brahman, [dvija + uttama.] 
 
 dvita, a. second, [dvi.] 
 
 dvita, adv. just so ; so also; equally. 
 
 dvitiya, a. second, [dvita, 487 4 , 1215d.] 
 
 dvidha, adv. in two parts,in twain. [1104.] 
 
 dvi-pad [391], a. having two feet; as m. 
 the two-footed one, man, 16 2 ; as n. sing. 
 that which is two-footed, collectively, men, 
 90 1 - 3 , 92 3 . [cf. SiTroSa, Lat. bipedem, 'bi- 
 ped.'] 
 
 dvi-pada, f. -i, a. having (taken) two 
 steps. 
 
 dvi-pravrajin, f. -ni, a. in f. going 
 after two (men), unchaste, 98 14 . 
 
 V dvis (dvesti, dviste; didv^sa; adviksat, 
 -ata; dvista ; dvestum). hate; show 
 hatred ; be hostile, [cf . o-Sva-avro, ' be- 
 came wroth,' w. prothetic o.] 
 
 dvis, vbl. hating, in cpds; asf. hate; as m. 
 concrete, hater, foe. [Vdvis.] 
 
 dvis, adv. twice, [see dvi, dva: cf. Si's, 
 Lat. bis, *dvis, ' twice ' : the radically cog- 
 nate Eng. twice is a gen. form.] 
 
 dvipa, m. island. 
 
 dvipi-carman, n. tiger-skin, [dvipin.] 
 
 dvipin, a. having islands or island-like 
 spots ; as m. leopard ; tiger, [dvipa.] 
 
 V dvr, cover, close, in derivs. [see dvar.] 
 
 dvedha, adv. in two, in two kinds, [for 
 *dvayadha, fr. dvaya, 1104 2 .] 
 
 dvesa, m. hatred. [Vdvis.] 
 
 dvesas, n. hatred ; concrete, hater, foe. 
 [Vdvis.] 
 
 dha, vbl. bestowing, granting, in vasu-dha 
 [Vldha,333.] 
 
 V dhan (dadhanti). set in motion, [cf 
 V dhanv.] 
 
 dhana, n. 1. the prize of the contest; 
 not only the reward put up for the victor. 
 but also the booty taken from the foe 
 Vedic; so w. Vji, win booty by conquest, 
 81 2 ; then, 2. in general, wealth, riches, 
 property, money. [V dha, ' put ' : cf . fo^o, 
 ' thing put up as a prize,' and for the mg 
 also Ger. Ein-satz, 'stakes.']
 
 [175] 
 
 [V 1 dha 
 
 dhanu, m. bow. [fr. dhanus, a transfer 
 to the u-declension.j 
 
 dhanus-kanda, n. bow and arrow, 
 [dhanus : see 1253b.] 
 
 dhanus, n. bow. [Vdhan, 1154.] 
 
 dhanya, a. wealthy; fortunate, [dhana.] 
 
 \f dhanv (dhanvati; dadhanve ; adhan- 
 vit). set in motion ; run. [secondary 
 form of v'dhan.] 
 
 dhanvan, n. bow. [Vdhan, 1169. la.] 
 
 dhanvin, a. subst. having a bow, bow- 
 man, [dhanvan, 1230b.] 
 
 V dh amor dhma(dhamati [750] ;dadhmau; 
 adhmaslt ; dhamisyati ; dhamita, dhma- 
 ta; -dhmaya). blow, breathe out; blow 
 (pipe, shell, bag-pipe, bellows), [see 108g 
 and 750.] 
 + a , blow up ; adhmata, fig. puffed up. 
 
 dhara, a. holding; bearing; keeping; 
 wearing. [Vdhr.] 
 
 d harm a, m. 1. custom, 98 18 ; usage, 
 99 u ; right; duty, 28 6 ; virtue, 21 7 , 10, 
 15 17 , 29 1 ; (virtue, i.e.) good works, 29 5 , 
 63 n ; correct course of conduct, II 3 ; 
 dharme, in a question of right, 21 u ; 
 la. dharmena, adv. : as was right, 14 17 ; 
 dutifully, 16 5 ; 2. law; prescription, 
 rule; the law (as a system), 28 5 , 58 16 ' 19 ; 
 -3. personified, Virtue, 67 n , 48*. 
 
 [a post-Vedic word, taking the place of 
 V. dharman: dharma is fr. v'dhr (1166b), 
 perhaps in mg 6, and thus designating 
 ancient custom or right as 'that which 
 holds its own, which persists or endures ' ; 
 but it may come fr. Vdhr in mg 1, so that 
 dharma is 'that which is established or 
 settled'; in the latter case, cf., for the 
 mg, 0(/j.is, ' that which is established as 
 custom or law,' w. riOrifu, ' set, establish/ 
 and Ger. Ge-setz, ' law,' w. setzen, ' set.'] 
 
 dharma-j iia, a. knowing the law or one's 
 duty or what is right. 
 
 dharma-j naiia, n. knowledge of the 
 law. 
 
 dharmatas, adv. in a way which starts 
 from dharma, i.e. in accordance with good 
 usage, 59 19 ; by rights, 61 16 . [dharma, 
 1098c 3 .] 
 
 dharman, n. established ordinance; stead- 
 fast decree (e.g. of a god), 80 10 ; dhar- 
 
 mana, according to the established order 
 of things, in a way that accords with 
 nature, 84 8 . [Vdhr, 1168. Ic: see under 
 dharma.] 
 
 dharma-mula, n. the root or foundation 
 of the law. 
 
 dharma-vid [391], a. knowing the law 
 or one's duty, 1 15 ; acquainted with good 
 usage, 61 10 . 
 
 dharma-gastra, n. authoritative or ca- 
 nonical compend of dharma, 58 18 ; law- 
 book; law-shaster. 
 
 dharmatman, a. having virtue or right 
 as one's nature ; just, [atman.] 
 
 v' dhav (dhavate). run. [see under Vdhu, 
 and cf. dew, \10eF, 'run.'] 
 
 dhavala, a. dazzlingly white. [V 2 dhav, 
 'rinse,' 1189, 1188.] 
 
 \/ Idha (dadhati, dhatt6 [668]; dadhaii, 
 dadhe; adhat, adhita [884]; dhasyati, 
 -te; r. -dhita, later hita[954cl; dhatum; 
 dhitva ; -dhaya ; dhiyate ; dfdhisati, 
 dhitsati; dhapayati ' L 1042dl). 
 
 -1. put, 86 10 ; set; lay, 39 u ; -2. put 
 in a place, bring to, u\ tatra, 85 19 ; w. loc., 
 89 s , 95 5 ; w. dat.,83 1 ; -3. put upon, di- 
 rect towards ; dharme dha manas, set the 
 heart on virtue, 66 7 ; 4. put something 
 for a person (dat.), i.e. bestow upon him, 
 grant him, 84 1 , RV.x. 125.2; 5. put in 
 a position, i.e. appoint, constitute, w. double 
 ace., 88 12 ; 6. make, cause, produce ; 
 
 7. hold, keep, 86 6 ' 9 ; 8. mid. take to 
 one's self, receive, obtain, win ; esp. gar- 
 bham dha, conceive fruit in the womb, 
 92 12 ; 9. mid. assume, 19 7 ; maintain ; 
 
 10. hita, see s.v. ; 11. desid. act. desire 
 to grant; mid. desire to win. 
 
 [The original meaning of the root is 
 'put'; but, from the proethnic period, a 
 secondary development in the line ('set,' 
 ' establish,' and so) 'make,' ' do,' is clear. 
 The secondary mg has even won the more 
 prominent place in Germanic and Slavic. 
 
 For the primary mg, cf . rieri/j.i, ' put ' 
 (the parallelism of its mgs is remarkable 
 
 dfo-av KiOov, ' they set a stone ' ; OfaOai 
 v!6v, 'conceive a son,' etc., etc.) ; Lat. ab- 
 de-re, 'put off or away,' and con-de-re, 'put 
 together, construct, establish ' ; Eng. do,
 
 Vidha] 
 
 [176] 
 
 'put,' in the contract forms doff, don, dup ; 
 Ger. weg-thun, ' do away or put away.' 
 
 For the secondary mg, cf . 9tivai TWO. &a- 
 trjAe'o, 'make one a king'; AS. don hine 
 to cyninge, ' make him a king ' ; Lat. flo, 
 ' am made ' ; Eng. do, deed ; Ger. thun, 
 ' do ' ; Slavic de-/o, ' deed ' : observe that 
 ff-eri, ' become,' is to f&-c-ere, ' make,' as 
 i-re (V/a), ' go/ is to ja-c-ere, ' make to 
 go, throw.'] 
 
 + antar, 1. put into the interior of 
 a thing ; and so 2. hide, conceal. 
 + a pi, put close upon; cover (a jar with 
 its lid); apihita, closed up. [cf. ewiriOrifu, 
 'put upon.'] 
 
 -f abhi, put on; put a name upon, desig- 
 nate; address; speak to, 43 10 ; say, 42 20 ; 
 abhihitam, (it was) said, 38 13 . 
 4-ava, put down in; esp. duck (trans.) 
 into the water; avahita, fallen into the 
 water ; cans, cause to be laid in. 
 + a , 1. put or lay or set in or on, w. loc., 
 77 \ 79 12 , 88 15 , 90 5 , 102 ; -2. put on 
 (wood on the fire), 82 15 ; 3. mid. set for 
 one's self on (the hearth a sacred fire), 
 95 12 ; _ 4. mid. put on one's self, take on, 
 74 6 ; _5. take, i.e. take away, 87 10 . 
 -t-vy-a, pass, be separated; be uncom- 
 fortable or sick. 
 
 + s a m - a , put upon ; w. manas, concen- 
 trate the mind upon one thing ; samahita, 
 intent, eager, 1 13 . 
 
 -fupa-sam-a, set together (wood) unto 
 (an already burning fire), put (fuel) on, 
 100 16 , 105 10 . 
 
 + u p a , put on (esp. a brick or stone 
 on the sacred fire-altar or enclosure), 
 96" ff. 
 
 + ni, lay down, 87 8 ; set down (sacred 
 fire), 85 6 ; w. kriyam, put labor upon 
 (loc.), take pains with, 19 u ; nihita, put 
 down, lying low, 70 19 . 
 + sam-ni, lay down together; put to- 
 gether ; pass, be near together ; samni- 
 Mta, near, impending, 25 15 . 
 + pari, put around; esp. put (part of a 
 sacrificial fence) around (an altar), 105 13 ; 
 put around one's self, put on, (garments) 
 103 19 , (shoes) 45 u ; clothe. 
 4-puras, see s.v. 
 
 + p r a , set forward, [cf . pradhana, pra- 
 dhana.] 
 
 + vi, 1. part, mete out, distribute; 
 - 2. spread abroad, RV. x. 125. 3 ; - 3. (like 
 Lat. dis-pdnere) arrange, determine; pre- 
 scribe, 59 7 ; vihita, ordained, 14 4 ; 4. lay 
 out, make, build; prepare, 54 18 ; 5. ac- 
 complish, 56 12 ; make, do (in a great 
 variety of applications) ; vadham vidha, 
 do slaughter, slay, 32 u ; pujam vidha, do 
 or show honor, 28 13 ; pravrttim vidha, 
 make an advance into, w. loc., expose one's 
 self to, 20 12 ; upayam vidha, employ an 
 expedient, 39 2 ; kim vidheyam, what's to 
 be done, 31 6 ; tatha vidhiyatam, so let 
 it be done, II 4 ; yatha , tan maya vi- 
 dheyam, I must take such a course, that , 
 37 6 ; cf. 38 22 . 
 + grad, see grad. 
 
 -t-sam, put together, unite; embroil in, 
 w.loc., 73 ". 
 
 V 2dha(dhayati[761d2]; dadhaii ; adhat ; 
 dhasyati ; dhita ; dhatum ; -dhiya ; dhi- 
 tva). suck; drink, 63 1 . [cf. dadhi, dhenu: 
 also 0-fiffaTo, ' sucked ' ; ya\a-0rji'6s, ' milk- 
 sucking ' ; 0ri-\-ti, ' breast ' ; Lat. fe-lare, 
 'suck'; Goth, dadd-jan, 'give suck.'] 
 
 1 dha, in cpds. as vbl. bestowing, grant- 
 ing ; as subst. place. [V 1 dha, ' place, 
 grant.'] 
 
 2 dha, in cpds. as subst. drink. [V2dha, 
 'drink.'] 
 
 dhatu, m. layer, as part of a composite 
 whole. [V 1 dha, ' put, lay.'] 
 
 clhatf, m. establisher; creator; Dhatar, as 
 name of a deity, 90 9 N. [VI dha.] 
 
 dhana, a. holding, containing, [v/ldha, 
 1150.] 
 
 dhana, f. pi. corns, i.e. grain. 
 
 dhanya, a. cereal (adj.); as n. cereal 
 (noun), grain, [dhana.] 
 
 dharana, a. holding; as n. a holding, 
 keeping ; wearing, 14 u ; -a, f. established 
 ordinance ; rule, 62 ". [Vdhr.] 
 
 dhara, / stream, jet. [v/ldhav, 'run, 
 pour.'] 
 
 dharasara, m. pi. stream-pourings, vio- 
 lent pourings, [asara.] 
 
 dharin, a. holding; possessing, 22 23 ; re- 
 taining, 68 u . [vdhr.]
 
 [177] 
 
 [Vdhr 
 
 dharmik a, a. righteous; virtuous, [dhar- 
 ma.] 
 
 V Idhav (dhavati, -te; adhavit; dhavis- 
 yati; dhavita; dhavitva; -dhavya). run 
 (of fluids), stream, pour; run (of animate 
 beings), [see under Vdhu.] 
 + anu, run after. 
 + upa, run unto, 
 -f sam-upa, run on unto, 3 13 . 
 + pra, run forth, flow; run. 
 
 V 2dhav (dhavati, -te; dadhave; adhav- 
 ista; dhauta; dhautva; -dhavya). rinse. 
 
 dhi, vbl. containing, granting, in cpds. 
 [Vldha, 1155. 2e.] 
 
 dhik, excl. fie! w. ace. 
 
 V dhi (didheti [676] ; didhaya [786 3 ] ; 
 dhitd). think, [see v/dhya.] 
 + anu, think over. 
 
 dhi [351], /. -1. thought; dhiya-dhiya, 
 with each thought, every time it occurs to 
 one; 2. (like Ger. An-dacht, lit. 'think- 
 ing upon,' and then 'devotion') religious 
 thought, devotion, 69 13 , 74 19 , 82 " ; observe 
 that mati, manas, manisa, mantra, and 
 manman show this same specialization of 
 mgi prayer, 74 15 ; 3. intelligence, in- 
 sight, mind, 89 l ; understanding, skill. 
 [VdhL] 
 
 1 dhiti, f. perhaps draught, see 82 7 x. 
 [V2dha, 'drink,' 1157. la.] 
 
 2 dhiti, / 1. thought; 2. devotion; 
 -3. skill. [Vdhi: for 2, cf. dhi 2.] 
 
 dhimant, a. gifted with understanding, 
 wise, [dhi.] 
 
 1 dhira, a. wise, 78 3 - 10 . [Vdhi, 1188a.] 
 
 2 dhira, a. firm; resolute, 48 2 . [Jdhr : 
 cf . Lat. Jir-mus, ' firm.'] 
 
 dhlvara, m. 1. a very clever or skilful 
 man; -2. a fisher, [dhi, 1171.] 
 
 dhiini, a. shaking, stormily moved, bois- 
 terous, wild. [f r. quasi-root dhun of 
 dhun6ti, sfdhii.] 
 
 V dhu (dhun6ti, -nut6; later, dhun6ti, 
 -nut6 [see 711] ; dudhava, dudhuve ; 
 adhusta [887a] ; dhavisyati ; dhuta, later 
 dhuta; dhutva; -dhuya). 1. move 
 quickly hither and thither ; shake ; 2. fan 
 (a fire) ; 3. shake off. 
 
 [orig. ' move violently, agitate ' : cf . 6vu, 
 6vvw, 'rush on'; Ovpos, 'agitation, anger, 
 
 passion, spirit': 0i5a>, 'sacrifice,' is poss 
 akin w. V dhu as a generalization of mg 2 : 
 closely akin w. V dhu is V 1 dhav, ' run,' 
 and also Vdhav, 'run' (cf. 0eo>, V0F, 'run'): 
 see also under dhuma.] 
 + ava, shake down; mid. shake off from 
 one's self. 
 
 dhuma, m. smoke; vapor. [cf. Lat. 
 fumus, ' smoke ' : smoke has no such " swift 
 eddying motion" as to make it easy to 
 connect these names for it w. \ldhu, q.v. ; 
 but on this connection their identification 
 w. 6v/j.6s should seem to depend : more 
 prob. is the explanation of dhumi as ' the 
 enveloping or blackening,' fr. s/ldhvan, 
 as vama fr. Vvan.] 
 
 dhumaka, m. smoke, at end of cpds [1307] 
 for dhuma; / -ika [1222d], the same. 
 
 dhurta, a. subst. shrewd, sly, cunning; 
 rogue, [ppl. of Vdhvr, 'harm by deceit' 
 (cf. 957b 2 ): according to the gramma- 
 rians, dhurta, w. acct altered as in jiista: 
 for a somewhat analogous development 
 of mg, cf. Middle Eng. schrewen, ' curse,' 
 whence schrew-ed, 'cursed, bad,' Eng. 
 shrewd, 'bad, artful.'] 
 
 dhurta-traya, n. rogue-triad, trio of 
 swindlers. 
 
 dhusara, a. dusted over, dusty, dust- 
 colored, gray. [Vdhvans, dhvas, 1188d: 
 cf. 181a.] 
 
 v' dhr (dadhara [786], dadhre ; adhrta ; 
 dharisyati, -te ; dhrtd ; dhartum ; dhr- 
 tva ; -dhf tya ; dharayati ; adidharat). 
 rngs of cans, forms ident. [1041 2 ] w. those of 
 simple forms; hold, in its various mgs, 
 trans, and intrans. ; 
 
 trans. 1. hold, bear, support, 33 n , 
 39 3 , 75 s - 7 , 87 9 , 92 J; make firm, 92 10 ; 
 carry, 62 12 ; wear; -2. hold fast, 22 10 , 
 33 : ; hold in check, bear, withstand, 2 20 , 
 8 12 ; -3. keep (a cat), 31 9 ; -4. set or 
 lay or place in or on, w. loc., 33 12 , 41 21 ; 
 5. hold or make sure or ordain for some 
 one (dat.) ; mid. be ordained for some one 
 (dat.), belong of right to, 75 3 ; 
 
 intrans. 6. mid. hold, i.e. remain, con- 
 tinue; w. this mg, even in the active, 15 5 . 
 
 [cf. 6p&-vos, 'support, seat,' 6pa-vos, 
 'bench,' dp-fi-a-aa-Oai, 'sit'; Lat. fre-tus, 
 12
 
 Vdhrs] 
 
 [178] 
 
 'held or supported by (hence iv. abl.), 
 relying on,' fre-num, 'holder, bridle.'] 
 + ava,cas. 1. set down, fix; 2. (like 
 Eng. hold) assume as certain, 44 u . 
 
 V dhrs (dhrsn6ti; dadharsa; adhrsat ; 
 dhrsita, dhrsta; -dhfsya; dharsayati). 
 be bold or courageous; dare; venture, 
 74 2 ; caus. venture on some one or 
 something; offend; overpower; dharsita, 
 overcome, [cf . Opcur-vs, ' bold ' ; Lat. fas- 
 tus, 'pride'; Goth, ga-dars, AS. dearr, 
 Eng. he dare (all 3d persons sing, of a 
 preterito-present) ; AS. dors-te, Eng. 
 durs-t.~\ 
 
 + a , venture against. 
 + prati, hold out against, withstand, 
 82 5 . 
 
 dhrsnii, a. daring; courageous, doughty, 
 78 ?;' bold, 84". [v/dhrs, 1162.] 
 
 dhenii, f. milch cow; cow. [v'2dha, 
 'suck,' 1162.] 
 
 dheya, n, the giving. [v'ldha, mg 4, 
 ' bestow, give ' : 1213c.] 
 
 dhairya, n. firmness; earnest or resolute 
 bearing. [2dMra, 1211.] 
 
 V dhma. see s dham. 
 
 V dhya (dhyati, dhyayati [761dl]; da- 
 dhyaii ; adhyasit [911] ; dhyasyati ; 
 dhyatd ; dhyatva ; -dhyaya) . think upon ; 
 meditate, [see Vdhi and 108g.] 
 + abhi, set the mind on something; 
 sink one's self in thought, 57 l . 
 
 dhyana, n. meditation. [Vdhya, 1150.] 
 
 dhyana-para, a. having meditation as 
 highest object, absorbed in contempla- 
 tion. [1302b.] 
 
 V dhraj (dhrajati; adhrajit). draw on- 
 ward, advance, intrans. [see v'dragh, of 
 which this is poss. a collateral form.] 
 
 V dhru, collateral form of s'dhvr. 
 
 dhruti, /. a deceiving ; infatuation . 
 [Vdhru.] 
 
 dhruva, a. 1. holding or continuing, 
 i.e. remaining fixed in place ; as m. 
 the pole-star, 100 8 ; 2. of abodes 
 certain, safe, 79 18 . [Vdhr in mg 6: see 
 1190.] 
 
 dhruva, / sacrificial ladle, 102 13 , see 
 sriic. [lit. 'holder,' vfdhr in mg 1 : see 
 1190.] 
 
 V dhvans or dhvas (dhvansati, -te; da- 
 dhvansa, dadhvase ; adhvasat ; dhvasta ; 
 -dhvasya). 1. fall to dust, perish ; 
 dhvasta, exhausted, hurt, impaired; 2. 
 vanish, be off; 3. only in ppl. dhvasta, 
 bestrewn, covered over, esp. with dust, 
 [cf. Eng. dits-t ; prob. also AS. dw&s and 
 dysig, ' foolish,' Eng. dizzy, Old High Ger. 
 tuslc, ' foolish.'] 
 
 dhvansa, m. the perishing; destruction. 
 [V dhvans.] 
 
 v' Idhvan (adhvamt; dhvanta; dhvan- 
 ayati). 1. cover one's self; dhvanta, 
 dark ; 2. become extinguished ; caus. 
 1. envelope, cover over; 2. blacken, 
 [perhaps akin w. V dhvans: see dhuma: 
 cf . AS. dunn, Eng. dun, ' dark, brownish- 
 black.'] 
 
 V 2 d h v a n (dhvanati ; dadhvana ; dhvantd 
 [955a]). sound, resound, [cf. Old Eng. 
 dune, Eng. din.~\ 
 
 dhvani, m. sound. [v'2dhvan.] 
 
 V dhvr (dhvarati). bend or make crooked ; 
 cause to fall; harm by deceit. [see 
 dhurta and dhruti : cf. AS. dwellan, 
 ' lead astray, cause to delay,' Eng. dwell, 
 intrans., ' delay, linger, abide ' ; Eng. dwaul, 
 'wander, rave,' dwale, 'stupefying potion'; 
 Dutch dwaal-licht, ' ignis f atuus ' ; Goth. 
 dvals, 'foolish'; Eng. dull, dol-t ; Ger. 
 toll, ' mad.'] 
 
 na [491], end. pron. root of 1st person, see 
 aham. [w. nas, 'us,' cf. v&, 'we two,' 
 Lat. nos, 'us.'] 
 
 na, adv. 1. not [1122b], 3 2 ; -la. in 
 connected sentences or clauses : repeated 
 simply: 97 8 , octies ; 62 u>15 , quinquies ; 
 63 13 - 14 , 71 4 , ter; 4 13 , 17 18 , 74 J , 80 ", bis; 
 with ca : na , na ca, na ca , 62 16 ; 
 na , na ca , na % 63 J ; with api : see 
 api2; with u, 21 u ; Ib. not repeated, 
 but replaced by api ca or va^api (see these), 
 2 12 , 63*; Ic. combinations: na ca, 8 16 ; 
 na ca, 13 7 , 62 16 ; naiva, 22 10 , 23 19 , 96 10 ; 
 na vai, 92 15 ; na va, 96 12 ; na tu, 64 13 ; 
 na tv eva tu, see tu ; na ha, 95 1T ; na_iva, 
 not exactly, 93 5 ; Id. tantamount to a- 
 in negative cpds [1122b 4 ], as nacira, na-
 
 [179] 
 
 [Vnam 
 
 tidura, nadhita, etc. ; le. at beg. of 
 adversative clause: with adversative con/., 
 34 10 ; without, 22 20 , 41 13 , 92 16 ; -If. in em- 
 phatic litotes, 21; Ig. substantive verb to 
 be supplied, 32 5 (asti); Ih. na precedes 
 ced, if it belongs to the protasis, 63 9 ; if it 
 immediately follows ced, it must be joined to 
 the apodosis, 18 9 ; li. for prohibitive nega- 
 tive, see ma; Ij. na, 'not,' coalesces met- 
 rically in Veda w. following initial vowel, 
 e.g. 70 12 , 71 4 , 83 9 ; 
 
 2. like [see 1122d and d 2 ], in this sense 
 Vedic only, 70 15 ' 18 , 71 7 ' 9 , etc.; na, 'like,' 
 does not coalesce metrically in Veda w. fol- 
 lowing initial vowel. 
 
 [cf. vr\-, Lat. n&-, negative prefix in 
 i/T)-/cep8es, 'gain-less,' nff-fas, 'not right, 
 wrong'; AS. and Old Eng. ne, 'not'; AS. 
 na (ne +d), 'not ever, never, no,' Eng. no; 
 Eng. na- in nathless, AS. na \>e Zees, ' not 
 the less ' ; Eng. n- in n-ever, n-aught, etc.] 
 
 nakis, indecl. subst. pron. 1. no one, 78 1 , 
 73 M?. _. nothing, 73 '"I; -3. et-en as 
 ae?y. [see 1117], never, 75 n . [na + kis, 
 see 504 2 end.] 
 
 nakula, m. Viverra ichneumon, an animal 
 like the polecat, often domesticated, and 
 a bitter foe of serpents and mice. 
 
 nakta, n. night; -am [llllb], by night, 
 [cf. vvl-, stem VVKT, Lat. nox, stem nocti, 
 Eng. night.'] 
 
 V naks (naksati, -te; nanaksa, nanakse). 
 attain unto; w. dyam, mount up to 
 heaven. [collateral form of V2na, 
 ' attain.'] 
 
 naksatra, n. 1. sidus, heavenly body, 
 in Veda, of sun as well as of stars ; star, 
 13 3 , 71 12 ; sing, collectively, 78 n ; constel- 
 lation; 2. asterism of the lunar zodiac, 
 59 10 . [perhaps the stars are they that 
 'mount up' to heaven, cf. Vnaks w. 
 dyam.] 
 
 nakha, m. n. nail (on fingers or toes); 
 claw; talon, [cf. uvv, stem o-wx, Lat. 
 unguis, ' nail, claw ' ; AS. ntEgel, Eng. nail.~\ 
 
 nakhin, a. having claws; as m. beast with 
 claws, [nakha.] 
 
 nagara, n., and -ri,f. town, city. 
 
 nagaropanta, n. neighborhood of the 
 town, [upanta.] 
 
 na-cira, a. not long; -at, adv. [1114c], 
 
 soon. [1122b 4 .] 
 nata, m. dancer, mime, actor (these form 
 
 a very despised caste), [Vnrt.] 
 nada or nala, m. reed. [Whitney 54: cf. 
 
 2 nada and nala.] 
 V nad (nadati ; nanada, nede; nadita; 
 
 -nadya). sound ; roar ; bellow. [see 
 
 1 nada and nadf.] 
 
 1 nada, m. the bellower, i.e. bull. [Vnad.] 
 
 2 nada, m. reed, rush. [cf. nada.] 
 nadi,f. roaring stream ; river. [Vnad: cf. 
 
 Ne'Sa, Ne'Scoi/, names of streams.] 
 
 nanandr [3G9 2 ], f. husband's sister. 
 
 V nand (nandati, -te; nananda; nandis- 
 yate; nandita; -nandya). be glad, 
 -i- abhi, be glad in; greet joyfully. 
 
 nandana, a. gladdening; causing joy ; as 
 m. son, 21 n ; as n. Nandana, or Elysium, 
 the pleasure ground of the gods, esp. of 
 Indra, 49 18 . [caus. of Vnand.] 
 
 nandi, m. The Gladsome One, euphemis- 
 tic epithet of the dreadful god, Qiva- 
 Rudra. [Vnand: cf. giva.] 
 
 nandi-deva, m. Xandideva, name of a 
 Brahman, ['having (yiva as his god.'] 
 
 nap at, naptr [370], m. 1. in Veda, de- 
 scendant in general; son; grandson, 87 18 ; 
 2. in Skt., grandson, 63 9 . [declension: 
 in Veda, napat, napatam, naptra, naptr- 
 bhis, etc. ; in Skt., napta, naptaram, nap- 
 tra, naptrbhis, etc. : see 1182d : cf . vt-rroSfs, 
 'young ones'; Lat. nepotem, 'grandson'; 
 AS. nefa, ' son's son or brother's son ' 
 supplanted by Old French neveu (Eng. 
 nephew], which in Old Eng. meant 'son's 
 son' as well as 'brother's son.'] 
 
 napti [356], /. daughter, 72 6 ; grand- 
 daughter. [/. to napat : acct, 355b.] 
 
 V nabh (nabhate). burst; tear. 
 
 nabhas, n. 1. mist, clouds; 2. atmos- 
 phere, sky. [cf. vefyos, ve(j>f\T), ' cloud, 
 mist'; Lat. nubes, 'cloud,' nebula, 'mist'; 
 AS. nifol, ' misty, gloomy ' ; Ger. Nebel, 
 'mist': for mg2, cf. Ger. Wolken and AS. 
 wolcnu, 'clouds,' w. Eng. welkin, 'sky.'] 
 
 nabhas-tala, n. sky-surface, i.e. sky, see 
 tala. 
 
 V nam (namati, -te; nanama, neme [794e]; 
 anansit; nansyati; nata [954d]; nami- 
 12*
 
 namas] 
 
 [180] 
 
 turn, nantum ; natva ; -namya ; nama- 
 
 yati). bow (intrans.), bend one's self; aim 
 
 at a person (gen.) with (instr.), 73 15 ; nata, 
 
 bowed down, bending over, 68 19 K. ; cans. 
 
 cause to bow, subdue; namyate, is sub- 
 dued, 31 6 . 
 
 + ava, bow down, 34 17 . 
 
 + a , bow down to. 
 
 + u d , raise one's self up, arise. 
 
 + s a m - u d , rise. 
 
 + nis, bend out; contort one's self. 
 
 + pra, make obeisance before (ace.). 
 namas, n. bow, obeisance; adoration (by 
 
 gesture or word); reverence; used also 
 
 like the Lat. gloria in the Gloria patri. 
 
 [V nam.] 
 namas-kara, m. a making of namas; 
 
 adoration. [171 3 .] 
 namas -kr (see Vlkr). do homage, 9 U . 
 
 [171 3 , 1092a.] 
 V namasya( namasy ati ) . pay reverence. 
 
 [namas, 1063, 1058.] 
 namuci, m. Namuchi, name of a demon, 
 
 foe of Indra, 81 16 , 97 6 . 
 nay ana, n. eye. ['leader, organ of sense 
 
 that leads/ sfni, 1150. la : for mg, cf. 
 
 anana, gatra, car ana, netra.] 
 nara, m. man, 3 21 , etc.; at 57 5 , the primal 
 
 man or spirit. [transition-stem fr. nr, 
 
 1209a.] 
 
 nara-nari,y. man and woman. [1253a.] 
 nara-pati, m. lord of men ; king. 
 nara-vahana, a. subst. having men as 
 
 his team, drawn by men; epithet and 
 
 name of Kuvera, god of wealth; name 
 
 of a king, successor of Qalivahana. 
 naravahana-datta, m. Naravahanadat- 
 
 ta, name of a son of king Udayana. 
 naravahanadatta-carita, n. adven- 
 tures of X. 
 naravahanadattacaritamaya, f. -i, a. 
 
 containing the adventures of N. [1225 : 
 
 see maya.] 
 nara-vyaghra, m. man-tiger, i.e. brave 
 
 and noble man. [cf . naragardula : 1280b.] 
 nara-gardula, m. man-tiger, i.e. best 
 
 among men. [cf. naravyaghra : 1280b.] 
 nara-grestha, a. subst. best of men. 
 nara-sunu, /. daughter of the primal 
 
 man or spirit. 
 
 naradhipa, m. lord of men, i.e. king 
 
 prince, [adhipa.] 
 naregvara, m. lord of men, i.e. king, 
 
 prince. [Igvara.] 
 narottama, a. subst. best of men. [ut- 
 
 tama.] 
 narmada, a. granting or causing fun; 
 
 making gladness; f. -da, Xarmada (called 
 
 also Reva), the modern Nerbudda river. 
 
 [narman + da.] 
 
 narman, n. fun. 
 n a 1 a , m. reed ; Nala, name of a prince of 
 
 Nishadha. [cf. nada, Vedic nala.] 
 nalopakhyana, n. Nala-episode, I 1 . 
 
 [upakhyana.] 
 
 1 nava, a. new; of an earthen dish, (fresh, 
 i.e.) unburned. [prob. fr. mi, 'now/ q.v. : 
 cf. vfos, Lat. novus, Ger. neu, Eng. new."] 
 
 2 nava [483 *], num. nine. [cf. tvvta, Lat. 
 novem, Ger. neun, Eng. nine.'] 
 
 n a v a t i [485], f. ninety. [2 nava.] 
 
 nava-nlta, n. fresh butter. [perhaps 
 ' fresh-brought/ as we say ' bring the but- 
 ter, i.e. make it come/ in churning.] 
 
 navedas, a. perhaps well-knowing, cogni- 
 zant of (gen.), [apparently fr. an affirma- 
 tive particle na-, and vedas : see 1296 3 
 end.] 
 
 V Inag (nagyati ; nanaga, negus; anagat ; 
 nanksyati [936]; nasta; nagayati). be 
 missing ; get lost ; vanish ; perish, be 
 ruined, [cf . ven-pos, ' dead ' ; Lat. nex, 
 ' death ' ; nocere, ' harm.'] 
 + vi, get lost; perish; caus. cause to dis- 
 appear; bring to nought, 81 20 . 
 
 V 2nag (nagati, -te; nanaga; anat [833]). 
 attain ; reach, come up to, 74 J ; w. accha, 
 draw hither, 76 u . [see V 1 ag, ' reach ' : cf . 
 Lat. nac-tus sum, ' am having reached ' ; 
 AS. nedh, comp. near, superl. nedhst, Eng. 
 nigh, near (as comp., Macbeth ii. 3. 146), 
 next ; AS. ge-neah, ' it reaches, es reicht, it 
 suffices'; ge-noh, Eng. e-nough.~\ 
 + pra, reach to, hit; fall upon, 78 8 . 
 
 nas [397], /. nose. [nom. dual, nasa: cf. 
 Lat. nas-turcium, ' nose-teaser, nasturtium ' ; 
 ndr-es, ' nostrils ' ; AS. nosu, Eng. nose ; 
 nos-tril, 'nose-thrill, nose-hole.'] 
 
 nas [491], end. pron. form of \st pers. [cf. 
 v(>, ' we two ' ; Lat. nos, ' us.']
 
 [181] 
 
 [Vnind 
 
 nasa, for nas in cpds [1315c]. 
 
 V nah (nahyati [761c]; naddha [223 8 ]; 
 -nahya). bind; join, [despite naddha (a 
 poss. false formation), and Avestan nazda 
 ( Morphologische Untersuchungen, iii. 144), 
 probably for *nagh : cf. Lat. nec-t-ere, 
 'bind.'] 
 + u p a , tie on, lace. 
 
 nahi, adv. not, to be sure; nahf me asti, 
 to be sure, I have no . [na + hi, 1122a 
 and b 4 : acct of verb, 595d.] 
 
 nahusa, m. Nahusha, name of an ancient 
 king, [perhaps 'neighbor,' from nahus, 
 and in that case a transfer-form (1209b).] 
 
 nahus, m. neighbor. [Vnah.] 
 
 n iika, m. vault of heaven, firmament. 
 
 natidura, . not very far. [na + ati- 
 dura, 1122b 4 .] 
 
 V nath (nathate ; nathita ; nathitum; 
 -nathya). turn with supplication to. 
 
 nath a, n. a refuge; as m. protector; 
 lord, [v/nath.j 
 
 nadhita, a. un-learned. [na + adhita, 
 v'i: 1122b 4 .] 
 
 nabhi, f. 1. navel; 2. nave or hub. 
 [cf. ofj.cj>-a\6s, Lat. umb-ilicus, AS. naf-ela, 
 Eng. navel ; also AS. naf-u, Eng. nave.'] 
 
 nabhi-vardhana, n. the cutting of the 
 navel (-string). 
 
 nama-dheya, n. the name-giving, nam- 
 ing, 59 9 ; name, 17 9 , GO 22 , [naman.] 
 
 Hainan, n. 1. distinguishing character- 
 istic; form; -2. name, 13 8 , 60 21b , 78 9 , 
 61 9 ; nama grah, (take i.e.) mention the 
 name, 64 13 ; personal name (e.g. deva- 
 datta), as distinguished from the gotra 
 or ' family name ' (e.g. kagyapa, ' descen- 
 dant of Ka9yapa'), 103 19 N. ; at end of 
 cpds, having as name, named , so 11 
 times, e.g. 19 u ; 3. nama, adv. [llllb], 
 by name, so 19 times, e.g. I 3 , 60 2U , 94 16 ; 
 also munna, 56 5 ; w. interrogatives, pray, 
 54 16 . [origin unknown: cf. o-po/xa, Lat. 
 nomen, Eng. name.] 
 
 nara, 1. a. human; 2. as m. man; 
 narl, /. woman, I 9 , 86 18 , etc.; wife, 
 [nr, 1208b : for mg 2, cf . manava.] 
 
 nara da, m. Narada, name of an ancient 
 devarsi (see note to 1 u ), who often appears 
 on the earth to bring news from the gods, 
 
 and returns to heaven with reports from 
 men. 
 
 n a r a y a n a , m. Narayana, son of the pri- 
 mal man. [simply a patronymic of nara, 
 see 1219.] 
 
 nava,/. ship, [transfer-form (1209,399) 
 fr. nau, nav.] 
 
 nag a, m. loss; destruction, [v/nag, 'be 
 missing.'] 
 
 nasa, dual f. the two nostrils, the nose, 
 [transfer-form (399) fr. nas, strong nas.] 
 
 nasika,/. nostril; dual, the two nostrils; 
 the nose, [nasa, 1222c 1.] 
 
 nastika, a. subst. atheist, infidel, not be- 
 lieving the Vedas and Puranas. [fr. 
 na + asti, ' there is not,' 1314b.] 
 
 nahusa, m. descendant of Xahusha, pa- 
 tronymic of Yayati. [nahusa, 1208 and f .] 
 
 ni, prep, down; in, into. [cf. tvi, 'in'; 
 Eng. ne-ther, be-nea-th.'] 
 
 nikata, a. near; as n. neighborhood; 
 presence. [1245g.] 
 
 nikhila, a. entire; all. [perhaps for 
 nih-khila, ' without a gap,' nis + khila : 
 1305 - end.] 
 
 nija, a. own; belonging to our party, 24 6 ; 
 nijo ripus, foe in one's own camp, 37 15 ; 
 often used as reflexive possessive pron., my 
 own, his own, our own, etc., or rather, 
 my (47 17 ), his (50 u , 53 12 , 56 4 ' 6 ), etc. 
 [perhaps 'in-born,' fr. ni +ja.] 
 
 ninya, a. inner; hidden, 70 20 ; as n. secret, 
 78 3 . [ni.] 
 
 nitya,a. 1. own (Vedic), 79 16 ; 2. con- 
 stant; eternal, 57 7 ; -am, adv. constantly, 
 always, 17 16 , 64 19 . [in mg 1, fr. ni, 'in,' 
 1245b, and so signifying 'inward, not 
 alien.'] 
 
 nitya-kala, m. uninterrupted time ; -am, 
 adv. always, under all circumstances, 60 6 . 
 
 nitya-snayin, a. constantly making 
 sacred ablutions. [1279.] 
 
 V nid or nind (nindati; nininda ; anindlt; 
 nindita ; -nindya). blame ; reproach, 
 [cf. ovfiSos, ' reproach.'] 
 
 n i d r a , /. sleep. [V 2 dra, ' sleep,' + ni.] 
 
 nidhana, ra. n. end; death, 5 19 . [perhaps 
 f r. V dha + ni, ' put down or out of the 
 way,' ' make an end of.'] 
 
 v nind, see nid.
 
 nindaka] 
 
 [182] 
 
 nindaka, a. subst. scoffer. [Vnid, nind.] 
 
 nibandhana, n. a binding, ligation, 59 3 ; 
 that on which a thing is fastened or 
 rests or depends, condition, means, 46 7 . 
 [Vbandh + ni.] 
 
 nibhrta, a. (borne down, lowered, i.e.) 
 hidden; -am, adv. secretly. [Vbhr + ni.] 
 
 nimajjana, n. bathing. [Vmajj +ni.] 
 
 nimitta, n. mark (for shooting at) ; sign, 
 token; occasion or cause; -am, -ena, ad- 
 verbially, because of; tannimittam, -ena, 
 because of this, on account of this. 
 
 nimesa, m. closing or winking of the eyes. 
 [Vmis -t-ni.] 
 
 n i y o g a , m. a fastening on ; injunction, 
 and so, commission ; business, 30 6 . [V yuj 
 + ni: for mg, cf. alicui injungere labor em, 
 ' fasten or impose a task on a person.'] 
 
 nir , for nis before sonants [174] ; see nis. 
 
 nir-antara, a. without interval or free 
 space ; completely filled, 53 10 ; continuous ; 
 uninterrupted, 56 12 . 
 
 nir-apaya, a. without failure or danger; 
 infallible or safe. 
 
 nir-apeksa, a. without regard or expec- 
 tation ; regardless, 52 20 ; not expecting 
 anything from another, independent, 31 n . 
 [apeksa, 334 2 .] 
 
 nir-amisagin, a. not meat-eating, [see 
 nis 3.] 
 
 nir-ahara, a. without food, abstaining 
 from food. 
 
 nir-ukta, a. spoken out; loud; clear; 
 os n. explanation ; etymological interpre- 
 tation of a word ; esp. Nirukta, title of a 
 commentary to the nighantavas or Vedic 
 Glossary. [V vac + nis. ] 
 
 n i r - r t i ,/. dissolution ; destruction. [Vr + 
 nis, 1157. Id.] 
 
 nir-guna, a. without a string, 18 5 ; void 
 of good qualities, 18 5 ; worthless, bad. 
 
 nir-nama, m. contortion, sinuosity. 
 [V nam + nis.] 
 
 nir-dhana, a. without money. 
 
 nir-buddhi, a. without wit, stupid. 
 
 nir-bhara, a. 1. without measure, 
 much ; -am, adv. very ; -am prasupta, 
 fast asleep ; 2. full of. 
 
 nir-niala, a. without impurity; pure; 
 clear. 
 
 nir-laksya, a. not to be perceived, 
 avoiding notice, [see nis 3.] 
 
 nir-vanga, a. without family; alone in 
 the world. 
 
 nir-vata, a. windless; sheltered. 
 
 nir-vigesa,a. without distinction; undis- 
 tinguished; alike; like. 
 
 nirvigesakrti, a. having like appear- 
 ance, looking just alike, [akrti.] 
 
 nivara, m. the warding off. [Vlvr, 
 'cover,' + ni.] 
 
 nivita, ppl. hung, i.e. draped, with hang- 
 ings, esp. with the sacred cord ; as n. 
 [1176a], the wearing the sacred cord about 
 the neck ; the sacred cord itself. [V vya + 
 ni.] 
 
 nivrtta, ppl. 1. turned away; esp. of 
 an action which is turned away, i.e. not 
 directed (to any ulterior purpose or ob- 
 ject), free from hope of reward in this 
 world or the next, disinterested, opp. of 
 pravrtta, q.v.; 2. having turned away 
 from, and so abstaining from, 29 3 . [Vvrt 
 
 niv6gana, n. a going in and settling down 
 
 to rest ; resting-place ; sleeping-place, bed, 
 
 105 8 ; dwelling, 8 6 . Vvig + ni: for mg, 
 
 cf. bhavana.] 
 
 nig [397], /. night, [cf. nakta.] 
 n i g a , f. night, [cf . nig, nakta.] 
 nigcaya, m. (ascertainment, determina- 
 
 tion, i.e.) a fixed opinion or a firm resolve. 
 
 [poss. fr. v!3ci, 'notice, look,' + nis; but 
 
 better, perhaps, fr. V 1 ci + nis, and so, 
 
 ' an un-piling, i.e. discrimination, determi- 
 
 nation.'] 
 nigcala, a. not moving, [nis + cala : see 
 
 nis 3.] 
 nigcita, ppl. determined, decided; -am, 
 
 adv. decidedly, surely, [see under nig- 
 
 caya.] 
 nihgreyasa, a. without a superior, i.e. 
 
 best; as n. final beatitude, [nis + grey- 
 
 asa: acct, 1305 3 .] 
 nihgvasa, m. breathing out, expiration; 
 
 sigh. [V gvas + nis. ] 
 nihgvasa-parama, a. having sighs as 
 
 chief thing, much addicted to sighing. 
 
 [1302b.] 
 nisadha, m. pi. the Nishadhans, name of
 
 [183] 
 
 [mlavarna 
 
 a people ; Nishadha, name of a country, 
 
 1 7 N., 4 3 . 
 
 nisadhadhipa, m. .ruler or king of the 
 Nishadhans. [adhjpa.] 
 
 nisudana, m. finisher (in its colloquial 
 sense), one who makes an end of, de- 
 stroyer. [V sud + ni.] 
 
 niseka, m. an injecting, esp. of semen, 
 impregnation; the ceremony performed 
 upon impregnation. [V sic + ni.] 
 
 nisevin, a. devoting one's self to; co- 
 habiting with, 67 22 . [Vsev + ni.] 
 
 niskramana, n. the stepping out; esp. 
 the first going out with a child. [Vkram 
 + nis.] 
 
 nistha, a. resting upon. [Vstha + ni, 
 333.] 
 
 nisphala, a. fruitless, 63 10 ; vain, 68 ". 
 [nis + phala.] 
 
 nis, adv. prep. 1. out, forth; 2. in 
 cpds [1305 2 end], having away, with- 
 out , e.g. nirantara ; 3. in cpds, not, 
 e.g. nigcala. 
 
 V m (nayati, -te ; ninaya [800b], ninye ; 
 anaisit, anesta [882]; nesyati, -te; nita; 
 netum ; nitva ; -niya ; niyate ; naydyati 
 [1042b]). lead, 24 15 ; guide; conduct, 
 85 20 ; carry, 39 19 , etc.; carry off, 36 15 , 
 43 17 ; vyaghratam ni, bring to tiger-ness, 
 change into a tiger ; vagam ni, bring into 
 one's power. 
 
 + anu, (draw along toward one, i.e.) 
 try to win or conciliate by friendly words. 
 -f abhi, bring hither to. 
 + a , bring to, 29 u ; bring, 31 9 ; bring 
 (one liquid) into (another, loc.), mix, 101 u ; 
 caus. cause to be fetched, 50 5 . 
 + u d , bring up ; rescue (as a drowning 
 man from the water), 90 10 . 
 + u p a , take unto one's self, of the 
 teacher who receives a youth of one of 
 the three free castes as pupil, and at the 
 same time invests him with the sacra- 
 mental cord, thus conferring spiritual re- 
 birth, and making him a full member of 
 his caste ; see upanayana ; upanita, in- 
 vested with the sacramental cord. 
 + pari, lead around (a cow, steer), 91 u , 
 105 M ; esp. lead a bride around the fire 
 (as wedding ceremony), page 99. 
 
 + pra,l. bring forward ; 2. as litur- 
 gical terminus technicus, convey the sacri- 
 ficial fire and water to their places on and 
 near the altar; pranitas (sc. apas), holy 
 water; 3. bring forward (one's feelings), 
 i.e. come out with or manifest one's affec- 
 tion, 9 15 . 
 + vi, lead; guide; train; discipline. 
 
 ni [352], vbl. bringing, in vaani. [Vni.] 
 
 nica, a. low, not high ; morally and 
 socially low. [inorganic transfer-form 
 (1209a) fr. nic-a, q.v.] 
 
 nica, adv. down, low. [adverbially ac- 
 cented instr. instead of nic-a, 1112e 
 fr. ny-anc.] 
 
 nica-vayas [418], a. whose strength is 
 low; exhausted. [1306.] 
 
 nida, Vedic nila, m. n. 1. (place for 
 settling down, i.e.) resting-place; 2. esp. 
 bird's nest, [for ni-zd-a, i.e. ni-s(a)d-a 
 198b 3 V sad + ni : cf . Lat. nidus, 
 Ger. Nest, Eng. nest: for 1, see Whitney 
 54.] 
 
 nida-garbha, m. nest-interior. 
 
 niti,/. 1. co'nduct, esp. right and saga- 
 cious conduct; the knowledge of all that 
 governs virtuous and discreet and states- 
 man-like behavior; political and social 
 ethics ; 2. leading. [V ni, ' conduct.'] 
 
 niti-jna, a. knowing how to conduct 
 one's self discreetly. 
 
 niti-vidya, f. knowledge of niti or 
 political and social ethics, esp. as it con- 
 cerns princes. 
 
 niti-Qastra, n. doctrine or science of 
 political and social ethics. 
 
 nitha, m. a leading; nitha, n. (way, and 
 so, like the German Weise) a musical air, 
 song. [Vni, 1163a.] 
 
 nira, n. water. 
 
 nirasa, a. sapless, dried up; tasteless; 
 insipid, 54 ". [nis + rasa, 174, 179.] 
 
 niruj, a. without disease; healthy, 22 s . 
 [nis+riij, 174, 179.] 
 
 nila, a. dark-colored, esp. dark blue; as n. 
 indigo ; nfli, / indigo, [hence, through 
 the Arabic an-nil, for al-nil, 'the indigo- 
 plant,' come Eng. anil and aniline.'] 
 
 nila-pata, m. dark garment. 
 
 nlla-varna, a. blue-colored.
 
 nilasarhdhanabhanda] 
 
 [184] 
 
 nilasamdhana-bhanda, n. vat for the 
 
 mixing, i.e. preparing of indigo, 
 nillbhanda-svamin, m. indigo-vat-pro- 
 
 prietor. 
 nivara, m. wild rice; sing, the plant; pi. 
 
 the grains, 
 nil a, see mda. 
 > nn (navate; nunava: anusta; nuta; 
 
 -mitya). cry aloud; shout; exult; praise. 
 
 + pra, murmur; hum; esp. utter the 
 
 sacred syllable om. 
 nu, adv. la. now, at once, temporal ; Ib. 
 
 now, confirmative ; adha nu, so now, 79 8 ; 
 
 Ic. now, introductory, 70 * ; Id. so 
 
 then, in encouraging or summoning; le. 
 
 now, pray, in questions, 5 21 , 7 18 , 51 20 , 74 8 , 
 
 78 12 ; 2. asseverative : nakir nu, surely 
 
 no one or nothing, 73 20 ; ma nu, in order 
 
 that surely not, 86 10 ; 3. w. relatives : 
 
 ya nu, whatsoever, 74 2 ; yan nu, i.e. yat 
 
 nu, as long soever as, 79 13 . [in V. often 
 
 nu: cf. vv, vvv, Lat. nun-c, Ger. nu, nun, 
 
 AS. nu, nu, Eng. now: see also nava, 
 
 nutana, nunam.] 
 V nud (nudati, -te ; nun6da, nunud6 ; 
 
 anutta [881]; notsyati, -te; nutta, nun- 
 
 na; -nddya). push; thrust. 
 
 --par a, thrust away; move from its 
 
 place. 
 
 + p r a , push forward ; set in motion. 
 
 4-vi, drive asunder or away ; turn away, 
 
 esp. from cares, like the Eng. di-vert; 
 
 amuse. [for mg, cf. also dis-port and 
 
 s-port.~\ 
 
 n u d a , a. dispelling, in cpds. [V nud.] 
 nutana, a. of now ; recent ; young, [nu, 
 
 1245e.] 
 
 niinam, adv. now. [nu, 1109.] 
 nf [370, 371 5 - 9 - 10 ], m. man; hero; used 
 
 also of gods: of the Maruts, 74*, 77 18 . 
 
 [cf . arfip, stem avtp, ' man ' ; Old Lat. nero, 
 
 stem neron, 'manly, strong'; Lat. Nero.~\ 
 nr-caksas, a. men-beholding. [1296 3 .] 
 V nrt (nftyati, -te ; nanarta ; anartit ; 
 
 nartisyati ; nrttd ; nartitum ; nart- 
 
 itva). dance. 
 
 nrti, /. dance. [Vnrt, 1155. 1.] 
 nr - p a , m. protector of men, i.e. prince, king, 
 nr-pati, m. lord of men, i.e. prince, king. 
 
 [acct, 1267a.] 
 
 nrmna, n. virtus, manliness, courage, 
 
 strength, [fr. nr (1224c), as virtus fr. 
 
 vir.~\ 
 
 nr-Qansa, a. man-cursing; malicious. 
 netavya, grdv. to be carried. [Vni.] 
 netra, n. eye. ['leader,' Vni, 1185a: for 
 
 mg, cf. nayana.] 
 n 6 d , adv. lest, in order that not, w. accented 
 
 verb (595d) in the subjunctive (581c), 84 ". 
 
 n e d y a , grdv. to be blamed. [V nid, 963d.] 
 n e mi, / felly, rim. [nam, 1155.] 
 nairukta, a. pertaining to the Nirukta; 
 
 as m. an etymologist, [nirukta, 1208f .] 
 naisadha. a. pertaining to Nishadha ; as 
 
 m. prince of the Jsishadhans, i.e. Xala. 
 
 [nisadha, 1208f.] 
 n6, adv. and not, 21 u ; no ced, and if not, 
 
 see ced. [na + tu] 
 nau, see 491. 
 nau [361a], /. boat; ship. [cf. vavs, Lat. 
 
 navis, ' ship ' ; perhaps AS. naca, ' skiff ' : 
 
 perhaps 'the swimmer,' Vsnu, cf. Vsna.] 
 nyag-r6dha, m. Ficus indica, banyan 
 
 tree. [ ' downwards - growing ' : nyanc 
 
 (1249a) + rodha.] 
 nyanc [409b], a. directed downwards, [ni 
 
 + anc, 407.] 
 nyayd, m. 1. (that to which a thing 
 
 goes back, i.e.) rule, norm; 2. (that in 
 
 which a thing goes, i.e.) way; 3. esp. 
 
 the right way, propriety. [Vi + ni, 
 
 1148.2.] 
 nyayya, a. regular, normal, right; -am, 
 
 adv. rightly; properly, [nyaya, 1211.] 
 nyasa, m. a putting down, commitment. 
 
 [V 2 as + ni, ' throw down.'] 
 
 1 pa, vbl. drinking, in cpds. [VI pa, 333.] 
 
 2 pa, vbl. keeping, keeper, in cpds. [V2pa, 
 333.] 
 
 paksa, m. 1. wing, 93 2 ; 2. side, of a 
 door or of the hair of the head ; 3. half, 
 esp. of a lunar month, 27 1 , 57 19 , cf. krsna-. 
 gukla-; 4. side, i.e. party, 37 18 . 
 
 paksa-bala, n. strength of wing. 
 
 paksin, a. winged, 92 19 ; as m. bird, 2 M . 
 [paksa.]
 
 [185] 
 
 [pati 
 
 paksimrgata, f. condition of bird or 
 of beast. [fr. paksin + mrga : 1237, 
 1252.] 
 
 paksi-c,avaka, m. young of a bird; 
 birdling. [paksin.] 
 
 pa iika, n. mud, mire. 
 
 panktf, f. set or series or row of five; 
 row in general, [panca, 1157.4.] 
 
 pankti-krama, m. order of a row; 
 -ena, in a row, 39 M . 
 
 V pac (pacati, -te; papaca, pec6 [794e]; 
 apaksit; paksyati, -te; paktum; pak- 
 tva). cook, by baking or boiling or 
 roasting ; ripen. [cf . irfffcrw, ' cook ' ; 
 vfv-wv, 'ripe'; Lat. coquo, 'cook'; bor- 
 rowed AS. noun coc, Eng. cook.'] 
 + v i , cook thoroughly ; pass, be brought 
 to maturity; ripen (of an action), i.e. 
 come to its consequences or issue. 
 
 panca [483 3 ], num. five. [cf. ireVre, Aeolic 
 ire'yuire, Lat. quinque, Goth, fimf, AS. flf, 
 Eng. Jive.'] 
 
 panca-tantra, n. Panchatantra, name 
 of a collection of fables, ['having five 
 divisions or books.'] 
 
 panca-tapas, a. having five fires, of an 
 ascetic who sits between four fires, one at 
 each cardinal point, and with the burning 
 sun above. 
 
 pancatva, n. fiveness ; esp. dissolution 
 of the body into the five elements (earth, 
 water, fire, air, ether, see bhuta and 66 5 N.), 
 i.e. death; w. gam, die. [panca, 1239.] 
 
 panca-pada,/ -I, a. having (taken) five 
 steps, [acct, 1300.] 
 
 pancama, f. -i, a. fifth, [panca, 487 6 .] 
 
 panca-yama, a. having five courses, 
 [acct, 1300.] 
 
 panca-girsa, a. five-headed. [girsan, 
 1315a.] 
 
 V pat (patayati, etc.). split, slit. 
 + ud, open out. 
 
 pat a, m. woven stuff ; cloth; garment. 
 
 patala, n. veil; cover, [cf. pata.] 
 
 p a t u , a. 1. sharp ; and so 2. Jig. 
 (nearly like Eng. sharp), clever. 
 
 V path (pathati; papatha; pathita; path- 
 itva; pathayati). read aloud, 54 23 , 55 9 ; 
 recite, 17 11 ; repeat to one's self, study, 
 22 u ; cans, teach to talk, 19 15 . 
 
 V pan (panati, -te; panita). 1. bargain; 
 buy; 2. bet, wage, stake, play. [prob. 
 for *paln : cf . irfpinj/^L and ir<a\f(a, ' sell ' ; 
 Ger.feil, 'for sale, venal.'] 
 + a, in apana, ' market.' 
 + vi, sell. 
 
 pana, m. 1. bargain, stipulation, 45 u ; 
 2. wage, gage, prize; 3. a certain 
 coin, 47 16 . [Vpan.] 
 
 pani, m. 1. bargainer, who gives nought 
 without return ; chafferer, haggler, and so 
 2. niggard; esp. one who is stingy to- 
 wards the gods, an impious person ; 3. a 
 malicious demon. [Vpan.] 
 
 pandita, a. learned; as m. learned man, 
 Anglo-Indian pandit. 
 
 pandita-sabha, /. assembly of pandits. 
 
 panya, grdv. to be bargained for or bar- 
 tered ; as n. article of trade. [Vpan, 963.] 
 
 V pat (patati, -te; papata, petus [794e]; 
 apaptat ; patisyati ; patita ; patitum ; 
 patitva ; -patya ; patayati, -te). 1. fly ; 
 move swiftly through the air; 2. de- 
 scend, let one's self down ; cast one's 
 self at, 26 8 ; 3. fall down, tumble down, 
 34 8 , 40 2 - 5 ; fall (morally), fall from one's 
 caste; fall down (dead); 4. fall upon, 
 be directed to, 13 6 ; 5. fall or get into, 
 22 s - 9 ; cans, cause to fly; hurl (a curse), 
 49". [cf. vfTOfuu, 'fly'; vl-vru, 'fall'; 
 Lat. peto, ' fall upon, make for, seek ' : see 
 also pattra.] 
 + a n u , fly after, pursue. 
 + ud, fly up. 
 
 + sam-ud, fly or spring up together, 
 3 6 , 8". 
 
 + ni, fly down; light, 3 8 ; tumble into, 
 36 1S ; caws, cause to fall; kill, 32 n , 33 17 . 
 + s a m - n i , fall together, 99 20 ; come 
 together; cans, bring together or convene, 
 9 19 . 
 + para, fly off, 93 l . 
 
 patatra, n. wing. [Vpat, 1185d.] 
 
 patatrin,a. winged; as m. bird, [pata- 
 tra.] 
 
 pa tana, n. fall. [Vpat.] 
 
 pati [343b], m. 1. master, possessor; 
 lord; ruler, 4 2 ; 2. then (like Eng. lord), 
 husband, 9 7 , 89 5 , 86 19 , 64 ". [cf. w6 ff is, 
 'husband'; Lat. impos, stem irn-pot, 'not
 
 patighni] 
 
 [186] 
 
 master of; Goth.fafrs in bru}>-fa\>-s, 'bride- 
 groom.'] 
 
 pati-ghni, a. f. husband-slaying, [for- 
 mally a fern, to pati-han, 402.] 
 
 patitva, n. condition of spouse; wedlock. 
 [patL] 
 
 pati-loka, m. husband's place, abode of 
 the husband in the future life. 
 
 pati-sthana, n. husband's place. 
 
 pat isthaniya, a. belonging to or in 
 the husband's place ; as m. husband's 
 representative, [patisthana, 1215.] 
 
 pattra, n. 1. feather; wing; 2. 
 (plumage of a tree, i.e.) leaf for mg, cf. 
 parna ; 3. a leaf for writing on ; a 
 written leaf, 54 19 . [V pat : cf . irrep6v, 
 'wing'; Lat. penna and Old Lat. pesna 
 (for *petna), 'wing'; Ger. Fed-er, Eng. 
 feath-er.~\ 
 
 pattra-aka, n. leaf -vegetable, a vege- 
 table consisting chiefly of leaves. 
 
 patni, / 1. mistress, lady; 2. then 
 (like Eng. lady), wife. [fern, to pati, just 
 as Trd-rvia., ' lady/ is to ir<J<m.] 
 
 patsutah-gi [352], a. lying at the feet. 
 
 patsutas, adv. at the feet. [fr. patsii, 
 loc. pi. of pad, 1098b.] 
 
 path [433], same as panthan. 
 
 patha, for path in cpds [1315c]. 
 
 path! [433], same as panthan. 
 
 pathi-raksi, a. guarding the paths, 
 [panthan, 1249a : acct, 1276.] 
 
 pathya, a. (pertaining to the way, course, 
 or progress of a thing, and so) suitable, 
 wholesome ; pathya, f. pathway, [path, 
 1212d 1.] 
 
 V pad (padyate; papada, ped6 [794e]; 
 apatta [882] ; patsyate, -ti ; panna 
 [957d] ; pat turn ; -padya ; padayati). 
 1. go, step, tread, only w. prepositions 
 and in derivatives; 2. fall, sink down 
 (from fatigue), perish, [connection be- 
 tween 1 and 2 not clear: uncompounded 
 verb very rare : see under pdd and 
 pada.] 
 
 + a, come unto; get into (a condition); 
 esp. get in trouble. 
 
 -I- v y - a , fall away, perish ; cans, destroy ; 
 kill. 
 + ud, go forth or out of; come into 
 
 existence ; be produced ; utpannam an- 
 nam, food (not cooked for the occasion, 
 but) already on hand, 104 l ; utpanne 
 karye, when the emergency has arisen, 
 38 u ; caws, engender, 23 8 ; produce ; 
 get, 42 17 . 
 
 -t-praty-ud, in ppl. pratyutpanna, 
 ready or on hand to meet an emergency. 
 + upa, fall upon; happen, take place, 
 100 10 ; come to, get at, reach ; upapanna, 
 (having gotten at [952 2 ], i.e.) in posses- 
 sion of, endowed with, 1 *, 2 3 . 
 + prati, 1. step to; enter upon, 66 18 ; 
 
 2. get into (a condition), 49 15 ; get at, 
 acquire, attain, 98 n ; get back again, 60 17 ; 
 
 3. go to meet, and so (like the Lat. 
 ac-cedere), accede, yield; say yes to; con- 
 sent, 48 12 . 
 
 + vi, fall asunder, 93 9 ; come to nought, 
 get into trouble. 
 
 sam, 1. turn out well, succeed, 
 prosper; 2. become, 45 12 , 47 18 ; 3. fall 
 together, be united with; sampanna, en- 
 dowed with, 2 10 . 
 
 pad [391], m. foot. [V pad : cf . W5-o, Lat. 
 pffd-em, Eng.ybof.] 
 
 pada, n. -1. step, 17 21 , 99 s23 ; -2. foot- 
 step; 3. foot, 86 6 ; 4. standing-place, 
 stead, place; home, 56 4 ; station, position, 
 41 1 . [Vpad: cf. WSov, 'ground'; Lat. 
 op-pedum, op-pidum, 'town, (on or over the 
 field)'; peda, 'footprint'; AS. fozt, 'step, 
 going, journey,' whence fetian, 'go for,' 
 Eng. fetch.] 
 
 p a d m a , m. n. lotus, Nelumbium speciosum 
 (not the plant, but the flower, which closes 
 at evening). 
 
 padma-garbha, a. containing lotuses; 
 Lotus-filled, name of a lake, [see garbha 
 
 2-] 
 padma-raga, a. having the color of a 
 
 lotus ; as m. ruby. [1296.] 
 
 panthan [433], m. road, path, way. [cf. 
 TTOTOS, ' path ' ; Lat. pont-em, ' path, bridge ': 
 Eng. path and Ger. Pfad, if they belong 
 here at all, must be regarded as very early 
 borrowings, fr. the Greek irdros, or poss. 
 from the Scythian.] 
 
 pant ha [433 5 ], same as panthan. 
 
 pay as, n. milk.
 
 [187] 
 
 [paridhi 
 
 payo-mukha, a. having milk on the 
 face or surface, [payas, 1303.] 
 
 para [525 4 ], a. 1. far, distant, more dis- 
 tant, further off, 86 4 ; -2. following, 
 later, future ; 3. being beyond, surpass- 
 ing, summus ; chief, 68 7 ; best, 36 10 ; ut- 
 most, 1 13 ; greatest, 44 17 ; highest, 103 u ; 
 at end of cpds [1302b], having as chief 
 thing, given over to , devoted to ; 
 
 4. a. and subst. other, 64 13 ; eka para, 
 the one the other, 53 19 ; another, 30 22 ; 
 strange, hostile ; stranger, 24 6 ; foe, 29 10 , 
 37 19 . [V 2 pr, ' bring across ' ; cf . Wpd, 
 ' beyond ' ; Lat. peren-die, ' the day after/ 
 i.e. ' day after to-morrow ' ; Eng. far and 
 /ore.] 
 
 par a -d a r a, m. pi. another's wife, 
 para-dravya, n. pi. another's property. 
 para-pakaa, m. party of the foe. 
 para-patni,/. wife of a stranger. 
 par am, adv. beyond; w. abl. [1128], after, 
 
 60 2 \ [para, llllc.] 
 pa ram a [525 3 ], a. 1. farthest, extreme, 
 
 last ; of heaven, highest, 83 13 ; so 85 3 ; 
 
 2. chief est, 29 l ; supreme; most excel- 
 lent, 15 1T ; at end of cpds [1302b], having 
 as supreme object, devoted to ; 3. 
 advly in cpds, before an adj. [1279], highly, 
 exceedingly, [para, 474.] 
 
 parama-gobhana, a. exceedingly beau- 
 tiful. 
 
 paramangana,/. most excellent woman, 
 [angana.] 
 
 paramegvara, m. supreme lord. [15- 
 vara.] 
 
 parame-athin, a. standing in the high- 
 est place ; supreme, as epithet of Praja- 
 pati. [parame (1250c) i-sthin, 186.] 
 
 para-loka, m. the other or future 
 world. 
 
 paras, adv. far; in the distance; beyond; 
 w. advly used instr. [1127] ena, beyond 
 here, i.e. beyond, RV. x. 125. 8. [see 
 para.] 
 
 parastat, adv. beyond; afterwards, at 
 the end. [pards, HOOb.] 
 
 paras-para, one another; parasparam 
 and parasparatas, adv. with one another ; 
 mutually, [an agglomeration (1314c) of 
 paras (nom. s. m. of para) and para: the 
 
 syntactical forms sometimes correspond to 
 the logical relation of the two parts so, 
 e.g., in parasparam nindanti, ' they scold, 
 the one the other ' but have come to 
 be stereotyped and used often where the 
 logical relation would require other case- 
 forms : cf. anyonya.] 
 
 parasparadin.a. devouring one another, 
 [adin.] 
 
 para, adv. to a distance, away, forth, [cf. 
 irapd, w. gen., 'away from, from beside 'j 
 Lat. per- in per-lre and Ger. ver-in ver-ijehen,, 
 'pass away, perish '; Eng. for- in for-bear,, 
 'hold off from.'] 
 
 parakrama, m. s. and pi. bold advance; 
 courage; strength, [v'kram + para.] 
 
 paran-mukha, a. having the face 
 averted; turning the back upon, avoiding. 
 [paranc, 1249a, 217, 161.] 
 
 paranc [409a], f. paraci, a. directed away ; 
 averted; turning the back, [para + anc, 
 407.] 
 
 parartha, m. the sake of others; -am, 
 -e, adv. for others, [artha, 1302c4.] 
 
 paravat,/. the distance, [para, 383d 1, 
 12451] 
 
 pari, adv. around; prep. w. abl.: from 
 around, 87 8 ; from, 75 15 . [cf . irepl, 
 ' around.'] 
 
 parigha, m. iron bar for locking a gate. 
 [Vhan + pari, 1143c, 333: for mg, cf. Ger. 
 Schlag, ' coach-door/ and schlagen, ' strike ' : 
 force of prep, unclear.] 
 
 parighopama, a. like iron bars, fupama, 
 334 2 .] 
 
 pari -j ana, m. the surrounding folk, 
 TrepiVoAoi , retinue. [1289a.] 
 
 p a r i - j a t a, a. completely grown. [1289a/J 
 
 parineya, grdv. to be led around. [Vni 
 + pari.] 
 
 parityaga, m. relinquishment. [v'tyaj 
 + pari.] 
 
 paridevita, n. lament. [V2div, 'lament,' 
 + pari, 1176a.] 
 
 paridhi, m. (a put-around, i.e.) enclosure, 
 fence, protection, 86 10 ; in the language of 
 the sacrifice, the three green sticks laid 
 about the altar fire and supposed to hold 
 it together, 105 13 - 3 . [\fldha, ' put,' + 
 pari, 1155. 2e.]
 
 paripanthin] 
 
 [188] 
 
 paripanthin, a. besetting the path; as 
 m. waylayer. [pari + panthan, 1310a 
 and c end.] 
 
 paribhu [352], a. being around, encom- 
 passing. [Vbhu + pari, 323.] 
 
 pari-vatsard, m. a full year. [1289.] 
 
 parivartin, a. turning round, circling, 
 constantly returning into itself. [V vrt + 
 pari.] 
 
 parivara, m. that which surrounds, i.e. 
 retinue. [V 1 vr, ' cover,' + pari.] 
 
 pari grit, f. (encloser, i.e.) one of the 
 little stones by which the sacrificial altar is 
 surrounded. [Vgri + pari, 'enclose': 383b.] 
 
 parisamkhya, f. complete tale or enu- 
 meration ; sum. [V khya + pari-sam.] 
 
 par us a, a. knotty, rough, harsh, [parus, 
 1209b.] 
 
 parus, n. knot ; joint, of a plant or of the 
 body, [perhaps ' a fullness,' V 1 pr, ' fill ' : 
 cf. parvan.] 
 
 par6ksa, a. beyond the eye, out of sight, 
 invisible ; -e, adv. [1116], behind one's 
 back, [for paro 'ksa, i.e. paras + aksa, 
 'eye': 1310a.] 
 
 paroksartha, m. invisible thing, the 
 invisible, [artha.] 
 
 parkati, f. waved-leaved fig-tree, Ficus 
 infectoria. 
 
 parna, n. 1. wing; plume, feather; 
 
 2. leaf for mg, cf. pattra. [v'*spr 
 (1177a), see under Vsphur: cf. Lithuanian 
 spdrna, ' wing ' ; Ger. Farn, Eng. fern, so 
 called (like irrepis, 'fern,' cf. irrepSv, 
 'feather,') from its feathery fronds.] 
 
 paryalocana, n. deliberation; -&,f. plan, 
 consilium. [Vloc + pary-a, 1150. 2a 2 .] 
 
 parvata, 1. a. consisting of knots or 
 ragged masses, used of a mountain, giri ; 
 as m. 2. mountain, 27 6 , 92 19 ; hill; 
 
 3. cloud-mountain, 70 2 ; 4. rock or 
 bowlder, 86 n ; 5. Parvata, name of a 
 Rishi, companion of Narada (q.v.), 5 9 . [fr. 
 parvan, cf. 1245c: cf. Tlappaffia (ttrapfarta), 
 sc. ir6\is, i.e. ' Hil-ton.'] 
 
 parvata-kandara, n. mountain-cave, 
 parvata-gikhara, m. n. hill-top, 
 parvatopatyaka,/. mountain-lowland, 
 
 lowland by a mountain range, [upat- 
 
 yaka.] 
 
 parvan, n. knot, joint, ['fullness,' Vlpr, 
 'fill,' 1169. la: cf. parus. J 
 
 pargu,/ rib; sickle. 
 
 V palay (palay ate; palay am cakre ; apa- 
 layista ; palayisyati, -te ; palayita ; 
 palayitum; palayya). flee; depart, cease, 
 40 19 . [quasi-root f r. v' i, ' go,' + para, 
 ' away,' see 1087c and c 2 : quite different 
 is V palaya, ' protect.'] 
 
 palay ana, n. flight. [V palay.] 
 
 pavana, n. instrument for purifying; 
 winnowing-fan. [v'pu, 1150.] 
 
 V Ipag, orig. spag (p4gyati, -te; in Veda: 
 paspage ; dspasta [834c] ; spasta ; later : 
 dadarga, etc.). 1. see; 2. perceive; 
 behold; -3. look; -4. look on, 39 7 ; 
 gaze, 13 7 ; 5. (see, i.e.) experience, 20 1G , 
 35 !; -6. look upon, 21 , 40 15 ; consider 
 as; 7. see with the spiritual eye (as 
 seers and poets), 94 9 . [for the initial s, 
 see the perfect and vi-spasta: cf. <rKr- 
 r-ofuu, ' look about ' ; Lat. specid, ' behold ' ; 
 Ger. spoken, ' spy,' Old High Ger. spehon, 
 whence, through Old French espier, the 
 Eng. espy, and shortened spy.'] 
 
 anu, look along or spy out (e.g. a 
 path for some one, i.e.), disclose or show, 
 83 7 . 
 
 -f v i, see in places apart, distinguish, see 
 clearly ; vispasta, clear. 
 
 V 2pag, fasten, bind, in derivs, see pagii, 
 paga. [cf . irdffffa\os, #ira.K-ja\os, ' peg ' ; 
 Lat. pac-iscor, 'bind myself, agree'; pax, 
 'agreement, peace'; pang-ere, 'make fast/ 
 pac-tum, 'agreed upon'; Goth, fah-an, AS. 
 Jon, tjoh-an, ' fasten on, take hold of ' ; 
 Eng. verbyan^, ' seize,' noun yam?, ' seizing- 
 tooth'; connection of fing-er ('grasper, 
 holder'?), doubtful: cf. also Goth, fagrs, 
 'fitting,' AS.fcegr, Eng./azV; AS.ge-feyan, 
 Eng. /ay, Ger.fuyen, ' fit together,' trans., 
 and Eng. fudge, ' fit together or agree/ 
 intrans.] 
 
 pagti, m. cattle, 90 2 a single head or a 
 herd; domestic animal (opp. to mrga, 
 'wild beast'), 67 2 ; esp. beast for sacrifice, 
 101 6 . [prop, 'tethered (beasts)/ V2pac, 
 'fasten': cf. Lat./jec-u, Ger. Vieh, ' cattle/ 
 AS. feoh, 'cattle, property/ Eng. fee.. 
 orig. 'property/ then 'payment.']
 
 [189] 
 
 [pana 
 
 pagu-ghna, a. slaying cattle; as m. 
 cattle-slayer. 
 
 pagu-tfp, a. cattle-stealing. [vbl of 
 V2trp.j 
 
 pagu-bandha,?n. animal sacrifice, ['bind- 
 ing of beast' to sacrificial post.] 
 
 pagumant, a. rich in cattle. [pagu, 
 1235 and b.] 
 
 pacu-roman, n. a hair of an animal. 
 
 pagu-vadha, m. slaughter of animals. 
 
 page a, a. hinder; later; west; pagcat, 
 as adv. [1114c] : -1. behind ; after, 39 23 ; 
 -2. later, afterwards, 29 17 , 38 4 ; there- 
 upon, 36 13 , 39 17 , 40 12 ; pagcat, as prep. w. 
 gen. [1130]: -3. after, 51 2 ; -4. to the 
 west of, 98", 100 ", 105 11 . [pacca is an 
 inorganic transfer-stem (1209a) fr. pagca, 
 q.v.] 
 
 pagca, adv. behind; later; west, [adver- 
 bially accented instr. instead of pagc-a, 
 i.e. pas-(a)c-a, 1112e fr. *pas-anc (407) : 
 with pas cf . Lat. pos-terus, ' later,' etc.] 
 
 pagcat, see pagca. 
 
 pagcima, a. last, 52 16 ; westerly, [pagca: 
 cf. 1224a and b.] 
 
 V lp a (pibati, -te [671, 749]; papaii, pape; 
 apat ; pasyati, -te ; pita [954c] ; patum ; 
 pitva ; -paya, -pfya). drink, [cf. W- 
 TTU-KO., ' have drunk ' ; TlT-ffa, ' The Burn, 
 The Fountain ' ; Lat. po-tus, ' drunk ' ; 
 bibo, *pi-b-o, ' drink.'] 
 
 V 2 pa (pati ; apasit; patum). protect; 
 keep ; for so-called cans., see palaya. 
 [cf . irf-ira.-p.cu, ' have kept, possess ' ; tru>-v, 
 ' herd ' ; Lat. pa-sc-o, ' keep, pasture ' ; see 
 go-pa.] 
 + p a r i , protect around. 
 
 1 pa, vbl. drinking, in cpds. [\/lpa.] 
 
 2 pa, vbl. keeping, keeper, in cpds. [V2pa.] 
 pansu, m. pi. dust. 
 
 paka, a. 1. of a calf, young; 2. sim- 
 ple, [lit. ' sucking,' V 1 pa, ' drink.'] 
 
 paka-durva, f. young millet-grass. 
 [paka + durva : acct, 1280 2 .] 
 
 patala, a. pale red ; as m. Bignonia 
 suaveolens. 
 
 p a t a 1 i , f. Bignonia suaveolens or trumpet- 
 flower, [cf. patala.] 
 
 patali-putra, n. Pataliputra, capital of 
 Magadha, at the old confluence of the 
 
 Sone (gona) and Ganges, the Ila\t&oOpct 
 of Ptolemy, 17 9 N. 
 
 patava, n. sharpness; cleverness, [patu, 
 q.v.: 1208c.] 
 
 p a n i , m. hand. [prob. for *palni : cf . 
 TrctAci/uTj, Lat. palma, AS. folm, ' palm, 
 hand ' : radically akin is AS. fel-an, Eng. 
 fed^ 
 
 pani-graha, m. hand-grasper, i.e. (see 
 89 5 N.) husband. 
 
 pandava, m. descendant of Pandu. [pan- 
 du, 1208c.] 
 
 panditya, n. learning, erudition, [pan- 
 ditk.] 
 
 pandu, a. whitish, pale; as m. Pandu, 
 name of a prince of the Lunar Race. 
 
 pandu-nandana, m. son of Pandu. 
 
 pandu-varna, a. pale-colored. 
 
 pata, m. fall. [Vpat.] 
 
 pataka, a. causing one to fall (from 
 caste); as n. crime, [fr. caus. of v/pat.] 
 
 patra, n. 1. instrument of drinking, 
 cup; vessel; 2. in general, utensil (cf. 
 bhanda), 102 n ; -3. Jig., as in Eng. (cf. 
 sthana5), a fit vessel or worthy person, 
 22 5 ; patri [364], /. sacrificial vessel. 
 [\/lpa, 'drink,' 1185a: cf. 362b 2 .] 
 
 pada, m. 1. foot; leg, 26 10 ; 2. limb 
 of a quadruped, i.e. quarter (as, conversely, 
 in Eng., quarter means ' fourth part of a 
 quadruped, including a leg') ; then quarter 
 (of anything); 3. esp. quarter of a 
 (four-versed) stanza, verse; then verse 
 (even of a three-versed stanza), 60 12 ; 
 4. (foot of a heavenly body, i.e.) ray, 
 beam see 2 kara. [transition-stem (399) 
 fr. pad, ace. pad-am, to which, as if it 
 were pada-m, is formed the nom. pada-s, 
 etc.] 
 
 pada-pa, m. plant, esp. tree. [lit. 'drink- 
 ing with its foot, i.e. root.'] 
 
 pa da -raj as, n. foot-dust. 
 
 padika, a. amounting to or lasting one 
 fourth (of a time), [pada.] 
 
 paduka, f. shoe ; slipper. [cf. pad, 
 ' foot.'] 
 
 pana, 1. n. the drinking (esp. of strong 
 drink); 2. perhaps as vbl adj. drench- 
 ing, i.e. trankend. [V 1 pa, ' drink,' 
 1150.]
 
 paniya] 
 
 [190] 
 
 paniya, grdv. to be drunk, for drinking ; 
 
 as n. drink; water. [VI pa, 'drink/ 965: 
 
 prop. fr. pana, 1215b.] 
 
 paniya- varsa, m. water-rain, down- 
 pour of water, 
 pantha, m. wayfarer; viator, [panthan, 
 
 1208a 2 end.] 
 papa, a. bad; evil; as m. bad fellow, 46 19 ; 
 
 as n. trouble; harm, 26 8 ; evil (deed), 
 
 27 2 . 
 papa-karman, a. of evil deeds; as m. 
 
 villain, 
 papa-gila, a. having evil as one's nature, 
 
 prone to evil, 
 papiyans, a. worse; very bad. [papa, 
 
 466.] 
 
 papman, m. evil; sin, 93 11 . [cf. papa.] 
 para, n . the further bank or bound. [V 2 pr, 
 
 ' bring across.'] 
 paramegvara, a. of the supreme lord 
 
 (Qiva). [paramegvara.] 
 parusya, n. harshness, esp. of speech. 
 
 [parusa.] 
 parthiva, a. of or belonging to the earth ; 
 
 as m. king, [prthivi, 1208d.] 
 parthiva-suta, /. king's daughter, 
 parthivendra, m. most excellent of 
 
 kings, [indra.] 
 pargva, n. 1. side; ana* so 2. as in 
 
 Eng., immediate neighborhood. [pargu, 
 
 ' rib/ 1208c : so French c6te~, ' side or 
 
 ribbed part/ Medieval Lat. costatum, fr. 
 
 Lat. costa, 'rib.'] 
 
 pal a, m. protector. [V2pa, 'protect/ 
 
 1189.] 
 
 V pal ay a (palayati). be protector; pro- 
 tect; keep. [pala, 1042f: acct, 1067: 
 
 quite different is Vpalay, 'go away.'] 
 
 + pari, protect around, 
 pavaka, a. pure; clear; bright. [Vpu, 
 
 1181b and a : cf . gvapada.] 
 pavana, a. purifying; freeing from sin. 
 
 [Vpu, 1150b.] 
 paga, m. bond; snare; trap. [V2pag, 
 
 ' fasten.'] 
 V pi, same as pi. 
 ping a, a. reddish brown. 
 pin gal a, a. reddish brown. [pinga, 
 
 1227.] 
 pinjula, n. tuft of stalks ; grass. 
 
 pfnda, m. 1. lump; ball; lump (of 
 earth), 98 8 ; 2. esp. lump or cake of 
 meal offered to the Manes; 3. mouth- 
 ful, 65 5 ; pindi, f. meal-cake. 
 
 pitamaha, m. father's father, grand- 
 father ; great father, [pita (nom. s. of 
 pitr) + maha, 1314c and d.] 
 
 pitf [373], m. -1. father; -2. pi. father 
 and his brothers (cf. French parent, ' rela- 
 tive'), 61 n ; 3. pi. the fathers, spirits 
 of the forefathers, the Manes, 67 16 , 83 13 , 
 etc. [origin unknown, see 1182d : cf. 
 irar-ftp, Lat. pater, Eng. father.] 
 
 p i t r t a s , adv. on the father's side, [pitr, 
 1098b.] 
 
 pitr-mitra, n. father's friend. 
 
 pitr-yajna, m. sacrifice to the Manes, 
 [yajna.] 
 
 pitrvya, m. father's brother, patruus. 
 [pitr, 1228c : cf . irdrptas, Lat. patruus, AS. 
 fsedera, ' father's brother.'] 
 
 pi try a, a. of one's father; of (our) 
 fathers, 78 18 ; of or belonging to or sacred 
 to the Manes, [pitf, 1212b : cf. irdrpios, 
 Lat. patrius, ' of one's father.'] 
 
 v' pin v (pinvati ; pipinva ; pinvita). cause 
 to swell or stream. [V pi or pi : 749, 749b, 
 716.] 
 
 pipasa, f. desire to drink, thirst, [fr. 
 desid. (1026) of VI pa, 'drink': 1149 4 .] 
 
 pipila, m. ant. [perhaps for *piplda, 
 ' pressed in or constricted in the middle/ 
 Vpid.] 
 
 V pig (pingati, -te [758]; pipega, pipig6; 
 pistd). adorn, [cf. irojKt'Aos, AS. fah, 
 ' many-colored ' ; Lat. pic-tor, ' painter.'] 
 
 piganga, a. reddish brown. [Vpig.] 
 
 p i g a c 4 , m. one of a class of demons (perhaps 
 personifications of the ignis fatuus); goblin. 
 
 piguna, a. backbiting, slanderous, [cf. 
 iriKpos, 'bitter.'] 
 
 V pis (pinasti; pipe>a, pipisd; apisat 
 peksyati; pista; pestum; pistva; -pis- 
 ya). crush; grind, 47 5 ; mill. [cf. Lat. 
 pinsere, pisere, 'crush': of doubtful kin- 
 ship is mia-ffd}, ' pound, husk.'] 
 + sam, crush together or to pieces. 
 
 pista, ppl. milled; as n. meal. [Vpis: for 
 the mgs, cf. pis, pista, and molere, mola, 
 with mill, meal.']
 
 [191] 
 
 [pura 
 
 pista-pagu, m. effigy of a sacrificial 
 beast made of meal. 
 
 V pi or pya (pyayate [761dl]; pipaya 
 [786 s ], pipyiis; apyasit; pita, pina). 
 swell; overflow, [hence pi-van, iri-onv, 
 fat.'] 
 
 pit ha, n. 1. seat; 2. pedestal (of an 
 image of a god). 
 
 pitha-cakra, n. seat-wagon; wagon with 
 a seat. 
 
 \ piid (pidayati [1041 2 ]; pidayam asa; 
 pidita; pidayitum; pidayitva; -pidya). 
 press; oppress, pain, [for *pizd, *pisd, 
 198b 8 : cf. Vpis.] 
 + a, press out, 103 20 . 
 
 pida, f. pain, ache. [Vpid, 1149 3 .] 
 
 pin a, a. thick, brawny. ['swollen,' ppl. 
 of Vpi, 957a.] 
 
 pivas, n. fat. [Vpi: cf. irlap, i.e. -itt-fap, 
 'fat.'] 
 
 pums, same as pumans. 
 
 puta, m. n. fold; cavity; nose (of a bas- 
 ket), [for #plta : cf. -ir\affios, *ir\rjos, in 
 St-TrXafftos or Si-ira\TOs, Eng. two-fold.] 
 
 ptinya, a. prosperous; happy; lucky, 
 faustus, auspicious, 12 13 , 59 1>10 ; right, 
 good ; as n. good work ; sing, collectively, 
 good works, 28 n ; merit (from good 
 works), [perhaps fr. v'pus.] 
 
 piinya-gandha, a. of good or pleasant 
 smell. 
 
 punya-papa, n. pi. good and bad deeds. 
 [1253a.] 
 
 punya-loka, a. of good fame; as m. 
 Punya9loka, epithet of Nala. 
 
 puttika, f. white ant. ['the doll-like 
 insect ' : for putrika.] 
 
 putra, m. -1. son; child, 98 20 ; -2. 
 whelp; 3. shortened form for Putraka 
 as proper name. 
 
 putraka, /. 1. little son (as term of 
 endearment), boy; 2. Putraka, other- 
 wise Putra, name of the founder of Patali- 
 putra-pura, 45 2 ; -putrika, /. [1222d], 
 daughter; doll (of wood or lac), [putra.] 
 
 putra-dara, n. son and wife. [1253b.] 
 
 piinar, adv. 1. back; home; tv. a-gam, 
 go back, 4 3 , 41 18 ; so a_i, 83 14 ; w. vac, 
 reply, 19 19 ; -2. again, 8 8 , 40 21 ; anew; 
 punah punar, again and again, 2 17 ; 
 
 punar, equiv. to punah punar, 4 13 ; 3. 
 confirmative, again, further, 29 n ; more- 
 over, 16 8 , 57 21 ; besides or in turn, 10 10 ; 
 kim punas tu, but what besides, how 
 much more, a fortiori, 17 15 ; longer, 84 s ; 
 
 4. but, 46 2 - 10 ; on the other hand, 20 17 . 
 [cf. the similarly connected notions of 
 iteration and opposition shown by Trd\iv, 
 Eng. again and against, Ger. wieder and 
 wider.'] 
 
 punar-garbhavati, a. f. again preg- 
 nant. 
 
 punar- janman, n. re-birth. 
 
 punah-sara, a. coming back (as a ghost 
 from the other world exactly like the 
 French revenant), and so ghostly, uncanny, 
 [punar, 178.] 
 
 pumans [394], m. man; a male, 59 7 ; opp. 
 o/stri, e.g. 104 9 ; pumansah putras, male 
 children, 98 2 \ 
 
 1 pur,/, fullness, [vf Ipr, 'fill.'] 
 
 2 pur [392], /. stronghold; castle; forti- 
 fied town, [cf . ir6\is, ' city.'] 
 
 pura, n. stronghold; fortified town; city. 
 [2 pur, 399.] 
 
 puramdhi, 1. a. courageous, high- 
 spirited, exalted ; 2. as m. perhaps as 
 name of a god, Purandhi ; 3. asf. exal- 
 tation. 
 
 pur as, adv. in front, forward, before; at 
 first, 54 18 ; compounded [1078 6 ] esp. tv. kr 
 and dha : w. kr, put in front, appoint ; w . 
 dha, put in front or in charge, esp. of the 
 priestly duties. [see pra: cf. -rrdpos, 
 ' before.'] 
 
 puras-karya, grdv. to be appointed or 
 commissioned, praeficiendus. [see puras 
 + kr: also963b and 171 3 .] 
 
 purastat, adv. 1. before; in the front, 
 85 18 ; -2. previously, afore, 98 6 ,101 ' 13 ; 
 
 3. before, i.e. (see pranc) eastward; 
 
 4. prep. w. gen. [1130], before, in the 
 presence of, 20 l . [puras, HOOb.] 
 
 purah-sara, a. going before; as m. fore- 
 runner; at end of cpds [1302c2], having 
 
 as forerunner, i.e. accompanied by ; 
 
 -purahsaram, adv. with or after . 
 pura, adv. formerly, 46 2 , 79 14 ; once upon 
 
 a time, 38 9 , 48 20 ; prep. w. all. [1128], 
 before, 95 17 , 104 19 . [see pra.]
 
 purana] 
 
 [192] 
 
 purana, a. former, belonging to old 
 times ; as n. things of the past ; tale 
 of old times, \6yos and pvGos. [pura, 
 1245d.] 
 
 pur is a, n. crumbling earth, as opp. to 
 fluids; rubble; loose earth, ['fillings or 
 heaps,' fr. V 1 pr, in the sense ' fill, i.e. 
 heap': 1197b.] 
 
 puru, a. much, many. [Vlpr, 'fill,' q.v. : 
 cf. iro\v, AS.fela, 'much, many.'] 
 
 purutra, adv. in many places, [puru, 
 1099.] 
 
 purusa, m. 1. man; 2. (as in Eng., 
 man, i.e.) servant; 3. the personal and 
 life-giving principle in man and other 
 beings, soul, spirit ; then 4. personified 
 as The Supreme Spirit, Soul of the Uni- 
 verse, 57 8 . 
 
 purusa-kara, m. deed of a man, human 
 effort, as opp. to claiva, 'fate.' 
 
 purusa-sinha,m. man-lion, stout-hearted 
 man. 
 
 p u r u c i , a.f. many, abundant ; long, [for- 
 mally fern, to a stem *puru-ac, 'directed 
 or reaching in many ways, abundant ' : cf . 
 407.] 
 
 puro-gama, a. going before; as m. 
 leader; at end of cpds [1302c2], having 
 as leader, accompanied by . [puras.] 
 
 puro-gava, m. fore-bull, and so, general- 
 ized (see g64), leader; purogavi,/. leader, 
 [puras.] 
 
 pur6-hita, ppl. set before or in charge 
 (esp. of priestly service) ; as m. priest, 
 house-priest of a prince, [see puras with 
 dha.] 
 
 pulkasa, m. one of a despised mixed 
 caste. 
 
 V pus (pusyati, -te ; pup6sa ; apusat ; 
 pusta). 1. thrive; bloom; 2. trans. 
 cause to thrive ; develop ; unfold, display, 
 
 ! 78*. 
 
 puska, bloom, a word assumed as probable 
 on account of puspa, 'bloom,' piiskara, 
 'lotus blossom,' and puskala. [Vpus, 
 1186 2 .] 
 
 puskala, a. abundant, [prob. 'blooming,' 
 fr. *puska, 1227.] 
 
 pusta, ppl. having thrived ; strong ; fat. 
 [Vpus, 955 2 .] 
 
 pustanga, a. fat-limbed, [anga.] 
 
 pusti, f. thrifty growth ; prosperity. 
 [V pus.] 
 
 p lisp a, n. bloom ; flower. [poss. for 
 *puska, q.v. : cf. 1201 2 end.] 
 
 puspa-danta,m. Pushpadanta or Flower- 
 tooth, name of an attendant of C,iva, see 
 53 3 N. 
 
 puspamoda, m. fragrance of flowers, 
 [amoda.] 
 
 p u s t a k a , m. n. manuscript ; book. 
 
 V pu (punati, punite ; pavate; pupava; 
 apavit; puta; -puya). 1. make clear 
 or bright ; purify ; KaQaipfiv ; puta, pure ; 
 2. mid. clear itself, flow clear, [cf . irv-p, 
 Eng. fire (rb irvp Ka.6a.ipfi): w. puta, cf. 
 Lat. putus, ' clear,' purus, ' pure.'] 
 sam, purify, clean. 
 
 pu, vbl. purifying, in cpds. 
 
 puga, m. betel-palm, Areca Catechu; as 
 n. betel nut. 
 
 V puj (pujayati, -te; pujayisyati; pujita; 
 -pujya). honor. 
 + abhi, do honor to. 
 
 piijaniya, grdv. to be honored. [Vpuj, 
 965.] 
 
 p u j a , f. honor. 
 
 pujya, grdv. to be honored. [Vpuj, 
 963d.] 
 
 purna, ppl. filled; full. [Vlpr, 'fill,' 
 957b: cf. Goth, fulls, Eng. full.'] 
 
 purna-masa, m. full moon and the full- 
 moon sacrifice. 
 
 purta, ppl. filled; bestowed, fulfilled; as 
 n. [1176a], fulfilment; reward; merit. 
 [Vlpr, 'fill,' 242.] 
 
 purva [525*], a. being before in place or 
 time: 1. east (cf. prafic) ; 2. prior; 
 preceding, 86 13 ; purva uttara, former 
 latter, 21 8 ; ancient, 57 6 ; of old time, 
 69 8 , 83 10 ; first spoken, 60 2 ; w. past pass, 
 ppl. [1291]: drsta-purva, seen before; 
 purvam, adv. before; beforehand, 60 9 ; 
 previously, already, 7 21 , 25 n ; in former 
 times, 48 1 ; long ago, 46 3 ; first, 103 6 ; 
 purvam uttaram, first last, 104 12 ; 
 3. at end of cpds, (having as preced- 
 ing thing, i.e.) accompanied by , or 
 simply with , 8 21 . [connected w. puras 
 and pra.]
 
 [193] 
 
 [paicunya 
 
 purvaka, f. [1222d] -ika, a. 1. preced- 
 ing ; 2. used like purva 3. [purva, 
 1222c and 1307.] 
 
 purva -janman, n. former birth, pre- 
 vious state of existence. 
 
 purvaksara,o. with the preceding letter, 
 [aksara.] 
 
 purvya, a. ancient, [purva, 1212c.] 
 
 pusan [426a], m. Pushan, a Vedic divinity, 
 keeper of flocks and herds, and bringer of 
 prosperity. [Vpus, 1160c.] 
 
 \f Ipr (prnati; puryate; purna [957b]; 
 pass, puryate; purayati, -te; etc.). fill; 
 bestow abundantly ; sate ; puryate, be- 
 comes sated [see 761b]; cans. [1041 -}, fill; 
 make a thing (ace.) full of (gen.}, 102 18 . 
 [for treatment of root-vowel, see 242 : cf . 
 -jri'-7rA.7j-jut, Lat. plere, ' fill ' ; po-pul-us, 
 'folk'; Eng. fol-k (doubtful): see also 
 purna and Vpra.] 
 
 + pra, intrans. prapuryate, becomes 
 sated. 
 
 + sam, intrans. sampuryate, becomes 
 full ; sampurna, full. 
 
 V 2pr (piparti; parayati, -te; etc.). pass, 
 trans.; bring across, [cf. Trepctco, 'pass 
 over, cross ' ; Tropos, ' passage, i.e. ford, 
 ferry, bridge ' ; Lat. por-ta, ' gate ' ; Eng. 
 fare, ' get on ' ; ferry, for-d ; Avestan 
 peretu, ' bridge,' and E.v-<ppdrr]s, ' the well- 
 bridged (stream)'; also B6<T-iropos and 
 Ox-ford.'] 
 + a t i , bring across. 
 
 vl 3pr (prn6ti; prta; priyate; parayati). 
 be busy; only w. a, see 773. 
 + a, in aprta, busied. 
 + v y - a , in vyapriyate, is busied. 
 
 V prc (prnakti, prnkte; paparca ; aprak- 
 sit, aprkta [882] ; prkta; prcyate). fill; 
 mix ; put in connection with, [perhaps 
 connected w. V 1 pr, ' fill.'] 
 + up a, put one's self close to, be near. 
 
 pft,/. fight, battle. 
 
 p ft an a, f. battle, [cf. ptt.] 
 
 V prta nay a (prtanayati). fight; present 
 ppl. fighting; as subst. enemy, [prtana, 
 1060.] 
 
 V prtanya (prtanyati). fight; attack; 
 present ppl. fighting ; as subst. enemy, 
 [prtana, 1059d.] 
 
 V prth, collateral form of prath, in derivs. 
 
 prtha, m. the flat of the hand, irAon-eio. 
 [V prath, 241.] 
 
 prthak, adv. separately, 105 1G ; severally, 
 65 4 ; for one's self, 64 8 . [perhaps 'di- 
 rected widely (apart)': cf. prth and see 
 
 mid.] 
 
 prthivi, f. the earth as the wide and 
 broad, [fern, to prthu, 344 2 , and standing 
 for prthvi, as the metre shows it is to be 
 pronounced at 92 10 : for mg, cf . mah-i, 
 s.v. mah.] 
 
 prthivi-ksit, a. earth-ruling; as m. 
 prince. 
 
 prthivi-pati, m. lord of the earth, king. 
 
 prthivi-pala, m. keeper of the earth, 
 king. 
 
 prthii, f. prthvi, a. wide, broad, [v 1 prath, 
 241: cf. Tr\arvs, 'wide': akin are Old 
 Eng._/?aJ?e, Ger.Fladen, 'broad, thin cake,' 
 Old High Ger. ace. s. fladon, ' sacrificial 
 cake,' whence, through French flan, ' flat 
 cake,' comes the Eng. Jtawn, ' flat custard 
 or pie': V prath has no connection w. AS. 
 brad, Eng. broad.] 
 
 pfgni, a. speckled; dapple, esp. of kine; 
 as f. Pri^ni, mother of the Maruts. [cf. 
 irepKvds, 'dark colored'; Old High Ger. 
 farhana, whence Ger. Forelle, ' trout.'] 
 
 prsad-ajya, n. speckled butter, ghee 
 clotted with curds, [pfsant.] 
 
 pfsant, a. speckled. [450c.] 
 
 prstha, n. 1. back, of an animal; 2. 
 the upper side, surface ; 3. top, of a hill 
 or palace, [cf. Ger. First, 'ridge of a 
 house ' ; AS. first-hrof, ' ridge-pole ' : ob- 
 serve that VWTOS has mgs 1, 2, and 3, that 
 Lat. tergum has mgs 1 and 2, and that 
 Eng. ridge has mgs 1 and 3.] 
 
 prsthatas, adv. a tergo, from behind; 
 with the back, with averted face, 30 17 . 
 [1098c 3 .] 
 
 prstha-mansa, n. back-flesh; w. khad, 
 in double sense, bite the back-flesh and 
 back-bite. 
 
 peya, n. a drinking. [VI pa, 'drink,' 
 1213c.] 
 
 paiQaca, f. -I, a. of the goblins, [picacd, 
 1208f.] 
 
 paigunya, n. slander, [piguna, 1208f.] 
 13
 
 posa] 
 
 p6sa, in. thriving, development; welfare. 
 [Vpus.] 
 
 p a u m s y a , n. manliness ; manly deed, 
 [pums, 1211 2 .] 
 
 paurusa, n. manliness ; manly deed, 
 [purusa, 1208f.] 
 
 V pya (pyayate [761dl]; apyasit [882]; 
 pyata). swell; overflow. [a collateral 
 form of Vpi, q-v.] 
 + a, become full of or rich in. 
 
 pra, prep, forward, onward, forth, fore, 
 [cf. irp6, 'before'; Lat. prff, later pro, 
 ' before ' ; Eng. fore : see also the follow- 
 ing articles, and puras, pura, and purva.] 
 
 prakarana, n. treatment ; discussion ; 
 subject of discussion, what's being talked 
 about. [V 1 kr, ' do, put,' + pra.] 
 
 prakarsa, m. (preference, advantage, 
 i.e.) superiority. [Vkrs, ' draw,' + pra: 
 for mg, cf. Eng. preference; also Ger. 
 Vor-zug, ' preference, advantage,' with 
 vor-ziehen, ' draw forward, prefer.'] 
 
 prakaga, a. sliining out, clear; open; 
 -am, adv. openly, aloud. [Vkag + pra.] 
 
 prakrti, f. that which one pre-supposes 
 (voraus-setzt), i.e. the original or natural 
 form or condition ; nature. [V 1 kr, ' do, 
 set,' + pra.] 
 
 prakopa, m. a boiling with rage; anger, 
 [v'kup + pra.] 
 
 prage, adv. early in the morning. 
 
 pracrtta-gikha, a. with loosened 
 braids or flowing hair, [gikha.] 
 
 pracetas, a. knowing, wise. [Vcit + 
 pra, cf . 1151. 2b.] 
 
 V prach (prcchati, -te; papraccha [794c]; 
 apraksit ; praksyati ; prsta ; prastum ; 
 prstva ; -pfcchya). ask; ask after, in- 
 quire about; ask some one (ace.) about 
 something (ace.), 61 7 . [true root-form 
 prag (see 220, 241, and Vvrgc), orig. 
 *prk : cf . Qfo-irpoTr-os, ' asking the gods ' ; 
 Lat. prec-es, ' prayers,' proc-us, ' suitor ' ; 
 Old High Ger. frdh-en, Ger. frag-en, ' ask ' : 
 prcchati is a sk-formation (*prk-sketi), 
 cf. Lat. poscit, *porc-scit, Old High Ger. 
 forskot, *forh-skot, ' asks for,' Ger. forscht, 
 'inquires into.'] 
 -f- pari, ask. 
 + vi, find out by inquiry. 
 
 a am, mid. consult with, converse or 
 talk with. 
 
 praja,^ 1. procreation; 2. offspring, 
 children, descendants ; 3. creatures, 
 57 1 ; esp. 4. folk, subjects, of a prince, 
 16 5 . [Vjan or ja -f pra, 1147.] 
 
 praja-kama, m. desire for offspring, 
 [praja -f- kama, 1264 : acct, 1267.] 
 
 praja-kama, a. possessing prajakama, 
 i.e. desirous of offspring, 93 c , I 1 -. [1296, 
 1295.] 
 
 praja-pati, m. 1. lord of creatures; 
 
 2. genius presiding over procreation, 
 89 19 ; 3. lord of creatures, i.e. creator 
 or Prajapati, 60 10 , see note. [acct, 
 1267a.] 
 
 prajarthe, adv. for the sake of offspring, 
 [artha, 1116, 1302c4.] 
 
 prajfia, f. understanding. [Vjna-pra.] 
 
 prajnata, ppl. well-known. [Vjna ~ 
 pra.] 
 
 pranaya, m. manifestation of one's af- 
 fection. [V ni + pra : for n, see 192a.] 
 
 pranayana, n. 1. a fetching; 2. 
 means for fetching, vessel, [do.] 
 
 pranava, m. the sacred syllable om. 
 [Vnu 4^ pra, q.v.] 
 
 pra n am a, m. bow, reverent salutation, 
 [v'nam 4- pra.] 
 
 pranita, ppl. see Vni + pra; -as, f. pi. 
 holy water. 
 
 pranita-pranay ana, n. the fetching 
 of the holy water. [1250e.] 
 
 prataram, adv. further, longer, [pra, 
 473 2 , llllc: cf. Tfp6repov, 'before.'] 
 
 prati, prep, hi reversed direction, back to, 
 back against, against, in return ; 1. to, 
 towards, w. ace., 2 19 , 23"; -2. with 
 reference to, in respect to, w. ace., 4 7 - 17 , 
 13 2>) ; 3. over against, i.e. like ; 4. in 
 cpds [1313a] : before ; on, w. idea of con- 
 stant repetition ; at; (back-, i.e.) reflected; 
 see the following words, [cf. vporl, 'to'; 
 Lat. par- (*port) in por-rigere, 'reach out 
 to.'] 
 
 pr atij na, f. promise. [Vjna -f- prati.] 
 
 prati-dinam, adv. on (each) day, daily. 
 [1313a, 1310a and d : cf . pratyaham.] 
 
 pratipatti, /. the acquiring. [\fpad + 
 prati.]
 
 [195] 
 
 [pradhana 
 
 prati-bimba, n. reflected disk (of sun 
 or moon in the water) ; image. 
 
 pratima, f. match ; image ; likeness. 
 [V 1 ma + prati, ' make (so as to be a 
 match) against ' : for mg, cf. Eng. counter- 
 feit, ' imitated/ fr. French contre-fait, 
 whose elements go back to Lat. contra 
 and facere.~] 
 
 pratimana, n. that which is made or 
 put over against, a match, equal. [V 1 ma 
 + prati.] 
 
 pratistha,/. stead; standing-place; then 
 (like Eng. standing), position, i.e. celebrity. 
 [V stha + prati.] 
 
 pratisthana, n. stead; then (like Ger. 
 Stadt, 'place, town'), The Town, name of 
 a town on the Godavari, the Ha.lQa.va of 
 the Greeks. [V stha, + prati, 1150: cf. 
 H 'amp-stead. ,] 
 
 pratihastaka, m. proxy. ['person at 
 one's hand/ prati + hasta, 1310a, 1222c.] 
 
 pratikara, m. counter-action, remedy. 
 [V 1 kr, ' do, act/ -f prati, ' against ' : 
 1087b.'] 
 
 praticina, a. backward ; being behind ; 
 following, i.e. future, [pratyanc, 1223d.j 
 
 pratlta, ppl. see \fi + prati. 
 
 pratipd, a. (against the stream, i.e.) con- 
 trary ; -am, adv. contrarily, frowardly. 
 [prati + ap, 1310a, ISloc, cf . samlpa : 
 for mgs, cf. Eng. contrary. .] 
 
 pratta, see 1087e. 
 
 pratyaksa, a. before the eyes, plainly 
 visible ; -e, adv. before one's face, [prati 
 + aksa, 1310a.] 
 
 pratyaksa-dargana, . a seeing be- 
 fore one's eyes ; the ability to see any 
 one (e.g. a god) bodily, 15 13 . 
 
 pratyag-daksina, adv. (west-southerly, 
 i.e.) southwesterly, [pratyanc, 1249a.] 
 
 pratyan-mukha, a. having the face 
 westward, turned to the west, [pratyanc, 
 1249a, 161 : 1306.] 
 
 pratyinc [408], /. [410] pratici, a. -1. 
 (directed back, i.e.) turned backwards ; 
 moving in reverse direction or away, 87 n ; 
 2. turned westward (see pranc), west- 
 erly; 3. (being to-ward, i.e.) with the 
 face towards, w. ace., 71 18 . [prati + anc, 
 407 : see anc.] 
 
 praty-abhivadana, n. return-saluta- 
 tion, Gegen-gruss. [1289b.] 
 
 praty-aham, adv. on (each) day, daily. 
 [1313a, 1310a and d: 1315a: cf. pra- 
 tidinam.] 
 
 pratyakhyana, n. refusal. [Vkhya + 
 praty-a.] 
 
 pratyutthana, n. rising up to meet (a 
 person), respectful reception. [Vstha + 
 praty-ud, 233a.] 
 
 pratyutpanna-mati, a. having wits 
 ready to meet an emergency ; as m. Ready- 
 wit, name of a fish. [Vpad + praty-ud.] 
 
 pratyrcam, adv. at or with each stanza, 
 [prati + re, 1313a, 1310a and d : 1315c.] 
 
 V prath (prathate, -ti; paprathe; apra- 
 thista ; prathit& ; prathayati ; apapra- 
 that). broaden, intrans.; cans, broaden, 
 trans.; spread out, 78 n . [see under 
 prfchu.] 
 + vi, cans, spread out wide, 75 8 . 
 
 prathamd, a. first; primal; -am, adv. 
 at first, [lit. ' fore-most/ for *pra-tama, 
 superl. of pra, 487 3 , 473 2 .] 
 
 prathama-ja [352], a. first-born. [1286.] 
 
 prada, a. giving; furnishing. [Vlda + 
 pra, 333.] 
 
 pra-daksina, 1. a. moving to the 
 right ; 2. -am, adv. to the right, so that 
 the right side is towards an object (a sign 
 of respect), 60 1 , 99 1 ; w. kr, put (an 
 object) to the right ; 3. adj. standing 
 on the right, 62 19 . [perhaps the use as 
 adv. (mg 2) is the primary one, lit. 'for- 
 ward to the right.'] 
 
 pradana, n. a giving. [Vlda + pra.] 
 
 pra dig, f, intermediate region (between 
 the cardinal points see dig), [pra + 
 dig, 'fore-point.'] 
 
 pradega, m. direction; and so, place. 
 [V die + pra.] 
 
 pradosa, m. evening, nightfall, ['fore- 
 dark/ pra + doaa.] 
 
 pradhana, n. prize of the contest; the 
 contest therefor ; battle. [V 1 dha + pra : 
 cf. dhana.] 
 
 pradhana, n. (that which is put forward) 
 the important or chief thing; at end of 
 cpds [1302], having as chief thing, de- 
 voted to . [VI dha + pra.] 
 13*
 
 prapatha] 
 
 [196] 
 
 pra-patha, m. (forth-path, i.e.) onward 
 way, 85 18 ; journey in the distance or 
 distant journey, 86 2 . 
 
 prabandha, m. uninterrupted connec- 
 tion; continued series. [Vbandh + pra.] 
 
 prabhava, m. origin; atendofcpd [1302], 
 having as origin, originating with . 
 [Vbhu fpra.] 
 
 prabha, /. splendor; radiant beauty. 
 [v bha +pra.] 
 
 prabhata, ppl. begun to be light; as n. 
 [1176a], day-break, [s bha + pra.] 
 
 prabhava, m. superior might, of gods, 
 of ascetics, of asceticism. [Vbhu + 
 pra.] 
 
 prabhu, a. being before or superior to 
 others; as m. ruler; master; lord; hus- 
 band, 52 14 . [later form (354) for Vedic 
 prabhu : Vbhu + pra.] 
 
 prabhutva, n. lordship, power. [1239.] 
 
 prabhrti,/. 1. lit. a carrying forward 
 or on, i.e. continuance; used esp. at end 
 of cpds [1296], having continuance from 
 
 , i.e. continuing from ; 2. then in 
 such cpds used in ace. s. n. adverbially 
 [1311], continuing from , beginning 
 with , from ; 3. then as an adv. 
 uncompounded, prabhrti, w. abl., from 
 
 on ; tatah prabhrti, from then on. 
 [Vbhr + pra, 1157. Id.] 
 
 pramada, m. pleasure. [V mad + pra.] 
 
 pramada-vana, n. pleasure-grove (of a 
 prince). 
 
 pramada-vana, n. pleasure-grove (of 
 the wives of a prince), [a quasi feminine 
 to the preceding.] 
 
 pramana, n. measure, extent (57 w ), 
 scale, standard ; something by which to 
 judge, 54 11 ; norm, rule of action, 21 a ; 
 authority, 12 10 , 19 * 2 . [VI ma, 'measure,' 
 + pra, 192a : hence, through the Persian 
 farmdn, the borrowed Eng. firman, 'an 
 authority or decree,' esp. of the Sublime 
 Porte.] 
 
 >/ pramana y a (pramanayati). regard 
 as an authority; take a person (ace.) as 
 authority in a matter (loc.). [pramana, 
 1058.] 
 
 pramanabhava, m. lack of anything to 
 judge by. [abhava.] 
 
 pramathin, a. stirring; agitating. 
 [V math -f pra, 1183 3 .] 
 
 pramrsta-mani, m. polished or bright 
 gem. [Jmrj-f-pra.] 
 
 pramr stamani-kundala, a. possess- 
 ing bright-gem ear-rings. 
 
 prayatna, TO. effort, pains ; -ena, -at, 
 adv. carefully. [Vyat + pra, 1177a.] 
 
 prayana, n. a going forth (from home), 
 journey. [Vya -f pra, 1150, 192e.] 
 
 prayotf, TO. remover. [V2yu, 'keep off,' 
 + pra.] 
 
 pralaya, m. dissolution; esp. dissolution 
 of the universe, [v II -f pra.] 
 
 pra lap a, m. unintelligible or childish 
 or lamenting talk ; chatter. [V lap + 
 pra.] 
 
 pra van a, a. prone; sloping, [pra, 1170 
 (cf. 383d 1): cf. irpijvrjs, Doric irpavos, Lat. 
 pronus, 'inclined forward.'] 
 
 p r a v a t , f. slope, of a mountain ; height, 
 83 7 . [pra, 383d 1.] 
 
 pra-vayas, a. having (forward, i.e.) ad- 
 vanced age; aged. [1305 2 .] 
 
 pravartaka, a. causing to roll onward 
 (as a wheel), setting in motion, promoting; 
 as m. promoter, prompter, [caus. of v'vrt 
 + pra.] 
 
 pravada, m. a saying or an on dit. [Vvad 
 + pra.] 
 
 pravibhaga, m. division. [Vbhaj + 
 pra-vi.] 
 
 pravina, a. clever. 
 
 pravinata, f. cleverness, [pravina.] 
 
 pravrtta, ppl. 1. having turned for- 
 ward; directed forward (to a specific 
 object), esp. of an act performed with a 
 view to the attainment of some advantage, 
 i.e. interested, opp. of nivrtta, q.v. ; 2. 
 engaged in. [V vrt + pra.] 
 pravrtti,/. a moving forward or taking 
 an active step, 20 15 ; advance into or ex- 
 posure of one's self to (danger, loc.), 20 12 . 
 [V vrt + pra.] 
 pravrddha, ppl. grown up, great. 
 
 [v'vrdh + pra.] 
 pravega, m. entrance. [Vvig + pra.] 
 
 Ipravrajin, a. going forth or after, in cpd 
 dvi-. [Vvraj + pra, 1183 3 : for mg, cf. 
 (71^) irfpiSpopos, ' lewd woman.']
 
 [197] 
 
 [praptayauvana 
 
 prais [392], /. command. [V gas + pra, 
 639, 225 J ' 2 : cf. ais.j 
 
 praraya, m. respectful demeanor, ['an 
 inclining forward,' fr. Vgri + pra.] 
 
 pra-savya, a. moving to the left; -am, 
 adv. to the left cf. pradaksinam. 
 
 prasada, m. grace; favor; prasadam 
 kr, do favor, be gracious. [V sad + pra, 
 q.v.] 
 
 prasiti, f. continuation; extended path 
 (of life, for example). [V sa + pra, 250.] 
 
 prasiddhi,/. success; celebrity; a being 
 known ; ato me aaiika iti prasiddhis, 
 therefore I am known as "Q.", 36 8 ; cf. 
 prasiddha. [V 2 sidh, ' succeed,' + pra.] 
 
 prastara, m. 1. stramentum, straw; 
 2. rock, 33 10 . [V sir, ' strew,' + pra : 
 for mg 1, cf. Eng. straw w. strew: connec- 
 tion of mg 2 unclear.] 
 
 prastava, m. beginning, introduction. 
 [\lstu + pra, 1148.2.] 
 
 prastuta-yajna, a. having one's sac- 
 rifice begun ; as m. Prastutayajna, name 
 of a Brahman. [V stu + pra.] 
 
 prastha, m. n. table-land on a mountain, 
 ['that which stands forth from the sur- 
 rounding country,' fr. Vstha (333) + pra.] 
 
 pra-svadas, a. (lit. having advanced 
 agreeableness, i.e.) highly pleasing. 
 [1305 2 .] 
 
 prahara, m. a stroke (on a gong, an- 
 nouncing the lapse of a watch), and so 
 a watch (of about three hours). [Vlhr + 
 pra.] 
 
 prahartavya, grdv. to be struck ; impers. 
 one must strike, [do.] 
 
 prahrsta-manas, a. having a delighted 
 heart, [v'hrs 4 pra.] 
 
 V pra (prati; papraii; apras [889]; pra- 
 ta). fill. [Vedic collateral form of \l 1 pr, 
 ' fill,' q.v. : cf . ir\-t)-pr)s, Lat. ple-nus, ' full.'] 
 + a, fill. 
 
 prak, see pranc. 
 
 prakrta, a. natural; usual; common; 
 vulgar; as n. the vulgar (language), lan- 
 guage of the vulgus, the Prakrit, [pra- 
 krti, 1208d : for mg, cf . Ger. deutsch, Old 
 High Ger. diut-isk, '(language) of the 
 people (diot), i.e. German' (as contrasted 
 with the Latin of the Church and with 
 
 the neighboring Romance tongues) ; cf. 
 also f) Kotrf) (sc. StoAe/cTos), ' the Common 
 (dialect),' as opp. to Doric, etc.] 
 
 prag-griva, a. having the neck directed 
 eastward, [pranc (1249a) + griva.] 
 
 prag-daksina, adv. east-southerly, 
 south-easterly, [pranc, 1249a.] 
 
 prangana, n. fore-court, Vor-hof ; court- 
 yard, [pra + angana, 1289a, 193.] 
 
 p r a n - m u k h a , /. -1,0. having the face di- 
 rected eastward, [pranc, 1249a, 149, 161.] 
 
 prajna, a. wise; as m. wise man. [pra- 
 jna, 1208e.] 
 
 pranc [408], /. praci, a. I. directed for- 
 wards ; w. verb of motion, onward, 86 9 ; 
 2. east, eastern (since the Hindus, in 
 naming the cardinal points, began with 
 the east, as we do with the north, and 
 conceived it as before them, as we do the 
 north) ; praci dig, the eastern quarter, 
 101 3 ; 3. prak, ace. s. n. as adv. before: 
 (in place) before one's face, 26 8 ; (in time) 
 formerly, 20 21 , 51 7 ; (in order) before, w. 
 abl. [1128], 59 7 . [pra + afic, 407.] 
 
 pranjali, a. having an anjali (q.v.) before 
 one, i.e. in a posture of reverent saluta- 
 tion, [pra + anjali, 1305.] 
 
 prana, m. breath; vital breath, 60 16 ; 
 vital spirit, 63 21 ; then (like Eng. breath), 
 life; esp. in pi. pranas, life, 15 5 , 2 1 18 , 
 29 8 . [Van + pra, 192b.] 
 
 pranin, a. having life; as m. living being, 
 [prana, 1230.] 
 
 pratar, adv. 1. early in the morning; 
 then 2. (like the Ger. morgen and Eng. 
 morrow) on the next morning, on the 
 morrow, to-morrow, [pra, 1109: cf. irpoo-i, 
 Ger. frtih, ' early.'] 
 
 pradiis, adv. forth to view; w. as [1078 6 ], 
 be visible, appear, reveal one's self. 
 
 prantara, n. a long and lonely road. 
 [' an advanced interval or long distance,' 
 pra + antara, 1289.] 
 
 prapaniya, grdv. to be brought to. 
 [caus. of V ap + pra, 965, 192e.] 
 
 prapta-kala, m. arrived time, favorable 
 moment. [\' ap + pra.] 
 
 prapta-yauvana, a. possessing at- 
 tained adolescence, having reached a 
 marriageable age. [see 1308.]
 
 praptavya] 
 
 [198] 
 
 praptavya, grdv. to be obtained, about 
 
 to be got. [Vap + pra, 964.] 
 prapti,/. a reaching, arriving at. [Vap 
 
 + pra.] 
 pray a, m. 1. a going forth or out; 
 
 2. that which sticks out or is prominent ; 
 the principal part of a thing; the most 
 part; at end of cpds [1302], having for 
 the most part, having for its predomi- 
 nant characteristic, like , 22 16 . [V i + 
 pra, 1148. la.] 
 
 prayagas, adv. for the most part, 
 [praya, 1106.] 
 
 pray as, adv. for the most part, almost, 
 50 22 . [prop. ace. s. n. (lllld) of a neuter 
 noun *prayas, 'that which is predomi- 
 nant' (see praya), Vi + pra, 1151. 1.] 
 
 pravi, a. attentive, heedful, zealous. 
 [Vav + pra, 1156 3 , 355b end.] 
 
 pra 5 a n a, n. 1. the eating; 2. the 
 giving of food, feeding, [in mg 1, fr. 
 V2ag, ' eat,' + pra; in mg 2, fr. caus. of 
 the same.] 
 
 pragitf, m. eater. [V2ag, ' eat,' + pra, 
 1182a.j 
 
 pragitra, n. the portion of ghee to be 
 eaten by a Brahman at a sacrifice, 
 ['that which belongs to the pragitr,' 
 1208b.] 
 
 pragitra-harana, n. vessel for hold- 
 ing the pragitra. [' pragitra-holding,' 
 1271.] 
 
 prasada, m. lofty seat; building on high 
 foundations, palace, 20 l . [V sad + pra, 
 perhaps in the sense ' sit forward or in a 
 conspicuous place ' : see 1087b.] 
 
 priya, a. la. dear, 79 16 ; beloved of, 
 w. gen. (296b), 84 18 ; -Ib. priya,/. the 
 beloved, the wife, 32 6 , 33 10 ; -2a. desired, 
 pleasant ; agreeable, 58 <22 ; priyam kr, 
 do a favor, 3 2 ; 2b. as n. that which is 
 desired, one's wish, 89 1T ; 3. (like Ho- 
 meric <]>l\osl to which one is attached or 
 wonted, 76 8 , 86 8 ; own, 78 9 ; wonted; 
 
 4a. loving, devoted to; 4b. as m. 
 friend. [Vpri, q.v., 1148.3: cf. irpaos, 
 ' gentle ' ; Goth, freis, ace. s. m. frijana, 
 AS. fri, Ger. fret, Eng. free : although the 
 modem mg ' free ' is common also to the 
 Goth, and AS. words, yet the orig. mg 
 
 must have been 'loving or loved, kindly 
 treated, spared' (and so 'free'), as is 
 shown by the Goth, abstract frija-\>va, 
 AS. fredd, ' love ' : for mg Ib, cf . AS. 
 free, ' woman ' : cf . also Old High Ger. 
 Frla, ' The Loving One,' in frld tag, Eng. 
 Fri-day, ' dies Veneris.'] 
 
 priya-vadin, a. saying pleasant things. 
 
 priyapriya, n. comfort and discomfort, 
 [apriya: 1253b.] 
 
 V p r I (prlnati, prinit6 ; priyate ; pipraya, 
 pipriy6; apraisit; prita; pritva). la. 
 prlnati, gladden, show favor to, propi- 
 tiate ; Ib. prinati, have pleasure in ; 
 Ic. prinlt6, be glad or content ; 2. 
 priyate, be glad or content ; have pleasure 
 in ; love, be favorably inclined to ; 3. 
 prit : glad, pleased, satisfied ; loved, 
 dear, [cf . Goth, frijon, ' love ' ; frijonds, 
 AS. freond, ' loving, i.e. friend,' Eng. 
 friend; also AS. freo-\>o, 'a sparing or 
 indulgence, favor, grace, peace,' Ger. 
 Friede, 'peace'; Goth. Frtya-reiks, Eng. 
 Frede-rick, ' grace-ruler, gracious prince ' : 
 see also under priya.] 
 
 priti, /. 1. pleasure; pritya, with pleas- 
 ure, gladly; 2. friendship. [Vpri.] 
 
 priti-vacas, n. friendship-talk, friendly 
 words. 
 
 prenkha, a. rocking, pitching; as m. n. 
 unsteady boat, skiff. [Vinkh +pra.] 
 
 pr6ta, ppl. gone onward, i.e. departed, 
 dead; as m. 1. dead man; 2. ghost. 
 [Vi + pra.] 
 
 pr6tya, grd. after dying, i.e. in the other 
 world (opp. to ilia). [Vi + pra, 992.] 
 
 prestha, a. very pleasant. [Vpri, 470 4 : 
 serves as superl. to priya.] 
 
 presya, grdv. to be sent; as m. servant. 
 [V 2 is, ' send,' + pra.] 
 
 praisya, n. servitude, [presya, 1208f.] 
 
 pr6stha, m. bench or couch. 
 
 prosthe-gaya, a. lying on a couch. 
 [1250c, 1270.] 
 
 plava, a. swimming; as m. swimmer, 
 name of a kind of duck. [Vplu: cf. 
 ir\6os, *7rAoFos, ' a sailing.'] 
 
 Vplu (plavate, -ti; puplava, pupluve ; 
 aplosta ; plosyati, -te ; plutA ; -phitya, 
 -pluya). float through water or air:
 
 [199] 
 
 [bandha 
 
 1. swim; 2. bathe; 3. sail; 4. 
 hover ; fly ; 5. fly off ; hasten away ; 
 
 6. spring ; pluta, floating, and so (see 
 Whitney 78), protracted, of a vowel. 
 
 [cf. ir\fw, *7rA.eFo>, ' float, sail ' ; Lat. 
 pluere, ' rain ' : for mg of pluere, cf. the 
 Eng. intrans. float, ' swim,' w. trans, float, 
 ' cover with water,' and the intrans. bathe 
 w. trans, bathe : 
 
 closely connected w. Vplu is the ex- 
 tended form plud as seen in Lithuanian 
 plud-iti, ' swim, float ' : w. this, cf. AS. 
 fleot-an, ' swim or float about,' Eng. verb 
 fleet, 'float, sail, hasten,' Ger. fliessen, 
 sometimes ' swim,' but usually ' flow ' ; 
 further, AS. fleot, ' raft, ship, fleet,' Eng. 
 fleet, ' ships ' ; also AS. flota, ' ship,' Eng. 
 float, ' a thing that swims on the surface 
 of a fluid, e.g. a raft' (verb float is a 
 denom. of this), Ger. Floss, 'raft'; finally 
 Eng. fleet, ' streamlet or bay,' whence The 
 Fleet, as name of a small affluent of the 
 Thames at London and of a famous prison 
 thereon, and Fleet Street, which crossed 
 The Fleet.] 
 + a , bathe, intrans. 
 
 + sam-a, 1. bathe, Intrans.; 2. 
 bathe, trans. ; inundate ; suffuse, 10 19 . 
 + u d , spring up. 
 + upa, hover unto. 
 
 + vi, float asunder; drift in different 
 directions ; be dispersed ; be lost ; be 
 ruined or dishonored. 
 
 V phal (phalati ; paphala ; phalita ; 
 phulla [958]). burst, split, intrans. [prob. 
 for *spal, of which Vsphat (i.e. *sphalt), 
 ' split, break,' is an extension : cf . Ger. 
 spalten, Eng. split. ,] 
 
 4-ud, burst out or open; utphulla [958], 
 expanded, wide open. 
 
 V phala (phalati). bear fruit ; fruit ; 
 phalitam, impersonally, it is fruited, fruit 
 is borne (by a thing, instr.), 24 2 ~>. [denom. 
 of phala, 1054.] 
 
 phala, n. 1. fruit; 2. then (like Eng, 
 fruit), the good or evil consequences ol 
 human deeds ; result ; reward or punish- 
 ment, [perhaps ' the ripe and bursting 
 fruit,' fr. Vphal.] 
 
 phalavant, a. fruitful; yielding good 
 results, [phala, 1233a.] 
 
 phulla, a. burst open, expanded, bloom- 
 ing, [see Vphal and 958.] 
 
 phullotpala, a. having blooming lo- 
 tuses ; as n. Blooming-lotus, name of a 
 lake, [utpala.] 
 
 ph6na, m. foam. 
 
 V banh or bah (badhd [223 s ] ; cans. 
 banhayate). be thick, firm, strong; caus. 
 make strong, [perhaps for *bhagh: see 
 bahii and bahu.] 
 
 baka, m. heron, Ardea nivea. 
 
 baka-murkha, m. heron-fool, fool of a 
 heron. [1280b.] 
 
 baddha-mandala, a. having con- 
 structed-circles, i.e. ranged in circles. 
 [V bandh.] 
 
 v' bandh (badhnati, badhnit6 [730] ; 
 babandha, bedhe ; bandhisyati, bhant- 
 syati ; baddha ; bandhitum, banddhum, 
 baddhum ; baddhva ; -badhya). 1. 
 bind; fasten; catch; esp. bind (a victim 
 for the gods, i.e.), sacrifice; baddha: 
 bound ; caught ; fastened ; 2. bind to- 
 gether, join ; and then (iv. a specialization 
 of mg like that seen in the Eng. joiner), 
 construct, e.g. a bridge; compose (verses, 
 cf. Lat. serere). [for *bhandh: cf. -rrevO- 
 ep6s, 'connection (by marriage)'; ireTo-^a, 
 *irfv0/j.a, ' rope ' ; Lat. of-fend-ix, ' knot ' ; 
 fld-es, ' string ' ; foed-us, ' league ' ; Eng. 
 bind, band: for mgs, cf. Eng. connection 
 and league w. Lat. con-nectere and ligdre, 
 ' bind together.'] 
 
 + ni, 1. bind; fasten; 2. (bind down 
 together, put down connectedly, i.e.) put 
 into written form, write down, 53 6 . 
 + p r a , bind on ; connect onward, form 
 an advancing connection, form a continued 
 series. 
 
 + sam, bind together, con-nect ; sam- 
 baddha, con-nected, co-herent (w. the same 
 flg. mg as in Eng.}. 
 
 bandha, m. 1. a binding; esp. a binding 
 to the sacrificial post (see bandh 1), sac- 
 rifice; 2. band, string. [V bandh: cf. 
 Eng. band.~]
 
 bandhana] 
 
 [200] 
 
 bandhana, a. binding; as n. bond or 
 bonds. [-Jbandh.] 
 
 baiidhu, m. 1. connection or relation- 
 ship; 2. (concrete, as in Eng.) a connec- 
 tion, relative ; friend ; one who belongs 
 to (a certain caste, for example). [Vbandh, 
 1178.] 
 
 barbara, a. stammering, balbutiens ; as 
 m. 1. pi. foreigners, ot SapjSapoj, name 
 applied by Aryans to non-Aryan folks 
 (as Welsh ana* Walsch by English and 
 Germans to folks that speak a strange 
 tongue) ; 2. sing, a man of lowest origin; 
 a wretched wight, wretch, 30 10 . [cf. 
 &dpf}a.pos, 'foreign, outlandish'; Lat. bal- 
 bus, ' stammering,' whence Spanish 6060, 
 ' blockhead,' Eng. booby.] 
 
 bar ha, m. n. tail-feather. [prop, 'pluck- 
 ings,' v' 1 brh, ' pluck ' : cf . the no less 
 arbitrary specialization of mg in Eng. 
 pluck, 'that which is plucked out after 
 killing a beast, its liver, lights, heart,' 
 and, fig., 'courage.'] 
 
 barhina, m. peacock, 68 2 . [transition- 
 stem fr. barhin, 1223f, 1209c.] 
 
 bar bin, m. (having tail-feathers, i.e. the 
 tail-feathered bird KO.T' f^o-^v,) the pea- 
 cock, [barha.] 
 
 bar hi s, n. grass or straw of Ku9a-grass, 
 spread over the sacrificial ground to serve 
 as a place for the oblations and as a seat 
 for gods and offerers, [prop. ' that which 
 is torn up, vulsum, pluckings,' v'lbrh, 
 ' tear, pluck ' : for mg, cf . Eng. hay, 
 'cuttings,' from hew, 'cut.'] 
 
 bala, n. 1. might, power, strength, force ; 
 balat, forcibly ; 2. then, as in Eng., force 
 (for making war) ; forces, troops, 5 4 . [for 
 *vala : cf . Lat. valere, ' be strong, well.'] 
 
 bala -da [352], a. strength-giving. [1269.] 
 
 balavant, a. powerful. [1233a.] 
 
 baladhika, a. superior in strength, 
 [adhika: 1265.] 
 
 balanvita, a. connected with power ; 
 suggestive of power, [anv-ita, Vi.] 
 
 bali, m. 1. of-fering, tribute; 2. esp. 
 portion of a daily meal or sacrifice offered 
 as tribute to gods, semi-divine beings, 
 men, animals, esp. birds, and even inani- 
 mate objects, 65-. [perhaps fr. vbhr: 
 
 if so, cf ., for the mg, <f>6pos, ' tribute,' w 
 
 <t>fpw, 'bear, bring.'] 
 
 balin, a. mighty, I 3 , [bala, 1230a.] 
 balistha, a. most mighty; very strong. 
 
 [balin, 468 2 .] 
 balonmatta, a. frenzied or crazed with 
 
 power, [unmatta, \'mad + ud.] 
 V bah, see banh. 
 bahis-karya, grdv. to be put outside, 
 
 to be banished. [bahis and kr, 'do, 
 
 put/ 1078 7 .] 
 bahis-krta, ppl. put out, expelled. 
 
 [bahis and kr, 'do, put,' 1078 7 .] 
 bahih-paridhi, adv. outside the en- 
 closure (see paridhi). [1310a.] 
 bahis, adv. [lllld], outside; as prep, out- 
 side of, w. abl. [1128]. 
 bahii, a. much, many; bahu man, consider 
 
 as much, think much of, esteem. [Vbanh 
 
 or bah : cf . TT&XVS, ' thick.'] 
 bahudha, adv. many times. [bahu, 
 
 1104.] 
 bahumana, m. esteem, respect. [Vman 
 
 + bahu.] 
 
 bahumana -pur ahsaram, adv. with re- 
 spect. [1302c2, 1311.] 
 bahula, a. 1. thick; 2. abundant; 
 
 much. [in mg 1, perhaps directly fr. 
 
 Vbah, 1189, and in mg 2, fr. bahu, 1227.] 
 bahulausadhika, a. having abundant 
 
 herbs, [osadhi, 1307.] 
 V badh (badhate ; babadb.6; abadhista ; 
 
 badhisyati, -te ; badhita ; badhitum ; 
 
 -badhya). press hard; distress; beset. 
 
 [see Vvadh: cf. Lat. de-fend-ere, 'press 
 
 or ward off ' ; of-fend-ere, ' press hard 
 
 upon, hurt.'] 
 
 + n i , press down heavily, 
 badh a, a. distressing ; as m. distress. 
 
 [v'badh..] 
 bandhava, m. (having connection or 
 
 relationship, i.e.) a relative ; friend. 
 
 [bandhu, 1208c.] 
 bala, a. young, not grown; as subst. m. 
 
 and f. 1. child (distinguished from 
 
 yuvan, 'young man,' 28 12 ); boy; girl; 
 
 2. applied to a grown person (cf. Eng. 
 
 childish, puerile), child or booby, w. double 
 
 my, 61 21 . 
 balaka, a. young; as m. child, [bala.]
 
 [201] 
 
 [brh 
 
 balapatya, n. young offspring, of men 
 and of animals, [apatya.] 
 
 baspa, m. tears. 
 
 baspakula, a. agitated by tears, [akula.] 
 
 bahu, 7/1. arm; esp. fore-arm; of beasts, 
 the fore-leg, csp. the upper part thereof, 
 101 1D . [for *bhaghu: cf. -x?ix' JS > Doric 
 TTO.XVS, *(j>ax.vs, ' fore-arm ' ; AS. bog, ' arm ' 
 and ' arm of a tree, i.e. branch,' Eng. bough, 
 ' arm of a tree/ Ger. Bug, ' shoulder, hip ' ; 
 also Dutch boeg, Eng. bow, ' shoulder of a 
 ship/ bow-sprit, ' bow-spar.'] 
 
 bahu-yuddha, n. arm-fight, wrestling. 
 
 bahulya, n. abundance; commonness, 
 state of being usual ; concretely, usual 
 order of things; -at, from or in accord- 
 ance with the usual order of things, in 
 all probability, 24 21 . [bahula, 1211.] 
 
 bahya, a. being outside, external; at end 
 of cpds, equiv. to Eng. extra- at beg. of 
 cpds. [bahls, 1211: cf. 1208a 2 end.] 
 
 bid a la, m. cat. 
 
 bimba, m. n. disk of sun or moon. 
 
 bila, n. cleft; hollow. [perhaps fr. Vbil 
 or bid, collateral forms of bhid, ' cleave.'] 
 
 bija, n. seed, of plants and animals. 
 
 buddha, ppl. awakened; illumine; en- 
 lightened ; esp., as m. The Enlightened 
 One, epithet of Gautama of the Cakya 
 tribe, [v/budh: for budh-ta (160), the 
 formal equivalent of -irvd-ro- in &TTV<TTOS, 
 'not having learned.'] 
 
 buddhi, f. 1. insight, understanding, 
 intellect; mind, 13 13 ; wit, wits; 2. 
 mind in the sense of opinion (as in Eng.); 
 belief ; at end of cpds : vyaghra-buddhya, 
 with tiger-belief, (mistakenly) thinking 
 that it was a tiger, 34 15 ; 3. mind in the 
 sense of purpose, resolve (as in Eng.); 
 buddhim kr, make up one's mind, 58 12 ; 
 buddhim pra-kr, mid., put a plan before 
 one's self, decide, 9 11 . [v'budh, 1157: 
 for budh-ti (160), the formal equivalent 
 of TfvffTis, *irjO-Ti-s, ' an inquiring.'] 
 
 buddhi -jivin, a. living by one's mind, 
 employing one's intelligence, intelligent. 
 
 buddhimant, a. possessing understand- 
 ing; intelligent. 
 
 V budh (b6dhati, -te ; biidhyate ; bub6dha, 
 bubudh6 ; abuddha [160] ; bhotsyati, 
 
 -te ; buddha ; b6ddhum ; buddhva ; 
 -budhya). 1. be awake; 2. come to 
 consciousness ; hence 3. notice ; give 
 heed to, w. gen., 76 1 -; 4. notice, i.e. 
 perceive ; and so, become acquainted with ; 
 understand ; 5. rarely, (like Eng. re- 
 member a person, i.e.) present a person 
 with a thing (instr.); cans. 6a. cause 
 to notice or understand ; 6b. teach ; 
 announce to. 
 
 [for *bhudh, orig. ' be awake/ cf. 
 Church Slavonic bud-eti, ' be awake ' : the 
 cognate words of the related languages 
 agree closely in form, but show consider- 
 able diversity of mgs : mg 4 mediates 
 the transition to the idea of the Greek 
 V IT j0, *<pv6, in irv0ecrda.i, ' find out ' : mgs 5 
 and 6 form the bridge to the principal 
 Germanic mgs, ' offer ' and ' command ' : 
 cf . Goth, ana-biud-an, (prob. ' give notice 
 to/ and so) 'command/ AS. beod-an, 
 ' announce, offer, command/ Eng. bid, 
 ' announce, offer in words, offer in general, 
 esp. at an auction, declare, proclaim, com- 
 mand, invite/ Ger. biet-en, 'offer'; (from 
 an entirely different root is Eng. bid, AS. 
 biddan, Ger. bitten, 'pray/ as in bid beads, 
 'pray prayers';) cf. also Eng. noun bode, 
 ' announcement/ whence denom. verb 
 bode, ' foretell ' : for mg 5, observe the 
 analogy of Ger. Jemand bedenJcen, 're- 
 member or take notice of a person esp. in 
 one's will, i.e. make a bequest to.'] 
 + ni, attend to, 58 J ; understand, know, 
 7 9 . 
 
 + pra, come forth (from sleep) to con- 
 sciousness ; awake, intrans. 
 + prati, awake, intrans.; awake, trans., 
 76 3 . 
 
 budh. a, a. awake; intelligent; wise ; as m. 
 wise man. [v'budh.] 
 
 bubhuksa, f. desire to eat, hunger, [fr. 
 desicl. of v2bhuj, 'frui/ 1149 4 .] 
 
 V 1 1 b r h , collateral form of V vrh, ' pluck/ q.v. 
 
 V 2 brh (brnhati, -te ; babarha; brdha ; 
 cans, brnhayati, -te). be thick, great, 
 strong, in brhant, q.v.; cans, make great, 
 strengthen. 
 
 brh, / prayer, conceived as a swelling and 
 filling of the heart in devotion. [ :?brh.]
 
 brhatkatha] 
 
 [202] 
 
 brhat-katha, /. Great-Story, title of a 
 collection of stories ascribed to Gunadh- 
 ya (gunadhya), and abridged by Soma- 
 deva under the name Kathasaritsagara. 
 [brhant, 1249a, 1279.] 
 
 brhad-aijva, a. possessing great or 
 powerful horses ; as m. Brihada9va, name 
 of the sage who narrates the story of Xala 
 to Yudhishthira. [brhant (1249a) + agva, 
 1298 : cf. *Me7aA.-(7T7ros, which is similarly 
 compounded and of like meaning.] 
 
 brhant [450a], a. great; mighty; lofty, 
 [present ppl. of V 2 brh, ' be great.'] 
 
 bfhas-pati, m. Brihaspati, name of a 
 divinity in which the activity of the pious 
 in their relations towards the gods is per- 
 sonified, the mediator between gods and 
 men, and the type of the priest and of 
 the priestly dignity ; later, god of wisdom 
 and eloquence, ['lord of prayer,' brh- 
 as + pati : for cpd, see 1250 and d, and 
 1267d; for acct, Whitney 94b ; for eu- 
 phony, 171 2 .] 
 
 baijika, a. pertaining to the semen; of 
 guilt, inherited from one's father, [bija, 
 1222e and e2.] 
 
 brahma-carya, n. life of holiness 
 (brahman), walk and conversation of a 
 Brahman student (brahman), esp. chas- 
 tity ; religious studentship, the first of 
 the four periods of a Brahman's life, see 
 agrama. [brahman (1249a 2 ) or brahman 
 (probably both) +carya, equiv. of carya: 
 acct, 1272, 1213c.] 
 
 brahma-carin, a. (busying one's self 
 with, i.e.) studying sacred knowledge ; 
 as m. Brahman student, 65 8 ; as adj. esp. 
 observing chastity, 64 u , 100 21 . [brah- 
 man, 1249a 2 .] 
 
 brahmanyk, a. pertaining or attached 
 to the holy life and study (brahman), i.e. 
 pious ; attached or friendly to Brahmans 
 (brahman). [1212dl.] 
 
 brahma-daya, m. sacred-word heritage, 
 heritage consisting of the sacred word, 
 [brahman, 1249a 2 .] 
 
 brahmadaya-hara, a. receiving the 
 sacred word as a heritage. 
 
 brahma-dvfs, a. devotion-hating, god- 
 less, [brahman, 1249a 2 : acct, 1269.] 
 
 braliman, . 1. devotion (conceived as 
 a swelling and filling of the soul with 
 adoration for the gods), worship, in gen- 
 eral, any pious expression in the worship 
 of the gods ; hymn of praise, praise, 73 6 - 10 , 
 744.11. prayer, 76 15 ; 2. sacred word, 
 word of God (opp. to the profane), 60 8 ; 
 
 3. divine science, 57 13 ; sacred learning, 
 theology, theosophy; 4. holy life, i.e. 
 chastity ; 5. the (impersonal) spirit 
 that pervades the universe. [v'2brh, 
 1168. Ic : brahman (n.) is to brahman (m.) 
 as prayer ('supplication') is to pray-er 
 ('supplicant').] 
 
 brahman, m. 1. pray-er, 76 18 ; wor- 
 shipper ; priest, 88 9 , RV. x. 125. 5 ; pray-er 
 by profession, Brahman ; 2. the imper- 
 sonal universe-pervading spirit (brdhman 
 6), personified as a god, i.e. Brahman, the 
 Supreme All-soul, 57 * 8 ; in the theological 
 system, the Creator of the world, 67 17 . 
 [V2brh, see brahman.] 
 
 brahmarsi, m. priest-sage, priestly sage, 
 see 1 14 N. [brahman (1249a 2 ) + f si, 127, 
 1280b.] 
 
 brahmavarcasa, n. pre-eminence in 
 sacred learning or holiness, [for brah- 
 mavarcas, which occurs only in derivs : 
 brahman (1249a 2 ) + varcas, 1315c.] 
 
 brahmavarcasvin, a. eminent in 
 divine knowledge. [' possessing brahma- 
 varcasa,' q.v. : 1232.] 
 
 brahma-vedin, a. knowing divine 
 knowledge, [brahman, 1249a 2 .] 
 
 brahma-han [402], a. Brahman-slaying; 
 as m. murderer of a Brahman, [brah- 
 man, 1249a 2 .] 
 
 brahma,y. -I, a. 1. pertaining to brah- 
 man, divine ; holy, 59 6 ; spiritual, 61 15 ; 
 
 2. pertaining to brahman, in loth its 
 senses, i.e.: 2a. of Brahmans; 2b. of 
 Brahman or (anglicized) Brahma, the 
 Creator, 57 s3 , 58 9 . [brahman and brah- 
 man, 1208a 2 end.] 
 
 brahmana, m. (having to do with brah- 
 man or prayer and praise and divine 
 science, i.e.) priest, 84 15 ; theologian, 
 Brahman, 57 16 ; f. brahmani, woman 
 of the priestly caste, Brahmanee. [brah- 
 man, w. usual shift of acct, 1208a.]
 
 [203] 
 
 [Vbhaj 
 
 brahmana, n. (of a brahman, of a priest 
 or Brahman, i.e.) the dictum of a priest 
 on matters of faith and cultus ; esp. a 
 Brahmana, as designation of one of a 
 class of Vedic writings which contain 
 these dicta. [brahman, w. usual shift 
 of acct, 1208a.] 
 
 brahmana-vada, m. a statement of 
 the Briihmanas. [brahmana.] 
 
 V brii (bravlti [632], brute: the second 
 clause of 632 should read " before the 
 initial consonant of an ending"). 1. act. 
 say ; w. dot. of person and ace. of tiling, 
 10 21 , 96 14 ; iv. ace. of person and either 
 oratio recta (12 5 , 60 7 - 23 , 98") or else ace. 
 of thing (95 13 ) ; speak to, w. ace. of person, 
 3 14 ; speak of, iv. ace. of person, II 18 ; 
 say, i.e. announce, tell; w. vacas, tiros 
 flirelv, 10 18 ; u: punar, answer, 8 3 ; 2. 
 middle, brute (used esp. to introduce oratio 
 recta and without designation of the person 
 addressed], says, inquit, 20 18 , 28 *, 30 5 - 10 - 12 , 
 35 18 . 
 
 + apa, remove (the thought or recollec- 
 tion of a thing or person, ace., from a 
 person, abl.) by speaking, i.e. try to con- 
 sole a person (abl.) for the loss of a thing 
 or person (ace.), 92 14 . [this locution is 
 apparently like the Eng. colloq. phrase 
 "I'll talk it (his opinion) out o/him."] 
 + pra, tell forth, proclaim, 75 13 ; an- 
 nounce, 88 7 ; then (like the Eng. tell of, 
 bad and colloquial tell on), inform against, 
 betray, 93 1; . 
 + prati, speak back to (ace.), answer. 
 
 V bhaks (bhaksati, -te; bhaksita; bhak- 
 situm ; -bhaksya ; bhaksayati [1041 2 ]). 
 (partake, enjoy, i.e.) eat; consume; de- 
 vour, [old desid. of vfbhaj, 108g end: of. 
 bhiks, and for mg, V 2 ag, ' eat.'] 
 
 bhaksa, m. the enjoying, eating or drink- 
 ing ; food ; at end of adj. cpds, having 
 as food, living on . [V bhaks.] 
 
 bhaksaka, m. eater. [V bhaks: see 1181a 
 end.] 
 
 bhaksitavya, grdv. to be eaten. 
 [V bhaks, 964 2 .] 
 
 bhaksin, a. eating. [V bhaks, 1183 8 .] 
 
 bhaksya, grdv. to be eaten, eatable; 
 as n. proper food. [V bhaks, 963.] 
 
 bhaga, m. 1. (he who deals out, i.e.) 
 dispenser ; rich or kind master ; lord, fre- 
 quent epithet of Savitar so 74 17 ; 2. 
 esp. Bhaga, name of an Aditya, from 
 whom welfare is expected and who brings 
 about love and institutes marriage, 89 ; 
 
 3. portion ; lot (w. dur-, su-) ; fortune ; 
 esp. (as in Eng.}, good fortune, happy lot; 
 -4. loveliness. [Vbhaj, 216.1: -1. cf. 
 Old Persian l>aga, 'God'; 807010$ Zcvs 
 $pvyios ; Slavonic bogii, 'God'; for mg, 
 cf. Eng. lord, AS. hldf-ord (Maf-weard?), 
 ' loaf-ward, loaf -keeper ' ; 3. for mg, cf . 
 the relation of /j.6pos, ' lot, fate,' to e^uop-e, 
 'gat a share.'] 
 
 bhagavant,a. 1. fortunate, possessing 
 a happy lot, blessed ; then 2. (like Eng. 
 blessed) heavenly, august, lordly, applied 
 to Indra, Brahma, The Self-existent, the 
 Wood-deity, Sun, Moon, Earth, etc. ; used, 
 esp. in voc., as a form of address, so 94 8 , 
 26 4 . [bhaga.] 
 
 bhagin, a. fortunate; happy; splendid; 
 
 bhagini, f. sister (the happy one 
 so far forth as she has a brother). 
 [bhaga.] 
 
 bhagiratha, m. Bhagiratha, name of an 
 ancient king, who brought the Ganges 
 down from heaven, [perhaps fr. bhagin 
 + ratha, ' having a splendid chariot.'] 
 
 bhagna, see 957c. 
 
 bhagna-bhanda, a. having broken pots 
 or [1308] who broke the pots. 
 
 bhagnaga, a. having broken hopes, dis- 
 appointed. [aa, 334 2 .] 
 
 bhanga, m. a breaking, [v'bhafij, 216. 1.] 
 
 V bhaj (bhajati, -te; babhaja, bhej6 [794el; 
 abhaksit, abhakta [883] ; bhajisyati,-te; 
 bhaktd ; bhaktum ; bhaktva ; -bhaj y a ; 
 cans, bhajayati). 1. deal out; appor- 
 tion ; divide ; then (as Eng. share means 
 both 'give a part of and 'have a part of) 
 
 2. middle, have as one's part, receive ; 
 have or take part in ; 3. give one's self 
 up to; 4. (choose as one's part, i.e.) de- 
 clare one's self for, prefer, 15 3 ; 5. be- 
 take one's self to ; turn to ; go to, 20 10 ; 
 
 6. belong to, be attached to ; revere ;
 
 V bhanj] 
 
 [204] 
 
 love, 9 2; caus. cause to have a share, 
 w ace. of person and yen. of tiling, 83 8 . 
 
 [cf . (pay-flv, ' get one's portion, eat/ 
 w. a specialization of mg like those seen 
 in Eng. partake and take as used with the 
 implied object food or drink, in bhakta, 
 ' thing divided, portion, food,' and in 
 bhaks : akin are the names of the two 
 food-trees yielding eatable nuts (acorns, 
 buck-mast), Qdyds, (p-ny6s, 'oak,' ~La,t.fagus, 
 'beech,' AS boc, Eng. buck-, 'beech-,' in 
 buck-mast, beech-nuts,' and buck-wheat (so 
 called from the likeness of the kernels to 
 beech-nuts), AS. bece, Eng. beech: with hoc, 
 ' beech,' is ident. hoc, ' book,' orig. ' runes 
 scratched on branches of a fruit-bearing 
 tree,' see Tacitus, Germania, x. ; such a 
 branch was called by a name which became 
 in Old High Ger. puah-stap or buoh-stab, 
 and meant orig. ' beech-staff ' , but the 
 word came to be used for the significant 
 thing on the branch, ' the rune or letter,' 
 AS boc-stsef, Ger. Buch-stabe.~\ 
 + a, act., sometimes mid., deal out to, give 
 a person (ace.) a share in a thing (loc.). 
 + v i , part asunder ; divide. 
 + pra-vi, divide. 
 
 + 8am-vi, 1. divide a thing (ace.) 
 with a person (instr.) ; give a share; 
 2. present a person (ace.) with a thing 
 (instr.). 
 
 V bhanj (bhanakti; babhanja; abhank- 
 sit ; bhanksyati ; bhagna [957c] ; bhank- 
 tva ; -bhajya). break. [opinions are 
 divided as to whether Mbhanj, 2bhuj, 
 and bham (see these) orig. began w. bhr- ; 
 cf giri-bhraj, 'breaking forth from the 
 mountains ' : if bhanj does stand for 
 *bhranj, then Lat. frangere, 'break,' 
 nau-frag-a, ' ship-breaking ' (tempestas), 
 and Ger brechen, Eng. break are akin.] 
 
 bhattara, m. lord. [a transition-stem 
 (399) fr bhartr : corresponding to the 
 strong ace. s. form bhartar-am, taken as 
 if it were bhartara-m, is made the nom. 
 s bhartara-s, etc. ; both transition to 
 the a-declension, and assimilation of rt 
 to tt are regular in Prakrit.] 
 
 bhattaraka, m. lord, fi-'.plied to gods 
 and learned men. [bhattara, 1222c 1.] 
 
 bhattaraka- vara, m. lord's day, Sun- 
 day. 
 
 bhadra, a. 1. praiseworthy, pleasing; 
 gladsome, 76*, 90 n ; 2. good, happy, 
 84 3 ; voc. f., good lady, 9 r) ; bhadram, 
 adv., w. kr or a-car, do well, 22 n , 23 19 ; 
 3. favorable, auspicious, 86 8 ; as n., 
 sing, and pi., welfare, prosperity, 20 16 ; 
 w. kr, grant welfare to a person (dat.), 
 bless, 69". [Vbhand, 1188a.] 
 
 bhadra-kft, a. granting welfare; bless- 
 ing. [1269.] 
 
 V bhancl (bhandate). receive jubilant 
 praise. 
 
 bhandistha, a. most loudly or best 
 praising. 
 
 bhaya, n. 1. fear, anxiety; in composi- 
 tion w. the thing feared, 10 12 , 31 9 , 46 5 ; 
 fear of a thing (abl.), 40 w ; bhayat, from 
 fear, 20", 36*, 41 17 ; then, as conversely 
 in Eng., fear (orig. ' danger,' so Job 39. 22) 
 has come to mean 'anxiety,' 2. danger, 
 peril, 25 19 , 42*4. [Vbhl, 1148. la: for 
 mg 2, cf. samdeha.] 
 
 bhayarta, a. stricken with fear, [arta.] 
 
 bhara, m. 1. a bearing, carrying; 2. 
 burden ; weight, 50 J ; 3. mass, quan- 
 tity; 4. (w. specialization as in Lat. 
 pondus, ' weight,' then also ' pound ') a 
 particular quantity or measure, in nir-. 
 [Vbhr: cf. <f>toff-<t>6po-s, Lat. luci-fer(u-s), 
 ' light-bringing ' ; AS. horn-bora, ' horn- 
 bearing, trumpeter ' : for mgs 2-4, cf . 
 Eng. weigh, orig. 'bear up, lift,' as in 
 weigh anchor, AS. wegan, ' carry, bear,' 
 and weight, ' burden,' then ' mass,' then 
 'definite mass.'] 
 
 bharata, a. to be supported or main- 
 tained ; esp. to be kept alive by the care 
 of men, as epithet of the god Agni ; as m. 
 Bharata, name of a patriarchal hero. 
 [Vbhr, 1176e.] 
 
 bhargas, n. radiant light ; glory. [Vbhrj 
 or bhraj , q.v., 216. 1 8 : cf . QXtyos, n., 
 ' flame ' ; Lat. fulgur, ' lightning.'] 
 
 bhartr, m. 1. bearer; 2. supporter, 
 maintainer; lord; husband, 10 21 . [Vbhr, 
 1182b: cf. Lat./ertor, 'bearer.'] 
 
 bhavd, m. the coming into existence. 
 [VbhiL]
 
 [205] 
 
 [bhava 
 
 bhavat-purva, a. having bhavant as 
 first or preceding; -am, adv. [1311], in a 
 way having bhavant first, i.e. with the 
 voc. s. f. of bhavant at the beginning of 
 one's begging formula. 
 
 bhavadaharartham, adv. for your 
 food, ['in a way having your food as 
 object,' 1311, 1302c 4 : bhavant + ahara 
 and artha.] 
 
 bhavaduttaram, adv. with bhavant 
 as last (word of one's begging formula), 
 [ace. s. n. of adj. *bhavad-uttara, 1311.] 
 
 bhavana, n. dwelling, abode, house, 
 [prop. ' an existing,' then ' place of exist- 
 ing,' v'bhii, 1150. la. so Eng. dwelling and 
 abode and Lat. man-sio meant ' a waiting, 
 an abiding,' and then ' abiding-place, 
 maison ' : cf . also mandira and asta.] 
 
 bhavant [456], a. lordly; used in re- 
 spectful address as substitute [514] for 
 pronoun of the second person, and trans- 
 latable by your honor, thou (e.g. 6 23 ), ye 
 (e.g. 7 6 , 12 10 ) ; used in the pi. of a single 
 person to express greater courtesy, 19 * 2 , 
 28 4 - 5 ; used in the voc. s. m. (bhavas, con- 
 tracted) bhos, f. bhavati, as word of 
 address, (lord, master, mister,) sir, lady, 
 [prob. a contraction of bhagavant : cf . 
 
 61 M N.] 
 
 bhavan-madhy a, a. having bhavant as 
 middle (word) ; -am, adv. [1311], with the 
 voc. s. f. of bhavant as the middle (word 
 of one's begging formula). 
 
 bhavitavya, grdv. deserving to become, 
 destined to be, about to be ; impers. [999], 
 maya bhavitavyam, sc. asti, I must be, 
 23 13 ; bhavitavyam, it must be, 27 14 . 
 [Vbhu, 964.] 
 
 V bhas (babhasti [678]; bhasita). chew, 
 bite ; crush ; devour, consume ; bhasita, 
 consumed to ashes, [cf. <pa.n-fj.ri, *<f>acr-fj.ii, 
 ' barley-groats ' : w. the 3d pi. ba-ps-ati 
 cf . the collateral form psa and tyd-/j.a-0os, 
 ' sand.'] 
 
 bhasman, n. ashes, ['consumed': see 
 V bhas.] 
 
 V bha (bhati; babhau; bhasyati; bhata). 
 be bright, shine ; appear. [cf. <^TJ-^, 
 Lat. fa-ri, ' make appear, reveal, say ' ; 
 Eng. ban, 'public proclamation, manda- 
 
 tory or prohibitory,' ' notice (of mar- 
 riage),' etc.: cf. v'vbhas, bhas.] 
 + a, shine upon ; illumine. 
 + u d , shine out, become manifest, 56 20 . 
 + nis, shine forth from (a&/.), Jig. 
 -l-pra, shine forth; begin to be light 
 (of the night). 
 + v i , shine far and wide. 
 
 bhaga, m. part: 1. allotted part, 96 20 ; 
 share, 84 10 ; lot ; esp. happy lot ; 2. in 
 post-Vedic, portion (not lot), 64 22 ; 3. 
 place, spot (cf. Eng. parts, 'regions'), 
 [v'bhaj.] 
 
 bhaga-dheya, n. (bestowal or allotment 
 of a part, i.e. ) portion, 88 7 ; esp. bestowal 
 of a goodly lot, blessing, 82 4 . [1213c.] 
 
 bhagagas, adv. part by part; gradually, 
 [bhaga, 1106.] 
 
 bhagiratha, a. of Bhagiratha; -i, /. 
 the stream (nadi) of Bh., the Ganges, 
 [bhagiratha, 1208f.] 
 
 bhagya, n. lot; fate; esp. happy lot; 
 luck; bhagyena, luckily, [bhaga, 1211.] 
 
 bhajana, n. vessel, dish. [lit. 'receiver,' 
 Vbhaj, mg2: 1150. lb.] 
 
 b hand a, n. 1. vessel, pot; vat; dish; 
 2. generalized (like patra), Utensil ; 
 wares or ware. 
 
 bhanda-miilya, n. capital consisting of 
 wares ; stock in trade. 
 
 bhanu, m. light; beam. [Vbha, 1162.] 
 
 v' bham (bhamita). rage, be angry, 
 [orig., perhaps, 'be agitated,' and so, a 
 Prakritic form of bhram, q.v. : for loss 
 of r, see under Vbhanj.] 
 
 bham a, m. rage, fury. [Vbham.] 
 
 bhara, m. burden. [Vbhr.] 
 
 bharata, a. descended from Bharata ; 
 as m. descendant from Bharata, epithet 
 of Yudhishthira, to whom Brihadacva 
 tells the story of Nala. [bharata, 1208f.] 
 
 bharika, m. carrier, [bhara.] 
 
 bharya, grdv. to be supported or main- 
 tained ; -a, / wife. [Vbhr, 963b.] 
 
 bharyatva, n. condition of being wife 
 or (among animals) mate, [bharya.] 
 
 bhava, TO. 1. the becoming, 61 2 ; exist- 
 ence, 15 18 ; being; in cpds, used as equiv. 
 to the suffix tva or ta, condition of being , 
 35 21 , 49 12 ; -2. (way of being, i.e.) con-
 
 bhavin] 
 
 [206] 
 
 dition; 3. (way of being, i.e.) nature; 
 4. natural disposition ; feeling ; 5. 
 feelings ; heart, 30 18 ; 6. the existent ; 
 existent thing, 66 9 . [V bhu, 1148. 2.] 
 
 bhavin, a. becoming, coming into exist- 
 ence; about to be, destined to be, 18 9 ; 
 future, 38 13 ; -ini, f. a beautiful woman. 
 [Vbhu, 1183 s end.] 
 
 \f bhas (bhasate ; babhase ; abhasista ; 
 bhasita; bhasitum; bhasitva; -bhasya). 
 speak; talk; say. [perhaps for *bhask, 
 a sk-formation fr. Vbha: 182a.] 
 + abhi, speak unto, address, w. ace.; 
 speak, without object. 
 + prati, speak back, answer. 
 
 bh as a, /. speech, language, [vfbhas.] 
 
 bhasita, ppl. spoken; as n. [1176a], what 
 is spoken, the words. [Vbhas.] 
 
 V bhas (bhasati, -te ; babhas6 ; bhasita). 
 shine, [cf. Vbha.] 
 
 + prati, shine over against, make a 
 show, appear well. 
 
 bhas, n. light. [Vbhas: but cf. 1151. lc 2 .] 
 
 bhas-kara, m. the sun. [' light-making ' : 
 171 3 .] 
 
 V bhiks (bhiksate; bibhikse; bhiksisye; 
 bhf ksitum ; bhiksitva). desire to have 
 a share for one's self, wish for ; then (like 
 the Eng. desire, 'express a wish for'), re- 
 quest; beg; esp. go begging for food, 
 [old desid. of Vbhaj, lOSg 1 end: cf. 
 bhaks.] 
 
 bhiksa,/. 1. the act of begging, beg- 
 ging ; 2. that which is got by begging, 
 alms. [Vbhiks, 1149 4 : w. the relation of 
 1 to 2, cf. that of Eng. getting, 'act of 
 getting,' to getting, ' that which is got.'] 
 
 V bhid (bhinatti, bhintte; bibheda, bi- 
 bhid6 ; abhet [832] ; bhetsyati, -te ; 
 bhinnA [957d] ; bhettum ; bhittva ; 
 -bhidya). cleave, cut asunder; break in 
 twain, 102 14 ; smite sore (in battle), 81 5 ; 
 pound, bruise, crush (as a reed), 70 15 ; 
 pierce. [orig. 'split, crush': cf. Lat. 
 ftndo, 'cleave,' perfect fidi; Ger. beissen, 
 Eng. bite; also bit, 'morsel,' and bit, 'part 
 of a bridle ' ; bitter, used of a sword, w. a 
 trace of the orig. mg, Beowulf, 2705 ; 
 caus. bait, in bait a bear, ' make dogs bite 
 him,' and bait a horse, 'let him eat.'] 
 
 -t- pra, split forth or open. 
 
 + vi, split asunder; break to pieces, 
 
 destroy. 
 
 bhiyds, m. fear, [v'bhi, 1151. 2c.] 
 
 V bhisaj (bhisakti). heal. 
 
 bhisaj, a. healing; as TO. healer. [V bhisaj, 
 1147.] 
 
 V bhi (V. bhayate; V. and later, bibheti ; 
 bibhaya ; abhaisit ; bhesyati ; bhitA ; 
 bhetum ; cas. bhisayate [1042f]). fear; 
 be afraid of (abl.) ; bhita, having feared, 
 frightened ; caws, affright, [w. bi-bhe-ti, 
 cf . Old High Ger. bi-be-t, ' trembles,' whose 
 bi- is syllable of reduplication, Ger. bebt, 
 AS. beofa^S, ' trembles ' : the connection of 
 these words with <t>f-ft-o/j.cu, 'am afeard, 
 flee in fright,' and tp6&os, ' fear,' is still a 
 moot-point.] 
 
 bhi [351], /. fear. [V bhi, 348.1.] 
 
 bhita, ppl. feared; as n. [1176a], fear. 
 
 bhima, a. fearful, terrible; as m. Bhima, 
 name of a Vidarbhan king. [Vbhi, 
 1166b.] 
 
 bhima-par akr ama, m. terrible 
 strength or courage. [1264, 1267.] 
 
 bhlma-parakrama, a. possessing 
 bbima-parakrama, 1", 2 3 . [1293.] 
 
 bhima-gasana, n. command or sum- 
 mons of Bhima. [1264, 1267.] 
 
 bhirii, a. timid. [Vbhi, 1192.] 
 
 vf Ibhuj (bhujati ; bhugna ; -bhujya). 
 bend; turn; make crooked, [so far as 
 the meaning goes, the following words 
 may well be taken as cognate: ipvy-e'iv, 
 Lat. fug-ere, ' turn about, flee ' ; AS. bug-an, 
 'bend, turn about' (intrans.), sometimes 
 also 'flee,' Eng. verb bow (as in bow down), 
 ' bend ' ; AS. boga, Eng. bow, ' arcus,' el-bow, 
 rain-bow ; Ger. bieg-sam, ' pliable,' Old Eng. 
 buh-sum, 'pliable, yielding,' Eng. buxom, 
 ' lithe, lively, vigorous ' : but the Ger- 
 manic g raises phonetic difficulties which 
 are not yet satisfactorily cleared up.] 
 
 V 2bhuj (bhunakti, bhunkte ; bubhoja, 
 bubhuj6 ; abhujat ; bhoksyati, -te ; 
 bhukta ; bh6ktum ; bhuktva). 1. en- 
 joy; in Veda, (have use with, i.e.) have 
 the use of a thing (and so w. instr.) ; 
 2. in later Skt. (like Ger. geniessen, cf. 
 also bhoga and bhojana), enjoy esp. food,
 
 [207] 
 
 [v bhu 
 
 K;. ace. ; 3. without object, take one's 
 meal; then 4. enjoy (things that are 
 not food), w. ace., 10 9 ; 5. reap the fruit 
 (of sin) at the hands of a person (gen.), 
 791"; _6. cans, cause to take food, feed, 
 [if f or *bhruj (but this is doubtful see 
 V/bhanj), then cf. Lat. frui, *frugvi, 'have 
 use with' (a thing, hence instr.-abl.), 
 'enjoy'; frug-es, 'fruit'; AS. brucan, 
 ' enjoy' (food or drink), 'use,' Eng. brook, 
 orig. ' use,' now ' put up with.'] 
 + anu, reap the fruit (of good or evil 
 deeds). 
 
 + upa, 1. enjoy, esp. (enjoy food, i.e.) 
 eat; 2. reap the fruit (of good or evil 
 deeds). 
 
 bhuj am-gama, m. serpent. ['going 
 with bending or with crooking': bhujam, 
 grd of V Ibhuj, 995 : for mg, cf. khaga.] 
 
 V bhur (bhurati). make short and quick 
 motions, twitch, jerk, kick, struggle, stir, 
 [cf . <t>vpu, ' stir around, mingle ' ; (p\vw, 
 ' bubble ' ; Lat. fur-ere, ' be agitated, rage ' ; 
 de-frustum, 'boiled off'; Eng. brew, 'boil'; 
 bro-th, 'bouillon.'] 
 
 bhurana, a. (like the Encj. stirring, i.e.) 
 both 1. moving quickly and 2. active, 
 busy. [Vbhur, 1150. 2c.] 
 
 V bhuranya (bhuranyati). be stirring, 
 busy, [bhurana, 1059d.] 
 
 bhu van a, n. 1. being, existence; 2. 
 world ; 3. with vigva : sing., tout le 
 monde ; pi., all beings. [v'bhu, 1150. 
 2c.] 
 
 bhuvana-traya, n. world-triad, i.e. 
 heaven and atmosphere and earth. 
 
 b h u v a s , the second of the so-called " utter- 
 ances" (see vyahrti), bhuvas!, interpreted 
 as air or atmosphere, on account of its 
 position between bhur and svar. [prob. 
 nothing more than the voc. pi. of bhu, 
 ' ye spaces.'] 
 
 v' bhu (bhavati, -te ; babhuva [789a] ; 
 abhiit ; bhavisyati, -te ; bhuta ; bha- 
 vitum ; bhutva ; -bhuya ; caus. bhava- 
 yati, -te). become, 93 3 , 40 21 , 57 3 , 67 21 , 
 3 n ; come into being, 92 17 ; arise, happen, 
 take place ; exist ; very often to be ren- 
 dered simply by be, 2 15 , 3 18 - 22 , 7 1 ; 
 purvam abhud raja, once there was a 
 
 king, 48 * ; tatha bhavatu, so be it, 27 14 ,- 
 so 32 1T ; pranjalir bhutva, (having be- 
 come pranjali, i.e.) assuming suppliant 
 posture, 13 22 ; w. possessive yen., become 
 (the property) of a person; adhipatyam 
 tasya babhuva, lordship became his, he 
 attained lordship, 37 : ; seldom w. dat., 
 96 2l) ; imperative, bhavatu: (be it, i.e.) 
 good ; enough ; what's the use of talking, 
 30 16 , 42 2 ; the thing is clear, 23 7 , 31 6 ; 
 tad bhavatu, never mind that, 34 6 ; 
 
 bhuta, see s.v. ; in self-explaining 
 periphrases iv. ppls, 49 19 , 52 n , 99 21 ; 
 
 desid. bubhusati [1027], desire to be, 
 70 14 . [w. abhut cf. e<t>v, 'became, grew' ; 
 cf. Lat. fu-it, 'was' ; Old Lat. fa-at, 'may 
 be ' ; AS. beam, ' am ' ; Eng. be.~] 
 
 + anu, 1. (perhaps be along after, 
 and so) come up with, attain; 2. ex- 
 perience; enjoy, 24 9 ; 3. (experience, 
 i.e.) make practical acquaintance with, 
 come to understand; perceive; hear, 4 21 . 
 + abhi, be against [1077 8 ], oppress, 
 and so overpower. 
 
 + ud, arise up, make itself perceptible. 
 + pari, 1. be around, surround, en- 
 compass ; 2. (like the Eng. colloq. get 
 around, i.e.) get the better of, prove 
 superior to ; be superior to, and so 3. 
 treat with contempt, 37 s . 
 + pra, 1. come forth into being; 
 arise; 2. be before (others), have the 
 power ; have power, be strong. 
 + vi, (become asunder, i.e.) expand, de- 
 velop ; pervade ; caus. cause to expand 
 or open ; discover ; vibhavita, discovered, 
 found out. 
 
 + sam, 1. (unite [intrans.] together, 
 and so take form, i.e.) be shapen in its 
 old sense, be created ; be born, 97 2 ; come 
 into being ; become ; originate ; sam- 
 bhuta, sprung from, 19 12 ; 2. exist, 
 39 2 ; be, 39 5 ; sambabhuva, am, II V. 
 x. 125. 8; 3. happen, 20 12 ; occur; pass 
 current, 52"; caus. 1. (cause to be 
 together, bring into form, i.e.) make, 
 accomplish; 2. honor, 30 12 ; 3. (bring 
 together, and so, like Eng. con-jecture) 
 suppose, [development of caus. mg 2 
 unclear.]
 
 bhu] 
 
 [208] 
 
 + abhi-aam, (lit. become unto, i.e.) 
 attain (e.g. a condition) by a process of 
 change, enter into (e.g. wifehood), 86 19 ; 
 be born unto (immortality), 97 8 . 
 
 bhu [351-2], a. at end of cpds, becoming, 
 being, existent; as f. 1. a becoming, 
 being; 2. the place (for mg, cf. bha- 
 vana) of being, the world, space ; pi. 
 worlds, spaces (cf. bhuvas) ; 3. the 
 earth, as distinguished from heaven and 
 atmosphere; bhuvi, on earth; 4. the 
 land, lands. [Vbhu, 347.] 
 
 bhuta, ppl. 1. become, been, i.e. past; 
 real; 2. having become, being, used in 
 composition w. its predicate as a grammati- 
 cal device to give the predicate an adj. form 
 w. number and gender [1273c], 6 7 , 19*, 29*, 
 56 15 ; _3. os n. (that which has become, 
 i.e.) a being, divine (90 19 ) or human or 
 other ; creature in general, 21 18> **, 57 18 , 
 63 12 ; created thing, 58 10 ; world, 91 10 ; 
 
 4. as m. n. uncanny being, ghost, gob- 
 lin, 55 19 ; 5. as n. element; panca 
 bhutani, five elements (earth, water, fire, 
 air, ether, of which the body is composed 
 and into which it is dissolved), 66 5 , 68 9 ; 
 so 66 ! 8 . [V bhu : cf . $6-r6-v, ' plant, 
 creature.'] 
 
 bhuta-grama, m. sing, and pi. commu- 
 nity of creatures. 
 
 bhuta-bhasa, f. language of the gob- 
 lins or Picachas. 
 
 bhu-tala, n. earth-surface, ground, earth, 
 [cf. tala.] 
 
 bhuti, f. being, esp. well-being. [Vbhu: 
 cf . (pva-ts, ' a being, nature.'] 
 
 bhu-pa, m. protector of the earth or land, 
 king, prince. 
 
 bhu-pati, m. lord of the land, king, 
 prince. 
 
 bhu-bhaga, m. spot of the earth, place. 
 
 bhu man, n. earth; world. [Vbhu, 1168. 
 Id : for mg, cf. bhu.] 
 
 bhumi,/. -1. earth, 57"; ground, 43 18 ; 
 
 2. land; 3. place, 23 14 ; esp. fit place, 
 proper vessel (cf. sthana, patra), 21 6 , 
 28 3 . [Vbhu, 1167 : for mg, cf. bhu.] 
 
 bhumi-pati, m. lord of the land, king, 
 
 prince, 
 bhumi-bhaga, m. spot of ground. 
 
 bhumi-stha, a. standing on the ground, 
 [stha.] 
 
 bhuyans,a. more; greater, ['becoming in 
 a higher degree, increasing/ Vbhu, 470 2 .] 
 
 bhur, the first of the three "utterances" (see 
 vyahrti), bhur!, O earth. [crystallized 
 voc. sing, of bhu.] 
 
 bhuri, a. abundant; much. [Vbhu, 1191: 
 cf. bhuyans.] 
 
 bhuri-kala, m. longtime. 
 
 bhuri-sthatra, a. having many sta- 
 tions, being in many places. 
 
 bhurni, a. stirring, and so vigilant, jealous 
 (of a god). [Vbhur, 1158.2, 245b.] 
 
 V bhu s (bhusati; bhusayati [1041 2 ]). 
 1. bhusati, be busy for ; 2. bhusayati, 
 (make ready for, i.e.) adorn. 
 
 bhusana, n. ornament. [v'bhus, mg 2: 
 1150.]' 
 
 V bhr (bibharti [645] ; bharati, -te ; T*. 
 jabhara, jabhr6 [789b] ; later, babhara ; 
 abharsit ; bharisyati ; bhrta ; bhartum ; 
 -bhftya). bear (cf. the various senses of 
 bear in Eng.): thus, 1. hold, and so pos- 
 sess; 2. bear (in the womb); abharat, 
 she bare, 85 15 ; 3. endure ; 4. carry, 
 convey; 5. (bear, i.e., as in Latimer) 
 win; 6. bring (as an offering, cf. of-fer), 
 69", 82 14 ; w. udhar, offer the breast, 
 suckle, 78 8 ; 7. (bear, i.e.) support; 
 and so (like Eng. support), furnish sus- 
 tenance to, 22 2 ; maintain, RV. x. 125. 1 ; 
 so also, keep (on hire) ; 8. wear (as Ger. 
 tragen means 'bear' and 'wear'); w. 
 nakhani. wear the nails, keep them un- 
 trimmed, 64 19 . [cf. <>>cp<a, Lat. fero, Eng. 
 bear, 'bear' in its various mgs, Ger. ge- 
 bdren, ' bring forth ' : AS. bear-n, Eng. 
 bairn, 'child,' is an old ppl., lit. 'that 
 which is borne or born ' ; cf . also $<&p, Lat. 
 fur, ' carrier off, thief ' : see also under 
 the derivs, bhara, bhartr, and bhrti ; cf . 
 bhara and the following.] 
 + a p a , carry off, take away, airo^e'po). 
 + ava, bear down (an assailing weapon), 
 ward off. 
 
 + a, bear unto, bring to. 
 + upa, bring unto. 
 
 + ni, only in ppl., nibhrta, (borne down, 
 lowered, i.e.) hidden.
 
 [209] 
 
 [bhratr 
 
 + pra, act. mid. bring forward; offer; 
 
 prabhrta, brought forward, made ready. 
 
 [cf. irpocpepw, Lat. profero, ' bring for- 
 ward.'] 
 vl bhrjj ( bhrjj ati ; bhrsta ; bhrstva). 
 
 rpast ; parch, esp. grain, [cf . <ppvyw, Lat. 
 
 frigere, 'roast ': akin w. v'bhraj.] 
 bhrti, /. the supporting, maintenance. 
 
 [Vbhr, 1157. la: cf. Ger. Ge-bur-t, Eng. 
 
 bir-th'.] 
 bhrtya, m. (one who is to be maintained, 
 
 i.e.) servant, [grdv. of Vbhr, 963b.] 
 bhrga, a. powerful, 
 bhrga-duhkhita, a. (powerfully, i.e.) 
 
 exceedingly pained, 
 bhetavya, grdv. to be feared ; bhetavyam, 
 
 impers. [999], timendum est, one should 
 
 fear, 42 3 ; na bhetavyam, never fear. 
 
 [Vbhi, 964.] 
 bheda, m. fissure, split, breach; a creating 
 
 of divisions, [v'bhid.] 
 bhesaja, f. -i, a. healing; as n. healing 
 
 (subst.). [bhisaj, 1209i.] 
 bhaiksa, n. begging; bhaiksam car, go 
 
 a-begging, [bhiksa, 1208e.] 
 bhaima, a. descended from Bhima; /. -i, 
 
 Bhima's daughter, Damayanti. [bhlma, 
 
 1208f.] 
 bhairava, a. fearful, i.e. awful; as m. 
 
 Terrible, name of a hunter. [bhirii, 
 
 1208c.] 
 
 bho, see 176a (in 2d ed., see 174b). 
 bh6ga, m. enjoyment; use; esp. use of 
 
 food, i.e. eating. [V2bhuj, 'enjoy,' 216. 
 
 1-] 
 bho gin, a. enjoying or having enjoyment; 
 
 esp. enjoying food, well-fed. [not di- 
 rectly fr. vf2bhuj, but fr. bhoga, on 
 
 account of the g, 1230c end.] 
 bh6jana, n. the enjoying, esp. of food; 
 
 the eating; then (like Eng. eating), food. 
 
 [V2bhuj, 'enjoy,' 1150. la.] 
 bhojya, grdv. to be eaten; as n. food, 
 
 supply of food. [V2bhuj, 'enjoy, eat,' 
 
 963d.] 
 bhobhavat-purvaka, a. accompanied 
 
 [1302c2] by bhos orbhavant; -am, adv. 
 
 [1311], with bhos or bhavant. 
 bho-bhava, m. the becoming bhos; w. 
 
 namnam, the becoming bhos of names, 
 
 i.e. the use of bhos instead of a person's 
 real name. 
 
 bhos, excl. of address, thou, sir !, !, ho !, 
 halloo ! ; often repeated, e.g. 6 2;? . [for ori- 
 gin, see bhavant : for euphonic combina- 
 tion, see 176a (in 2d ed., see 174b).] 
 
 bhoh-gabda, m. the word bhos. 
 
 V bhrang or bhrag (bhrangate; bhragyati 
 [767]; abhragat; bhrasta). fall. 
 + apa, fall off; see apabhrasta. 
 
 bhranga, m. fall; ruin; loss, [\fbhranc_.] 
 
 V bhram (bhramati, -te; bhramyati, -te 
 [763]; babhrama ; bhramisyati ; bhranta 
 [955a] ; bhramitum, bhrantum ; bhran- 
 tva; -bhramya, -bhramya). 1. move 
 unsteadily or without aim; wander; roam, 
 36 12 , 23 5 ; flutter, of insects, etc.; 2. 
 move in a circle, rotate ; 3. Jig. be wan- 
 dering (of the mind) ; be agitated or con- 
 fused. 
 
 [the orig. meanings seem to have in- 
 cluded irregular and aimless and rotary 
 motion as applied to water, wind, and 
 fire, and also to have been transferred to 
 the sound thereof : cf . the derivs bhfmi, 
 ' whirlwind,' bhrama, ' whirling flame ' and 
 ' whirlpool,' and bhramara, ' bee ' : cf . 
 ftpfH-fiv, 'rage,' 'roar' (of storm and 
 wave), Ppopos, 'rage, roar'; Lat. frem-erc , 
 ' rage, roar ' ; Ger. brummen, ' hum, rum- 
 ble'; AS. brim, 'surf, surge,' Eng. brim, 
 ' place of surf, edge, margin ' ; Old Eng. 
 brim, ' flame, fire,' preserved in Eng. 
 brimstone, 'fire-stone': see also Vbham.] 
 + pari, wander around. 
 + sam, be much confused ; sambhranta, 
 agitated, perplexed, in a flutter. 
 
 V bhraj (bhrajate, -ti; babhraja ; abhrat 
 [890 or 833?]; bhrajisyate). shine; be 
 radiant ; flame ; Jig. be radiant (with 
 beauty or glory). [cf. (p\fy-ia, 'flame, 
 burn'; tf>\(y-^a, 'flame'; Lat. flam-ma, 
 *flag-ma, ' flame '; fulg-ere, 'shine, lighten'; 
 AS. bide, 'shining, splendid' (of fires and 
 flames), then 'white' (of the dead), Eng. 
 bleak, ' pale ' ; bleach, ' whiten.'] 
 + vi, shine. 
 
 bhratr [373], m. brother. [origin un- 
 known, cf. 1182d: cf. <f>pa-Ti)p, 'brother, 
 esp. one of a brotherhood or clan,' and 
 14
 
 bhratrsthana] 
 
 [210] 
 
 so, ' clansman ' ; Lat. frailer, ' brother ' ; 
 Eng. brother.'} 
 
 bhratr-sthana, a. (having, i.e.) taking 
 the brother's place ; as i. representative 
 of a brother. 
 
 bhruva, for bhru at end ofcpds, 1315c. 
 
 bhru [351], f. brow. [cf. b-<ppv-s, 'eye- 
 brow ' ; AS. bru, ' eye-lid ' ; Eng. brow.~\ 
 
 ma [491], pron. root, see aham. [cf. /te, 
 Lat. me, AS. me, Eng. me.~\ 
 
 V manh (manhate). make great or abund- 
 ant a thing (ace.) for a person (dot.), 
 grant abundantly to. [for *magh, cf. 
 magha : orig. ' be great,' and trans, 
 'make great or high/ and essentially 
 ident. w. Vmah: see under \ruah: for 
 mg, cf. Lat. largus, 'large, liberal/ w. 
 larglri, 'give liberally/ and Eng. large 
 with largess."] 
 
 manhistha, a. granting most abundantly, 
 most generous. [Vmanh, 467.] 
 
 ma-kara, m. the letter m. [Whitney 18.] 
 
 makha, a. jocund, [cf. Vmah.] 
 
 magadha, m. pi. Magadhans, name of a 
 people ; Magadha, name of their country, 
 Southern Behar. 
 
 magadha-dega, m. the land of Magadha. 
 
 V magh, see manh. 
 
 magha, n. liberal gift ; bounty. [V magh, 
 i.e. manh.] 
 
 maghavan [428], a. 1. abounding in 
 liberal gifts, generous; esp., as m., gener- 
 ous (patron), designation of the rich lord 
 who institutes a sacrifice and pays the 
 priests, 88 J cf. suri ; applied in particular 
 to Indra, as Rewarder (of priests and 
 singers), 70 6 , 71 5 , 73 20 , 75 10 ; -2. in the 
 Epos, The Generous One, standing epithet 
 of Indra, 5". [magha, 1234.] 
 
 manga la, n. 1. welfare, luck; 2. any- 
 thing lucky, auspicious, or of good omen ; 
 3. old or traditional usage, 59 18 . 
 
 mangalya, a. lucky, auspicious, of good 
 omen, [mangala, 1212d4.] 
 
 mac-chisya, m. pupil of me, my pupil, 
 [mad + gisya, 159, 203.] 
 
 V majj (majjati, -te ; mamajja ; amajjit ; 
 manksyati, -te ; majjisyati ; magna 
 
 [957c] ; majjitum; -majya). sink under; 
 dip one's self ; dive ; duck or sub-merge, 
 intrans. [perhaps orig. *mazgh, ' get 
 into': cf. madgu, 'duck'; Lat. merg-ere, 
 ' duck ' ; merg-us, ' diver ' bird : for the 
 phonetic relations, cf. majjan, Avestan 
 mazga, Church Slavonic mozgu, AS. 
 mearg, Eng. marrow, Ger. Mark, all mean- 
 ing ' marrow/ and, as meaning originally 
 ' the inmost part or pith/ prob. from this 
 root : see rajju.] 
 + u d , e-merge. 
 - n i , sink down ; dip one's self, bathe. 
 
 majjao, Prakrit for marjara-s ('cat') 
 and for maj-jara-s ('my paramour'). 
 
 mathara, a. perhaps persistent; as m. 
 Mathara, name of a man. 
 
 mani. m. 1. pearl; jewel; 2. water- 
 jar. 
 
 manika, m. large water-jar, [mani.] 
 
 mandapa, m. n. open hall or pavilion. 
 
 mandapika, /. small shed or shop, 
 [mandapa, 1222 and d.] 
 
 mandala, n. disk, circle, ring. 
 
 manduka, m. frog; f. manduki [355b], 
 female frog. 
 
 mat!,/ 1. (thinking upon, i.e., like the 
 Ger. An-dacht, see dhii'j devotion; pious 
 hymn or song of praise, 73 10 , 79 6 ; 2. 
 thought ; thoughts, 49 3 ; purpose, 73 5 ; 
 mind ; intention ; 3. opinion ; 4. un- 
 derstanding, 19 9 ; intelligence. [Vman, 
 q.v. : cf . Lat. mehs, stem men-ti, ' mind ' ; 
 AS. ge-myn-d, ' mind/ Eng. mind.'] 
 
 mati-prakarsa, m. wit-superiority, i.e. 
 a fine dodge. 
 
 mat ay a, m. fish. ['the lively one/ 
 v'mad.] 
 
 V math or manth. (mathnati, mathnite ; 
 manthati; mathati [746]; mamatha, ma- 
 mathus. mamanthus, methiis ; amath- 
 It ; mathisyati, -te, manthisyati ; math- 
 itd ; mathitum ; mathitva ; -mathya). 
 1. stir or whirl ; w. agnim, produce fire 
 by whirling the stick of attrition in a dry 
 piece of wood ; 2. shake, agitate, dis- 
 tress. 
 + pra, agitate. 
 
 v mad fmadati ; madyati ; mamada ; 
 amadit ; madita, matta ; maditum ; mad-
 
 [211] 
 
 [manas 
 
 ayati, -te). 1. bubble, undulate, of 
 water, and as a type of joyousness ; 
 apam urmir madann iva stomas, praise 
 (joyous) as a bubbling water-wave, 81 10 ; 
 boil, be agitated; 2. Jig. be (pleasantly 
 excited, i.e.) glad; rejoice; w. instr., 83 12 ; 
 be exhilarated or intoxicated with joy ; 
 
 3. esp., as describing the life of the 
 gods and the blessed, be in bliss ; w. cog- 
 nate ace., 83 18 ; 4. trans, gladden, rejoice, 
 75 12 ; intoxicate ; matta, drunk ; cans. 
 
 1. act. gladden; 2. mid. take delight, 
 8419. 
 
 [the rather rare physical mg (1) is 
 prob. the orig. one, w. a transfer to fig. 
 use, as in Eng. bubble over with joy or 
 mirth: cf. /xo8-ao>, 'be moist'; Lat. mad-ere, 
 'be soaked, full, drunk'; mat-ta-s (mg 4) 
 and Lat. mat-tu-s, ' drunk ' : see the colla- 
 teral form Vlmand, and Vmud.] 
 4-ud, be out (of one's senses) with ex- 
 citement; be frantic. 
 + pra, take pleasure. 
 
 mad, so-called stem of 1st pers. pron., 494. 
 
 mad a, m. excitement, inspiration, intoxi- 
 cation, 81 4 ; pi. intoxicating drinks, esp. 
 Soma-draughts, 81 1J . [Vmad.] 
 
 madly a, a. mine, [mad, 494 3 , 1215d.] 
 
 madgii, m. a water-fowl, ['diver,' Vmajj, 
 q.v.] 
 
 madhu, a. sweet; as n. sweet food and 
 drink : esp. Soma ; milk and its products ; 
 oftenest honey, 26 18 . [cf. peOv, 'wine'; 
 AS medu, Eng. mead.'] 
 
 madhura, a. sweet; of speeches, honeyed, 
 [madhu, 1226a.] 
 
 madhya, 1. as n. middle; w. nabhasas, 
 middle of heaven, mid-heaven ; madhye : 
 in the middle, 57 12 ; w. gen. [1130] or at 
 end of cpd, in the midst of , in , 18 7 , 
 2 9 ; 2. m. n. (the middle, i.e.) the waist; 
 
 3. as adj., used like Lat. medius : samu- 
 dram madhyam, in medium mare. [cf. 
 fj.<Tffos, */j.f6-jo-s, Lat. medius, Goth, midjis, 
 AS. mid, Eng. mid-, ' middle.'] 
 
 madhya-ga, a. situated in the middle 
 of, tarrying among. 
 
 madhya-carin, a. moving in the mid- 
 dle of (w. gen., 1316 2 ), i.e. moving 
 among. 
 
 madhyam&, 1. midmost, situated be- 
 tween; 2. of middling quality, size, etc.; 
 .3. as m. n. the middle (of the body), 
 waist; 4. as n. the middle (of anything), 
 [madhya, 474: cf. 525 3 .] 
 
 V man (manyate; mene [794e] ; amansta; 
 mansyate, -ti ; mata ; mantum ; matva ; 
 -manya, -matya ; desid. mimansate). be 
 minded : 1. think, believe, imagine, 34 18 , 
 43 16 ; conjecture ; yadi nanyatha man- 
 yase, if thou art not otherwise minded, if 
 thou art agreed, 25 8 ; manye, inserted 
 parenthetically, methinks, 51 13 ; expect, 
 52 n ; 2. consider something (ace.) as 
 something (ace.), 13 12 , 37 7 , 55 2/) , 79 8 ; 
 praptakalam amanyata, considered (sc. 
 it) an arrived time, thought that the time 
 had come, 13 20 ; bahu man, consider as 
 much, esteem, honor; 3. think fit or 
 right, 10 16 ; 4. think upon, set the heart 
 on, 3*; 5. have in mind or view, 88 6 ; 
 
 cans., see manaya ; desid. consider, 
 examine, call in question, [cf. fj.f-fj.ov-a, 
 'mind, i.e. fix the thoughts on, wish, 
 strive' (see man 4); Lat. me-min-i, 'keep 
 in mind'; AS. prcterito-present man, 'am 
 mindful,' and the indirectly connected 
 miKnan, Eng. mean, 'have in mind, in- 
 tend.'] 
 
 + anu, (be minded after another, i.e.) 
 follow another in opinion, assent, ap- 
 prove ; consent ; give leave, w. ace. of 
 person, 49 4 ; permit, 62 6 . 
 + abhi, 1. put one's mind upon, de- 
 sire ; abhimata, desired, agreeable ; 2. 
 have intentions against [1077 8 ], plot 
 against. 
 
 + ava, (mind, i.e. regard downwards, i.e.) 
 regarder de haut en bas, look down upon, 
 like the Lat. de-spicere, despise, treat with 
 contempt. 
 
 manas, n. mind, in its widest sense as 
 applied to the powers of conception, will, 
 and emotion : thus, 1. the intellect ; the 
 thoughts, 8 16 , 10 5 , 66 7 ; understanding, 
 82 17 ; mind, 10 16 , 15", 65i 2 -i 3 ; -2. re- 
 flection ; excogitation ; perhaps the thing 
 excogitated, praise, or (like dhi2) devo- 
 tion, 73 7 ; 3. wish, inclination towards ; 
 
 4. desire; 5. feelings; disposition; 
 
 14*
 
 manisa] 
 
 [212] 
 
 heart, 78 7 . [V man : cf . n*vos, ' mind, 
 spirit ' ; Lat. Miner-va, the goddess ' gifted 
 with understanding.'] 
 
 manisa,/. 1. thought ; understanding ; 
 instr. manisa, adv. wisely; 2. expression 
 of thought and wisdom in saw, prayer, 
 and hymn (cf. dhi2). [Vman, 1197b.] 
 
 man! sin, a. 1. having understanding, 
 wise; 2. prayerful, devout. [manisa, 
 1230a.] 
 
 manu, m. 1. man; collectively (as in 
 Eng., and like Hebrew adam), man, man- 
 kind, 73 19 ; -2. (like Hebrew Adam) The 
 Man tear' f^ox'fi", Manu, father of man- 
 kind ; Manu, as originator of prayer, 
 praise, and sacrifice, 89 2 ; Manu, as type 
 of piety and majesty, 1 10 ; Manu, sup- 
 posititious author of the law-book of the 
 Manavas. [cf. Goth, manna, Ger. Mann, 
 AS. man, Eng. man : the noun is general- 
 ized to a quasi pronoun in AS. man, Ger. 
 man, like Lat. homo in French on, but 
 retains a distinct form as noun in Ger. 
 Mann (as homo does in French homme) : 
 cf. also Mannus, mythical ancestor of the 
 West-Germans (Tacitus, Germania, ii.) : 
 perhaps related are Mtw-s and MiVo>s, 
 mythical Greek forefathers : the deriva- 
 tion of manu fr. Vman, 'think,' is unobjec- 
 tionable so far as the form goes (1178b), 
 but the usual explanation of manu as 
 'the thinker' defies common sense.] 
 
 manu-ja, m. man. [prop, adj., 'Manu- 
 born, sprung from Manu/ 1265.] 
 
 manujendra, m. (prince of men, i.e.) 
 prince, king, 1 5 . [manuja + indra, 1264.] 
 
 manusya, 1. a. human; 2. as m. man. 
 [manus, 1212d 1 : cf. manusa : for mg 2, 
 see manava.] 
 
 manusyatva, n. condition of being man. 
 [manusya, 1239.] 
 
 manusya-devd, m. human god [1280 1 ] 
 or man-god [1280b] or god among men 
 [1264], i.e. Brahman, 95 *. 
 
 manusya-loka, m. world of men. 
 
 manus, m. man. [cf. manu and 1154.] 
 
 mano-ratha, m. wish. [lit. 'heart's 
 joy,' manas + 2 ratha.] 
 
 mano-hara, a. (heart-taking, i.e.) cap- 
 tivating. 
 
 mantu, m. counsel, i.e. deliberation; then 
 (like Eng. counsel), result of deliberation, 
 plan, intent. [Vman, 1161a.] 
 
 mantra, i. 1. thought; esp. thought as 
 uttered in formal address, in prayer or 
 song of praise (see dhi2), or in pious text; 
 
 2. usual designation of the hymns and 
 texts of the Vedas ; 3. later (when 
 these Vedic texts came to be used as 
 magic formulas), spell, charm; 4. like 
 mantu, deliberation, plan, [v'man, 1185b: 
 for mg 3, cf. Lat. carmen, ' solemn utter- 
 ance' (see v'gans), then 'magic spell,' 
 whence Eng. charm.'] 
 
 mantra-da, a. giving, i.e. imparting the 
 sacred texts, i.e., as m., Veda-teacher. 
 
 V mantraya (mantrayate [10G7]). 1. 
 speak with solemn or formal utterance ; 
 
 2. deliberate. [denom. of mantra 
 see its various mgs.] 
 
 + anu, follow with a mantra, accompany 
 
 with a sacred text, like Lat. prosequi 
 
 vocibus. 
 
 + abhi, address a spell unto; charm or 
 
 conjure. 
 
 + a , speak unto ; esp. bid farewell to, 
 
 56. 
 
 + ni, invite, [for mg, cf. (under Vbudh) 
 
 Eng. bid, 'make formal announcement 
 
 of,' and then 'invite.'] 
 
 sam-ni, invite together, 4 2D . 
 mantravant, a. accompanied by sacred 
 
 texts, [mantra, 1233.] 
 mantr a-varna, m. the wording of a 
 
 sacred text. 
 V Imand (mandati: mamanda; amand- 
 
 it). gladden, 74*. [collateral form of 
 
 V mad.] 
 V 2m and or mad (mamatti ; madati). 
 
 tarry, loiter. [amplification of *man, 
 
 'remain,' the congener of p.ev-(iv, Lat. 
 
 man-ere, 'remain.'] 
 m a n d a , a. 1. tarrying, slow ; 2. 
 
 (sluggish, and so) weak ; insignificant ; 
 
 little; 3. (like Eng. colloq. slow) stupid. 
 
 [V2mand, 'tarry.'] 
 manda-bhagya, a. having little luck, 
 
 unlucky. 
 
 mandara, m. Mandara, a sacred moun- 
 tain.
 
 [213] 
 
 [masi 
 
 mandadara, a. having little regard for 
 (w. loc., 303a), careless about, [manda + 
 adara.] 
 
 mandara. m. n. 1. coral tree, Erythrina 
 indica; 2. m. used, perhaps, as name of 
 a man, Mandara. 
 
 mandira, n. dwelling; house; palace. 
 fV 2 mand, 'tarry,' 1188e: prop, 'a wait- 
 ing, an abiding,' and then 'abiding-place, 
 mansion': cf. /j.dvS-pa, 'fold, stable,' later 
 ' monastery ' : for mg, observe that Lat. 
 mansio, stem man-si-on- (fr. man-ere, 
 'tarry'), meant first 'a tarrying,' and 
 then 'a stopping-place, mansion,' French 
 ' maison ' ; see also bhavana.] 
 
 manmatha, m. love; the god of love, 
 ['the agitator, distresser,' intensive for- 
 mation fr. Vmath or nianth, 1148.4, 
 1002b.] 
 
 manman, n. thought; esp. (like dhi2) 
 An-dacht, devotion, prayer or praise. 
 [Vman, 1168.1a.] 
 
 man-mahsa, n. my flesh, [mad, 494.] 
 
 man yd, m. 1. mood, i.e. temper of 
 mind; then 2. (like Eng. mood) anger, 
 heat of temper. [Vman, 1165a.j 
 
 mama, see 491 and ma. 
 
 may a, 1. called a derivative suffix (see 
 1225, 161 3 ), but really a nomen actionis 
 meaning formation, make, used as final 
 element of a cpd, having as its make, 
 made of , consisting of , containing 
 in itself ; 2. nomen agentis, maker, 
 former; esp. Maya, The Former, name of 
 an Asura, artificer of the Daityas, and 
 skilled in all magic, 45. [fr. mi, weak 
 form (cf. 954c, 250) of VI ma, 'measure, 
 arrange, form,' 1148. la and b: so the 
 Eng. deriv. suffix -hood, -head, Ger. -heit, 
 was once an independent noun, see under 
 ketu.] 
 
 may as, n. invigoration, refreshment, cheer, 
 gladness, joy. [prop, 'a building up,' fr. 
 V 1 mi, ' establish,' or fr. the weak form mi 
 (cf. 954c, 250) of the kindred and partly 
 equivalent V 1 ma, ' measure, arrange, 
 form, build,' 1151. la.] 
 
 mayo-bhu [352], a. being for or conduc- 
 ing to mayas, i.e. refreshing, gladdening. 
 
 mar a, m. death. [\/mr, 'die.'] 
 
 marakata, n. smaragd or emerald, [cf. 
 0-fj.dpa-ySos, whence Lat. smaragdus, Old 
 French esmeralde, French e'meraude."] 
 
 marana, n. death. [V 1 mr, ' die.'] 
 
 marlci, f. 1. mote or speck in the air, 
 illuminated by the sun ; 2. later, beam 
 of light, [cf. mariit.] 
 
 marici-mala,/. garland of rays. 
 
 maricimalin, a. having a garland of 
 rays, [maricimala, 1230a.] 
 
 m a r li , m. a waste ; desert, [perhaps ' the 
 dead and barren' part, whether of land 
 or water, V 1 mr, ' die ' : cf . 'A./j.(j>l-jjiapos, 
 son of Poseidon; Lat. mare, 'sea'; AS. 
 mere, ' sea, lake, swamp,' Eng. mere, ' lake, 
 pool,' Winder-mere, mer-maid ; AS. mor, 
 Eng. moor, ' marshy waste, heath.'] 
 
 mariit, m. pi. the Maruts or gods of the 
 storm-wind, Indra's companions, selections 
 xxxv., xlii., xlvii., Ixvii. [perhaps ' the 
 flashing ones,' as gods of the thunder- 
 storm, and connected w. a V*mar seen 
 in fj.ap-/j.aip-(i>, 'flash.'] 
 
 maru-sthall,/. desert-land, desert. 
 
 martavya, grdv. moriendum ; imperso- 
 nally, see 999. [V 1 mr, ' die,' 964.] 
 
 m arty a, m. like Eng. a mortal, i.e. a 
 man ; as a. mortal. 
 
 mar dan a, m. crusher; fig., as in Eng., 
 subduer. [Vmrd, 1150. la.] 
 
 marma-jna, a. knowing the weak spots. 
 [marman.] 
 
 mar man, n. mortal part, vulnerable or 
 weak spot, lit. and fig. [cf . V 1 mr, ' die.'] 
 
 marya, m. man, esp. young man; pi. (like 
 Eng. men, Ger. Mannen), servants, at- 
 tendants, henchmen. 
 
 marsa, m. patient endurance. [Vmrs.] 
 
 mala, n. m. smut; impurity, physical and 
 moral, [cf . p.4\-av, ' dark ' ; Lat. malu-s, 
 'bad.'] 
 
 malla, m. -1.pl. the Mallas, a people ; 
 2. professional boxer and wrestler ; one 
 who engages in the irayKpdnov, pancra- 
 tiast. 
 
 magaka, m. biting and stinging insect, 
 gnat. 
 
 masi, f. 1. bone-black; 2. ink, made 
 of lac or of almond-charcoal boiled in 
 cow's urine.
 
 masyabhava] 
 
 masy-abhava, m. lack of ink. 
 
 V mah (mahate; mamahe [786]; mahita; 
 mahitva; cans, mahayati, -te). orig. be 
 great or high, and so 1. mid. be glad, 
 rejoice; then (trans, make great or high, 
 and so) 2. act. elate; gladden; exalt 
 (mid.), 74 8 ; 3. esteem highly, honor. 
 
 [for *magh, cf. magha, also v'manh: 
 for orig. mg, cf. participial adj. mahant, 
 ' great ' : for mgs 1 and 2, cf . American 
 colloq. use of high as 'high in spirit, 
 elated, esp. intoxicated': 
 
 with orig. v'*magh in the mgs 'be 
 great, mighty, i.e. powerful or able,' trans, 
 'make able, help,' cf. pox-\6s, 'helping- 
 bar, lever'; /ir/x-aHj, 'means'; Goth, mag, 
 AS. mseg, 'am able,' Eng. may: 
 
 with the collateral form *mag, whose 
 deaspiration is prob. Indo-European, cf. 
 fJLty-as, Lat. mag-nus, AS. mic-el, Eng. 
 mickle, ' great.'] 
 
 mah, /. mahi, a. great; mighty, 78 8 ; 
 strong ; mahi, as subst. the great, i.e. the 
 earth; for mg, cf. prthivi. [cf. Vmah: 
 see 400 2 .] 
 
 mah a, a. great. [Vmali.] 
 
 mahant [450b], f. mahati, 1. a. great 
 (in space, time, quantity, or quality, and 
 so), large, long, mighty, important; sig- 
 nificant, 6 n ; as m. great or noble man, 
 19 21 , 36 10 ; -2. m. (sc. atman), the intel- 
 lect, 66 9 , 67 17 . [orig. ppl. of Vmah, q.v.] 
 
 maharsi, m. great Rishi. [maha + rsi.] 
 
 mahas, n. greatness; might; glory; glad- 
 ness; mahobhis, adv.: with power, 79 u ; 
 joyfully, 73 13 . [Vmah, see its various mgs.] 
 
 mah a, used as prior member of a cpd, instead 
 o/mahant, 1249b, 355a. [Vmah.] 
 
 maha-katha, f. great tale. 
 
 maha-kavi, m. great poet. 
 
 maha-kula, n. (great, i.e.) noble family. 
 
 maha-guru, a. exceedingly reverend 
 [1279] ; as m. person worthy of unusual 
 honor. 
 
 maha-tapas, a. (having, i.e.) practising 
 great austerity; asm. Great-penance, name 
 of a sage. 
 
 mahatman, a. having a (great, i.e.) noble 
 nature, noble ; magn-animus. [maha + 
 atman.] 
 
 maha-dhana, a. having great wealth, 
 very rich. 
 
 maha-panka, m. n. (great, i.e.) deep 
 mire. 
 
 maha-pandita, a. exceedingly learned 
 [1279]. 
 
 mahaparadha, m. great crime, [maha 
 -f aparadha.] 
 
 maha-praj na, a. very wise [1279]. 
 
 maha-bahu, a. great-armed [1294], i.e. 
 stout-armed. 
 
 maha-bhuta, n. grosser element, i.e. 
 earth, air, fire, water, or ether (as dis- 
 tinguished from a subtile element or rudi- 
 mentary atoms). 
 
 maha-manas, a. great-minded. 
 
 maha-muni, m. great sage. 
 
 maha-yajna, m. great sacrifice, 59 6 w. 
 
 maha-yagas, a. having great glory, 
 famous. 
 
 maha-raja, m. great prince. [raj an, 
 1315a.] 
 
 maha-rava, m. great howl. 
 
 maha-vikrama, a. having great might 
 or courage ; as m. Great-might, name of a 
 lion. 
 
 maha-vira, m. great hero. 
 
 maha-vrata, n. great vow. [1267.] 
 
 maha-vrata, a. having a mahavrata, 
 having undertaken a great vow. [1295.] 
 
 maha-sinha, m. great lion. 
 
 mahi, a. great. [Vmah.] 
 
 mahitva, n. greatness, might. [1239.] 
 
 mahiman, m. might; instr. mahina, see 
 425e. [Vmah, 1168. 2b.] 
 
 mahisa, a. mighty; mahiso mrgas, the 
 powerful beast, i.e. buffalo, RV. ; as m., 
 without mrga, buffalo, 55 3 ; mahisi, /. 
 [acct, c/!362b 2 ], the powerful one, as desig- 
 nation : of a woman of high rank ; of the 
 first wife of a king, I 16 ; sometimes of any 
 queen of a king, 50 1 . [Vmah, 1197b.] 
 
 mahi, see under mah. 
 
 mahi-ksit, m. earth-ruler, king. 
 
 mahl-pati, m. earth-lord, king. 
 
 mahi-pala, m. earth-protector, king. 
 
 V mahiya (mahiyate). be glad, happy, 
 blessed, [prop, 'be great, high,' denom. 
 of mahi (1061), with the modification of 
 mg mentioned under Vmah, q.v.]
 
 [215] 
 
 [mada 
 
 mah end r a, m. 1. Great-Indra ; 2. 
 great chief, 10 15 (w. mg 1 also), [maha 
 + indra.] 
 
 mahendratva, n. the name or dignity 
 of Great-Indra. [1239.] 
 
 mahegvara, m. great lord; esp., as pi., 
 designation of the four lokapalas, Indra, 
 Yama, Agni, and Varuna. [maha + 
 igvara.] 
 
 mahaujas, a. having great strength, 
 mighty, [maha, + ojas.] 
 
 V 1m a (minute [660-3]; mamau, mame; 
 amasta ; mitd [954c] ; matum ; mitva ; 
 -maya). 1. measure; 2. measure 
 with, compare ; 3. mete out ; 4. ar- 
 range, form; build; make, 72 2 . [for 1, 
 cf . fj.4-rpov, ' measure ' ; Lat. ni-mi-us, ' not 
 to be measured, excessive'; for 4, cf. 
 fj.d-p-ri and Lat. ma-nu-s, ' former, i.e. hand ' ; 
 ev-/j.api')s, 'handy, easy': see also the col- 
 lateral form VI mi, 'build, set up,' and 
 under matf and mas.] 
 + anu, (form after, i.e.) re-create in 
 imagination, conceive. 
 -f- u p a , measure with, compare. 
 4- nis, fashion or make out of (abl.); con- 
 struct. 
 
 4- vi-nis, lay out (garden). 
 -i- pari, measure around, limit, 
 -f pra, measure. 
 
 4-prati, make (so as to be a match) 
 against, cf. pratima. 
 
 4-vi, measure out; then (like Eng. meas- 
 ure), pass over, traverse (the sky). 
 
 V 2 ma or mi (mimati [660-3]; mimaya). 
 bellow, 
 -f vi, bellow or cry aloud. 
 
 m a , adv. and conj. not, mostly in prohibitions 
 [1122b] : 1. regularly w. subjunctive, i.e. 
 augmentless form of a past tense [579-80], 
 76 16 , etc.; in order that not, 53 7 ; 2. w. 
 imperative, 22 2 , 35", 50 4 ; 3. rarely w. 
 optative, 79 17 ; 4. w. evam, not so, 38 5 ; 
 5. w. u, mo, see u. [cf. ^, Elian p.a, 
 'not, that not.'] 
 
 mans and mansa [397], n. meat, flesh ; used 
 also in pi. [cf. Church Slavonic meso, 
 Prussian mensa, 'flesh': cf. 64 7 N.] 
 
 mansatva, n. the being meat, the etymo- 
 logical meaning of mansa. [1239.] 
 
 mansa-ruci, a. having pleasure in meat, 
 greedy for meat. 
 
 mansa-lubdha, a. desirous of meat 
 [Vlubh.] 
 
 mangalya, a. bringing happiness, pleas-. 
 ant. [mangala.] 
 
 maciram, adv. (not long, i.e.) shortly, 
 straightway, [ma + ciram, 1122b 4 .] 
 
 mathara, m. Mathara, name of a man. 
 [mathara, 1208f.] 
 
 manava, m. boy, youngster, [not akin 
 w. manu, ' man ' : perhaps for * malnava : 
 cf. Prussian malnyx, 'child.'] 
 
 manavaka, m. manikin, dwarf, [man- 
 ava, 1222b.] 
 
 matarigvan, m. Matari^van, mystic 
 name of Agni. 
 
 matula, m. mother's brother. [matr, 
 1227 2 : cf. fj.-f)Tpws, Doric Carpus, 'mother's 
 brother.'] 
 
 matf [373], f. mother; applied also to the 
 earth, the Dawn, the sticks of attrition 
 (82 9 ). [perhaps 'the one who metes 
 out' food to the household, or else 'the 
 former' of the child in the womb, 
 VI ma, 'measure or mete,' 'form,' 1182d: 
 cf. /j.-firrip, Doric fj-ar^p, Lat. mater, 
 AS. moder, Eng. mother ; also pata, 
 ' mother.'] 
 
 matrtas, adv. from the mother, on the 
 mother's side, [matr, 1098b.] 
 
 matrvat, adv. as one's mother. 
 
 matr a, f. 1. measure; at end of adj. 
 cpds [see 1302c3], having as its measure, 
 so and so long or high or large, etc. : 
 janu-matra, knee-deep ; vyama-matra, a 
 fathom broad; 2. the full measure, 
 i.e. limit ; at end of adj. cpds, having as 
 its limit, not more than ; and then, these 
 adj. cpds being used substantively (1247 
 III 4 ), merely, only, mere , 27 , 
 50 9 ; such a cpd as first member of an- 
 other cpd, 34 8 , 37 6 ; hence 3. from 
 this frequent use of matra at end of 
 cpds in the form matra (334 2 ), the quasi- 
 stern, matra, n. measure, i.e. height, 
 depth, length, breadth, distance (43 12 ). 
 [V 1 ma, ' measure,' 1185c : cf. 
 ' measure.'] 
 
 mada, m. revelry, [v/mad.]
 
 1 mana] 
 
 [216] 
 
 1 mana, m. n. 1. opinion; 2. (like the 
 Eng. opinion) estimation, esp. good esteem ; 
 -3. honor. [Vman, 1148.2.] 
 
 2 mana, m. like the Eng. building, and 
 . so structure, castle. [V 1 ma, ' make, 
 
 bund,' 1150. la.] 
 
 3 mana, m. 1. like the obs. Eng. maker, 
 trotirrfo, poet; 2. as name of Agas- 
 tya's father, Mana. [do.] 
 
 man a -da, a. (giving, i.e.) showing honor 
 (to others); as m. honor-giver, address of 
 a woman to her lover. 
 
 V ma nay a (manayati). honor, [denom. 
 of 1 mana: cf. 1067.] 
 
 manava, 1. a. human; descended from 
 man or Manu (see manu); 2. as m. one 
 of the sons of men, a man; 3. m. 
 Manava, name of a school of the Yajur- 
 veda. [manu, 1208c: for mgs 1 and 2, 
 observe that Old High Ger. mennisch, 
 though prop, an adj. fr. man, 'homo,' and 
 meaning 'humanus/ is used also as a 
 subst. meaning ' man,' and used in its Ger. 
 form Mensch, 'man,' as subst. only: cf. 
 also nara, manusya, manusa.] 
 
 manava-dharmagastra, n. law-book of 
 the Manavas or Manava-school. 
 
 manasa, a. sprung from the mind; of the 
 mind, [manas, 1208a.] 
 
 manusa, f. -i, a. pertaining to man, hu- 
 man; as m. man (cf. manava). [manus, 
 1208a end : cf . manusya.] 
 
 manusa-daivika, a. of men and of 
 gods. [1257.] 
 
 mandarya, a. descended from Mandara ; 
 as m. descendant of M. [mandara, 1211.] 
 
 m a n y a , a. descended from a poet or from 
 Mana ; as m. the poet's son or Mana's son. 
 [3 mana, 1211.] 
 
 mama, a. lit. of mine; voc. s. m., as word 
 of address of a dog to an ass, uncle, 
 [mama (491), 1208f.] 
 
 may a, f. 1. (a working, ana" so) a 
 power ; esp., in Veda, supernatural or 
 wonderful power ; wile ; 2. later, trick ; 
 illusion. [V 1 ma, ' make, i.e. have effect, 
 work,' 1149, cf. 258.] 
 
 maya-kapota, m. illusion-pigeon. 
 
 mayakapota- vapus [418], a. having 
 the form of a phantom-pigeon. 
 
 may in, a. wily, [maya.] 
 mayobhavya, n. gladness, happiness. 
 
 [mayobhu, 1211, cf. 1208c.] 
 mar a, m. a killing, murder. [Vlmr, 
 
 'die.'] 
 marakata,/! -I, a. smaragdine, emerald 
 
 (adj.). [marakata, 1208f.] 
 mar ana, n. a killing; w. pra^ap, incur 
 
 killing, get killed, [caus. of V 1 mr, ' die/ 
 
 1150. lb.] 
 maratmaka, a. having murder as one's 
 
 nature, murderous. [mara + atmaka, 
 
 1302.] 
 marga, a. of or pertaining to game or 
 
 deer ; as m. track of wild animals, slot ; 
 
 then, in general, track, way, path, [mrga, 
 
 1208f.] 
 marja, adj. subst. cleaning, a cleaner, in 
 
 cpds. [Vmrj, 627 1 - 2 .] 
 mar jar a, TO. cat. ['the cleaner,' so 
 
 called from its habit of cleaning itself 
 
 often : fr. marja : formed like karmara, 
 
 1226b.] 
 malava, m. Malwa, name of a country in 
 
 west-central India. 
 
 malava-visaya, m. the land of Malwa. 
 m a 1 a , f. crown, wreath, garland, 
 malin, a. crowned, wreathed, [mala.] 
 malya, n. crown, wreath, [mala, 1210.] 
 mas [397], m. 1. moon, see candra-mas; 
 
 then (as in Eng.), a moon, i.e. month. 
 
 ['the measurer/ VI ma, 1151. lc 2 : cf. 
 
 HT}-vT], ' moon ' ; Lat. Mena, ' menstruationis 
 
 dea ' ; Goth, mena, AS. mono, Eng. moon ; 
 
 AS. monan dseg, 'dies Lunae/ Eng. Mon- 
 day; also ft,i\v, stem /j.evs, Lat. mens-i-s, 
 
 ' month ' ; AS. mdnaft, prop. ' a lunation/ 
 
 Eng. month."] 
 mas a, TO. 1. moon, see purna-masa; 2. 
 
 month, [transition-stem fr. mas, o99.] 
 masa-traya, n. month-triad, three 
 
 months, 
 masa-aatka, n. month-hexade, six 
 
 months. 
 
 mahina, a. glad, blithe, [\rnah, 1177b.] 
 V 1 mi (min6ti, minute; mimaya; mita; 
 
 -mitya). build; establish; setup (a post, 
 
 pillar), [collateral form (250a) of VI ma, 
 
 ' make, build/ q.v. : cf . mit and Lat. me-ta, 
 
 ' post ' ; mu-n/s, ' wall.']
 
 [217] 
 
 [Vmih 
 
 V2mi o?- mi (minati, minati; mimaya, 
 mimye; amesta; mesyate; mita; -mlya). 
 minish, lessen ; minish, bring low ; bring 
 to nought. [cf. fjii-vv-ta, Lat. mi-nu-o, 
 ' lessen ' ; AS. positive min, ' small ' ; Old 
 High Ger. comp. minniro, *minv-iro, Middle 
 High Ger. minre, Ger. minder, ' less ' ; 
 neiwv, *(j.ri-i<av, ' less ' ; Lat. min-or, ' less ' ; 
 per-mi-t-ie-s, ' ruin ' : fr. AS. min comes 
 perhaps Eng. minnow, ' very small fish.'] 
 + p r a , bring to nought ; pass, come to 
 nought, perish. 
 
 V migh, see mih. 
 
 mit, f. post, pillar, prop. [V 1 mi, ' set up/ 
 383b 3 : for mg, cf . Eng. post, Lat. postis, 
 with ponere, ' set up.'] 
 
 mitra, 1. m. friend, comrade (Vedic 
 only) ; esp. 2. Mitra, name of an Aditya; 
 
 3. n. friendship (rare and Vedic only); 
 
 4. n. friend (commonest meaning and 
 gender). 
 
 mitrabandhu-hina, a. destitute of 
 friends and relatives. [1265, 1252.] 
 
 mitra-labha, m. Friend-acquisition, as 
 title of the first book of the Hitopade9a. 
 
 mitratithi, m. Mitratithi, name of a 
 man. [' having Mitra as his guest ' or 
 else ' guest of M.' : the mg of the cpd 
 depends on its accent (see 1302 : and 
 1267 J ), and this is not known: mitra + 
 atithi.] 
 
 mitra-vdruna, nom. du. m. Mitra and 
 Varuna. [see 1255 and a, and Whitney 
 94a.] 
 
 V mith (methati ; mime'tha ; mithita ; 
 mithitva). 1. meet together as friends, 
 associate with, pair ; 2. meet as rivals, 
 dispute, wrangle, altercari. [observe that 
 Eng. meet is just such a vox media and 
 means both 'harmonize' and 'have a 
 conflict.'] 
 
 mit has, adv. together, mutually, among 
 each other; in turns. [V mith, 11 lid.] 
 
 mitliu, a. wrong; false; used only in the 
 adv. ace. s. n. mithu (lllld), and instr. 
 s. f. mithuya (1112e), wrongly, falsely. 
 [Vmith: for mg, observe that Ger. ver- 
 kehren means both ' to turn the wrong way ' 
 and ' to associate with,' whence Verkehr, 
 ' intercourse,' and verkehrt, ' wrong.'] 
 
 mithuna, 1. a. paired, forming a pair ; 
 2. m., later n. pair (consisting of a male 
 and female), pair of children; pair (of 
 anything). [Vmith, 1177c.] 
 
 mithuya, adv. falsely. [see mithu: 
 acct !] 
 
 mithya, adv. wrongly, falsely, [younger 
 form of mithuya.] 
 
 mithyopacara, m. false service or simu- 
 lated kindness, [mithya + upacara, 1279, 
 mithya being used as a quasi-adj.] 
 
 V mil (milati; mimela; milisyati; militd; 
 militva; -milya). meet; assemble, [cf. 
 Lat. mille, 'assemblage, host, thousand,' 
 pi. mll-ia, whence the borrowed Eng. 
 mile, 'a thousand (paces), mllia pas- 
 suum ' ; perhaps mll-it-es, ' going in com- 
 panies or troops ' and so, like Eng. troops, 
 ' soldiers.'] 
 
 V mig, mix, in the desid. mimiks (see 1033), 
 and the deriv. migra or migla. [cf. 
 fj.iyw/j.i, # P.IK-W-JJ.I, Lat. misceo, *mic-sc-eo, 
 ' mix ' ; Old High Ger. misken, Ger. 
 mischen, 'mix'; AS. miscian, *mih-sc-ian, 
 whence Eng. mix for misk (like ax, for- 
 merly good English for ask); also Eng. 
 mash, 'mixture' esp. of grains, whence 
 verb mash, ' mix, and esp. make into a 
 confused mass by crushing.'] 
 
 migrA, a. mixed. [Vmig, 1188.] 
 
 migribhava, m. the becoming mixed, 
 the mingling (intrans.). [migribhu.] 
 
 migribhava-karman, n. mingling-action, 
 process of becoming mixed. 
 
 migribhu, become mixed, [migra, 1094.] 
 
 migla, same as migra. [1189.] 
 
 V mis (misati; mimosa; amimisat; misita; 
 -misya). open the eyes, have the eyes 
 open. 
 + ni, close the eyes ; fall asleep; wink. 
 
 V mih or migh (me'hati; amiksat; mek- 
 syati; midhd [222 3 ]). make water, [fr. 
 migh (223 3 ) come ppl. meghamana, and 
 noun megha, 'cloud': cf. o-mx-fw, Lat. 
 ming-ere, AS. mig-an, 'make water': orig. 
 mg, ' pour out,' whence on the one hand 
 'mingere' and on the other 'rain, drip, 
 drop' (cf. noun mih); then, fig. 'drop 
 fatness, bestow richly' (see under mldh- 
 vans).]
 
 mih] 
 
 [218] 
 
 mih,/ mist. [Vmih: cf . a-pix-hri, ' mist ' ; 
 AS. mist, *mig-st, Eng. mist.] 
 
 midhvans, a. bestowing richly, bountiful, 
 [said to be perfect ppl. of Vmih, 222 s , 
 790b, 803 2 .] 
 
 mimansya, grdv. to be called in question, 
 [fr. desid. of v/man, 1028e, 963.] 
 
 mllhuse, see midhvans and Whitney 54. 
 
 mukta-gapa, a. having a laid aside 
 curse, leaving his curse behind him. 
 [Vmuc.] 
 
 mukha, n. -1. mouth, 39 3 , 40 M , 51 12 ; 
 jaws, 18 & ; 2. visage, countenance, 
 face, 13 3 ; snout or face of an animal, 
 44 12 ; at end of cpds, esp. w. an adj. 
 [1298a], or adjectively used prep. [1305], 
 or adv. [1306] denoting direction: udan- 
 mukha, having a northward face, turning 
 northward ; abhi-mukha, having the face 
 towards; 3. (like Eng. face) surface, 
 25 21 ; 4. (like Eng. head, and like chief 
 from caput) the head, i.e. chief, best, 
 most excellent, 51 22 . 
 
 nnikhya, a. (at the mouth or front, and 
 so) chief, most excellent, [mukha, cf. 
 mg4: 1212a.] 
 
 \f muc (muficati, -te [758]; mum6ca. mu- 
 nuice; amucat; moksyati, -te; mukta; 
 m6ktum; muktva; -mucya; mocayati, 
 -te[1041 2 ]). release; free; let go; let 
 loose, 34 14 ; lay aside ; release esp. from 
 the bonds of sin (93 13 ) or existence; (let 
 go, i.e. emit or) utter, e.g. sounds; shed 
 (tears); discharge (phlegm, urine, ordure, 
 smells), [orig. mg, 'to free or clear': 
 specialized in Greek and Latin ' to clear 
 the nose, to snot': cf. airo-fivffffw, *-/AVK-j<a, 
 Lat. e-mung-o, 'snot'; pvK-r-fip, 'snout, 
 nose'; Lat. muc-us, 'snot': for mg, cf. 
 relation of snout to the cognate verbs snot 
 and snite.] 
 
 + nis, let out; release. 
 + pra, let go forth from, release from, 
 w. dbl. 
 
 + vi, loosen, e.g. a bond (ace.) from (abl.), 
 79 18 ; untie ; free ; pass, be freed or sep- 
 arated from, be deprived of, w. abl., but 
 also w. instr. (283 2 ). [for last mg, cf. 
 Eng. loose with lose.~] 
 
 munja. m. sedge; esp. Saccharum Munja. 
 
 V mud (mddate ; mumude ; modisyate; 
 mudita). be glad, rejoice ; mudita, glad, 
 happy, [cf. s mad and V Imand.] 
 + a, in amoda. 
 
 miini, m. 1. pressure, the pressing on- 
 ward, impetus, 78 7 ; 2. a man driven on 
 by inward pressure or impulse, person in 
 a (religious) ecstasy, enthusiast; later 
 3. any distinguished sage or seer or 
 ascetic, esp. one who has taken a vow of 
 silence (cf. mauna) ; hermit, 40 9 , etc. 
 
 mumursu, a. wishing to die, about to die, 
 moribund, [fr. desid. of v'lmr, 1028b, 
 1178f.] 
 
 vmus (musnati; mumosa; amosit; mus- 
 ita; musitva; -musya). rob; steal, [cf. 
 mus, ' the thief, i.e. mouse ' ; jj.vs, ' mouse,' 
 and from the shape, 'muscle'; Lat. mus, 
 'mouse,' whence diminutive mus-culus, 
 ' muscle ' ; AS. mus, ' mouse ' and ' muscle,' 
 Eng. mouse; Ger. Maus, 'mouse' (whence 
 denom. mausen, 'steal,' in which we are 
 brought back again to the orig. mg of 
 the primitive), and also 'muscle of the 
 thumb ' ; further, yumo, */*u<na, Lat. mus-ca, 
 ' fly ' : see also muska.] 
 
 musk a. m. 1. testicle; 2. pudenda 
 muliebria. [from noun mus, i.e. (383a 2 ) 
 mus, 'mouse': for mgs, see under Vmus: 
 cf. piiff-xov rb av5pe7ov Kal yvvaiKe'iov popiov: 
 w. muska, cf. also Persian mushk, Eng. 
 musk, 'perfume got from a bag behind 
 the navel of the musk-deer.'] 
 
 muska-dega, m. region of the testes, 
 groin. 
 
 musti, m.f. fist. 
 
 miisala, m. n. pestle. [181c.] 
 
 v'muh (muhyati, -te ; mum6ha, mumuhe ; 
 amuhat; mohisyati; mugdha, mudha). 
 be confused; err; lose one's senses; 
 mudha, foolish, and as subst., fool, simple- 
 ton, [cf . Lat. mug-er, ' false player.'] 
 
 miihus, adv. suddenly; in a moment; 
 muhur muhus, at one moment at 
 another, i.e. repeatedly. [' in a bewilder- 
 ing way,' s'muh, lllld.] 
 
 muhurta, m. n. 1. moment; 2. thir- 
 tieth of a day, an hour (of 48 minutes), 
 59 10 . [muhus.] 
 
 mudha, see Vmuh.
 
 [219] 
 
 [Vmrd 
 
 mutra, n. urine. 
 
 murkha, a. stupid, foolish; as m. fool. 
 [V march, mg 3.] 
 
 murkha-gata, n. fool-hundred. 
 
 V m u r c h ( mur chati ; nmmurcha ; mur- 
 chita, murt [220 2 ]). become rigid: 
 1. coagulate, acquire consistency; and 
 so 2. take shape, be formed ; 3. (be- 
 come stiff, numb, torpid, and so) become 
 stupid, senseless. [for mg 3, cf. Eng. 
 torpid, ' numb,' and then ' dull, stupid ' : 
 see miirti and murkha.] 
 
 m u r t i , f. firm body, definite shape, em- 
 bodiment. [Vmurch, 220 2 .] 
 
 murtimant, . having bodily form, in- 
 carnate, [murti, 1235.] 
 
 murdhan, m. forehead, skull ; head ; 
 oftenest figuratively, highest part; mur- 
 dhni, at the head. 
 
 mala, n. root; fig. (like Eng. root), that 
 from which a thing grows or proceeds, 
 root, basis ; capital. 
 
 mulya, n. price, 47 3>u ; capital, 46 14 . 
 [properly, perhaps, adj. 'pertaining to 
 the root, radical, basal,' and then, as 
 subst., ' basis ' of a transaction : fr. mula, 
 q.v.] 
 
 mus, m. f. mouse. ['the thief,' Vmus, 
 q.v.: see383a 2 .] 
 
 musaka, m. thief; mouse, 46 n ; Mousey, 
 as name of a man, 47 21 . [Vmus, q.v.] 
 
 miisakakhya, f. the name Mousey. 
 [akhya: 1280b.] 
 
 miisika, m. mouse, rat. [Vmus, q.v.] 
 
 musika-nirvigesa, a. undistinguished 
 from a mouse. 
 
 V Imr (mriyate [773]; mamara ; amrta; 
 marisyati ; mrta ; martum ; mrtva). 
 die; mrta, dead. [w. mrta, cf. @po-r6s, 
 *fj.poTos, ' mortal ' ; cf . <p\.b i-fj.ap-a.v-6t], 
 ' flame died away ' ; Lat. mor-i, ' die ' ; 
 mors, stem mor-ti-, ' death ' ; Goth, maur- 
 \>-r, AS. morftor, Eng. murther, murder : 
 see amrta.] 
 
 + abhi, (lit. die against, i.e.) affect un- 
 pleasantly by dying; guruna^abhimrta, 
 (affected by a teacher by dying, i.e.) 
 bereaved by the death of a teacher. 
 
 V 2mr (mrnati; mrnati [731]; murna). 
 crush; smash. [cf. fj.dp-va-fj.ai, 'fight,' 
 
 used of " bruisers," Odyssey 18. 31 ; fj.v\-Tj, 
 'mill'; Lat. mol-a, 'mill'; Eng. meal (for 
 mg, cf. pista) ; AS. mol-de, Eng. mol-d, 
 'fine earth' (for mg, cf. mrd): cf. also 
 Vmrd.] 
 
 V 3mr, exists perhaps in marut. [cf. fj.ap- 
 [j.aipcii, *fj.ap-/j.ap-j(, ' flash ' ; Lat. mar-mor, 
 ' marble.'] 
 
 mrga, m. 1. (like AS. de5r) wild animal, 
 beast of the forest, as opp. to pagu, 
 'cattle,' 67 2 ; then 2. (w. the same spe- 
 cialization of mg as in Eng. deer) animal 
 of the genus Cervus, deer, gazelle, [per- 
 haps 'the ranger, rover,' v'mrj, q.v.: for 
 2, observe the use of deer in the more 
 general sense in King Lear, iii. 4. 128, 
 "rats and such small deer."] 
 
 V mrj (marsti [027]; mamarja; amarjit, 
 amarksit ; marksyate ; mrst ; marstum ; 
 mrstva ; -mfjya ; also marjitum, mar- 
 jitva, -marjya). rub off ; wipe away ; 
 clean; polish. 
 
 [original meaning 'move hither and 
 thither over ' : then, on the one hand, 
 1. 'range, rove, streifen,' as in Avestan 
 meregh, and Skt. mrga ; and, on the 
 other, 2. 'go over with the hand, i.e. 
 rub, wipe, strip (a tree, a cow), milk': 
 for 2, cf. o-/j,6py-vvfj.i, 'wipe off'; a-fifpy-ca, 
 'strip off, pluck'; a-/j.\y-eiv, Lat. mu/g- 
 ere, ' to milk ' ; AS. noun meolc, Eng. 
 milk.'} 
 
 + apa, wipe away; also jig., of guilt, 
 [cf . diro/j.6pyvv/j.i, ' wipe away.'] 
 + pra, wipe off, polish. 
 
 V mrd (mrlati, mrlayati [1041 2 ]). be 
 gracious ; forgive, [for 1, see Whitney 
 54.] 
 
 mrlika, n. grace, mercy. [Vmrd, 1186 4 , 
 Whitney 54.] 
 
 mrta, ppl. dead ; as n. [1176a], death. 
 [V 1 mr, ' die.'] 
 
 mrta vat, adv. as if dead. [mrta, 
 1107.] 
 
 mrtyii, m. death. [Vlmr, 'die,' 1165a: 
 see 95 16 .] 
 
 V mrd (mrdnati; mardati, -te ; mamarda; 
 mardisyate ; mrditd ; marditum ; 
 mrditva; -nifdya). press or rub hard, 
 squeeze, crush, smash, destroy.
 
 mrd] 
 
 [220] 
 
 [extension of V2mr, 'crush': cf. a-/j.a\S- 
 vvto, ' destroy ' e.g. a wall : w. mrdti, ' soft, 
 weak,' cf. Lat. mollis, *molvis, *moldv-i-s, 
 ' soft, weak,' and &pa$vs, *npaSv-s, 'slow' 
 (for rag, cf. Ger. weich, ' soft,' w. Eng. 
 weak, and Lat. len-is, 'soft,' w. len-tus, 
 'slow'): 
 
 with v' mrd in hima-mardana, ' melting 
 of the snow,' we might compare f*.f\8ia, 
 ' melt,' Eng. melt ; but the s of the col- 
 lateral form smelt makes this doubtful : 
 see also mradas.] 
 + vi, destroy. 
 
 mfd, /! earth; loam; clay; mound of 
 earth, 62 18 . [prop, 'crumbled earth,' 
 Vmrd: similar specializations of mg are 
 frequent : thus AS. mol-de, 'crumbling 
 earth, dust,' Eng. mol-d, come fr. a Vwza/, 
 the cognate of V2mr, 'crush, crumble'; 
 Ger. Grand, 'sand,' is fr. the same root 
 as Eng. grind; Ger. Scholle, 'clod,' and 
 zer-schellen, ' break to pieces,' go back to 
 the same root ; logd and losta, ' clod,' 
 are derivs of Vruj, 'break.'] 
 
 mrdu, a. soft; weak. [V mrd, q.v.] 
 
 mrnmaya, a. made of earth; w. grha, 
 house of clay, the grave, [mfd -f- maya : 
 see maya.] 
 
 V mrc, (mrgati, -te ; mamarca, mamrg ; 
 amrksat ; mrsta ; mar stum ; -mfgya). 
 
 1. touch, mulcere, stroke ; grasp, take 
 hold of; 2. take hold of mentally, 
 consider. [cf. the Hesychian Bpaice'iv, 
 V *npaic, ' grasp, understand ' ; Lat. mulc- 
 ere, ' stroke.'] 
 
 + abhi, touch. 
 
 V mrs (mfsyate, -ti; mamarsa, mamrse; 
 amarsista ; -mfsya ; caus. marsayati). 
 -1. forget, 92 16 ; -2. (like Eng. not 
 mind) disregard, treat as of no conse- 
 quence, bear patiently. 
 
 m e k a , a setting up, in su-m6ka. [V 1 mi, 
 ' establish.'] 
 
 mekhala.y! girdle, see 59 8 K. 
 
 meg ha, m. cloud. [Vmigh, see mih.] 
 
 medas, n. fat. [v'mid or med (761a), 
 medyati, 'be fat.'] 
 
 medha, m. 1. juice of meat, broth; 
 
 2. sap and strength, essential part, esp. 
 of the sacrificial victim; 3. sacrificial 
 
 victim ; animal sacrifice. [cf. \ mid 
 under m6das.] 
 
 medhas, wisdom, m su-medhas. [equiv. 
 of medha.] 
 
 medha, f. wisdom. 
 
 melaka, m. assembly; w. kr, assemble. 
 [Vmil, 1181.] 
 
 modaka, m. small round comfit, sweet- 
 meat, [prop, 'gladdener,' s'mud, 1181: 
 so Eng. cheer and refreshment are applied 
 esp. to eatables.] 
 
 maurija, a. made of Munja-grass; f. 
 -I, sc. mekhala, girdle of Munja-grass. 
 [munja, 1208f.] 
 
 maunji-nibandhana, n. ligation of 
 the Munja-girdle. 
 
 mauna, n. silence, [muni, 1208d.] 
 
 mna, uncertain verbal. minded; assumed 
 on account of sumna. [V mna.] 
 
 V mna (manati ; amnasit; mnatd). col- 
 lateral form of v' man, ' be minded,' 108g. 
 [see V man : cf . ni-/j.vh-fficoi, ' keep in 
 mind.'] 
 
 V myaks (mydksati ; mimyaksa [785]; 
 amyak). be fixed in or on; be present. 
 sam, keep together, 73 4 . 
 
 mradas, n. softness. [Vmrad, collateral 
 form of Vmrd, q.v.] 
 
 V ml a (mlayati ; mamlaii ; amlaslt ; 
 mlana). wither. [collateral form of 
 V 1 mr, ' die,' and so ' perish, decay, 
 fade.'] 
 
 mlana-sraj, a. having a withered gar- 
 land. 
 
 V mluc (m!6cati ; muml6ca ; mlukta). 
 
 go- 
 
 + a p a , go off, retire ; apamlukta, re- 
 tired, hidden. 
 
 mleccha. m. barbarian. [Vmlech.] 
 v' mlech (mlecchati). speak unintelligibly 
 or barbarously, [root *mlek : mlecchati 
 is for *mlek-sketi, like prcchati, q.v., for 
 *prksketi : cf. a.-/ji(^)\aK-e1v, V/uAeuc, 'err, 
 miss ' ; j8A.c^, &\a.K-6s, ' stupid.'] 
 
 4 [509], relative pron. 1. who, which; 
 sometimes following its -correlative: 7 6 , 17 18 , 
 29 6 , 30 15 , 33 16 , 52 ", 73 9 , 78 10 , 79 7 ; 
 evambhuto vidvan, yas samarthas,
 
 [221] 
 
 [yajiyaris 
 
 tarn doctus qui possit, 19 4 ; 2. but 
 muck oftener preceding its correlative: ya 
 
 ta, 77 12 , 69 7 , Sis, 1713, 2 123 ( 22 4 , 30 n , 
 32 10 ; yam esara, 74 3 ; yac ca^ucyate 
 
 , etad alasyavacanam, and (what is 
 said, i.e.) as for the saying , that is 
 [fatalists' ] sloth-talk, 18 8 - n ; 
 
 3. converting the subject or object of a 
 verb into a substantive clause : sometimes, 
 perhaps, merely for metre : 29 3 , 38 "', 58 6 ; 
 but often for emphasis: 9 18 , 56 19 , 57 7 ; y6 
 paksa asans, te jimuta abhavan, what 
 were wings, those became clouds, for t6 
 paksa abhavan jimutas, 93 3 ; ay dm y6 
 h6ta, kir u sa yamasya, who this priest 
 
 [is], is he also that of Yama, 88 10 ; so 
 yad, even w. words of different gender and 
 number, as, prajapater va etaj jyestham 
 tokam, yat parvatas, of P. that [was] the 
 first creation, what the mountains are, 
 921 9 ; so95 15 , 97 1 ; 
 
 4. which, what, as adj. pron. agreeing 
 w. incorporated antecedent : na^asmai vid- 
 yiit sisedha, na yam miham akirad 
 dhradunim ca, not for him did the light- 
 ning avail, not what mist he scattered 
 abroad, and hail, 71*; so 7 1 21 to 72 2 , 74 4 , 
 79 9 1, 83 3 , 88 ~; as subst. pron., the ante- 
 cedent not being expressed, 74 1>2 , 78 18 ; 
 
 5. ya in special connections : ya ya 
 [511], whoever, whichever, whatever, who- 
 soever, etc., 13 12 , 45 13 ; so ya ka ca, 68 10 ; 
 ya ka cid, 60 ^ 68 12 ; ya ka cana, 9 16 ; 
 ya ka cid, anyone soever, no matter who, 
 quilibet, 21 n ; so ya ta, 18 4 ; 6. two or 
 more relatives in the same clause : yo 'tti 
 yasya yada mansam, when (who) some- 
 one eats the flesh of (whom) someone, 
 29 '; so 37 n, 66 i g ; -7. ya, if anybody, 
 si quis (really an anacoluthon) : so 79 16 ; 
 -8. ya, and he, 74 15 ; -9. for further 
 illustration, see 512, 511 ; for derivatives, 
 510 ; for influence on the accent of the verb, 
 595 ; cf. yad, yasmat, yat, yena. 
 
 [orig. and primarily a demonstrative 
 (like Eng. that and Ger. der) : cf. 6s, 'he,' 
 in ^ 8' os, ' said he ' ; 8>s, ' so,' in oi>5' Sis, 
 'not even so'; secondarily a relative 
 (like Eng. that and Ger. der}: cf. 8s, a or 
 5;, o for *j8, 'who, which'; hence yat, 
 
 with which cf . is, ' as ' ; but these com- 
 parisons are rejected in toto by some.] 
 
 V yaks (yaksate). perhaps an extended 
 form o/*yah (*yagh), 'stir, move quickly ': 
 and so, on the one hand, pursue, esp. pursue 
 avengingly, avenge, and on the other, dart 
 swiftly (as a suddenly appearing light), 
 [see the following three words and s'*yah : 
 kinship of Ger. jag-en, ' pursue, hunt,' is 
 doubted.] 
 
 yaks a, n. spirit or sprite or ghost; as /. 
 a Yaksha, one of a class of fabulous genii, 
 attendants of Kubera. [perhaps ' a rest- 
 less one,' Vyaks: for connection of mgs of 
 root and deriv., cf. the converse relation 
 of Eng. spirit or. sprite to sprightly, 'brisk, 
 stirring,' and cf. Scott's "restless sprite."] 
 
 yaksin, a. avenging. [Vyaks.] 
 
 yaks ma, m. disease, [perhaps, the sin- 
 avenging Varuna's 'avenger,' Vyaks. 
 1166.] 
 
 V yaj (yajati, -te ; iyaja, Ij6 [784 3 ]; 
 ayaksit, ayasta ; yaksyati, -te ; ist& ; 
 yastum ; istva ; caws, yajayati). honor 
 a god (ace.), 99 12 ; worship; worship 
 with prayer and oblation (instr.) ; and so 
 consecrate, hallow, offer ; sacrifice ; in 
 Veda, active, when one honors or sacrifices 
 (e.g., as a paid priest) on account of another, 
 and middle, when one sacrifices on one's 
 own account; yajamana, as m. one who 
 institutes or performs a sacrifice and pays 
 the expenses of it; caus. cause or help 
 or teach a person (ace.) to worship with 
 a certain sacrifice (instr.) ; serve a person 
 as sacrificing priest, [cf . 07-0$, ' worship, 
 sacred awe, expiatory sacrifice'; afoucu, 
 *a.y-jofj.ai, ' stand in awe of,' e.g. gods ; 
 ay-vos, 'worshipped, hallowed', w. yaj- 
 ya, ' colendus,' cf . 07-105, ' to be wor- 
 shipped, holy ' : different is &yos, see 
 agas.] 
 
 + a , get as result of sacrifice a thing 
 (ace.) for a person (dat.), einem etwas 
 er-opfern. 
 
 yajatra, a. venerable, holy. [Vyaj, 
 1185d.] 
 
 yajiyans, a. excellently sacrificing, right 
 cunning in the art of sacrifice. [Vyaj, 
 1184, 468.]
 
 yajurveda] 
 
 [222] 
 
 yajur-ved.4, m. the Veda of sacrificial 
 texts, Yajurveda. [see yajus.] 
 
 yajusmant, a. (possessing, i.e.) accompa- 
 nied by sacrificial texts ; f. -mat! (sc. 
 istaka), Yajushmati, name applied to 
 certain bricks used in building the sacred 
 fire-pile, and so called because each was 
 laid with the recitation of a special text 
 of its own. [yajus, 1235.] 
 
 yajus, n. 1. sacred awe; worship; 2. 
 sacrificial text, as distinguished from 
 stanza (re) and chant (saman); 3. the 
 collection of such texts, the Yajur-veda. 
 [Vyaj, 1154.] 
 
 yajna, m. worship, devotion (so in Veda); 
 later, esp. act of worship, sacrifice, offering 
 (these the prevailing mys). [v'yaj, 1177a, 
 201.] 
 
 yajna-kratti, m. sacrifice-ceremony, 
 i.e. rite. [1280b.] 
 
 yajna-cchaga, m. sacrifice-goat, [cha- 
 ga, 227.] 
 
 yajna-patra, n. sacrificial utensil. 
 
 yajnartham, adv. for a sacrifice, [ar- 
 tham, 1302c4.] 
 
 yajniya, a. 1. worthy of worship or 
 sacrifice, reverend, holy, divine ; 2. 
 active or skillful in sacrifice, pious ; as m. 
 offerer, [yajna, 1214.] 
 
 yajfiopavita, a. the sacrifice-cord, sacred 
 cord worn over the left shoulder, [upa- 
 vita.] 
 
 yajvan, m. worshipper, sacrificer. [Vyaj, 
 1169. la.] 
 
 V yat (yatati, -te ; yete ; ayatista ; 
 yatisyati, -te ; yatita, yatta ; yatitum ; 
 -yatya). 1. act. join, trans.; 2. 
 mid. join, intrans.; range one's self in 
 order, proceed in rows, 86 w ; 3. mid. 
 try to join, strive after; take pains ; 4. 
 cans, (cause to attain, i.e.) requite with 
 reward or punishment. [perhaps orig. 
 'reach out after' and akin w. Vyam.] 
 + a , reach to, attain, get a foot-hold. 
 + pra, (reach out, i.e.) make effort, take 
 pains. 
 
 yat as, adv. from what (time or place or 
 reason): 1. where, 6 14 ; 2. because, 
 for, 28 2 s , 38 5 ; esp. common as introducing 
 a proverb or the first (only) of a series of 
 
 proverbs motivating a preceding statement 
 or action, e.g. 19 7 ; yatas tena, since 
 therefore, 30 "; so yatas atas, 36 2 ; 
 yatas tad, 37 6 ; cf. tatas. [pron. root 
 ya, 510, 1098.] 
 
 1 yati [519], pron. as many, quot. [pron. 
 root ya, 510, 1157.4.] 
 
 2 yati, m. ascetic, man who has restrained 
 his passions and abandoned the world ; 
 see agrama and 65 3 N. [' striver, one who 
 takes pains, one who castigates himself,' 
 Vyat, 1155: its mg was perhaps shaded 
 towards that of ' restrainer ' by a popular 
 connection of the word with \fyam, 
 1157 1 , cf. 954d.] 
 
 yatna, m. a striving after ; effort; pains; 
 w. kr : take pains ; bestow effort upon 
 (loc.), have a thing (loc.) at heart, I 13 ; 
 yatne krte, pains having been taken. 
 [Vyat, 1177.] 
 
 yatra, adv. where, e.g. II 10 ; whither; 
 -correl. w. tatra, 24*, 85 19 ; w. ena, 83 10 ; 
 yatra yatra, where soever; catuspathe, 
 yatra va, at a quadrivium, or somewhere 
 (else), 104 21 . [pron. root ya, 510, 1099.] 
 
 yatha, rel. adv. and con/. 1. in which 
 way, as ; sometimes following its correlative : 
 tatha yatha, 22 14 , 43 2, 44^; evam 
 
 yatha, 37 8 ; 2. but much oftener pre- 
 ceding its correlative: tesam sam hanmo 
 aksani, yatha^idarh harmiam, tatha, 
 of them we close the eyes, as (we close) 
 this house, so, 77 13 ; so 61 6 , 27 14 , 21 16 - 18 , 
 etc.; yatha evam, 18 18 , 95 7 - 9 ; yatha 
 
 eva (Vedic),8Q l ^ s ; 
 
 3. correlative omitted: buddhim pra- 
 kurusva, yatha^icchasi, decide (so), as 
 thou wishest, 9 n ; 5 2, etc. ; so with verbs 
 of saying, etc.: tad brohi, yatha 
 upadadhama, this tell us (viz. the way) 
 in which we are to put on , 96 u ; so 
 
 88 6- 7; 
 
 4. without finite verb, as mere particle 
 of comparison, as, like, e.g. 6 19 ; so enclitic 
 at end of a pada, 71 12 - M, 87 ", 1 6 , 2 , 31 1, 
 43 4 ; in solemn declarations: yatha ', 
 tena satyena, as surely as , so, 13 w ff . ; 
 
 5. combinations (cf. ya 5); yatha 
 yatha tatha tatha, according as so, 
 the more the more, 48 13 ; yatha tatha,
 
 [223] 
 
 [yadi 
 
 in some way or other (cf. ya5 end), at 
 any rate, 62 9 ; 
 
 6. in order that, so that, ut, (so) 
 that : in Veda, w. subjunctive, 88 14 , 
 89 5,10,15^ 90 19. i ater> w _ opL> J49. w ,f ut , 
 
 ind., 3*; w. pres. ind., yatha svami ja- 
 garti, tatha maya kartavyam, I must 
 act so, that the master wakes, 30 16 ; so 
 37 5 ' 7 , 38 22 , 39 !; -7. that, w. verbs of 
 saying, knowing, etc., 30 7 ; for influence 
 on accent of verb, see 595. [pron. root ya, 
 510, 1101 : cf. article ya.] 
 
 yatha-kartavya, a. requiring to be 
 done under given circumstances ; as n. 
 the proper course of action, 41 n . 
 
 yathakamam, adv. according to wish, 
 agreeably, 16 2 ; in an easy-going way, 
 slowly, 49 14 . [yatha + kama, 1313b.] 
 
 yatha-karya, = yathakartavya. 
 
 yathakramam, adv. according to order, 
 in regular series. [yatha + krama, 
 1313b.] 
 
 yathagata, a. on which one came ; 
 -am, adv. by the way by which one came, 
 [yatha + agata, Vgam, 1313b.] 
 
 yathangam, adv. limb after limb or 
 limb on limb ; membratim. [yatha + 
 anga, 1313b.] 
 
 yathatatham, adv. as it really is, ac- 
 curately, [yatha + tatha, 1313b, 1314a.] 
 
 yathabhimata, a. as desired, that one 
 likes, [yatha + abhimata, Vman.] 
 
 yathabhimata-dega, m. desired place, 
 place that one likes. [1280 *.] 
 
 yathayogyam, adv. as is fit, according 
 to propriety, [yatha + yogya, 1313b.] 
 
 yathartha, a. according to the thing or 
 fact, true ; as n. the pure truth, [yatha 
 + artha. ] 
 
 yatharha, a. according to that which is 
 fit ; -am, adv. suitably, according to one's 
 dignity, [yatha + arha, 1313b.] 
 
 yathavat, adv. according to le comment, 
 comme il faut, duly, [yatha, 1107.] 
 
 yathavidhi, adv. according to prescrip- 
 tion or rule, [yatha + vidhi, 1313b.] 
 
 yatha-vrtta, a. as happened; -am, w. 
 verb of telling: either the actual occurrence 
 or circumstances (as nom. or ace. s. .), 
 or as it really happened (as adv., 1313b). 
 
 yathagraddham, adv. according to in- 
 clination, as you will, [yatha + graddha, 
 1313b, 334 2 .] 
 
 yathepsita, a. as desired ; -am, adv. 
 according to one's wish, [yatha + Ipsita, 
 Vip.] 
 
 yathokta, a. as (afore-)said ; -am, adv. 
 as aforesaid, [yatha + ukta.] 
 
 yad, 1. as nom. ace. s. n. to ya, see ya; 
 used in cpds and derivs, see 510; 2. as 
 conjunctive adv. that ; tan na bhadram 
 krtam, yad vigvasah krtas, therefore 
 it was not well done (herein), that trust 
 was reposed, 22 n ; ninya ciketa, prgnir 
 yad udho jabhara, he knoweth the 
 secret, that P. offered her udder, 78 3 ; 
 introducing oratio recta, 38 l ; yad , tad, 
 as for the fact that , therein, 36 1 ; so 
 94 1G ; yad vai tad abruvan, as for the 
 fact that they said that, indeed, 96 ' 23 ; 
 
 3. in causal connections: like Eng. that 
 (i.e. on account of which), 78 16 ; yad- 
 tad, since therefore, 17 5 ; yad 
 tasmat, inasmuch as therefore, 15 3 ; 
 since (i.e. considering that), 79 14 ; pur- 
 pose: in order that, 78 9 , 72 12 ' 14 ; result : 
 that, 71 e - 7 ; etadrga dharmajna, yan 
 mam hantum udyatas, so understanding 
 the law, as to undertake to slay me, 
 28 5 ; 
 
 4. temporal : as, 86 6 ; tad yad, 
 then when, 71 2 ; yad tatas, when 
 then, 92 12 ; so yad taditna, 70 7 ; 
 correl. often lacking: yad '",', when , 
 (sc. then), 75 12 ; so 80 3 , 81 17 ; while, 71 5 ; 
 hence, the temporal use passing insensibly 
 (cf. yad vaama, when or if we will, 73 17 , 
 and Eng. when w. Ger. wenn) into the 
 conditional, - 5. if, 80 9 - 10 ' n ; -yad placed 
 within the dependent clause, 78 8 (quoted 
 under 2), 79 14 ; for influence on acct 
 of verb, see 595. [pron. root ya, 510, 
 lllla.] 
 
 y a d a , adv. when ; yada tada or tatas, 
 when then ; yada atha, Vedic, 
 84 s, 6, 7 . y a da yada, quandocunque, see 
 tada. [pron. root ya, 1103a.] 
 
 ya,di, adv. if; 1. w. pres. ind. in protasis: 
 apodosis has pres. ind., 20 17 , 37 12 ; 42 14 , 
 43 7 , 65 23 , 99 21 ; has fut., 39 20 , 44*; has im-
 
 yadbhavisya] 
 
 [224] 
 
 perative, 10 16 ; has no finite verb, 18 n , 25 8 , 
 28 9 , 40 1 ; 2. w. fut. in protasis and apo- 
 dosis, 9 20 , II 3 ; 3. w. pres. opt. in protasis 
 and apodosis, 3 17 , 98 20 ; 4. w. no finite 
 verb in protasis: apodosis has imperative, 
 32 17 , 48", 84 9 ; has no finite verb, 27 18 , 
 28 12 , 63 9 ; alternative conditions : va, 
 yadi va , va, whether , or , 
 or , 28 12 ; apodosis introduced by tada 
 (e.g. 25 8 ), tad (37 12 ), tarhi (32"), or 
 without adv. (e.g. 3 17 ). [pron. root ya, 
 1103d.] 
 
 yadbhavisya, a. who says yad bhavis- 
 yati, (tad) bhavisyati or " What will be, 
 will be " ; as m. fatalist ; Yadbhavishya or 
 Whatwillb', name of a fish. [1314b.] 
 
 V yam (yacchati, -te [747]; yayama, 
 yeme" ; ayamsit, ayamsta ; yamsyati ; 
 yatd ; yamtum ; yamitva ; -yamya). 
 hold ; hold up, sustain, support ; hold 
 back, restrain ; hold out, offer, grant, 
 furnish ; show (the teeth), 77*. [cf. 
 C*?/"'a, 'restraint, i.e. punishment.'] 
 + a, hold out, i.e. extend, and so (like 
 Eng. extend), lengthen; ayata, extended, 
 long. 
 
 + ud, 1. raise (the arms, weapons), 
 35 20 ; 2. (like Eng. take up, i.e.) under- 
 take or set about (a thing) ; udyata, 
 having undertaken, w. inf., 28 6 . 
 + sam-ud, like ud-yam [1077b]: 1. 
 raise; 2. set about; samudyata, hav- 
 ing set about, w. inf., 40 20 . 
 + u p a , hold on to, take hold of ; esp., 
 middle, take to wife, marry, 98 8 . 
 -I- n i , hold, restrain ; niyata, having re- 
 stricted one's self (to a certain thing), all 
 intent upon one definite object. 
 + pra, hold or reach out, offer, give; give 
 in marriage (as a father his daughter), 
 98 7 . 
 
 + prati-pra, offer in turn, pass (food), 
 w.gen., 100 2 \ 
 
 + vi, hold asunder, stretch out. 
 -t-s am, hold together, co-hibere, hold in 
 check ; samyata, restrained. 
 
 yama, 1. a. holding, restraining ; 2. m. 
 (holder, i.e.) bridle. [Vyam.] 
 
 yama, 1. a. paired, twin, geminus; as m. 
 a twin; 2. The Twin, Yama, who, with 
 
 his sister Yami, constituted the first 
 human pair, selection Ixiii. ; honored as 
 father of mankind (cf. also manu) and as 
 king of the spirits of the departed fathers 
 (pitaras), see 83 *N. ; in later times, re- 
 garded as the 'Restrainer' (Vyam) or 
 ' Punisher,' and ruler of death and of the 
 dead in the under-world, 7 11 ; yaml, f. 
 Yami, twin sister of Yama. [so Thomas, 
 Hebrew t e om, means ' twin.'] 
 
 yama-rajan, a. having Yama as their 
 king ; as m. subject of Yama. [1302a.] 
 
 yayati, m. Yayati, a patriarch of the 
 olden time, son of Nahusha. [perhaps 
 'The Striver,' Vyat, cf. 1155.2c: or from 
 Vya, 1157.1c.] 
 
 yava, m. orig. prob. any grain or corn, 
 yielding flour; later, barley-corn, barley, 
 [cf . ejo, *oF-w(, ' corn.'] 
 
 yava-madhyama, a. having a barley- 
 corn middle, i.e. big in the middle and 
 small at the ends, like a crescendo-dimin- 
 uendo sign; as n. the Yavamadhyama, 
 name of a candrayana or lunar penance. 
 [1297, 1280b.] 
 
 yavistha, a. youngest; esp. of a fire just 
 born of the sticks of attrition or just set 
 on the altar, [superl. to yiivan, q.v., but 
 from the simpler *yu, 468.] 
 
 yavisthya, a. = yavistha, but always at 
 the end of a pada and as diiambus. 
 
 yaviyans, a. younger. [comp. to 
 yiivan, q.v., but from the simpler *yu, 
 468.] 
 
 yagas, n. fame, honor. [1151. 2a.] 
 
 yagas, a. honored, splendid. [1151. 2a.] 
 
 yasti, f. staff, [perhaps 'a support,' fr. 
 yacch, quasi-root of the present system 
 of yam: cf. 220, 1157.] 
 
 V yah, stir, move quickly, inferred fr. yaks, 
 q.v., and yahva, 'continually moving, 
 restless.' 
 
 V ya (yati; yayau; ayasit[911]; yasyati; 
 yata; yatum; yatva; -yaya). 1. go, 
 39 l ; yatas, avasitasya, of him that 
 journeys (and) of him that rests, 71 8 ; w. 
 astam, 62 u , see astam ; 2. go to, w. ace., 
 43 17 , 91 6 ; w. dot. 49"; -3. go to, i.e. 
 attain to (a condition) : e.g. devatvam ya, 
 attain to godhead, i.e. become divine,
 
 [225] 
 
 [Vyuj 
 
 19 21 ; so 17 22 , etc.; -4. yatu, lot it go, 
 no matter, 44 8 . 
 
 [collateral form of Vi, 'go,' 108g: 
 hence yana, ' passage, way,' w. which cf . 
 Lat. janus, 'passage, archway/ and the 
 god thereof Janus: fr. Vya comes also 
 ya-ma, ' period or watch of the night ' ; 
 Hi-pa, ' time, season,' Eng. year, show a 
 development of mg like that of yama, 
 q.v., but their connection w. Vya is 
 doubtful (see 2 vara).] 
 + a n u , go after, follow. 
 + a , come hither or to or on. 
 + s a m - a , come hither together ; assem- 
 ble ; samayata, come. 
 + ud, go forth or out. 
 + up a, go or attain unto. 
 + pra, go forth; set out. 
 
 V yac (yacati, -te ; yayace ; ayacista ; 
 yacisy6 ; yacita ; yacitum ; yacitva ; 
 -yacya). make a request; ask a person 
 (ace.) for a thing (ace.), 46 u ; ask a 
 thing (ace.) of a person (abl.), 55 21 . 
 
 yat, adv. as; temporally, so long as, .79 13 . 
 [abl. of pron. root ya, 1114a, 510: see 
 under ya.] 
 
 yat ana, f. requital ; esp. punishment, 
 pains of hell. [Vyat, 1150.] 
 
 yatr, m. avenger. [' pursuer,' Vya, 1182.] 
 
 yana, m. way; as n. wagon. [Vya, 1150.] 
 
 yama,/. -I, a. of or coming from Yama. 
 [yama, 1208f.] 
 
 yama, in. 1. course or going, 78 5 ; 2. as 
 in Eng., course (of a feast); 3. watch 
 of the night. [Vya, 1166: for mg 2, cf. 
 irtpi-oSos, 'way around, circuit, course at 
 dinner/ and Ger. Gang, ' course ' : for 
 mg 3,' cf. irfptoSos, 'time of circuit.'] 
 
 yavant [517], 1. a. as great, 101 9 ; as 
 many, 64 4 , 105 4 ; as much ; preceding its 
 correl. tavant; 2. yavat, adv. as long, 
 while ; tavat yavat, so long as, 
 19 2 , 42 3 ; yavat tavat : as long 
 as , so long, 15 5 , 32 2 , 40 18 ; as soon 
 as or the moment that , then, 44 15 , 
 22 7 ; 3. yavat, as quasi-prep, w. ace.: 
 during; up to (in space or time); sarpa- 
 vivaram yavat, as far as the serpent's 
 hole, 39 13 ; adya yavat, until to-day, 
 24 ". [pron. root ya, 517. cf. tavant.] 
 
 yavayad-dvesas, a. driving away foes. 
 [V2yu, 'keep off': see 1309.] 
 
 V lyu (yaiiti [626], 3rd pi. yuvanti, mid. 
 yute ; yuvati, -te ; Jinite forms Vedic 
 only; yuta ; -yuya). fasten, hold fast; 
 draw towards one, attract ; join, unite. 
 + s am, unite; samyuta, connected with, 
 i.e. having reference to, 59 14 . 
 
 V 2yu (yuy6ti; yucchati [60S 2 ]; ayauslt; 
 yuta; -yuya; cans, yavayati). repel, 
 keep off or separate, trans. ; sometimes 
 keep off or separate, intrans. ; a Vedic 
 word. 
 
 + pra, remove; prayucchant, removing 
 (intrans.), moving away, and so (like Eng. 
 absent), heedless. 
 
 yu, root of 2d pers. pronoun, cf. 494. [cf. 
 v/j.e7s, Lesbian tf/u/ues, 'ye': kinship of 
 Eng. ye, doubtful.] 
 
 yukti, f. 1. a yoking, harnessing; 
 -2. yoke, team. [Vyuj, 1157, 219: cf. 
 eC|iy, *evy-<ri-s, ' a yoking.'] 
 
 yuga, n. 1. yoke; 2. couple, pair; 
 3. esp. w. manusa, a human generation 
 (as that which is united by common 
 descent), -yei/os avdpwirccv ; 4. and so, in 
 a temporal sense, an age of the world, see 
 58 l y. [Vyuj, q.v., 216. 1: cf. yugma.] 
 
 yugapat-prapti,/ simultaneous reach- 
 ing or arriving at. [1279 and a.] 
 
 yugapad, adv. simultaneously. [ap- 
 parently ace. s. n. of an adj. *yuga-pad, 
 ' pair-footed, even-footed, side by side/ a 
 possessive form (1301) of a descriptive 
 cpd (1280b) *yuga-pad, 'pair-foot.'] 
 
 yugma, a. paired, even; as n. pair, 
 couple. [Vyuj, 1166, 216.5: for mg, cf. 
 couple, Lat. copula, *co-ap-ula, Vap + co-, 
 'fit or join together.'] 
 
 V yuj (yunakti, yuakt ; yuyoja, yuyuj6; 
 ayukta ; yoksyati, -te ; yukta ; y6ktum ; 
 yuktva; -yujya; yojayati). -1. yoke; 
 harness ; make ready for draught, used 
 of wagon (101 1T ) as well as of steed (72 6 ) ; 
 then, generalized, 2. make ready, set to 
 work, apply; use, e.g. the Soma-press- 
 stones, 76 18 ; yukta, engaged upon (loc.), 
 busied with, 62 u ; 3. unite ; middle, 
 unite one's self with (instr.); yujana, in 
 company with, 73 12 ; 4. passive, be 
 15
 
 [226] 
 
 united with (instr.), i.e. become possessed 
 
 of, 60 15 ; yukta: possessed of (instr.), 
 
 1 12 ; having , at end of cpd, 65 J - ; 
 
 5. pass, be joined or made ready, and so 
 
 be fitted, suited; yukta, fit, suitable, 
 
 right, proper, 23 19 ; yuktam, adv. fitly, 
 
 rightly, etc., 36 2 ; -6. yojayati [1041 2 ], 
 
 apply ; lay on, 102 u . [cf . ^eiry-yy/zt, Lat. 
 
 jung-o, 'yoke, harness, join'; w. yuga, 
 
 'yoke,' cf. vy6v, Lat. jugum, Ger. Jock, 
 
 Eng. yoke : for euphony, see 219.] 
 
 + ud, mid. make one's self ready, set to 
 
 work, exert one's self. 
 
 + up a, mid. harness, put to, 73 13 ; apply, 
 
 use. 
 
 + ni, mid. 1. fasten to; 2. put (a 
 
 task) upon, commission; caus. [1041 2 ], 
 
 set, lay, e.g. snares, 24 n . [for mg 2, 
 
 cf. niyoga; also Eng. en-join w. its Lat. 
 
 predecessor in-jungere.~\ 
 
 + pra, apply, use; w. namaskaram, 
 
 employ, i.e. do adoration. 
 
 + s am, join together, unite; samyukta, 
 
 at end of cpd: joined with, i.e. endowed 
 
 with, 34 4 ; connected with, i.e. having 
 
 reference to, 59 12> u . 
 
 yuj [389, 219, 386b], -1. a. yoked to- 
 gether; as m. yoke-fellow, and so comrade, 
 88 s ; 2. a. paired, even. [Vyuj: see 
 ayuj and ayuja.] 
 
 yujya, a. united, combined. [Vyuj, 
 1213e.] 
 
 yuddha, ppl. fought; as n. [1176a], fight, 
 battle, contest. [Vyudh, 1176, 160.] 
 
 yuddha-varna, m. a sort of battle; a 
 battle, so to speak. 
 
 Vyudh (yiidhyate; yuyudh6; ayuddha ; 
 yotsyate; yuddha; y6ddhum ; -yiidhya). 
 fight, [cf . vo-fj.ii'Tj, *\>9-fjuvri, ' battle.'] 
 + a, fight against. 
 
 yiidh,/. fight. [Vyudh.] 
 
 yudhi-sthira, m. Yudhishthira, son of 
 Pandu and Kunti, to whom Brihadacva 
 tells the story of Nala ; see 1 14 N. [' firm 
 in battle,' yudh-i (1250c) -f sthira.] 
 
 V yup (yuy6pa; yupita; yopayati[1041 2 ]). 
 set up an obstacle, block or bar the way ; 
 hinder, thwart, 80 10 ; obstruct or clog, see 
 86 OK. 
 
 yuvd, pron. stem, 2d pers. dual, 491. 
 
 yuvati, serving as a feminine to ydvan. 
 young woman; maiden. [1157.3 end: 
 perhaps pres. ppl. of V 1 yu, ' attract.'] 
 
 yuvan [427], a. young; as subst. young 
 man (distinguished from bala, 'child,' 
 28 12 ); youth (used even of youthful 
 gods). [perhaps fr. v'lyu, 'attract,' 
 suffix an, not van, 1160 : see yaviyans, 
 yavistha, yuvati : cf . Lat. juven-i-s, 
 'young'; w. juven-cu-s, 'young,' cf. Ger- 
 manic *yuvunga, ijnnga, Eng. young ; also 
 Old Eng. yung-fye, Spenser's youngth, Eng. 
 youth.'} 
 
 yusm, see 491. 
 
 yutha, m. n. herd. [prop, 'a union,' 
 v'lyu, 'unite,' 1163: for mg, cf. also Ger. 
 Bande, 'gang or set of men,' and Eng. 
 band, 'company,' both indirectly fr. the 
 root of bind.~\ 
 
 yutha-natha, m. protector or leader of 
 the herd. 
 
 yutha-pa, m. keeper or protector of the 
 herd; esp. the elephant that leads the 
 herd. 
 
 yutha-pati, m. lord of the herd; esp. 
 the elephant that leads the herd. 
 
 yunas, see 427. 
 
 yuyam, see 491. 
 
 yena, adv. 1. wherefore, 6 2 ; 2. yena 
 tena, because therefore, 64 9 ; 3. 
 that, ut, introducing a result and corre- 
 sponding to a ' such ' or ' so' expressed 
 (21 10 ) or implied (II s ). [pron. root ya, 
 
 yestha, pronounced yaistha, a. (best 
 going, i.e.) swiftest. [Vya, 470 3 , 468.] 
 
 y 6 g a , TO. 1. a setting to work ; use ; 
 appliance (act of applying); 2. appli- 
 ance (thing applied), and so means; esp. 
 supernatural means, magic, 56 8 ; 3. (the 
 applying one's self to a thing, and so) 
 pursuit or acquisition (of a thing), cf. 
 ksema ; 4. connection, relation ; -yogat, 
 at end of cpd, from connection with , i.e. 
 in consequence of . [Vyuj, 216. 1.] 
 
 y6gya, a. of use, suited for use, fit, fit- 
 ting. [y6ga, 1212a.] 
 
 yoddhr, m. fighter. [Vyudh, 1182, 160.] 
 
 yodhin, a. at end of cpds, fighting. 
 [Vyudh, 1183.]
 
 [227] 
 
 [rajas 
 
 y6ni, m.f. 1. lap; womb or birth-place ; 
 2. place of origin; origin, 93 4 ; 3. 
 birth-place, i.e. home ; place of abiding ; 
 place, 86 17 , 89 8 , RV. x.125.7; -4. (like 
 Eng. origin or birth) family, race; form 
 of existence (as man, Brahman, beast, 
 etc., in the system of transmigrations) as 
 this form is determined by birth, 67 ~\ 
 [' the holder ' of the born or unborn babe, 
 v'lyu, 'hold,' 1158. 2 2 : cf. the analogous 
 metaphors in Lat. con-cipere, 'take, hold, 
 conceive'; and in volva, 'cover, envelope,' 
 and so ' womb,' fr. a root cognate with 
 1 vr, ' cover.'] 
 
 yonitas, adv. from birth, by blood, [yoni, 
 1098b.] 
 
 yosit, f. young woman, maiden, [per- 
 haps ' the attractive one,' fr. V 1 yu, 
 'attract,' 1200a, 383. 3 (through the inter- 
 mediate form y6-sa, 1197, of the same 
 mg) : cf. yuvati.] 
 
 yauvana, n. youth, period between child- 
 hood and maturity, adolescence (of man 
 or maid), [yrivan, 1208a.] 
 
 yauvana-daga,/*. time of youth. 
 
 V ranh (ranhati, -te). 1. make to run; 
 hasten, trans. ; 2. mid. run ; hasten, in- 
 trans. [for *rangh : cf . the forms langh 
 and raghii, and see under laghii.] 
 
 rakta, ppl. colored; esp. red? as n. blood. 
 [Vranj, 954a.] 
 
 V Iraks (raksati, -te; raraksa; araksit; 
 raksita ; raksitum; -raksya). de-fend, 
 protect ; keep, i.e. both retain and main- 
 tain; take care of (as a sovereign), i.e. 
 govern ; guard, ward ; save, [a desid. 
 extension of V*rak or ark: cf. dAe-o!, 
 ' ward off,' which bears a similar relation 
 to VaAK or apK in &\-a\K-f, 'warded off,' 
 apK-fca, 'ward off, protect'; cf. also Lat. 
 arc-eo, ' ward off,' arx, ' stronghold of de- 
 fence, citadel ' ; AS. ealh-stede, ' defence- 
 stead, strong-hold ' ; ealgian, ' protect ' : 
 for the two chief mgs of \ raks, cf. Lat. 
 de-fendere, 'ward off, protect.'] 
 + pari, protect around ; save. 
 
 V 2 r a k s , harm, in raksas. [perhaps only 
 another aspect of 1 raks, ' ward off/ i.e. 
 'beat away.'] 
 
 raksaka, /. keeper; warder; protector. 
 [Vlraks, 1181.] 
 
 raks ana, n. protection; preservation. 
 [Vlraks, 1150.] 
 
 raksas, n. 1. harm; 2. concrete, 
 harmer, name of nocturnal demons who 
 disturb sacrifices and harm the pious. 
 [V 2 raks, 1151.2a.] 
 
 raksa, f. protection; watch. [Vlraks, 
 1149.] 
 
 raksi, a. guarding, at end of cpds. 
 [Vlraks, 1155.] 
 
 r a k s i t r , m. protector ; watcher. [V 1 raks, 
 1182a.] 
 
 raghii, 1. a. running, darting, swift; 
 as m. runner; 2. m. Raghu (The Run- 
 ner, Apo/tevs), name of an ancient king. 
 [Vranh, q.v.: older form of laghii, q.v.] 
 
 ranga, m. 1. color; 2. theatre, amphi- 
 theatre. [Vraj or rafij, 216. 1 : connection 
 of mg 2 unclear.] 
 
 V raj or ranj (rajyati, -te; rakta; -rajya; 
 cans, ranjdyati). 1. be colored; esp. 
 be red; rakta: red; dyed; as n. blood; 
 
 2. fi(j. be affected with a strong feeling 
 (cf. raj + vi) ; esp. be delighted with, 
 have pleasure in, be in love with; cans. 
 
 1. color; redden; 2. delight, please, 
 make happy. 
 
 [orig. 'be bright or white' (whence 
 rajaka) ; then 'glow, be red": see the 
 ident. V3rj and its cognates tipyvpos, etc.; 
 and cf . V f>ey in aor. f>tai, ' dye/ and 
 peyevs, 'dyer': w. this root may be con- 
 nected the root raj in its mgs given 
 under 2.] 
 
 + anu, 1. be colored after, take the 
 tinge of ; 2. feel affection towards. 
 + vi, 1. lose color; 2. be cold or 
 indifferent towards (loc.), 45 s . [for mg 
 2, cf . the senses of the simple verb : the 
 metaphor may be either ' not glowing/ 
 and so, as in Eng., ' cold/ or else ' color- 
 less/ and so, ' indifferent.'] 
 
 raj aka, m. washerman, who is also a dyer 
 of clothes. [' whitener ' or else ' dyer/ 
 Vraj, 1181.] 
 
 rajas, n. 1. atmosphere, air, region of 
 clouds, vapors, and gloom, clearly dis- 
 tinguished from heaven (dyaus, 72 2 ) or 
 15*
 
 rajju] 
 
 [228] 
 
 the ethereal' spaces of heaven (rocana 
 divas, 81 8 , or svar), "where the light 
 dwelleth," these being beyond the rajas, 
 just as the ai&fip is beyond the a-f)p; 
 used loosely in pi., the skies, 71 7 ; the 
 sky conceived as divided into an upper 
 and a lower stratum, and so dual, rajasi, 
 75 5i12 ; so far Vedic; 
 
 2. post-Vedic: like the Greek d-fip, the 
 thick air, mist, gloom, darkness ; 3. 
 dust, e.g. 14 13 ; 4. in the philosophical 
 system, darkness (cf. 2), the second of the 
 three qualities (see guna), soul-darkening 
 passion (popularly connected with raga, 
 'passion'), 66 8 - 16 . 
 
 [since the orig. mg, as indicated by 
 usage, is ' the cloudy (region), region of 
 gloom and dark' as distinguished from 
 the everlasting light beyond, the word is 
 prob. to be derived f r. V raj in the sense 
 'be (colored, i.e.) not clear': cognate are 
 f-pe0os, 'darkness, Erebus,' and Goth. 
 riqis, neut., ' darkness ' : for connection of 
 mgs 2 and 3, cf . Ger. Dunst, ' vapor,' and 
 Eng. dust.'] 
 
 T & j j u , f. cord ; rope. [V *razg, ' plait ' : cf . 
 Lithuanian rezgis, ' plaited work, basket ' ; 
 Lat. restis, *resctis, *rezg-ti-s, 'rope': see 
 Vmajj.] 
 
 V ranj, see raj. 
 
 ran a, m. pleasure, gladness. [Vran.] 
 
 ranva, a. pleasant, lovely. [Vran, 1190.] 
 
 rati, f. 1. rest, quiet; 2. comfort, 
 pleasure. [Vram, 1157, cf. 954d.] 
 
 ratna, n. 1. gift; blessing, riches, 
 treasure, as something bestowed or given 
 (cf. ratna-dha); so far Vedic; 2. post- 
 Vedic: precious stone, jewel, pearl; fig., 
 as in Eng., jewel, i.e. the most excellent of 
 its kind. [V Ira, 'bestow.'] 
 
 ratna-dha [352], a. bestowing bless- 
 ings 
 
 1 rath a, m. wagon, esp. the two-wheeled 
 battle-wagon (lighter and swifter than the 
 anas, ' dray ') ; car or chariot of gods 
 (72*-, 89 u ) as well as of men (87 14 ). 
 [Vr, 'move,' 1163: for mg, cf. Lat. currus, 
 ' chariot,' and currere, ' run.'] 
 
 2 ratha, m. pleasure, joy. [Vram, 1163, 
 cf. 954d.] 
 
 V ran (ranati ; rarana ; aranit). be 
 pleased; Vedic. [ident. w. Vram.] 
 
 rap as, n. bodily injury; disease. 
 
 V rabh (rabhate; rebhe; arabdha ; raps- 
 yate ; rabdha ; rabdhum ; -rabhya). 
 grasp ; take hold of. [prob. a collateral 
 form of Vgrabh, and ident. w. labh, see 
 these : cf . TO \d<p-vpa, ' spoils, booty ' ; 
 f"i-\r](t>-a, ' took ' ; Lat. lab-or, ' undertaking, 
 labor ' ; perhaps ^\<p-ov, ' gat, earned.'] 
 + &, 1. take hold upon; touch, RV. 
 x. 125. 8 ; 2. take hold of, i.e. under- 
 take, 14 6 ; w. yatnam, undertake an effort, 
 i.e. exert one's self, II 2 ; 3. (like Ger. 
 an-fangen and Lat. in-cipere) begin ; 
 arabhya : w. abl., beginning from , or 
 simply from , 39 13 ; w. adya, from to- 
 day on, 36 19 . 
 
 + anv-a, take hold of from behind, 
 hold on to. 
 
 + sam-anv-a, hold on to each other 
 (said of several) ; sam-anv-arabdha, 
 touching. 
 
 sam-a, undertake (see a-rabh) to- 
 gether. 
 
 sam, take hold of each other (for 
 dance, battle, etc.), hold together; take 
 hold (of a thing) together. 
 
 V ram (ramati, -te ; rarama, reme ; 
 aramsit, aramsta ; ramsyate ; rata ; 
 ramtum; ramtva; -ramya; ramayati). 
 
 1. act. stop, trans. 2. mid. stop, in- 
 trans. ; rest ; abide ; stay gladly with ; 
 
 3. mid. (rest, take one's ease or com- 
 fort, and so) find pleasure in ; rata, w. loc., 
 or at end of cpds, taking pleasure in, de- 
 voted to ; 4. caus. bring to a stand-still, 
 stay, 73 7 . [cf. ii-pfp-a, 'quietly'; Goth. 
 nmis, ' quiet ' ; tpa^ai, eparai, *m-/j.ai, 
 *pm-rai, 'love, loves'; i-pa.-r&-s, 'lovely,' 
 formally ident. w. ratd : for mgs 2 and 3, 
 cf. \'2gam.] 
 
 + abhi, mid. 1. stop, intrans. ; 2. find 
 pleasure ; please, intrans., 106 1 . 
 + a , act. stop, trans. 
 
 -up a, stop; uparata, ceased, (of 
 sounds) hushed. 
 + v i , act. stop, intrans. ; pause, 
 ramaniya, grdv. enjoyable, pleasant. 
 [Vram, 965, 1215.]
 
 [229] 
 
 [rajm 
 
 ramya, grdv. enjoyable, pleasant. [Vram, 
 903.] 
 
 rayi, m. wealth, treasure. [prop, 'be- 
 stowal' (cf. 70 n ), fr. ri, a weaker form 
 of Vlra, 'bestow,' 1155.1: cf. ratna and 
 rai.] 
 
 ravi, m. the sun. 
 
 r a g a n a , /. cord ; strap ; rein, [cf . ragmi.] 
 
 rag mi, m. 1. line, cord; 2. Jig. (line, 
 i.e.) ray, of light; beam, [so Eng. ray 
 involves a metaphor, its Lat. predecessor 
 radius meaning orig. 'staff' and then 
 ' spoke ' : cf . ragana and ragi.] 
 
 rasa, m. la. the sap or juice of plants 
 (36 18 ), and esp. of fruits ; fruit-syrup, 68 l ; 
 Ib. fig. the best or finest or strongest 
 part of a thing, its essence or flos, 44 7 , 
 83 3 ; Ic. sap, generalised, fluid, liquid ; 
 drink, 15 1T ; 2a. taste (regarded as the 
 chief characteristic of a liquid); 2b. 
 taste, i.e. relish for, 97 6 ; 2c. object of 
 one's taste, esp. that which pleases one's 
 taste, e.g. the beauties (of a story), 56 n . 
 
 rasa, f. 1. moisture ; 2. Rasa, a 
 mythical stream supposed to flow round 
 the earth and atmosphere, [cf. rasa.] 
 
 rasika, a. tasty; as m. connoisseur, [rasa, 
 1222.] 
 
 V rah (rahita; rahitum). leave, give up, 
 abandon. 
 + v i , abandon, separate from, in viraha. 
 
 r alias, n. solitude; lonely place; as adv. 
 [llllbj, secretly. [Vrah.] 
 
 V Ira (rarate; rarau, rare; arasta; rata), 
 give, grant, bestow, [see rai : cf . rayi.] 
 
 V 2ra (rayati [761dl]). bark; bark at. 
 [cf . Lat. in-ri-re, ' growl at.'] 
 
 raksasa, a. demoniacal; as ??j. a demo- 
 niacal one, a Rakshas. [raksas, q.v., 
 1208a.] 
 
 rag a, m. 1. coloring, color; 2. affec- 
 tion, feeling, passion. [Vraj, 216.1.] 
 
 raghava, m. descendant of Raghu, i.e. 
 Rama, [raghii, 1208c.] 
 
 V raj (rajati, -te ; raraja, reje [794e 2 ]; 
 arajit). 
 
 1. direct ; rule ; be first ; be master 
 or king of, w. gen. ; 
 
 2. shine ; be illustrious ; distinguish 
 one's self ; caws, cause to shine. 
 
 [orig., perhaps, two distinct roots, 
 but no longer distinguished in form, 
 and with the two sets of mgs partly co- 
 incident: w. raj 1, cf. Vlrj, 'reach out'; 
 w. raj 2, cf. V3rj, 'be bright,' and Vraj: 
 see under raj an.] 
 
 + v i , 1. become master of, master (gen.), 
 81 u ; 2. shine out; ca;/s. adorn, 12 17 . 
 
 raj [nom. rat], m. king. [Vraj.] 
 
 r a j a , at end of cpds for rajan, 1249a 2 . 
 
 raj a-kula, ?. 1. royal family; in pi., 
 equivalent to princes; 2. (as conversely 
 in Eng., The Sublime Porte, lit. ' the high 
 gate,' is used for the Turkish government) 
 the royal palace. [1280b.] 
 
 raja-dvara, n. king's door, door of the 
 royal palace. 
 
 rajan, m. 1. king, prince, I 8 , etc.; ap- 
 plied also to Varuna, 83 12 , 75 s , 76 1T , 
 78 19 , 80 1 ; to Indra, 71 8 ; to Yama, 83 12 ' 8 , 
 84 20. _2. equiv. to rajanya, a ksatriya 
 or man of the military caste, 59 13 - 22 ; 3. 
 at end of cpds : regularly raja ; sometimes 
 rajan, 6 s , 84 20 . [Vraj, 1160c: cf. Lat. 
 reg-em, ' king ' ; Keltic stem rig-, ' king ' : 
 from the Keltic was borrowed very early 
 the Germanic *rilc-, ' ruler ' ; of this, Goth. 
 reiki, AS. rice, 'dominion,' are dcrivs ; so 
 also Goth, reiks, AS. rice, ' powerful,' 
 Eng. rich: rice, 'dominion,' lives in Eng. 
 bishop-ric."] 
 
 rajanya, a. royal, princely; as m. one of 
 royal race, a noble, oldest designation of 
 a man of the second caste; see ksatriya. 
 [rajan, 1212dl.] 
 
 raja-putrd, m. king's son, prince, [acct, 
 1267.] 
 
 raja-putra, a. having princes as sons; 
 -tra, f. mother of princes. [1302 : acct, 
 1295.] 
 
 raja-purusa, m. king's man, servant of 
 a king, royal official. 
 
 raj as a,/. -I, a. pertaining to the second 
 of the three qualities (see rajas 4), pas- 
 sionate, as terminus technicus. [rajas, 
 1208a.] 
 
 rajendra, m. best or chief of kings, 
 [raja + indra.] 
 
 r a j n I , f. queen, princess, Anglo-Indian 
 rannee ; ruler, [rajan, 1156.]
 
 rajya] 
 
 [230] 
 
 rajya, n. kingship, [raj, 1211.] 
 
 rati, a. ready to give or bless; gracious; 
 as f. grace, [v'lra, 'give.'] 
 
 r a t r a , n. for ratri at end of cpds. [1315b.] 
 
 ratri, later ratri, /. night, [perhaps fr. 
 s'ram, 'rest.'] 
 
 V radh (radhn6ti; radhyate [761a], -ti ; 
 raradha ; aratsit ; ratsyati ; raddha ; 
 raddhva ; -radhya; radhayati). 1. be 
 successful ; prosper, have luck ; be happy, 
 103"; 2. trans, make successful or 
 happy ; gratify ; cans, accomplish ; make 
 happy, satisfy, [akin w. Vrdh.] 
 + apa, 1. hit away (from the mark), 
 miss (the mark), fail; 2. be at fault, 
 be to blame ; offend, sin ; aparaddha, 
 guilty, to blame, 33 l . [for 1, cf. the 
 simple verb, ' succeed,' i.e. ' make a hit ' : 
 for 2, cf. the relation of Eng. fail and 
 fault.] 
 + a, caus. make happy, satisfy. 
 
 radhas, n. gracious gift, blessing. [V radii, 
 ' gratify ' : for mg, cf . French gratification, 
 'gift.'] 
 
 ram a, a. dark; as m. Rama, hero of the 
 epos Ramayana ; cf. raghava. 
 
 rayas-posa, m. development, i.e. in- 
 crease of wealth, [gen. s. of rai, 1250d : 
 171 2 .] 
 
 rava, m. cry; yell; howl. [Vru, 1148.2.] 
 
 r a 5 i , m. troop, host ; heap. [perhaps 
 akin w. rac.mi, q.v. : for connection of 
 mg, cf. Eng. line and French cordon, as 
 applied to soldiers.] 
 
 r a s t r a , n. kingdom ; sovereignty. [V raj 1 : 
 see 219 5 , 1185a.] 
 
 rastri, f. directrix, sovereign, [v'raj 1: 
 see 219 5 , 1182 2 .] 
 
 rastriya,a. belonging to the sovereignty ; 
 as m. sovereign, ruler, [rastra, 1215.] 
 
 rahu, m. The Seizer, Rahu, who is sup- 
 posed to seize and swallow sun and moon, 
 and thus cause eclipses, [prob. fr. Vrabh, 
 1178 2 .] 
 
 V rior ri (rinati; riyate [761c]). 1. act. 
 cause to run or stream, let loose ; 2. mid. 
 flow; run; dissolve, [cf. Lat. rl-vus, 
 'stream, brook'; provincial Eng. run, 
 ' brook,' as in Bull Run ; Ger. rinnen, Eng. 
 run: see also VII + pra.] 
 
 V ric (rinakti; ricyate [761b] ; rir6ca, 
 ririce; araiksit, arikta; reksyati; rik- 
 ta ; pass, ricyate ; caus. recayati). 1. 
 leave ; 2. let go, let free ; 3. very 
 rarely (like Eng. colloq. part with), sell. 
 
 [w. rinakti cf . Lat. linquit, ' leaves ' : 
 cf . t-\iit-e, ' left ' ; Lat. lic-et, ' it is left, i.e. 
 permitted' (Eng. leave means 'permis- 
 sion ') ; AS. Icon, <dlh-an, Ger. leih-en, ' leave 
 a thing to a person for a time, einem 
 etwas iiberlassen, i.e. lend'; AS. lain, 
 ' gift, loan,' Eng. noun loan, whence denom. 
 verb loan; fr. Isen comes liSnan, 'give, 
 loan,' Old Eng. Jen-en, preterit len-de, 
 whose d has become part of the root in 
 Eng. lend (though good usage has not 
 sanctioned the precisely similar blunder 
 in drownd-ed).~] 
 
 + ati, mid. (through pass, sense be left 
 over) surpass ; predominate ; cans, cause 
 to be in surplus ; overdo, 96 12 . 
 
 V rip (rirepa ; ripta). 1. smear; stick; 
 smear, and so 2. as in Eng., defile ; 
 
 3. (with the same metaphor as in the 
 Ger. an-schmieren) cheat, impose upon, 
 [the old form of Vlip: see under Vlip.] 
 
 ripii, m. impostor, cheat ; later foe. [Vrip, 
 1178b.] 
 
 ripra, n. defilement; impurity. [Vrip, 
 1188c.] 
 
 ripra-vaha, a. carrying off or removing 
 impurity, [acct, 1270.] 
 
 V ri (rinati, -te; rista). 1. pull; 2. 
 pull or bite off, crop, [older form of 
 Vlig.] 
 
 V ris (resati; riayati, -te [761a]; rista ; 
 caws, resayati; aririsat). be hurt; re- 
 ceive harm ; caus. harm. 
 
 V ri, see ri. 
 
 V ru (rauti [626]; ruvati; mrava; aravit; 
 ruta ; r6tum). cry ; yell ; howl ; hum, 
 26 9 . [cf . w-pu-o/xcu, ' howl ' ; Lat. raucus, 
 ' screaming, hoarse ' ; AS. ryn, ' a roar- 
 
 in g-'] 
 rukma, m. ornament of gold; as n. gold. 
 
 [V rue, 1166, 216.5.] 
 V rue (r6cate, -ti; ruruce, rur6ca; arucat, 
 
 arocista ; rocisyate ; rucita; r6citum). 
 
 1. shine; be bright or resplendent; 2. 
 appear in splendor ; 3. appear beautiful
 
 [231] 
 
 [V rupaya 
 
 or good, please, [cf. d/j.<f>i-\vK-r), ' twi- 
 light'; \fvK-ds, 'bright'; Lat. lux, lumen, 
 for */wc-s, */wc-men, 'light'; ^wna, *luc-na, 
 'moon'; AS. /eoVi-, Eng. light; cf. also 
 Lat. /uc-us (a lucendo, after all!), 'a clear- 
 ing (Eng. of U.S.) or Lichtung (Ger.) or 
 glade or grove ' ; AS. leak, Eng. lea, ' field, 
 meadow'; -ley in Brom-ley, 'broom-field/ 
 and -loo in TFaer-foo.] 
 + prati, appear good unto, please, 74. 
 
 riici,/. pleasure. [V rue, 216.2.] 
 
 rucira, a. splendid; beautiful. 
 
 ruciranana, a. fair-faced. [anana: 
 1298.] 
 
 V ruj (rujati ; ruroja ; rugna ; ruktva; 
 -riijya). 1. break, break to pieces; 
 
 2. injure, pain. [cf. \vy-p6s, 'painful, 
 sad ' ; Lat. lug-eo, ' grieve.'] 
 
 riij, / pain, disease, [v/ruj: for mg, cf. 
 Ger. Ge-brechen, ' infirmity,' w. brechen, 
 'break'; also roga.] 
 
 r u j a n a , f. perhaps breach, cleft, rift 
 (of the clouds). [Vruj.] 
 
 V rud (r6diti [6311, rudanti; rur6da; rod- 
 isyati ; ruditd ; r6ditum ; ruditva ; 
 -riidya). 1. cry, weep; 2. weep for, 
 lament. [cf . Lat. rud-ere, ' roar ' ; AS. 
 reot-an, ' weep.'] 
 
 rudra, a. connected by Hindus w. Vrud, 
 'cry,' and so howling, roaring, terrible, 
 applied to Agni and other gods ; true 
 meaning uncertain; as in. la. sing, in 
 the Veda : Rudra, leader of the Maruts or 
 Storm-gods, 77 18 , RV. x. 125.6; -Ib. in 
 pi. The Rudras, a class of storm-gods, 
 RV. x. 125.1 ; 2. sing. Rudra, received 
 into the Hindu Trinity in the later mythol- 
 ogy, and known by the name Qiva, q.v. 
 
 V Irudh (runaddhi, runddhe ; rur6dha, 
 rurudhe ; arautsit, aruddha ; rotsya- 
 ti, -te ; ruddha ; r6ddhum ; ruddhva ; 
 -riidhya). 1. hold back; obstruct; 
 hold ; 2. keep off ; hinder ; suppress ; 
 
 3. shut up ; close. 
 
 + anu, as pass., or mid. intrans., i.e. as of 
 the ya- or ya-cZss, anurudhyate, also -ti, 
 be held to, keep one's self to ; be devoted 
 to, practice, 10 13 ; have regard for. 
 + ava, 1. hold off; 2. mid. (hold 
 apart for one's self, lay up, and so) 
 
 obtain ; desid. mid. desire to obtain, 
 
 96". 
 
 + ni, hold; stop; shut up. 
 
 + vi, hinder or disturb. 
 V 2rudh (r6dhati). grow, [collateral form 
 
 of V mh, q.v. : cf . Lat. rud-is, fern., ' rod, 
 
 staff': for mg, cf. w. Vrudh and Ger. 
 
 wachsen, ' grow,' the nouns vi-rudh and 
 
 Ge-wdchs, ' a growth, i.e. plant ' : kinship of 
 
 Eng. rod, ' a growing shoot, rod, measure 
 
 of length,' older rood, ' measure of length 
 
 or surface,' is improbable on account of 
 
 the o of AS. rod.'] 
 v' rus (r6sati ; riisyati ; rusita, rusta). 
 
 be cross or angry, [cf. AiWr, *\v<r-ja, 
 
 ' rage.'] 
 
 rus [rut, rudbhyam], / anger, [\frus.] 
 V ruh (r6hati, -te ; rur6ha, ruruh< ; 
 
 aruhat, aruksat ; roksyati, -te ; rudha ; 
 
 r6dhum ; rudhva ; -riihya ; riiruksati ; 
 
 rohayati, later ropayati [1042e]). 1. 
 
 rise, mount up, climb ; 2. spring up, 
 
 grow up ; 3. grow, develop, thrive ; 
 
 cans. 1. raise; 2. place upon, [see 
 v'2rudh: for euphony, see 222 3 .] 
 
 + ad hi, cans, cause (e.g. one's body, 
 ace.) to rise to (e.g. the balance, ace.), i.e. 
 put (one's body) upon (the balance), 
 48 1S . 
 
 -fa, mount or get upon (a stone); seat 
 one's self upon; climb (tree); ascend to 
 (the head, hill-top, life, place) ; embark 
 upon (boat, ship); Jig. get into (danger) ; 
 
 cans, cause to get upon (stone, pelt) or 
 into (wagon, boat), w. ace. of person and 
 ace. or loc. (105 n ) of thing; desid. 
 desire to climb up to. 
 
 rupa, n. 1. outward look or appearance, 
 as well color as form or shape ; Lat. 
 forma; form, 48 1T , 77 2 , 96 12 ; rupam kr, 
 assume a form, 14 8 , 49 6 ; (reflected) image, 
 62 17 ; 2. (like Lat. forma, and Eng. 
 shape in shape-ly) good form, i.e. beauty, 
 2 4 , etc.; 3. appearance, characteristic 
 mark, peculiarity, [cf . varpas : see also 
 varcas.] 
 
 V rupaya (rupayati [cf. 1056, 1067]). used 
 esp. in theatrical language (to have the 
 look or appearance of, i.e.) act. [rupa, 
 1058.]
 
 rupajitapsaras] 
 
 [232] 
 
 + ni, 1. like Eng. look into tenta- 
 tively, i.e. : investigate, 20 18 ; seek, 29 17 ; 
 search, 33 12 ; 2. look into successfully, 
 i.e.: find out, 44 17 ; discover, 26 10 ; -3. 
 net, see simple verb. 
 
 rupa-jitapsaras, a. surpassing the 
 Apsarases in beauty. 
 
 rupavant, a. like Eng. shape-ly and 
 Lat. f ormosus ; beautiful, handsome, 1 4 . 
 [rupa, 1233.] 
 
 rupa-sampad, /. beauty of form, i.e. 
 beauty. 
 
 ru pa-samp anna, a. endowed with 
 beauty, beautiful. [Vpad.] 
 
 re, word of address. O; ho. [cf. are.] 
 
 V rej (rejati, -te). 1. act. shake, trans. ; 
 2. mid. shake, intrans. ; tremble, [per- 
 haps akin w. V \iy in -A.e-A.i|e, ' caused to 
 tremble, shook.'] 
 
 renu, m. dust, [perhaps connected w. Vri, 
 ' dissolve, go to pieces,' just as Ger. Staub, 
 'dust,' w. stieben, 'fly asunder': 1162.] 
 
 r e v a , f. Reva, a river, the same as the 
 Narmada, q.v. 
 
 rai [361b], m., rarely f. possessions; wealth; 
 prosperity, [stem strictly ra : prop. ' be- 
 stowal,' V 1 ra, see 361b and rayi : w. ace. 
 ra-m, cf. Lat. nom. re-s, 'property.'] 
 
 roka, m. brightness, light. [Vruc.] 
 
 r6ga, m. infirmity, disease. [Vruj, 216.1 : 
 for mg, see noun ruj.] 
 
 roc ana, a. shining, light ; as n. light ; 
 the place of the light, ethereal space or 
 spaces, 71 17 , 81 4 - 8 ; see rajas for further 
 description. [Vruc, 1150.] 
 
 rocisnii, a. shining, bright; Jig. blooming. 
 [Vruc, 1194a : or rather perhaps fr. rods, 
 1194c.] 
 
 rocis, n. brightness. [Jruc, 1153.] 
 
 r6dasi, dual f. the two worlds, i.e. heaven 
 and earth. 
 
 rodha, a. growing. [V2rudh, 'grow.'] 
 
 r op ay a, see 1042e end. 
 
 r6man, n. hair on the body of men and 
 beasts (usually excluding that of the 
 head and beard and that of the mane and 
 tail) ; later Ionian, q.v. 
 
 romanta, m. loc. -e, in hair- vicinity, i.e. 
 on the hairy side (of the hand), [roman 
 (1249a 2 ) + anta.] 
 
 raukma, a. golden, adorned with gold, 
 [rukma, 1208f.] 
 
 laksa, n. 1. rarely, mark, token; 2. 
 a hundred thousand, an Anglo-Indian 
 lac; 3. (like Eng. mark) mark which 
 is aimed at. [Vlag, 'be fastened to,' 
 1197a: for mg 1, cf. connection of Eng. 
 verb tag, 'fasten,' w. noun tag, 'attach- 
 ment, appendage,' and so, esp. as used 
 in modern shops, ' a mark or label-tag ' ; 
 for 2, cf. the specialization of Eng. marc 
 or mark as 'a weight' (of gold or silver) 
 and as ' a money of account ' ; also that 
 of Eng. token as ' a coin ' and as ' ten 
 quires printed on both sides.'] 
 
 laksana, n. 1. mark, token; charac- 
 teristic ; attribute, 66 u ; character, 101 12 ; 
 essential characteristic, 41 u ; special 
 mark ; esp. lucky mark, mark of excel- 
 lence, 62 7 , 98 7i 8 ; mark in the sense of 
 determinant at S8 23 ; 2. (like Eng. 
 designation) name, 57 14 ; 3. form, 
 kind, 65 12 . [fr. the denom. laksaya 
 (1150. 2a), or rather fr. the simpler 
 but very rare form of the same denom. 
 (1054), \' laksa.] 
 
 V laksaya (laksayati [1056]). mark, 
 note, notice. [laksa, 1053 : so Lat. 
 notare fr. nota.~] 
 + u p a , mark, notice ; see ; pass, appear. 
 
 laksasamkhya, a. having lacs (see 
 laksa) as their number, numbered by 
 hundred-thousands, [laksa + samkhya.] 
 
 laksmi [363 2 ], / -1. mark, sign; -2. 
 with or without papi, bad sign or omen, 
 something ominous, bad luck; 3. oftenest 
 a good sign, in the older language usually 
 with punya; good luck; prosperity, 18 14 ; 
 wealth, 46 2 ; (royal) splendor, 51 19 . [fr. 
 laks (1167), the quasi-root of lak-sa, 
 which is a deriv. of V lag : for connection 
 of mg 1 w. v'lag, see laksa: as for 2 
 and 3, observe that Eng. luck sometimes 
 means ' bad luck,' but of tener ' good 
 luck.'] 
 
 laksya, grdv. to be noticed or seen; to 
 be looked upon or considered as, 41 u . 
 [derivation like that of laksana.]
 
 [233] 
 
 [Vlikh 
 
 V lag (lagati; lagisyati; lagna [957c] ; 
 
 lagitva; -lagya). attach or fasten one's 
 
 self to ; lagna, attached to, put upon. 
 
 [cf. laksa, laksmi, linga.j 
 laguda, m. cudgel. 
 laghii, younger form of raghii, a. 1. 
 
 swift, quick; 2. light, i.e. not heavy; 
 
 3. (light, i.e.) insignificant ; small ; 
 contemptible ; low. 
 
 [for derivation, see raghii and V ranh : 
 cf. -\axv-s, 'small/ ^AOXI^TOS, 'smallest'; 
 Lithuanian lengvas, ' light ' ; Lat. Iffvis, 
 *lenhu-i-s 1 , ' 1. swift, 2. light, not heavy, 
 3. insignificant, small ' (mgs quite parallel 
 w. those of laghu) ; AS. lung-re, 'quickly ' ; 
 Eng. lungs, 'lights': kinship of AS. leok-t, 
 Eng. light, ' not heavy,' lights, ' lungs,' not 
 certain : for connection of mgs 1 and 2, 
 observe that swift and light, just as 
 slow and heavy, name qualities naturally 
 associated : for light, 'not dark,' see 
 v'ruc.] 
 
 laghu-krama, a. having a quick step; 
 -am, adv. [1311], quickly. 
 
 laghu-cetas, a. small-minded. 
 
 V langh (langhayati ; langhitd; -langh- 
 ya). spring over, [see V ranh, and under 
 laghii.] 
 
 V lajj (lajjate; lalajje"; lajjita; lajjitum). 
 be ashamed. 
 + vi, be ashamed. 
 
 lajj a,/, shame. [Vlajj, 1149.] 
 
 lajjavant, a. having shame; embar- 
 rassed. [1233.] 
 
 V lap (lapati; lalapa ; lapisyati ; lapita, 
 lapta ; laptum; -lapya). chatter; talk; 
 lament. [cf . o-\o<t>-v-s, ' a lamenting ' ; 
 6\o<pvpo/j.cu, ' lament ' ; perhaps Lat. Id- 
 menta, ' laments.'] 
 + a , talk to, converse with. 
 + pra, talk out heedlessly or lament- 
 ingly. 
 
 + v i , utter unintelligible or lamenting 
 tones. 
 
 + sam, talk with; caus. (cause to talk 
 witli one, i.e.) address, 26 J . 
 
 V labh, younger form of rabh (labhate ; 
 Iebh6 ; alabdha ; lapsyate ; labdh ; 
 labdhva ; -labhya). 1. catch; seize; 
 
 2. receive; get. [see under Vrabh.] 
 
 + pra, 1. seize; take; 2. dupe; 
 fool. [for 2, cf. Eng. colloq. take in, 
 ' gull,' and catch, ' ensnare.'] 
 + v i - p r a , fool, 37 6 . [see V labh + pra.] 
 
 V lamb (lambate; lalambe'; lambisyati ; 
 lambita ; lambitum ; -lambya). 1. 
 hang down; 2. sink; 3. hang upon, 
 hold on to; cling to; and so 4. (like 
 Eng. stick) tarry, lag. [younger form 
 of V ramb, ' hang down limp ' : cf . Ao/8-<fo, 
 'lobe or pendent part' (of ear, liver); 
 Lat. Idb-i, ' sink, fall ' ; limbus, ' fringe, 
 border ' ; AS. Iseppa, ' loosely hanging 
 portion,' Eng. lap (of coat, apron); Eng. 
 limp, ' hanging loosely, flaccid ' ; %>-ears, 
 'hanging' ears (of a rabbit).] 
 + ava, 1. hang down; 2. sink; 3. 
 hang upon, hold on to. 
 + vi, lag, loiter, [see v' lamb 4: for mg, 
 cf . also Eng. hang, in hang Jire.] 
 
 \1 lal (lalati, -te; lalita). sport, dally, 
 play ; behave in an artless and uncon- 
 strained manner ; lalita, see s.v. 
 
 lalata, n. forehead. 
 
 lalita, a. artless, naive; lovely, [prop. 
 ' unconstrainedly behaved,' ppl. of Vial, 
 952 2 : so Eng. behaved has rather adjec- 
 tival than verbal coloring.] 
 
 lavana, n. salt, esp. sea-salt; as a. salt. 
 
 V las (lasati; lalasa; lasita). gleam, 
 glance. [orig. 'glance,' but, like Eng. 
 glance, with the subsidiary notion (see 
 lasa), 'move quickly hither and thither,' 
 and so, 'play' (see the cpds w. preps.): 
 conversely, Eng. dull means ' slow,' and 
 then, 'not glancing': cf. Lat. lasc-lvus 
 (through *las-cu-s), 'wanton.'] 
 + ud, 1. glance; 2. play; 3. be 
 overjoyed, 24 23 . 
 
 + vi, 1. glance; 2. play; 3. be 
 joyful or wanton. 
 
 lasa, a. moving quickly hither and 
 thither; lively. [Vlas.] 
 
 laja, m. pi. parched or roasted grain, 
 [perhaps akin w. v'bhrjj.] 
 
 labha, m. the getting, acquisition. [Vlabh.] 
 
 V likh (likhati; lilekha; alekhit ; likhis- 
 yati; likhita ; likhitva; -likhya). - 1. 
 scratch ; furrow ; slit ; draw a line ; 2. 
 write ; write down ; delineate, [younger
 
 liriya] 
 
 [234] 
 
 form of v rikh : cf . t-pe'iK-w, ' furrow ' 
 (x.06?a, 'ground'); t-ptx-Ou, 'tear, rend'; 
 Lat. rima, *ric-ma, ' slit, crack ' : for mgs, 
 observe that Eng. write is fr. the same 
 root as Ger. ritzen, ' scratch.'] 
 
 linga, n. mark (by which one knows or 
 recognizes a thing), Kenn-zeichen, char- 
 acteristic, [connected w. Vlag in the 
 same way as laksa, q.v.] 
 
 linga-dharana, n. the wearing of one's 
 characteristic marks. 
 
 V lip (limpati, -te [758]; lilepa; alipat, 
 alipta; lipta; -lipya). 1. besmear or 
 rub over a thing (ace.) with a thing 
 (instr.); 2. smear a thing (ace.) over 
 or on a thing (loc.); stick (trans.) on to; 
 pass, stick or stick to, intrans. 
 
 [younger form of Vrip : orig. nig 
 ' smear, stick ' : cf . rb \iiros, ' grease ' ; 
 d-A.efy>-&>, ' anoint ' ; Lat. lippus, ' blear- 
 eyed ' ; \~nrap6s, ' greasy, shiny ' : 
 
 further akin are the following words, 
 but with curious divarication of rag : 
 \lTrapfto, like Eng. stick to, i.e. ' persist ' ; 
 AS. be-lif-an, Goth, bi-leib-an, Ger. b-leib-en, 
 (lit. 'stick,' i.e.) 'remain'; AS. libban, 
 Eng. live, Ger. leben, 'be remaining or 
 surviving, superstitem esse ' ; AS. llf, 
 Eng. life ; finally AS. lief-an, Eng. leave, 
 ' cause to remain.'] 
 -f anu, smear over, cover with. 
 + vi, besmear. 
 
 lipi,^ 1. a rubbing over; 2. writing. 
 [Vlip, 1155. 1.] 
 
 V lie, (ligate ; lilige ; aleista ; lista). 
 tear, break, [younger form of Vrig.] 
 
 liga, tearing, breaking, ana" so cutting, in 
 ku-lica. [Vli.] 
 
 V II (layate; liyate; Iily6; alesta ; Una; 
 -liya). 1. cling to; 2. stick; 3. 
 (stay, i.e.) of birds and insects, light upon, 
 sit upon ; 4. slip into ; disappear. 
 + ni, 1. cling to; 2. light upon (of 
 birds); 3. slip into; disappear; hide. 
 -I- pra, go to dissolution, [cf. Vri.] 
 
 HI a, /. -1. play; -2. (like Eng. child's 
 play) action that can be done without 
 serious effort ; lilaya, without any 
 trouble. 
 
 v! luth (luthati; Iul6tha ; luthita). roll. 
 
 V lup (lumpati [758]; Iul6pa ; lupta ; 
 16ptum; luptva ; -lupya). 1. break; 
 harm; 2. attack; pounce upon; 3. 
 rob, plunder, [younger form of ' rup : 
 cf. Lat. rumpere, 'break'; AS. reof-an, 
 ' break ' ; reaf, ' spoil of battle, booty, 
 armor, etc., esp. clothing, garments,' Ger. 
 Raub, ' robbery, booty ' ; AS. reafian, 
 'despoil, rob,' whence Eng. reave, ppl. 
 reft, and be-reave: fr. Old High Ger. 
 roubon, 'rob,' through Old French rober, 
 'rob,' comes French oV-rooer, Eng. rob, 
 and fr. Old High Ger. roub, 'robbery, 
 booty, esp. pillaged garment,' in like 
 manner, French robe, ' garment,' Eng. 
 robe.] 
 
 lubdhaka, in. hunter, [lubdha, vlubh.j 
 
 \l lubh (lubhyati; Iul6bha, lulubhe ; 
 lubdha; 16bdlium). 1. go astray; 2. 
 be lustful ; have strong desire ; lubdha, 
 longing for. [cf . r) AnJ/, *\uf>-s, ' longing ' ; 
 \tir-r-o/j.ai, ' long for ' ; Lat. lub-et, lib-et, 
 ' is desired or agreeable ' ; libens, ' willing, 
 glad ' ; libido, ' desire ' ; AS. leof, ' dear,' 
 Eng. lief, ' dear, gladly ' ; Ger. lieb, ' dear ' ; 
 also Eng. love.'] 
 
 V lul (161ati; lulita). move hither and 
 thither. 
 
 v' lu (lunati [728]; lulava ; luna). cut 
 (e.g. grass, hair) ; cut off ; gnaw off. [cf. 
 \v-ta, 'separate, i.e. loose'; Lat. so-lu-tus, 
 ' loosed.'] 
 
 lekha, m. a writing ; letter. [Vlikh'.] 
 
 V lok (16kate ; luloke ; 16kitum ; cans. 
 lokayati [1056] ; lokita ; -16kya ; only 
 cans, forms are in common use, and these 
 only with ava, a, and vi). get a look at ; 
 behold; -cans. [1041 2 ] -1. look, look 
 on; 2. get a look at, behold. [on 
 account of the guttural k, prob. a sec- 
 ondary root fr. roka (Vruc, 216.1): for 
 connection of mg, cf. Aewc-o'j, 'bright,' 
 and \evff<rw, *\fvK-jo>, 'see'; Lat. lumen, 
 'light,' then 'eye* (see under Vruc); 
 also locana : no connection w. Eng. 
 look.'] 
 
 + ava, caus. 1. look; 2. look at or 
 upon ; 3. behold, see, perceive. 
 + a, caus. 1. look at; 2. see, per- 
 ceive.
 
 [235] 
 
 [vaksana 
 
 + vi, cans. 1. look; 2. look at, in- 
 spect, 25; -3. behold. 
 
 loka, perhaps a younger form of uloka 
 (which appears regularly in the oldest texts, 
 but divided as u loka, 84 ai ), m. 1. open 
 space ; free room ; place, 83 15 ; 2a. the 
 vast space; the world, 103 8 ; any imagin- 
 ary world or worlds, 15 1G ; cf. antariksa-, 
 indra-, jiva-, pati-, para-, manusya-, 
 svarga-loka ; 2b. used of heaven : svar- 
 go lokas, the world situate in the light, 
 103 5> Ui 1G ; so sukrtam ulokas, the world 
 of the righteous, 84 u ; later, sukrtasya 
 lokas, world of virtue, 89 8 ; so 5' 20 ; 2c. 
 of earth : loke krtsne, in the whole earth, 
 5 18 ; asmin loke, in this world (cf. 
 ilia), 66 12 ; in same sense, loke, 57 8 , 63"; 
 2d. with senses merging imperceptibly into 
 those given under 3, e.g., in the world or 
 among men, 26 2 , 36 3 , 47 21 ; -3. (like 
 Eng. world and French monde) people ; 
 folks; men or mankind; sing. 6 7 , 21 13 ; 
 pi. 2 5i 14 , 39 19 , 57 15 . [etymology uncer- 
 tain : no connection with Lat. /ocs, Old 
 Lat. stlocus, ' place.'] 
 
 loka-kft, a. world-making, world-creat- 
 ing. [1269.] 
 
 loka-pald, m. pi. world-protectors, either 
 four in number (regents of the four 
 quarters of the world), or eight (regents 
 of the cardinal points and four points 
 mid-way between). 
 
 loka-pravada, m. world-saying, com- 
 mon saying. 
 
 lokam-prna, a. world-filling; f. -a (sc. 
 istaka), Lokamprina, name applied to the 
 common bricks used in building the sacred 
 fire-pile, and so called because all laid 
 with the recitation of the one general 
 formula, lokam prna, 'fill thou the 
 world.' [1314b : for prna, V 1 pr, see 
 731.] 
 
 loga, m. clod (of earth). [Vruj, 'break,' 
 216. 1 : for mg, see under mfd.] 
 
 V loc (locayati; locita; -16cya). used only 
 with a., [derived fr. Vruc; just how, is 
 unclear: see Vlok.] 
 
 + a, 1. rarely, cause to appear or be 
 seen; 2. usually, bring to one's own 
 sight or mind, consider, reflect ; matsyair 
 
 alocitam (impers.,999), the fishes reflected; 
 ity alocya, thus reflecting. 
 
 ~+pary-a, see loc + a ; reflect, delib- 
 erate. 
 + sam-a, see loc + a; reflect. 
 
 locana, 1. a. enlightening; 2. as n. 
 eye, usual mg. [Vloc: for mg, cf. lumen, 
 under Vlok.] 
 
 lobha, m. strong desire; greed, avarice. 
 [Vlubh.] 
 
 lobha-viraha, m. freedom from avarice. 
 
 16 man, n. hair on the body of men and 
 beasts (usually excluding that of the 
 head and beard and that of mane and 
 tail), [prop, 'clippings, shearings,' Vlu, 
 'cut,' 1168. la: cf. roman.] 
 
 lola, a. 1. moving hither and thither, 
 uneasy ; and so 2. anxious for, desirous 
 of; greedy, [v'lul.] 
 
 lostd, m. n. clod (of earth). [Vruj, cf. 
 222*: for mg, see under mrd.] 
 
 loh A, a. reddish; coppery; as m. n. red- 
 dish metal, copper, [cf. 16hita, r6hita, 
 and rudhira, all meaning 'red': with the 
 last, cf. e-pvQ-p6s, Lat. ruber, rufus, Eng. 
 ruddy, red.~] 
 
 lohayasa, n. coppery metal, any metal 
 alloyed with copper, [ayasa.] 
 
 laulya, n. greediness, [lola, 1211.] 
 
 lauhayasa, a. metallic; MS n. metallic 
 ware, [lohayasa, 1208f.] 
 
 vana, m. I. cane or stock or stem, esp. 
 of the bamboo ; 2. (like Eng. stock, and 
 stem [rarely], and Ger. Stamm) lineage, 
 family, race. 
 
 vana-viguddha, a. 1. made of per- 
 fectly clear or unblemished bamboo ; 
 2. of pure lineage, [lit. ' vanga-pure, 
 pure in its or his vana,' 1265 : v'gudh.] 
 
 V vak (vavakre [786, 798a]). roll, [akin 
 w. Vvanc, q.v.] 
 
 vaktavya, grdv. to be said or spoken; 
 see 999 end. [s/vac, 964.] 
 
 vakra, a. 1. crooked; 2. fig. (nearly 
 like Eng. crooked) disingenuous, ambig- 
 uous. [Vvak, 1188.] 
 
 vaksana, f. pi. belly; bellies (of cloud- 
 mountains).
 
 Vvac] 
 
 [236] 
 
 V vac ( vakti; uvaca, ucus [784, 800e]; 
 avocat [847 end, 854] ; vaksyati, -te ; 
 ukta; vaktum; uktva; -ucya; ucydte; 
 vacayati). say or speak (w. ace. of per- 
 son, 10 22 ; or w. ace. of person and ace. of 
 thing, 7 19 ); announce or tell, 66 19 , 98 17 ; 
 name or call, 58 ~ ; punar uvaca, replied, 
 19 19 ; ity uktva, with saying so, i.e. with 
 the words " ," saying " ," 4 2 ; 
 so saying, 19 ^ etc.; 
 
 ukta, 1. spoken, said; impers. pass. 
 [999 raid.], kakena^uktam, the crow said, 
 24 13 , etc. ; uktam, introducing a proverb, 
 't is said, 19 9 , 20 16 , etc.; 2. spoken 
 unto; evam ukta, thus addressed, 3 5 , 
 etc. 
 
 caus. 1. mid. cause or ask (e.g. the 
 Brahmans) to pronounce for one's self 
 (e.g. a benediction), 101 2 , 106 4 ; 2. cause 
 (a written leaf) to speak, i.e. read, 54 20 . 
 
 [cf . two, tFoK-ja, ' voice, rumor ' ; Lat. 
 vffc-dre, ' call ' ; Ger. er-wah-nen, ' mention ' : 
 w. vac-as, 'word,' cf. eiros, stem *Feir-<r, 
 ' word,' w. labialization : w. avocam, 
 %a-va-uc-am, cf. ttitrov, *e-Fe-nr-ov, 'said': 
 w. nom. vak, *vak-s, stem vac, 'voice/ 
 cf. Lat. vox, *vdc-s, 'voice/ and <ty, for 
 *flty, i.e. Ftav-s, ' voice.'] 
 + anu, 1. repeat or say (sacrificial 
 prayers, etc.) for some one (gen.); 2. 
 mid. say after (the teacher), i.e. learn, 
 study ; anucana, perf. mid. ppl., who 
 studies, studied, learn-ed. 
 + abhy-anu, say with regard to or 
 with reference to something ; describe 
 (an occurrence) in (metrical and Vedic) 
 words. 
 
 + nis, speak out or clearly; explain. 
 + pra, 1. tell forth, proclaim; tell, 
 announce, mention ; and so 2. (as con- 
 versely laudare, 'praise/ comes to mean 
 'mention') praise; 3. tell of, colloq. tell 
 on, i.e. betray, 93 18 ; 4. say, 45 9 ; 5. 
 declare to be ; name, 57 5 . 
 + prati, say in return, answer. 
 + s a m , say together. 
 
 vacana, n. 1. speech; words, 9 18 , etc.; 
 dictum ; 2. (like Lat. e-dictum and Eng. 
 edict and word) command ; injunction, 
 26 18 . [Vvac, 1150.] 
 
 vacas, n. 1. speech, 4 6 , etc.; words; 
 
 word; counsel; 2. language, 54 n ; 3. 
 
 (like Eng. word) order; request, 53 3 . 
 
 [Vvac, 1151. la: cf. TTOS, 'word.'] 
 V vaj (vajayati). probable root, with the 
 
 meaning be strong or lively, inferred from 
 
 ugra, 6jas, vajra, vaja ; see these words; 
 
 vajayant, hastening, 75: cf. Vvajaya. 
 
 [cf. vy-rhs, 'strong, healthy'; AS. wac-ol, 
 
 ' awake ' ; Eng. wake, ' not to sleep ' ; 
 
 perhaps Lat. vig-ere, ' be lively or strong/ 
 
 vig-il, ' awake.'] 
 vajra, m. Indra's thunderbolt, 70 8 , 88 15 . 
 
 [orig., perhaps, a mere epithet, 'The 
 
 Mighty' (Vvaj), like Miolnir, 'The 
 
 Crusher/ name of Thor's hammer.] 
 vajra-bahu, a. having the thunderbolt 
 
 on his arm (of Indra), lightning-armed. 
 
 [1303.] 
 vajrin, a. having the thunderbolt (of 
 
 Indra). [vajra, 1230.] 
 V vane (vancati ; vancayati ; vancit&). 
 
 totter; go crookedly; caus. (cause to go 
 
 astray, i.e.) mislead, deceive; cheat, [cf. 
 
 Lat. vacillare, 'totter, be unsteady'; AS. 
 
 woh, 'crooked, wrong/ whence Eng. woo, 
 
 'incline to one's self, court.'] 
 
 -f up a, totter unto. 
 
 vancaka, m. deceiver, [\fvafic, caus.] 
 vancayitavya, grdv. to be deceived; 
 
 as n. a to-be-practised deceit, w. objective 
 
 gen. (296b beg.), 26 2 . [Vvanc.] 
 vat a, m. Ficus indica ; cf. nyag-rodha. 
 vanik-putra, m. merchant's son. 
 
 [vanij.] 
 
 vanij, m. merchant. [Vpan, 383.5.] 
 V vat (vatati; vatdyati). only with api. 
 
 understand ; caus. cause to understand or 
 
 know, reveal, inspire (devotion). [cf. 
 
 Lat. vat-es, 'wise seer': see under vata.] 
 vatsa, m. young; esp. young of a cow, 
 
 calf. [prop, 'yearling/ from a not quot- 
 able watas, 'year': with watas, cf. 
 
 F'TOS, 'year/ Lat. vetus- in vetits-tu-s, 
 
 ' bejahrt, in years, old ' : akin are Lat. 
 
 vit-u-lu-s, 'yearling, i.e. calf/ and Eng. 
 
 weth-er : for mg, cf . x'M a P ox > ' g at / prop. 
 
 'winter-ling' (see hima) : see vatsara.] 
 vatsara, m. year; personified, 67 15 . [cf. 
 
 vatsa ; also pari- and sam- vatsara.]
 
 [237] 
 
 [vapa 
 
 V vad (vadati, -te; uvada, ude [784]; 
 avadit, avadista ; vadisyati, -te ; udita ; 
 vaditum ; uditva ; -lidya ; vadayati). 
 -I. speak, 95 7 > 9 ; say, 20 19 , etc.; speak 
 to, w. ace., or w. loc. (4 1 ) ; 2. communi- 
 cate ; announce, R V. x. 125. 5 ; speak of ; 
 udita, stated (authoritatively), 58 16 ; 3. 
 tell, i.e. foretell, predict, 103 12 ; -4. 
 designate as, 55 5 ; name. 
 + abhi, speak to, salute; signify, in 
 the derivs abhivadin, abhivada ; cans. 
 speak to ; salute. 
 
 + praty-abhi, caus. mid. salute in 
 return. 
 
 + a , speak to ; vidatham a-vad, give 
 orders to (the household), rule (as master 
 or mistress). 
 
 + p r a , 1. speak forth ; say ; 2. de- 
 clare to be. 
 + vi, mid. contradict. 
 + s am, mid. talk or take counsel with 
 one's self. 
 
 vadana, n. 1. mouth; 2. face, 
 ['organ of speaking/ Vvad, 1150: for 
 mg, cf. nayana.] 
 
 vaditavya, grdv. to be spoken. 
 [Vvad.] 
 
 v a d y a , grdv. to be spoken of, worthy of 
 (favorable) notice, and so praiseworthy. 
 [Vvad, 963 8 c.] 
 
 V vadh (avadhit, avadhista ; vadhisyati, 
 -te). 1. strike; harm; 2. (just as 
 AS. slean meant first ' strike ' and then 
 'slay, i.e. kill') slay, kill, [see Vbadh: 
 cf . wd-fw, ' push ' : see vadhar.] 
 
 vadh a, m. 1. murderer; 2. weapon 
 of death, esp. Indra's bolt; 3. slaying, 
 slaughter. [V vadh. ] 
 
 vadhar, n. weapon of death, i.e. Indra's 
 bolt. [Vvadh.] 
 
 vadhasna, only in instr. pi. weapons 
 of death, i.e. Indra's bolts. [vadha, 
 1195.] 
 
 vadhu, /. 1. bride; 2. woman, [prop. 
 ' the one fetched home ' by the bride- 
 groom, Vvah, q.v.] 
 
 vadhu- vastra, n. bride's garment. 
 
 vadhya, grdv. 1. to be struck, i.e. 
 punished, 27 21 ; to be harmed ; 2. to be 
 slain, 27 18 . [V vadh, 963 3 c.] 
 
 vadhri, a. whose testicles have been 
 
 crushed ; emasculated, opp. of vrsan. 
 
 [Vvadh, 1191.] 
 V van (van6ti, vanute; vavana, vavne ; 
 
 vata). 1. hold dear, love ; desire, 
 
 seek, beseech, 79 19 ; 2. get; 3. win. 
 
 [cf. Lat. ven-ia, 'favor'; Ven-us, 'The 
 
 Lovely One ' ; AS. winnan, ' exert one's 
 
 self, strive,' Eng. win, ' gain by striving ' ; 
 
 AS. wen, ' hope, expectation, supposition,' 
 
 whence wen-an, Eng. ween, ' suppose ' : see 
 
 \/vanch.] 
 
 vana, n. wood; forest, 
 vanana,/ desire. [Vvan, 1150. 2b 2 .] 
 vananvant, a. having desire, desiring. 
 
 [perhaps fr. vanana, 1233, w. irreg. loss 
 
 of final a: both mg and derivation are 
 
 doubtful.] 
 vana-prastha, m. n. forest-plateau, 
 
 wooded table-land. [1280b.] 
 vana-vasa, m. the living in a wood ; 
 
 -tas, owing to (his) forest-life. 
 vanas-pati, m. tree, ['lord of the 
 
 wood ' : see 1267 and a and d : perhaps 
 
 vanas stands for vanar, a subsidiary 
 
 form of vana, cf. 171 3 .] 
 V vand (vandate ; vavand6 ; vandita ; 
 
 vanditum ; vanditva ; -vandya). 1. 
 
 praise; 2. salute reverentially, [orig. 
 
 ident. w. Vvad, 108g.] 
 
 + abhi, make reverent salutation unto; 
 
 salute. 
 
 vanditf, m. praiser. [Vvand.] 
 V Ivap (vapati, -te; upta; -upya; vapa- 
 
 yati). shear (hair, beard); trim (nails); 
 
 caus. cause to be clipped, or simply 
 
 [1041 2 ], clip. 
 V 2vap (vapati, -te ; uvapa, up6 [784, 
 
 800e]; avapsit; vapsyati; upta; uptva; 
 
 -lipya). 1. strew; scatter, esj>. seed, 
 
 sow; 2. (like x^ w ) throw or heap up, 
 
 i.e. dam up. 
 
 + a p a , cast away ; fig. destroy. 
 
 + abhi, bestrew. 
 
 + a , throw upon, strew. 
 
 + ni, throw down. 
 
 + nis, throw out, esp. deal out (from a 
 
 larger mass) an oblation to a god, dat. ; 
 
 offer, 
 vapa, f. caul, omentum.
 
 vapus] 
 
 [238] 
 
 vpus, a. 1. wondrous, admirabilis ; 
 2. (like Eng. admirable) exciting wonder 
 mixed with approbation, esp. wondrous 
 fair; 
 
 as n. 1. a wonder ; wonderful ap- 
 pearance ; vapur drgaye, a wonder to see, 
 Oavfjia ISfffOcu, 79 9 ; 2. beautiful appear- 
 ance ; beauty, 8 8 ; 3. appearance ; form, 
 48 s - 4 . [for 2 and 3, cf. the converse 
 transition of mg in rupa, 1, 2.] 
 
 vayam, we, see 491. [cf. Ger. wi-r, Eng. 
 we.~\ 
 
 1 v d y a s , n. 1. fowl, collective ; 2. bird, 
 [see vi, ' bird.'] 
 
 2 v ay as, n. food, meal. [prop, 'enjoy- 
 ment,' v'lvi, 'enjoy': for analogies, see 
 V 2 bhuj, ' enjoy,' and V 1 vi.] 
 
 3 vayas, n. 1. strength, of body and of 
 mind; health; 2. the time of strength, 
 youth; marriageable age, 2 6 ; 3. gen- 
 eralized, any age or period of life ; years 
 (of life), [akin w. vi-ra, q.v.] 
 
 v a y a , f. strengthening. 
 
 1 v a r a , m. choice ; wish ; a thing to be 
 chosen as gift or reward, and so gift, re- 
 ward ; varam vr, wish a wish, make a 
 condition, 94 1 ; varam da, give a choice, 
 grant a wish, I 17 ; prati varam or va- 
 ram a, according to one's wish. [V2vr, 
 ' choose ' : cf . Eng. well, lit. ' according to 
 one's wish.'] 
 
 2 vara, a. (like Eng. choice or select) most 
 excellent or fair, best, w. gen. or loc., 16 2 , 
 3 21 ; w. obi., most excellent as distin- 
 guished from , i.e. better than , 68 14 ; 
 varam , na ca , the best thing is , 
 and not , i.e. is better than , 17 20 . 
 [V2vr, 'choose': for mg, cf. AS. cyst, 'a 
 choice,' and then ' the best,' with ceosan, 
 ' choose.'] 
 
 varana, n. a choosing. [V 2 vr, ' choose.'] 
 
 vara-varna, m. most fair complexion. 
 
 varavarnin, a. having a fan- com- 
 plexion; -ini, f. fair-faced woman, [va- 
 ravarna, 1230.] 
 
 varangana, f. most excellent woman, 
 [angana.] 
 
 vararoha, a. having fair hips or but- 
 tocks; tca\\iinyos. [aroha.] 
 
 varaha, m. boar. 
 
 varivas, n. breadth; fig. freedom from 
 constraint, ease, gladness, w. kr. [belong- 
 ing to uni, 'broad': see 1173 3 , 467 2 .] 
 
 varlyans, a. very broad, wide extended. 
 [Vlvr, 'cover, extend over': see 467 ' 2 
 and 11 73 3 .] 
 
 varuna, m. The Encompasser (of the 
 Universe), Varuna, name of an Aditya; 
 orig. the supreme god of the Veda (see 
 selection xxxvii. and notes), and so called 
 king as well as god, 83 12 ; omniscient 
 judge who punishes sin and sends sick- 
 ness and death, selections xliii., xliv., xlv. ; 
 later, god of the waters, 7 10 . [a personi- 
 
 fication of the ' all-embracing ' heaven, 
 Vlvr, 'cover, encompass,' 1177c : cf. 
 oi>pav6s, ' heaven,' and Ovpavds, ' Heaven,' 
 personified as a god.] 
 
 varutha, n. cover; and so, as in Eng., 
 protection. [Vlvr, 'cover,' 1163c.] 
 
 varuthya, a. protecting. [varutha, 
 1212d4.] 
 
 varenya, grdv. to be desired; and so, 
 longed for, excellent. [V2vr, 'choose,' 
 1217 1 - 2 - 3 , 966b.] 
 
 varga, m. group. [Vvrj, ' separate,' 
 216. 1 : for mg, cf. Eng. division, ' a sepa- 
 rating into parts,' and then 'the part 
 separated, group.'] 
 
 v arc as, n. vitality, vigor; the illuminat- 
 ing power in fire and the sun; and so, 
 splendor ; fig. glory, [perhaps akin with 
 rue : cf . varpas with rupa.] 
 
 varna, m. 1. outside; external appear- 
 ance ; color, 36 19 , 37 6 , etc. ; complexion ; 
 2. (color, and so, as in Eng.) kind, 
 species, sort, 98 2 ; 3. (sort of men, i.e.) 
 caste, 28 18 ; 4. letter; sound; vowel, 
 59 16 ; syllable ; word, 98 8 . [V 1 vr, ' cover,' 
 1177a: for mg 1, cf. Eng. coating, and 
 coat (of paint), and Lat. color, prop, 
 'cover or coating,' cognate w. oc-cul-ere, 
 ' cover over.'] 
 
 V varnaya (varnayati). 1. color, 
 paint; 2. fig. (like Eng. paint), depict 
 describe ; tell about ; pass. 12 8 . [varna, 
 1058.] 
 
 vartana, n. prop, an existing, and so 
 (like Eng. living), means of subsistence. 
 [Vvrt, mgs 3, 5: cf. vrtti.]
 
 [239] 
 
 [V3vas 
 
 vartf, m. restrainer, stayer. [\/lvr, 
 'cover/ mg 3, 'restrain': 1182.] 
 
 v art man, n. wheel-track; path, 43 9 ; 
 vartmana, at end of cpds : by way of, 
 39 14 ; or simply through ; akaga-vart- 
 mana, througli the air, 39 a . [v'vrt, 
 1168. la.] 
 
 vartra, a. warding off, liolding back; 
 as n. a water-stop, dam, weir. [Vlvr, 
 'cover,' q.v.] 
 
 Ivardhana, a. I. increasing, trans.; 
 as m. increaser ; 2. delighting in. 
 [Vlvrdh, 'increase,' q.v.] 
 
 2vardhana, n. the cutting. [\/2vrdh, 
 ' cut.'] 
 
 varpas, n. assumed appearance; image, 
 form, [akin with rupa : cf . varcas.] 
 
 vArman, n. envelope; coat of armor; 
 protection ; at end of Kshatriya-names, 
 59 1S N. [V 1 vr, ' envelop/ 1 168. la.] 
 
 varsa, n. 1. rain; 2. (rainy-season, 
 i.e.) year; varsa, f. pi. 1. the rains, 
 i.e. the rainy season; 2. very rarely, 
 rain-water, 104 14 . [Vvrs : cf. e-fpvai, 
 1 rain-drops ' : for mg 2 of varsa, cf . Eng. 
 "girl of sixteen summers," "man of 
 seventy winters," abda and garad.] 
 
 varsa-karman, n. the action of rain- 
 ing. 
 
 varsa-satka, n. year-hexade, period of 
 six years. 
 
 var smaii, m. height; top; crown of the 
 head, [see 1168. lc 2 and 2b.] 
 
 vala, m. prop, an encloser, and so 1. 
 (enclosure, i.e.) cave; 2. personified, 
 Vala, name of a demon who shuts up 
 the heavenly waters to withhold them 
 from man and is slain by Indra, 81 5>7 . 
 [Vlvr, 'enclose.'] 
 
 vala-vrtra, m. Vala and Vritra. [1252.] 
 
 valavrtra-nisudana, m. destroyer of 
 Vala and Vritra, i.e. Indra. [1264.] 
 
 valavrtra-han [402], a. slaying Vala 
 and Vritra ; as m. slayer of Vala and 
 Vritra, i.e. Indra. [1269.] 
 
 valmika, m. ant-hill. 
 
 vavri, m. prop, cover, and so 1. place 
 of hiding or refuge ; 2. corporeal tegu- 
 ment (of the soul), i.e. body. [Vlvr, 
 'cover/ 1155. 2c.] 
 
 V vac. (vasti, uganti [638]; uvaga [784]). 
 1. will, 73 17 ; 2. desire, long for; 
 ppls, pres. ugant, perf. vavagana [786] : 
 willing or (when qualifying subject of verb) 
 gladly, 83*, 85 6 ; longing, 78 a ; -3. (like 
 Eng. will in its rare or obsolete sense 
 'order') order, command. [cf. l/c&Jy, 
 stem *FeK-oj/T, ' willing.'] 
 
 vaga, a. willing, submissive; as m. 1. 
 will; 2. command; and so controlling 
 power or influence. [Vvag.] 
 
 vaga-ni [352], a. bringing into one's 
 power ; as m. controller. 
 
 vaga, f. 1. cow, esp. farrow cow; 2. 
 female elephant, Elephanten-kuh. [per- 
 haps 'the lowing' beast, fr. wag: cf. 
 Lat. vacca, 'cow': usual name for 'cow' 
 is g6.] 
 
 vagin, a. having command or control; 
 as subst. m. or f. master, mistress, [vaga.] 
 
 vagi-kr, make submissive, enthrall, en- 
 snare, [vaga and V 1 kr, ' make/ 1094.] 
 
 vagya, grdv. to be commanded or ordered, 
 and so obedient, submissive, yielding, 
 [vag, 963 8 c.] 
 
 vas, end. pron. you, 491. [cf. Lat. vos, 
 'ye, you.'] 
 
 V Ivas (ucchdti [753, 608]; uvasa [784]; 
 vatsyati [167] ; usta). grow bright ; 
 light up (of the breaking day), dawn, 
 [for cognates, Lat. us-tu-s, ' burned,' east, 
 Easter, etc., see the collateral form us, 
 'burn/ and the derivs usas, usra, va- 
 santa, vasu, vasara : cf. also ^ap, *Fe<r- 
 fj.ap, ' day ' ; tap, *Fetr-op, Lat. rer, we-er, 
 *ves-er, ' dawn of the year-light, i.e. 
 spring'; Ves-uv-ius, 'the burning' moun- 
 tain.] 
 + vi, shine abroad, 75 15 ; light up, 97 13 . 
 
 V 2 vas (vaste [628]; vavase ; avasista ; 
 vatsyati ; vasita ; vasitum ; vasitva ; 
 -vasya). put on (as a garment), clothe 
 one's self in. [cf. fwv/j.i, *FO--VV-IM, 
 'put on'; e-eff-To, 'had on'; sfyuo, 'gar- 
 ment ' ; Lat. ves-tis, ' garment ' ; Goth. 
 ga-vas-jan, ' clothe ' ; AS. wer-ian, Eng. 
 wear.~\ 
 
 V 3 vas (vasati ; uvasa [784]; avatsit 
 [167] ; vatsyati ; usita ; vastum ; usitva ; 
 -tisya; vasayati). stay in a place; esp.
 
 v 1 4 vas] 
 
 [240] 
 
 stay over night, 38 2 , 100 8 (with ratrim) ; 
 dwell, abide ; lire. [cf. JUTTV, *F<NT-TU, 
 ' dwelling-place, town ' ; Lat. ver-na, ' one 
 who lives in the house, i.e. slave ' or 
 'one who dwells in the land, i.e. native,' 
 like Eng. domestic, ' servant,' and domestic, 
 ' not foreign ' ; AS. wes-an, ' be ' ; Eng. 
 was, were.~] 
 
 + , take up one's abode in (a place), 
 occupy; enter upon, 62 8 . 
 + ud, cans, (cause to abide out, i.e.) 
 remove from its place, 97 u ? . 
 
 up a, 1. stay with; wait; 2. (with 
 a specialization of mg like that in Eng. 
 abs-tain, 'hold off, esp. from food or 
 drink') wait, and so stop (eating), fast. 
 -f ni, dwell (of men and of beasts). 
 + p r a t i , have one's dwelling. 
 
 V 4 vas (vasayati; vasita). cut. [cf . Lat. 
 vomis, *vos-mis, vomer, ' plow-share, colter.'] 
 -f- ud , cut away or off, 97 14 1. 
 
 vasanta, m. spring. ['the dawning or 
 lighting-up' year-time, Vivas, 11 72 s -*: 
 see 1 vas : cf. <eap, *Fe<r-ap, Lat. ver, *ve-er, 
 *ves-er, 'spring.'] 
 
 vasistha, a. most excellent, best; as m. 
 Vasishtha, name of one of the most 
 famous Vedic seers, 78 19 N. [formed as 
 superl. to vasu, fr. Vivas as a verbal 
 (467), the verbal having the same trans- 
 ferred sense as the adj. vasu, q.v.] 
 
 vasu, a. excellent, good; 1. as m. good 
 (of gods), 76 11 ; -2. as m. pi. The Good 
 Ones, the Vasus, a class of gods, RV.x. 
 125. 1 ; 3. as n. sing, and pi. good, 
 goods, wealth, [prop. ' shining, i.e. splen- 
 did,' V 1 vas, ' shine,' but w. a transfer of 
 mg like that in the Eng. splendid as used 
 by the vulgar for ' excellent ' : connection 
 w. r t vs, tvs, 'good,' and *l, 'well,' is im- 
 probable, see ayu.] 
 
 vasu-dha [352], a. yielding good; vasu- 
 dha [364], / the earth ; the land. 
 
 vasudhadhipa, m. (lord of the earth, 
 i.e.) king, prince, [adhipa.] 
 
 vasum-dhara, a. holding good or 
 treasures ; -a, /. the earth, [vasum + 
 dhara, 1250a: we should expect vasu 
 (ace. s. neuter, or stem), not vasu-m 
 (masculine!), 341.] 
 
 vasu-gravas, a. perhaps [1298a] hav- 
 ing good fame, or else [1297 and 1280b] 
 having wealth-fame, i.e. famed for wealth. 
 
 vasu-sampurna, a. treasure-filled. 
 [Vlpr, 'fill.'] 
 
 V vasuya (vasuyati). crave good, [de- 
 nom. of vasu, 1058 1 , 1061.] 
 
 vasuya, f. desire for good; longing. 
 [V vasuya, 1149 6 .] 
 
 vastr, TO. illuminer; or, as adj., lighting 
 up. [Vivas, 'shine,' 1182, 375 8 .] 
 
 vastr a, n. garment, piece of clothing; 
 cloth. [V2vas, 'clothe,' 1185a.] 
 
 vastra-vestita.a. covered with clothes, 
 well dressed. 
 
 vastranta, m. border of a garment, 
 [anta.] 
 
 V vah (vahati, -te; uvaha, uhe; avaksit; 
 vaksyati; udha[222]; vodhum; udhva; 
 -lihya; uhyate). 1. conduct, 84 u ; 
 carry, esp. the oblation, 85 1 , 93 M , 94 *; 
 bring with team, 73 n , 81 u , or car, 72 *, 
 87 w ; draw (wagon), guide (horses) ; 2. 
 intrans. travel; proceed (in a wagon); 
 3. pass, be borne along ; 4. flow, 
 carry with itself (of water) ; 5. (like 
 Ger. heimfiihren) bring home to the 
 groom's house, wed; 6. carry, 43 Ui16 , 
 52 9 ; bear, 26 * ; carry far and wide, i.e. 
 spread (a poem, fragrance), 54 2 . 
 
 [for *vagh : cf . ox os > *FOX OS > ' wagon ' ; 
 OXOA"" 'ride'; Lat. veh-ere, 'carry'; vehi- 
 culum, 'wagon'; AS. weg-an, 'carry, bear,' 
 whence Eng. weigh, 'lift' (as in weigh 
 anchor), 'find weight of by lifting' (cf. 
 bhara) ; AS. ivsegn or wxn, Eng. wain, 
 Dutch wagen (whence the borrowed Eng. 
 wagon), 'that which is drawn, i.e. wagon'; 
 further, Lat. vi-a, ve-a, *veh-ia, ' that which 
 is to be travelled over, way'; AS. weg, 
 Eng. way, ' that which carries ' one to a 
 place.] 
 
 + a , bring hither or to. 
 + ud, 1. bear or bring up; 2. esp. 
 lead out (a bride from her father's house), 
 wed. 
 
 + pari, 1. lead about; 2. esp. lead 
 about (the bride or the wedding proces- 
 sion), wed. 
 + p r a , carry onward.
 
 [241] 
 
 [V vajaya 
 
 + vi, lead away, esp. the bride from her 
 
 parents' house, and so wed, marry; mid. 
 
 get married. 
 
 + s a m , carry together ; carry, 
 vah, vbl. carrying, drawing, in cpds. 
 
 [Vvah.] 
 vahatii, m. wedding procession ; wedding. 
 
 [Vvah, 1161c.] 
 vahya, n. portable bed, litter. [Vvah, 
 
 1213 : for mg, cf. Eng. bier and verb 
 
 bear.'] 
 vahye-gaya,a. lying on litters, [vahya, 
 
 1250c : acct, 1270.] 
 V Iva (vati; vavati; avasit [882]; vas- 
 
 yati; vata; vatum; vapayati [1042d]). 
 
 blow, [cf . aiifj-t, *a-Frj-ytti, ' blow ' ; Goth. 
 
 va-ian, Ger. weh-en, AS. wdwan, 'blow'; 
 
 aii-pa, ' breeze ' ; cb?p, *aFr)p, ' air ' ; Lat. 
 
 vetitu-s (a participial form which has 
 
 made a transition to the vowel-declension 
 
 cf. vasanta and 1172 3 ' 4 ), 'wind,' Eng. 
 
 wind; AS. we-der, Eng. wea-ther, 'wind 
 
 (e.g. in weather-cock), condition of the air ' : 
 
 see vata and vayii, ' wind.'] 
 
 + a, blow hither. 
 
 + nis, 1. (blow out, intransitively, i.e.) 
 
 go out, be extinguished; 2. intrans. 
 
 (blow till one gets one's breath, and so) 
 
 cool off; cans. 1. extinguish; 2. 
 
 cool off, transitively, i.e. refresh. 
 
 + para, blow away. 
 
 + p r a , blow or move forward, intrans. 
 
 + vi, blow asunder, i.e. scatter to the 
 
 winds. 
 V 2va (vayati [761d2]; uvaya [784 2 ]; 
 
 vayisyati; uta; 6tum; uyate). weave, 
 
 interweave, both lit., and also (like Lat. 
 
 serere), fig., of hymns and songs; plait. 
 
 [orig. idea perhaps ' wind ' or ' plait ' : 
 
 root-forms are u, va, and vi : cf. iVe'o, 
 
 *p;T6o, ' willow ' ; ola-os, ' osier ' ; Lat. vi-ere, 
 
 ' plait ' ; vi-men, ' plaited work ' ; olvii, 
 
 ' vine ' ; olvos, ' wine ' ; Lat. vlnum, ' wine ' ; 
 
 vi-tis, ' vine,' Eng. withy or withe, ' pliant 
 
 twig,' Ger. Weide, ' withe, willow.'] 
 va, enclitic particle, following its word. 1. 
 
 or; va, va, 50 17 , 64 *>, 96 i 2 - 23 , 
 
 9718,19. % va, 77 6 , 24 6, 59 9 ' 29 , 64 18 , 
 
 972.3.16^ 10 42i. similarly, 35 6, 59, 84 9 ; 
 
 ;; va, 20 4 , 91 9 ; -further: 
 
 va, yadi va , va, 28 12 ;, va, 
 va_api, 62 2 ; , (va omitted), 
 va, va, 61 23 , Q2 1 ; finally, na, 
 va^api, ca, neither , nor , nor , 
 63 4 ; atha va, see atha 6; uta va, see 
 uta ; 2. va, for eva, 59 10 N. ; 3. with 
 interrogates: kim va, what possibly, 
 17 19 ; so 18 i. [cf . Lat. -ve, ' or.'] 
 
 vakya, n. 1. speech, words; 2. as 
 technical term, periphrasis, e.g. virasenasya 
 sutas/or virasena-sutas. [Vvac.] 
 
 v a g - d o s a t , by or as a bad consequence 
 of his voice, i.e. because he was fool 
 enough to let his voice be heard, [vac : 
 see dosa.] 
 
 vaghat [like dasat, 444 2 ], m. the pledg- 
 ing one, i.e. institutor of a sacrifice, not 
 the priest, but the yajamana. [perhaps 
 akin are ttf^-oyttcu, Lat. vovere, *vogv-ere, 
 ' vow.'] 
 
 vanmaya, a. consisting of voice or 
 utterance. [vac : see 1225 2 and 
 maya.] 
 
 vac [391], f. 1. speech, voice, word, 
 utterance, sound ; vacam vy-a-hr, utter 
 words, 3 l , and vacam vad, speak words, 
 94 9 , verb-phrases, used like a simple verb 
 of speaking, and construed w. the ace. of 
 the person (see 274b) ; perhaps (utterance, 
 i.e.) sacred text, 91 2 ; 2. personified, The 
 Word, Vach, Aoyos. [v/vac, q.v.] 
 
 vacam-yama, a. restraining or holding 
 one's voice, silent. [1250a, 1270 1 and b.] 
 
 vacaka, a. speaking ; as m. speaker. 
 [Vvac, 1181.] 
 
 vacika, a. verbal, consisting of words, 
 [vac, 1222e.] 
 
 vacya, grdv. 1. to be spoken; 2. to 
 be spoken to. [Vvac, 1213a.] 
 
 v aj a , m. 1. swiftness ; courage, esp. of the 
 horse; 2. race, struggle; 3. prize of 
 race or contest; booty; reward in general; 
 treasure, good. [prob. akin w. Vvaj, q.v.: 
 orig. ' strength and liveliness,' ' that in 
 which strength and courage show them- 
 selves,' and then 'the result of quick 
 and brave struggle.'] 
 
 V vajaya (only in ppl., vajayant). crave 
 treasure; seek good, 74 16 ; cf. Vvaj. 
 [denom. of vaja, 1058.] 
 
 16
 
 Vvafich] 
 
 [242] 
 
 V vanch (vanchati; vanchita). wish, [for 
 *vansk, orig. inchoative (cf. V 1 is) to 
 v'van, q.v. : cf. Ger. Wunsch, 'a, wish'; 
 AS. wusc, 'a. wish,' whence verb wyscan, 
 'wish,' whence Eng. verb wish, whence 
 noun wish.'] 
 
 vanijya, n. merchant's business, trade, 
 [vanij, 1211.] 
 
 vata, m. 1. wind; air; 2. Vata, god 
 of the wind. [V 1 va, ' blow ' : acct, 
 1176c : cf. Icelandic OS-inn, AS. Wod-en, 
 Old High Ger. Wuot-an, names of the 
 highest Germanic god, Odin: the name 
 still lives in the Eng. Wednes-day, AS. 
 Wodn-es dseg : some connect Woden w. 
 
 V vat, ' inspire, excite.'] 
 vata-svanas, a. having the roar of the 
 
 wind, i.e. blustering, exhibiting noisy 
 violence, tumultuous. 
 
 vataikabhaksa, a. having wind as sole 
 food, i.e. fasting, [vata - ekabhaksa.] 
 
 vada, m. speech, expression, statement. 
 [Vvad.] 
 
 vada-yuddha, n. speech-fight, i.e. con- 
 troversy. 
 
 vadayuddha-pradhana, a. devoted to 
 controversy ; as m. eminent controver- 
 sialist.] 
 
 vadin, a. speaking. [Vvad, 1183 3 .] 
 
 vanaprastha, m. a Brahman of the 
 third order, who has passed through the 
 stages of student and householder (see 
 agrama) and dwells in the woods, 65 3 N. ; 
 hermit. [vanaprastha : for mg, cf. 
 tpr)/j.lrr)s, Eng. hermit, and iprift-la, 'soli- 
 tude, desert.'] 
 
 vanara, HI. monkey, ape. 
 
 vapl, f. oblong pond; lake. [V2vap, 
 ' heap up, dam up,' and so, perhaps, orig. 
 'a dam' (cf. x^A" 1 * 'dam,' from x<ta, 
 'throw or heap up'), and then, by me- 
 tonymy, 'the pond made by the dam.'] 
 
 vapi-jala, n. lake-water, [perhaps the 
 first element is here to be taken in its orig. 
 sense of ' dam,' so that the whole means 
 prop. ' dam-water,' and so ' pond-water.'] 
 
 vain, see 491. 
 
 yam a, a. lovely, pleasant; as n. & lovely 
 thing, a joy. [Vvan: cf. dhuma and 
 
 I 1 dhvan.] 
 
 vayasa, m. 1. bird; 2. esp. crow; 
 -si, f. crow-hen. [Ivayas, 'bird,' 1208a.] 
 vayii, m. wind, [v'l va, 'blow,' 1165.] 
 var, n. water, [cf. ovp-o-v, orig. 'water,' 
 and so, as hi Eng., ' urine ' ; Lat. urlndri, 
 ' stay under water ' ; ur-lna, ' urine ' ; Ur-ia, 
 ' Water-town,' a port in Apulia ; prob. 
 akin is AS. wser, 'sea.'] 
 
 1 var a, m. tail-hair, esp. of a horse, 
 [prob. akin w. ovpr], 'tail.'] 
 
 2 var a, m. 1. choice treasure; 2. 
 moment chosen or determined for any 
 thing, appointed time, turn; 3. time 
 (as used with numerals); varam varam, 
 time and again; 4. the time or turn 
 (of one of the planets which rule in suc- 
 cession the days of the week), and so, 
 day of the week, day. [V 2 vr, ' choose ' : 
 identified by some w. &pa, ' time, seasqn,' 
 see under Vya.] 
 
 var ana, a. warding off (those that attack 
 it), and so strong or ungovernable (of 
 wild beasts); as m. elephant. [\lvr, 
 'cover, ward off,' 1150. lb.] 
 
 varanasi, f. Varanasi, the modern 
 Benares. 
 
 vari, n. water, [see var.] 
 
 vari-stha, a. situated in the water, t.e. 
 (of the sun's disk) reflected in the water. 
 
 vavd, particle, emphasizing the word which 
 it follows. surely, just. [for double 
 acct, see Whitney 94.] 
 
 V vag_ (va^yate [761c] ; vavae ; avi- 
 vagat [861]; vacita ; vagitva). bleat; 
 low; cry (of birds), [see vaa, Lat. 
 vacca, 'cow,' and vagra.] 
 
 vac_rA, a. lowing (of kine). [Vvac,, 
 1188a.] 
 
 vasd, m. 1. prop, a staying overnight; 
 2. an abiding, 32 5 ; 3. abiding-place, 
 23 2 \ [V3vas, 'dwell': for mg, cf. 
 bhavana.] 
 
 vasa-bhumi.y. dwelling-place. 
 
 vasara, 1. in Veda, as adj. of the 
 dawn ; ritptos ; 2. in classical Skt., 
 neuter, used as subst., also masculine, (prop. 
 time of dawn, as distinguished from 
 night, and so) day in general, [prop, a 
 secondary deriv. (1188d) fr. an obsolete 
 *vaa-ar, ' dawn/ V 1 vas, ' dawn ' ; see
 
 [243] 
 
 [V 1 vid 
 
 1 vas : and for the form vas-ar, cf . eap 
 
 and i-er, there given, and ah-ar, udh-ar, 
 
 430.] 
 vasa-veman, n. chamber for spending 
 
 the night, sleeping-room. 
 vasas, n. garment. [V2 vas, 'clothe.'] 
 vasin, a. dwelling. [\/3vas, 'dwell,' 
 
 1183 3 .] 
 vast a vy a, a. belonging to an abode; 
 
 as m. inhabitant, [vastu, 1212(12.] 
 vastu, m. n. dwelling. [\/3vas, 'dwell,' 
 
 vastos-pati, m. lord or Genius of the 
 dwelling, 77 2 N. [vastos, gen. of vastu 
 (1250d) + pati: acct, 1267a and d.] 
 vaha, a. carrying; carrying off. [Vvah.] 
 vahana, a. carrying off; as n. 1. beast 
 of burden, 56 s ; beast for riding; team; 
 vehicle ; 2. the carrying, 34 13 . [\/ vah, 
 1150. lb.] 
 
 1 vi [343e], m. bird. [cf. olwvos, *bri- 
 cavos, Lat. avi-s, ' bird.'] 
 
 2 vi, preposition. apart, asunder, away, 
 out ; denoting intensity in descriptive cpds 
 (1289), cf. vicitra, vibudha; denoting 
 separation or non-agreement in possessive 
 cpds (1305), cf. vimanas, etc. ; similarly 
 in the prepositional cpd (1310a), vipriya. 
 
 vingati [485], f. twenty. [cf. eftcoo-i, 
 
 Boeotian FI/COTJ, Lat. vlginti, ' twenty.'] 
 vikata, a. 1. exceeding the usual meas- 
 
 ure; and so 2. (like Eng. enormous) 
 
 monstrous, hideous; as m. Hideous, 
 
 name of a gander, [cf. 1245g.] 
 vikrama, m. a stepping out, appearance ; 
 
 esp. bold or courageous advance, courage, 
 
 might. [V kram + vi.] 
 vigata-samkalpa, a. with vanished 
 
 purpose, purposeless. [V gam. + vi : 
 
 1299.] 
 vigulpha, a. abundant. [origin un- 
 
 clear.] 
 vigraha, m. 1. separation; and so 2. 
 
 division; and so 3. discord, quarrel, 
 
 war. [V grab + vi.] 
 V vie (vinakti; vikta; vektum; -vicya). 
 
 separate, esp. grain from chaff by win- 
 
 nowing ; separate, in general. 
 
 + vi, separate out or apart; vivikta, 
 
 isolated, ana* so lonely. 
 
 vicaksana, a. appearing far and wide, 
 conspicuous; or, far-seeing. [\/caks + vi.] 
 
 vi-citra, a. 1. very variegated; 2. 
 differently colored, varied; 3. (full of 
 variety and surprises, and so) entertain- 
 ing, beautiful, [in mg 1, vi- has perhaps 
 intensive force ; in 2, perhaps variative.] 
 
 V vij (vijate; vivij6; avikta [834c]; vijis- 
 yati; vigna). move with a quick darting 
 motion, aiaaeiv ; (like Eng. start) move 
 suddenly from fear. [cf. AS. wlc-an, 
 'give way'; Eng. weak, 'yielding, soft, 
 feeble.'] 
 
 . + u d , start up ; be affrighted ; udvigna, 
 terrified. 
 
 vij ay a, m. victory; personijied, Victory, 
 name of a rabbit. [Vji + vi.] 
 
 vijiti,/. conquest, [v'ji + vi.] 
 
 vijitendriya, a. having the organs of 
 sense subdued, [vijita + indriya.] 
 
 vijneya, grdv. to be known or considered 
 as. [Vjna + vi, 963 3 a.] 
 
 vin-mutra, n. faeces and urine, [vis, 
 226b, 161 : for cpd, 1253b.] 
 
 vitatha, a. false, ['differing from the 
 so,' vi + tatha, 1314a.] 
 
 vitathabhinivega, m. inclination to- 
 wards that which is false, [abhinive^a.] 
 
 vitasti, f. a span, about nine inches or 
 twelve fingers, [prob. fr. Vtan + vi, and 
 so ' a stretch ' from the tip of the thumb 
 to that of little finger: for mg, cf. Eng. 
 noun span and verb span, 'extend over/ 
 and see vyama.] 
 
 vitana, m. n. 1. spreading out, exten- 
 sion ; 2. canopy. [V tan + vi : for mg 
 2, cf. Eng. expanse (of heaven) and ex- 
 pand.^ 
 
 vitta, ppl. gotten; as n. (like Lat. quaes- 
 tus) gettings, that which is got, property. 
 [V2vid, 'get.'] 
 
 Vivid (v6tti; v6da [790a] ; avedit ; 
 vedisyati, -te ; vetsyati, -te ; vidit& ; 
 veditum, v6ttum ; viditva ; -vidya ; ve- 
 dayati). 1. know; understand; per- 
 ceive ; ya evam veda, who knoweth thus, 
 who hath this knowledge, frequent formula 
 in the Brdhmanas,$7 3 ; vidyat, one should 
 know, it should be known or understood ; 
 2. recognize as ; nalam mam viddhi, 
 16*
 
 V 2 vid] 
 
 [244] 
 
 recognize me as N., know that I am N. ; 
 3. notice ; be mindful of, 75 ls ; bethink 
 one's self, 94 6 - 10 ; 4. believe; assume; 
 consider a person (ace.) to be (ace.), 
 43 19 ; ppl, vidvans, see s.v. 
 
 [whh v6da, vidma, cf. oT5a, fSyuev, AS. 
 tc wat, we witon, ' I know, we know ' ; Eng. 
 / wot, gerund to wit, noun wit, ' under- 
 standing ' : cf . also flSov, tiFtSov, ' saw ' ; 
 Lat. videre, ' see ' ; AS. untan, ' see ' ; 
 whence wlt-ga, 'seer, soothsayer, wizard' 
 (Icelandic vit-ki, 'wizard'), wicca, 'wizard,' 
 wicce, ' witch,' Eng. witch, masc. and fern. : 
 v6da is an old preterito-present, 'have 
 seen or perceived,' and so, 'know' see 
 V2vid: the forms of the other tense- 
 systems are comparatively modern.] 
 + anu, know along, i.e. from one end to 
 the other, know thoroughly. 
 + ni, caus. cause to know; do to wit; 
 announce; communicate. 
 
 V 2 vid (vindati, -te [758]; viv6da, vivid6; 
 avidat, avidata ; vetsyati, -te ; vittd. ; 
 v6ttum ; vittva ; -vidya). 1. find, 
 4 12 , etc.; get, 74 13 ; obtain (children), 
 l(X)5-9 ; _2. get hold of, 80 7 ; -3. pass. 
 vidyate : is found ; later, equiv. to there is, 
 there exists; ppl. vidana [619 8 ], found, 
 73 2) ; ppl. vitta, see s.v. 
 
 [orig. ident. w. Vivid, of which this is 
 only another aspect, namely that of ' see- 
 ing esp. an object looked for, i.e. of 
 finding': see Ivid.] 
 + .anu, find. 
 
 vid, vbl. knowing, at end of cpds. [V 1 vid.] 
 
 vida, a. knowing, at end of cpds. [do.] 
 
 vidatra, a. noticing, in cpds. [Vivid, 
 1185d.] 
 
 vidatha, n. directions, orders, [prop. 
 ' knowledge given, i.e. instructions,' 
 Vivid, 1163b.] 
 
 vidarhha, 1. m. pi. the Vidarbhans, 
 Vidarbha, name of a people, and of their 
 country, which was south of the Vindhya 
 mountains, and is now called Berar; 2. 
 m. sing. Vidarbha, i.e. a king of Vidarbha, 
 4 2 . [for mg 2, cf. "Norway, uncle of 
 young Fortinbras," Hamlet, i.2.28.] 
 
 vidarbha-nagari, f. city or capital 
 of Vidarbha, i.e. Kundina (kundina). 
 
 [vidarbha- does not stand in the rela- 
 tion of a gen. of appellation : see 295 a .] 
 
 vidarbh,a-pati, m. lord or king of 
 Vidarbha. 
 
 vidarbha-raj an, m. king of Vidarbha. 
 
 vid a sin, a. becoming exhausted, drying 
 up. [V das + vi, 1183 3 .] 
 
 vidya,/ 1. knowledge; a discipline or 
 science; esp. trayi vidya, the triple 
 science or knowledge of the holy word, as 
 hymn, sacrificial formula, and chant, or 
 the Rigveda, Yajurveda, and Samaveda; 
 2. esp. the science /car' e&xhv, i.e. magic; 
 a magic formula, spell. [V 1 vid, 1213d : 
 for mg 2, observe the equally arbitrary 
 specialization in Eng. spell, which in AS. 
 meant ' a saying.'] 
 
 vidya-dhara, a. keeping or possessed of 
 knowledge or the magic art ; as m. a, Vid- 
 yadhara, one of a class of genii, who are 
 attendants on Qiva, and reputed to be 
 magicians. 
 
 vidya-mada, m. knowledge-intoxication, 
 i.e. infatuated pritle in one's learning. 
 
 vidyavayo-vrddha, a. grown old in 
 knowledge and years, distinguished for 
 learning and age. [vidya + 3vayas, 
 1252.] 
 
 vidyut, 1. a. lightening; and so, as in 
 Eng., 2. /. lightning. [Vdyut + vi, 
 'lighten'] 
 
 vidvaj-jana, m. wise man. [vidvans, 
 1249a, 202.] 
 
 vidvans [461], ppl. knowing; wise, 17 18 , 
 etc.; learned; tvasta vidvan, a cunning 
 workman (cf. Eng. cunning and Old Eng. 
 cunnen, 'know'), 75 6 . [Vivid, 'know,' 
 790a, 803 2 .] 
 
 V 1 vidh (vidhati). worship a god (dat.) 
 with (instr.) ; honor (ace.) with (instr.). 
 [cf. vedhas.] 
 
 V 2 vidh (vindhate). lack or be without a 
 thing (instr.), viduari; be bereft or alone, 
 [see vidhava.] 
 
 V 3vidh, see Vvyadh. 
 
 vidh, vbl. boring through, wounding, at 
 end of cpds. [V 3 vidh or vyadh, 252, cf. 
 785.] 
 
 vidhdva,/ widow. [V 2 vidh, ' be bereft,' 
 1190: cf. ii-i6eos, 'youth without a wife
 
 [245] 
 
 [vibhidaka 
 
 bachelor ' ; Lat. viduus, vidua, ' widower, 
 widow ' ; AS. widwe, wuduwe, Eng. widow."] 
 
 vridha, /. proportion, measure; way; and 
 so kind, sort ; esp. at end of cpds [see 
 1302c 6] : e.g. tri-vidha, of three kinds, 
 three-fold, [prop. ' dis-position, arrange- 
 ment, order, method,' see V 1 dha + vi.] 
 
 vidhatavya, grdv. to be shown. [VI dha 
 + vi, mg 5.] 
 
 vidhatf, m. dis-poser, arranger. [VI dha 
 -f vi.] 
 
 vidhana, n. a dis-position, ordering, ordi- 
 nance; vidhanatas, according to (estab- 
 lished) ordinance. [VI dha + vi, 1150.] 
 
 vidhi, m. 1. a dis-position, ordinance, 
 prescription, rule (65 7 ), method; 2. 
 (method, i.e.) way, 3S 23 ; procedure; 3. 
 (the supreme disposition or ordaining, i.e.) 
 destiny, fate. [Vldha + vi, 1155. 2e, 
 345 2 : for mg 3, cf . Lat. destinare, ' estab- 
 lish, ordain,' and Eng. destiny."] 
 
 vidhivat, adv. according to rule; equiv. 
 to Lat. rite, [vidhi, 1107.] 
 
 vidhu, a. lonely (of the moon that 
 wanders alone among the star-hosts) ; 
 as m. moon. [prob. fr. V2vidh, 1178.] 
 
 vidhura, a. 1. alone, bereft; 2. suf- 
 fering lack, miserable ; 3. disagreeable ; 
 as n. trouble, [prob. fr. V2 vidh, through 
 the intermediate vidhu, 1188f.] 
 
 vidhnra-dargana, n. sight of adversity. 
 
 vidheya, grdv. to be done, [see VI dha 
 + vi, mg5: also 963 8 a.] 
 
 vinaya, m. 1. training, breeding, i.e. 
 formation of manners; and so 2. trans- 
 ferred (like the Eng. breeding), manners, 
 good breeding, politeness. [Vnl + vi.] 
 
 vina, prep, without, w. instr. or ace. [1127, 
 1129.] 
 
 viniti, f. (good breeding, esp.) modesty. 
 [Vni + vi: see vinaya.] 
 
 vino da, m. exactly like Eng. di-version; 
 amusement, [see V nud + vi.] 
 
 V vind, see V2vid. 
 
 vindhya, m. Vindhya, name of the 
 mountain-range crossing the Indian pen- 
 insula and separating Hindustan from 
 the Deccan. 
 
 vindhyatavl, /. the Vindhya-forest. 
 [atavL] 
 
 V vip (vepate; vivipe ; avepista; vepa- 
 yati). be in trembling agitation; tremble 
 or shake ; cans, shake, trans, [cf. Lat. 
 vibrdre, 'shake, brandish/ from *vib-ru-s, 
 mvip-ru-s, 'shaking'; AS. wsefre (formed 
 like *vip-ru-s), ' moving this way and 
 that,' whence Eng. waver; Eng. frequen- 
 tative whiffle, ' veer about, blow in gusts ' ; 
 whiffle-tree, so called from its constant 
 jerky motion (-tree means 'wooden bar,' 
 see daru).] 
 
 vip ana, m. trading-place, shop; -I, f. 
 shop. [Vpan + vi, 1156.] 
 
 vipatti,/. a coming to nought, destruc- 
 tion. [Vpad + vi, 1157.] 
 
 vipad, / misfortune, trouble. [Vpad + 
 vi, 383a.] 
 
 vipaka, m. the ripening, esp. of the fruit 
 of good or bad deeds, and so the conse- 
 quences ; the issue, in general. [Vpac + 
 vi, 216.1.] 
 
 vipra, 1. a. agitated, inspired; as subst. 
 he who gives utterance to pious emotion 
 at the altar, poet, singer, 74 11 - 18 ; 2. 
 a. (inspired, i.e.) gifted with superior 
 insight, wise, of a god, 79 13> 17 ; 3. as TO. 
 a Brahman, 60 15 , etc. [Vvip, 1188a: 
 mg 3 is to be taken directly from 1.] 
 
 vipriya, a. not dear, unpleasant; as n. 
 something disagreeable, an offense. [2 vi 
 + priya, see vi and 1310a end.] 
 
 vi-budha, a. very wise (vi- is intensive, 
 1289) ; as m. a god. 
 
 vibudhanucara, ?H. attendant of a god. 
 [anucara.] 
 
 vibudhevara, m. a lord of the gods. 
 [igvara.] 
 
 vibhava, m. 1. development or growth; 
 
 2. (the result of growth, i.e.) power, 
 ana* so lordship, majesty, high position ; 
 
 3. sing, and pi. (like Ger. Vermogen) 
 property, possessions. [V bhu + vi : cf . 
 vibhu and vibhuti.] 
 
 vibhavan, f. -vari, a. shining far and 
 wide. [Vbha + vi, 1169. Ib and 2 2 , 
 
 vibhidaka, m. n. the large tree Termi- 
 nalia Bellerica; one of the nuts of this 
 tree, which were used for dicing; a die, 
 dice, [perhaps 'the destroyer,' fr. Vbhid
 
 vibhu] 
 
 [246] 
 
 + vi : if so, we must suppose that the 
 name was first given to the die as die, 
 and applied secondarily to nut and 
 tree.] 
 
 vibhii, a. 1. pervading, far-reaching; 
 unlimited, 74 2 ; 2. powerful, mighty, 
 of Indra, 6 12 - 15 ; as subst. lord or ruler. 
 [Vbhu + vi, 354: for 2, cf. vibhava 1 
 and 2, and vibhuti.] 
 
 vfbhuti,y. 1. development or growth; 
 2. (the result of growth, i.e.) power, 
 esp. of a lord or ruler. [Vbhu + vi, 1157d : 
 cf. vibhava and vibhu.] 
 
 vi-manas, a. (having an away-removed 
 mind or heart, i.e.) out of one's senses or 
 disheartened. [1305.] 
 
 vimarda, m. destruction; (of sleep) dis- 
 turbance. [Vmrd+vi.] 
 
 vimana, a. traversing, esp. the sky; 
 as m. n. a palatial car of the gods that 
 moves through the air, sky-chariot. 
 [V 1 ma + vi, ' measure/ q.v. : 1150.] 
 
 vi-mukha, a. having the face away; 
 vimukha yanti, they go (with averted 
 faces, i.e.) homewards. [1305.] 
 
 vi-rajas, a. having dust away, dustless, 
 pure. [1305.] 
 
 viraha, m. 1. abandonment, separation 
 from ; 2. absence, freedom from. [V rah 
 + vi.] 
 
 virama, m. stop, end, pause. [Vram+vi.] 
 
 virodhin, a. hindering, disturbing. 
 [Vrudh + vi, 1183 3 .] 
 
 vilasa, m. joy. [V las + vi.] 
 
 vivara, m. n. opening; hole (of creatures 
 that live in the ground). [Vlvr + vi, 
 'uncover, open.'] 
 
 vi-varna, a. having the color away, 
 colorless, pale. [1305.] 
 
 vivarna-vadana,a. pale-faced. [1298a.] 
 
 vivasvan, a. lighting up; vivasvabhis, 
 as adv. [1112c], so that it lights up ; as n.; 
 perhaps, flash, spark. [V 1 vas + vi, ' light 
 up,' 1169b.] 
 
 vivasvant, a. lighting up; as m. Vivas- 
 vant, name of a god of the dawning day- 
 light or morning-sun, father of the twins 
 Yama and Yami and of the A9vins, 
 8513.H. [Vlvas + vi, 'light up,' see 
 1233e.] 
 
 vivaha, m. fetching home of the bride, 
 wedding, marriage. [Vvah + vi.] 
 
 vivaha-catustay a, n. marriage-qua- 
 ternion, i.e. the marrying of four wives. 
 
 vivahagni, m. wedding-fire, [agni.] 
 
 vividha, a. having different kinds, i.e. 
 of different sorts, various. [2 vi + vidha, 
 334 2 , 1305.] 
 
 vivrddhi, f. growth; increase in size; 
 increase. [Vvrdh + vi, 1157. Id.] 
 
 viveka, m. 1. a separating apart ; 2. 
 discrimination, discernment, good judg- 
 ment. [Vvic + vi, 216.1: for mg 2, cf. 
 discrimination w. Lat. discrimindre, ' sepa- 
 rate/ fr. discrimen of the same root as 
 discernere, ' separate ' ; cf . also discernment 
 with discernere. .] 
 
 V vi (viati, -te; vivea, vivic^ ; aviksat; 
 veksyati, -te ; vista ; vestum ; -vigya ; 
 vegayati). settle down; go in; go into, 
 enter, [with vea, 'house/ cf. O!KOS, 
 'house' (analogous to entry from enter); 
 Lat. vlcus, 'settlement, village/ whence 
 the borrowed AS. wlc, ' village ' ; Goth. 
 veihs, ' village ' ; Lat. villa, *vic(u)la, ' small 
 settlement, farm': see further vfg and 
 vec.a.] 
 
 + a, go into, enter; pervade, KV.x. 125.6; 
 avista : actively, having entered ; passively, 
 entered by, filled with ; caus. cause to 
 go into, put into, communicate. 
 + upa, settle down upon; sit down; 
 upavista, seated. 
 
 + ni, mid. go in; go home (to house or 
 nest) ; settle down to rest. 
 + abhi-ni, settle down to ; be inclined 
 towards, fig., as in Eng. ; be bent upon, 
 -fpra, enter, get into; w. ace., 85 2 ; 
 w. loc., 18 23 ; without expressed object : 
 enter, 8*; go in, 33"; go home, 103 21 ; 
 penetrate, pierce ; caus. cause to enter. 
 + sam-pra, go in;w. grham, go home; 
 w. niveganam, go to bed ; enter, w. loc. 
 + s a m , enter together, i.e. make their 
 appearance together or come hither to- 
 gether, 86 16 ; caus. cause to enter upon, 
 put or set upon. 
 
 viQ (vit, vigam, vidbhis [218 3 ]), / - 1. a 
 settlement, i.e. dwelling-place ; ana" so 
 house ; 2. a settlement, i.e. the com-
 
 [247] 
 
 [vis 
 
 munity, clan, folk; vigam patis, lord of 
 peoples, i.e. simply prince ; tribe or host 
 (of gods), 71 18 , 78 4 ; -3. the folk, as 
 distinguished from the Brahmans and 
 Kshatriyas, the third caste, later called 
 vaigya; a man of the third caste, 59 22 . 
 [Vvig, q.v. : cf. Acapiees Tpixd-w-es, ' three- 
 tribed Dorians'; also Keltic vie in Ordo- 
 vlc-es, people of North Wales, and Lemo- 
 vlc-es, people of modern Limoges.] 
 
 viganka, f. hesitation. [Vgank + vi, 
 1149.] 
 
 vigakha, a. having spread-asunder 
 branches, i.e. forked ; -e, dual f. Viyakhe, 
 name of an asterism. [2 vi + gakha, 
 1305, 334 2 .] 
 
 vigakhila, m. Vi9akhila, name of a mer- 
 chant, [vigakha, 1227 : perhaps named 
 after the asterism because various green- 
 grocer's commodities belonged to it.] 
 
 vigala, a. capacious, spreading, broad. 
 
 vigistata, f. condition of being distin- 
 guished, distinction, superiority, [vigista, 
 1237 : see gis + vi.] 
 
 vigesa, m. 1. that which separates or 
 distinguishes one thing from another, 
 distinction or difference ; and so 2. (like 
 Eng. distinction) eminence, excellence ; 
 vigesena, as adv. [1112b], to an eminent 
 degree, i.e. very much, especially, like 
 French par excellence. [V gis + vi.] 
 
 vigesatas, adv. 1. at end of a cpd, 
 according to the difference of , 66 28 ; 
 
 2. (like vigesena, see above) especially, 
 [vigesa, 1098b.] 
 
 vig-pati, m. master of the house. 
 
 [euphony, 218 5 : acct, 1267a: cf. Old 
 
 Prussian wais-patti-n, ' house-mistress ' ; 
 
 Lithuanian vesz-pat-s, ' lord.'] 
 vigrabdham, see Vgrambh. 
 vigrambha, m. confidence. [Vgrambh 
 
 + vi.] 
 vigrambhalapa, m. confidence-talk, 
 
 familiar conversation, [alapa.] 
 vigva [524], pron. adj. la. all, every; 
 
 every one ; common in Veda, but replaced 
 
 in the Brahmana and later by sarva, q.v.; 
 
 Ib. vigve devas : all the gods, 82 l ; or 
 the All-gods (as a class, see deva 2b), 
 88 G - 8 , 90 8 ; -Ic. vigvam, as n. The All, 
 
 T& TTOJ', 92 12 ; 2. sometimes, entire, whole ; 
 so 71 17 . 
 
 vigva-caksas, a. all-beholding, [see 
 1296 3 : acct, 1298c.] 
 
 vigvatas, adv. from or on all sides, 
 everywhere, [vigva, 1098b: acct, 1298c.] 
 
 vigvato-mukha, a. having a face on 
 all sides, whose face is turned every- 
 whither. [1306.] 
 
 vigva-dargata, a. to be seen by all, 
 all-conspicuous, [acct, 1273, 1298c.] 
 
 vigva-deva, m. pi. the All-gods (see 
 deva2b), EV. x. 125.1. [vigva + deva: 
 acct, 1280a, 1298c.] 
 
 vigva-bhesaja, a. all-healing, [vigva 
 + bhesaja: acct, 1280a, 1298c.] 
 
 vigva-gcandra, a. all-sparkling, [vigva 
 + gcandra: acct, 1280a, 1298c.] 
 
 vigva-sfj, a. all-creating; as m. pi. All- 
 creators, name of certain creative beings. 
 
 v i g v a d , a. all-consuming, [vigva + ad.] 
 
 vigvayu, assumed as stem of vigvayos, 
 75 1 , prop, a form of transition to the u- 
 declension of the stem vigvayus, and mean- 
 ing either friendly to all, all-friendly (if 
 taken with mama, i.e. varunasya), or else 
 all living creatures (if taken with rastram, 
 'lordship over') ; see vigvayus 1 and 2. 
 
 vigvayus, 1. a. belonging to or appear- 
 ing to all life or living creatures, i.e. 
 either friendly to all or all-known (applied 
 to gods), or else dwelling in all (of the 
 Genius of Life), 85 18 ; -2. as n. all-life, 
 i.e. all living creatures, men and beasts, 
 [vigva + ayus, acct, 1280a, 1298c : for 
 mg 1, see 1294 2 .] 
 
 vigvasa, m. confidence. [Vgvas + vi.] 
 
 vigvasa-karana, n. reason for con- 
 fidence. 
 
 vigvasa-bhumi, /. proper vessel for 
 confidence, one who may safely be 
 trusted. 
 
 vigvaha, adv. always, for evermore, 
 [vigva, see HOOa and cf. 1104 2 - 8 : acct, 
 cf. 1298c.] 
 
 V vis (vivesti; viv6sa; veksydti, -te; 
 vista; -visya). work, be active, accom- 
 plish. 
 
 vis (vit, visam, vidbhis), f. excrement, 
 faeces.
 
 visa] 
 
 [248] 
 
 visa, n. poison. [prop, 'the potent or 
 overpowering,' Vvis: no less arbitrary is 
 the specialization in Eng. poison, fr. Lat. 
 potionem, 'draught': cf. Us, Fjo-or, Lat. 
 virus, 'poison.'] 
 
 visa-kumbha, m. jar of poison. 
 
 visaya, m. 1. prop, working, and so 
 sphere of activity or influence ; 2. one's 
 department or line or peculiar province ; 
 and so, generalized 3. province, field, 
 domain, empire, country; 4. field of 
 activity of one of the sense-organs (e.g., 
 sound is the visaya of the ear), a mere 
 specialization of mg 1 ; object of sense, 
 pleasure of sense ; 5. object in general. 
 [Vvis: but the formation of the stem is 
 not clear.] 
 
 visada, m. despondency, dejection. [Vsad 
 
 visu, adv. on both sides. 
 
 visuvat- samkr anti, f. equinox-passage 
 (of the sun from one zodiacal sign to the 
 next) ; the time of equinox-passage, the 
 equinox, [visuvant.] 
 
 -vi suv ant, 1. a. having or taking part 
 on both sides, i.e. keeping or being in the 
 middle; 2. m. middle day (e.g. of a 
 long sacrifice); 3. m. n. esp. middle 
 day between the solstices, the vernal or 
 autumnal equinox. [visu, 1233c and 
 b end.] 
 
 V vist (vestate; vistita; -vSstya; vesta- 
 yati). wind one's self about; caus. wind 
 around, envelope, wrap up, dress. 
 
 vlsnu, m. Vishnu, name of a god, whose 
 chief work in the Veda is the measuring 
 of the sky in three paces, and who became 
 one of the Hindu Trinity, and extremely 
 important in the later sectarian devel- 
 opment of India; cf. brahman 2 and 
 giva. [prob. 'the mighty worker,' Vvis, 
 1162.] 
 
 visnu-garman , m. Vishm^arman, 
 name of a sage. [' having V. as his 
 protection' or else 'the delight of V.': 
 the mg of the cpd depends on its accent 
 (see 1302 1 and 1267 : ), and this is not 
 known.] 
 
 visnugarma-naman, a. possessing vis- 
 nuQarman as name, named V. [1249a 2 .] 
 
 visvanc [408], a. directed in both ways or 
 parted asunder, [visu + anc, 407.] 
 
 visa rj ana, n. the letting go ; evacuation. 
 [Vsrj +vi.] 
 
 vispasta, see VI pag + vi. 
 
 vispastartha, a. having clear or intel- 
 ligible meaning, [artha.] 
 
 vismaya, m. astonishment. [Vsmi + vi.] 
 
 vismayanvita, a. filled with astonish- 
 ment, [anvita, V i + anu.] 
 
 vi-hasta, a. 1. having the hands away, 
 handless ; and so 2. (like Eng. un- 
 handy) awkward; and so 3. perplexed, 
 confounded. [1305.] 
 
 viharin, a. wandering about. [Vlhr + 
 vi, 1183 8 .] 
 
 V Ivi (veti; vivaya, vivye; vita). 1. 
 seek eagerly; 2. accept gladly; enjoy; 
 3. strive to get; 4. fall upon. 
 
 [cf . Lat. vendri, ' hunt,' a denom. of 
 *ve-na, ' hunt ' ; AS. wci-ft, ' hunt ' ; Old 
 High Ger. weida, ' 1. the seeking, esp. of 
 food, i.e. hunting, fishing, and then 2. place 
 for getting food, pasture, and 3. food, 
 fodder ' ; weida appears w. mg 1 in Ger. 
 Waid-mann, 'hunter' (also as family 
 name, Weidmann, 'Hunter'), and w. mgs 
 
 2 and 3 in Weide, ' pasture, food ' : per- 
 haps 2 vayas, ' food,' q.v., comes f r. V vi 
 in mg 1, ' seek for, hunt,' and in this case 
 the development of mg is like that of 
 weida 3 and like that of Lat. venation-em, 
 ' hunting, game,' whence Eng. venison."] 
 
 + upa, seek after. 
 
 V 2 vi, see vya. 
 
 v i n a , f. lute. 
 
 vita, see Vi + vi; also referable to roots vi 
 and vya. 
 
 vita-darpa, a. having one's pride de- 
 parted; humbled. [Vi+vi.] 
 
 vita-raga, a. having one's passions de- 
 parted, i.e. having conquered one's pas- 
 sions, [do.] 
 
 vira, m. 1. man; esp. man of might, 
 hero ; in pi. Manner ; 2. hero, applied 
 to gods; 3. pi. (like Eng. men) re- 
 tainers, Mannen, 86 6 . [cognate with 
 
 3 vayas, ' strength ' : cf . Lat. vir, AS. wer, 
 ' manly or heroic man ' ; Eng. were-wolf, 
 ' man-wolf.']
 
 [249] 
 
 [vrksopari 
 
 V viraya (virayate [1067]). be a hero, 
 show one's self brave, [vira, 1058.] 
 
 viravant, a. having or rich in men or 
 heroic sons, [vira, 1233a.] 
 
 vira- su [352], a. bringing forth heroes 
 (as sons). 
 
 virasena, a. possessing a virasena or 
 hero-army ; as subst. m. Virasena, king 
 of Nishadha, like the Greek 'Hp6-crrpaTos in 
 formation and mg. [vlra-sena, 334 2 , 
 1297 : acct, 1295.] 
 
 virasena-suta, m. Virasena's son, I 8 . 
 [1264.] 
 
 vlra-sena,/. hero-army, army of heroes, 
 [vird + s6na, 1280b : acct, 1280 2 .] 
 
 virya, n. 1. manliness, courage; 
 strength ; 2. concrete, heroic deed, 
 [vira, 1212 d 4.] 
 
 vihasta, for vihasta, q.v., 52 12 . [see 
 1087 b.] 
 
 V Ivr (vrn6ti, vrnut6; vavara, vavre; 
 avarft ; vrtd ; varitum, vartum ; vrtva ; 
 -vftya; varayati). 1. cover, enclose, 
 encompass; surround, i.e. guard, 11 2 * ; 
 2. offensively, keep in, hold back or 
 captive ; vrta, pent up, 75 14 ; 3. de- 
 fensively, hold back, keep in check (75 n ), 
 ward off, hinder, restrain ; cans. 
 [1041 2 ], keep back, hinder, stop. 
 
 [cf. f-f\-/j.evos, 'enclosed' and 'held in 
 check,' referred to elfAco, Aeolic e\\<a, 
 *F \-vta ; el\ap, *Fe\-ap, ' cover, defense ' ; 
 Lat. ver-eri, 'be on one's guard, fear'; 
 vellus, '(cover, i.e.) pelt, fleece'; vallum, 
 ' defense, palisaded rampart, wall,' whence 
 the borrowed Eng. wall ; Eng. ware, wary, 
 ' on one's guard, cautious ' ; Ger. wehren, 
 'check, ward off'; Wehre, 'defense'; 
 with vartra, ' stopping,' and then ' a dam,' 
 cf Ger. Wehr, AS. wer, Eng. weir, '(water-) 
 stop, dam ' : for other cognates, see uru, 
 urna, varuna: cf. the derivs vala, vrtra, 
 variitha, varna, etc.] 
 -t-anu, cover over. 
 
 + a p a , uncover, open, [cf . the relation 
 of Ger. decken, ' cover,' and auf-decken, 
 'uncover.'] 
 + abhi, cover. 
 
 + a , cover ; avrta : covered, 33 2 ; con- 
 cealed; encompassed, surrounded, 3 9 ; 
 
 (covered with, i.e.) filled with, provided 
 with, 66 1. 
 
 + s a m - a , cover ; samavrta, surrounded. 
 + ni, keep down, suppress, ward off; 
 cans. [1041 2 ], stop, 98 4 . 
 + n i s , in ppl. nirvrta, pleased, con- 
 tented, free from care. [prop. ' uncov- 
 ered, not covered over, i.e. not dark or 
 gloomy,' and so ' clear, bright ' : cf . 
 V 1 VT + vi, which shows a similar meta- 
 phor.] 
 
 + pari, surround. 
 + p r a , cover. 
 
 + sam-pra, mid. cover completely. 
 + v i , uncover, open ; make open or clear, 
 illume, [cf. vllvr + nis.] 
 + s am, 1. cover over; 2. keep to- 
 gether or in order, and so put in order, 
 gather up, 26 2 \ 
 
 V 2vr(vrnite; vavre; avrta; varisyate; 
 vrtd ; varitum [254 3 ] ; varitva ; caus. 
 varayati, -te [1042b 3 ]). choose; prefer; 
 desire, wish ; choose for one's self, make 
 one's portion, 70 5 , 86 u ; varam vr, wish 
 a wish, make a condition, 94 1 ; caus. 
 [1041 2 ], choose. 
 
 [cf . Lat. volo, ' will ' ; Old Eng. wol, wul, 
 ' will,' still living in / won't, ' I wol not ' ; 
 Ger. Wahl, ' choice, selection,' whence 
 wahlen, ' select,' Chaucerian wail, ' select ' ; 
 Ger. wohl, Eng. well, 'according to one's 
 wish ' (see under 1 vara) : perhaps akin 
 are f3ov\o/j.ai, *fio\vofj.ai, Epic &6\ofj.cu, 
 'will,' and f)f\-repos, 'choicer, better,' 
 but this is disputed.] 
 + a , choose, desire. 
 
 vfka, 1. a. tearing, harming, in a-vrka; 
 2. m. (the tearer, i.e.) wolf. [\/*vrk or 
 *vrak, simpler form of V vrac : cf . \VKOS, 
 *F\VKOS, Church Slavonic vluku, Lat. lupus, 
 Eng. wolf.] 
 
 vrkka, dual m. the kidneys. 
 
 vrksa, m. tree, ['that which is felled,' 
 V*vrk (1197) or *vrak, simpler form of 
 Vvragc: for mg, cf. bar his.] 
 
 vrksa-traya, n. tree-triad, three trees. 
 
 vrksatraya-tale, under three (sepa- 
 rate) trees, see tala. 
 
 vrksopari, on the tree. [upari: see 
 'l314f.]
 
 \fvrj] 
 
 [250] 
 
 V vrj (vrnakti, vrnkte; vavarja; avark 
 [832]; varksydti, -te; vrkta; -vfjya; 
 varjayati). 1. turn; twist off; 2. 
 turn or set aside; 3. (turn aside, i.e.) 
 di-vert or keep away or alienate something 
 from some one ; 
 
 cans. [1041 -] 1. (set aside, i.e.) 
 abandon, shun; avoid, 25 21 , 104 3 ; -2. 
 (set aside, take out, and so, like ex-cipere) 
 except; varjayitva, with an excepting, 
 i.e. with exception of, 54 22 ; leave out, 
 exclude, separate. 
 
 [orig. ' bring out of its original direction 
 or position, by bending or diverting or 
 keeping in ' (in this last sense, cf. vrjana, 
 'enclosure/ and l-fpy-w, 'shut in'), and 
 so the opposite of Vlrj, 'stretch or reach 
 straight out,' q.v. : cf. also Lat. vergere, 
 'bend, turn'; Eng. wrick, 'to twist,' and 
 wriggle ; prob. cognate is wring, ' twist ' ; 
 also Eng. wrong, 'twisted, crooked' (as in 
 wrong-nosed, Wyclif), 'bad,' which shows 
 the same metaphor as vrjina and French- 
 Eng. tort, from Lat. torguere, ' twist.'] 
 
 vrjana, n. enclosure, esp. enclosed settle- 
 ment, and so, either dwelling-place (74 13 ) 
 or the dwellers. [Vvrj, q.v.: 1150. 2c.] 
 
 vrjina, a. crooked, wrong, opp. of rju, 
 'straight, right.' [Vvrj, 1177b: for the 
 mg, see Vvrj.] 
 
 V vrt (vartate, -ti; vavarta, vavrte [786]; 
 avrtat ; vartisyati, -te ; vartsyati, -te ; 
 vrtta ; vartitum ; -vftya ; vartayati, 
 -te). 1. turn or roll or move as does a 
 wheel; in general, move or come from 
 (all), 76 14 ; -2. (like Eng. take its 
 course) go on, take place; happen; eka- 
 payena vrt, go with a diminution-by-one, 
 i.e. decrease by one, 58 5 ; 3. (move 
 one's self about in a place, and so) abide, 
 exist, be, be present ; murdhni vrt, stand 
 at the head, be chief in importance, 22 21 ; 
 
 4. be in a certain condition, case, occu- 
 pation ; be concerned with (loc.), 10 s ; 
 
 5. live; live by (instr.), i.e. live upon, 
 104 2 ; 6. proceed, behave ; 7. atten- 
 uated in mg from sense 3 to that of a simple 
 copula, be, 51 4 ; vrtta, see s.v. 
 
 [cf . Lat. vert-ere, ' turn ' ; AS. weor'San, 
 'become,' Eng. worth, 'become, be to' (in 
 
 wo worth the day), Ger. werden, 'become'; 
 for transition of mg in Eng. and Ger., cf. 
 Eng. turn, which also means ' become ' (as 
 in turn traitor): cf. also Eng. -ward, as 
 in go south-ward, i.e. ' turned to the south, 1 
 fly up-war d, i.e. 'directed up,' etc. (see 
 anc) ; also Ger. Wirt-el, ' spindle-ring ' ; 
 Church Slavonic vret-eno, ' spindle ' : 
 
 further akin is, prob., AS. wriZan, 
 ' twist,' whence come : Eng. writhe ; AS. 
 wr&ft, 'a twisted band,' Eng. wreath; u-rist, 
 earlier hand-wrist, *-wri$-st, 'hand-turner': 
 
 with vrtta, cf . Lat. versus, ' turned,' 
 whence versdre, ' turn much ' : for mgs 
 3-6 of vrt, cf . Lat. versdri, whose senses 
 are quite parallel, and the Eng. phrase 
 " in whom we live and move and have oi:r 
 being."] 
 
 + anu, roll after; follow; and so, con- 
 tinue. 
 
 + a, act. turn hither (trans.), 73 6 ; so at 
 74 n (sc. ratham vas, 'your car'); mid. 
 turn (intrans.), roll back, 63 8 . 
 ' + upa_a, turn hither unto, 93 19 . 
 + abhi-pary-a, turn around unto. 
 + vy-a, turn away, intrans.; separate 
 from or part with (instr.), 86 8 , 96 22 . 
 -sam-a, turn back to meet; go home, 
 used esp. of a religious preceptor's pupil 
 who has finished his studies. 
 + ud, turn out (centrifugally), intrans., 
 fly asunder ; caus. burst asunder or open. 
 + ni, 1. turn back; 2. flee; 3. 
 turn away ; 4. turn from, abstain ; ni- 
 vrtta, see s.v. 
 
 + prati-ni, turn back from (all.). 
 + nis, roll out, intrans., and so (with a 
 metaphor like that in the Eng. e-volve itself 
 and Ger. sich ent-wickeln) develop, come 
 into being, 92 1S ; caus. e-volve from, i.e. 
 create from (abl), 57 16 . 
 + pari, turn around; move in a circle. 
 + p r a , 1. turn or move forward ; 2. 
 set out; 3. begin, set about; 4. en- 
 gage in; pra vrtta, see s.v.; caus. set 
 in motion. 
 
 + vi, turn away; part with (instr.), 88 3 ; 
 caus. whirl about, trans. 
 
 sam, unite, intrans., and so take shape, 
 form itself, come into being.
 
 [251] 
 
 [vrsan 
 
 vf t, vbl. turning, in cpds. [\fvrt.j 
 
 vrtta, ppl. 1. happened (Vvrt2); tad 
 vrttam, that took place ; 2. existing 
 (vrt 3); as n. 1. thing happened, 
 occurrence (vrt 2); 2. life, behavior 
 (vrt 5, 6). 
 
 vrttanta, m. occurrence, adventures, 
 story, [anta: force of anta not clear.] 
 
 vrtti.,/1 prop, an existing, and so (like 
 Eng. living) means of subsistence, sup- 
 port. [Vvrt 3, 5: cf. vartana.] 
 
 vrtti-nibandhana, n. means of sup- 
 port. 
 
 vrtta uj as, a. possessing existing strength, 
 i.e. mighty, [ojas.] 
 
 vrtra, 1. n. that which wards off or 
 holds in check, i.e. the enemy, 75 14 ; 2. 
 m. coverer, encloser; personified, Vritra, 
 demon of drought and darkness, principal 
 personification of the malign power that 
 covers or darkens the sky and encom- 
 passes (70 16 ) or withholds the heavenly 
 waters, selections xxxii. and Ixvii. ; slain 
 by Indra, 73 1S ; see 82 * and 97 19 . [V 1 vr, 
 'cover,' 1185b.J 
 
 vrtratara, comparative to vrtra (see 
 473 1 ). the arch-withholder. [acct ir- 
 regular, 471, 1242a 2 .] 
 
 vrtra-putra, a. having Vritra as son; 
 -a, /. the mother of V. [1302.] 
 
 vftha, adv. at will, at pleasure; for 
 pleasure, i.e. not for the sake of the gods. 
 [V2vr, 'choose, will,' 1101.] 
 
 vrtha-pagughna, a. slaying cattle for 
 pleasure ; as m. one who slays cattle for 
 pleasure, i.e. not for sacrifice. [1279.] 
 
 vrddha, ppl. I. grown, become great; 
 increased (of wealth), 42 1G ; 2. as adj. 
 grown up, opp. of young; old, aged; as 
 subst. old man, 28 12 ; 3. (grown great, 
 and so, like Lat. altus) eminent, distin- 
 guished. [Vvrdh, 160.] 
 
 vrddhatva, n. condition of being old, 
 old age. [1239.] 
 
 vrddhi, /. 1. growth, increase; 2. 
 interest (on money lent), 46 20 ; 3. the 
 (second) increment of a vowel, see 235-6. 
 [V vrdh, 1157. la, 160.] 
 
 V vrdh (vardhati, -te ; vavardha, va- 
 vrdhe ; avrdhat, avardhista ; vartsyati ; 
 
 vrddha ; vardhitum ; vardhayati, -te). 
 act. trans.: 1. elevate, make to grow, 
 make greater, strengthen; 2. Jig. ele- 
 vate inwardly, excite pleasantly, cheer, 
 inspire (cf. the metaphor in slang Eng. high, 
 'slightly intoxicated'), used of the effects 
 which the homage and sacrifices of men 
 are supposed to have on the gods ; 
 
 mid. intrans. : 3. grow, 24 3 ; thrive, 
 69 16 ; vardhate, he thrives, i.e. it goes 
 well with him, 65 ' 2 ; grow strong or greater 
 or mighty, 81 2 , 82 3 ; increase, 8 11 , 60 19 ; 
 4. Jig. be pleasantly excited, take de- 
 light in ; be inspired ; 
 
 caus. 1. make to grow; make 
 strong; bring up (a child), 46 8 ; increase, 
 trans., 64 21 ; 2. fig. excite pleasantly, 
 cheer, inspire; distinction between the 
 physical and jig. mgs not always to be made, 
 so 80 19 . 
 
 [cf. B\a.aTi], *F\ad-Ti), ' growth, a shoot,' 
 fi\acndv<a, ' grow ' ; op66s, *Fop6os, ' up- 
 right ' ; Lat. verb-er, ' a shoot, rod ' ; verb- 
 ena, '(sacred) twig.'] 
 
 + pra, grow on, grow up; pravrddha, 
 (like Lat. altus) exalted. 
 + v i , grow, increase, 2 19 . 
 + sam, grow; caus. make to grow; bring 
 up ; nourish, feed. 
 
 vrdh, vbl. being pleased, rejoicing. 
 '[Vvrdh.] 
 
 V vrs (varsati, -te ; vavarsa, vavrse ; 
 avarsit ; varsisyati, -te ; vrsta ; varsi- 
 tum; vrstva, -vrsya). rain; varsati 
 [303b], VOVTOS, while it is raining, [orig., 
 perhaps, more general, 'to pour down,' 
 esp. either the fructifying water of heaven 
 (masc.) upon the earth (fern.), or semen 
 of the bull or male animal upon the 
 female : with varsa, ' rain,' cf. e-fpo-at, 
 ' rain-drops ' ; with vrsan and vrsabha, 
 ' bull,' cf . Lat. verres, *vers-es, ' boar,' so 
 named from his great generative power, 
 just as the sow (see su) from her fe- 
 cundity.] 
 
 vrsa, used only at end of cpds [1315a] in 
 Veda, but later independently, instead of 
 vrsan. 
 
 vrsan [426b], adj. and subst. describing 
 or denoting all that was distinguished for
 
 vrsabha] 
 
 [252] 
 
 its strength and virility: 1. man, as 
 opposed to a castrated person, 70 u ; 2. 
 of animals : stallion ; bull ; boar ; 3. of 
 gods : manly, mighty, great ; of Indra, 
 74 5 ; of the Maruts, 73 5 ; of the Sun or 
 Sun-horse, 79 7 . [Vvrs, q.v., 1160c: cf. 
 apffTjv, stem *Fapfftv, ' male.'] 
 
 vrsabha, essentially the same as vrsan, 
 q.v. : esp. 1. bull ; with sahasra-grnga, 
 the thousand-horned steer, i.e. the sun or 
 (77 u ) the moon; 2. bull, as type of 
 greatness and might; most mighty one, 
 of Indra, 73 is. [Vvrs, 1199.] 
 
 vrsala, m. prop, manikin, i.e. little man, 
 and so, as term of contempt, a low person, 
 esp. a Qudra. [vrsa, 1227.] 
 
 V vrsasya (vrsasyati). desire the male, 
 be lustful, [vrsa, 1059e, 1058.] 
 
 V vrsaya (vrsayate). act as a vrsa, i.e.: 
 show one's manly strength or courage ; 
 be lustful; or simply, be eager. [vrsa, 
 1059b, 1058.] 
 
 vrsti,/rain. [Vvrs, 1157.] 
 
 V vrhorbrh (vrhati; vavarha; avrksat; 
 vrdha [224a] ; -vfhya). pluck, tear. 
 
 venu, m. reed, esp. bamboo-reed. 
 
 veda, m. 1. understanding, knowledge; 
 
 2. esp. the sacred knowledge, handed 
 down in triple form of re, yajus, and 
 saman, see these, and cf. (trayi) vidya; 
 
 later, the well-known collections called 
 Rigveda, Yajurveda, and Samaveda 
 (63 6 - 6 ), the holy scriptures, held to be a 
 revelation and so called gruti, 58 18 . 
 [Vivid.] 
 
 veda, m. tuft of strong grass (kuga or 
 
 mufija) tied so as to form a broom, 62 18 . 
 veda-traya, n. the three Vedas. 
 veda-nindaka, m. one who scoffs at 
 
 the Veda, infidel, 
 veda-punya, n. Veda-merit, sanctity 
 
 acquired by Veda-study, 
 veda-bahya, a. being outside of the 
 
 Veda, i.e. extra- Vedic, differing from or 
 
 conflicting with the Veda. [1265, veda- 
 
 being in an abl. relation.] 
 veda-vid[391], a. Veda-knowing. [1269.] 
 1 vedas, n. knowledge; possibly adj., 
 
 knowing, cf. na-vedas. [VI vid, ' know ' : 
 
 cf. 1151.2a,b.] 
 
 2 vedas, n. (like Lot. quaestus) gettings, 
 property, cf. vitta. [V 2 vid, ' get.'] 
 
 vedadhyayana, n. Veda-study, scrip- 
 ture-reading, [adhyayana.] 
 
 v 6 d i , f. sacrificial bed, i.e. a spot of ground 
 excavated two or three inches and covered 
 with straw and serving as a kind of altar. 
 
 vedin, a. knowing. [Vivid, 1183 3 .] 
 
 vedi-purisa, n. loose earth of the vedi. 
 
 vedhas, subst. adj. 1. worshipper of the 
 gods, worshipping, pious, devoted; 2. 
 generalized, faithful, true, used of Indra, 
 75 18 . [Vlvidh, 'worship a god,' 1151. 
 2b.] 
 
 vela, f. 1. end-point, limit; 2. esp. 
 limit of time, point of time, hour. 
 
 vega, m. 1. settler; neighbor. 2. (set- 
 tlement, i.e.) dwelling, house. [Vvig: cf. 
 O!KOS, 'house,' Old Lat. veicus, Lat. vlcus, 
 ' houses, quarter of a town, village ' : hence 
 the borrowed AS. wlc, ' town,' as in Eofor- 
 vnc, Eng. York, prop. ' Eber-stadt ' or 
 'Boar-town,' and perhaps in Nor-wich, 
 ' Nor-ton.'] 
 
 vegman, n. (settlement, i.e.) dwelling, 
 house, abode, chamber. [Vvig, 11 68. la.] 
 
 vai, postpositive particle, emphasizing the 
 preceding word, e.g. 3 17 , 96 13 ; rare in 
 the samhita, 90 2, 103 4 (in a quoted man- 
 tra) ; excessively common in the brahmana 
 (92 H.19, 93 6 } 944,13,18^ 956.15) and Epos 
 
 (7 6 , etc.); in brahmana often marking 
 the preceding word as the Jlrst of its clause 
 (cf. atha, near end of ma 3): so 94 6 , 95 12 , 
 96 12 , and in the examples just given; often 
 used, esp. in Epos, as a mere expletive 
 [see 1122a 4 ], so at end of a pada, 3 9 , 10 9 , 
 68 9 . 
 
 vaicitrya, n. variety, diversity, [vici- 
 tra, 1211.] 
 
 vain a v , f. -I, a. of reed, esp. of bamboo, 
 [venu, 1208c.] 
 
 v a i d a r b h a, f. -I, a. belonging to Vidar- 
 bha; as m. the Vidarbhan, i.e. king of 
 V.; asf. the princess of V., i.e. Dama- 
 yanti, 8 7 , etc. [vidarbha, 1208f.] 
 
 vaidika, a. Vedic, prescribed by or con- 
 formable to the Vedas. [veda, 1222e 2.] 
 
 vaidya, 1. a. having to do with science, 
 learned; and so 2. as m. (with a tran-
 
 [253] 
 
 [vyaparagata 
 
 sition like that from Lai. doctor, 'teacher, 
 learned man,' to Chaucer's doctour of 
 phisik) physician, doctor, [vidya, 1211.] 
 
 vaimanika, a. riding in a sky-travers- 
 ing car called vimana, q.v. [vimana, 
 1222e2.] 
 
 vaivasvata, a. descended from Vivas- 
 vant; as m. son of V., i.e. Yama. [vivas- 
 van t, 1208 and a and a 2 .] 
 
 vaigya, adj. subst. man of the vig or folk 
 or third caste, 57 1G . [vig, 1211.] 
 
 voc, quasi-root, see 854 and Vvac. 
 
 vyansa, a. having the shoulders apart, 
 i.e. broad-shouldered ; as in. Viansa, 
 Broad-shoulder, name of a demon, slain 
 by Indra. [vi + ansa, 1305.] 
 
 V vyac (vivyakti [082]; vivyaca [785]). 
 embrace, encompass, extend around. 
 [cf. 1087f 2 , 108g.] 
 
 vyacas, n. compass, extent. 
 
 v y a t i k a r a , m. a mixing, confusing ; con- 
 fusion, disaster. [V3kr, ' scatter,' + vi.] 
 
 v' vyath (vyathate ; vivyath6 [785] ; 
 avyathista; vyathita). 1. move to 
 and fro, rock, reel ; 2. Jig. (like Eng. be 
 restless) be disturbed in mind, be pained. 
 
 vyath. a, f. feeling of painful unrest, 
 discomfort, sorrow. 
 
 V vyadh or vidh (vidhyati; vivyadha 
 [785] ; vetsyati ; viddha ; veddhum ; 
 viddhva; -vidhya). bore through, pierce, 
 hit (with a weapon), [akin w. Vvadh: 
 cf . Lat. di-vid-ere, ' part asunder, divide.'] 
 
 vyapadea, m. the making a false show 
 of, an unauthorized referring to or using 
 the name of (a person of high position). 
 [V dig + vy-apa.] 
 
 vyaya, a. going asunder or to pieces, 
 perishing, w. a-. [Vi + vi, 1148. lb.] 
 
 vyalkaga,/. Vialkafa, a certain plant. 
 
 vyavasaya, m. determination, resolve. 
 [Vsa + vy-ava.] 
 
 vyavasayin, a. determined, resolute, 
 [vyavasaya.] 
 
 vyavahara, m. 1. procedure, conduct, 
 way of acting ; 2. (way of acting with 
 others, i.e.) intercourse, 24 12 . [\flhr + 
 vy-ava.] 
 
 vyasana, n. prop, a throwing one's self 
 away (upon a thing), and so 1. passion- 
 
 ate devotion to a thing (whether good or 
 bad, e.g. alms-giving, scripture-study, 
 gambling); hobby; 2. an overpowering 
 passion, esp. for something bad; vice, 
 20 4 ; 3. (a throwing one's self away, 
 i.e.) misfortune, adversity, 25 8>4 . [V2as 
 + vi.] 
 
 V vya or vi (vyayati, -te [761d2]; vi- 
 vyaya [785], vivye; vita; -viya). mid. 
 envelope or hide one's self. [orig. ' wind 
 around ' as with robe or girdle, and so a 
 a doublet of Vvi, i.e. V2va, 'weave,' 
 q.v.] 
 
 + upa, hang about, esp. wind the sacred 
 cord over the left shoulder and under the 
 right arm ; upavita, see s.v. 
 + ni, wind about, hang (e.g. garland, 
 cord) about (e.g. neck, shoulders) ; nivita, 
 see s.v. 
 
 + pari, act. envelope around or com- 
 pletely; mid. wind something as cover 
 around one's self, envelope one's self in ; 
 perhaps in sense of act., 84 1G . 
 
 vyakarana, n. the putting asunder, and 
 so analysis, grammar. [V 1 kr, ' do, put,' 
 + vy-a.] 
 
 vyakhyatr, m. explainer. [Vkhya + 
 vy-a.] 
 
 vyaghra, m. tiger; like ardula and 
 sinha, as type of noble manliness, in cpds, 
 see nara-vyaghra. [perhaps fr. V 1 ghr, 
 ' besprinkle,' + vy-a, ' the sprinkled or 
 spotted one.'] 
 
 vyaghra-carman, n. tiger-skin. 
 
 vyaghrata, f. tigerhood, condition of 
 being a tiger. [1237.] 
 
 vyadha, m. hunter, [v' vyadh.] 
 
 vyadhi, m. disease. [V 1 dha, 'put,' + 
 vy-a, 1155. 2e.] 
 
 vyadhita, a. diseased. [vyadhi, see 
 117Cb.] 
 
 vyapada, m. destruction, [v'pad + vy-a.] 
 
 vyapadayitavya, grdv. to be destroyed 
 or killed, [caus. of Vpad + vy-a.] 
 
 vyapara, m. 1. business, i.e. occupa- 
 tion; 2. (as in Eng.) business, i.e. con- 
 cern, 30 4 ; 3. activity, exertion. [V3pr 
 + vy-a, ' be busied.'] 
 
 vyapara-ata, n. exertion-hundred, a 
 hundred attempts.
 
 vyamaj 
 
 [254] 
 
 vyama, m. prop, a stretch-out, the dis- 
 tance covered by the stretched-out arms, 
 a fathom, about six feet, [for vi-yama, 
 V yam + vi : for mg, cf . the precisely 
 parallel Eng. fathom w. AS. fseftm, ' the 
 extended arms ' ; opyvid, ' fathom,' and 
 opt-yea, ' stretch ' ; French toise, Medieval 
 Lat. tesa, ' fathom/ from Lat. tensa, ppl. 
 of tendere, ' stretch.'] 
 
 vyama-matra, a. having a fathom 
 as its measure, see matra. [matra, 
 3342.] 
 
 vyahrti, f. 1. utterance; 2. esp. 
 one of the three sacred and mystical 
 exclamations, bhur, bhiivas, and svar, 
 which see. [V 1 hr + vy-a. ] 
 
 vyoman, n. heaven, sky. 
 
 V vraj (vrajati; vavraja; avrajit; vrajis- 
 yati ; vrajita ; vrajitum ; vrajitva ; 
 -vrajya). march, proceed, go. 
 + a, come hither, go unto, 
 -fpraty-a, march or go back. 
 + pari, march round about; wander 
 around. 
 
 -1-pra, march forth; go unto; wander; 
 esp. leave one's house to wander about as 
 an ascetic, 65 2 . 
 
 vrata, n. 1. will ; devanam ati vratam, 
 beyond the will of the gods, 88 2 cf. 
 inrep Aibs ctiffav ; decree, command or 
 Gebot, statute ; and so 2. (as Eng. 
 command is applied to the forces under 
 one's command) that over which one 
 exercises command, domain, Gebiet ; 
 further, directly from the root again 3. 
 choice, determination ; firm resolution, 
 14 6 ; 4. esp. resolve (to keep a religious 
 or ascetic observance) ; vow or holy work 
 (e.g. of chastity, fasting, etc.), 28 m , 59 5 , 
 61 28, 64 8 , 65 8 ; -5. religious duty, duty 
 in general. [V2vr, 'will, choose': for 
 mg 2, observe that Ger. Gebiet formerly 
 meant 'command' and now means 'do- 
 main.'] 
 
 V vragc (vrgcati ; vrkn4 [957c] ; vrstva ; 
 -vfgcya). hew off; fell (a tree); cut to 
 pieces, [orig. form is vrk, as in vfk-a, 
 vrk-na, vrk-sa, which see: vrgc is prop, 
 only a quasi-root of the present stem 
 vrgca, for vrk-ska, formed like the 
 
 present of Mprach and mlech, which see: 
 
 see 221 2 and cf. 220.] 
 
 -f vi, cut asunder or to pieces. 
 
 V 9 ati s (gansati, -te ; gagansa, gaganse ; 
 agansit ; gansisyati ; gasta ; gastva ; 
 -gasya). orig. say in a loud and solemn 
 way, and so: 1. recite, esp. a sacred hymn 
 or text to a god by way of praise ; and 
 so 2. generalized, praise; gasta, see s.v.; 
 3. rarely, make a solemn wish, whether 
 blessing or curse (see gansa), like impre- 
 cari ; 4. announce ; communicate, 52 13 . 
 [cf. Lat. carmen, teas-men, 'an utterance 
 hi solemn, measured, or melodious way, 
 i.e. song, oracle, magic charm ' ; Camena, 
 *casmenja, name of the goddess of song ; 
 cens-ete, ' declare, pass judgment on ' ; AS. 
 herian, 'praise.'] 
 
 + a, 1. wish, esp. in the noun agas or 
 aga, ' wish,' q.v. ; and so 2. hope in, put 
 one's trust hi (ace.); 3. pronounce a 
 blessing upon, wish good to (ace.), 101 4 . 
 [mg 1 may be a mere specialization of 
 the mg 'speak solemnly unto ' (cf. Vgas + 
 a), and mg 2 a further development of 
 mg 1 ; for mg 3, cf. the simple verb, 
 mg3.] 
 
 + pra, tell forth; praise, 2 1G . [cf. 
 simple verb.] 
 
 gansa, m. 1. solemn utterance; 2. im- 
 precatio, blessing or curse; as adj. 3. 
 cursing. [V gans.] 
 
 V gak (A. gakn6ti; gagaka, gekus [794e]; 
 agakat ; gaksyati, -te ; gakta; pass. 
 cakyate, gakita ; 
 
 -B. desid. gfksate [1030, lOSg 1 end]; 
 caus. of desid. giksayati ; pass, of desid. 
 and of caus. of desid. giksyate, giksita). 
 
 A. simple verb : 1. be strong ; be 
 able, 8 19 ; in pass. : impersonally, it is 
 possible ; with infin. [988], be able, by the 
 instrumentality of some person or thing 
 (instr.), to become the object of an 
 action ; maya mtim grahayitum gak- 
 yante, they are able to be caused by me 
 to get hold of niti, 19 13 ; 2. rarely (be 
 strong for a person, i.e.) be serviceable or 
 helpful, help, w. dat.;
 
 [255] 
 
 [cabda 
 
 B. desiderative : 1. desid. to A. 1, 
 (strive to be able, i.e.) practice; learn; 
 caus. cause a person (ace.) to learn a 
 thing (ace.), 51 23 , 52 3 ; pass, of caus.: 
 giksita, caused to learn or taught a thing 
 (ace.), 46 10 ; without noun, taught, 52 5 ; 
 giksyamana, instructed, 51 1T ; 2. desid. 
 to A. 2, be willing to help; aid; (of 
 gods) bestow blessing upon (dat.), 80 13 ; 
 grant, give. 
 
 [cf. Lat. cac-ula, 'servant' (like help as 
 sometimes used in America for 'ser- 
 vant'); w. gagma, *gak-ma, 'helpful, 
 friendly,' cf. Lat. comis, *coc-mi-s, 'friend- 
 ly ' : prob. akin is Ger. be-hag-en, AS. on- 
 hag-ian, 'suit, please' (cf. gak, A. 2).] 
 + upa, (bring unto one's self by giving, 
 i.e.) attract, 76 18 . [for mg, see the un- 
 compounded verb, B. 2.] 
 
 gakala, 1. m. n. chip; piece; 2. n. 
 half (of an egg-shell). 
 
 gakuna, m. bird. 
 
 gakti, f. ability, power. 
 
 gakya, a. 1. possible, practicable, 33 16 ; 
 common with the infinitive : gakya being 
 used 2. impersonally; or 3. in agree- 
 ment with the subject, in which case the inf. 
 [988] is to be translated as a passive, 29 la . 
 [Vcak, 1213.] 
 
 gakra, 1. a. powerful, mighty, standing 
 epithet of Indra; 2. as m. The Mighty 
 One, i.e. Indra (just as we use The Al- 
 mighty as a name for 'God'). [Vgak, 
 1188a.] 
 
 V gank (gankate ; agankista ; gankita ; 
 gankitum ; -gankya). 1. be anxious 
 or suspicious ; 2. hesitate. 
 + vi, hesitate. 
 
 ganka,/. hesitation. [Vgafik, 1149 8 .] 
 
 gaci, f. 1. might or help (esp. of the 
 helping deeds of Indra); 2. Qachi or 
 Might, as wife of Indra (derived from the 
 misunderstood gaci-pati, q.v.), 2 7 . [Vgac, 
 collateral form of gak.] 
 
 gacl-pdti, m. 1. Vedic, lord of might 
 or of help, epithet of Indra, 80 13 ; 2. 
 later (pati, q.v., being misunderstood as 
 'husband'), husband of Might or Qachi, 
 name of Indra, 15 14 , 49 4 . [acct, 1267a 
 and d, Whitney 94b.] 
 
 gat ha, a. false. 
 
 V gat (gatayati; gatita). cut in pieces; 
 make to fall off. 
 
 gat a [485 2 ], n. hundred; also as expression 
 of a large number; for construction, see 
 486b. [cf . t-Karov, ' one-hundred ' ; Lat. 
 centum, AS. hund, neut., 'hundred'; Eng. 
 hund-red.~\ 
 
 gatatman, a. having a hundred lives, 
 [gata + atman: acct, 1300a.] 
 
 gatru, m. 1. (victor, i.e.) victorious 
 opponent ; 2. foe, enemy, in general. 
 
 [if mg 1 is the orig. mg, we may take 
 the word fr. Vgad and as standing for 
 *gat-tru, 1185e, 232: 
 
 if mg 2 is the orig. mg, we may analyse 
 thus, gat-ru (1192), and compare Church 
 Slavonic Icot-ora, Irish cath, ' battle ' ; AS. 
 heaft-o in cpds, as heafto-weorc, 'battle- 
 work,' Old High Ger. had-u in names, 
 as Hadu-brant, 'Battle-flame,' Hadu-wlch, 
 'Battle-strife,' Ger. Hedivig ; Ger. Hader, 
 ' strife ' ; cf. also the Keltic proper name 
 Catu-rig-es (rig under rajan), 'The Battle- 
 kings.'] 
 
 gatru-nandana, a. causing joy to one's 
 enemies. 
 
 gatru-samkata, m. danger from the foe. 
 
 V gad (gacada, gagade [786]). distinguish 
 one's self; get the upper hand, prevail; 
 Vedic only. [cf. KfKaff/^evos, Doric Kf-KaS- 
 /uifvos, ' distinguished.'] 
 
 ganakais, 00*1'. quietly; gently; slowly, 
 [instr. (1112c) of an unused stem *ga- 
 naka, diminutive to *gana, see ganais.] 
 
 ganais, adv. quietly; gently; slowly; 
 gradually. [instr. (1112c) of an unused 
 stem *gana, which is prob. connected w. 
 \f2gam, 'be quiet.'] 
 
 g a mt at i,/ benefit, [gam, 1238.] 
 
 V gap (gapati, -te; gagapa, gepe; gapis- 
 yate; gapta; gapitum; gapitva). 1. 
 curse, usually act., 93 n ; 2. mid. (curse 
 one's self, i.e.) assert with an oath, swear, 
 vow, w. dat. of person, 97 7 . 
 
 gapatha, m. curse; oath. [Vgap, 1163b.] 
 
 gabala, a. brinded. 
 
 gab da, m. 1. sound; cry; noise; gab- 
 dam kr, make a noise, raise one's voice ; 
 -2. word, 50 9 , 61 1 .
 
 [256] 
 
 gabda-gastra, n. word-theory, word- 
 compendium, i.e. grammar. 
 
 V lg am (gamyati; gagamS ; agamista; 
 gamita). get weary by working, work, 
 [cf . KOL/JL-VU, ' get weary by working.'] 
 
 V 2 <jam (gamyati [763J; gagama, gemiis; 
 agamat; ganta [955aj; gamayati). be 
 quiet or still or content ; stop ; Jbr these 
 senses, cf. \ ram ; ganta, see s.v.; cans. 
 quiet, still ; euphemistically, kill. 
 -f u p a , be quiet ; stop. 
 + pra, come to rest; stop; go out; 
 praganta, extinguished. 
 
 V 3gam (gammte). harm. 
 
 V 4 9 am (ganta; -gamya; gamayati, gama- 
 yati). used only with ni. observe; per- 
 ceive; hear. 
 
 gam [384 2 ], n. welfare; happiness; bless- 
 ing. 
 
 gam a, a word of doubtful mg at 71 8 : 
 perhaps tame (cf. s'2gam, caws.) or indus- 
 trious (cf. VI gam). 
 
 gamayitr, m. slayer. [V2gam, caus.] 
 
 garni, f. a fabaceous plant, either Prosopis 
 spicigera or Mimosa Suma; a tree from 
 which the sticks of attrition (arani) were 
 taken. 
 
 gamimaya,/ -I, a. of or made of Qami- 
 wood. [see maya.] 
 
 gami-gakha, f. Qami-branch. 
 
 gami-sumanas, / Qami-flower. 
 
 gamisumano-mala, /. garland of 
 C/aml-flowers. 
 
 gamya,/. staff, 102 16 . 
 
 gay a, a. lying, sleeping, at end of cpds. 
 [Vgi, 1148. la.] 
 
 gay ana, n. a lying, sleeping. [Vgi, 
 1150. la.] 
 
 gayaniya, 1. a. serving for lying; 
 2. n. bed, couch, [gayana, 1215.] 
 
 gayya,/. 1. bed; 2. a lying, sleep- 
 ing. [Vgi, 1213d, cf. 963 8 b.] 
 
 gar a, m. 1. reed, esp. of the Saccharum 
 Sara, used for arrows ; 2. arrow, [ob- 
 serve that Lat. arundo means ' reed ' and 
 ' arrow.'] 
 
 gar ana, 1. a. protecting, affording 
 refuge, 87 7 ; as n. 2. shed, that gives 
 cover from the rain ; Ka\id, hut ; 3. 
 protection; refuge, 50 n . 
 
 [garana presupposes a root *gr or *gl, 
 'cover, protect'; w. such a root agree 
 well in form and mg as derivs, garira, 
 garman, and gala, see these : 
 
 further agree as cognates Ka\td, ' hut, 
 barn'; AS. heal, Eng. hall; KoA-u|, 'husk, 
 pod ' ; Ger. Hiille, ' covering ' ; Eng. hull, 
 ' covering ' of grain ; AS. hel-m, ' protec- 
 tor' (used of God and Christ), 'head- 
 protector, helmet,' Ger. Helm, Eng. helm ; 
 Lat. oc-cul-ere, 'cover'; color, 'color' (see 
 varna) ; eel-are, Ger. hehl-en, Chaucer's 
 lid-en, later hele, ' conceal ' ; further, 
 K a \inr-r-to, ' cover,' and the ident. KPVJT-T-OI, 
 ' hide.'] 
 
 garanagata, a. come for refuge, seeking 
 protection with any one. [agata.] 
 
 gar ad, /. autumn; pi. poetic for years 
 (cf. varsa). 
 
 gdrava, m. n. flat earthen dish. 
 
 gdrira, n. the body, as distinguished from 
 the vital breath or from the immortal 
 soul (so 96 21 - 22 , 29 6 ) and from the soft 
 viscera and inward fluid secretions, of 
 which things the body, or the firm red 
 flesh with the bones, forms as it were 
 the hollow cover (67 l ), tegument, or 
 Hiille; used also in pi., 84 9 ; body in 
 general ; mrtam gariram, corpse, 63 n ; 
 so 84 4 . [prop. ' the corporeal tegument ' 
 of the soul, V*gr, 'cover' (1188e 2 ), see 
 under garana: for mg, cf. the cognate 
 Ger. Hiille (under garana) in sterbliche 
 Hiille, ' mortal envelope, i.e. body ' : cf. 
 97 16 N.] 
 
 garira -j a, a. (born of, i.e.) performed 
 by the body. 
 
 garirantakara, m. destroyer of the 
 bodies, [anta-kara.] 
 
 garu,/. missile, either spear or arrow, [cf. 
 gara.] 
 
 garkara, m. brown sugar, [fr. the Pra- 
 krit form sakkara comes on the one 
 hand, through Arabic sokkar and Medie- 
 val Lat. zucara, the Eng. sugar, and on 
 the other ffdicxapov, Lat. saccharum, all 
 borrowed words : cf. khanda.] 
 
 V gardh (gardhati). be strong or defiant. 
 
 gardha, m. troop, host. [cf. Ger. Herde, 
 Eng. herd.']
 
 [257] 
 
 carman, n. 1. cover; protection; shel- 
 ter ; refuge ; 2. comfort, joy ; 3. 
 common at the end of Brahman-names, 
 19 n , 42 n , 69 13 N. [see under garana.] 
 
 garmavant, a. containing (the stem) 
 garman. [1233.] 
 
 garva, m. Qarva, name of an arrow-slay- 
 ing god ; later, a common name for the 
 god Qiva. [garu, 1209, cf. 1209g.] 
 
 garvara, a. variegated; f. garvari, the 
 night (as variegated with stars). [cf. 
 gabala.] 
 
 garva- varman, a. having Qiva as his 
 protection ; as m. Qarvavarman, name of 
 a man. 
 
 gala, m. 1. staff; 2. prickle (of a 
 hedge-hog), [cf. gara.] 
 
 galya, m. n. point of spear or arrow; 
 thorn ; prickle. [cf . gala, gara : cf. 
 K?]\OV, ' missile.'] 
 
 galyaka, m. hedge-hog, [cf. galya.] 
 
 gavas, n. superior might; heroic power; 
 also pi. [Vgu, 1151. la.] 
 
 gavistha, a. most mighty. [Vgii, 468.] 
 
 gaga, m. hare; the Hindu sees, not "a 
 man in the moon," but rather, a hare 
 or a gazelle. [for *gasa (see Vgus and 
 gvagura) : cf. Ger. Hase, Eng. hare.~\ 
 
 gagaka, m. hare, rabbit, [gaga, 1222b.] 
 
 gaganka, m. the moon. [prop., adj., 
 'having a rabbit as its mark/ gaga (q.v-) 
 + anka, 1302a.] 
 
 gagin, m. the moon, [prop., adj., 'having 
 the (picture of a) rabbit,' gaga, 1230.] 
 
 gagvant, a. ever repeating or renewing 
 itself. 
 
 V gas (gasati; gagasa; gasisyati; gasta; 
 -gasya). cut to pieces; slaughter, [see 
 gastra.] 
 
 gasta, a. praised, esteemed as good or 
 lucky; equiv. to happy, cheerful, 52 u . 
 [prop. ppl. of Vgans.] 
 
 gastra, n. knife; sword; weapon. ['in- 
 strument of cutting,' Vgas, 1185: gas-tra 
 is ident. in form and mg w. the Lat. stem 
 *cas-tro, which appears in the denom. cas- 
 trdre, prop, 'cut,' and so, like Eng. cut, 
 ' castrate.'] 
 
 gastra-pani, a. having a sword in the 
 hand. [1303.] 
 
 gastra-vrtti, a. having weapons as 
 one's means of subsistence, living by 
 military service. [1302a.] 
 
 gaka, n. an edible herb ; vegetable food. 
 
 gakha,/. branch. 
 
 gatayitr, m. one who cuts in pieces, 
 destroyer, 97 19 . [caus. of V gat, 1182c.] 
 
 ganta, a. quiet; still; stopped, [ppl- of 
 v'2gam, 'be quiet.'] 
 
 ganti, f. a ceasing, stopping; esp. the 
 absence of the evil results of some word 
 or thing of evil omen. [V 2 gam, ' be quiet,' 
 cf. 955a.] 
 
 ganti-karman, n. a ceremony for avert- 
 ing the results of something ominous. 
 
 gapa, m. curse. [Vgap.] 
 
 gapadi, a. having the curse as its first; 
 as n. curse and so forth. [1302c 1.] 
 
 gapadi-cestita, n. curse-and-so-forth 
 doings, i.e. adventures including the curse 
 et cetera. [1280b.] 
 
 gap ant a, m. end of the curse or period 
 during which the curse has effect, 
 [anta.] 
 
 gayin, a. lying, sleeping, [v'gi, 1183 3 .] 
 
 garira, a. corporeal, of the body, [garira, 
 1208f.] 
 
 gardula, m. tiger; at end of cpds, like 
 vyaghra, the best of . 
 
 gala, f. hut ; house ; room ; stable, [see 
 under garana: cf. the derivs Ka\id and 
 Eng. hall, there given.] 
 
 galin, a. 1. possessing a house; 2. at 
 end of cpds, attenuated in mg so as to sig- 
 nify merely possessing . [gala.] 
 
 galmall,/. Salmalia malabarica, the silk- 
 cotton tree. 
 
 gava, m. the young of an animal, [see 
 Vgu.] 
 
 gavaka, m. the young of an animal, 
 [gava.] 
 
 gagvata, a. continual ; eternal, [gag- 
 vant, 1208a, a 1 .] 
 
 V gas or gis ( Vedic, gasti, gaste [639]; 
 Vedic and Epic, gasati ; gagasa ; agisat 
 [854 3 ] ; gasisyati, -te ; gasita, gasta, 
 gista [954e] ; gasitum, gastum ; gasitva ; 
 -gasya, -gisya). 1. chasten, correct; 
 2. instruct, teach; direct; 3. (like 
 Eny. direct) give order to, rule, govern. 
 17
 
 9asana] 
 
 [258] 
 
 [perhaps reduplicated form of cans, 675 : 
 
 for the weak form gis, cf. 639.] 
 
 + a, mid. wish or pray for, cf. agis and 
 
 V gans -^ a ; make supplication, 73 u . 
 
 + pra, instruct; direct; command, cf. 
 
 simple verb, and praxis. 
 
 5 as an a, n. 1. government, way of rul- 
 ing; 2. command. [Vas.] 
 
 gasitr, TO. teacher. [Vgas.] 
 
 gastra, n. 1. instruction; 2. rule; 
 theory ; compendium (of an art or 
 science) ; a scientific or canonical work ; 
 science, 17 18 . [Vgas.] 
 
 V giks, see 1030 and v'gak. 
 
 cikhara, 1. o. peaked; 2. m. n. peak, 
 [gikha, 1226.] 
 
 gikha, f. 1. tuft or braid of hair; 
 2. (like Eng. crest) top in general, 
 peak. 
 
 githira, a. loose; flaccid; unsteady, 93 2 ; 
 opp. of drdha, 'firm, hard.' [perhaps 
 fr. Vcrath, 1188e: for loss of r, cf. 
 Vbham.] 
 
 gibi, TO. Qibi, name of a king. 
 
 giras, n. head. [cf. >capo, 'head'; Lat. 
 cerebrum, *ceres-ru-m, ' brain ' : w. the col- 
 lateral form girsan, q.v., cf. Ger. Him, 
 Old High Ger. hirni, *hirsni, 'brain': akin 
 is also icpaviov, ' skull.'] 
 
 girisa, m. the tree Acacia Sirissa; as n. 
 the blossom. 
 
 giro-mukha, n. head and face. [1253b.] 
 
 gila,y! stone; crag. 
 
 gila-bhava, TO. condition of being stone; 
 -am ap, turn into stone. 
 
 gill, f. the beam under a door. 
 
 gili-mukha, TO. Block-snout, name of a 
 hare. 
 
 giloccaya, TO. crag-pile, i.e. craggy hill, 
 [uccaya.] 
 
 giva, 1. a. kind, 90 2 ; friendly; gracious; 
 agreeable, lovely; opp. o/ghora; 2. m. 
 The Friendly One, name euphemistically 
 applied to the horrible god Rudra, who 
 under this name (Qiva) becomes the third 
 person of the Hindu Trinity, [for mg 2, 
 cf. Eu/tej/jSej, 'The Gracious Ones, i.e. the 
 Furies,' and nandi.] 
 
 gigu, m. young; child, [see Vgu, and 
 1147b and b 2 .] 
 
 V Igis (ginasti; gigise; agisat; geksyati, 
 -te; gista; gistva; -gisya). leave, leave- 
 remaining. 
 
 + ud, leave remaining. 
 + vi, (leave apart or by itself, i.e.) sepa- 
 rate, distinguish ; vigista, (separated, and 
 so, like Eng. distinguished) eminent, ex- 
 cellent. 
 
 V I 2gis, subsidiary form to Vgas, q.v. 
 gisya, grdv. to be taught; as TO. pupil. 
 
 [V gas, weak form gis.] 
 V Igi (gete [see 628-9]; gigye; agayista; 
 
 gayisyate, -ti; gesyate, -ti; gayita ; ga- 
 
 yitum; gayitva; -gayya). 1. lie still; 
 
 lie; 2. sleep. [w. ge-te, cf. Kfl-rat, 
 
 ' lies ' : cf . also Koi-r-rj, ' bed.'] 
 
 + adhi, lie in or on; dwell in. 
 
 + anu, lie down after another. 
 
 + a, lie in. 
 
 + u p a , lie by. 
 
 + sam, be undecided or in doubt, [lit. 
 
 ' lie together ': metaphor unclear.] 
 V 2gl, simpler form of Vgya, q.v. 
 gi, vbl. lying. [Vgi.] 
 git a, a. cold; as n. cold, [ppl- of Vgya 
 
 or 2gi.] 
 g i t a k a , f. gitika, a. cool. [gita : cf . 
 
 1222d.] 
 
 gitala, a. cool, [gita, 1227.] 
 gltarta, a. distressed with the cold. 
 
 [arta.] 
 gitikavant, a. cool. [as if from fern. 
 
 of gitaka: 1233, cf. b.] 
 gipala, m. n. Blyxa octandra, a common 
 
 water-plant, 
 girsan, n. head. [girs-an is to giras 
 
 (q.v.), as irs-ya is to iras-ya, see 
 
 these.] 
 gila, n. 1. natural or acquired way of 
 
 being; character, 23 m ; habit or habits, 
 
 58 u ; in composition [1302] with that to 
 
 which one is inclined or accustomed, 21 4 , 
 
 60 18 ; 2. (character, i.e., as in Eng.) 
 
 good character, 98 7 . 
 givan, a. lying. [V Igi, 1169. la.] 
 guka, TO. parrot, [prop. ' the bright one,' 
 
 on account of its gaudy colors, V guc : 
 
 cf. 216.1,1 s .] 
 guka vat, adv. like a parrot. [guka, 
 
 1107.]
 
 [259] 
 
 gukra, a. clear, bright, 76 9 . [v/guc, 
 1188a, 216.7.] 
 
 gukla, 1. a. clear; bright; white; with 
 paksa, the bright lunar half-month, from 
 new to full moon; 2. as m. (sc. paksa), 
 the bright lunar fortnight, 65 5 . [see 
 1189 and 2 .] 
 
 gukla-paksa, m. fortnight of the wax- 
 ing moon. 
 
 guklapaksadi, a. having the bright 
 lunar fortnight first, beginning with the 
 bright lunar fortnight, [adi, 1302c 1.] 
 
 guklambara, a. having a white garment, 
 [ambara.] 
 
 V guc (g6cati, -te; gug6ca; agocit; gocis- 
 yati; g6citum; gocitva). 1. flame, 
 light, beam ; glow, burn ; 2. Jig. suffer 
 burning pain; grieve; grieve at (loc.), 
 66 13 ; intens. flame brightly, [for mg 2, 
 cf. Vtap, dagdha and Vdah.] 
 + apa, intens. [1002a], drive away by 
 flaming brightly, 72 8 . 
 + a blii, burn, trans. 
 + a , bring hither by flaming, 72 8 . 
 
 giici, a. 1. flaming, beaming ; Jig. beam- 
 ing (of a smile) j-light, bright; 2. Jig. 
 clear, pure; holy (of a god), 80 5 ; honor- 
 able (in business), 25 2 ; pure (in a ritual 
 sense), 62 10 . [v/guc, 1155. 2a, 216.2.] 
 
 guci-smita, a. having a beaming smile, 
 bright-smiling. 
 
 guddhd, a. pure. [ppl. of \lgudh, 160.] 
 
 guddha-mati, a. pure-minded. 
 
 gudh or gundh (gundhati, -te; gudhyati; 
 guddha). 1. gundhati, -te : act. purify; 
 mid. become pure ; 2. gudhyati, become 
 pure. [orig., perhaps, ' to clear,' and 
 akin w. V gcand, q.v.] 
 + v i , vigudhyati, become entirely pure ; 
 viguddha, perfectly clear. 
 
 guna, a. grown, prosperous, fortunate; as 
 n. [cf. 1176a], growth, prosperity; luck, 
 [perhaps fr. Vgu, 1177a.] 
 
 V gundh, see gudh. 
 
 gundhyu, f. -yu [355c], a. pure; un- 
 blemished; fair. [\f gundh, 1165b.] 
 
 V Igubh or gumbh (gumbhate). glide 
 along lightly; move onward, 73. [per- 
 haps akin w. -oD</>os, ' light, nimble.'] 
 
 V 2gubh or gumbh (g6bhate; gumbhate; 
 
 gumbhdti ; gugubhe ; gobhisy&ti). act. 
 adorn; mid. adorn one's self, 73 12 ; look 
 beautiful, appear to advantage, shine 
 
 (fig-)- 
 
 1 giibh, f. a gliding onward, esp. through 
 the sky ; onward progress ; so, perhaps, 
 78 5 ; course, 73 4 ; dat., infinitivally [982], 
 so as to glide onward, 79 n . [sflgubh.] 
 
 2 giibh, f. beauty; so, perhaps, 78 5 . 
 [V2gubh.] 
 
 gubha, a. 1. fair, 9 11 ; beautiful, agree- 
 able to the eyes, 15 13 , 45 18 , 62 13 ; -2. 
 agreeable (to other senses than the eyes) ; 
 gubhan gandhan, perfumes ; 3. agree- 
 able in general, 20 13 ; 4. of good quality, 
 (54.12. _5_ fortunate, auspicious, 12 13 . 
 [V2gubh, 'adorn.'] 
 
 gubhanana, a. fair-faced, [anana.] 
 
 gubhagubha, a. agreeable and disagree- 
 able, agreeable or disagreeable ; good and 
 bad, good or bad, in ethical sense, 65 19 . 
 [agubha, 1257.] 
 
 gubhagubha-phala, a. having agree- 
 able or disagreeable fruit, resulting in 
 weal or woe. 
 
 gubhrd, a. beautiful; clear (of sounds). 
 [V2gubh, ' adorn,' 1188a.] 
 
 V gus (giisyati; -gusya). be dry, dry up. 
 [for *sus (see gaga), as shown by Avestan 
 V hush, ' dry ' : cf . av<a, ' dry ' ; Syracusan 
 (Tav-K6s, 'dry'; AS. sedrian, 'dry up/ 
 denom. of sear, Eng. sear.'] 
 
 giiska, a. dry. [Vgus, 1186 2 : see 958.] 
 
 giisma, m. 1. whistling, 73 5 , 78 7 ; 2. 
 exhalation, i.e. (fragrant) odor (of the 
 Soma), 73 10 ; -3. (exhalation, breath, 
 and so, like Eng. spirit) courage, impetu- 
 osity, 82*. [Vgvas, 252, 1166.] 
 
 V gu o?- gva or gvi (gvayati ; gugava 
 [786*]; gund[957a]; gvayitum). swell; 
 be greater or superior or victorious. 
 
 [orig. sense of root, ' swell,' but with 
 two diverse ramifications : 
 
 1. negatively, ' be swollen, i.e. hol- 
 low, empty ' ; cf . guna, '.vacuum ' ; Kv-ap, 
 ' hole ' ; Lat. cavus, ' hollow ' ; caelum, 
 *cav-i-lu-m, ' heaven's hollow vault ' ; KOI\OS, 
 ' hollow'; 
 
 2. positively, 'be swollen, i.e. full, 
 strong'; with special reference: (a) to 
 
 17*
 
 ^udra] 
 
 [260] 
 
 the womb and its fruit; cf. gi-gu and 
 
 gava, ' young ' ; KVG>, ' be pregnant ' ; Lat. 
 
 in-ciens, 'pregnant'; (b) to strength and 
 
 growth in general; cf. gura, 'man of 
 
 might ' ; gavas, gavistha, guna ; Kvpos, 
 
 ' might ' ; K/IO, ' swell, billow.'] 
 gudra, m. a man of the fourth caste, a 
 
 Qudra. 
 
 guna, n. emptiness. [Vgu, 1177a.] 
 gar a, a. mighty, bold ; as m. man of might, 
 
 hero. [Vgu, 1188c: gura is parallel w. 
 
 *icv-po-s, ' mighty,' whence T& Kvp-os, 
 
 'might' (cf. aiffx-pt-s w - T0 aftrx-os)-] 
 gurpa, n. a plaited basket for winnowing 
 
 grain. 
 V Igr (grnati; gagre ; agarit; garisyati, 
 
 -te ; girna [957b] ; -girya ; giryate). 
 
 crush; break; tear. [cf. Eng. har-m, 
 
 which answers to a Skt. *gar-ma.] 
 
 + vi, pass, be broken to pieces; perish, 
 
 60 9 . 
 
 + s am, break (a bow); like zusammen- 
 
 brechen. 
 
 V 2gr, see era, 'boil.' 
 grnga, n. horn. 
 g r n g 1 n , a. horned ; as m. horned beast, 
 grta, see Vgra. 
 
 geva, a. kind; dear. [cf. giva.] 
 gesa, 1. m. n. rest, remainder, 68 17 ; 
 
 gese, like Ger. im Uebrigen, for the rest, 
 
 12 10 ; 2. a. remaining, 55 15 . [Vlgis, 
 
 ' leave.'] 
 gesas, n. offspring, ['those whom one 
 
 leaves behind him, one's relicts,' V 1 gis, 
 
 ' leave.'] 
 
 g6ka, m. pain, grief. [Vguc, 216. 1.] 
 goka-ja, . grief-born; gokajam vari, 
 
 grief-born water, i.e. tears, 10 19 . 
 gokarta, a. sorrow-stricken, [arta.] 
 ocis-kega, a. having flame-locks, with 
 
 locks of flame. [gocis, 187: 1297, cf. 
 
 1280b.] 
 g6cistha, a. most or bright flaming. 
 
 [Vguc, 468.] 
 gocis, n. flame; beam; heat. [Vguc, 
 
 1153.] 
 g6na, 1. a. red, deep-red; 2. m. Sone 
 
 or Red River, affluent of the Ganges. 
 
 [prop. ' flame-colored ' . cf . t-icav-aa, 
 
 'burned,' /caC-/io, 'heat.'] 
 
 gonita, n. blood; also pi. [g6na, 1176d.] 
 c o b h a n a , a. beautiful. [V 2 gubh, ' adorn,' 
 
 1150.2a.] 
 
 g6bhistha, a. most swiftly moving on- 
 ward or most beautiful, 78 5 , according as 
 
 the word is referred to VI gubh or to 
 
 V 2 gubh see these. [468.] 
 V gcand (intens. ppl. canigcadat [1002c]). 
 
 shine, glance, [for *skandh : cf . av0-6s, 
 
 ' gold-yellow ' ; xa.9a.p6s, Doric KoO-ap6s, 
 
 ' clear, clean, pure ' ; KdvS-apos, ' coal ' ; 
 
 Lat. cand-ere, ' glow.'] 
 gcandra, . shining. [Vgcand, 1188a: cf. 
 
 vigva-gcandra, and candra.] 
 V gcut (gc6tati ; cugc6ta ; acugcutat ; 
 
 gcutita). drip. 
 
 gcut, vbl. dripping. [Vgcut.] 
 gmagana, n. the place for burning the 
 
 corpses and for burying the bones, 
 
 cemetery. 
 
 gmagru, n. beard. 
 V gya or gi (gyayati, -te [761dl]; glta, 
 
 gina, gyana; giyate). freeze; coagulate, 
 gyena, m. eagle; falcon; hawk. [cf. 
 
 I-KTIVO-S, ' kite.'] 
 V grath (grathnite; gagrathe; agigrathat; 
 
 grthitd). become loose, 
 grad, indecl. meaning perhaps orig. heart; 
 
 used w. dha ('grant, give,' see Vldha4) 
 
 and dot. of person, thus, grad asmai 
 
 dhatta, (your) heart to him give ye, i.e. 
 
 trust ye him, have faith in him, RV. ii. 
 
 12.5; ppl. grad-dadhat, trusting, trustful, 
 
 26 2 ; cf. 1079 2 . 
 
 [cf. KctpSi'a, icrip, *(CTjp5, Lat. cor, gen. 
 
 cord-is, Lithuanian szirdis, Ger. Herz, Eng. 
 
 heart: further, w. grad-dha, cf. Lat. 
 
 credgre, *cred-dere, ' trust ' : the regular 
 
 Skt. word for ' heart ' is hfd, and this can 
 
 not be connected w. the above words, 
 
 since they require in the Skt. an initial g, 
 
 *grd or grad.] 
 grad dha, f. trust, faith; desire, [see 
 
 grad: 1147.] 
 graddhiva, a. credible. [graddbjt, 
 
 1228a.] 
 V gram (gramyati [763]; gagrama; agra- 
 
 mit ; granta ; -gramya). be weary ; 
 
 take pains ; esp. castigate one's self,
 
 [261] 
 
 + a , in agrama, ' hermitage.' 
 
 -f-pari, weary one's self exceedingly; 
 
 parigranta, tired of, disgusted with. 
 
 gram a, m. weariness. [Vgram.] 
 
 V grambh (grambhate; grabdha; -grabh- 
 ya). used only with vi. put confidence 
 in ; vigrabdha : confiding, 26 3 ; -am, adv. 
 confidently, without distrust or hesitation, 
 9". 
 
 gravana, 1. m. ear; 2. n. hearing; 
 3. n. fame. [V gru, 1150. la : f or mg 3, 
 cf. gravas and esp. under V gru.] 
 
 gravas, n. 1. sounds; esp. loud praise, 
 91 15 ; -2. glory, 74 6 ; fame, [v/gru, 
 'hear,' 1151. la: the precise equiv. of 
 K\eos, stem K\fF-es, ' fame ' : for mg, see 
 V gru.] 
 
 V gra or gri or gr or gir (grinati, grinite; 
 gigriye; grata, grita, grta, girta). cook; 
 boil ; grid, cooked, done. 
 
 graddha, n. an oblation to the Manes, 
 accompanied by a funeral meal and 
 gifts to Brahmans. [graddha, 1208e : 
 according to the Scholiast, 'a thing of 
 trust,' because the gift for the Manes 
 is as a matter of fact entrusted to 
 Brahmans.] 
 
 granta, ppl. wearied; as n. [1176a], weari- 
 ness. [Vgram, 955a.] 
 
 grantagata, a. wearied and arrived, i.e. 
 arriving wearied, [agata : 1257.] 
 
 V gri (grayati, -te; gigraya, gigriye; agi- 
 griyat ; grayisyati, -te ; grita ; grayitum ; 
 grayitva; -gritya). 1. act. lean, trans. ; 
 lay against or on ; rest on, trans. 2. mid. 
 lean upon, intrans. ; rest upon, or, simply, 
 be lying or situated upon, 70 3 ; 3. mid., 
 act. betake one's self to, esp. for help or 
 protection, 48 5 . [cf. K\I-VW, 'lean'; 
 Kf-K\i-aTat, 'rest on'; Lat. clindre, 'lean'; 
 AS. hlinian, Eng. lean; K\I-TVS, 'incline, 
 slope, hill'; Lat. cli-vus, 'hill'; AS. hlsew, 
 hldw, Eng. -law, -low, 'hill,' in Mood-law, 
 Lud-low ; KA?-yua|, 'ladder'; AS. hlse-der, 
 Eng. ladder, .] 
 
 + a , lean upon, intrans. ; seek support 
 and protection with or from; agrita: 
 depending upon (another) ; as m. a de- 
 pendent or subordinate, 30 18 . 
 -fupa, mid. lean against; brace one's 
 
 self, 87 6 ; upagrita, (leaned upon, equiv. 
 to) laid upon or in, w. loc., 79*. 
 + pari, act. lay about; enclose. 
 + p r a , lean forward. 
 
 gri [351], ./. 1. beautiful appearance; 
 beauty, 78 5 , 2 4 , 8 8 ; -2. welfare; -3. 
 personified, Qri, goddess of beauty and wel- 
 fare, 2 10 ; 4. as honorific prefix to proper 
 names, the famous or glorious , 54 1 . [cf . 
 greyans, grestha.] 
 
 V gru (grn6ti, grnut6 [243]; gugrava, gu- 
 gruv6 ; agrausit ; grosyati, -te ; grut ; 
 gr6tum ; grutva ; -griitya ; gruyate ; 
 giigrusate; gravayati). 1. act. hear, 
 86 5 ; know by hearing; w. gen. of person, 
 6 2 ; listen; give heed to, 25 14 ; hear (a 
 teacher), i.e. learn, study ; gugruvans, 
 having studied, i.e. learned, 94 18 ; 2. 
 mid., in Veda, with pass, sense, be heard of 
 (as subject of talk), i.e., like Lat. cluere, 
 be called, be famed as, 75 w ; 
 
 3. pass.: be heard; gruta: heard; 
 heard of, 2 12 ; impers.: gruyatam, let it 
 be heard, i.e. hear ye ; evam gruyate, 
 thus it is heard, there is this saying, 31 6 ; 
 grutam maya, I've heard (your story), 
 33 9 ; 4. cans, cause (hearers, ace.) to 
 hear (a thing), i.e. proclaim to; recite to, 
 54 20 . _ 5. desid. be willing to hear, and 
 so (cf. Eng. obedient and Lat. ob-oediens 
 with audire), obey, 64 9 . 
 
 [with gru-dhi, 'hear thou,' cf. K\v-6i, 
 ' hear thou ' ; Lat. clu-ere, ' be called ' ; 
 cluens, cliens, 'who hears or obeys, i.e. a 
 dependent ' ; with gru-ta, ' heard, heard 
 of,' cf. K\v-r6s, 'famed,' Lat. in-clu-tus, 
 inclitus, 'famed,' Old High Ger. hlu-do in 
 Hludo-wlg, ' Loud-battle,' Ger. lau-t, AS. 
 hlu-d, Eng. lou-d ; 
 
 with the subsidiary form grus, as in 
 grus-ti, 'a listening to, compliance,' cf. 
 AS. hlos-nian, ' listen,' hlys-t, ' the hearing,' 
 whence hli/st-an, Eng. listen : for the mg 
 ' famed ' of gruta, etc., cf. gravana, gra- 
 vas, and gloka.] 
 
 + prati, answer, say yes to; make a 
 promise to (gen.), [prop., like Eng. hear, 
 ' give a hearing in return to what is said,' 
 i.e. 'not turn a deaf ear to/ and so 
 ' answer.']
 
 ^ruta] 
 
 [262] 
 
 + vi, pass, be heard of far and wide, be 
 famous; vigruta, known as, named, 6 3 . 
 + sam, 1. hear; 2. like Eng. hear, 
 accede to the request of, make a promise 
 to (loc.). [cf. gru + prati.] 
 
 gruta, ppl. heard; heard of; as n. that 
 which is heard from the teacher, that 
 which is learned ; learning. [V gru.] 
 
 grutavant, a. possessing learning, 
 learn-ed. [gruta.] 
 
 griiti, /. 1. a hearing; 2. ear; 3. 
 the thing heard ; sound ; 4. report, 
 hearsay ; 5. utterance ; esp. a sacred 
 utterance handed down by tradition, a 
 religious prescription, a sacred text, the 
 Veda, 58 18 N. ; 6. learning ; prob. in- 
 correct for gruta. [Vgru, 1157. la.] 
 
 grutimant, a. possessing learning ; prob. 
 incorrect for grutavant, q.v. [gruti.] 
 
 griitya, a. worthy to be heard (of a 
 hymn), goodly. [Vgru, 1213a.] 
 
 greyasa, for greyas (greyans) in cpds, 
 1315c. 
 
 greyans, a. fairer; more beautiful or 
 excellent; better; as n. (the better, i.e.) 
 welfare, prosperity, 35 1 . [from an un- 
 used root gri corresponding to the noun 
 gri, 470 4 : cf. Kpeiuv, 'superior, ruler.'] 
 
 gr6stha, a. fairest; most excellent; 
 best: w. gen., I 10 ; w. loc., 68 10 ; at end 
 of cpd, 11 9 ; best as distinguished from 
 (abl.), equiv. to better than, 68 u . [see 
 greyans.] 
 
 grafsthya, n. supremacy, precedence, 
 [grestha, 1211 2 end.] 
 
 gr6tra, n. ear; hearing, [Vgru, 1185a.] 
 
 gr6triya, a. studied, learned (in sacred 
 tradition) us m. & Brahman versed in 
 sacred lore, [grotra, 1214c : for mg, cf . 
 Vgru, mg 1, and gruta, s.v.] 
 
 glaksna, a. slippery ; smooth. [cf. 
 1195.J 
 
 V glagh (glaghate; gaglaghe ; glaghita). 
 
 1. have confidence in; 2. talk con- 
 fidently ; brag, praise one's self ; 3. 
 praise. 
 
 glaghya, grdv. to be praised, praise- 
 worthy; honorable. [V glagh.] 
 g!6ka, m. 1. (thing heard, i.e.) sound; 
 
 2. fame, for mg, cf. V gru ; 3. strophe ; 
 
 later, esp. the anustubh-strophe, the epic 
 
 gloka, in which, for example, the story 
 
 of Nala is composed. [Vgru, 1186 2 .] 
 V gvanc (gvancate). open itself; receive 
 
 in open arms (as a maid her lover). 
 
 + ud, open itself out, open, 87 4 . 
 gvdn [427], m. dog. [cf. KVOIV, Lat. can-i-s, 
 
 AS. hun-d, Eng. hound, ' dog.'] 
 gvagura, m. father-in-law. [for *sv&- 
 
 gura : cf. tKvpos, Lat. socer, socerus, Church 
 
 Slavonic swekrii, AS. sweor, *sweohor, Ger. 
 
 Schwdher, ' father-in-law ' : for g in place 
 
 of s, cf. gaga and Vgus.] 
 gvagru [355c], f. mother-in-law, [gva- 
 gura, 355c : cf . ficvpd, Lat. fern, socrus, 
 
 AS. sweger, Ger. Schwieger, 'mother-in 
 
 law.'] 
 V gvas (gvdsiti [631]; gvasati; gagvasa ; 
 
 gvasisyati ; gvasita, gvasta ; gvasitum ; 
 
 -gvasya ; gvasayati). 1. blow, blus- 
 ter, whistle, snort ; 2. breathe ; 3. 
 
 sigh. [cf. AS. hweos, preterit to thwiesan, 
 
 Eng. wheeze."] 
 
 4 a, get one's breath, become quiet; 
 
 caus. quiet, comfort. 
 
 + n i s , breathe out, sigh. 
 
 + pra, blow forth. 
 
 + abhi-pra, blow forth upon, ace., 
 
 94 \ 
 
 + vi, have confidence, be unsuspecting; 
 
 caus. inspire confidence. 
 gvAs, adv. to-morrow, on the next day; 
 
 gvah gvas [1260 2 ], from day to day. 
 gvasatha, m. a snorting. [Vgvas, 
 
 1163b.] 
 gv&stana, a. of the morrow; as n. the 
 
 morrow, 92 n . [gvds, 1245e.] 
 gvapada, m. a beast of prey, 84 u . [to 
 
 be pronounced gvapada (cf. pavaka, 
 
 1181a) : prop., perhaps, ' having the feet 
 
 of a dog,' gvan + pada.] 
 gvavidh [nom. -vit], m. porcupine, [gvan 
 
 + vidh, ' dog-wounding.'] 
 
 satka, 1. a. consisting of six; 2. as n. 
 
 a whole consisting of six, a hexade. [sas, 
 
 1222a, 226b.] 
 sat-tringat [485], /. six and thirty. 
 
 [sas.]
 
 [263] 
 
 [sakhigana 
 
 sat-pada, / -I, a. having (taken) six 
 
 steps, [sas: 1300a.] 
 san-masa, n. semester, six months. 
 
 [sas : prop. ' that which has six months,' 
 
 see 1312.] 
 sas [483 8], num. six. [see 182b 2 , 146 3 : 
 
 cf. e, Lat. sex, Eng. siar.J 
 sastf, /. sixty, [sas, 1157.4.] 
 sastha, a. sixth, [sas, 487 5 : cf. (K-TOS, 
 
 Lat. sex-tus, AS. six-ta, Eng. six-th.] 
 
 1 s a , pron. see ta and 495. 
 
 2 sa, inseparable prefix denoting similarity, 
 community, or connection numerous ex- 
 amples on the pages following ; esp. common 
 w. an adj. value in possessive cpds [see 
 1304c], having an accompanying , 
 with . [1121b : prob. ident. ultimately 
 w. 3 sa.] 
 
 3 sa, one, in sa-krt, sa-hasra. [for *sm 
 (vocalic m), root *sem: cf. els, *<re / u-s, 
 /j.ia, *(Tyu-ja, ' one ' ; f-Kar6v, ' one-hundred ' ; 
 a-ir\6os, ' one-fold ' ; Lat. sem-el, ' once ' ; 
 sim-plex, ' one-fold ' ; &-\ox<>s, ' having one 
 (i.e. one and the same) bed, spouse ' ; 
 o-irarpos, 'having one (i.e. one and the 
 same) father'; d-SeA^xfe, see under gar- 
 bha.] 
 
 samyatendriya, a. having restrained 
 senses, self-controlled, I 9 . [samyata 
 (\fyam, 1085a) + indriya, 1298.] 
 
 s a my a ma, m. restraint, control, 68 6 . 
 [V yam + sam.] 
 
 samvatsara, m. year, [sam + vatsara, 
 q.v.] 
 
 samgaya, m. 1. doubt; na samgayas, 
 (there is) no doubt; 2. danger, 20 16 . 
 [V gi + sam.] 
 
 samsad, /". like Lat. consessus, a sitting 
 together and those who sit together, i.e. 
 assembly. [V sad + sam.] 
 
 samsarga, m. mixture, union; contact. 
 [Vsrj + sam, 216.1.] 
 
 samsara, m. the wandering of the soul 
 from one existence to another, metem- 
 psychosis ; transmigration, 66 18 ; the cycle 
 or round of existence, 18 l . [Vsr + sam.] 
 
 samskara, m. 1. a working over, a 
 preparing or purification ; esp. a technical 
 
 proceeding with a thing ; an adorning or 
 adornment, 17 5 ; 2. a domestic religious 
 rite to be performed upon or observed by 
 every member of the three upper castes, 
 prop, his preparation or purification ; sac- 
 rament, consecration, 59 2 N. ; 3. im- 
 pression; an impression produced on the 
 mind or a disposition formed in the mind 
 by something past (e.g. deeds of a former 
 existence, a past conversation, etc.), but 
 which has ceased to work on the mind, 
 40 *. [\f 1 kr, ' do,' + sam, 1087d.] 
 
 samskrta, ppl. 1. prepared; adorned, 
 fine, cultivated ; as n. the cultivated lan- 
 guage, as opposed to the low vernaculars, 
 Sanskrit, 52 6 . [V 1 kr, ' do,' + sam, 1087d. ] 
 
 samhita, ppl. put together; -a, f. a 
 putting together; a text whose sounds 
 and words are put together according to 
 grammatical rules. [V 1 dha + sam, 954c.] 
 
 sa-kacchapa, a. having tortoises along 
 with them, i.e. along with tortoises. 
 [1304c.] 
 
 sakala, a. having its parts together, i.e. 
 all, entire ; .as n. everything, one's entire 
 property, 46*. [sa + kala, 1304c, 334 2 .] 
 
 sakaga, m. presence; tasya sakagam 
 gam, go to the presence of him, i.e. go to 
 him ; -sakage, at end of cpd, in the pres- 
 ence of , before , 3 3 . [sa + kaga : 
 orig., perhaps, ' having visibility, present/ 
 and then ' presence.'] 
 
 sakft, adv. for one time, a single time, 
 once. [3 sa + 2krt.] 
 
 sa-kopa, a. angry; -am, angrily. [2sa, 
 1304c.] 
 
 s a k t u , m. coarsely ground parched grains, 
 grits, esp. barley grits. 
 
 sakha, for sakhi at end of cpds [1302], 
 having as attendant, accompanied by 
 . [1315b.] 
 
 sakhi [343a], m. attendant, companion, 
 82 1 ; comrade ; friend, 23 16 , etc. ; in con- 
 nection with a fern., 75 18 - 19 , 100*. [Vsac: 
 for mg, cf. lir-T7js and soc-ius, under 
 V sac.] 
 
 sakhi [364], f. female companion, friend 
 (of a woman), [sakhi: cf. 362b 2 .] 
 
 sakhi-gana, m. (friend-crowd, i.e.) 
 friends.
 
 sakhijana] 
 
 [264] 
 
 sakhi-jana, m. (friend-persons, collec- 
 tively, i.e.) friends. 
 
 sakhya, n. friendship, [sakhi, 1212c.] 
 
 sa-gana, a. with (their) troops (of at- 
 tendants). [2sa.] 
 
 sagara, m. 1. the atmosphere, Luft- 
 meer; 2. Sagara, name of a mythical 
 prince. 
 
 samkata, 1. a. narrow, strait; 2. m. 
 Slender, name of a gander, 37 21 ; 3. n. 
 narrow passage, a strait; 4. Jig., like 
 Eng. strait, a difficulty, 52 14 ; danger, 25 4 . 
 [cf. 1245g.] 
 
 samkalpa, m. a decision of the mind; 
 the will or wish or purpose proceeding 
 from such decision, a definite intention, 
 [vlklp + sam, 1148.1, 236.] 
 
 sariiketa, m. agreement; esp. a meeting 
 agreed upon with a lover, a rendezvous, 
 [prop. ' co-intention,' sam + keta.] 
 
 samkranti,/. an entering, esp. entering 
 of the sun upon a new zodiacal sign. 
 [Vkram +sam, cf. 1157 l w. 955a.] 
 
 samkhya,^ the tale or number. [Vkhya 
 + sam.] 
 
 sang a, m. 1. a sticking to or hanging 
 upon; 2. Jig. an attachment (of the 
 mind) to anything, desire for a thing; 
 sange, in case of desire, 64 2 ; pi. lusts. 
 [\/sanj, 210.1.] 
 
 samgama, m. a coming together, union. 
 [Vgam + sam.] 
 
 samgama 11 a, f. -I, a. subst. causing to 
 assemble, gatherer, [caus. of Vgam + 
 sam.] 
 
 saihgara, m. agreement, promise. [Vlgr 
 4- sam, ' chime in with.'] 
 
 sanigha, m. (a combination, i.e.) com- 
 pany, crowd. [V han + sam, 333, cf . 
 216.9 and 402.] 
 
 V sac (sisakti; sacate ; sagcus, sagcire 
 [794d 2 ]). -1. be with, be united with; 
 be together, have intercourse together, 
 79 14 ; 2. accompany a person (ace.) to 
 a thing (dat.), i.e. help him to it, 69 18 ; 
 3. be attached to; Jig. follow (a com- 
 mandment), 75 2 ; follow up, i.e. attend to, 
 821'. 
 
 [orig. ' accompany,' i.e. 1. ' go at the 
 side of, with help or favor,' and 2. ' go 
 
 after, seek, follow': cf. fV-o/ucu, 'accom- 
 pany/ e-oTr-cyUTji/, ' followed ' ; Lat. sequ-or, 
 ' follow ' ; sec-undus, ' following, second ' ; 
 also fir-ertjs, ' attendant,' Lat. soc-ius, 
 'comrade': further, AS. seon, *seh(w)on, 
 Eng. see, Ger. seh-en, ' (seek, look for, 
 follow with the eyes, i.e.) see.'] 
 
 saciva, m. attendant, supporter, [v'sac, 
 1190, with union-vowel i.] 
 
 sa-j6sas, a. (of like pleasure, i.e.) unani- 
 mous, harmonious; kindly disposed, 86 15 . 
 [1304c 3 .] 
 
 sajja, a. 1. as used of a bow, having its 
 string on, strung, ready for use (the string 
 being wound around the bow when this 
 is not in use) ; 2. generalized, ready, as 
 used of persons and things, [for sajya, 
 q.v., with assimilation as in sajyate, 
 sajj ate see v' sanj . ] 
 
 sajji-kr (-karoti). 1. make strung, 
 string (a bow); 2. make ready, 34 1T . 
 [sajja, 1094.] 
 
 sajya, a. having its string on, strung. 
 [2sa + 2jya, 'bow-string.'] 
 
 samcaya, m. a piling together, accumu- 
 lation, esp. of wealth; supply (of food), 
 [v' 1 ci, ' pile up,' + sam. ] 
 
 samcayana, n. the gathering (of the 
 bones of the dead), [do.] 
 
 samcayavant, a. possessing an accu- 
 mulation (of wealth), rich ; with arthais, 
 rich with money, i.e. having capital, 
 [samcaya.] 
 
 samcarin, a. wandering. [V car + sam, 
 1183 3 .] 
 
 samciti, f. a piling; pile, [,'lci, 'pile 
 up,' + sam.] 
 
 v sanj or saj (sajati; sasanja; asankslt; 
 sakta; saktum; -sajya; pass, sajyate 
 or sajjate). stick to, be attached to; 
 sakta, attached (of a glance), immov- 
 able, [cf. Lat. seg-nis, 'sticking, i.e. slow, 
 lazy.'] 
 
 4-pra, be attached to; prasakta, ad- 
 dicted to. 
 
 sat at a, only in ace. s. neut., -am, as adv. 
 continuously, constantly, always. [for 
 samtata, see Vtan + sam: for mg, cf. 
 Lrt. con-tinens, ' con-tinuous.'] 
 
 sat-kr, scs sant 6.
 
 [265] 
 
 [sadasat 
 
 satkara, m. good treatment, esp. kind 
 reception of a guest, hospitality, [satkr.] 
 
 sattama, a. best, [sant, 471.] 
 
 sattva, 1. n. condition of being, being- 
 ness, being, existence, essent-ia; 2. n. 
 condition of being good, absolutely good 
 being, goodness, the highest of the three 
 qualities (see guna), 66 8 N. ; 3. m. n. 
 a living being, creature, 28 u , 48 2 . [formed 
 from sant (1239), just as the artificial 
 Lat. essent-ia, ' being-ness, that on which a 
 thing depends for being what it is,' from 
 essens, a quasi-ppl. of esse.'] 
 
 satpati, m. strong ruler; master, [sant 
 + pati, 1280, cf. 1267a.] 
 
 satya, 1. a. real; true; existing in 
 reality, 45 12 ; truthful, trusty, faithful, 
 69 9 ; 2. n. the real; the true; reality; 
 truth, 95 end of line; truthfulness, 21 6 , 
 95 6 near mid. of line; faithfulness, 69 12 ; 
 yatha , tena satyena, as , by this 
 truth, as truly as , so truly, 14 l ff . ; 
 3. n. vow, promise, oath; satyam bru, 
 swear, 10 21 , 15 6 ; satyam cikirsamanas, 
 desiring to keep his promise, 8 12 ; 4. 
 satyam, adi\ truly, indeed, 49 10 . [sant, 
 1212c : radically akin w. ereo-s, ' true/ 
 but of different formation, since the 
 Cyprian shows that 3re6s stands for 
 *fTeFo-s.] 
 
 satya-radhas, a. having real blessings, 
 bestowing real blessings. [1298.] 
 
 satya-vadin, a. truth-speaking, truth- 
 ful. [1275.] 
 
 satya-vrat, n. vow of truthfulness. 
 [1264, acct 1267.] 
 
 satyavrata, a. having, i.e. keeping a 
 satyavrata, always truthful, 6 23 . [1296, 
 acct 1295.] 
 
 satya-samgara, a. having, i.e. keep- 
 ing a true agreement, i.e. true to his 
 promise. 
 
 satyasamdha, a. having, i.e. keeping a 
 true agreement, i.e. faithful, [satya + 
 samdha.] 
 
 satvara, a. with haste; -am, adv. quick- 
 ly, immediately. [2sa + tvara.] 
 
 sat-samnidhana, n. a being near to 
 the good, intercourse with the good, 
 [sant.] 
 
 V sad (sidati, -te [748]; sasada, sediis 
 [794e]; asadat; satsyati; satta, sanna; 
 sattum; -sadya; sadayati, -te). 1. 
 sit; seat one's self; 2. settle down, 
 sink beneath a burden ; be overcome ; 
 get into trouble; be in a desperate pre- 
 dicament, 18 7 ; despair; not know what 
 to do, be unable to help one's self ; 
 
 cans. set. [w. sidami, *si-zd-ami, 
 si-s ft d-ami, cf. ?o>, *a-j-c5-ai, *<n-cr S-a>, 
 ' sit,' Lat. sld-ere, ' settle down ' ; cf . also 
 sed-ere, 'sit'; Eng. sit, caus. set; sad-as, 
 e'S-oj, e5-pa, Lat. sella, *sed-la, AS. set-l, 
 Eng. settle, ' a seat.'] 
 
 + ava, sink down, get into trouble, be 
 in distress. 
 
 + a, 1. sit upon; 2. lie in wait for, 
 89 :3 ; 3. get to, reach (a place); asan- 
 na : approached ; near, neighboring, 33 10 ; 
 
 caus. 1. set upon; 2. get to, arrive 
 at, reach ; find, obtain, gain, 23 n , 46 2 ; 
 
 3. asadya, often so attenuated in mg as 
 to be equiv. to a mere preposition : nimittam 
 kimcid asadya, (having obtained some 
 cause or other, i.e.) by or in consequence 
 of some cause or other, cf. V dig + ud. 
 
 + ni, 1. sit down; take one's seat, esp. 
 of the hotr at the sacrifice, 88 6 - 8 ; -2. 
 act. and mid. set, install as, trans.!, 
 82 12 ; caus. act. and mid. set, install as, 
 88i". 
 
 + pra, be favorable or gracious; pra- 
 sanna, kindly disposed, 1 n ; caws, make 
 kindly disposed, propitiate, 36 6 . [behind 
 the mg ' be gracious ' lies doubtless the 
 physical mg ' settle forward, incline to- 
 wards, e.g. a suppliant.'] 
 + vi, sink, used (like the Eng. be de- 
 pressed) of the spirits, be dejected ; de- 
 spond, 35 n ; come to grief, 31 1 ; visanna, 
 dejected. 
 
 + sam, sit together. 
 sadadi, adv. always, 93 3 . [cf. sada.] 
 s a dan a, n. seat; generalized, like Eng. 
 seat and Lat. sedes, place (75 7 ), dwelling. 
 [Vsad.] 
 
 sadas, n. seat. [Vsad: cf. e5os, 'seat.'] 
 sadasat, n. existence and non-existence. 
 [sat + asat, the subst. used neuter stems 
 of sant and asant, 1252.]
 
 sadasadatmaka] 
 
 [266] 
 
 sadasad-atmaka, a. having existence 
 and non-existence as its nature, whose 
 nature it is to exist and also not to exist 
 at the same time, [sadasat.] 
 
 sad a, adv. always, [cf. 1103a 2 .] 
 
 sad-acara, m. the conduct or practices 
 of the good, [sant.] 
 
 sa-dfga, a. of like appearance; equal, 
 used (296b) M;. gen. [518.] 
 
 s a d y a s , adv. on the same day ; imme- 
 diately, [see 1122f.] 
 
 sadha, adv. equiv. of 1 saha, see 1104 8 . 
 
 sadha-mada, m. co-revelry, <rv/j.ir6(Tiov, 
 common feast; sadhamadam mad, revel 
 in bliss with, w. instr. [1290.] 
 
 sadha-stha, n. (orig., perhaps, co-place, 
 i.e. place of union, but generalized to the 
 simple mg of) place. 
 
 sana, a. old. [orig. 'of long standing, 
 long continued': cf. eVo-s, 'old'; Lat. 
 sen-ex, 'old man'; Goth, sin-ista, 'oldest'; 
 AS. sin-ceald, ' perpetually or extremely 
 cold'; AS. and Old Eng. sin-grene, 'ever- 
 green,' Eng. sen-green, ' (extremely green, 
 i.e.) house-leek': from a not quotable 
 Goth. *sina-skalks, Medieval Lat. sini- 
 scalcus, 'oldest house-servant,' through 
 intermediate Romance forms, comes Eng. 
 seneschal; Ger. Siind-flut, 'sin-flood,' is a 
 popular interpretation of Old High Ger. 
 sin-vluot, ' the long-continued flood, the 
 Noachian deluge.'] 
 
 s d, n a , adv. of old, always, [instr. of sana, 
 1112c, not a.] 
 
 sanat, adv. from of old, always, forever, 
 [sana, acct 1114d.] 
 
 sanatana, a. everlasting, eternal, [sana, 
 1245e.] 
 
 sa-nila, a. having a common nest or 
 origin, affiliated, united. [1304c.] 
 
 sane mi, adv. always. [perhaps from 
 sana.] 
 
 sant, 1. ppl. being; otiose, 24 16 , see 
 \1 1 as ; existing ; 2. a. real, genuine ; 
 true, good; 3. of people, good, noble, 
 excellent, 19 8 ' 20 , 28"; -4. sati, /. a 
 true, good, virtuous wife (hence Anglo- 
 Indian Suttee); 5. n. the existent; 
 existence ; 6. sat-kr, make good, treat 
 well, receive kindly. 
 
 [present ppl. of V 1 as, ' be,' q.v. : cf . 
 fiav, stem tovT, 'being'; Lat. absens, stem 
 ab-sent, 'being off'; sons, stem sont, 'the 
 real doer,' ' the guilty one ' ; Danish sane?, 
 AS. soft, ' true,' Eng. sooth, ' true, truth ' : 
 for mg 2, cf. the mg of satya, of rbv 
 iovra \6yov, 'the true story/ and of 
 Eng. sooth.~\ 
 
 samtati, f. 1. continuation; 2. esp. 
 continuation of one's race or family, i.e. 
 offspring. 
 
 samta'pa, m. 1. heat; 2. pain, sor- 
 row, [vftap + sam.] 
 
 samtapavant, a. sorrowful. [1233.] 
 
 samdrg, / a beholding; sight. [Vdrg + 
 sam.] 
 
 samdeha, m. 1. doubt; -at, from (by 
 reason of) uncertainty [291 2 ] ; 2. dan- 
 ger, 20 15 . [V dih + sam : for mg 2, cf . 
 bhaya.] 
 
 samdha, f. 1. covenant, agreement; 
 2. promise. [V 1 dha, ' put,' + sam : for 
 mg 1, cf. ffwO'fiKri, 'covenant,' and vw- 
 riOiifu, the counterpart of samdadhami.] 
 
 samdha n a, n. a putting together, avv- 
 Offfis, mixing. [V 1 dha, ' put,' + sam : 
 paroxytone, 1150. lc.] 
 
 samdhi, m. 1. a putting together, ativ- 
 Offfis; 2. like samdha, compact, alliance, 
 41 13 ; peace, 17 7 ; 3. the putting together 
 of sounds in word and sentence (see 
 Whitney 109b 2 ), euphonic combination, 
 50 9 ; 4. junction (of day and night), i.e. 
 morning or evening twilight. [V 1 dha, 
 ' put,' + sam, 1155. 2e.] 
 
 samdhya, a. pertaining to samdhi or 
 junction; samdhya,/. 1. time of junc- 
 tion (of day and night), morning or even- 
 ing twilight ; du. morning and evening 
 twilight; 2. morning twilight (of a 
 yuga), 58 3 . [samdhi, cf. 1212b.] 
 
 sarndhyanqa, m. (lit. twilight-portion) 
 evening twilight of a yuga. [anga.] 
 
 samdhya-samaya, m. twilight-time, 
 evening. 
 
 samnidhana, n. (a putting down to- 
 gether, juxta-position, approximation, and 
 so) a being near; contiguity; presence; 
 neighborhood, 40 9 . [VI dha, 'put,' + 
 sam-ni, 1150: cf. samnidhi.]
 
 [267] 
 
 [samartha 
 
 samnidhi, ?. presence. [Vldha, 'put,' 
 + sam-ni, 1155. 2e : for mg, cf. samni- 
 dhana.] 
 
 V sap (sapati, -te ; sepiis). follow after; 
 be attached or devoted to. [identified by 
 some with V sac.] 
 
 sap, vbl. following after, in cpds. [Vsap.] 
 
 sapatnl, a. f. having a common hus- 
 band ; as subst. one of two or more wives 
 of the same man, co-wife, fellow-wife, 
 concubine. [sa + pati, but in the fern, 
 form, since the masc. would not be used : 
 1304c: cf. supatni.] 
 
 V saparya (saparyati). pay devotion to, 
 worship. [denom. of a not quotable 
 *sapar, ' devotion,' from V sap.] 
 
 sa-pinda, a. subst. having the pinda 
 (q.i'. ) in common, said of persons who 
 have a common ancestor not more than 
 six generations back to whom they offer 
 a pinda together, persons related in the 
 sixth generation. [1304c.] 
 
 sapta [483*], num. seven, 53 6 , 99 2S ; also, 
 as a favorite sacred number, the expression 
 of an indefinite plurality, e.g. 71 3 , 72 4 ' 6 . 
 [cf. eirrd, Lat. septem, AS. seofon, Eng. 
 seven.'} 
 
 saptakathamaya, f. -I, a. consisting 
 of seven narrations, [sapta-katha : see 
 maya.] 
 
 sapta-tantu, a. having seven courses. 
 
 sapta-pada, f. -I, a. 1. being for 
 seven, i.e. many or all, steps (see 1294 2 ), 
 i.e. being at every step, constant ; 2. 
 having (taken) seven steps; see 100 4 N. 
 [1300 a.] 
 
 sa-pragraya, a. with respectful de- 
 meanor; -am, adv. respectfully. 
 
 sa-phala, a. fruitful, fruit-bearing. 
 
 sa-bandhu, a. having a friend. 
 
 sa-baspa, a. tearful. 
 
 sa-brahmacarin, m. fellow-student. 
 
 sa-bhaya, a. fearful; -am, adv. in 
 terror. 
 
 sabha, f. house or hall for public meet- 
 ings, esp. gambling-house ; assembly, 19 3 ; 
 society, 19 l . [orig., perhaps, 'family': 
 cf . Goth, sibja, ' relationship,' AS. sibb, 
 ' relationship, related ' ; Old Eng. god-sib, 
 'related in God,' i.e. ' a sponsor in baptism/ 
 
 Eng. gossip, ' sponsor, familiar friend, 
 tattler ' ; Ger. Sipp, masc., ' relative/ 
 Sippe, fern., 'relationship, kindred.'] 
 
 sabharya, a. having his wife with him, 
 i.e. with his wife, 1 1T . [2 sa + bharya, 
 1304c, 334 2.] 
 
 sam, prep, along, with, together, [cf. 2sa.] 
 
 1 sama [525 4 ], end. pron. any; every, 
 76 12 ; cf. samaha. [cf. a^-flei/, 'from 
 some place or other'; ovo-a.fj.6s, 'not any'; 
 ov8-a/j.ios, 'in not any wise'; AS. sum, 
 ' some one/ Eng. some.'] 
 
 2 sama, a. -1. even; -2. like, 63 17 ; 
 equal, 48 10 ; w. gen. (296b), 3 16 ; -am, adv. 
 equally with, along with, with, w. instr., 
 29 6 ,26 5 ; -3. like or equal (to the usual), 
 i.e. not distinguished, common, mediocre, 
 19 10 . [cf. apa, Doric a/xd, 'at the same 
 time ' ; o^os, ' one and the same, common ' ; 
 6fj.a-\ds, ' even, equal ' ; Lat. simi-lis, 
 'like'; AS. same, 'in like manner'; Eng. 
 same.] 
 
 samata, f. equality; mediocrity, 19 10 . 
 
 [2 sama, 1237.] 
 samad, f. fight, contest, [sam, 383d 4 : 
 
 cf . ofj.ao-o-s, ' confused voices of men, din 
 
 of battle, throng.'] 
 sam-adhika, a. having a surplus with 
 
 it ; masatrayam samadhikam, three 
 
 months and more. [1305.] 
 sam-anantara, a. with a non-interval, 
 
 immediately adjoining ; -am, adv. im- 
 mediately thereupon. [1305.] 
 samaya, m. 1. (a coming together, i.e., 
 
 like Eng. con-vention) agreement; 2. 
 
 (like Eng. juncture) a point of time ; and 
 
 so time or season, 49 16 ; occasion; 3. a 
 
 con-currence (of circumstances), i.e. a 
 
 case see iha. [Vi + sam.] 
 samayocita, a. suitable to the occasion ; 
 
 -am, adv. as the occasion demands. 
 
 [ucita, Vuc.] 
 samara na. n. battle; Treffen. [prop. 'a 
 
 coming together/ Vr + sam, 1150. la : just 
 
 so, Eng. verb meet sometimes means ' come 
 
 together with hostile purpose/ and Eng. 
 
 noun encounter is used mostly of ' a hostile 
 
 meeting.'] 
 sam -art ha, a. (having an agreeing or 
 
 accordant object [1305], i.e.) suiting its
 
 samalamkrta] 
 
 [268] 
 
 object, and so suitable; capable; able, 
 w. inf. 
 
 sam-alamkrta, a. well adorned, [see 
 alam : sam intensive, 1077b end.] 
 
 samavatta-dhana, a. containing 
 gathered pieces, [see 1087e.] 
 
 s am ah a, accentless adv. somehow, 80 5 . 
 [Isama: cf. HOOa and 1104 3 .] 
 
 samagama, m. 1. a coming together, 
 meeting; 2. meeting with, i.e. inter- 
 course. [ V gam + sam-a. ] 
 
 samana, f. -i, a. 1. like; one and the 
 same, 78 15 ; -am, adv. in the same way, 
 103 13 ; 2. common (to different persons 
 or countries), 73*, 98 17 ; united, 73 16 . 
 [2 sama, 1245d.] 
 
 sam ana -grama, m. the same village. 
 
 samanagramiya, a. belonging to the 
 same village, [samana-grama, 1215.] 
 
 samasa, m. 1. a putting together; and 
 so (cf. Lat. con-trahere, ' draw together,' 
 then 'abridge') 2. a condensation; 
 abridgment; -ena and samasatas, suc- 
 cinctly. [V 2 as, ' throw,' + sam.] 
 
 samidh, f. (like Eng. kindlings) fuel. 
 [\/idh + sam, 'kindle.'] 
 
 samlpa, 1. a. near ; 2. as n. near- 
 ness, neighborhood, presence ; used like 
 antika, q.v. ; 2a. samipam, w. gen. or in 
 cpd, (to the presence of, i.e., simply) to, 
 w. verbs of going, 6 W , 27", 33*, 44 u ; 
 2b. samlpe, w. gen. or in cpd (in the 
 presence or neighborhood of, i.e., simply) : 
 before, 2 16 ; near, 25 9 ; hard by, 34 14 ; 
 by, 40 3 . [cf. pratipa.] 
 
 samipa-stha, a. in cpd, situated in the 
 neighborhood of, near. 
 
 samutsarga, m. an ejecting, discharge. 
 [Vsrj + sam-ud, 216.1.] 
 
 samudra, m. a gathering of waters, a sea, 
 an ocean, ['a con-fluence/ Vud + sam, 
 1188b.J 
 
 samunnati, f. arising; elevation, i.e., 
 Jig., distinction. [V nam + sam-ud, 1157 
 and d.] 
 
 samrti.y. (a coming together, and so) 
 col-lision, shock, [Vr + sam, 1157d: cf. 
 samarana.] 
 
 sampatti, /. success; prosperity; abund- 
 ance, 17 14 . [Vpad + sam, 1157d.] 
 
 sampad, f. 1. success; 2. (a falling 
 together, co-inciding, and so a fitting of 
 the parts to each other, i.e.) correct pro- 
 portion, beauty. [V pad + sam.] 
 
 sam put a, m. hemispherical bowl or dish; 
 round casket (for jewels) ; sampute likh, 
 write a thing (ace.) in the strong-box of a 
 person (gen.), i.e. credit it to him. [sam + 
 puta, ' a together-fold,' 1289a.] 
 
 samprati, adv. 1. just opposite; and 
 so 2. (to the same limit) even, exactly; 
 3. (like Eng. even) at the very time; 
 and so just now. [sam (intensive, 1077b 
 end) + prati, 1314a.] 
 
 sam-priya, a. mutually dear, [priya, 
 1289a.] 
 
 sambandha, m. con-nection ; and so, as 
 in Eng., relationship. [V bandh + sam. ] 
 
 sambhava, m. origin; at end of adj. 
 cpds, having as its origin, originating 
 in . [VbM + sam.] 
 
 sambhavya, grdv. to be supposed, sup- 
 posable. [caus. of V bhu + sam.] 
 
 sambhrama, m. extreme agitation, haste 
 arising from excitement. [V bhram + 
 sam.] 
 
 sam-mila, a. corn-mixed, mixed with, 
 united with. [1289a.] 
 
 sam-rajnl, f. complete, i.e. sovereign 
 ruler ; mistress. [for sam, see 1289b 
 end, and 1077b end : for m instead of m, 
 see 2-13a 2 .] 
 
 sa-yatna, a. (having, i.e. taking pains 
 to, i.e.) trying to, w. inf.; engaged in, 
 w. inf. 
 
 sara, a. running, moving, going, in cpds. 
 [Vsr.] 
 
 sarana, a. running; as n. a running. 
 [Vsr, 1150. la.] 
 
 V saranya (saranyati). run, hasten, 
 [sarana, 1059d.J 
 
 saranyu, a. hastening, swift ; -yu [355c], 
 f. Saranyu, daughter of Twashtar, and 
 spouse of Vivaswaut, to whom she bare 
 Yama and Yami, 85 15 N. [V saranya, 
 1178h: cf. 'Eplvv-s, 'the swift' goddess of 
 vengeance.] 
 
 s a r d m a , f. the bitch of Indra or of the 
 gods ; cf. 83 n N. [' the runner ' or ' mes- 
 senger,' Vsr, cf. 1166.]
 
 [269] 
 
 [savayas 
 
 saras, n. lake, pool. [orig. 'fluid, i.e. 
 water,' from Vsr, 'run,' just as fluidus 
 from fluere, ' flow, run.'] 
 
 aaras-tira, n. bank of a pool. 
 
 sarasvant, 1. a. rich in waters ; -vati, 
 /. : 2. Saraswati, name of a mighty 
 stream, probably the Indus ; 3. Saras- 
 wati, a small stream in Madhyade9a, to 
 which the name and attributes of the 
 great stream were transferred ; 4. 
 Saraswati, the goddess of voice and 
 speech, learning and eloquence, [saras.] 
 
 s a r 1 1 , f. stream. [V sr, ' run, flow,' 383. 3 : 
 for mg, cf . Ger. Fluss, ' stream,' w. fliessen, 
 ' flow,' and Eng. stream under V sru.] 
 
 sarga, m. 1. shot; 2. stream or spurt 
 or jet; 3. a letting loose; 4. that 
 which is let loose, esp. a herd let loose 
 from the stall, 76 4 ; 5. chapter of an 
 epic poem, a Jig. use of the word in mg 1 
 or 2. [Vsrj, 216.1.] 
 
 sarpa, m. (like serpent from serpere, 
 'creep') the creeper, snake, serpent, 84 14 . 
 [V srp, q.v.] 
 
 sarpis, n. clarified butter, either warm 
 and still fluid or cold and hardened, and 
 so not differing from ghrta, ' ghee.' [orig. 
 ' fluid ' butter, or ' the slippery, fat ' 
 stuff, from V srp, ' creep, move gently, 
 slip,' 1153: see Vsrp and srpra: akin are 
 Hesychian e \ir-os, ' olive oil, fat,' and 
 <!\<j>-os, 'butter'; Ger. Salbe, AS. sealf, 
 Eng. salve.~\ 
 
 sarva [524], pron. 1. entire or complete, 
 50 2 \ 95 18 , 96 2 ; salvus, integer, un- 
 harmed ; 2. adj. all, every ; 2a. subst. : 
 sing, m., everyone ; sing, n., everything ; 
 pi., all ; 2b. common at beg. of cpds 
 instead of an adj.: thus sarva-gunair 
 yuktas, for sarvair gunair yuktas, I 12 , 
 cf. 2 3 ; so cf. 10 15 w. 10 23 , 32 15 w. 32", 
 51 22 w. 52 23 ; similarly 6 4 , 17 1 - 9 , 2 1 23 , 
 etc. ; 2c. idam sarvam, 63 21 , see idam ; 
 so for 66 19 ; 
 
 observe that both mgs, 1 and 2, are 
 common to the post-Vedic literature ; that in 
 the oldest parts of the Veda, sarva occurs 
 only in mg 1, while for mg 2 the proper 
 Vedic word is vigva, q.v.; but see 77 11 K. 
 [cf. o\os, Epic ov\os, *oA.A.os, *O'AFO-S, 
 
 ' whole, entire ' ; Lat. salvus, ' whole, un- 
 harmed, well ' ; Oscan sollu-s, ' entire ' ; 
 Lat. stem sollu- in cpds, e.g. solli-ferreum, 
 'all-iron (weapon),' soll-ennis, 'of every 
 year, annual,' used of religious cere- 
 monies : no connection w. Eng. (w)hole, 
 see also kalya.] 
 
 sarvam -sah a, a. patiently bearing all 
 things, [sarvam, 1250a, 1270b.] 
 
 sarva-gata, a. (gone to all, i.e.) uni- 
 versally prevalent. 
 
 sarvatas, adv. 1. from all sides; on 
 all sides, 93 12 ; in every direction, 3 11 , 
 101 12 ; 2. omnino, altogether, 56 16 . 
 [sarva, 1098b : acct, cf. 1298c.] 
 
 sarvatra, adv. 1. everywhere or in all 
 cases, 21 19 ; 2. at all times; always, un- 
 interruptedly, 5 14 . [sarva, 1099: acct, 
 cf. 1298c.] 
 
 sarvatha, adv. 1. in every way; 2. 
 by all means. [sarva, 1101.] 
 
 sarvada, adv. always; constantly; for 
 ever, [sarva, 1103.] 
 
 sarva-deva, m. pi. all the gods. 
 
 sarvadevamaya, a. containing in him- 
 self all the gods, i.e. representing or being 
 in the name of all the gods, 28 19 . [sarva- 
 deva: see maya.] 
 
 sarva-dravya, n. pi. all things. 
 
 sarva-bhava, m. the whole heart. 
 
 sarvabhutamaya, a. containing in 
 himself all beings, 56 20 . [sarva-bhuta : 
 see maya.] 
 
 sarva-yosit, f. pi. all women. 
 
 sarva -1 oka, m. the entire world. 
 
 sarva-vira, a. with unharmed heroes or 
 with all heroes, i.e. having lost none. 
 [1298.] 
 
 sarvagas, adv. wholly, altogether; all 
 together, 6 6 ; together, 65 15 . [sarva, 
 1106.] 
 
 sarvanavadya, a. entirely faultless, 
 [anavadya, 1279 *.] 
 
 sarvanavadyanga, a. having an en- 
 tirely faultless body, [anga, 1298.] 
 
 savana, n. a pressing, esp. of Soma. 
 [Vlsu, 'press out.'] 
 
 sa-vayas, a. of like strength or age; 
 m. pi. (like fjAt/cej, fi\iKiurai, ' equals in 
 age, comrades') comrades. [3vayas.]
 
 savarna] 
 
 [270] 
 
 sd-varna, a. 1. having the same ex- 
 ternal appearance, exactly similar, 85 H ; 
 2. of the same caste, 62 7 . [for rags, 
 see varna.] 
 
 sa-vitana, a. having a canopy, with a 
 canopy. 
 
 savitf, m. 1. (with the two mgs of 
 Eng. quickener) impeller, enlivener ; 2. 
 The Enlivener, Savitar, name of a god, 
 selection xxxvi. ; 3. the sun, 23 13 . 
 [V2su, 'impel.'] 
 
 sa-vinaya,". with politeness ; -am, adv. 
 politely. 
 
 sa-vigesa, a. possessing distinction, dis- 
 tinguished; -am, adv. in a distinguished 
 way, especially. 
 
 savya, a. left, 101 19 , 102", 103 2 ; as m. 
 the left hand or foot, 60 5 . [prob. for 
 *syavya (as would appear fr. the Church 
 Slavonic form suj, 'sinister'), and so per- 
 haps akin with trKaws, *<TKaFio-s, Lat. 
 scaevus, 'left.'] 
 
 savyatha, a. with sorrow or trouble, 
 [sa + vyatha.] 
 
 savyavrt, a. with a turn to the left, i.e. 
 turning to the left, [avrt.] 
 
 sa-gisya, a. with his pupils. 
 
 V sas (sasti). sleep, slumber. 
 
 s a s a , m. or n. herbs ; grass. 
 
 sasamdhya, o. with the morning twi- 
 light, [samdhya.] 
 
 sa-samdhyanga, a. with the evening 
 twilight. 
 
 sa-sambhrama, a. with excited haste. 
 
 sa-sarpa, a. with a serpent. 
 
 sasya, n. standing crop; produce of the 
 field, grain, [cf. sasa.] 
 
 sasya-ksetra, n. field of grain. 
 
 sasya-raksaka, m. keeper or watcher 
 of the standing crop. 
 
 V s ah (sahate; sasaha, sasahe ; asahista; 
 sahisyate ; sodha [222 3 ] ; sahitum, s6- 
 dhum ; -sahya). 1. overpower, 99 8 ; 
 be victorious, 78 4 ; 2. hold out against, 
 withstand ; and so bear ; endure patiently, 
 32 7. 
 
 [orig. 'be powerful, withstand, hold 
 back, hold': cf. the collateral Vsagh, 
 'take on one's self, bear': cf. tax", *<"- 
 <rx-a>, ' hold back ' ; ex, %-<r\-ov, ' hold or 
 
 have, had ' : w. sahas, *sagh-as, cf . the 
 Germanic stem seg-oz, as it appears in 
 Goth. neut. siyis, AS. sigor, prob. neuter, 
 all meaning ' victory ' ; the stem appears 
 also in Seges-tes, name of a Cheruscan 
 prince (Tacitus, Annals), and in Sigis- 
 mund : cf. also AS. sige, Ger. Sieg, 
 ' victory.'] 
 
 + ud, 1. hold out, endure; 2. be 
 able, w. inf. ; katham svartham utsahe, 
 how can I (sc. do, prosecute) my own 
 object. 
 
 1 saha, 1. adv. together; saha na etad, 
 in common ours (is) that, i.e. we'll own 
 that together, 97 10 ; 2. prep, with, along 
 with, w. instr., I 16 , 89 8 . [cf. 2sa, and 
 1104 3 .] 
 
 2 saha, a. 1. powerful ; 2. enduring, 
 patiently bearing. [Vsah.] 
 
 saha-carin, 1. a. going together, ac- 
 companying; 2. as m. comrade, [for 
 2, cf. sahaya.] 
 
 saha-jd, a. born together, con-nate, in- 
 born, natural. 
 
 saha-bha sman, a. with the ashes. 
 
 saha-vatsa, a. with the calf. [1304c.] 
 
 saha-vahana, a. having their teams 
 along, with their teams. [1304c.] 
 
 sahas, n. superior power; might, 75 u ; 
 victory ; sahasa, adv. (with violence, 
 i.e.) suddenly, straightway, [see under 
 Vsah.] 
 
 sa-hasta, a. having hands. 
 
 sahasya, a. powerful, [sahas, 1212dl.] 
 
 sahasra, n. a thousand; esp. a thousand 
 kine ; a thousand, in the sense of a great 
 many, 87 6 ; for constructions, see 486. 
 [prop. ' one-thousand,' 3 sa + hasra : witl 
 hasra, cf. -xl\o-, *xei\o, *x<r/\.o (in SeKoi- 
 Xf\ot), and ^l\ioi, ' thousand.'] 
 
 sahasra-nitha, a. having a thousand 
 songs, rich in songs, [nitha, 193, 1300a.] 
 
 sahasradaksina, a. having a thousand 
 kine as his gift or as its reward ; as m., sc. 
 yajfia, a sacrifice at which such reward is 
 given, 87 15 ; of persons who offer such 
 gifts, 91 9 . [daksina, ISOOa.J 
 
 sahasra-dvar [388c], a thousand- 
 doored. 
 
 sahasra-^rnga, a. thousand-horned.
 
 [271] 
 
 [saman 
 
 sahasrangu, a. thousand-rayed; as m. 
 the sun. [angu.] 
 
 sahasrangu-sama, a. sun-like. 
 
 sahasra-magha, a. having thousand 
 gifts. [247.] 
 
 sahasvant, a. mighty, [sahas.] 
 
 s ah ay a, m. companion, attendant. [lit. 
 ' going together or with/ saha + aya : for 
 mg, cf. Lat. comes, stem com-i-t, Vz, lit. 
 'going with, i.e. companion,' and also 
 sahacarin.] 
 
 sahayatana, a. along with the fire-place. 
 [ayatana.] 
 
 sahita, a. united; pi. in company, all to- 
 gether. [quasi-ppl. from 1 saha, like Eng. 
 downed from dou-n. 
 
 sahela, a. with levity; -am, adv. play- 
 fully. [2sa + hela.] 
 
 V sa or si (syati [761d3] ; sinati; sisaya ; 
 asat ; sisyati ; sita ; situm ; -saya ; 
 sayayati). bind; used almost exclusively 
 with ava and vi. [cf. 1/j.ds, stem *ai-n.a.vr, 
 ' strap, thong '; AS. si-ma, 'bond'; Church 
 Slavonic se-tt, Lithuanian se-tas, AS. sd-da, 
 Ger. Sai-te, ' string ' ; Church Slavonic 
 si-lo, AS. sd-l, Ger. Sei-l, 'rope': see also 
 V siv and snayu.] 
 
 + ava, 1. unbind or unharness (a 
 team); and so turn in; go to rest; go 
 home, 101 6 ; avasita, having turned in, 
 at rest ; 2. come to a stop at, i.e. decide 
 upon (e.g. a dwelling-place). 
 + adhy-ava, cans, bring one's self to 
 a stop at, i.e. decide upon, undertake, 
 
 + ud-ava, set out, esp. from the place 
 
 of sacrifice, cf. sa + ava, 1 ; betake one's 
 
 self, w. he., 101 4 . 
 
 + v y - a v a , decide, determine, cf. sa + 
 
 ava, 2. 
 
 + pra,.zn prasiti, 'continuation.' 
 sakuta, a. having a (definite) intention; 
 
 -am, adv. significantly, impressively. 
 
 [akuta.] 
 saksa, a. having or with the eyes; used 
 
 only in abl. saksat, as adv. 1. with the 
 
 eyes ; 2. plainly, actually, 51 14 ; exactly, 
 
 58 23 ; 3. (in reality, i.e.) in propria 
 
 persona, embodied, in person, I 10 , 6 18 . 
 
 [aksa: 1114c.] 
 
 sagara, m. ocean, [cf. sagara: accord- 
 ing to the legend, a basin hollowed out 
 by the sons of Sagara, and filled by 
 Bhagiratha with the water of the Ganges.] 
 
 sagnika, a. having Agni with them, with 
 Agni. [sa + agni, 1304c : for -ka, see 
 1222c2 2 and 1307.] 
 
 sangustha, a. with the thumb. [an- 
 gustha.] 
 
 sata, m. Sata, name of a Yaksha. 
 
 sata-vahana, . having Siita (in the 
 form of a lion) as his beast of burden, 
 riding on Sata ; as m. Satavahana, name 
 of a king, 49 1T . 
 
 sattvika, f. -I, a. 1. (really existent, 
 i.e.) real, 22 5 ; 2. standing in relation 
 to the quality sattva (q.v.), proceeding 
 from sattva, governed by sattva, good, 
 [sattva, 1222e2.] 
 
 sadana, n. dwelling. [Vsad: for mg, cf. 
 sadana.] 
 
 sadara, a. with respect; -am, adv. re- 
 spectfully, [adara.] 
 
 V sadh (sadhati, -te; sadhitum; sadha- 
 yati). 1. come straight to one's aim, 
 attain one's object; 2. bring straight to 
 one's object; cans. 1. bring to its 
 object or end; accomplish; 2. attain, 
 win. [cf. v' 2 sidh, 'succeed.'] 
 
 sadhu,/. sadhvi, a. 1. leading straight 
 to the goal; straight (path), 83 17 ; 2. 
 good or noble (of people) ; faithful (wife), 
 64 10 ; as m. noble man, 21 19 ; as f. excel- 
 lent woman, 46 7 ; 3. as adv. right; 
 regularly, 86 12 ; well; as excl. bravo! 14 22 , 
 48 16 . [Vsadh, 1178a.] 
 
 sadhuya, adv. straight, directly, [sadhii, 
 1112e end.] 
 
 sadhya, grdv. to be won; as m. pi. 
 Sadhyas, a class of deities. [V sadh.] 
 
 sanu, n. m. top; surface; ridge; back, 
 [cf. snu.] 
 
 sanugaya, a. full of repentance, [anu- 
 aya.] 
 
 sama-dhvani, m. sound of the saman. 
 [1249a 2 .] 
 
 saman, n. song; as technical term, esp. & 
 Vedic stanza as arranged for chanting, a 
 saman ; the collection of saman's, the 
 Samaveda.
 
 samarthya] 
 
 [272] 
 
 samarthya, n. ability; -am kr, do one's 
 
 utmost ; strength, 41 4 . [samartha, 
 
 1211.] 
 sama-veda, m. the Veda of saman or 
 
 chants, 63 6 . [1249a 2 .] 
 samprata, a. of now, present; -am, adv. 
 
 at present, now. [samprati, 1208d.] 
 s a my a, n. equality. [2sama, 1211.] 
 samyata,y. condition of equality or like- 
 ness, [samya.] 
 say a, n. 1. a turning in, going to rest; 
 
 2. evening; sayam, adv. at evening, 
 sayaka, a. suitable for hurling, missile. 
 
 [V2si, 'hurl,'1181a.] 
 saranga, a. dappled; as m. antelope, 
 sarameya, m. descendant of the bitch 
 
 Sarama, name of certain dogs, 77 *, 83 17 . 
 
 [sarama, 1216a.] 
 sard ha, a. with a half; dve gate sardhe, 
 
 two hundred and fifty; sardham, adv., 
 
 generalized, together ; as prep, along with, 
 
 w. instr. [ardha : the generalization of 
 
 mg is paralleled by that seen in galin.] 
 savitra, f. -i, a. belonging to Savitar; 
 
 with or without re, a verse to Savitar, esp. 
 
 Kigveda iii.62. 10 (= 74 14>15 ), regarded as 
 
 the most sacred in the Veda, and called 
 
 also gayatri, 60 13 . [savitf, 1208b.] 
 sagru, a, tearful; sagru, adv. [llllc], 
 
 tearfully, with tears in (their) eyes, 54 19 . 
 
 [acru.] 
 sastangapata, a. having or with an 
 
 astangapata, q.v. ; -am, adv. with pro- 
 
 foundest obeisance, 
 sasuya, a. with impatience; -am, adv. 
 
 impatiently, [asuya.] 
 sahasra, a. consisting of a thousand, 
 
 milliarius. [sahasra.] 
 sahayya, n. office of attendant, and so 
 
 (like Eng. attendance) service, aid. 
 
 [sahaya, 1211.] 
 V Isi, bind, see Vsa. 
 V 2 si, hurl, in pra-sita, 'darting along,' 
 
 sayaka, ' missile,' and sena, ' weapon.' 
 sinha, m. lion; at end of cpds, the best of 
 
 , noble or brave ; cf. vyaghra. [' the 
 
 powerful ' beast, V sah.] 
 V sic (sincati, -te [758]; siseca, sisice ; 
 
 asicat, -ata ; seksyati, -te ; sikta ; sek- 
 
 tum ; siktva; -sicya ; sicyate). 1. 
 
 pour out; sprinkle, 49 20 ; 2. esp. semen 
 inf undere f eminae ; 3. (like Eng. found) 
 cast, e.g. molten metal; phenam vajram 
 asincan, they cast the foam into (the 
 shape of) a thunderbolt, 97 12 . [cf. 
 (ic-/ub, ' moisture ' ; AS. seon, *sih-an, 
 ' filter, flow,' Ger. seih-en, ' strain ' ; Church 
 Slavonic slc-ati, Ger. seich-en, ' mingere ' : 
 cf. also Swedish sila, *sih-la, ' strain,' 
 whence Eng. sile, 'drain, strain,' whence 
 sil-t, ' drainings, sediment.'] 
 + abhi, 1. pour upon, sprinkle; 2. 
 sprinkle in token of consecration, and so 
 (like Eng. anoint) consecrate. 
 + ava, pour upon. 
 + a, pour into. 
 
 + ni, pour down or in; semen inf undere 
 feminae. 
 
 sic, f. hem of a garment or robe. 
 
 siddha, a. perfected; as m. pi. the Sid- 
 dhas, a class of demi-gods, with super- 
 natural powers, esp. that of flying through 
 the air. [see V 2 sidh, ' succeed.'] 
 
 siddhi,/. 1. success, 36 10 ; accomplish- 
 ment (of a wish), 24 21 ; successful per- 
 formance, 57 14 ; attainment of an object, 
 52 u ; 2. (perfection, i.e.) magic power, 
 [prop. ' the reaching an aim,' V 2 sidh, 
 'hit the mark,' 1157. la.] 
 
 siddhimant, a. possessing magic power. 
 [1235.] 
 
 V Isidh (sedhati ; sisedha ; setsyati ; 
 siddha; seddhum; -sidhya). drive off; 
 scare away. 
 
 V 2 sidh (sidhyati, -te; sisedha; setsyati, 
 -te ; siddha). 1. reach an aim, hit the 
 mark; 2. succeed, 18 n ; be accom- 
 plished, IS 22 ; become realized, 18 19 ; be 
 of advantage, boot, avail, 71*; siddha, 
 having reached one's (highest) aim, hav- 
 ing attained perfection; esp. perfect in 
 the sense of having attained supernatural 
 or magic powers ; as m. a Siddha, q.v. 
 [cf. v'sadh.] 
 
 + p r a , succeed ; prasiddha, known, cf. 
 prasiddhi ; aham prasiddho musaka- 
 khyaya, I go by the name of M., 47 21 . 
 
 sindhu, 1. in V., m. stream; 2. in V. 
 and later, f. The Stream, i.e. the Indus 
 (incolis Sindus appellatus Pliny); 3.
 
 [273] 
 
 [1 suta 
 
 the land on the Indus and its inhabitants 
 (pi.), [cf. the Old Persian form hindu 
 (in an inscription of Darius Hystaspis at 
 Persepolis), as name of the land on the 
 Indus : hence, w. loss of aspiration, the 
 classical form 'Ij/SJ-s ; hence also Persian 
 Hind, ' India,' and Hind-u-stan (stem = 
 sthana, 'abode, land').] 
 
 sisrksu, a. desirous to create. [fr. 
 desid. of V srj, 1038, 1178f : euphony, 
 184c 2 .] 
 
 V si v (sivyati ; syiita ; -sivya). sew. 
 [prop, slu (765): cf. v' sa, si, 'bind,' su- 
 tra, ' thread,' sucf, ' needle ' : cf . Kaff-avu, 
 *KaTo-<ruco, 'sew down, stitch together, 
 cobble ' ; Lat. su-ere, ' sew,' su-tor, ' shoe- 
 maker'; AS. siw-ian, seowian, Eng. sew; 
 AS. seam, Eng. seam, Ger. Saum, 'hem, 
 border.'] 
 
 V Isu (sun6ti, sunute; susava; savisyati, 
 sosyati; suta; -siitya). press out, ex- 
 tract, esp. the Soma or extract ; sunvant, 
 as m. the Soma-presser ; suta, extracted ; 
 as m. the extract, i.e. Soma-juice, 70 5 ; 
 draught of Soma, 73 10 . 
 
 V 2su or su (suvati ; susuv6 ; dsavit; 
 suta, suta ; -siitya). impel, set in 
 motion ; bring about ; occasion ; give 
 authorization to; w. loc., perhaps set, at 
 KV. X. 125. 7. [cf. <?<*, *o-eF-cia>, ' let .go, 
 permit'; aT/ta GV-TO, 'the blood shot or 
 spurted.'] 
 
 + ud, impel upwards; set a-going, begin, 
 in utsava. 
 + p a r a , drive away. 
 
 V 3 s u , generate, bear, see V su. 
 
 sti, 1. adv. [1121d], well; with stha, stand 
 well, i.e. firmly, 87 6 ; asseverative or em- 
 phatic, and to be rendered variously: we 
 pray, 79 4 ; ni su svapa, sleep in peace; 
 with u, 'now,' just now, right soon, 80 l , 
 74 11 ; -2. inseparable prefix [1304b, 1288b], 
 with force of either adv. or adj., well or 
 good; sometimes intensive, as, su-dustara, 
 ' very bad-to-cross.' [no prob. connection 
 w. e5, 'well'; see ayii.] 
 
 sukumara, a. very delicate. [cf. ku- 
 mara.] 
 
 sukumaranga, f. -I, a. having very 
 delicate limbs, [anga.] 
 
 s u - k r t , a. well-doing, righteous ; as m. pi. 
 the righteous ones /car' Qoxhv, i.e. the 
 departed fathers (85 19 ), who enjoy the 
 reward of their works in the world of the 
 pious sukftam u loke, 84 n . 
 
 su-krta, n. a good deed, good works, 
 63 16 ; sukrtasya loka, world of righteous- 
 ness, 89 8 , modernized substitute for the old 
 phrase sukftam u loka. [1288 and b: 
 acct, 1284a.] 
 
 su-keganta, a. fair-locked. [1304b.] 
 
 su-ksatra, a. having a good or kind 
 rule ; as m. kind or gracious ruler, [ksa- 
 tra, 1304b.] 
 
 su-ks6tra,n. fair field. [ks6tra, 1288b.] 
 
 V suksetriya (*suksetrlyati). to desire 
 fair fields denom., found only in the fol- 
 lowing word, [suksetra, 1059c and c 2 .] 
 
 suksetriya, f. desire for fair fields. 
 [V suksetriya, 1149 6 .] 
 
 sukha, a. pleasant; comfortable; as n. 
 pleasure; comfort; joy; bliss, 58 n , 66 1 ; 
 sukham, -ena, adverbially, pleasantly, 
 with pleasure, in comfort, happily, well 
 or easily, 24 9 , etc. [cf. duhkha.] 
 
 sukha-duhkha, n. weal or woe. 
 [1253b.] 
 
 sukhin, a. having comfort, being in com- 
 fort, [sukha.] 
 
 sukhocita, a. accustomed to ease, 
 [ucita, Vuc.] 
 
 sukhodya, a. easily pronounceable, 
 [udya.] 
 
 sukhopavista, a. comfortably seated, 
 [upa vista, Vvic,.] 
 
 su-gd, a. having the going or approach 
 easy; easy to attain ; as n. good path. 
 
 su-gata, a. well-conditioned, i.e. having 
 had a goo.d time. 
 
 su-gatuya,/! desire for welfare, [pre- 
 supposes a noun *su-gatu, ' wel-fare ' 
 (see gatu), whence the denom. verb-stem 
 *sugatuya, 'desire welfare' (1061), whence 
 this noun 1149 6 .] 
 
 su-cira, a. very long; -am, adv. very 
 long. 
 
 su-janiman, a. having good productions 
 or creations ; skillfully fashioning. 
 
 1 suta, ppl. extracted; as m. extract; 
 sea \l 1 su, ' extract.' 
 
 18
 
 2 suta] 
 
 [274] 
 
 2 suta, m. son ; suta, f. daughter, [prop, 
 'generated, born,' ppl. of V3su, see Vsu: 
 for mg, cf. sunii, and Eng. bairn (under 
 V/bhr).] 
 
 su-tfp, a. easily satisfied. [vbl. fr. 
 \f 1 trp.] 
 
 su-dargana, a. having a beautiful ap- 
 pearance, handsome, eu-<j)wfis; as m. Su- 
 darfana, name of a king, 'Ei><f)dvr]s. 
 
 su -daman, a. having good gifts, bestow- 
 ing blessings ; as m. cloud, as source of 
 rain and therewith connected blessings, 
 blessed rain-cloud. 
 
 su-dina, a. very bright or clear; as n. 
 (like Lat. serenum) clear weather. 
 
 sudinatva, n. (like Lat. serenitas) clear 
 weather; fig. auspicious or blessed time, 
 always in the phrase -tve ahnam, in der 
 Gliickszeit der Tage, in the happy days. 
 [1239.] 
 
 su-ditl, f. beautiful flaming or flame. 
 
 su-dustara, a. very hard-to-cross, hard 
 to get over; (of a promise) hard to per- 
 form. 
 
 1 sudha, f. (good place or position, i.e.) 
 well-being, [sii + 1 dha.] 
 
 2 sudha, /. (good drink, i.e.) drink of the 
 gods, nectar, [sii + 2 dha.] 
 
 su-nasaksibhruva, a. having beauti- 
 ful noses-and-eyes-and-brows. [for na- 
 saksibhru (1315c), i.e. nasa + aksi + bhru, 
 1253.] 
 
 su-nigcaya, a. having a very firm re- 
 solve, very resolute. 
 
 sundara,yi -I, a. beautiful. 
 
 s u n v a , a. Soma-pressing. [V 1 su, ' press ' : 
 see 1148. 3b and 716.] 
 
 supatni, a. f. having a good husband, 
 [su + pati, but in the fern, form, since 
 the masc. would not be used : 1304b : cf. 
 sapatni.] 
 
 su-parna, a. with good wings; as m. bird 
 of prey ; eagle, vulture ; mythical bird. 
 [parna, 1304b.] 
 
 su-putra, a. having good sons, [putra, 
 1304b.] 
 
 su-pratisthita, a. properly set up. 
 
 su-pravi [355b], a. very zealous. [1288b.] 
 
 sii-prita, a. well pleased. [1288b and 
 1284.] 
 
 su-baddha, a. well or fast bound. 
 [1288b and 1284a.] 
 
 su-buddhi, a. having good wits; as m. 
 Bright-wits, Good-wits, name of a crow. 
 
 su-bhaga, a. having a goodly portion, 
 fortunate, happy ; esp. loved (by one's 
 husband), 89 10 ; charming; amiable, 61 12 . 
 [bhaga, 1304b.] 
 
 siimakha, a. jocund. [perhaps sii + 
 makha.] 
 
 su-mangala, /. -gall [355b], a. having 
 or bringing good luck, [mangala: acct 
 irregular, cf. 1304b 2 end.] 
 
 su-madhyama, a. fair-waisted. 
 
 su-manas, a. 1. good-hearted, well- 
 disposed, 90 2 ; kind; 2. (having good, 
 i.e. happy feelings, i.e.) cheerful; glad, 
 78 13 ; -3. as / pi. (the cheerful ones, 
 i.e.) the flowers; in cpd, 19 2/) . [cf. the 
 second part of eu-jueHjs, stem fv-/j.fves, 
 ' well-disposed.'] 
 
 V sumanasya, only in ppl. sumanas- 
 yamana, being cheerful ; joyous, [su- 
 manas, 1063.] 
 
 sii -mah a nt [450b], a. very great or 
 important. [1288b.] 
 
 sumahakaksa, a. having very-great 
 (enclosures, i.e.) halls or rooms. [su- 
 maha + kaksa, 1298a, 334 2 .] 
 
 su-meka, a. (having a good setting-up, 
 i.e.) firmly stablished. 
 
 su-medhas, a. having good insight or 
 wisdom, wise. 
 
 sumna, n. favor, grace; welfare, [per- 
 haps neuter of an adj. su-mna, 'kindly 
 minded ' see mna : but cf . 1224c.] 
 
 sura, m. a god. [a pendant to asura, 
 formed by popular etymology from 
 asu-ra, as if this were a-sura, ' non-god ' 
 see asura.] 
 
 su-raksita, a. well-guarded. 
 
 su-ratna, a. having goodly treasures, 
 [ratna, 1304b.] 
 
 surabhi, a. sweet-smelling, fragrant. 
 
 surabhisrag-dhara, a. wearing fra- 
 grant garlands, [surabhi-sraj.] 
 
 sura-sattama, m.pl. the best of the gods. 
 
 siira, f. spirituous, ana" esp. distilled, 
 liquor ; brandy ; liquor. [V 1 su, ' express ' : 
 cf. Isuta and soma.]
 
 [275] 
 
 [sura 
 
 su-radhas, a. having goodly blessings, 
 
 bounteous, 
 surottama, a. subst. chief of gods, [ut- 
 
 tama.) 
 su-lalita, a. very lovely; (of meat) 
 
 delicious. 
 
 su-locana, a. fair-eyed, 
 su-varcas, a. having good varcas, i.e.: 
 
 full of life, 83 1 *; blooming, 90 2 ; fiery, 
 
 2 2 ; glorious, 1 16 . 
 su-varna, a. having a beautiful color; 
 
 as n. gold, 
 suvarna-kankana, n. gold-bracelet. 
 
 [1280b.] 
 su-vidatra, a. kindly noticing, i.e. 
 
 taking kind notice, kindly. [1288b.] 
 suvidatriya, a. kindly. [suvidatra, 
 
 1214a.] 
 su-vira, a. having good heroes; rich in 
 
 retainers, 87 l ; heroic, 78 4 , 88 14 . [vird: 
 
 acct, 1304b 2 end.] 
 suvrkti, f. excellent praise, goodly 
 
 hymn, [su + rkti, with euphonic v.] 
 su-eva, a. very kindly. [Qeva, 1288b.] 
 su-glaksna, a. very smooth, 
 su-samcita, a. well-gathered; -am, 
 
 adv. susamcitam samcitya, having gath- 
 ered (in a well-gathered way, i.e.) 
 
 carefully, 
 sii-samahita, a. very intent, entirely 
 
 concentrated upon one thing. [V 1 dha, 
 
 'put': acct, 1284 2 .] 
 su-stha, a. (well situated, i.e.) safe and 
 
 well. 
 su-hrd, m. friend, [prop, adj., 'having 
 
 a good heart, kindly disposed.'] 
 suhrd-bheda, m. a creating of divisions 
 
 among friends, separation of friends, 
 suhrd-vakya, n. (speech, i.e.) words of 
 
 a friend. 
 V su or su (sute [628]; susava, susuve; 
 
 asosta ; savisyati, -te ; sosyati, -te ; 
 
 suta, suta; sutva ; -suya). generate; 
 
 bring forth ; bear ; so perhaps at RV. x. 
 
 125. 7. [cf . 2 suta, ' bairn ' ; vt6s, *<n/-jo-s, 
 
 'son'; for pronunciation as trisyllable, 
 
 &-i-6s, cf. Boeotian ovitis : see also under 
 
 su and sunii.] 
 
 + pra, bring forth; prasuta, born of 
 
 (gen.). 
 
 su [351], vbl. bearing, in virasu ; as f. 
 mother. [Vsu, q.v. : with su-s, cf. o-C-s, 
 v-s, Lat. su-s, AS. su, Eng. sow (qua pecude 
 nihil genuit natura f ecundius Cicero, 
 cf . verres under V vrs) ; also AS. swin, 
 *su-ina, Eng. swine, prop, a diminutive of 
 SM.] 
 
 sukara, m. swine, boar, [origin uncer- 
 tain.] 
 
 siik am a, a. fine, small; subtile, intangi- 
 ble, atomic, 56 19 . 
 
 \/ sue ay a (sucayati). indicate; sucita, 
 made recognizable, [suci, mg 3 : 1061 2 .] 
 
 suci and suci, f. 1. needle; 2. general- 
 ized, a pointed object; and so 3. (like 
 Eng. pointer) indicator; index, [prob. fr. 
 Vsiv, sm, q.v.] 
 
 sutra, n. I. thread; cord; 2. brief 
 rule or book of such rules (so called, per- 
 haps, because each rule was a short 'line' 
 or because the collection was a ' string ' of 
 rules), cf. Whitney xvii. [Vsiv, q.v.] 
 
 \f sud (sudayati). 1. lead straight on, 
 keep a-going; 2. bring about, finish; 
 3. finish (in its colloquial sense), put an 
 end to, destroy. 
 + ni, destroy, see simple verb. 
 
 sunara, f. -I, a. gladsome, joyous, [cf. 
 sunfta.] 
 
 sunii, m. son; once (a57 6 ), as/, daughter. 
 [Vsu: cf. Church Slavonic synu, AS. 
 sunn, Eng. son : for mg, cf. 2 suta.] 
 
 sunfta, a. joyous, gladsome, kind ; -a, 
 as / jy- [sunara : see 1237 3 .] 
 
 sunrtavan,/. -varl, a. joyous, [sunfta, 
 1234 and 3 : for fern., 1169. 2 2 .] 
 
 supa, m. soup, [despite the identity of 
 mg, no etymological connection has as 
 yet been discovered.] 
 
 supa-kara, m. soup-maker, cook. 
 
 supavancana, a. (having an easy 
 faltering-approach, i.e.) to which one 
 easily or gladly totters (of the grave), i.e. 
 easy of approach or not repulsive, [upa- 
 vancana, 1304b 2 .] 
 
 supayana, a. (of easy approach, i.e.) 
 easy of access, [upayana, 1304b 2 .] 
 
 sura, m. the sun. [cf. svar, gen. sur-as, 
 ' sun ' : perhaps a transfer to the a-declen- 
 sion, 399.] 
 
 18*
 
 suri] 
 
 [276] 
 
 suri, TO. (prop, impeller, inciter, i.e.) he 
 who engages priests to perform a sacrifice 
 for his own benefit and pays them for it, 
 a sacrifice-master ; the same as maghavan 
 (g.v.) and the later yajamana. [V2su, 
 'impel/ 1191.] 
 
 surya, m. the sun, selection xl. ; the Sun, 
 personified, selection xxxiii. ; surya, f. 1. 
 the Sun, personified as a female ; 2. the 
 hymn of Surya's wedding, RV. x. 85, selec- 
 tion Iviii. [fr. svar (sur), 1212a.] 
 
 aurya-vid, a. knowing the Surya-hymn, 
 RV. x. 85. 
 
 V sr (sisarti; sasara, sasr6 ; asarat ; sa- 
 risyati; srta; sartum; srtva; -sftya ; 
 sarayati, -te). run swiftly, glide, flow; 
 ecus. act. set in motion, [cf. fy>-/t^, 'rush, 
 onset, spring,' whence dpudta, 'rush on'; 
 Ox-pa, ' spring ' ; a\Xoft.a.i, ' spring ' ; SA-TO, 
 ' leaped ' ; Lat. salire, ' spring ' ; cf . saras, 
 'pool,' sarit, 'stream,' and, for the root 
 with 1, sal-ila, 'flowing' and 'fluid, i.e. 
 water.'] 
 
 + anu, run or go after. 
 + apa, go off ; caws, remove; take out. 
 + ava, go down, in avasara. 
 4- a , run unto ; run. 
 f u p a , go unto, approach. 
 + nis, go out; cans, drive out or away. 
 + pr a , go forth ; caws, stretch forth or out. 
 + s a m , 1. flow together ; 2. go 
 about, wander, sam intensive, 1077b end ; 
 esp. wander from one existence to another 
 (of the soul). 
 
 s r k a , m. perhaps missile, lance. 
 
 srgala, m. jackal. 
 
 V srj (srjati, -te; sasarja, sasrje; asrak- 
 sit ; sraksyati, -te ; srsta ; srastum ; 
 srstva; -sfjya; sisrksati). 1. let loose 
 (from the hand), dart, hurl; throw; 2. 
 let go, pour out (streams, rain), discharge; 
 3. let loose (herds); 4. spin or twist 
 (cord or garland); 5. (discharge from 
 one's self, cf. 57 J , and so) procreate, en- 
 gender ; create. 
 
 + ava, 1. shoot off (arrows) ; throw or 
 put in, 57 2 ; 2. let loose (streams); 
 loose (from a bond), 78 19 ; deliver over, 
 84 12 ; -3. (like Eng. colloq. let slide) let 
 pass unnoticed, forgive, 78 18 . 
 
 + ud, 1. cast ; hurl (a bolt) ; 2. pour 
 out, 103 18 ; 3. cast off; lay down (a 
 corpse) ; 4. let go, 3 8 . 
 - sam-ud, let go, discharge. 
 + upa, (hurl at, and so) plague, dis- 
 tress, vex ; aditya upasrstas, sc. rahuna, 
 the sun vexed by Rahu, i.e. eclipsed. 
 + vi, 1. throw away, 105 17 ; 2. dis- 
 charge; (let go from the hand, i.e.) lay 
 down, 103 2 ; mid., w. vacam, let go the 
 voice, i.e. break silence by saying , 
 100 8 ; 3. create, 57 8 , cf. simple verb. 
 + sam, (let go together) mix, unite. 
 
 sfj, vbl. creating. [Vsrj.] 
 
 v' srp (sarpati, -te ; sasarpa ; asrpat; 
 sarpsyati, srapsyati ; srpta ; sarpitum ; 
 srptva; -sfpya; sisrpsati). creep, crawl; 
 glide ; used of gentle and cautious motion, 
 [cf . e/wr&i, ' creep, go ' ;. Lat. serp-ere, 
 ' creep ' ; repere, *srep-ere, ' creep,' rep-ti-lis, 
 ' creeping ' ; AS. sealf, Eng. salve, so 
 named from its slipperiness, like sarpis 
 and srpra, see these ; cf. also tpTr-rrAv and 
 Lat. serpens, 'snake': no connection w. 
 Eng. slip.~\ 
 
 + u d , creep out or up ; rise ; desid. wish 
 to rise. 
 
 + upa, go gently unto, approach gently. 
 + vi, 1. move asunder, disperse; 2. 
 move about. 
 
 srpra, a. slippery, fatty; smooth, [v'srp, 
 'l!88a.] 
 
 1 sena, /. a missile; weapon. [V2si, 
 'hurl,'1177a.] 
 
 2 sena, f. line of battle; acies; army, 
 [akin with sita, ' furrow,' siman, ' parting 
 of the hair ' : from these a root *si, ' draw 
 a straight line,' may perhaps be inferred.] 
 
 sersya, a. with jealousy; -am, adv. with 
 jealousy, [sa + irsya.] 
 
 V sev (sevate; siaeva, siseve; sevisyati; 
 sevitd; sevitum; sevitva; -sevya). 1. 
 stay by (loc.), the opp. of tyaj ; 2. stay 
 by, and so (like Eng. wait upon) serve or 
 reverence, 30 17 ; 3. devote one's self 
 to; practice, 21 , 66 2 , 68 9 . [no connec- 
 tion w. fff&ofjiai, 'reverence,' see Vtyaj.] 
 -I- u p a , reverence ; be devoted to. 
 + ni, be devoted to, i.e. cohabit with. 
 + sam, practice.
 
 [277] 
 
 [V stigh 
 
 sevana, n. practice. [Vsev.] 
 
 a e v a , f, a serving or reverencing. [V sev, 
 1149.] 
 
 sainika, a. belonging to an army; as m. 
 soldier; champion or fighter. [2sena, 
 1222e2.] 
 
 s6daka, a. with water, containing water, 
 [udaka, 1304c.] 
 
 s6ma, 7?i. 1. extract, esp. of certain 
 species of the Asclepias family, see 70 5 N. ; 
 Soma, both literally, and also personified as 
 a god ; as pi. Soma-draughts ; 2. the 
 moon, see 70 6 N. [Vlsu, 'extract/ 1166.] 
 
 so ma -pa [352], a. Soma-drinking ; asm. 
 Soma-drinker. 
 
 soma-p6ya, n. a drinking of Soma; dat. 
 in order to drink the Soma, see 1213c, 982. 
 [acct, 1272a.] 
 
 somya, a. having to do with Soma, i.e., 
 as m. : Soma-offerer ; pi. the Manes, 84 18 . 
 [s6ma, 1212c.] 
 
 saudamani, f. lightning; prop., f. of an 
 adj. *saudamana, 'of the rain-cloud, 
 cloud-born/ and to be taken in its adj. 
 sense, as epithet of vidynt, at 2 9 . [see 
 suclaman and 1208a.] 
 
 saiibhaga, n. happiness. [subhaga, 
 1208f.] 
 
 saubhagatva, n. condition of happi- 
 ness; weal and blessing, [saiibhaga, 
 1239.] 
 
 saiibhagya, n. happiness, esp. conjugal 
 felicity, 89 16 ; charmingness, 2 6 . [su- 
 bhaga (1211, 1204c) see its rags.] 
 
 saumya, a. 1. of or relating to Soma; 
 Soma-, 96 6 ; 2. (moon-like, i.e.) having 
 a mild and kindly influence on senses and 
 feelings, and so mild, gentle ; 3. voc. 
 sing, saumya, O gentle sir, 61 8 . [s6ma, 
 1211.] 
 
 saury a, a. pertaining to the sun; neut. 
 pi, sc. suktani, hymns to Surya. [surya, 
 1211.] 
 
 sauvarna, a. golden, [suvarna, 1208f.] 
 
 V s k a n d ( skandati ; caskanda ; askantsit ; 
 skantsyati; skanna; -skandya, -skd- 
 dya). intrans. dart, spring, spurt; drop, 
 be spilled; fall. [cf. <riiv5-a\ov, 'trap- 
 stick' (cf. Ger. Falle, 'trap, pit-fall/ w. 
 fallen, 'fall'), and 'stumbling-block'; Lat. 
 
 scand-ere, 'climb,' de-scend-ere, 'climb 
 down ' ; scdla, *scad-la, ' ladder.'] 
 
 skandha, m. shoulder. 
 
 skandha-dega, m. region of the 
 shoulder, i.e. shoulder. 
 
 skandhas, n. ramification; branches of 
 a tree, tree-top. 
 
 stana, m. the breast of a woman. 
 
 stabdha, a. immovable, rigid, stiff. 
 [Vstabh, 954, 160.] 
 
 stabdha-locana, a. having immovable, 
 i.e. unwinking eyes. 
 
 stabdhl-kr, make rigid or stiff (as if 
 dead), [stabdha, 1094.] 
 
 V stabh or stambh (stabhnati; tastam- 
 bha, tastambhe; astambhlt; stabdha; 
 stabdhum; stabdhva ; -stabhya). 1. 
 make firm or steady, prop or uphold 
 (heaven or earth); 2. mid. become 
 firm or immovable or rigid; stabdha, 
 immovable, rigid, [cf . ffTepfy-vKov, ' olives 
 pressed hard, oil-cake ' ; ffTf/j.ft-fiv, ' mal- 
 treat,' collateral form of ff-rt'tfl-eij>, ' stamp 
 on, tread ' ; Eng. stamp : for connection 
 of mgs, cf . tyfiSw, ' make steady or firm, 
 fix firm, plant.'] 
 + u d , prop up. 
 
 + vi, 1. prop asunder, 78 10 ; 2. 
 (make immovable, i.e.) bring to a stand- 
 still, stop, 6 21 . 
 
 stambha, m. prop, post, column. 
 [V stambh.] 
 
 V sta (stayant). be stealthy, [see stena, 
 stayd.] 
 
 stayii, m. thief. [Vsta, 1165: cf. tayri.] 
 
 V stigh (stinn6ti). proceed, stride; esp. 
 proceed against, attack. [cf. o-reixw, 
 'proceed, march, go in line,' rarely 
 'mount up'; Church Slavonic stignati, 
 ' hasten ' : the root is wide-spread in Ger- 
 manic, but often shows a specialization of 
 mg, ' proceed upward, ascend, climb ' ; cf . 
 AS. stlg-an, which often means simply 
 ' proceed, go,' but also ' ascendere,' and 
 even ' descendere ' ; Ger. steig-en, ' mount 
 up ' ; AS. stKg-er, ' a step to climb by/ 
 Eng. stair; AS. stigel, 'step or steps for 
 climbing over a fence/ Eng. stile; AS. 
 stig-rdp, sti-rdp, 'mounting-rope/ Eng. 
 stirrup ; Ger. Steg-reif, ' stirrup ' ; AS.
 
 Vstu] 
 
 [278] 
 
 stigend, ' rising or sty,' Eng. sty, ' swelling 
 (on eye-lid)': for change of gh to n in 
 present, cf . 161 l and *.] 
 + pra, get ahead in attacking, succeed 
 in one's attacks, 93 5 - 10 - ". 
 
 V stu (stauti [626], state 1 ; tustiva, tu- 
 stuve ; dstausit, astosta ; Astavit ; 
 stavisydti, -te ; stosyati, -te ; stuta ; 
 stdtum ; stutva ; -stiitya, -stuya ; stu- 
 ydte). praise; extol (a god); stuvant, 
 (praising, as subst.) worshipper. 
 + pra, 1. praise; 2. bring forward 
 as object of mention or subject of con- 
 versation (cf. Lot. laudare, prop. ' praise,' 
 but also 'mention'), and so 3. general- 
 ized, introduce, begin. 
 
 stuka, /. lock or tuft (of wool or hair), 
 [see stokd.] 
 
 V str (strnati, strnit6, in mg 1 in Veda; 
 strn6ti, strnutS, in mg 2; tastara, ta- 
 stare ; astarit [900] ; starisyate ; strta, 
 stirna [957b] ; strtva, stirtva'; -stftya, 
 -stirya). 1. strew, esp. the sacrificial 
 straw, 88 1T ; spread out; 2. (like Lat. 
 sternere) overthrow (an enemy). 
 
 [cf . ffr6p-vv-fjn, Lat. ster-n-ere, ' strew, 
 spread out'; a-rpw-fj.a, (like Eng. spread) 
 'bedding,' <rrp<a-[j.v4), 'bed,' Lat. strd-men, 
 ' straw,' storea, ' straw mat,' torus, *stor-u-s, 
 ' bed ' ; AS. strea-w, streo-w-ian, Eng. straw, 
 strew ; ffTpca-r6s, Lat. strd-tus, ' bespread ' ; 
 (via) strata, ' (way) bespread' with stones, 
 i.e. 'paved,' whence borrowed AS. street, 
 Eng. street; Old Lat. stld-tus, Lat. Idtus, 
 'spread out, spreading, and so broad, 
 wide ' ; see also under noun str.] 
 + ana, cover over. 
 + a , spread out. 
 
 + upa, spread upon, spread as a cover; 
 as technical term of the ritual, with or with- 
 out ajya, pour the sacrificial butter over 
 (e.g. the hand) so as to make a coating, 
 999. 
 + pra, spread out. 
 
 stf [371 12 , taras, stfbhis], m., plural only. 
 the stars, [if fr. Vstr, we may interpret 
 the name as meaning either (a) 'the 
 light-strewers,' or (b) 'the scattered' ones, 
 those that are ' spread out ' over the vault 
 of heaven ; but the connection w. V str is 
 
 very uncertain: cf. arr^/>, stem a-a-rtp, 
 Avestan star, Lat. stella, *ster-la, Ger. 
 Stern, AS. steorra, Eng. star: see also 
 tara.] 
 
 stena, m. thief. [Vsta.] 
 
 stokd, 1. m. drop; 2. as adj. small, 
 insignificant, [akin with stuka, ' tuft ' : 
 from these, a root *stu, 'drop, dribble, 
 run together, be compacted into a round 
 mass,' may perhaps be inferred: for mg 
 2, cf. Eng. dribble w. driblet.'] 
 
 stotf, m. praiser (of a god), worshipper, 
 singer, [v'stu, 1182a.] 
 
 st6ma, m. praise, song of praise, [sfstu, 
 1166a.] 
 
 stoma- vArdhana, a. delighting in 
 praise, [acct, 1271.] 
 
 stri [366], f. woman, female individual, 
 wife, opp. of pumans, e.g. 104 9 . [prob. 
 for *sutri, ' generatrix,' V su, 1182 2 .] 
 
 stri-kama, a. having desire for female 
 (children). [1296.] 
 
 sth, 1. vbl in cpds. standing; and so, 
 generalized (like Eng. stand, 'be situated'), 
 situated, staying, being; 2. sometimes, 
 perhaps, substantively, place (like Eng. noun 
 stand, 'place'), in go-stha, sadha-stha. 
 [Vstha, 333: sometimes -stha, 186.] 
 
 sthala, n. dry land (as opp. to water), 
 terra firma, Test-land ; sthali, f. place, 
 [prob. akin w. V stha, ' that which stands 
 firm.'] 
 
 sthdvira, a. 1. firm, thick, massy, 
 sturdy; 2. full-grown, old; as m. old 
 man. [from sthii, collateral form of 
 Vstha, 1188e: for mg 1, cf. Eng. steady, 
 cognate w. stand, and cf . sthira ; for 2, 
 cf. Eng. of long standing.] 
 
 V stha (tisthati, -te [671, 749a]; tasthaii, 
 tasthe; asthat, asthita [884]; sthasyati, 
 -te ; sthita ; sthatum ; sthitva ; -sthaya ; 
 sthlyate; sthapayati, -te [1042d]). 
 
 -1. stand, 13 18 , 25 16 , 47 6 , 80 7 , 87 , 
 98 18 ; stand still, 70 19 - 21 ; remain stand- 
 ing ; 2. stand by (a friend) ; hold out 
 faithfully, 25 5 , 63 13 - 14 ; -3. remain, 64 W; 
 wait, 54 6 ; abide, 39 10 , 46 6 ; pass., impers.: 
 sarvaih sthiyatam, let all remain, 24 10 ; 
 atra sthiyatam, stay here, 39 21 ; 4. 
 remain or be in a condition, continue in
 
 [279] 
 
 [sthavara 
 
 an action [1075c]; w. adj. or ppl., 28 3 , 
 30 3 ; vyapaditas tisthati, lies dead, 44 1G ; 
 iv. gerund, 26 1G ; w. instr., 41 6 ; 
 
 5. exist; be present, 10 3 , 45 13 ; 6. 
 be situated, be, I 5 , 26 13 , 33 4 ; -7. (remain 
 standing, i.e. unmoved or untouched, and 
 so, like Ger. dahingestellt bleiben) remain 
 unconsidered or unmentioned ; thus, dure 
 tisthatu tadvrddhis, (let the interest of 
 it stand afar off, i.e.) to say nothing of 
 the interest of it, 46 2) ; 8. sthita,see s.v.; 
 9. cans, cause to stand, set ; put, 41 19 . 
 
 [for *sta: cf. Doric inf. crra-nev, Epic 
 crrri-vai, Church Slavonic sta-ti, Lat. std-re, 
 Old High Ger. std-n, Ger. steh-en, ' stand ' : 
 this old form of the root appears also in 
 Ger. Statt, AS. stede, Eng. stead, 'place': 
 the prevailing form of the root in Ger- 
 manic is stand; cf. AS. stond-an, Eng. 
 stand; Ger. preterit stand, 'stood': with 
 a-stha-t, cf. S-O-TTJ, 'stood'; w. ti-stha-mi, 
 cf 'l-ffri)-fu, ' set,' Lat. si-sti-t, ' sets ' : for 
 mgs of Vstha, cf. in general those of 
 Eng. stand.~] 
 + adhi, stand upon. 
 + anu, 1. (stand along by, i.e.) take 
 one's place along by, and so support, 
 help ; 2. devote one's self to a thing, 
 e.g. virtue, 58 16 ; devote one's self to (an 
 undertaking), and so carry out (a plan), 
 33 14 ; accomplish ; pass, impers. : evam 
 anustheyam, it must be done so, 37 8 ; 
 so 38 15 ; tatha^anusthite, it having been 
 thus accomplished, this being done, 33 14 ; 
 see 303b* and cf. 35 1G , 37 13 , 39 15 - 22 . 
 + abhi, set the foot upon, vanquish; 
 withstand. 
 
 + ava, -1. stand off, 105 20 ; -2. 
 stand ; 3. remain, abide ; avasthita : 
 standing ; posted, 43 12 ; situated ; abiding, 
 dwelling; caus. (cause to stand apart, 
 i.e.) leave behind, 44 2>9 . 
 + a, take one's place at; resort to, 10 x . 
 + ud, stand up; rise up (from sleep or 
 inactivity), 30 20 ; spring up, 26 n ; get out 
 of (abl.), 36 13 ; caus. cause or bid to rise, 
 102 7 ; pull out (of a mire, a vat), 22 9 , 
 36". [a lost, 233a.] 
 
 + praty-ud, rise up to meet (in token 
 of respect). 
 
 + sam-ud, rise up, spring up. 
 + upa, 1. stand by, 94 9 ; set one's 
 self near; stand opposite, 59 23 ; 2. ap- 
 proach, esp. with reverence or supplica- 
 tion; upasthita : (having) approached 
 or appeared ; near at hand, 41 8 . 
 + anu^upa, mid. approach one after 
 another; w. ma (the pronoun), come to my 
 side, 94 4 . 
 
 + sam-upa, approach; fall to one's 
 lot; samupasthita, on hand. 
 + ni, stand in, rest on. 
 + pari, stand round about, encompass; 
 restrain. 
 
 + pra, mid. arise, and so set out to go; 
 go off ; prasthito 'bhavat, prof ectus est ; 
 caus. send away, dismiss, 36 9 . 
 -fprati, stand; be established; get a 
 place or foot-hold, 84 9 ; pratisthita : es- 
 tablished, resting upon ; set up ; caus. 
 set. 
 
 + vi, mid. (stand asunder, i.e.) spread 
 itself. 
 
 + anu-vi, spread one's self over, per- 
 vade (ace.), RV.x.125.7. 
 + sam, mid. 1. remain with; 2. in the 
 ritual, come to a stand-still (sam, inten- 
 sive), i.e. get through, finish; samsthite, 
 loc. absolute, if he (end, i.e.) die, 101 6 . 
 
 sthatra, n. station, place. [Vstha, 1185: 
 for mg, cf. Eng. stead w. root sta under 
 V stha.] 
 
 sthana, n. 1. a standing; 2. a re- 
 maining, abiding ; 3. standing, i.e., as 
 in Eng., rank; 4. an abode (see bha- 
 vana) ; place, 35 5 , etc.; 5. pregnantly 
 (cf. patra), a proper place ; 6. a proper 
 occasion ; concrete, a proper object for 
 giving occasion to anything ; tatkavya- 
 sya^arpana-sthanam ekah s-, of this 
 poem S. is the sole consignment-occa- 
 sioner, i.e. the only one worthy of having 
 this poem entrusted to him, 54 1 . [Vstha, 
 1150. 1.] 
 
 sthana-bhr anga, m. abode-ruin, loss 
 of abode. 
 
 sthavara, a. standing; not endowed with 
 the power of locomotion, and so, as col- 
 lective n. sing., the plants, 63 22 ; as m. pi. 
 plants, 67 a . [Vstha, 1171a.]
 
 sthavarata] 
 
 [280] 
 
 sthavarata, f. condition of being a 
 plant. [1237.] 
 
 sthita, a. 1. standing (as opp. to going, 
 lying), 14 18 ; 2. (of animate and inani- 
 mate beings) standing in a place; abid- 
 ing; sthitas (supply, as is often necessary, 
 some form o/Vas, 'be'), was abiding, i.e. 
 abode, 29 18 ; situated; bhutale sthitam, 
 being on the earth, i.e., simply, on the 
 earth, 6 17 ; impers. : sthitam, it was 
 waited by (instr.), i.e. (he) waited, 34 18 ; 
 3. existing ; present, 6 18 ; 
 
 4. being or remaining in a situation 
 or condition (cf. Vstha 4), which is ex- 
 pressed: by an adj. in the same case, 13 10 ; 
 by an adv.; tatha, 26 18 ; kah sthito 'tra, 
 who (is) being here, i.e. who is here, 49 7 ; 
 by a gerund; atmanam acchadya sthitas, 
 after concealing himself (was) remaining, 
 i.e. kept hidden, 25 10 ; so 86", 38 19 , 41*; 
 upavigya sthitas, waited sitting, 43 9 ; 
 yair vyapya bhavan sarvan sthito 
 mahan, with which the intellect, pervad- 
 ing all beings, stands, i.e. with which it 
 constantly pervades all beings, 66 9 . 
 
 [ppl. of V stha, 954c : cf . o-Ta-r6-s, Lat. 
 sta-tu-s, ' standing, set ' : for mgs above, 
 cf. Vstha.] 
 
 sthlti,^ 1. a standing; 2. a remain- 
 ing by a thing; and so 3. devotion to 
 (loc.), 15 17 ; 4. (like Lat. status) con- 
 dition; and so 5. way, method of pro- 
 cedure, 26 7 . [Vstha, 1157. la, cf. 954c.] 
 
 sthin, vbl. standing, in cpds. [Vstha, 
 1183*.] 
 
 sthira, a. steady; steadfast, 81 9 ; firm; 
 also of persons, 99 7 ; enduring (of might), 
 78. [Vstha, 11881, cf . 9 54 C: for mg> cf . 
 sthavira.] 
 
 V sthu, assumed as collateral form of stha, 
 cf. sthavira, and see under V sna. 
 
 s than a, f. post, pillar, [for *stul-na, fr. 
 v'*stul or *stal, an extended form of 
 V*sta, Skt. stha: cf. Ger. Stolle(n), Old 
 High Ger. stollo, *stol-no, 'prop, post'; 
 <rrv\-os, ' post, pillar ' ; these words, like 
 <rrtj\ij, Doric trrd\a, ' prop, post,' presup- 
 pose the root in causal mgs, 'cause to 
 stand,' i.e. (a) 'keep from falling, prop 
 up/ and (b) 'set up,' as a pillar: the root 
 
 appears also in Ger. Stall, Eng. stall, 
 'stand, i.e. standing-place,' and in Ger. 
 still, Eng. still, ' standing, not moving.'] 
 
 V sna (snati; sasnau; snasyati, -te; 
 snata; snatum; snatva; -snaya). bathe; 
 perform a religious ablution, esp. at the 
 end of religious studentship (62 6 ) or of a 
 vow. [orig. sna or snu (so stha, sthu) : 
 cf. V ffvv in Hwfov, *t-ffv*f-ov, 'swam'; Lat. 
 nd-re, ' swim ' : see also under naii.] 
 
 snataka, a. who has performed the 
 ablution customary at the end of religious 
 pupilage, [snata, 1222.] 
 
 s nan a, n. a bathing, religious ablution. 
 [Vsna, 1150.] 
 
 snana-glla, a. (having bathing as a 
 habit, i.e.) practicing religious ablutions. 
 [1302.] 
 
 snayin, a. performing religious ablutions. 
 [Vsna, 1183 s , 258.] 
 
 snayu, f. n. 1. sinew, 25 7 . [perhaps 
 ' ligament,' from V sa or si, ' bind, ligare,' 
 q.v. : if so, it is formed from the present- 
 stem sina (see 1148. 3b and cf. sunva), 
 abbreviated to sna, with suffix u (1178b) 
 and interposed y (258) : cf. Old High 
 Ger. se'nawa, Ger. Sehne, AS. sinu, Eng. 
 sinew, which point to a Goth. *sinava: 
 that sna-yu and its older equiv. sna- van 
 are abbreviated forms (for sina-) would 
 appear from the Germanic cognates.] 
 
 snayu-bandha, m. sinew-band, i.e. bow- 
 string. 
 
 V snih (snihyati ; snigdha). 1. be 
 supple, greasy, moist ; and so 2. stick 
 to, i.e., as in Eng., be attached to, be 
 fond of. 
 
 snu, n. collateral form o/sanu. surface. 
 
 sneha, m. 1. stickiness; 2. viscid and 
 smooth stuff; oil; fat; 3. attachment, 
 love, friendship, [v'snih: for connection 
 of 1 and 3, see snih.] 
 
 V spa 5, older form of V 1 pac,, q.v. 
 
 V sprdh (spardhate ; pasprdhe ; spar- 
 dhita; spardhitum). contest the pre- 
 cedence among one another ; emulate ; 
 strive. 
 
 spfdh, f. rival ; opponent; foe. 
 [V sprdh.] 
 
 V sprg (sprgati, -te; pasparga, paspr6 ;
 
 [281] 
 
 [Vsru 
 
 aspraksit, asprksat; spraksyati; sprstd; 
 sprastum; sprstva; -spfgya). touch. 
 + upa, 1. touch, 103 22; reach to, 
 RV. x. 125. 7 ; 2. w. apas, touch water, 
 technical term for symbolical purification, 
 by dipping the hand in a dish, by rinsing 
 the mouth, or by washing, 104 17> 22 ; word 
 for water to be understood, 65 6 . 
 
 sprastavya, grdv. to be touched. 
 [Vsprg, 241.] 
 
 V sphur or sphr (sphurati, -te; aspharit; 
 sphurita). make a quick or jerky 
 motion: 1. dart, trans.; with the foot, 
 kick; 2. dart, intrans.; twitch (of the 
 eye, arm) ; 3. (of the lightning) flash. 
 
 [for *spr, ' quiver, jerk, kick, flutter ' : 
 cf. a-cnratp-oi, 'struggle convulsively' (as 
 a fish just out of water) ; Lat. spernere, 
 ' kick away, reject ' ; Eng. spur, ' goad 
 with the heel ' ; spurn, ' kick away ' : see 
 also under parna.] 
 + p r a , shake, tremble. 
 
 sphya, m. wooden splinter, shaped like a 
 knife and as long as the arm, for use at 
 the sacrifice. 
 
 sma, enclitic and slightly asseverative par- 
 ticle, 79 17 , 6 8 ; accompanying a verb which 
 is in the present tense but has the value of a 
 past, 2 8 , 8 19 , 12 21 ; explained at 778b 
 and}) 2 . 
 
 V ami (smayate ; sismiye' ; asmayista ; 
 smita; smitva; -smitya). smile; smile 
 bashfully; blush, [cf. <t>i\o-fi/u.etS-fis, 'fond 
 of smiles,' stem 0-/m8ej, as in Hesychian 
 jueTSos, ' smile ' ; yue8ao>, ' smile ' ; Lat. 
 ml-ru-s, ' wonderful,' mlrdri, ' wonder ' (for 
 mg, cf. smaya, 'wonder'); Middle High 
 Ger. smie-r-en, smie-l-en, ' smile ' ; Eng. 
 smile, smirk.'] 
 + v i , be astonished. 
 
 smita, a. smiling; as n. [1176a], a smile, 
 [ppl. of \fsmi.] 
 
 smita -purva, a. previously smiling, 
 with a smile. [for irreg. order, see 
 1291.] 
 
 V smr (smarati; sasmara ; smarisyati; 
 smrta ; smartum ; smrtva; -smftya). 
 1. remember, both keep in mind and 
 call to mind ; 2. call to mind, i.e. hand 
 down by memory, hand down by tradi- 
 
 tion, hand down see the important word 
 smrti; 
 
 smrta : 1. remembered ; 2. 
 handed down by smrti or taught by 
 tradition ; and so 3. declared to be , 
 61 2 ; passing for ; regarded by tra- 
 dition as , 63 6 ; to be variously para- 
 phrased ; margo 'yam smrtas, this is, we 
 are taught, the path, 21 " ; called, 22 5 , 
 57 6 . 
 
 [cf . fj.fp-fj.fp-a fpya, ' memorable works ' ; 
 fifpipva, ' anxious thought, care ' ; /j.dp-Tvp, 
 ' rememberer, witness ' ; (j.f\fiv, ' care for ' ; 
 fj.t \\eiv, ' hesitate, delay, be going to 
 do ' ; Lat. me-mor, ' mindful ' ; memoria, 
 ' memory ' ; mor-a, ' hesitation, delay.'] 
 + vi, forget. 
 
 smrti, f. 1. remembrance; 2. tra- 
 dition (see Vsmr2); tradition which is 
 handed down and accepted as authorita- 
 tive (except gruti, q.v.} ; defined, 58 18 , see 
 note; a work based on such tradition; a 
 law-book. [Vsmr.] 
 
 smrti-gila, dual n. tradition and habits 
 (habits in collective sense, i.e. usage). 
 [1253a.] 
 
 s y d [499a], pron. that ; cf. tya. 
 
 V syand or syad (syandate; sasyandS; 
 asyan [890 2 ] ; syantsyati ; syanna ; 
 syanttum; syattva; -syadya). run (of 
 animate beings and of fluids) ; flow. 
 + abhi, flow unto. 
 + p r a , flow forth or away. 
 
 syona, a. soft; mild; tender. 
 
 srakva, m. corner of the mouth; mouth, 
 jaws. 
 
 sragvin, a. wearing a wreath, [sraj, 
 1232.] 
 
 sraj, f. wreath, garland. [Vsrj, mg 4, 
 'twist,' just as AS. wristf, Eng. wreath, fr. 
 AS. wrlftan, Eng. writhe, 'twist' (under 
 Vvrt).] 
 
 sravanti, f. flowing (water), stream, 
 [ppl. of Vsru.] 
 
 V sru (sravati; susrava; asravit; sravis- 
 yati; sruta). 1. flow, stream; 2. 
 flow or trickle away, waste away, become 
 lost, 60 9 . [cf. pew, *o-peF-ta, Lithuanian 
 srav-j-u, ' flow,' Irish sruth, ' stream ' ; cf . 
 also Church Slavonic stru-ja, 'stream,'
 
 sruc] 
 
 [282] 
 
 Ger. Stro-m, Eng. strea-m, with t between 
 s and r (see under usra and svasr) : 
 further pev-/j.a, 'stream'; Lat. Ru-mo, 
 'The River/ old name of the Tiber: w. 
 a-srav-a-t, cf. Uppee, *^-<rpeF-e-T.] 
 
 sruc, f. one of the large sacrificial ladles 
 (as long as the arm), of which there are 
 three, juhii, upabhrt, and dhruva, see 
 102 u N. ; used for pouring ghee in the 
 fire, [akin w. v'sru.] 
 
 sruva, m. a small sacrificial ladle (a cubit 
 long), used for dipping from the pot and 
 pouring into the sruc. [akin w. Vsru.] 
 
 sr6tas, n. stream. [Vsru, 1152a.] 
 
 svd [525*], 1. pron.adj. own; my own, 
 73 18 } 7812,20. thy own> 69 16 , 86*; his 
 own or his, 4 1T , 45 3 , etc. ; her, 8 10 ; their 
 own or (each) his own, 14 8 ; indef., one's 
 own, 58 w , 66 6 ; very often at the beginning 
 of cpds: my, 10 **, 21 10 ; his, 31 9 , etc.; 
 their, 27 9 ; our, etc., see following words; 
 
 2. m. kinsman, friend ; 3. (like 
 atman) one's self, see 513 2 ; one's natural 
 self or condition ; 4. n. (like Goth, sves) 
 possessions, property, [cf. EC'S, *<7eFo'-s, 
 and 6's, ?}, ov, and ff<p6s, ' own ' ; Old Lat. 
 sovo-s, Lat. suu-s, 'own'; Goth, sve-s, AS. 
 swies, ' own ' ; also ?, cr<f>f, Lat. se, Goth. 
 si-k, Ger. si-ch, ' self.'] 
 
 svaka, a. own; his own, etc. ; equiv. to 
 sva. [sva, 1222a.] 
 
 sva-ksatra, a. (having self-rule, i.e.) 
 free. 
 
 sva-cchanda, m. own will, [chanda, 
 227.] 
 
 svacchanda-vanajata, a. (by its own 
 will, i.e.) spontaneously wood-grown, i.e. 
 growing wild in the wood. 
 
 V svaj (svajate ; sasvaje ; svajisyate ; 
 svakta ; svaktum; svajitva; -svajya). 
 embrace. 
 + pari, embrace. 
 
 V svad (svadati, -te ; sasvade; svatta ; 
 svadayati, svadayati). 1. act. make 
 savory, season ; fig. make agreeable ; 
 2. mid. be savory, relish, intrans,; 3. 
 mid. relish, trans. ; take pleasure in. [cf . 
 ayS-avw, 'please,' aorist evaSe, W-oTaS-e, 
 'pleased'; ^8o/w, 'rejoice'; see also 
 under svadu.] 
 
 sva-dharma, m. own duty. 
 
 1 svadha, f. 1. wont, habit, custom, 
 76 7 ; rule; <l9os; 2. accustomed place, 
 home, %6os; 3. (wonted condition, i.e.) 
 comfort; joy; bliss, 83 12 ; pleasure, 73 u ; 
 svadham anu nas, according to our 
 pleasure, i.e. exactly to our wish, 73 13 ; 
 svadhaya and svadhabhis : in wonted 
 wise; with pleasure, gladly; (gladly, i.e.) 
 willingly, freely, 84 n . [cf . e0os, ' custom,' 
 ^Qos, ' wonted place, haunt,' ef-a>0-a, ' am ac- 
 customed ' ; AS. sidu, Ger. Sitte, ' custom.'] 
 
 2 svadha, f. sweet drink; esp. a libation 
 of ghee to the Manes. [perhaps for 
 2 sudha : for the etymology, cf. sva- 
 dha adhayat, ' he drank the sweet 
 drinks,' RV.] 
 
 svadhavant, a. 1. (having his wont, 
 i.e.) keeping to his custom, faithful, con- 
 stant; 2. (having bliss, i.e.) blessed, 
 78 17 , 79*- 1 5 . [Isvadha, 1233: see mgs 1 
 and 3.] 
 
 svadhiti, m. f. axe. 
 
 V svan (svanati, -te; sasvana; asvanit, 
 asvanit ; svanita). sound, resound, roar, 
 [cf . Lat. sonus, ' sound ' ; Old Lat. son-it, 
 ' sounds ' ; AS. swinsian, ' sound ' ; Eng. 
 swan, so named from its song; similarly 
 in Ger. the cock is called Hahn, a name 
 akin w. Lat. can-ere, ' sing ' cf . Hamlet 
 i. 1. 160, " the bird of dawning singeth."] 
 
 svana, m. sound; roar (of wind). 
 [Vsvan.] 
 
 svana s, n. roar, [do.] 
 
 V svap (svapiti [631]; susvapa [785 8 ] ; 
 asvapslt ; svapsyati ; supt& [954b] ; 
 svaptum; suptva; svapayati). sleep; 
 fall asleep; supta, sleeping; cans, put 
 to sleep. [cf . Lat. sop-or, ' sleep ' ; w. 
 caus., cf . Lat. sopire, ' put to sleep ' ; see 
 also under svapna.] 
 + ni, go to sleep; caus. put to sleep. 
 + pra, fall asleep; prasupta, fallen 
 asleep, asleep, sunk in sleep. 
 
 svapas, a. having good works, i.e. wonder- 
 working, [su + apas, 1304b.] 
 
 svapu [352], f. perhaps besom, [perhaps 
 for su-pu, ' cleaning well ' : for va in 
 place of u, cf. 2 svadha: for mg, cf. 
 pavana.]
 
 [283] 
 
 [svastyayana 
 
 svapna, m. 1. sleep; 2. dream. 
 [Vsvap, q.v. : cf. vir-vo-s, Lat. som-nu-s, 
 ' sleep ' ; AS. swef-n, ' sleep, dream ' ; 
 Chaucerian swefn, ' dream '; Lat. somnium, 
 ' dream ' : for connection of 1 and 2, cf . 
 61 9 , where either sense fits.] 
 
 svapna-manavaka, m. the Dream- 
 manikin, name of a certain magic whose 
 performance brings dreams that become 
 realized, 51 8 . 
 
 sva-bhava, m own way of being, in- 
 herent nature, ingenium, as distinguished 
 from acquired qualities, see. guna 2, and 
 22 21 ; svabhavat, by nature [291 2 ], 
 naturally. 
 
 svabhava-dvesa, m. natural hatred. 
 [1280b.] 
 
 svayam-vara, m. self-choice; esp. free 
 choice of a husband, which was allowed 
 to girls of the warrior (ksatriya) caste, a 
 Swayamvara. 
 
 svayam [513], pron. own self, self; him- 
 self, etc. ; referring to subject, 48 3 , etc ; all 
 by itself, of its own accord, 93 9 ; referring 
 to predicate, 1 10 . [from sva with nom. 
 case ending -am (cf. tv-am, a-y-am), and 
 interposed y, cf. 258.] 
 
 svayam-bhii [352], a. self -existent ; asm. 
 epithet of Brahma. 
 
 svayam-mrta, a. dead of himself . 
 
 sva-yukti,//> own team [acct, 1274: 
 for mg, cf . the Dutch and the American 
 Eng. span (of horses) w. AS. spannan, 
 'join.'] 
 
 V svar (svarati ; asvarsit ; asvarit). 
 sound, [cf ffvp-iy^, 'pipe, flute'; Lat. 
 su-sur-ru-s, ' a humming '; Eng swar-m^\ 
 
 svar [388d], pronounced siiar in the Veda, 
 n. 1. the sun, 71 19 ; 2. sunlight, sun- 
 shine; light, 79 9 , 3. (the place of the 
 light, cf. rajas) heaven, 91 6 , 92 8 ; 4. 
 one of the three " utterances," see 
 vyahrti. 
 
 [cf. Sfip-ios, 2efp, ' sun, dog-star' ; 
 ffe\-as, 'light'; (Tf\-i\vr\, 'moon'; Lat. 
 ser-enus, ' bright ' ; sol, AS. sol, ' sun ' ; 
 AS swel-an, Eng. sweal, 'burn, glow, waste 
 away by heat ' ; and the kindred swelter, 
 ' be overcome by heat,' whence sweltry or 
 sultry: if the forms with r and / are fr. 
 
 extended forms of a root *su, ' to light,' 
 and if svar is a direct deriv. of the same 
 V*su (sii-ar), we may compare Ger. Sonne, 
 AS. su-nne, Eng. sun, AS. sunnan dxg, 
 Eng. Sun-day. ~\ 
 
 sva-riipa, n. own form or shape; true 
 nature, 40 19 . 
 
 svarupa-bhava, m. the becoming or 
 being the true form (of names), i.e. the 
 use of the true form (of a person's name). 
 [1280b : svarupa is used predicatively.] 
 
 svar-ga, 1. a. going or leading to the 
 light or to heaven ; situate in the heavenly 
 light, heavenly ; esp. w. loka, svargo lo- 
 kas, the heavenly world, heaven, 103 5> 14> 16 
 also as one word, see svargaloka ; 2. 
 m. without loka, heaven, 64 9 , GO 1 . 
 
 svarga-gamin, . going to or attaining 
 heaven. 
 
 svarga-loka, m. the heavenly world, 
 heaven, 103 ". 
 
 svar-bhanu, m. Suarbhanu, name of a 
 demon causing the eclipse of the sun, 
 cf. the later rahu. [poss. 'having, i.e 
 withholding the sun's rays.'] 
 
 s vary a, pronounced svaria, a. sounding; 
 of a thunderbolt, whizzing. [V svar, 
 1213.] 
 
 svalamkrta, a. well adorned. [su + 
 alamkrta: see alam.] 
 
 svava, a. with goodly horses. [sii + 
 ava, 1304b.] 
 
 svasr [373], f. sister. [cf. Lat. sdror, 
 AS. sweoster, swuster, Eng. sister : cf. 
 369 2 and 1182f : for t between s and r, 
 cf. Easter, under usra, and stream under 
 
 V sru.] 
 
 svasti, pronounced suasti in Veda, 1. 
 f. (like the Eng. well-being, i.e.) welfare; 
 blessing; 2. svasti, instr. [336 3 end], 
 with luck, happily; hence 3. the inde- 
 clinable nom.-acc. neut. svasti, luck, hap- 
 piness, 84 l ; svasty astu te, a blessing on 
 thee. [sii + an unused asti, ' be-ing,' fr. 
 
 VI as, 'be,' 1157 la. acct, 1288b.] 
 svasti-da [352], a. bestowing welfare, 
 svastyayana, n. sing, and pi. (luck- 
 progress, i.e.) wel-fare, prosperity; bless- 
 ing; and so benediction, 101 2 , 106 4 ; 
 pi. the blessings, i.e. Vedic hymns con-
 
 svastha] 
 
 [284] 
 
 taining the word svasti, 106 8 . [svasti + 
 ay ana: acct, 1271: with -ay ana, cf. -fare 
 in wel-fare.'] 
 
 sva-stha, a. being in one's natural con- 
 dition, self-contained, healthy, well. 
 
 svadas, n. agreeableness, t'n pra-svadas. 
 [Vsvad, 1151. Ib: cf. ^5os (sic), Doric 
 55oy, 'pleasure.'] 
 
 svadu, a. tasting good, savory; sweet. 
 [Vsvad, q.v., 1178a: cf. rjSvs, Doric a8w, 
 *<rFd5i>-y, Lat. svdvis, *svadv-i-s, AS. swete, 
 Eng.' sweet.'] 
 
 svadhyayd, m. the reading or repeat- 
 ing to one's self, study (of the Veda), 
 [adhyaya.] 
 
 svami-karya, n. master's business. 
 
 svami-kumara, TO. the Lord Kumara, 
 name of Skanda, god of war, see kartti- 
 keya and kumara. 
 
 svami-guna, m. ruler-virtue. 
 
 svamin, m. owner, proprietor, master, 
 lord ; opp. of servant, subject, wife, [sva, 
 'own,' 1231.] 
 
 svami-seva, f. the serving one's mas- 
 ter. 
 
 svami-hita, n. master's welfare. 
 
 svartha, m. own affair or cause, [artha.] 
 
 sv ah a, excl. used when making oblations, 
 hail, w. dot., 103 s ; at the end of an invoca- 
 tion, like Amen, 99 13 . 
 
 V svid (sv6date; svidyati, -te; sisvide; 
 svinna). sweat. [svidyami=i8ta, 'sweat'; 
 cf. T5os, IS-pws, 'sweat,' ISpow, 'sweat'; 
 Lat. sudd-re, 'sweat,' denom. of *sudu-s, 
 'sweat'; sud-or, 'sweat'; Lettish swidrs, 
 ' sweat ' ; AS. noun swat, Eng. sweat : 
 observe that though there is a word for 
 'sweat' common to most Indo-European 
 tongues, there is no such common word 
 for ' be chilly.'] 
 
 sveccha,/. own will ; svecchaya, accord- 
 ing to one's inclination, at will, [iccha.] 
 
 sv6da, m. sweat. [Vsvid.] 
 
 h a , enclitic and slightly asseverative particle, 
 64*; in the Veda, 78 , 79*, 02"; the 
 Brdhmanas, 94 8 , and very often (so pages 
 95-6), 103 15 (quotation from a Brdhmana) ; 
 in the Sutras, to be sure, of course, desig- 
 
 nating that the author agrees with the view 
 or method mentioned, 99 19 , 101 s , 103 1 *- 16 ; 
 
 very common at end of half-cloka, 7 15 ; 
 
 esp. after a 3d sing. perf. ( w w ), 9 4 , 10 2 ; 
 
 so iti ha, 12 8 ; combinations: iti 
 hovaca, " ," he said, 61 18 ; so hovaca, 
 hocus, 95 18 , 96 18 . [this word appears 
 also as gha in the Veda : cf . 7, Doric 70, 
 enclitic asseveratives.] 
 
 hansa, m. goose, gander; perhaps applied 
 also to the swan and like water-fowl, 
 [prob. a consonantal stem, transferred 
 (399) to the a-declension, and so orig. 
 *ghans : cf . x^ v > Lat. ans-er, Lithuanian 
 sast-s, Irish ^oss, Ger. Gans, AS. ^ros, 
 Eng. ^roose : even the s of *ghans may be 
 derivational ; cf . AS. gan-d-ra, *gan-ra, 
 Eng. gander; Old High Ger. gan-azzo, 
 ' gander ' ; AS. gan-et, Eng. gannet, ' sea- 
 fowl.'] - 
 
 hatd, see 954d. 
 
 hatya, n. slaying. [Vhan, 1213c and a 
 (middle), cf. 954d.] 
 
 V han (Mnti [637] ; jaghana [794d] ; 
 hanisyati; hatd [954d]; hantum; hatva; 
 -hatya; hanyate ; jighansati [1028f]). 
 
 1. strike ; strike down ; smite or slay, 
 70 2 , etc.; kill, 28 6 , 35 14 , etc.; overcome; 
 
 2. destroy, 37 19 ; bring to nought; (of 
 darkness) dispel, 18 8 ; desid. wish to 
 smite or afflict, 78 16 ; 
 
 hata, 1. smitten, slain, 98 4 ; killed, 
 23 21 ; 2. destroyed, ruined; lost, 27 18 , 
 42 !; 3. pounded. 
 
 [with han-mi, cf . Odva, *9ft>-jw, ' smite ' ; 
 w. ja-ghn-us, cf . %-ire-q>v-ov, ' slew ' ; w. 
 hata, *ghata, cf . <par6s, ' slain ' ; w. ghana, 
 q.v., ' a slaying,' cf . <f>6vos, ' slaughter ' ; w. 
 ha-ti, ' a smiting, slaying,' cf . Old High 
 Ger. gun-d, AS. gitfS, ^wn-iS, ' battle ' ; AS. 
 guft-fana, Old High Ger. gund-fano, ' battle- 
 flag'; fr. the last form (not fr. the AS.), 
 through the French, comes Eng. gonfanon, 
 gonfalon ; for mg of gift, cf. Ger. schlagen, 
 ' smite, slay,' with Schlacht, ' battle ' : for 
 senses under 1, observe that AS. sledn 
 (whence Eng. slay) means 'smite' and 
 then also ' slay.'] 
 
 + ava, strike down ; bring to nought. 
 + a, strike upon; hurl (a bolt) upon (loc.
 
 [285] 
 
 [VI ha 
 
 w. adhi) ; mid. strike (one's thigh with 
 
 one's hand). 
 
 + ud, force up; uddhata [163], raised. 
 
 -fni, strike down; slay. 
 
 + p a r i , strike around ; encompass. 
 
 + prati, strike back at (ace.); strike 
 
 against so as to transfix, to broach (on a 
 
 lance, loc.}. 
 
 + sam, strike together; (of the eyes) 
 
 close ; unite, combine. 
 
 ban [402], vbl. slaying, slayer, in cpds. 
 [Vhan.] 
 
 hanta, interjection, come! goto! 
 
 hantavya, grdv. to be slain, occidendus. 
 [Vhan, 964.] 
 
 hantf, m. slayer, destroyer. [\/han.] 
 
 V liar (haryati, -te). be gratified, take 
 pleasure; take pleasure in (ace.), and so, 
 desire, long for. [perhaps a transfer (see 
 761a and b) from the yd-class, with 
 change of accent, and so properly an 
 irregular pass, to V 1 hr, ' take ' (reg. 
 hriyate) ; for the mg, cf. Eng. be taken, 
 i.e. ' be charmed/ and hara 2 : some take 
 Vhar as representing Indo-European *ghel 
 (ghicel), and connect it w. 0e'\o>, 'will,' 
 Eng. will; cf. also V2vr.] 
 + p r a t i , long for, entice. 
 
 hara, a. 1. taking, receiving; 2. (like 
 the Eng. carrying away, taking) charm- 
 ing ; 3. carrying off, removing, destroy- 
 ing ; as m. Hara, the Destroyer, a name 
 of (^iva, 55 21 . [V 1 hr, see its mgs.] 
 
 ha ran a, a. holding. [Vlhr, 'hold.'] 
 
 haras, n. grip; esp. the seizing or devour- 
 ing power of fire. [V 1 hr, ' hold.'] 
 
 h.d,ri, a. fallow, pale yellow, yellowish; 
 greenish ; as m. du. (cf. Eng. pair of bays, 
 i.e. bay horses) the fallow steeds, esp. of 
 Indra, his coursers. [V*ghr, *hr, 'be 
 yellow,' is inferrible, but not quotable : 
 cf . x^ w -P^ s > ' greenish-yellow ' ; X^T], 
 'verdure'; Lat. helus or holus or olus, 
 ' greens, vegetables ' ; helvus, ' grayish- 
 yellow'; AS. geolo, Eng. yellow; also 
 gol-d (cf. hiranya).] 
 
 harit, a. fallow, yellowish ; asf. fallow 
 mare, esp. of the Sun-god. [V*ghr *hr 
 under hari: 383d 3.] 
 
 harivant, a. having fallow steeds ; asm. 
 
 lord of the coursers, i.e. Indra, see hari. 
 [hari, 1233.] 
 
 harmya, n. a strong building; dwelling. 
 
 harsa, m. joy. [Vhrs.] 
 
 halahala, m. n. a certain deadly poison. 
 
 hava, m. call. [Vhu.] 
 
 havani, f. sacrificial ladle, [prop. fern, 
 of a substantival nomen agentis, havana, 
 Vhu, 1150d, 'the sacrificing' instrument.] 
 
 havfsmant, a. having an oblation ; asm. 
 offerer, [havis, 1235.] 
 
 ha vis, n. oblation, which, as gift for the 
 gods, is offered wholly or partly in the 
 fire ; generally, grain (parched, boiled, as 
 porridge, or as baked cake), milk in 
 divers forms, fat, and best of all 
 Soma. [Vhu, 1153.] 
 
 havya, n. oblation, [prop, grdv., 'offe- 
 rendum,' Vhu, 1213.] 
 
 havya, grdv. invocandus. [Vhu, 1213a.] 
 
 havya-vah [403], a. carrying the offer- 
 ing (to the gods) ; as m. oblation-bearer 
 (used of Agni), selections Ivi., Ixvi. 
 
 V has (hasati, -te; jahasa, jahase ; hasis- 
 yati; hasita; hasitum; hasitva; -hasya). 
 laugh. 
 
 + p r a , laugh out, laugh. 
 + vi, laugh out. 
 
 hasa, m. laughter. [Vhas.] 
 
 hasta, m. hand; (of an elephant) trunk; 
 (of a tiger) paw; at end of cpds [1303 2 
 end], having in the hand. 
 
 hasta- gfhya, grd. taking by the hand. 
 
 hasta-grabha, a. grasping the hand, 
 [acct, 1270.] 
 
 h a s t i n , a. having hands ; w. mrga, the 
 beast with the hand, i.e. trunk, Vedic 
 designation of the elephant; as m. ele- 
 phant ; Hastin, name of an ancient king, 
 [hasta, q.v.] 
 
 hastinapura, n. Hastinapura, a town 
 on the Ganges, home of the Kurus, said 
 to have been founded by king Hastin. 
 [cf. pura.] 
 
 h a s t i - r a j a , m. elephant-king, leader of 
 a herd of elephants. 
 
 hasti-snana, n. ablution of an elephant. 
 
 V lha (jihite [664]; jahe; ahasta; has- 
 yate ; hana; hatum). move, intrans., 
 run away, yield.
 
 V2ha] 
 
 [286] 
 
 V 2 ha (jahati [665]; jahau; ahasit [913] ; 
 hasyati ; hind [957a] ; hatum ; hitva ; 
 -haya; hiyate, hiyate). 1. leave, i.e.: 
 quit ; leave in the lurch, 82 l ; desert, 
 86 13 ; leave behhid, 85 15 ; abandon, cast 
 off ; lay aside, 83 u ; relinquish ; 2. 
 hiyate, be forsaken or left behind; fall 
 short or be deficient; become deficient, 
 decrease; deteriorate, be lowered, 19 9 ; 
 
 hind: 1. forsaken; 2. (like Eng. 
 abandoned) vicious, low, low-lived, 19 9 ; 
 
 3. at end of cpds, abandoned by , 
 i.e. destitute of , free from . [cf. 
 xn-po-s, '(forsaken) destitute/ x^-P a > 
 ' widow ' ; Lat. fa-mes, ' lack, hunger.'] 
 
 + pari, 1. forsake; 2. pass, be 
 lacking, decrease ; come to an end, see 
 simple verb. 
 -f vi, leave; vihaya, passing over. 
 
 ha, excl. of pain or astonishment. [1135a.] 
 
 harya, grdv. to be taken away or stolen. 
 [Vlhr, '86126/963%.] 
 
 hasin, a. laughing. [Vhas, 1183 8 .] 
 
 hasya, grdv. to be laughed at; as n. 
 laughter; ridicule. [Vhas, 963 8 c.] 
 
 V hi (hin6ti, hinute; jighaya; ahaisit; 
 hesyati ; hita). set in motion, drive, 
 impel, 
 -fpra, send off or away ; deliver over. 
 
 hi, particle. 1. asseverative : surely, 
 verily, indeed, 18, 22 2, 23 21 , 28 15 , 
 35 21 , 83 l , etc.; 2. giving a reason: 
 because; f or, 3 19 , etc., 53 2 , 70 ; -3. w. 
 interrogatives, pray, II 1 , 13 14 ; finite verb 
 accented w. hi [595d], 72 18 ; hi never at beg. 
 of sentence. 
 
 V hins (hindsti [696]; jihinsa; ahinsit; 
 hirisisy ati ; hirisita ; hinsitum ; hinsitva ; 
 -hinsya). hurt, harm, slay, [perhaps, 
 orig., desid. of v'han, see 696.] 
 
 hinsa, f. a harming, injuring, [vhins, 
 1149.] 
 
 hirisra, a. harming; asm. a savage or 
 cruel man. [Vhins, 1188a.] 
 
 hita, ppl.,adj. 1. put, set; placed; and 
 so 2. pregnantly (like Eng. in place, i.e. 
 'in the right place,' and Ger. gelegen, 
 'lying aright, i.e. convenient'), fit, con- 
 venient, agreeable ; yadi tatra te hitam, 
 if it suits thee there ; advantageous, salu- 
 
 tary ; 3. as n. welfare, safety. [V 1 dha, 
 ' put,' 954c : -dhita in Veda : cf . 6cr6s, 
 'set.'] 
 
 hita-kama, a. wishing one's welfare, 
 well-wishing, [see kama.] 
 
 hiteccha, /. desire for the welfare (of 
 another), [iccha.] 
 
 hitopadega, m. salutary instruction ; 
 Hitopade9a, name of a collection of 
 fables. [upadeQa.] 
 
 him a, m. the cold; winter. [the stem 
 *X<AIO, 'winter,' appears in x'M-P-* lit- 
 'winter-ling, i.e. a one-winter-old or year- 
 ling goat,' named x'Ay o * precisely as is 
 the dialectic Ger. Ein-winter, ' a one-winter- 
 old goat ' ; cf . xfy""P> ' she-goat, chimera ' ; 
 see similar names under vatsa : cf . further 
 -XM- i Q Sva-xw-s, ' very wintry ' ; Lat. 
 -himu- in blmits, *bi-himu-s, ' of two winters 
 or years'; also x'^" 'snow,' x e 'A"' l '> 
 ' winter ' ; Lat. hiems, ' winter.'] 
 
 hiranya, n. gold, [akin w. hari, q.v.] 
 
 hiranya-garbha, m. fruit or scion or 
 child of the gold (i.e. of the golden 
 egg, 57 3 ), Hiranyagarbha or Gold-scion, 
 name of a cosmogonic power, the personal 
 Brahman, 91 16 . 
 
 V hid (Vedic forms [Whitney 54, 240 s ] : 
 helant, helamana; jihlla, jihile; hilita; 
 Epic, helamana). be angry ; be incon- 
 siderate or careless. 
 
 hind, see V2ha. 
 
 V hu (juh6ti, juhute; juhava, juhve; 
 ahausit ; hosyati ; hut a; h6tum; hutva). 
 pour into the fire, cast into the fire; and 
 so offer; make oblation even of things 
 not cast into the fire ; huta : offered ; as 
 n. oblation. 
 
 [orig. *ghu: cf. x"> *X 6F - CO > 'pour'; 
 -s, ' liquid, juice ' ; w. hu-ta, cf . 
 -TJ-S, ' poured ' ; w. a-hu-ti, cf . x"~ (Tt ~ s i 
 ' a pouring,' Lat. fu-ti-s, ' water-pot ' ; 
 further, fons, stem font, *fov-ont, 'pour- 
 ing,' i.e. ' fountain ' : 
 
 with the extended form *ghud, cf. Lat. 
 V/wa 7 in fund-ere, 'pour,' AS. geot-an, Ger. 
 giessen, ' pour ' ; provincial Eng. gut, 
 'water-course'; and Eng. gut, w. like 
 sense, in Gut of Canso.] 
 + &, offer in (loc.) ; ahuta : offered; laid
 
 [287] 
 
 [Vhrs 
 
 in the fire (of a corpse), 84 12 ; as n. obla- 
 tion. 
 
 huta-homa, a. having offered oblation. 
 
 hutaga, m. fire; tlie fire-god, Agni. [prop, 
 'having the oblation as his food,' aga: 
 1302.] 
 
 hutagana, m. fire; the fire-god, Agni. 
 [prop, 'having the oblation as his food,' 
 agana: 1302.] 
 
 V hii or hva (havate and huvate, Vedic ; 
 classical, hvayati, -te [761d2]; juhava, 
 juhuve; ahvasit [912] ; hvayisyati, -te 
 [935c] ; huta; hvatum, hvayitum; hutva ; 
 -huya). call; call upon; invoke, esp. a 
 god [orig. *ghu: w. hu-ta, 'called upon, 
 invoked,' some identify the Goth, stem 
 gu-\xt, gu-da, ' God,' AS. and Eng. God.'} 
 + a, 1. call to or hither; summon, in- 
 vite ; 2. mid. challenge. 
 + upa, mid. 1. call or summon to 
 one's self ; 2. call encouragingly unto. 
 
 huti,/. invocation. [Vhu.] 
 
 v' Ihr (harati, -te; jahara, jahre; aharsit, 
 ahrsta ; harisyati, -te ; hrta ; hartum ; 
 hrtva ; -hftya; hriyate; jfhirsati). 1. 
 carry, 102 5 , 104 25 ; hold; -2. carry unto, 
 bring ; offer, 105 9 ; 3. carry away ; 
 remove, 85 3 ; 4. esp. take away by 
 violence or unlawfully, 46 4 , 63 7 ; steal, 
 30 2 , 67 23 , 68 4 , 97 6 - 9 ; seize; -5. take 
 lawfully, receive (a gift) ; come into 
 possession of (as heir), 45 8 - 15 ; 6. get 
 hold of, 96 22; become master of; 7. 
 (like Eng. take) charm, captivate; 8. 
 (carry off, i.e. remove, and so) destroy. 
 [cf. x f/l P> dialectic xV s > 'hand'; ev-xtp- 
 fis, ' easy to handle ' ; Lat. Air, ' hand ' ; 
 heres, 'heir,' see root, mg 5.] 
 -f ava, (carry down, i.e.) move down. 
 + vy-ava, move hither and thither, go 
 to work, proceed, act. 
 + a, 1. bring hither, 34 3 ; fetch; fetch 
 or get back, 97 10 - 11 ; 2. receive, 47 12 ; 
 accept; 3. used (like Eng. take) esp. 
 of food, take, eat ; desid. be willing to 
 get back, 97 10 . 
 
 + ud-a, bring out, and so utter, say, tell. 
 + praty-a, get back again; at II 6 , in- 
 correct reading for pra-vy-a-. 
 + v y- a , bring out, and so utter ; 
 
 with vacam, speak words to a per- 
 son (ace.), 3 1 ; similarly, 8 19 . 
 + pra-vy-a, utter ; speak. 
 + u d , take out. 
 + pari, carry around. 
 + pra, 1. (bring forward, i.e. reach 
 out, e.g. feet, fists, and so) strike, attack, 
 deal blows ; 2. throw, esp. into the fire. 
 + anu-pra, throw into the fire or on a 
 fuel-pile. 
 
 + v i , 1. take apart, divide ; 2. pass 
 (part of one's life), 64 22 ; 3. pass one's 
 time, esp. pleasantly; wander about for 
 pleasure, enjoy one's self, 16 9 - 12 , 49 18 ; 4. 
 wander about. 
 
 + s a m , bring or draw together, contract ; 
 withdraw. 
 
 + upa-sam, bring or draw together to 
 one's self, mid.; withdraw. 
 
 V 2hr (nrnltd). be angry. 
 
 hrcchaya, a. lying or abiding in the 
 heart [1265]; as m. love, 2 19 . [hrd + 
 gaya, 159, 203: acct, 1270.] 
 
 hrcchaya-pidita, a. love-pained, love- 
 sick. 
 
 hrcchaya-vardhana, a. increasing or 
 arousing love. 
 
 hrcchaya vista, a. entered by or filled 
 with love, [avista, V vig, 1085a : acct of 
 cpd, 1273.] 
 
 hrcchayavistacetana, a. possessing a 
 love-filled mind. [hrcchayavista + c6- 
 tana, 1298a, 334 2 .] 
 
 hfd [397], n. heart; esp. as seat of the 
 emotions and of mental activity in gen- 
 eral; also, properly, region of the heart, 
 [see under grad.] 
 
 hfd ay a, n. heart; 1. prop, heart, as an 
 organ of the body, 100 21 ; 2. fig. heart, 
 as seat of the feelings. [see hrd and 
 397.] 
 
 V hrs (hfsyati, -te [761a]; jaharsa, jahrse; 
 hrsita, hrsta ; -hfsya; harsayati, -te). 
 be excited, esp. with pleasure or fear; (of 
 the hair) bristle or stand on end by rea- 
 son of fright or pleasure ; be impatient ; 
 hrsta, delighted; hrsita: (of the 
 hair) standing on end; (of flowers) not 
 drooping, unwithered, fresh ; intens. be 
 very impatient, 84 1T ; caus. excite pleas-
 
 hrsitasragraj ohina] 
 
 [288] 
 
 [Vhvr 
 
 antly, gladden, [for ghrs : cf . Lat. korr- 
 ere, hors-ere, 'bristle, shudder'; hirsiitus, 
 'bristly, rough'; hor-deum, Ger. Gers-te, 
 ' barley/ so called from its bristly ears.] 
 + pra, give one's self up to joy, exult; 
 prahrsta, delighted, glad. 
 
 hr sitasragrajohlna, a. having unwith- 
 ered garlands and free from dust, [hrsita- 
 sraj + rajo-hina, 1257.] 
 
 hetu, m. 1. prop, an impeller, and so 
 occasioner, causer, occasion, cause ; hetos, 
 (like Lat. causa) on account of; trasa- 
 hetos, from fear ; 2. reason, argument, 
 proof i -3. means, 41 16 . [Vhi, 1161a.] 
 
 hetu-gastra, n. reason-book, rational- 
 istic work ; dialectics. 
 
 he ma or heman, n. gold. 
 
 hemanta, m. winter, [cf. hima: 1172 4 .] 
 
 he la, f. carelessness; levity, [for hela, 
 from v hid, q.v.] 
 
 haima, a. golden, [hema, 1208f.] 
 
 h6tr, m. 1. priest, chief priest, whose 
 assistant in oldest times was the adhvar- 
 yu; Agni, as the chief est hotr, 69 2 , 88 6 ; 
 2. in the highly developed ritual, the first 
 of the four chief priests, see rtvij. [prop. 
 ' offerer/ from V hn, ' offer ' : but the sense 
 of 'invoker/ naturally suggested by his 
 function in the ritual, was popularly asso- 
 ciated with it and the word thus connected 
 with VM, 'invoke.'] 
 
 hotr a, n. offering, sacrifice, both the action 
 and the thing offered. [Vhu, 1185a.] 
 
 h6ma, m. a pouring into the fire; oblation; 
 
 sacrifice; observe that the older word is 
 ahuti. [Vhu, 1166.] 
 
 hrada, m. pool, lake. [cf. Vhlad.] 
 
 s hras (hrasati, -te; hrasita, hrasta ; 
 hrasayati). become less; cans, dimin- 
 ish, [w. hras-iyans, 'less/ cf. x f ' t P< av > 
 *X*P ff j< av > 'worse/ and for the mg, 
 cf. Lat. detero, ' lessen/ w. deterior, 
 ' worse.'] 
 
 V hrad (hradate ; nradita ; hradayati). 
 sound (of drums); rattle (of stones or 
 dry bones). [for *ghrad : cf. KOX^O^CO, 
 */ca-xA.(8-j'a), ' sound ' (of liquids, breakers, 
 rain), Ke-xAd5-<Js, 'resounding' (song of 
 victory) ; AS. gr&t-an, obsolete Eng. greet, 
 'cry, lament'; xap^S-po, 'noisy mountain 
 torrent': see hraduni.] 
 + sam, strike (intrans.) together so as to 
 rattle ; caws, cause to rattle. 
 
 hraduni, /. hail-stones, hail, [so called 
 from its rattling sound, V hrad : cf . xaA.aa, 
 *Xa*.a5-ja, Church Slavonic gradu, Lat. 
 grando, stem grand-in, ' hail.'] 
 
 V hlad (hladate; hladayati, -te). cool 
 off, intrans., refresh one's self ; cans, cool 
 or refresh, trans. 
 
 hladaka, /. -ika, a. cooling, refreshing. 
 [Vhlad, 1181 and a 3 .] 
 
 hladikavant, a. rich in cooling, [from 
 fern, of hladaka, substantively 1 ?] 
 
 V hvr (hvarati, -te ; ahvarsit; hvrta ; 
 hvarayati). go crookedly; bend over, 
 fall. 
 + vi, fall; caus. overturn.
 
 EXPLANATIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 CITATIONS. 
 
 All numbers below 107 refer to the text of this Reader, which is cited by page and 
 line ; thus, 79 2 means page 79, line 2. When still more precise reference is needed, the 
 first half of a line is designated by a and the second by b . 
 
 All numbers above 107 refer to the sections of Whitney's Grammar. Observe, 
 however, that reference is occasionally made to grammar-sections preceding 107, and 
 that the word " Whitney " is then prefixed to the number to show that the Grammar is 
 meant. The grammar-sections sometimes have subdivisions unmarked by letters or 
 numbers. In referring to these, a small superior number is used, and designates the 
 (typographical) paragraph as counted from the last lettered or numbered subsection. 
 Thus 330 6 refers to the paragraph beginning " PI. : nom.-voc. masc." ; 371 12 begins with 
 " From ait come " ; 1222 3 , with " The accent of derivatives " ; 1222c 2 2 , with " In the 
 Brahmanas." 
 
 SIGNS. 
 
 The root-sign (V) is prefixed to roots and quasi-roots to catch the eye or as an 
 abbreviation. It is also set before denominative verb-stems, although these are of 
 course in no sense roots. 
 
 The plus-sign ( + ) is set before prepositions with which verbs appear in composition 
 and before certain other elements used as prefixes. 
 
 A star (*) signifies that the word or stem or root to which it is prefixed does not 
 actually occur in that form. 
 
 A half-parenthesis on its side ( v ) is used to show that two vowels, which, for 
 the sake of clearness, are printed with hiatus in violation of the rules of euphonic 
 combination, should be combined according to those rules. 
 
 A hyphen is sometimes used to avoid the repetition of an element of a compound ; 
 thus in the article loka, p. 235, para- stands for para-loka. 
 
 In Greek words, the old palatal spirant yod is represented by j, pronounced of course 
 as English y. A very few Slavic and Lithuanian words occur, in which the actual or 
 original nasalization of a vowel is denoted by an inverted comma, thus, e, a. Anglo-Saxon 
 SB has the sound of a in man. 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 It is hoped that most of these, if not all, will be found self-explaining. To preclude 
 any misunderstanding, however, a complete list of the abbreviations is given below, p. 293. 
 
 But certain abbreviations and words are used in an arbitrary way and require 
 more explanation than is given in the list. 
 
 When both the letters, m. and n., follow a stem, they mean that it shows both 
 masculine and neuter case-forms. 
 
 19
 
 [290] 
 
 An "etc." following a reference that stands after a certain definition signifies that 
 the word is of common occurrence in that meaning. 
 
 The abbreviation [do.] is used to avoid repetition of identical items in the square 
 brackets at the end of articles ; for examples, see the three words following abhivada, 
 p. 119. 
 
 The etymological cognates are usually introduced by the conventional "cf."; this 
 implies that the words which the reader is bidden to "compare" are akin. The fact 
 that two related words are compared implies as a rule only that they are radically akin, 
 and not that their formative suffixes are identical. Thus with anta is compared English 
 end, although this corresponds strictly only to the Sanskrit secondary derivative antya. 
 So asthan, oo-Tfov, and os are radically identical, though not of entirely parallel formation. 
 
 On the other hand, where it is desired to call attention, not to radically kindred 
 words, but to words analogous only in metaphor or in transfer of meaning, the brief 
 phrase, " for mg, cf .," is used ; and this is to be understood as standing for the phrase, 
 "for a parallelism in the development of meaning, compare," or, "for an analogous 
 instance of transition of meaning, compare." 
 
 Specially important references to the Grammar are marked by the word "see": 
 thus under narayana (p. 181), special attention is called to 1219, which shows that 
 this word is a simple patronymic of nara, and is not what the text (at 57 6 ) says it is, a 
 compound of nara + ayaiia. 
 
 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE VOCABULARY. 
 
 The order of the articles is strictly and solely alphabetical (see below). Respecting 
 words whose alphabetic place changes with their inflection, the following remarks may be 
 made for beginners. 
 
 All nouns, whether they be substantives or adjectives, are given under the stem. In 
 order to know the stem, a preliminary study of the more important paradigms and rules 
 of euphonic combination is necessary. Thus the nom. sing, raja must be looked for 
 under raj an, and the ace. sing, nama under naman (Whitney, 424) ; but nalo, as standing 
 for nala-s (175a, 330), must be looked for under nala. The stems in r or ar are entered 
 in the form r. The stems of the perf. act. ppl. and of the primary comparatives are 
 given as ending in vans and yans. The stems in at or ant are given in the fuller form, 
 ant, and similarly those in mant and vant ; and the f eminines of these and of the in-stems 
 are not given, since they are always made in anti or ati, mail, vati, ini. 
 
 All verb-forms must be sought under the root. Thus asit will be defined only under 
 the root 1 as (636), and not in the alphabetic place which the augment gives it, under 
 long a. Likewise prepositional compounds of verbs will be found under the roots (see 
 1076), and not in the alphabetic place under the preposition. The beginner is advised 
 to make himself thoroughly familiar with the list of prepositions (1077) at the outset. 
 
 Of the verbal adjectives and nouns (Whitney, chapter xiii., p. 307 ff.), only the 
 gerundives (in ya, tavya, and amya) have been given regularly in alphabetic place. 
 The participles in ta and na are usually given under the roots ; but in some cases, where 
 they have assumed a distinctly adjectival or substantival coloring or have an incon- 
 veniently large variety of meanings and uses, they are treated at length in alphabetic 
 place; such, for example, are rta, krta, gata, jata, nivrtta, bhuta, sthita, hita, etc. 
 Gerunds with a- or su- (e.g. a-citva) are of course treated in alphabetic place. 
 
 Such adverbs as are merely case-forms of substantive or adjective stems, are 
 generally to be sought for under those stems. Those from pronominal stems (e.g. kirn, 
 tad, yad) receive separate treatment.
 
 [291] 
 
 The pronouns of the first and second person would require a dozen different arti- 
 cles apiece if all their forms were given alphabetically. The same is true to a greater 
 or less extent of the other pronouns. The student should therefore learn, as early as 
 possible, the forms given at 491, 495, 499b, 501 (especially ayam : asau is less important), 
 504, and 509. The uses of sa-s, etc., esa-s, etc., and ayam, etc., are given under ta, etad, 
 and idain respectively. 
 
 As for compounds, they are given with completeness for the Vedic selections, and 
 with great freedom for the remaining texts, especially for the Nala. The meaning of 
 such as are lacking can be easily learned by looking out their component parts. 
 
 THE ALPHABETIC ORDER. 
 
 The order of the letters is given by Whitney at 5 (compare 7); but several 
 matters which are frequent occasions of stumbling, may be noticed here. 
 
 The visarga lias the first place after the vowels. Thus antah-pura (for antar 
 + pura) stands next after anta, p. 116, and not after antardhana. But the visarga 
 which is regarded as equivalent to a sibilant and exchangeable with it (Whitney, 7 2 ), 
 stands in the alphabetic place of the sibilant. Thus the visarga of adhah-gayin, as 
 equivalent to g (172), brings this word just before adhas (p. 115, top), and not between 
 adha and adhanya. 
 
 The sign n, as representing " the anusvdra of more independent origin" (Whitney, 
 73 3 ), has its place before all the mutes etc. (Whitney, 5). Thus in ang-a, the n repre- 
 sents a nasalization of the radical vowel, and the word comes immediately after a. So 
 hansa comes just after ha, p. 284; dang and danstrin, at the beginning of the letter d. 
 
 The sign m, as representing an assimilated m, is differently placed, according to its 
 phonetic value. On the one hand, if m, as product of a m assimilated to a semivowel, 
 sibilant, or h (see 213c, d), represent a nasal semivowel or anusvara, then its place is like 
 that of n. Thus samyatendriya follows sa, and samhlta comes just before sakacchapa 
 (p. 263), and pums before puta (p. 191). 
 
 On the other hand, if, for instance, as product of a m assimilated to a guttural, the 
 sign m represent guttural n, then its place is that of n ; and a similar rule applies 
 to all the other cases under 213b. Thus samkata and samkalpa follow sagara, and 
 saihgama follows sanga, p. 264; so samcaya (whose m = n) follows sajya; and sariitati 
 (whose m = n) follows sant, p. 266. 
 
 Vedic 1 is placed after d, and Ih after dh. 
 
 THE CONTENTS OF THE SEPARATE ARTICLES. 
 
 Homonyms, unless differentiated by accent, are distinguished by a prefixed number 
 (cf. anga, vayas) ; similarly homonymous roots (cf. kr). 
 
 References to the Grammar in square brackets immediately after a declinable stem 
 refer to some peculiarity of declension. Occasionally, typical cases of stems are given. 
 Thus under drg are given the nom. and ace. sing, and instr. dual ; from these, the other 
 cases (drk-su, drg-a, etc., drg-bhis, etc.) are easily known. 
 
 Each root is followed by a synopsis of its conjugational forms, so far as they actually 
 occur in the literature. The finite forms are given in the third person singular of the 
 indicative, and in the order in which they are treated in the Grammar, namely, present, 
 perfect, aorist, and future ; then follow the past participle, the infinitive, and the two 
 gerunds (e.g. apta, aptum; aptva, -apya: observe the alternation of the accents); then 
 follow in order the third sing, present indicative of the passive, intensive, desidcrative, 
 and causative, so far as they seemed of importance for the users of this Reader. 
 
 19*
 
 [292] 
 
 Meanings which are synonymous or nearly so, are separated by commas; those 
 which differ considerably from each other, are separated by semicolons or by full-faced 
 dashes and figures ( 1., etc.). The colon is often used to show that several meanings 
 which follow it and are separated by semicolons are co-ordinate with each other. Thus 
 on p. 268, under samipa 2b., the meanings " before," " near," " hard by," and " by " are 
 co-ordinate, and are equivalent to " in the presence or neighborhood of " ; cf . suvarcas. 
 
 The arrangement for matter in heavy brackets at the end of articles is : in the case 
 of primary derivatives, first, the root from which the word comes, with reference, if 
 necessary, to the section giving the suffix of derivation; second, cognate words from 
 allied languages ; and third, words showing a development of meaning analogous to that 
 shown by the Sanskrit word or illustrative of it. If the derivation of a simple word is 
 not given, it is because it is unknown or too uncertain to be worth mentioning. In the 
 case of secondary derivatives, the primary is given, with a reference to the section showing 
 its treatment. The analysis of compounds is often indicated by a hyphen ; but if one 
 member ends and the next begins with a vowel or diphthong, the latter member is given 
 in square brackets at the end of the article ; cf . nalopakhyana. 
 
 Where words of different languages are given together, separated only by commas, 
 the definition given after the last applies to them all ; or, if no definition is given, the 
 English word in italics at the end is both a cognate and a definition of all at the same 
 time; for examples, see aksa ('axle'), asta, urna. 
 
 The references to the Grammar may seem too numerous; but they are really a 
 device for avoiding the frequent repetition of explanations which would otherwise have 
 to be given in full. It would take half a dozen lines to explain the etymology of 
 manmatha, for instance ; but the references to 1148. 4 and 1002b make this needless ; 
 cf . the references under daridra, c,iu, sunva. 
 
 It often happens that the statement in the section referred to does not directly cover 
 the point aimed at in citing it ; but a moment's thought will show what is meant. Thus 
 under samkranti, the two references to be compared mean that the derivative suffix is 
 ti, and that before it the root-vowel suffers the same peculiar change that is seen in the 
 past participle. Under samyatendriya reference is made to 1298, which states that 
 possessive descriptives " are very much more common than [simple] descriptives of the 
 same form." The real point of the reference is plainly, not to bring out this fact, but to 
 show the beginner in what category of compounds this word belongs. So 1290 states 
 that " other compounds with adverbial prior members are quite irregularly accented " ; 
 but the section is cited, e.g., under sadha-mada, to indicate that this is a descriptive 
 compound (see the heading of the preceding right-hand page, 441) hi which the first 
 member is an adverbial element with the function (cf. 1289) of an adjective. Many roots 
 form verb-stems in aya, but without causative signification ; this is briefly indicated by 
 the reference 1041 2 . In the case of secondary derivatives in vant, mant, ta, and tva, a 
 simple reference to one of the sections treating of these endings (1233, 1235, 1237, 1239) 
 is put instead of a repetition of the primitive.
 
 LIST OF ABBBEVIATIONS. 
 
 a adjective. 
 
 abl ablative. 
 
 ace accusative. 
 
 acct accent. 
 
 act active, actively. 
 
 adj adjective, adjectively. 
 
 adv adverb, adverbial. 
 
 advly adverbially. 
 
 aor. aorist. 
 
 AS Anglo-Saxon. 
 
 assev asseverative. 
 
 B Brahmana. 
 
 beg beginning. 
 
 caus causative. 
 
 cf compare. 
 
 colloq colloquial. 
 
 comp comparative. 
 
 conj conjunction. 
 
 correl correlative. 
 
 cpd, cpds . . . compound, compounds. 
 
 dat dative. 
 
 denom denominative. 
 
 deriv., derivs . derivative, derivatives. 
 
 desid desiderative. 
 
 e.g for example. 
 
 end enclitic. 
 
 Eng English. 
 
 equiv equivalent. 
 
 esp especially, especial. 
 
 etc and so forth. 
 
 excl exclamation. 
 
 f., fern feminine. 
 
 ff and the following. 
 
 fig figuratively, figurative. 
 
 fr from. 
 
 fut future. 
 
 gen genitive. 
 
 Ger German. 
 
 Goth Gothic. 
 
 grd gerund. 
 
 grdv gerundive. 
 
 Hdt Herodotus. 
 
 ident identical. 
 
 i.e that is. 
 
 imf imperfect. 
 
 impers impersonally, impersonal. 
 
 imv imperative. 
 
 ind indicative. 
 
 indecl indeclinable. 
 
 indef indefinite. 
 
 inf infinitive. 
 
 instr instrumental. 
 
 intens intensive. 
 
 interr interrogative. 
 
 intrans intransitive, intransitively. 
 
 irreg irregularly, irregular. 
 
 Lat Latin. 
 
 lit literally, literal. 
 
 loc locative. 
 
 in., masc. . . . masculine. 
 
 MBh Mahabharata. 
 
 met metaphorically, metaphor. 
 
 mg, mgs .... meaning, meanings. 
 
 mid middle. 
 
 N note. 
 
 n., neut neuter. 
 
 nom nominative. 
 
 num numeral. 
 
 opp opposed, opposite. 
 
 opt optative. 
 
 orig originally, original. 
 
 pass passive, passively. 
 
 pel particle. 
 
 perf perfect. 
 
 pers person, personal. 
 
 pi plural. 
 
 poss possibly. 
 
 ppl participle. 
 
 prep preposition. 
 
 pres present. 
 
 prob probably, probable. 
 
 pron pronoun, pronominal. 
 
 prop properly. 
 
 q.v which see. 
 
 reg regularly, regular. 
 
 RV Eigveda. 
 
 S Sutra. 
 
 s singular. 
 
 sc scilicet. 
 
 sing singular. 
 
 Skt Sanskrit. 
 
 subst substantive, substantively. 
 
 superl superlative. 
 
 s.v sub voce. 
 
 trans transitive, transitively. 
 
 U.f uncombined form or forms. 
 
 vbl verbal. 
 
 V Vedic, Veda. 
 
 voc vocative. 
 
 w. , . with. 
 
 For abbreviations of titles, see next page.
 
 ABBREVIATIONS OF TITLES. 
 
 See also pages 315-16, 332, 340, 359, 398, 402. 
 
 RV Rigreda Samhita. AB Aitareya Brahmana. 
 
 SV Samaveda QB Qatapatha " 
 
 AV Atharvaveda PB Pancavin9a_or Tandya Br. 
 
 MS Maitrayani TA Taittiriya Aranyaka. 
 
 TS Taittirlya AGS. . . . A^valayana Grhya-sutra. 
 
 VS Vajasaneyi C,GS. . . . Qankhayana " 
 
 K Kathaka. PGS. . . . Paraskara " 
 
 JASB. . . . Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 
 
 JA Journal Asiatique. 
 
 JRAS. . . . Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society. 
 
 JAOS. . . . Journal of the American Oriental Society. 
 
 PAOS. . . . Proceedings " " " 
 
 ZDMG. . . . Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft. 
 
 AJP American Journal of Philology ed. B. L. Gildersleeve. 
 
 Ind. Ant. . . Indian Antiquary ed. James Burgess. 
 
 ISt Indische Studien ed. Albrecht Weber. 
 
 KZ Zeitschrift fur vergleichende Sprachforschung ed. A. Kuhn. 
 
 ASL History of Ancient Sanskrit Literature, by Max Miiller. 
 
 BI Bibliotheca Indica publ. by the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 
 
 BR Bohtlingk and Roth's Sanskrit- Worterbuch see Brief List, p. xviii, no. 5. 
 
 GKR Geldner, Kaegi, and Roth's Siebenzig Lieder see p. xix, no. 15. 
 
 HIL History of Indian Literature, Weber see p. xx, no. 21. 
 
 IA Indische Alterthumskunde, by Christian Lassen. 
 
 ILuC Indiens Literatur und Cultur, Schroeder see p. 359, 100. 
 
 OLSt Oriental and Linguistic Studies, Whitney see p. 359, 100. 
 
 VP Visnu Purana Bombay text; or Wilson's translation, ed. 1 or ed. 2 (F. Hall). 
 
 SEE Sacred Books of the East transl. by various scholars and ed. F. Max Miiller. 
 
 Vol. Vol. 
 
 i. T.'panisnds. .1. xv Upanisads. 2. 
 
 ii. Laws. 1. Apastamba, Gautama. xxiii A vesta. 2. Yashts, etc. 
 
 iv. Avesta. 1. Vendidad. xxv Manu. 
 
 vii. Laws. Yisnu. xxvi < 'atapatha Brahmana. 2. 
 
 x. Dhammapada_, etc. xxix Grbya-sutras. 1. yG8., AGS., PGS. 
 
 xii. Qatapatha Brahmana. 1. See p. 356, N.9. xxx Grhya-sutras. 2. 
 
 xiv. Laws. 2. Vasistha', Baudbayana. xxxi. Avesta. 3. Yaana. etc. 
 
 La religion vedique see p. 359, 100. 
 
 Der Rigveda see p. 352, 70. 
 
 Der Rigveda see p. 359, 100. 
 
 Original Sanskrit Texts see p. xx, no. 26. 
 Si-yu-ki . . . Buddhist Records of the Western World. Transl. by S. Beal, London, 1884. 
 Zimmer . . . Altindisches Leben see p. xx, no. 22. 
 
 Bergaigne 
 Kaegi . . . 
 Ludwig . . 
 Muir . 
 
 The Vocabulary will often serve as an index to the Notes.
 
 PART III. 
 NOTES.
 
 [297] 
 
 SELECTION I. 
 THE STORY OF XALA AND DAMAYANTI. 
 
 1. The trend of Aryan migration in India has been from the extreme north- 
 west to the south-east, across the region drained by the Indus and its affluents, and 
 called the Panjab or Land of the Five Rivers; and again south-east, down the valleys 
 of the Jumna and Ganges. One prominent group of Aryan immigrant tribes was 
 that of the Kosalas, Videhas, and Magadhas, who settled in the lower valley of the 
 Ganges, east of its confluence with the Jumna, in the districts now named Oudh 
 and Behar, the Palestine of Buddhism. 
 
 2. Another group of tribes had their home on the upper Indus, in the north- 
 west of the Panjab. Theirs was the religion and civilization of which the Vedas 
 are the monument. Later we find them advancing south-eastward, and establishing 
 themselves on the upper course of the Jumna and Ganges, in Madhya-deca, The 
 Mid-Land. Foremost among them are the tribes of the Bharatas, the Kurus, and 
 the Panchalas. Here arose the system of Brahmanism ; here' the simple nature- 
 religion of the Vedas developed into a religion of priests and sacrifices ; here the 
 Bharatas attained a kind of religious primacy and the lustre of a great name, 
 although gradually merging their tribal individuality with that of kindred tribes ; 
 here were fought the battles of the Bharatas ; and here, to ever-ready listeners, in 
 school or forest-hermitage, at a sacrifice or a burial, were told the tales of these 
 battles and their heroes. These are the tales that form the nucleus of the Great- 
 Bharata-Story (maha-bharata^akhyana, or, more briefly), the Maha-bharata. 
 
 3. These tales were probably first circulated in prose, until some more clever 
 teller put them into simple and easily-remembered metrical form. The date of 
 these first simple epics we do not know. They may well have existed several 
 centuries before our era ; but neither their language nor the notices of the Greeks 
 afford any satisfactorily direct evidence upon the subject. Around this nucleus 
 have been grouped additions, historical, mythological, and didactic, until the 
 Great-Bharata, as we now have it, contains over one hundred thousand distichs, or 
 about eight times as much as the Iliad and Odyssey together. 
 
 4. Only about one-fifth of the whole poem is occupied with the principal 
 story. This, in the briefest possible summary, is as follows. The two brothers, 
 Dhritarashtra and Pandu (dhrta-rastra, pandu), were brought up in their royal 
 home of Hastina-pura, about sixty miles north-east of modern Delhi. Dhritarashtra, 
 the elder, was blind, and so Pandu became king, and had a glorious reign. He had 
 five sons, chief of whom were Yudhishthira, Bhima, and Arjuna. They are called 
 Pandavas, and are the types of honor and heroism. Dhritarashtra's hundred sons, 
 Duryodhana and the rest, are usually called the Kuru princes, and are represented 
 as in every way bad. After Pandu's death, his sons are brought up with their
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 TO 
 
 cousins. The kingdom devolved on Dhritarashtra, who in turn made his nephew 
 Yudhishthira the heir apparent. 
 
 5. Yudhishthira's exploits aroused the ill-will of his cousins, and, to escape 
 their plots, the Pandu princes went away to the king of Panchala, whose daughter, 
 Draupadi, became their common wife. In view of this strong alliance with the 
 Panchalas, Dhritarashtra thought it best to conciliate the Pandus. So he divided the 
 kingdom, and gave Hastina-pura to his sons, and to his nephews a district to the 
 south-west, where they built Indra-prastha, the modern Delhi. Here the Pandavas 
 and their people lived happily under king Yudhishthira. 
 
 6. On one occasion Dhritarashtra held a great assembly of princes at his 
 capital. The Pandavas were invited and came. Yudhishthira was challenged to 
 play with Duryodhana, and accepted. The dice were thrown for Duryodhana by his 
 uncle (^akuni. Yudhishthira loses everything wealth, kingdom, brothers, wife. A 
 compromise, however, is made, by which the Pandavas give up their part of the 
 kingdom for twelve years, and agree to remain incognito for a thirteenth. With 
 Draupadi, they retire to the Kamyaka forest, on the Saraswati. 
 
 7. For twelve years the Pandu princes dwell in the wood. Many legends are 
 told to divert and console them in their exile ; and these stories, with the description 
 of the forest-life of the princes, combine to make up the third or ' Forest-book,' the 
 vana-parvan, which is one of the longest in the whole poem. 
 
 8. The thirteenth year arrived and passed. " Then in the fourteenth the 
 Pandavas demanded back their possessions, but received them not. From this arose 
 the conflict. They overthrew the ruling house, slew prince Duryodhana, and then, 
 although losing most of their warriors, they got back again their kingdom." MBh. 
 1.61.51=2280. Thus ended the Bharata, doubtless, in its oldest and simplest form. 
 
 9. The poem, as we now have it, spins out the story of the combat through 
 several books and through thousands of distichs. At length Yudhishthira is crowned 
 in Hastina-pura, and Bhishma, the leader of the Kurus, although mortally wounded, 
 instructs him, for about twenty thousand distichs, on the duties of kings and on 
 other topics, and then dies. In the seventeenth book, the Pandus renounce the king- 
 dom, and in the next, the last, they ascend to heaven with Draupadi. 
 
 10. The Nala-episode illustrates very well how loose is the connection of the 
 episodes in general with the main thread of the Bharata. The story of Xala is one 
 of those inserted in the third book (above, 7), and its setting is as follows. Ar- 
 juna had gone to the heaven of Indra to get from him divine weapons. The other 
 Pandavas, remaining in the forest with Draupadi, lament their brother's absence and 
 the loss of their kingdom. Meantime the fierce and stout-armed Bhima addresses 
 his brother Yudhishthira, and offers to go out and slay their deceitful cousins. 
 Yudhishthira counsels Bhima to wait till after the thirteenth year, and is trying to 
 calm his impetuous brother, when suddenly there arrives a mighty sage, Brihada9wa. 
 The holy man is received with honor and with the customary guest's-dish of milk 
 and honey. When he is seated, Yudhishthira sits by him, bewails his sad lot, and 
 asks, " Hast thou ever seen or heard of a man more luckless than I am ? I believe 
 there never was one more unhappy." " On this point," replies the sage, " I will tell 
 thee a story of a king who was even more luckless than thon. King Xala was once 
 cheated out of his kingdom by a false dice-player, and dwelt in the forest, and
 
 [299] 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 TO XALA. 
 
 neither slaves, chariot, brother, nor friend was left him ; but thou art surrounded by 
 heroes, brothers, and friends, and oughtest not to grieve." Thereupon Yudhishthira 
 begs him to relate the story at length. Accordingly, to console the king, and to 
 show him that there is hope of regaining his kingdom, just as Xala regained his, 
 Brihada9wa begins as in the extract given in the Reader (1 s ). 
 
 11. CHAPTER 1. Xala was a prince of Xishadha. Damayanti was the 
 lovely daughter of Bhima, the king of Vidarbha. By the miraculous interposition 
 of swans, the prince and princess become mutually enamored. 
 
 12. CHAP. 2. Bhima accordingly holds a swayamvara (' self-choice ') for 
 her. The neighboring kings are invited, and she is permitted to choose for herself 
 her husband from them. The chief gods hear of it and determine to go also. On 
 their way, they meet Xala, who is bound on the same errand. 
 
 13. CHAP. 3. The gods request Xala to sue for them. Reluctantly consent- 
 ing, he enters the chamber of the princess and tells how the gods desire her hand. 
 
 14. CHAP. 4. Damayanti refuses to listen to the arguments in favor of the 
 gods. She desires that the swayamvara be held in the usual form, and that the 
 gods be present, and informs Xala that she intends to show openly her preference 
 for him. All this Xala reports to the gods. 
 
 15. CHAP. 5. The gods and kings assemble. The four chief gods assume 
 the appearance of Xala. Unable to distinguish the real Xala, the princess, dis- 
 tressed, prays to the gods, and they, in answer, resume their proper forms and 
 peculiar attributes (see 14 12 N.). Thereupon she chooses Xala. The kings express 
 their sorrow, and the gods their delight. The gods give Xala the magic power of 
 having fire and water whenever he wishes, and a wonderful skill in cookery. The 
 wedding-feast is celebrated. Xala returns to Xishadha with his bride. They live 
 happily, and have a son and daughter. Here the extract in the Reader ends. 
 
 16. CHAPTERS 6-26. These tell of Xala's misfortunes, and their final happy 
 issue. He loses everything, even his kingdom, by gambling, and wanders, hungry 
 and half naked, in the forest. He is transformed into a dwarf, and becomes chari- 
 oteer of Rituparna, king of Oudh. Damayanti, at her father's in Kundina, is led by 
 certain tidings to suspect "that Xala is at Oudh. By way of stratagem, she holds out 
 hopes of her hand to Rituparna, if he will drive from Oudh to Kundina, some five 
 hundred miles, in a single day, knowing well that only Xala's skill in horsemanship 
 (see I 4 ) is equal to this task. Rituparna gets Xala to drive him thither through the 
 air. Xala receives as reward perfect skill in dicing. His wife recognizes him by his 
 magical command of fire and water, and by his cooking. He resumes his true form, 
 plays again, and wins back all he had lost, and lives happy ever after.* 
 
 17. When Brihada9wa had finished the story of Xala, Yudhishthira, pleased, 
 asked him for perfect skill in dicing ; and the hermit, granting him his prayer, departed. 
 
 18. This story is unquestionably one of the oldest and most beautiful 
 episodes of the Maha-bharata. It was extremely popular in India; and to this is 
 due the fact that it escaped the bad influence of Vishnuism, whose adherents have 
 worked over the vast epic, changing and interpolating, and always for the worse. 
 
 * The student mav read the entire story in any 
 of the numerous translations by Milrnan, Bopp, 
 
 the very spirited English rendering of Edwin Arnold, 
 in his Indian Idylls, Boston, Roberts Brothers, 1883, 
 
 Riickert, and others. The most easily obtained is $1.00.
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 TO 
 
 [300] 
 
 19. Even the Xala, especially in the first chapter, has suffered much from 
 later hands ; but on the whole it is one of the least corrupted episodes. Its antiq- 
 uity is shown by the simplicity of manners implied in its incidents the prince, for 
 example, cooks his own food, by the character of Indra (cf. 14 22 x.), and in other 
 ways. See Holtzmann's Indische Sagen, Stuttgart, 1854, p. xiv. Bruce has 
 attempted to reject definite passages throughout the poem, and has published, at 
 St. Petersburg in 1862, a text of the Nala, reduced from 983 to 522 distichs. 
 
 20. The story begins at iii.53.1 (folio 58 b) of the Bombay edition of 1877, 
 and at iii. 2072 of the Calcutta edition of 1834. 
 
 21. THE METRE. The stanza (cloka) or distich consists of four octosyllabic 
 verses (pada). The first and second padas form together a half -cloka or a line, 
 divided at the middle by the caesura: likewise the third and fourth. The more 
 important rules follow. 
 
 a. Odd padas end usually with a first epitrite, ^ , or antispast, w w- 
 
 b. Even padas end in a diiambus, v^_w , or second paeon, w ww. 
 
 So the type of the half-9loka is o o o o | ^ w || o o o o | \^ w ^- But 
 
 c. In no pada may the syllables 2, 3, 4 form a tribrach, w ^/ w, or anapaest, ^ w ; 
 
 d. Nor, in the even padas, an amphimacer, \j . 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 1. 
 
 LINE 1. atha, see p. 114, s.v. atha 3. 
 nalopakhyana-m, nom.s.n. (see 330) of 
 nalopakhyana : this last is a compound 
 stem, see s.v., p. 180 : its analysis is indicated 
 in the manner mentioned at p. 292, paragraph 
 2, end : the second member is upakhyana, 
 as given in the square brackets, p. 180 : its 
 initial, u, has evidently combined with the 
 final vowel of the first member to o : accord- 
 ing to the important rule 127, that final 
 must have been an a-vowel (a or a), and, 
 since there is no stem nala, the first member 
 must be nala : since this logically determines 
 the second member, i.e. distinguishes the 
 ' Nala-episode ' from all other episodes, the 
 compound is to be classed as a determinative, 
 see 1262. 
 
 2. brhadagva, u.f. brhadagva-s (175b), 
 nom.s.m. of brhad-ava, see s.v., p. 202 : as 
 shown in the square brackets, the first mem- 
 ber of the cpd is brhant, which, by 1249a, 
 enters into composition in its weak form 
 brhat : by the law of regressive assimilation 
 (159, the most important rule of Sanskrit 
 phonetics), the t becomes d. The combina- 
 tion brhad-agvd, with the accent on the 
 ultima, means 'a great horse'; the same 
 
 combination, with the acct of the prior 
 member, is a secondary adjective cpd, and 
 means 'having great horses': here the sec- 
 ondary adjective is used as a substantive, 
 ' (man) having great horses, i.e. Great-horse ' : 
 see 1293 2 and cf. the difference between a 
 great heart and Bunyan's Mr. Great-heart. For 
 the ligature gv, see Whitney 13 G . uvaca, 
 v/vac, p. 236, perf. act. 3d sing., see 800e. 
 For the connection of this line with the 
 story, see p. 298, 10. 
 
 3 a . asid, u.f. asit, by the law of regres- 
 sive assimilation, just mentioned : as was 
 said at p. 290, paragraph 8, the meaning 
 must be sought under V 1 as, p. 122 : the 
 form is imf. 3d sing., 636. raja, see p. 
 290, paragraph 7, and for declension, 424. 
 nalo, u.f. nala-s, 175a: declension, 330. 
 Nominatives in as are extremely common, 
 and so of course is the change of as to o. 
 nama, acc.s.n. (424) of naman, see s.v. 3. 
 
 3 b . virasena-suto, u.f. -suta-s, 175a : 
 the word is a dependent noun-cpd and = 
 virasenasya sutas, see 1264 : the stem vira- 
 sena (see s.v.) is itself also a cpd, and of 
 the same kind as brhad-agva. ball, see 
 440.
 
 [301] 
 
 ( NOTES TO 
 ) PAGE 1. 
 
 4 a . upapanno, u.f. upa-panna-a (175a), 
 \fpad+upa, p. 186. As a prepositional cpd, 
 this must be sought under the root, not 
 under the preposition read p. 290, para- 
 graph 8. For the form panna, see 957d : 
 lit., it has only an indefinite past sense, not 
 a passive sense, see 952 2 . gunair, u.f. 
 gunais, 174: declension, 330. istai, u.f. 
 istais, which becomes iatair (174 again) 
 before the following sonant initial; and 
 since this is r, the final r is dropped see 
 179: is-tais ppl. of VI is, 953: the t of ta 
 becomes tby progressive assimilation (197), 
 which is far less common than regressive 
 assimilation. The half -line means, 'en- 
 dowed with (desired, i.e. desirable or) excel- 
 lent virtues.' For the use of the instr., see 
 278. 
 
 4 b . rupavan, see 452 and '453, and cf. 
 447. For rii, cf. Whitney lOd. agvakovi- 
 dah, u.f. agvakovidas, 170a, an extremely 
 common change. Nala's skill in the manege 
 is a point of prime importance in the story 
 seep. 299, 16. 
 
 5 a . atisthan, u.f. atisthat (161) is 3d s. 
 imf. act. of Vatha, 742. [The a is augment, 
 585 : ti is reduplication (for t, see 590c ; for 
 i, 660) : the i alters s to a (180 and 184c), 
 and this a involves the conversion of th to 
 th (197 cf. iata). Orig. stha belonged to 
 the reduplicating class (671 cf . 'L-a-ri}-^, 
 '[-(TTij-s, 1-ffrri-fft), but has been transferred 
 (749) to the commonest of all classes, the 
 a-class, and is inflected as if the stem were 
 tistha, i.e. as if we had in Greek 1-arca, 
 1-<TTfis, f-o-rej.] manujendranam, gen.pl. 
 of manujendra : after the lingual r, the n 
 of the ending is changed to lingual n see 
 189 and 190a : for the combination of ma- 
 nuja+indra, see 127; for dr, Whitney 14. 
 
 5 b . murdhni, loc.s. of murdhan, 424: 
 for rdh, see Whitney 14. devapatir, u.f. 
 devapatia, 174 : declension, 339. yatha, 
 see s.v. 4. 'He (stood, i.e.) was at the head 
 of princes, as Indra (sc. is at the head of 
 gods)': i.e. 'He was as much superior to 
 other princes as Indra to other gods.' " As 
 handsome as Indra" was a proverbial ex- 
 pression. 
 
 6 a . upary, u.f. upari, 129: the word is 
 repeated for emphasis, 1260 : ' above, above,' 
 i.e. 'far above.' sarveaam, gen.pl. of 
 aarva, 522 and 524 : for construction, see 
 s.v. upari and 1130 end. 
 
 6 b . aditya, u.f. adityaa, 175b. tejasa, 
 414 : as referring to the sun, it means ' splen- 
 dor,' and as referring to Nala, it has the 
 transferred mg, ' majesty ' : the instr., prop, 
 the 'with '-case, is here best rendered by 
 'by,' i.e. 'in virtue of.' The force of 
 atiathat extends through the gloka or dis- 
 tich. ' He was far above all in majesty, as 
 the sun (is) in splendor.' 
 
 7 a . vedavic churo, u.f. vedavit Quras : 
 the final t is changed to the palatal c, before 
 the palatal sibilant 9 (regressive assimila- 
 tion, 203), and the sibilant g is also changed 
 to the mute ch, 203 : the same changes 
 appear in paryupasac chaclm, 2", abhuc 
 chrnvatoh, 2 1S , hrcchayah, 2 19 , and tac 
 chrutva, 4 6 , 4 16 : vedavit is nom.s.m. of 
 vedavid (391), the d being changed to t 
 (159) before the a of the case-ending, which 
 last, however, is dropped see 150. 
 
 7 b . niaadheau, ' among the Nishadhans ' 
 or ' in Nishadha '. mahlpatih, u.f. mahi- 
 patia, 170a : declension, 339. 
 
 It is not known where Nishadha was. 
 Vidarbha, the modern Berar, is at the head- 
 waters of the Tapti, between Nagpore and 
 the Nizam's Kingdom, and about five hun- 
 dred miles from Oudh. The general run 
 of the story makes it highly probable that 
 Nishadha was between Berar and Oudh. 
 From chapter ix., it would seem to have been 
 north of Oujein (ujjayim). From an allusion 
 in the Qatapatha-brahmana, ii.3.2, Weber 
 thinks it is in the south (i.e. from Madhya- 
 de9a). These premises give some ground 
 for the inference that Nishadha was in the 
 valley of the Sind, which traverses Gwalior 
 State, Central India. On the Sind is Nar- 
 war ; and local tradition connects this place 
 with "King Nala" in a story whose leading 
 features bear a striking resemblance to those 
 of our poem. Finally, Nala is said, chap, xv., 
 to have reached Oudh on the tenth day after 
 quitting Damayanti, and this time suits the
 
 NOTES TO i 
 PAGE 1. < 
 
 [302] 
 
 distance some two hundred miles very 
 well. 
 
 8 a . aksapriyah, u.f. aksapriyas, 172: 
 for ks, cf. Whitney 13 end. satyavadi, 
 norn.s., 440. As a dependent cpd (1265), 
 aksapriya may mean, 1. ' dice-beloved, 
 lucky at gaming,' or, 2. ' dice-loving, friend 
 of dice, fond of gaming': on the whole, mg 
 2 is perhaps to be preferred. 
 
 8 b . mahan, nom.s., 450b. 
 
 9. See ipsita, which is ppl. (1037) of the 
 desid. nara-narl, declension, 364: for n, 
 cf . I 5a N. end : nan, see under nara : for use 
 of case, 296b. udarah, 172 again, like aksa- 
 priyah, 1 8 , and gresthah and manuh, next 
 line, etc. etc. samyatendriyah, read p. 
 291, paragraph 6: samyata, Vyam, 954d. 
 
 10. raksita, 373. dhanvin-am, 440. 
 saksad, u.f. saksat, 159. manu-h, 341. 
 Render 'as it were, Manu himself, in vis- 
 ible presence.' 
 
 11. tathaivasld, u.f. tatha eva asit, 
 127, 126, 159: see tatha, mg 3. -bhlma- 
 parakrama, possessive form of the descrip- 
 tive cpd bhima-parakrama : see references 
 in vocab. 
 
 12. sarva-gunair, u.f. sarva-gunais, 174, 
 cf . 1 4a N. : for mg, see sarva 2b : a de- 
 scriptive cpd, 1279. yuktah, u.f. yukta-s 
 (170d), ppl. (953, 219 and 217) of Vyuj: 
 see Vyuj 4, 'yoked with' (hence instr., 278), 
 and so ' possessed of '. prajakamah, ob- 
 serve accent and references in vocab. sa 
 caprajah, u.f. sas ca aprajas, 176a (as ex- 
 ception to 170c) : for sa-s, 495: ca, though 
 coalescing with aprajas in euphony (126) 
 and in print, is really an enclitic and so be- 
 longs w. sa: 'and yet he (sc. was) childless.' 
 
 13. akarot, 3d s. imf. of Vlkr, 714. 
 ' He (in the matter of, i.e.) for the sake of 
 children made the greatest effort,' i.e. he 
 performed pious rites, etc. ; or else, ' He had 
 the matter of children greatly at heart, all 
 intent (upon it).' 
 
 14. tarn, 495, 274a. abhy-agacchad, 
 \fgam+abhi, see references after pres. form 
 gacchati in vocab. : this is 3d s. imf., 742. 
 Respecting the spelling cch, see Preface, p. 
 v. note 6. brahmarsi-r : for r, 174: de- 
 
 ! clension, 339 : formation, see references in 
 vocab. There were three kinds of Rishis 
 (see rsi) : the rajarsi, or prince who adopted 
 a life of devotion ; tlie devarsi, or sage who 
 was also a demigod, as Narada ; and the 
 brahmarsi, or priestly sage. 
 
 Bharata, like rajendra, kaunteya, 
 vigam pate, prabho, maharaja, raj an, 
 pandava, kauravya, etc., is an interjected 
 vocative, addressed by Brihada9wa, the nar- 
 rator, to Yudhishthira, see p. 298, 10. 
 
 15. sa, see p. 291, paragraph 1, and 
 vocab., s.v. ta4. tosayam asa, periphras- 
 tic perf. of caus. of Vtus, 1070, 1071a: the 
 auxiliary is the 3d s. perf. (800a) of Vas, 
 'be.' dharma-vit, nom.s.m., declined like 
 veda-vit, I 7 . 
 
 16. mahisya, instr. (364) of mahisi. 
 suvarcas-am: declension, 418: goes with 
 tarn. 15-16. 'Along with his queen, 
 Bhlma, desiring children (and) knowing his 
 duty, gratified him (tarn, Damana), the glo- 
 rious, with hospitality.' 
 
 17. tasmai, 495. pra-sanno, Vsad+ 
 pra, cf. upa-panno, I*N. sabharyaya, 
 dat.s.m. with tasmai, 'to him having an 
 accompanying wife, i.e. to him and his wife ' : 
 observe that bharya shortens its final a in 
 composition, 334 2 . dadau, Vda, 'give,' 
 800c. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 2. 
 
 1. kumarang ca, u.f. kumaran ca (208), 
 or rather, kumarans ca (170c) ; for the so- 
 called " inserted sibilant " is in the acc.pl. a 
 historic survival, the original ending having 
 been ns. trm, 482c. maha-yagas (418) 
 goes with damanas. 
 
 2. damayantim, 364. 
 
 3. Cf . I 4 and I 11 and notes. 
 
 4. tejas-a, 414 : so yagas-a. griy-a, 
 stem gri, 351. 
 
 5. prapa, 3d s. perf. Vap+pra, 783c 2 , 
 800a. 4-5. ' Fair-waisted D. won fame 
 among men by her beauty, majesty, fame, 
 grace, and comeliness.' Reprehensible tau- 
 tology. 
 
 6. tarn, 495. vayas-i prapte, loc. ab- 
 solute, 303b: prapta, ppl. of Vap+pra. 
 dasinam, 295 end.
 
 [303] 
 
 ( NOTES TO 
 I PAGE 3. 
 
 7. paryupasac chaclm, u.f. pary-upa_ 
 asat gaclm, see I 7a N. : asat, 3d s. imf. of 
 a-class (742 augment 585) fr. Vas; this is 
 reg. of the root-class, G28, and mid. voice. 
 
 6-7. Lit. 'Now, her marriageable age 
 having come, of slaves an adorned hundred, 
 and a hundred of friends sat around her 
 (tarn.), as (they do) around (^aci.' 
 
 8. raj ate, Vraj, 735. sarva^abharana- 
 bhusita, 'adorned with all (her) jewels,' a 
 dependent cpd (1265), whose first member, 
 sarvabharana, is itself a cpd, like sarva- 
 guna, see I 12 N. 
 
 9. sakhi-madhye, see madhya 1. ana- 
 vadyangi, initial elided, 135 : the cpd is the 
 possessive form of a descriptive, 1297-8. 
 
 vidyut, 391. The Hindu epos often likens 
 maiden beauty to the brilliantly flashing 
 lightning of the rain-cloud. 
 
 10. rupa-sampanna goes with bhaimi. 
 U-f. grl-s (174) iva ayata-locana, 'like 
 long-eyed Qri.' 
 
 11. U.f. tadrk, nom.s.f. rupavati, 
 nom.s.f. of rupavant, 452. 
 
 12. U.f. manusesu (129) api ca anyesu 
 drsta-purva (sc. asit) atha va gruta. 
 api ca continues the force of the preceding 
 negatives, 'nor also.' For drsta-purva, 
 see reference in vocab. : drs-ta, ppl. of 
 Vdrg, 218. atha va, see atha 6. gruta = 
 gruta-purva, 1316 3 . 
 
 Omission of copula (asi, asti, smas, 
 santi, asit, 'art, is, are, was/ etc., 636) is 
 extremely common ; esp. so w. past pples, 
 which thus do duty as finite verbs cf. 
 3 19 N., 7 6 - r N. So also in German. 
 
 13. citta-pramathim, fern., 438, 440 end. 
 devanam, 1316, first example. Lines 
 11-13 belong together : ' Neither among gods 
 nor Yakshas (sc. was) such a beauty seen 
 before or heard of, nor also among other 
 beings, (namely) mortals': bala is added in 
 apposition to the subject. 
 
 14. nalag, 170c. -bhuvi, 351. 
 
 15. kandarpa, 175b. murtiman, 453. 
 
 abhavat, 742. 'In beauty he was like 
 K. himself incarnate or having bodily form ' 
 
 w. pregnant mg, since K is said to be 
 'bodiless,' an-anga. 
 
 16. U.f. tasyas, 495. pra-gagansuh, 3d 
 pi. perf. (800a) of v/gans+pra, p. 254: sub- 
 ject indef ., ' they ' or ' messengers.' 
 
 17. punah punah, u.f. punar punar, 178. 
 
 18. tayor, 495. ' bhuc chrnvatoh, u.f . 
 abhut grnvatos, see 1 7a N. : abhut, 829 : gr- 
 nv-at-os, loc. du., 447, of pres. ppl., 705, of 
 Vgru, 71(J. 
 
 19. anyonyam, see vocab. kaunteya, 
 see I 1 * N. end. vy-avardhata, Vvrdh+vi, 
 742. 
 
 20. a-gak-nuv-an, negatived pres. ppl., 
 705 (cf. 697 3 and 129 2 ), of Vgak. -dhar- 
 ayitum, inf., 1051 6 , of Vdhr, whose pres. 
 is made from a caus. stem, 1041, 1042b. 
 -hrd-a, 391. 
 
 21. antahpura-, read p. 291, paragraph 
 4. vana, u.f. vane, 133. as-te, 612. 
 
 gata-s, ppl. of Vgam, 954d. 'Stays in a 
 wood near the harem, having gone secretly.' 
 
 22. dadarga, 3d s. perf. Vdrg, strong 
 stem dadarg, weak dadrg, 792, 793c, 800. 
 
 hansaii, 202 2 . -pariskrtan, ppl. of V 1 kr 
 -fpari, 1087d, 180. -'Gold-adorned' = 'of 
 golden plumage '. 
 
 23. vi-caratam, gen ( pi, of pres. ppl. of 
 Vcar+vi. tesam, 495. jagraha, 3d s. 
 perf. of Vgrah, 590b, 800. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 3. 
 
 1. vacam etc., see under vac. vy-a- 
 jahara, 590b, 800. 
 
 2. Lines 2-4 are the words of the bird. 
 asmi, 636. te, enclitic, and tava, are 
 gen.s. of 2d pers. pron., 491 : use of case, 
 296b. -rajan,424. -karisyami,933. -See 
 priya 2a. 
 
 3. tvam, 491, object of kathayisyami, 
 fut. of denom. stem kathaya, 933. Supply 
 tatha as correl. of yatha na, 'ut non', 
 next line. 
 
 4. See yatha 6. -tvad, 491, abl. w. 
 anya, 292b. mansyati, 933, v'man, mg 4. 
 
 5. ut-sa-sarj-a, Vsrj+ud, 800. 
 
 6. te must be from ta, 495, since the en- 
 clitic te (491) could not stand at beg. of 
 verse. sam-ut-pat-ya, gerund of Vpat + 
 sam-ud, 990. Note how the gerund, as 
 instr. of accompaniment of a verbal noun
 
 NOTES TO ) 
 PAGES, j 
 
 [304] 
 
 (read 989), gets its mg : 'with a flying,' i.e. 
 'flying' or 'having flown.' vidarbhan, 
 274a. agamahs, u.f. agaman, 208, aor. of 
 V gam, 840. 
 
 7. ga-tva, gerund again, 991 : the root, 
 gam, shows the same form as in the ppl. 
 ga-ta, 954d. U.f. tada antike. 
 
 8. nipetus, Vpat+ni, 800d, 794e. da- 
 darga, 2 22 x. 
 
 9. drs-tva, v'drg, 991, 218. -U.f. sakhi- 
 gana^avrta, 'surrounded by (her) friend- 
 crowd,' 1265 : sakhi- is demanded by the 
 metre, instead of sakhi-, p. 300, 21d: a-vr- 
 ta, ppl. of v' 1 vr+a. 
 
 10. hrs-ta, ppl. of v'hrs, 197. grabl- 
 tum, inf., 968, 972 3 : used here with verb of 
 motion (vkram see 981 3 ) , Latin, 'subiit 
 captum'. khagamans, u.f. -an, 208; but 
 the s is here a true historic survival, cf . 2 l >*. 
 U.f. tvaramana upa-, 127: Vtvar, 741: 
 upa-ca-kram-e, v'kram+upa, 590b, 800a, 3d 
 s. mid. 
 
 11. See Vsrp+vi, and 800. 
 
 12. ekaikagas refers to both subject and 
 object 'singulae (puellae) singulos (an- 
 seres).' sam-upa_adravan, Vdru, 742. 
 
 13. sam-upa^adhavat, Vdhav, 742. 
 antike, ' in the presence, i.e. near,' is super- 
 fluous with ' ran on unto.' 
 
 14. kr-tva, Vlkr, mg 3, and 991. -a- 
 bravit, 3d s. imf. of Vbru, w. ace. of person, 
 274b. -13-14. Observe that the relative 
 clause comes first, w. incorporated antece- 
 dent, ' ad quern anserem D. accurrit, is ... 
 dixit ' : cf . 512, and vocab. ya 4. 
 
 15. With mahipatis supply asti, ' there is 
 a prince . . .' : cf . 2 12 s. end. 
 
 16. The first half-line goes w. line 15 : 
 supply santi in the second. The two geni- 
 tives are explained at 296b. 
 
 The caesura, be it observed, here marks 
 the beginning of a new clause. This is often 
 the case. So 3 ^ 8 - 18 - 21 , 5 6 , etc. 
 
 17- bharya, predicate nom. U.f. bha- 
 vethas, 177, 738. var-, voc.s., 364, fern., 
 440 end. 
 
 18. bhavej, u.f. bhavet, 202, 738. 
 janma, 424. U.f. rupam ca idam, 'pul- 
 critudoque haec'. 'Fruitful (of good) 
 
 would be thy birth, and this beauty (of 
 thine),' i.e. it would then prove a fortunate 
 thing that thou wast born and art so 
 beautiful. 
 
 19. For the long cpd, see 1247 I 2 : divide 
 -manusa-uraga-, 127 : the whole is object of 
 drsta-vant-as (supply smas, 'sumus' 2 12 
 x. end), which is exactly like the Eng. ' (are) 
 having seen ' = ' have seen ' : read 959 and 
 960. In the later mythology, the serpents 
 are divine beings with human face, whose 
 beauty is often praised : cf . 13 1 . 
 
 20. U.f. na ca asmabhis (491),'neque a 
 nobis.' drstapurvas, supply asit and see 
 N. to 2 12 . tathavidhas, substantively, of 
 course : ' (a man) of such sort '. 
 
 21. U.f. tvam ca api, supply asi, as in 
 2 u N. narinam, 364, in vocab. under nara 
 nalo, supply asti, as in 2 12 N. 
 
 22. U.f. vigistayas, 177, gen.s.f., ppl. of 
 v'gis~vi. For use of instr., 284. 'Ex 
 imiae cum eximio congressus.' For sam- 
 gama, read p. 291 1 7. 
 
 23. For vigam pate, ' prince ', s.v. vi 
 2, see 1 14 N. end. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 4. 
 
 1. abravit, see 3 M N. nale, 304a. 
 ' Do thou speak so to Nala also ' (sc. as 
 thou hast to me). The api ought to follow 
 nale. 
 
 2. See iti, mg 2, and tatha, mg 2. 
 uktva, <J vac, 991 : the root shows same 
 weak form^as in ppl., 954b cf. 217. 
 
 3. a-gam-ya, 990. nale, as in line 1. 
 See VI vid+ni : imf. 3d s. of caus., 1042a, 
 cf. 1043. -2-3. 'The bird, saying "Yes" 
 to the maid (274b) of Vidarbha, . . . ., com- 
 municated all to Xala.' 
 
 4. See iti, mg 2e. In this poem, adhy- 
 aya (not sarga) is the proper word for 
 ' chapter.' 
 
 6. For tac chrutva, see N. to I 7a : tat, 
 495: cru-tva, 991. bharata, see N. to l u 
 end. 
 
 7. prati, here used as a true " preposi- 
 tion", or rather postposition, connecting 
 nalam with svastha see 1123. babhuva, 
 Vbhu, 789a.
 
 [305] 
 
 ( NOTES TO 
 < PAGE 5. 
 
 8. U.f. tatas, 170c. For an explana- 
 tion of the nature of these and the following 
 long cpds, look up the references under them 
 in vocab. 
 
 9. nihgvasa-, read p. 291 If 4. 
 
 10. unmatta-dargana, 1299 : for un-, 
 161. 
 
 11. U.f. ksanena atha. The complete 
 analysis of the long word is indicated by ref- 
 erences in vocab. 
 
 12. First cpd, see 1253a. vindati, 
 V2 vid. 
 
 13. gete, VI 1, 629. -U.f. "ha ha" iti. 
 
 See v/rud and 619. See punar 2. 
 
 15. asvastham: observe the use, com- 
 mon in Skt., of a predicate adj. or subst. 
 instead of subordinate clause : thus, ' an- 
 nounced D. as ill', where we should say, 
 'announced that she was ill' : so 4 19 karyam. 
 
 naregvare (like nale, 4 L3 ) is loc. w. ny- 
 avedayat and in logical apposition w. the 
 dat. vidarbhapataye, despite the difference 
 of case. 
 
 16. See N. to 4 6 . Observe how the 
 idea of 4 14b is here put in one cpd. 
 
 17. cint-, see N. to I 15 . 'Considered 
 this important matter (in respect to, i.e.) 
 concerning his daughter.' 
 
 18. See Viks and 992. -prap-, see 1308. 
 ' Considering his daughter who had reached 
 nubility,' i.e. taking fully into account the 
 fact of her marriageability (though he knew 
 it well enough before). 
 
 19. apagyad, 759, 760.6. See atman 3, 
 and 514. ' Saw D's swayamvara requiring to 
 be instituted by himself, saw that he must 
 hold D's sw.' : cf . N. to 4 15 . 
 
 20. Periphrastic perf. of denom. man- 
 tray a +sam-ni, 1070, 107 la. 
 
 21. anubh- is 3d s. pres. imv. pass., Vbhu 
 -fanu, 771.4. ayam, read p. 291 1 1, and 
 see 501. iti marks the four preceding 
 words as the precise words of Bhima's invi- 
 tation : ' Let this swayamvara be heard or 
 taken notice of, O heroes, i.e. Understand 
 ye that one will take place here.' prabho, 
 841, see I 14 N. end. Observe that we have 
 
 _/ w w as the first half of the first 
 
 pada, a not infrequent irregularity. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 5. 
 
 1. sarve, 524, cf. 495. 
 
 2. abhijagmus, v'gam+abhi, 590b, 794d. 
 - For abl., see 291 2 . 
 
 3. The aggregative cpd hasty-agva-ratha 
 (1252) makes w. ghosa a genitively depend- 
 ent cpd (1264): hasti for hastin, 1249a 2 . 
 purayantas (Vlpr), agrees w. subject of 
 preceding clause. 
 
 4. Divide, vicitramalya+abharana, as 
 descriptive, 1280b. - balais, 279. -'(They 
 came) . . . with troops, splendid (and) well 
 adorned with variegated-garland-ornaments.' 
 
 5. tesam (495) parth-, objective gen. w. 
 pujam. 
 
 6. akarot, I 13 x. te begins new clause 
 
 see 3 16 N. -U.f. avasan, 135, 208, \/3vas. 
 
 7. U.f. etasmin, 210, 499b : see vocab. 
 under etad. 'The two best of the Rishis 
 (1264) of the gods': the verb is in line 10. 
 
 8. See \/at and 741. U.f. mahatman- 
 au, 134. -gatau, 954d. 
 
 9. U.f. ca eva, 127, see eva, end. maha- 
 stands in adverbial relation to -prajna 
 ('greatly, i.e. very, wise '), since the whole 
 is a descriptive adjective cpd see 1279. 
 
 10. Third pers. dual, perf. mid., Vvig, 
 800a. See sii 2, inseparable prefix. 
 
 11-12. U.f. tau, 495. arc-, gerund from 
 caus. stem of v'rc, 1051 7 . papraccha, 590, 
 794c. U.f. anamayam ca api. -gata 
 (like -bhuta, see 6 7 N., and 1273c) is a mere 
 means of turning sarva- [=sarvatra] into 
 attributive form : so also in sarvatragatam, 
 line 14, which should be printed as a cpd, 
 and means, like sarvagatam, ' under all cir- 
 cumstances, i.e. in all their goings and do- 
 ings.' Amend vocab. accordingly. 
 
 'Saluting them, Maghavan then asked 
 after the welfare unbroken and also disease- 
 less of them two under all circumstances 
 he, the mighty one': i.e. (cf. the principle 
 explained 4 15 N.) 'asked if it had gone con- 
 stantly well with them and if they had been 
 entirely free from sickness.' 
 
 14-15. avayos, 491. Copulas omitted 
 
 2 12 N. 'Of us two (there is) welfare, 
 j O god, under all circumstances, O lord : and
 
 NOTES TO ) 
 PAGES, j 
 
 [306] 
 
 in the whole (krtsne) world, Maghavan, 
 the princes (are) prosperous, O mighty oue.' 
 18-2O are prefatory to the question 
 proper in line 21 a : 'The princes (proleptic 
 nora. independent) . . . , who (509) go to 
 death by the sword (280) . . . , this (501) 
 imperishable world, i.e. heaven, (is cf. 2 12 
 N. end) granting every wish of them, just as 
 (yatha^eva) of me (it grants every wish).' 
 The idea is, Since the brave warriors can 
 here obtain their every wish, why do they 
 not come up ? 
 
 21. 'Where now (are) those princes, 
 heroes ? ' Observe caesura : cf. 3 16 N. 
 
 22. agacchatas, Vgam+a, 741, 447, 
 agrees w. tan. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 6. 
 
 2. crriu, 710, 703. -me, 491, 297b. - 
 drgyante, 768, 771. 
 
 3. Supply asti, ' there is ' (a daughter) . . . 
 
 See iti, mg 2 f . Vcru+vi. 
 
 4. Ppl. of Vkram+sam-ati (955a) 'having 
 excelled = excelling.' 
 
 5. tasyas, 495. bhavita, 944. 
 
 7. See bhuta 2, and reference, 1273c, 
 and cf. 5 12 N. Pres. ppl. of denom. stem 
 arthaya+pra, 1068. 
 
 8. kanksanti governs tarn. 
 
 9. 'While this (499b) is being told' 
 (pres. ppl. pass, of kathaya, 1068, cf . 1052a), 
 loc. absolute, 303b. Study references un- 
 der sagnika, an important kind of cpd : lit. 
 'having an accompanying (sa-) Agni', where 
 sa- is equiv. to an adj. Others in line 13. 
 
 10. Vgam+a, cf. 5 2 N. 
 
 11. Vgrn, 3d pi. perl, 800b. 
 
 12. U.f. grutva eva ca abruvan (632) 
 hrstas. gacchamas: for tense, 777a. 
 
 13. maharaja, see I 14 N. end. 
 
 14. yatas, supply asan, ' were.' 
 
 15. kaunteya, see I 14 . end. 
 
 17. path-i, loc.s., 433. - dadrcus, 2 & N. 
 
 sthitam, superfluous, see sthita 2. 
 
 18. 'In reality almost, the god of love, 
 present (see sthita 3) with definite shape, 
 (by reason of beauty =) so handsome was 
 he.' Cf. 2i*x. 
 
 2O. tasthus, 590c\ 794f, 800c. -Vsmi+vi. 
 
 21. vistabhya, v stabh+vi, 185. 992. 
 
 22. rajann, 210: see l u N. end. -Vtr 
 -f ava, 992 2 , 242. 
 
 23. U.f. bhos, see 176a. bhavan, see 
 bhavant and 456, and supply asti, 514. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 7. 
 
 I. 'Do thou (714) assistance of us' (491). 
 Observe caesura. 
 
 4. Vjna, 989. -U.f. karisye, 133, 933. 
 'Nala, promising them "I will do (the 
 assistance) ", . . .'. 
 
 o. etan, 499b. v'stha-fupa, 954c. 
 
 6-7. Now review declension of pronouns 
 
 very frequent hereabouts : interrogatives, 
 ke, kas, kirn, 504 ; demonstratives, tad, 495, 
 ayam and asau, 501 ; personal, aham, maya, 
 asman, and vas, tvam, tvam, 491. 
 
 Note frequent omission (2 12 N.) of copula : 
 u.f. ke bhavantas (santi, 514) ? kas ca 
 asau (asti), yasya aham ipsitas (asmi) 
 dutas? kim ca (asti) tad vas maya kar- 
 yam ('mihi faciendum')? yasya dutas, 
 'as messenger to whom.' kath-, 1068, 
 1043.4. 
 
 8 a . See303b 4 . 
 
 9. Vbudh+ni, 739. 'Know us as gods, 
 i.e. know that we are gods' cf. 4 15 N. 
 
 See artha. 
 
 10. U.f. aham indras (asmi), ayam ag- 
 nis ca (asti), tatha eva ayam apam patis 
 (asti). ayam, ' this one here', with a ges- 
 ture of introduction, apam, see ap. 'Lord 
 of waters ' is Varuna. 
 
 II. nfnam, gen.pl. of nr, 371 s . U.f. 
 yamas ayam (asti). 
 
 12. 'Announce us as assembled' cf. 
 
 4 15 N. 
 
 The last three lines (13-15) of Indra's 
 speech contain in oratio recta the message 
 which he wishes Nala to deliver. 
 
 13. Lit. 'The world-protectors, having 
 Great-Indra as first, i.e. Great-Indra and the 
 other world-protectors ' : for this important 
 kind of cpd, study 1302c 1, and adi in vocab. 
 
 Vya-i-sam-a, 611. See reference under 
 didrksu. 
 
 14. 'The gods seek (VI is, 608) to win 
 (Vap, 968) thee.'
 
 [307] 
 
 j NOTES TO 
 I PAGE 1O. 
 
 15. 'Choose thou', V 2 vr, 1043.4. 
 
 17. 'Me, come hither (sam-upa-itam, 
 \'i^ for one and the same purpose.' Inf. of 
 V2 is rpra, 1051. 
 
 18-19. 'Pray how can (Vsah+ud) a man 
 who is in love say (V vac, 968) such a thing to 
 a woman (striyam 360, 274b) for another 1 ' 
 
 20. ucus, Vvac, perf., see references. 
 
 21. sam-c,ru-tya, 992. For loc., 304a. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 8. 
 
 I. kar-, 933. Observe caesura. 
 
 4. veg-, object of pravestum, which is 
 inf. of Vvig+pra, 218. 
 
 5. U.f. pra-veksyasi (Vvig, fut., 932, 218) 
 iti . . . eva abhy-. 
 
 6. Vgam. See iti, mg 2. 
 
 7. Third word is vaidarbhim. See 
 VI vT+sam-a. 
 
 8. Vdip, intens. 1000, 1002a, 1016. - 
 vapus-a, 414. 
 
 10. Vksip+a, 752.5. 
 
 II. Join tasya w. kamas, and tarn w. 
 drstva. -Vvrdh, 800. 
 
 12. See satya 3. cik-, VI kr, desid., 
 1027, 1028b. -Vdhr, 1070, 1071a. 
 
 13. Vbhram+sam, 955a. 
 
 14. Vpat+sam-ud, 794e. Vdhrs. 
 
 16. U.f. na ca enam, see ena and 500. 
 
 18. U.f. kas ayam (asti) ? For rest of 
 line, see atha 6 and 948 2 end. 
 
 19. Vcak, 697 li8 . -See Vhr+vy-a: inf. 
 -See Ika2cand507. 
 
 20. Nom.pl.fem. of lajjavant, 452 3 . 
 21-22. 'Then to him smiling, Dama- 
 
 yanti with a smile addressing unto the 
 hero Nala spake, amazed.' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 9. 
 
 1. U.f. praptas (Vap) asi, 636. -'Thou 
 art having come like a god, i.e. thou earnest 
 invisibly?' Observe caesura. Vjna, w. 
 gen. te, 'get acquainted with thee.' 
 
 2. U.f. ca iha (asit). Caesura. U.f. 
 asi na laksitas (ppl. of laksaya), 'wast 
 thou not noticed.' 
 
 3. Caesura. U.f. ca eva ugra-. 
 
 5. viddhi = 1a8t : see V 1 vid 2 and 617. 
 6-7. Cf. 7 14 ' 16 . -gobh-, voc.s.fem. 
 
 8. U.f. pravistas aham (asmi), Vvig. 
 
 9. Vvig, 752.5. -See 1 ka 2d and 507. 
 
 U.f. apagyat, na api avar- (Vlvr caus.). 
 
 10. presitas (asmi), V2 is. 
 
 11. VI kr+pra, 2d s. imv. mid. 714. 
 
 14. From here on, the use of virama 
 with a final consonant to prevent its com- 
 bining in print with a following initial is 
 given up. Thus in nalamabravit, we allow 
 the a, which if unannulled by virama is 
 inherent in the nagari sign for ma, to serve 
 as the first letter of abravit. Cf. 9 4 with 
 the identical 10 2 . 
 
 See 992 for the two cpd gerunds. 
 
 15. Vni + pra, 739: for n, 192a. -See 
 v' 1 kr 2, 714, 578. 
 
 16. U.f. yat (202) ca anyat (161) mama 
 asti: see VI as 2. 'For both I and what 
 other good soever I have ' 
 
 17. 'That all (is) thine.' kuru, 714. 
 Igvara = Nala. 
 
 18. Explained at 512a, q.v. 
 
 19. Vpat+sam-ni, pass. ppl. of causa- 
 five, hence long a, 1051. 
 
 20. Vkhya+praty-a, 932 : 948 2 examples. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 1O. 
 
 1. asthasye, Vstha+a, 932. Suicide by 
 hanging etc. is referred to : so also Pan- 
 chatantra iv. fable 2. 
 
 2. Identical with 9*. 
 
 3. VsthaS: loc. (741), absolute, 303b. 
 
 'The gods being present, how seekest thou 
 a man (as husband, in preference) 1' 
 
 4-5. As at 3 13 - 14 (see N.), the relative 
 clause comes first, with incorporated ante- 
 cedent: lit. 'Of what world-creating noble 
 lords I (am) not equal to the foot-dust (instr., 
 see 281a), let thy mind on those be busied ' 
 (Vvrt 4, 739). More natural to us would 
 seem tesu lokakrtsu igvaresu mahatmasu. 
 " He's not as good as the dust on my feet" 
 was prob. a proverbial expression of re- 
 proach : so Malavika, act i. 
 
 6. U.f. hi acaran, pres. ppl. devanam 
 limits vipriyam, 296 b. rcchati, see Vr. 
 
 7. Vtra, 617. -Cf. 2 9 N. and 7 15 N. 
 
 8. See tatha 3. Nala tells her (lines 8-9) 
 what she may enjoy if she chooses a god.
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 1O. 
 
 [308] 
 
 9. devan prapya, V ap, 992, ' by obtaining 
 gods (in wedlock).' bhunksva, v2 bhuj, 
 689. 
 
 10. U.f . yas : its antecedent is tarn, 
 imam, 501. Vksip, 992. SeepunarS. 
 
 12-13. Explained 291 2 . yasya limits 
 only danda-, not the whole cpd, 1316. Yama 
 is meant here. 
 
 16-17. kriyatam (770c) varanam, 'let a 
 choice be made '. yadi manyase, \ man 3. 
 
 suirdvakyam. crnu, 6 2 x. 
 
 19. Vplu+sam-a, past ppl., instr. dual. 
 
 See atha 4. See vari and 339. 
 
 21. V2vr, 718. Declension of bhartr, 
 373. satyam etad bravimi, see satya 3. 
 
 22. Vvip, 741. krtanjalim, here fern., 
 846,344. 
 
 23. agatya, Vgam, 992. U.f. iha ut- 
 sahe : see V sah+ud 2. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 11. 
 
 1. U.f. hi aham. -For gen., 297a. 
 
 2. SeeVrabh+a2. katham, epanalepsis. 
 
 3. U.f. esas (176a) dharmas (sc. asti), 
 forms a clause. bhavita, 944. See 949 2 
 near end. 
 
 4. See >/ 1 dha+vi 5 and 770b. 
 
 6. See VI hr+praty-a. 
 
 7. ' Here is a safe means (seen in the 
 mind, i.e.) thought out by me.' 
 
 8. bhavita = bhavisyati, line 12. 
 9-10. U.f. tvam ca eva . . . devas ca 
 
 . . . ayantu (Vya, 611) : verb agrees w. near- 
 est subject. Observe caesura in 10. With 
 yatra supply asti. 
 
 11. For samnidhi(m=n), read p. 291 IT 7. 
 
 12. var- governs tvam. U.f. na evam. 
 
 14. U.f. punar, 178. End, supply asan. 
 
 15. U.f. tarn apagyan (208) tatha 
 ayantam (619). 
 
 16. U.f. ca enam, 500. 
 
 17. For kaccid (kat cid, 202), see kad. 
 18 a . ' And what did she say to us all? ' 
 
 20. U.f. bhavadbhis, 456. -See Vdic, 
 -fa. niv-, with pra vistas. 
 
 21. ' Guarded (vr-tam) by warders ' 
 (dandibhis). 
 
 22. U.f. na kas cid (1 ka 2d) drstavan 
 (sc. asti) naras, see 959, 960, this example. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 12. 
 
 1. U.f. sakhyas (364) ca asyas (501)... 
 tabhis ca api ... Copula twice omitted. 
 
 2. U.f. sarvas, nom.fem. vib-, voc. 
 
 G. ' While ye are being described by me,' 
 303b. 
 
 4. V2vr, 718. -sur-, voc. -Cf. 10 21 . 
 
 5. In the words ayantu to bhavita, line 
 8, Nala repeats substantially D's plan 
 (II 9 - 12 ), but in oratio recta. Hiatus (113) is 
 allowed at the caesura ; otherwise bala 
 (unless it had lost a final s, 177) would co- 
 alesce with the following initial. Cf. 16 u y. 
 
 8. mah-, voc. bhavita, II 8 N. See 
 iti5. 
 
 9-1O. U.f. etavad (nom.n., 453) uda- 
 hrtam (Vhr, sc. asti) maya, full stop. 
 ' For the rest, ye (are) an authority, gods ' : 
 i.e. it's your affair alone now. 
 
 13. The three substantives are locatives 
 absolute with prapte, 303b 3 . 
 
 14. Vhu+a : w. 782 cf. 643b. - For 
 loc., 304. 
 
 16. Vgam+sam-upa^a, 1080. For ace., 
 dam-, 271a. 
 
 18. U.f. vivicus (cf. 5 10 N.) te nrpas . . . 
 acalam. 
 
 19. U.f. asanesu . . asmas, 619 8 . 
 
 2O b . The cpd is a possessive form (1301) 
 of a descriptive cpd, 1280b. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 13. 
 
 I. Second word is suglaksnah. 'Like 
 the five-headed serpents ' because the hand 
 is quinquepartite. Cf . 3 19 N. 
 
 5. Vmus, 724: fern, irreg., 449c 8 : 'be- 
 guiling' cf. K\eirrfiv v6ov. prabhaya, 
 364. caksiinsi, 414 end. 
 
 6-7. U.f. tesam drstis, . . . patita, . . . 
 sakta (v'sanj) abhut (829) caesura : na ca 
 (drstis tesam) pagyatam cacala. 
 
 8. ' While the names are being an- 
 nounced' loc. absolute, 303b, pres. ppl. of 
 pass, of denom. kirtaya-f sam. 
 
 9. See atha 4. - See p. 299, 15. 
 
 10. Viks-rsam, 992. -See sthita 4. 
 
 II. U.f. samdehat (m=n, p. 291 1 7) 
 . . na abhy-ajanat, Vjna, 730 2 , 725.
 
 12. See ya 5. See Vman, 794e. 
 'For whichever she saw of them, him she 
 thought (to be) king N.' 
 
 13. U.f. buddhya, 339. -tark-, cf. I 15 N. 
 
 14. Optatives (577) of v/jfia, 721, and 
 VI vid, 616. 
 
 17-18. ' What marks of the gods [(are) 
 my heard ones (296b) =] I have heard of 
 from old men, these I do not notice as (being 
 of, i.e.) belonging to even one (ekasya api) 
 of those standing here (iha) on the ground 
 (bhumau).' 
 
 19. V3 ci+vi-nis, 992. -Vcar+vi, 1051. 
 
 20. 'Thought (it) an arrived-time, i.e. 
 thought that the time had arrived (cf. note 
 to 4 15 ) for refuge (of the) to the gods.' 
 
 22. pra- is predicate adj. w. bhu-tva, 
 991. See Vbhu. U.f. vepamana idam. 
 
 23. 'As surely as N. (was) chosen by me 
 on hearing . . : ' see yatha 4. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 14. 
 
 1. patitve, ' in marriage,' goes with vrtas. 
 - See satya 2 and 280 end. - U.f . tarn = Nala. 
 
 2. U.f. na abhicarami. 
 
 4. 'Ordained (as my, i.e.) to be my hus- 
 band' Vldha+vi 3, and 954c. 
 
 6. 'As this ceremony (vrata) was under- 
 taken by me (in the =) for the winning of 
 Nala . . '. v/rabh+a : rabh-ta = rabdha, 160. 
 
 8. Vikr 3,714: should be mid. See p. 
 299, 15. ' 
 
 9. See yatha 6. v/jna f abhi, 721. 
 
 10. V4 gam, 992. -U.f. tad. 
 
 11. vflkr, 800f. 
 
 12-13. ' She saw (apagyat) all the gods, 
 free from sweat (asvedan), unwinking, hav- 
 ing unwithered garlands and free from dust, 
 standing (see sthita 1) without touching 
 (asprgatas) the ground.' The "unwinking 
 eyes " are a survival of the old Vedic con- 
 ception of the gods that "neither slumber 
 nor sleep." The other marks of anthropo- 
 morphic divinity are natural enough. The 
 opposites of all five attributes are ascribed 
 to Nala, besides a shadow. 
 
 14. U.f. mlanasrak, nom.s.m., 391. 
 rajah-sveda- (1252), in instr. relation, forms 
 a cpd (1265) w. sam-anv-itas, Vi. 
 
 [3091 J NOTES TO 
 
 I PAGE 15. 
 
 15. 'And (ca- eva) the Nishadhan, . . 
 line 14 . . , (was) made recognizable, (by) 
 standing on the ground, and (ca) by winking.' 
 
 17. V2vr, 1070. -pandava,see IN. end. 
 
 18. See Vgrah 1. -Cf. 2 10 . 
 
 21. 'The cry "Ah, all" (ha hajti 
 cf. 4 18 ) was uttered (Vmuc).' 
 
 22-23. Same construction. 'The cry 
 'Bravo" was uttered (iritas, Vir) by ... 
 praising (Vgans) N.' Note the generous 
 magnanimity of the gods. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 15. 
 
 1. kauravya, see I 14 N. end. 
 
 2. Vgvas+a, caus. imf. U.f. antar- 
 atmana. 
 
 3. See yad 3 : correl. in line 4. 
 4*. Cf. 9 5 and N . 
 
 4 b . 'Delighted (Vram 3) with such (see 
 evam, end) words of thine' (as thou hast 
 spoken in choosing me). Loc., 303. 
 
 5. See yavant 2. SeeVdhr6. 
 
 6 a . Vbhu, construed prop. w. loc. of 
 thing (e.g. dane), means 'be in or on' (e.g. 
 giving), i.e. ' devoted to ' (charity) : here the 
 construction seems extended in like mg to a 
 person. ' So long will I be devoted to thee ' 
 
 tvayi. - Line 6 > = 10 21 b . 
 
 7-8. See vac (391) and nand+abhi. A 
 line, containing the principal verb with Nala 
 as subject, seems lacking. 
 
 9-1O. V pri 3. U.f. tu agni- : see -puro- 
 gama. See Vgam 5. 'But the two, 
 mutually pleased, beholding Agni and the 
 others, perceived those very gods as their 
 refuge, i.e. perceived that the gods had been 
 good to them.' 
 
 11-12. vrte, 303b. -U.f. nalaya astau 
 (483 3 ) . . dadus (800c). -The four gods 
 give each two gifts, and, besides, one gift in 
 common, a couple of children (mithunam, 
 19). It is by his exercise of the supernatu- 
 ral powers now given to Nala that Dama- 
 yanti in the sequel (chap. 23) recognizes her 
 lost and transformed husband. In passing 
 through a low door-way, he does not stoop 
 
 the lintel rises ; when he wants fire and 
 water for cooking, they come at his wish ; 
 and he seasons the food exquisitely.
 
 NOTES TO j 
 PAGE 15. 1 
 
 [310] 
 
 13-14. U.f . gatim ca an-, ' and a most 
 excellent gait ' : this includes the ability to 
 pass through the low door-way, as above. 
 -s/pri2, 760.5. 
 
 15. The god of fire and the god of the 
 waters (18) give N. magic power over their 
 respective elements see above and p. 
 299, 15. -U.f. pra-adat (VI da, 829) 
 yatra. 
 
 16. U.f. lokan atmaprabhan (208) ca 
 eva: ' places-in-heaven, having his (the 
 Fire-god's) splendor, or a splendor of their 
 own' (heaven has "no need of the sun, 
 neither of the moon, to shine in it ") r this 
 amounts, perhaps, to ' hopes of future bless- 
 edness'; but the Hindus make a deal of 
 loose talk about ' worlds ' (lokas). 
 
 17. U.f. yamas tu. anna-rasam, 'sub- 
 tle taste for food ' as the sequel shows 
 see above : vocab. wrong. 
 
 18. With apam patir supply pradat and 
 see? 10 *. 
 
 19. U.f. srajas ca ut-. 
 
 20. U.f. evam pra-daya (992) asya 
 (501), explained 297a. 
 
 21-22. Construe, anu-bhuya vivaham 
 asya damayantyac, ca : ' learning of the 
 wedding, i.e. that it would take place duly ' 
 they went back home. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 16. 
 
 1. Vlkr, caus., 1070, 1045. 
 
 2. usya, V3 vas, irreg. (990 2 ) for usitva. 
 4. U.f. bhrajamanas anguman : after 
 
 elision (bhrajamano 'ncuman), the anu- 
 swara belongs to the o, and so in nagari 
 has to be put over the o and to the left of 
 the avagraha. 
 
 6. U.f. ije (Vyaj) ca api. Yayati was 
 an ancient king, whose piety is celebrated 
 even in the Rigveda, where the gods are be- 
 sought to bless the sacrificer with their 
 presence, as in old time they did for Yayati. 
 His story is told MBh. i., chap. 75. 
 
 7. U.f. anyais ca bahubhis, dhlman, 
 kratubhis ca aptadaksinais : the second 
 ca seems superfluous. 
 
 8. U.f. punar (178) ca . . . upavanesu 
 (126). 
 
 9. Vhr+vi, cf. 3 1 N. and 16 12 . 
 
 10. Vjan, 1070, 1045: w. loc., 'begat 
 upon (the body of) D.' 
 
 11. Observe hiatus at the caesura cf. 
 12 s N. By penance the great ascetics 
 could become as gods and thrust even Indra 
 from his throne. The anxious god's most 
 effectual means to defend himself from the 
 power of their austerities was to seduce 
 them by sending a nymph so lovely that 
 they could not resist her charms. ' Indra's 
 weapon ' (indrasena, see vocab.) is therefore 
 a very complimentary name for Nala's 
 daughter. To name her brother, a corre- 
 sponding masculine was formed, which has, 
 of course, no other than grammatical appro- 
 priateness. 
 
 12. U.f . viharan ca, 208. 
 
 SELECTIONS II.-XXI. 
 
 FROM THE HlTOPADEQA, THE ' BOOK OF GOOD COUNSEL.' 
 
 22. The first book ever printed in Sanskrit was Kalidasa's ' Seasons ' (rt u - 
 samhara), edited by Sir Wm. Jones, and printed in Bengali letters in 1792. The 
 first Sanskrit book ever printed in Nagari letters was the Hitopade9a. It was edited 
 by Carey, and printed at Serampore in 1803. The publication was undertaken, said 
 Henry T. Colebrooke, "to promote and facilitate the study of the ancient and 
 learned language of India in the College of Fort William." It was chosen as the 
 first for this purpose because of its easy style and intrinsic interest and because two 
 English translations of it existed, one by Wilkins (Bath, 1787), and the other by 
 Jones (London, 1799). To pedagogical reasons, accordingly, may be assigned in 
 great part, the importance of this work : it has become important in the West,
 
 [3 1 1 1 ( INTBODUCTION TO 
 
 I HlTOPADECA. 
 
 because the text is so well suited for tyros in Sanskrit ; and in the Orient, because 
 of the intrinsic value of its contents. 
 
 23. The book belongs to the ethico-didactic class of literature, and is what 
 the Hindus call a niti-astra or ' conduct-work.' The term niti (see this in the 
 vocabulary) came to have special reference to the conduct of kings in their domestic 
 life and in their foreign relations ; a niti-gastra is, accordingly, a ' Prince's hand- 
 book of political and social ethics,' a kind of ' Mirrour for Magistrates.' The Hito- 
 pade9a consists of mingled verse and prose. The verses are mostly proverbs and 
 maxims often of the choicest practical wisdom; and their validity is proved, 
 illustrated, and enforced by the fables, which are in prose. 
 
 2-i. The frame in which the woi'k is set is simple and meagre. The sons of 
 King Sudar9ana of Pataliputra 1 (Patna) are ignorant and vicious. He therefore con- 
 vokes the wise men and asks if any one is able to reform the princes. Visnu9arman 
 offers to do so, and accordingly takes them in charge, and relates to them the stories 
 which make up the body of the collection. 
 
 25. The Hitopade9a is not an original work, but, rather, an excellent com- 
 pilation of ancient material. The time of its composition has not been even 
 approximately determined. The palm-leaf MS. brought by Mr. Cecil Bendall from 
 Xepal was written in the year 493 of the Nepal era or A.D. 1373. And Professor 
 Peterson's 2 old paper MS. from Jeypore is of about the same age. At present we 
 can hardly say more than that the work is at least 500 years old. In the working 
 over of the material, the metrical portions would naturally be changed less, on the 
 whole, than the prose ; and in fact, many of the proverbs can be traced back in their 
 identical form to works of antiquity. And travellers report that just such proverbs 
 are current to-day in the talk of the lower classes of India. 
 
 The author or editor of this collection of fables, according to the colophon 8 of 
 the Jeypore MS., was named Narayaiia, and his patron and publisher was the prince 
 Dhavalacandra. 
 
 26. The sources of this compilation are expressly said (end of the preface, 
 17 8 ) to be "the Pancatantra and another work." The first part of this statement 
 is borne out by the fact that, out of forty-three fables in the Hitopade9a, twenty-five 
 are found also in the Pancatantra. The latter work, as its name implies, consists 
 of five books ; while the Hitopade9a is divided into four, whose titles are given in 
 the preface, 17 7 . The correspondence is as follows. The first book of the Panca- 
 tantra answers in its frame-work to the second of the Hitopade9a and the second of 
 the Pancatantra to the first of the Hitopade9a. Five stories from the third book 
 of the Pancatantra, along with seven from the first, are scattered through the last 
 two books of the Hitopade9a. From the fourth book of the Pancatantra only one 
 story, "The ass in the tiger-skin," appears in the Hitopade9a; and from the fifth 
 book, only three. It thus appears that, in the main, only the first three books of 
 the Pancatantra were drawn upon by the author of the Hitopade9a; and Somadeva. 
 in his Katha-sarit-sagara (chapters 60-64, much of whose substance is from the 
 Pancatantra, i.-iii.), has followed a similar course. 
 
 27. What the "other work" is we can hardly say with entire certainty. In 
 it ought to be found together if the statement of the preface is accurate at least 
 
 1 From this point the spelling of proper names 2 See Preface to his Hitopadeca, p. i, ii, v. 
 
 will no longer be anglicized. 
 
 3 Peterson's ed., p. 161 : cf. p. iv, v.
 
 INTRODUCTION TO 
 HITOPADECA. 
 
 [312] 
 
 the eighteen fables of the Hitopadeca which do not occur in the Pancatantra. 
 Had the preface said " other works," the problem would be easier. Thus the story 
 of the two giants, iv. 9, may be traced to the Maha-bharata, and the prototypes of 
 other single stories are doubtless to be found in one and another ancient collection. 
 Professor Peterson 1 thinks that the " other work " is the Nitisara of Kamandaka. 
 The identification deserves further study. 
 
 28. The contents of the Pancatantra have been made the subject of one of 
 the most important contributions to the literary history of the world by the late 
 Professor Benfey. His principal results were published in his Pantschatantra (1859, 
 see above, p. xviii, no. 8), and in his introduction to Bickell's edition of the Kalilag 
 und Damnag (1876). The latter contains, pages VI-X, a brief resume of these 
 results. The summary given by Keith-Falconer (1885, see p. 315) is a systematic 
 and lucid account of the history of the fables, and is the one most to be commended 
 to English-speaking students. Some of the most important items follow. 
 
 A. The Indian original. In the sixth century of our era, there existed in 
 India a Buddhist Sanskrit work, in thirteen chapters, treating of the conduct of 
 princes. 2 Its doctrines were inculcated in the form of beast-fables, or stories in 
 which animals play the part of human beings. 
 
 B. This Indian original was translated by a Persian physician named Barzoi, 
 into the Pehlevi, the literary language of Persia, by command of the Sassanian king, 
 Khosru Anushlrvan, called The Just (531-579 A.D.). 
 
 29. Cl. Both the Indian original and its Pehlevi version are irrecoverably 
 lost ; but from the latter were made two very notable translations. The first was 
 into Syriac, made about 570 A.D., and called Kalilag and Damnag after the two 
 jackals, Karataka and Damanaka, who figured prominently in the introduction of 
 the Sanskrit original. A single notice of this version had been preserved in a 
 catalogue of Syriac writings made by Ebed-jesus (died 1318), and published by 
 Assemani at Rome in 1725. A Chaldean bishop, Georgius Ebed-jesus Khayyath, 
 on his way to the ecumenical council in 1870, stumbled upon a manuscript of this 
 Syriac version in the episcopal library at Mardin. Through the mediation of Ignazio 
 Guidi in Rome, and by a wonderful combination of lucky accidents and persistent 
 efforts, the existence of " the lost manuscript " was made known to the eager in- 
 quirers in Europe, 8 and at last published in text and German translation by Bickell. 
 
 30. C2. The second translation from the Pehlevi was the Kalilah and Dim- 
 nah or Fables of Pilpay in Arabic, made by Abd-allah ibn al-Moqaffa, a Persian 
 convert to Islam, who lived under the caliph al-Mansor and died about 760. This 
 version was published, though not in the best recension, by Silvestre de Sacy at 
 Paris in 1816, and an English translation of it was given by the Rev. Wyndham 
 Knatchbull, Oxford, 1819. 
 
 According to the Arabic introduction, Dabshelim (deva-Qarman) was the first 
 king of the Indian Restoration after the fall of the governor appointed by Alexander 
 
 1 See his Introduction, p. 29, 43, Notes, p. 3. The 
 Nitisara was edited by Rajendralala Mitra, in the 
 Bibliotheca Indica, vol. iv. 
 
 2 Such was Benfey's conclusion. It was ques- 
 tioned by Weber, Indische Streifen, iii. 437. Bar- 
 zoi's Pehlevi version (B.) may have been based on 
 several different works among them a Paficatantra. 
 Indeed, from the second chapter of the Arabic Kalilah 
 
 and Dimnah, The mission of Barzoi ' (Knatchbull, 
 pages 40-41; cf. Keith-Falconer, p. xii), and from 
 other evidence (Keith-Falconer, p. liv f), this is the 
 much more probable view. 
 
 3 The story of the discovery is told by Benfey, 
 in BickelPs book, pages Xn-XXIII, as also in vari- 
 ous periodicals there cited, p. XXII note, e.g. Lon- 
 don Academy for Aug. 1, 1871.
 
 T3131 i INTRODUCTION TO 
 
 I HlTOPADB^A. 
 
 at the close of his campaign in the Panjab, B.C. 326. When firmly established, 
 Dabshelirn gave himself over to every wickedness. To reclaim the king, a Brahman 
 philosopher takes up his parable, as did Nathan before David, and at last wins him 
 back to virtue. The wise man is called in Arabic bid-bah l and in Syriac bid-vag. 
 These words are satisfactorily traced by Benfey, through the PehlevI, to the Sanskrit 
 vidya-pati, 'master of sciences.' Accordingly, bidbah, which has become Bidpai or 
 Pilpay in our modern books, is not really a proper name, but an appellative, applied 
 to a ' Chief Pandit ' or ' Court-scholar ' of an Indian prince. 
 
 The Arabic version is of prime importance, since from it have flowed other 
 versions, which have been of the utmost influence in shaping the literature of the 
 Middle Ages. 
 
 31. D. These versions are: 1. The Later Syriac, made in the tenth or 
 eleventh century, edited by Wright, and translated by Keith-Falconer; 2. the 
 Greek one, made about 1080, by Symeon Seth, a Jewish physician ; 3. the Persian, 
 made some fifty years later, by Nasr Allah of Ghaznl ; 4. the Hebrew, ascribed to 
 Rabbi Joel, and probably made before 1250, and published, with French translation, 
 at Paris in 1881, by Joseph Derenbourg; 5. the old Spanish, made from the Arabic 
 in 1251, and published at Madrid in 1860 by Gayangos. 
 
 32. E. Of the descendants in the fifth degree from the original, only two 
 need be mentioned : 3. The Persian Anwar-i Suhaill or ' Lights of Canopus,' a sim- 
 plified recast of Nasr Allah's, made about 1494 by Husain Waiz al-Kashifi. English 
 translations of this have been published by Eastwick and by Wollaston, see below. 
 4. The Directorium humanae vitae, made from the Hebrew about 1270 by John 
 of Capua, and printed about 1480. 
 
 33. F. From John of Capua's version flowed the famous ' Book of examples 
 of the ancient sages,' Das buck der byspel der alien wysen. It was made at the 
 instance of Duke Eberhard im Bart, whose name and motto, EBERHART GRAF z[u] 
 WIRTENBERG ATTEMPTO, appear as an acrostic in the initials of the first sections. 
 It was first printed about 1481, and has since been admirably edited by W. L. 
 Holland, Stuttgart, 1860. Holland used, besides three manuscripts, two printed 
 editions sine loco et anno, and enumerates 17 dated editions that appeared between 
 1483 and 1592. Four dated editions appeared at Ulm between 1483 and 1485 ! The 
 great number of editions of the work and their rapid succession are the best proof 
 of its importance as a means of instruction and amusement in the fifteenth and 
 sixteenth centuries. 
 
 Another offshoot from the Directorium is the Italian version of A. F. Doni, 
 entitled La moral filosophia, and printed at Venice 2 in 1552. This is of special 
 interest, because from it came (G) the English translation of Sir Thomas North, 
 London, 1570. 
 
 It may here be added that La Fontaine, in the second edition of his Fables 
 (1678), which contains eleven books, says 8 that he owed the largest part of his new 
 material (books vii-xi) to Pilpay, the Indian sage. The edition of Henri Regnier 
 (Paris, Hachette, 1883-85, 3 vols.) gives abundant references to the sources of each 
 fable, and is especially to be commended to those who would compare the well- 
 known French offshoots with the Indian originals. 
 
 1 See Benfey, in Bickell, p. XLIII f. Avertissement prefixed to book vii, Regnier ii. 
 
 * With wood-cuts. Harvard College has a copy. 
 
 81.
 
 INTRODUCTION TO 
 
 [314] 
 
 34. From Benfey's investigations it appears that the truest extant repre- 
 sentative of the Indian original is the Syriac version, Kalilag and Damnag. Next to 
 the Syriac stands the Buck der Beispiele, which, besides, is in language remarkable 
 for its dignity, strength, and beauty ; upon this latter version, moreover, are based 
 almost all the printed ones previous to 1644. To the German version almost exclu- 
 sively, therefore, is Europe indebted for the wide-spread knowledge of this cycle of 
 literature from the last part of the fifteenth to the middle of the seventeenth century. 
 
 35. After this account of the direct descendants of the Indian original in the 
 Occident, it remains to speak of the history of that original in India, and of its 
 sources. Whether Barzoi translated from one work of thirteen chapters (cf . 28) 
 or from several independent works, the fact remains that the originals of all of his 
 sections may be certainly identified on Indian ground save thi-ee : l five, namely, 
 form the Pancatantra ; two other sections figure as a supplement to the first book 
 of a later recension of the Pancatantra; and yet other sections, three in number, 
 appear in the Maha-bharata. 
 
 The first three books of the Pancatantra (above, 26) were recast by Somadeva 
 about 1070 A.D., in his Katha-sarit-sagara, chapters 60-64. Somadeva's abstract of 
 these three books shows that they had the same form then as at the time of the 
 Pehlevi translation (570). As representatives of the Indian original, the offshoots 
 of the Pehlevi version surpass even the Indian offshoots. These latter, as respects 
 their truthfulness in reflecting the Indian original, are arranged by Benfey as follows : 
 first, the recension of the Indian original used by Somadeva ; second, the one on 
 which the Southern Pancatantra (of Dubois) is based; third, the one from which 
 the Hitopade9a is made ; and last, the one from which proceed the common Sanskrit 
 recensions of the Pancatantra. 
 
 36. At the time when Barzoi made his Pehlevi version, Buddhism was already 
 on the decline in India, and Brahmanism regaining its lost supremacy. It was not 
 to be expected on the one hand that the Brahmans would allow a work of such great 
 artistic merit as the original Mirrour for Magistrates to be lost and forgotten, nor, 
 on the other, that they would preserve it without transforming its whole spirit, which 
 was that of fanatical hatred for Brahmanism. They have, therefore, omitted or 
 transformed such parts as showed most Buddhist animus, leaving, however, many 
 marks uneffaced which betray its Buddhist origin. 
 
 In one other way, too, the original was modified. In most of its sections a 
 doctrine was inculcated by means of a single fable or story, and only a sparing use 
 was made of inserted apologues. But gradually the means became an end ; into the 
 main story were inserted others, and others still into these, until the main story 
 became a mere frame, and the result was comparable to a set of Chinese boxes. 2 
 
 37. Respecting the sources of the Indian original only a general statement 
 can be made. There were current among the Buddhists, fables and parables which 
 they ascribed to Buddha, and whose sanctity they sought to increase by identifying 
 the best character in any story with Buddha himself in a former birth. Hence the 
 tales were called Jatakas or ' Birth-stories.' There is evidence of the existence of a 
 collection with that name as early as the Council of Vesall, about 380 B.C. ; and in 
 
 1 Of the remaining three, one is shown by its 
 spirit of deadly hatred towards the Brabrnans to be 
 the work of Buddhists, and the other two are in 
 Benfey's judgment genuinely Indian. 
 
 2 Pedagogical reasons forbade the retention of 
 this arrangement, except by way of specimen. Thus 
 selection ix is boxed intoviii, and xv and xvi into 
 xiv.
 
 [315] 
 
 ( INTRODUCTION TO 
 
 ( UlTOPADKrA. 
 
 the fifth century after Christ the Jatakas were put into the form in which they now 
 appear iu the Sutta-pitaka. They are distinguished for quaint humor and gentle 
 earnestness, and teach the duty of tender sympathy with animals and even of 
 courtesy to them. With these stories may be identified many if not all of the 
 fables of the Hitopade9a. 
 
 38. The relation of the earliest Greek and Indian fables has been the subject 
 of much discussion. Wagener tried to show that the Greeks derived their apologues 
 from the Hindus ; Weber, that the Hindus got many from the Greeks. Correspon- 
 dences there undoubtedly are ; but the difficulty is that the earliest forms of the 
 fables which would furnish the only safe basis for comparison are irrecoverably 
 lost. Aesop and his fables are mentioned by Plato and others as very well known : 
 but whether he was a Phrygian, a Jew, or an Egyptian is matter of dispute ; and 
 even the Mu0fa/toi Aiffdnrtioi, of Babrius (ca. 100 A.D.), which tradition offers us as the 
 oldest extant collection, are removed some 700 years from the traditional date of 
 Aesop. The collection on which the common modern fable-books are based was 
 made by the Byzantine monk Maximus Planudes, ca. 1325. 
 
 At all events, the oldest extant documentary collections of Greeks or of Bud- 
 dhists are much later than Alexander's invasion; and considering the intercour.se of 
 the Greeks with India after that event, it is quite possible that the influence and 
 borrowing were in both directions. 
 
 39. We have seen how, under the New Persian Dynasty, and afterwards 
 under the Caliphs, with the spread of Islam, the Indian stories were carried over 
 western Asia and all southern and western Europe. But this is not all. The pious 
 pilgrims to India from China took home with them Buddhist apologues, which were 
 translated into Chinese, and wandered then to Korea and Japan. They have since 
 been translated from Chinese into French by Stanislas Julien (Les Avaddnas, Paris, 
 1859). Among the Mongols, too, Benfey has discovered many of these apologues; 
 and through the Mongols during their supremacy these stories came to the Slavic 
 peoples, and even to the Finns and Samoyeds. 
 
 40. BIBLIOGRAPHY. First the titles of some books cited often below. 
 
 [1. Pali.] The Jataka, together with its com- 
 mentary, being tales of the anterior births of Gotama 
 Buddha. For the first time edited in the original 
 Pali, by V. Fausboll. London, Triibner & Co., 1877-. 
 
 Buddhist birth stories; or Jataka tales. Trans- 
 lated by T. \V. Rhys Davids. London, Trubner & 
 Co., 1880. Vol. 1 (the only one) goes to Jataka 40. 
 It contains very useful lists of books illustrating the 
 history and migrations of Buddhist tales. 
 
 [2. Sanskrit.] Pantschatantra : Fiinf Bucher 
 indischer Fabeln, Marchen und Erzahlungen. Aus 
 dem Sanskrit ubersetzt rait Einleitung und Anmer- 
 kungen von Theodor Benfey. Leipzig, Brockhaus, 
 1859. 2 volumes. See p. xviii, no. 8. This work is 
 cited as "Benfey." The fables are cited by the 
 numbers of Benfey and Kosegarten. 
 
 [3. Old Syriac version.] Kalilag und Damnag. 
 Alte syrische Uebersetzung des indischen Fiirsten- 
 spiegels. Text und deutsche Uebersetzung von 
 Gustav Bickell. Mil einer Einleitung von Theodor 
 Benfey. Leipzig, Brockhaus, 1876. 
 
 [4. Arabic.] Kalila and Dimna, or the fables 
 of Bidpai. Translated from the Arabic. By the 
 Rev. Wyndhnm Knatchbull. Oxford, 1819. 
 
 Calila und Dimna, oder die Fabeln Bidpai's. Ver- 
 deutscht von Ph. Wolff. Stuttgart, 1839. 2 vols. 
 
 [5. Later Syriac version.] Kalilah and Dim- 
 nah or the fables of Bidpai : being an account of 
 their literary history, with an English translation of 
 the later Syriac version of the same, and notes. By 
 I. Q. N. Keith-Falconer. Cambridge University 
 Press, 1885. Price 7 shillings 6 pence. 
 
 [6. Persian.] The Anvar-i Suhaili; or, the 
 lights of Canopus; being the Persian version of the 
 fables of Pilpay : literally translated into prose 
 and verse. By Edward B. Eastwick. Hertford, 
 1854. There is another translation by A. N. Wollas- 
 ton, London, 1877. 
 
 [7. Latin.] Directorium humane vite alias 
 parabojle antiquorti sapientu.) By John of Capua. 
 (Sine loco et anno, gothic type, folio, 82 leaves, 
 quaint wood-cuts.) Copy in Harvard College Library. 
 Printed about 1480. Joseph Derenbourg is now pub- 
 lishing a critical edition of this work, with notes, 
 Paris, Vieweg, 1887-. 
 
 [8. German.] Das Buch der Beispiele der 
 alien Weisen. Herausgegeben von Dr. W. L. Hol- 
 land. Stuttgart, 1860.
 
 INTRODUCTION TO) 
 
 IIlTOPADECA. ) 
 
 41. THE LITERARY HISTORY of the Indian apologues has often been treated. 
 So by Silvestre de Sacy, Loiseleur Deslongchamps, H. H. Wilson (Works, London, 
 1864, iv. 1-159), Lancereau (in his Pantchatautra, Paris, 1871), Max Muller (On the 
 migration of fables, Chips, London, 1875, iv. 145-209), Rhys Davids (Introduction 
 to his translation of the Jatakas, London, 1880), J. Schoenberg(in the very readable 
 introduction to his German translation of the Hitopadeca, Vienna, 1884). Keith- 
 Falconer's account is on the whole the best ( 40). 
 
 The French translation of the Hitopade9a by E\ Lancereau (Paris, Maisonneuve, 
 1882) is especially useful on account of the full and convenient references to the 
 books where the analogues of the different fables may be found. This book is 
 intended by the citation " Lancereau." 
 
 42. EDITIONS AND TRANSLATIONS. The most accessible text edition is that 
 of Professor Peter Peterson (Bombay, Government Central Book Depot, 1887. Price 
 1 rupee 10 annas). It contains an introduction most helpful for reading the text 
 in course. It forms no. xxxiii of the Bombay Sanskrit Series. The text edition 
 used most often as a standard of reference is that of Schlegel and Lassen (Bonn, 
 1829). 
 
 A literal English version has been given by Fr. Pincott (London, W. H. Allen, 
 1880). A cheap reprint of Wilkins's translation appeared in Henry Morley's Uni- 
 versal Library (London and Xew York, Routledge, 1885). 
 
 43. METRES. Aside from the common cloka see p. 300, 21 there occur 
 in this book several other metres requiring description. The following five are 
 monoschematic i.e. the stanza consists of one metrical scheme four times repeated. 
 The first two are simple and natural iambic-choriambic rhythms and are common in 
 the Veda. The name vasanta-tilaka means 'Grace of the spring-time'; malini, 
 ' Garlanded ' ; rathoddhata seems to mean ' Car-proud.' 
 
 a. ^^.\j^-\\j\j\\jl.\j jagati, 22 1 *. 
 
 b. L/.V\VVJ!.\^JLV tristubh, 26*. 
 
 c. _Zw-^|^vyw|-il^v^-^|v/^_ vasanta-tilaka, 18 1 *, 26 s . 
 
 d. v4v^vy|<$^^|-_H-vyj| v I malini, 22 23 . 
 
 e. ^wZ|v^ww^|wZw^ rathoddhata, 56 11 . 
 
 The tristubh is simply a catalectic form of the jagati; but the catalexis gives the new 
 cadence a trochaic effect instead of iambic. The rhythm of the vasanta-tilaka is 
 closely analogous to that of the tristubh. The rathoddhata is essentially similar 
 to a jagati without its anacrusis. 
 
 44. THE arya METRE is based on the number of morae not on Thus: 
 the number of syllables. See Whitney, 76-79. A light syllable counts - 
 as one mora; a heavy syllable, as two. In general, the ary-foot con- _ ^ w 
 sists of four morae. These appear either as two heavy syllables, or with w ^ 
 one heavy one at the beginning or at the middle or at the end, or as wv/ 
 four light syllables. In each half-stanza, a caesura occurs at the end of ^ 
 
 the third foot, and the eighth or last foot of each half-stanza is catalectic. 
 The sixth foot of the first half-stanza must be an amphibrach, \j \, t and that
 
 [317] 
 
 ( NOTES TO 
 I PAGE 17. 
 
 of the second must be a single light syllable. No odd foot may be an amphibrach. 
 The metre occurs at 26 3 and 56 6 to 56 10 . The scheme is : 
 
 Applying this scheme, for example, to 56 s - 6 , we have, with the proper resolutions 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 16. 
 
 LINE 16. SELECTION II. Preface and intro- 
 duction to the Hitopade9a. U.f. samskrta^ 
 ukti, ' cultivated expression.' 
 
 17. See Vlda. ca belongs to nitiv-. 
 
 19. grh-, 956*. iva, 'as if.' Join 
 mrt- w. grh-. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 17. 
 
 1. 'Just wisdom (is) the best thing, they 
 say' (Vah). 
 
 2. ' By reason of ' the qualities denoted 
 by the three ablatives, 291 2 . 
 
 3. ' The knowledge (of) weapons and the 
 knowledge (of) books (are) two kinds-of- 
 knowledge (for acquisition) that one may 
 acquire.' 
 
 4. ' The first (is) for laughter is ridicu- 
 lous.' This dative is explained at 287 mid. : 
 similar uses 17 15 , 20 U . Vdr+a. 
 
 5-6. U.f. yad nave na anyatha 
 tad iha. ' Since ornamentation put upon 
 an unburned dish does not change, therefore 
 to children (297a) niti is communicated 
 etc.,' i.e. as one decorates a dish before burn- 
 ing it, in order to have the result permanent, 
 so worldly wisdom should be taught to chil- 
 dren while they are still young. Cf . Horace, 
 Epist. i.2.67-70. -See iha. 
 
 8. U.f. tatha anyasmat granthat. 7-8. 
 ' Friend-acquisition is delineated (by the 
 author) drawing (his materials) from .' 
 See page 311, 26. 
 
 9. The Ramayana (i.36-44 = 37-45) and 
 MBh. (iii. chap's 106-109) tell why and how 
 Bh. brought the Ganges down from heaven. 
 See also M. Williams, Indian Wisdom, p. 363. 
 
 'Town having P. as name,' 1302. In 
 
 Buddhist books it is called Patali-gama, 
 'Trumpet-flower Village.' Wilson thinks 
 Patali-putra is a mere corruption of Patali- 
 pura, ' Trumpet-flower City.' This certainly 
 accords well with the K'usumo-pulo (Skt. 
 Kusuma-pura, ' Flower-City ') of the Chinese 
 Buddhist pilgrims see Beal, Si-yu-ki, ii.83- 
 85. The Katha-sarit-sagara (chap, iii.) gives 
 a legend telling how the town was founded 
 by a king Putraka and his wife Patali. 
 This is perhaps an invention suggested by 
 the corrupted form. 
 
 The site of P. is discussed at length in 
 Cunningham's Archaeological Survey of India 
 Reports, viii.1-34 and Note prefixed to the 
 vol. See also Journ. As. Soc. of Bengal, 
 xiv.HSTf, with map. 
 
 10. Divide thus, sarva-svamiguna ; not 
 sarvasvami-guna : upeta, Vi+upa. King S. 
 need not be regarded as a historical person. 
 
 11. gugrava, Vgru, 793a, 800b. 
 
 12-13. Construe yasya na asti (see 
 v'las2) gastram, andha eva (see this) sas 
 (asti) : -ucchedi and dargakam are attri- 
 butive adjectives to gas-, and loc- is in 
 apposition w. gas-. 
 
 15. 'One by itself, even (api), is harmful 
 (17 4 N.) ; but how much more (kim4) all four 
 together ! ' 
 
 16-17. See iti2 and akarnaya. 'The 
 king, distressed (udvignamanas, 418) by the 
 shaster-neglect (-ananusthanena) of his (at- 
 manas) sons, who did not study books (see 
 1308 2 ) 
 
 18. See Ikal. 'What profit (is there) 
 with a son born, i.e. in the birth of a son, 
 who '. 
 
 Observe the use of the ppl. where we 
 use a verbal ncun : this is common in San-
 
 TO j 
 
 PAGE 17. i 
 
 [318] 
 
 skrit, e.g. 17 22 , 25 12 , 3S 23 , and also in Latin, 
 e.g. post conditam urbem. 
 19 b is the answer to 19 a . 
 
 20. ' Of (the three,) an unborn (i.e. no 
 son at all), a dead one, and (1253a) a fool, 
 ' : see 2vara. See ca5. 
 
 21. U.f. duhkhakarau (supply stas) 
 adyau. 
 
 22. See ca3. jato, lit. '(is) born'; 
 pregnantly, 'is born in reality or to some 
 noble purpose.' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 18. 
 
 1. Respecting the metempsychosis, see 
 65 9 to 68 8 and notes, va marks the rhe- 
 torical question as a rejoinder to an objec- 
 tor's statement. jayate, lit. 'is born,' 
 sjan, refers to the mere physical fact of 
 issuing from the womb. 
 
 Render the proverb: 'He (alone) is 
 born in reality, by whose birth (see 17 18 N.) 
 his family attains to distinction : or (if you 
 object to that), who, in the circling round of 
 existence, when dead, does not come out of 
 some womb again 1 ?' True, every one does 
 so issue ; but the fact by itself has no noble 
 significance. 
 
 The entire point lies in the antithesis 
 between the mg of jayate and the pregnant 
 sense of jato. Such pregnant uses of a word 
 are common in gnomic poetry : so 21 23 , 22 5 . 
 
 2. ' The best thing is one good son ; but 
 (ca5) not with even hundreds of fools (is 
 there any profit).' The ellipsis though 
 harsh and condemnable is made clear by 
 such phrases as that at 17 18 and the others 
 under Ika 1. 
 
 3 b . Supply tamo hanyate. 
 
 4 a . See ta3. For gen., 296b. -'Though 
 born (of whomsoever = ) of humble parent- 
 age.' 
 
 5. See Vlkr6. Note the puns in vanga- 
 viguddhas and nirgunas, which words thus 
 stand in covert and playful contrast w. yasya 
 tasya prasutas and gunavan. 
 
 6. U.f. na adlnta (see vi+adhi) etasu. 
 
 7. See vidvans. See go. Vsad2. 
 Send. Passives, 770c, 769. U.f. yad 
 
 ca ucyate, explained under ya2. 
 9. ' What is not to be, that will not be : 
 
 if it is to be, then it will not be otherwise' : 
 the do-nothing argument or ignava ratio. 
 See ced: na, if it belonged to the protasis, 
 would precede ced. 
 
 10. ' This remedy, embraced-in-the- 
 words (=iti) " What otherwise," why 
 is it not drunk ? ' Vlpa, 770b. 
 
 Lines 9-10 are in apposition w. yad (end 
 of 8), and contain the "sloth-talk" con- 
 demned in line 11. 
 
 12. ' One should not give up his exertion 
 (udyogam), thinking, "Fate (will do or pre- 
 vent all)."' 
 
 14. Metre, vaaanta-tilaka, p. 316, 43. 
 U.f. upa^,eti laksmis. 
 
 16. Vhan+ni, 992 2 . -kuru, 714. -atma- 
 has the force of a possessive of the second 
 person here: cf. atman-'J. 
 
 17 The loc. absolute expresses one con- 
 dition, and yadi na sidhyati a second. 
 
 20-21. The collective result of a man's 
 words and thoughts and deeds is his kar- 
 man ; this alone exists after death and is a 
 powerful determinant of his course in the 
 next birth. kuryat, cf. 25 21 N. 
 
 23. suptasya, 954b. 
 
 NOTES TO PARE 19. 
 
 1. See tavant2. 
 
 2. See tavant2. U.f . kim cid na. 
 
 3. kar-, made (959) from the past pass 
 ppl -f the cans, of Vlkr, 1051 3 . 
 
 4. See Vgru3 and 770a. asti kag cid 
 'is there anyone ? ' see yal. 
 
 5. putranam limits punarjanma. Cf 
 17 16 . 
 
 7. dhatte, Vldha9, 668. 
 
 9. Myate, cf. piyate, 18 10 and N. 
 
 11. See atral. Long cpd is analyzed 
 at 1248 2 . 
 
 Visnugarman, if not the name of a real 
 person, is chosen as a reminder of the synon- 
 ymous Visnugupta, an epithet of Canakya, 
 the wise and famous minister of Candra 
 gupta = 'SavdpoKVTTTos or 2a vdpditoTTos. See 
 Benfey, Pantch. i.31, and Bohtlingk, Indischc 
 Spriiche, 2d ed., no. 7061. Cf . above, p. 311, 
 24. 
 
 13. U.f. tad, 161. -Explained vfgakAl 
 
 14. U.f. na adravye. nihita, 954c.
 
 [319] 
 
 I NOTES TO 
 PAGE 31. 
 
 15. Pass, of caws, of Vpath, 1052a. 
 
 16. U.f. asmin (208) tu na apatyam. 
 20. U.f. -sangat, 'by sticking to ,' 
 
 291*. 
 
 22. ' You (are) an authority for .' 
 
 23. For gen., 297a. sam-arpitavan, 
 like karitavan, 19%. : Vr+sam, 1042d. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 2O. 
 
 2. ' By way of introduction.' 
 
 3. See \fgam2. 
 
 5. 'Tale of the crow, tortoise, and so 
 fortli ' (-adi2), not given in this Reader. 
 
 7. Vstu+pra (770a) cf . prastava. 
 
 8. SELECTION III. The old tiger and the 
 traveller. Hitopadepa, book i., fable 2. 
 The motif of this tale is feline hypocrisy 
 (whether of tiger or of cat), and appears 
 again in selection v., as also in Pancatantra, 
 iii.2, Kalilag und Damnag, p. 65f, MBh.v. 
 160.15-43 = 5421-49, Jataka, i. p. 460, no. 128. 
 Cf. 21 23 N. 
 
 aham, namely, the Pigeon-king, who 
 tells this story to dissuade his followers 
 from taking the rice with which a snare was 
 baited. carann, 210. See ekaS. The 
 ablution and sacred grass were intended as 
 outward symbols of inward piety. A pre- 
 tender to virtue is called ' one who acts like 
 a cat,' see Manu iv.195. 
 
 11. Observe the impersonal construction 
 (999), which will now be extremely fre- 
 quent. Logical subject in instr., 282. See 
 Vkrs fa and Vloc+a. 
 
 12. See kim4. asminn, 210. 
 
 13 a . 'In getting even a desirable (object) 
 from an undesirable (source) ' e.g. brace- 
 let from tiger. 
 
 14. Observe caesura and exact order of 
 original. mrtyave, ' (is) deadly/ 17*N. 
 
 16-17. Nothing venture, nothing have. 
 Join na w. pagyati (16). Both gerund- 
 clauses are conditional. 
 
 18. U.f. tad. -See tavantSa. 
 
 19. pra-sarya, 1051 and 5 . 
 
 20. U.f. prak eva, 'formerly,' w. em- 
 phasis : eva, as much as to say, ' not now, 
 of course' preliminary hint at a general 
 reformation of character. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 21. 
 
 1. Note how Brahmans are distinguished 
 from men : so 95 1 . U.f. -vadhat me, 'from 
 my killing , because I killed.' 
 
 2. Another me need not be expressed with 
 putras and daras : whose they are is clear 
 from nirvango 'smi. 
 
 3. upadistas: the upadega consisted of 
 the three words marked by iti. 
 
 4. U.f. -upadegat, ' in accordance with 
 (his) advice,' 291. 
 
 5. katham na, sc. asmi. 
 
 6. Cpd, 1253a : 2d member, adhyayana. 
 
 7. See iti 3. "The noble eight-fold 
 (astavidha) path " is a favorite Buddhist 
 topic. Buddha defines it in the famous 
 " Sermon at Benares." See smrta3. 
 
 8. See tatra 1 : ' among those (eight 
 things).' 
 
 9. U.f. na a-mahatmasu, emphatic litotes. 
 
 10. U.f. ca etavan, 206. See gata4. 
 11-12. Seeya5. -Seetatha4. -'The 
 
 common saying, " vyaghro khadati " 
 is .' 
 
 13-14. Third word is kuttamm. See 
 pramanaya. Cow-slaying is a heinous 
 offence (64 8 ), coordinated with man-slaying, 
 21 1 . A dvija's 'second or spiritual (61 15 ) 
 birth ' is when he is invested with the sacred 
 girdle, Manu ii.169. 
 
 'The world keeps on in the old ruts, 
 and does not, in a question of right, take as 
 authority a bawd who gives good advice as 
 (quickly as it does) a Brahman, even if he 
 be a cow-killer.' People heed the social 
 position of the adviser rather than the real 
 character of the adviser or the intrinsic 
 value of the advice. 
 
 15. adhltani, Vi+adhi: cf . 20 n N. 
 
 16 b . ' So (is) food (in = ) to a hungry man.' 
 
 17. ' To a poor man (304a) is given a 
 fruitful gift,' i.e. fruitful is the gift given to a 
 poor man cf. 22* and St. Luke vi.33-36. 
 Observe that the logically important idea 
 is often put in a grammatically subordinate 
 word. 
 
 18. See atman3 and Vlis+abhi. Cf. 
 Dhammapada, stanza 129, and SEE. x.36. 
 
 20. Note the use or the omission of ca
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 21. 
 
 [320] 
 
 according to the convenience of the metre : 
 so 221 8 , 26 1 - 2 , 32 4 ' 5 . 
 
 Lines 18-21 are positive forms of the 
 Golden Rule : cf . St. Luke vi.31 ; interesting 
 negative forms appear at MBh.v.39.72-73 
 1517-18, at the beginning of the Aidaxb T&V 
 dtadexa a.voffr6\u>v, in the Confucian Analects 
 xv. 23, Legge's edition, and in the Babylonian 
 Talmud (Story of Hillel). 
 
 22. matrvat = mataram iva : similarly 
 the rest. The accusatives are objects of 
 the first pagyati (Vlpag6). 
 
 23. Second pagyati, pregnantly, cf. 18%. 
 This proverb, along with the one quoted 
 
 I by the cat at 29 s , is quoted in substance by 
 the hypocritical cat in the tale of the ' Cat 
 as Judge,' Kalilag, p. 66. Cf . 208s. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 22. 
 2t>. U.f. pra-yaccha (747) igvare, 304a. 
 
 3. See Ika 1. The idea is identical with 
 that in St. Luke v.31. 
 
 4. datavyam (999) iti, ' with the thought 
 "It ought to be given (impers.), i.e. giving 
 is a duty." ' 
 
 5 a . Words used pregnantly, cf. 18 1 N. 
 
 6. v'grah+prati, 722 end. 
 
 7. U.f. yavat asau (= panthas) tavat 
 ni-magnas (v'majj). 
 
 9. See atasl. v'stha+ud, 233a, caus. 
 1042d. 
 
 11. Metre, jagati, p. 316, 43. -'The 
 fact that " He reads the law-books " is not 
 a ground for a judgment ' that the reader 
 be he man or tiger has a good and harm- 
 less nature. 
 
 13. 'Just the inherent nature here (atra) 
 is the surpassingly predominant thing (Vric 
 +ati) so . 
 
 14. 'as by nature cows' (361c) milk is 
 sweet.' Religious study will not change 
 the bad inborn nature of a man or a tiger 
 any more than sugar would turn sour milk 
 back into sweet milk again. Compare lines 
 20-21. 
 
 15. ' Of those having uncontrolled senses 
 and mind, the (religious) action is like the 
 bathing of elephants,' i.e. is mere external 
 action and without significance as an index 
 of character. One might infer from their 
 
 frequent ablutions that the elephants were 
 very religiously minded. Cf . 36 6 N. 
 
 16. 'Knowledge, without action (to cor- 
 respond), is a burden, like .' 
 
 17. Explained under yad2. 
 
 18. Use of ca, 21 20 N. Instead of -pani- 
 nam, we have, for sake of metre, -panlnam, 
 as if from -panin. 
 
 19. See eva. Note that the gen. and 
 loc. here express the same relation. So the 
 dat. and loc. above, lines 4-5. 
 
 20. Viks+pari, ' are considered ' (namely, 
 by wise people) = ' should be considered': 
 so Malavika i.17, karana-kopas, ' are (only) 
 cause-angry ' ' should not be angry with- 
 out a cause.' Cf . 41 13 >\ 
 
 21. vi+ati, 992. See guna2, and note 
 the difference between that and svabhava. 
 
 22. Metre, malini, p. 316, 43. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 23. 
 
 1. 'Even yonder (asau) moon (sky- 
 wandering, etc., p. 22) is eclipsed (grasyate) 
 .' The demon Rahu got a part of the 
 drink of immortality cf . 32 12 N. The Sun 
 and Moon betrayed him to Visnu, who cut off 
 his head. The head, grown immortal, avenges 
 itself on Sun and Moon by swallowing them 
 at times. Cf. introd. to selection xl. 
 
 2. ' Who is able to wipe out (Vunch) ? ' 
 The Hindus thought that every one's destiny 
 was written on his brow, although invisible 
 to human eye. Like enough the sutures 
 of the skull, which look very similar to the 
 written characters of some Indian alphabets, 
 gave rise to this belief. Now-a-days, writing 
 materials are placed beside the new-born 
 babe in the lying-in room, in order that 
 Vidhatr may write the child's destiny on its 
 forehead. See Shib Chunder Bose, The 
 Hindoos as they are, 2d ed., p. 25. 
 
 4. SELECTION IV. The deer and the crow, 
 and the jackal. Hitopadera, book i., fable 
 3. In the Indian fables, the jackal plays 
 the role which the fox plays in the Euro- 
 pean ; see Pane, book iii., stanza 73 ed. Kose- 
 garten, = 76 ed. Bombay. 
 
 5. bhramyan, 763.
 
 [321] 
 
 j NOTES TO 
 j PAGE 25. 
 
 7. U.f. etad. bhavatu, see this under 
 Vbhii. 
 
 8. 'I'll first get his confidence.' -U.f. 
 upa-srtya, 992. 
 
 11. a-sadya, grd of cans. 
 
 12. adhuna etc., explained at 999. 
 
 13. astam gate etc., loc. absolute. 
 17-18. 'This (ayam) is the jackal, (who 
 
 is) come seeking (icchann) .' 
 
 19. See VyujS. 
 
 20. ' (Is) not to be given to any one (gen. 
 297a) whose .' 
 
 21. The story which is announced in this 
 line, and which the crow tells to serve as the 
 " example " to the saw of line 20, is inserted 
 in the original between this line and ity 
 akarnya (24 1 ), but is here taken out for the 
 sake of continuity and given separately as 
 selection v. cf. p. 29 end. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 24. 
 
 1. iti refers to the story in selection v. 
 Vah. mrgasya, subjective gen. w. 
 -dargana-. U.f. bhavan api, 'you (= the 
 crow) too ' no less than I (the jackal) now. 
 
 2-3. U.f. adya yavat (see yavant 3) 
 etasya ( = mrgasya) sneha^anuvrttis. 
 
 5. Ppl. of v'2as+nis forms possessive cpd 
 w. padape, see 1299. -U.f. dege, 133. 
 
 6. ' " ayam va " is the ganana of / 
 i.e. only the small-minded take into account 
 or stop to ask whether or not a man belongs 
 to their own party or race. 
 
 7. See eva. The proverb expresses a 
 truth that underlies the doctrine of free- 
 trade. 
 
 9. U.f. kim (see Ikal) anena (501) ut-. 
 Join anu-bhavadbhis (741) w. sarvais. 
 
 10. sthiyatam, see VsthaS ; imv. pass., 
 770b, used impers., 999. ' Let all remain in 
 one place, enjoying pleasure by means of 
 familiar conversations.' 
 
 11. 'No one is any one's friend, no one 
 any one's foe ' i.e. by nature ; we must 
 have actual dealings (vyavahara) with each 
 other to bring out the friendship or enmity. 
 
 14. U.f. etasmin eva vana^ekadege = 
 (see 1316) etasya eva vanasya ekadege, cf. 
 33%. 
 
 16. tatha sati, read 303b 4 and cf . Vlas3. 
 
 18. U.f. baddhas, 160. mam, object 
 of tratum. Join itas (= asmat) with 
 vyadha-pagat. 
 
 19. (ko) rait r ad any as, 'who other than 
 my friend who but him." 
 
 20. U.f. a-gatya upa-sthitas. See 
 denom. \phala 
 
 21-22. U.f. etasya ( = mrgasya) utkrt- 
 yamanasya (Vkrt) mansa_asrg-anuliptani 
 asthini (431) maya . 
 
 23. v'las+ud, cf. 162. - chinddhi, Vchid, 
 689. -Seetavant3b. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 25. 
 
 2. U.f. janiyat (730, 721 ' one may 
 recognize'), yuddhe guram, rne gucim. 
 
 3. bharyam, ' a true wife,' one who has 
 really taken her husband "for richer for 
 poorer." V2ksi. 
 
 4-5. A friend in need (as well as in joy) 
 is a friend indeed. 
 
 6-7. 'Firm-bond-bound indeed (see ta- 
 vant5) is this deer.' The jackal 'thought' 
 this he did not say it aloud. 
 
 7. -nirmitas, Vlma+nis. Properly, the 
 Hindus designated the days as first, second, 
 third, etc. of the lunar half-month see 
 tithi. For the (comparatively modern) 
 names of the days as governed successively 
 (like those of our week) by the seven planets, 
 see JAOS. vi.176-7. 
 
 8. etan = pagan : cf . the ecclesiastical 
 prohibition of meat on Fridays. End, see 
 Vmanl . 
 
 9. U.f. yad tvaya ucyate, tad , ' what 
 you say, that I'll do.' 
 
 10. See sthita 4. 
 
 11. U.f. mrgam anagatam (cf. 4 15 N.) 
 ava-lokya, itas tatas anv-isya, tathavidh- 
 am drstva, uvaca. Note how the gerunds 
 mark each the end of its clause ; so 26 16 . 
 
 12. avadhirita-, under the denom. Vava- 
 dhiraya. ' This is the result of rejected 
 friend-words = (17 18 N.) of rejecting them.' 
 
 15. ' His trouble is near ' (Vldha+sam-ni). 
 
 18-19. 'The fact that "I've done no 
 wrong " that is not a ground of confidence 
 (cf. 22 11 ); for there is (V2vid3), from the 
 malicious, danger even for the good : ' al- 
 though having done to the bad no wrong
 
 NOTES TO , 
 PAGE 25. ' 
 
 [322] 
 
 calling for revenge they might fairly ex- 
 pect to be let alone. 
 
 21. Vvrj, 'one should shun' subject in- 
 definite : this is very common, when the 3d 
 pers. optative is used ; e.g. 18 21 , 26 5 , 30 17 . 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 26. 
 
 1-2. Metre, tristubh, p. 316, 43. -Note 
 use of ca cf. 21 20 N. Vlap+aam, pass, 
 ppl. of cans. See grad and 668. The 
 four genitives refer to arthinam. See 
 kim3. Line 2 b , ' Is there a to-be-practised- 
 deceit of the needy, i.e. ought they to be 
 deceived 1 ' 
 
 3-4. Metre, arya, p. 316, 44. -' Who 
 perpetrates wrong upon (loc.) .' U.f. 
 a-satyasamdham. bhag-, voc. e.fem. 
 
 5. See 2sama 2. kar-, see Vlkr, caws, 
 end, and 25 21 N. 
 
 6. U.f. ca angaras : see calb end. 
 
 7. atha va = ' or rather, to express myself 
 more to the point, this (iyam) is the way 
 (sthitis) of scoundrels.' 
 
 8. Metre, vasanta-tilaka, p. 316, 43. 
 
 9. ' In your ear pleasantly something 
 beautiful he gently hums (Vru).' 
 
 10. Gerund of v/riipaya+ni. 
 
 12. Anacoluthon: 'a scoundrel, though 
 (see ca 6) saying pleasant things, that is 
 not a ground of confidence (= 25 18b ) : ' i.e. 
 'a scoundrel may say ; but that's no 
 reason for trusting him.' 
 
 14. U.f. laguda-hastas (1303 2 ) tarn 
 agacchan ava-. 
 
 16. See Vdr+3am and Vlpr. Note how 
 the three gerunds mark each the end of its 
 clause : cf . 25 U N. See Vstha4. 
 
 17. utthaya, 233a ; gerund. 
 
 17-18. 'The deer waited just so as the 
 crow said.' 
 
 18. U.f. harsa^,utphulla-locanena, ' hav- 
 ing joy -expanded eyes, his eyes wide open 
 with joy.' 
 
 19. asau = the farmer. 
 
 19-2O. Note the position of the gerunds 
 as a help to the correct phrasing. 
 
 20. U.f. bandhanat, 290 ; not ace. 
 
 21. 'The farmer having withdrawn,' Vi+ 
 antar. 
 
 22-23. See die, -Hud, 'The jackal was 
 killed by the farmer, throwing the cudgel 
 at him in anger.' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 27. 
 1-2. ' One reaps the fruit right here on 
 earth, (with = ) after three , (or) three 
 days,' i.e. sooner or later. 
 
 3. In the original, the fables always begin 
 with the moral, which is then repeated at the 
 end, in abbreviated form, with the introduc- 
 tory words, ' Therefore I say.' This arrange- 
 ment is retained, e.g., 32 10 -33 7 . 
 
 4. See 1181a end. 
 
 5. 'Trap-caught (from the jackal, 291 = ) 
 by his plots.' 
 
 6. SELECTION V. The blind vulture, the 
 birdlings, and the cat. Hitopade9a, book i., 
 fable 4. Cf . 20 8 N., 21 23 N. 
 
 The Vulture-peak, Pali Gijjhakuta, is 
 near Rajagrha, and famous as a sojourn of 
 Buddha. 
 
 7. 'From the evil issue of fate = as hard 
 fate would have it.' 
 
 8. Instr., 280 end. 
 
 9. U.f. sva^aharat. See Ika 2d and 
 1260. -Vlda, 668. 
 
 10. Use of inf., 981 3 . 
 
 11. U.f. tarn a-yantam, 619. 
 
 12. See lidam near end: ' rts 8' ovros 
 
 14. U.f . api : the idea is, ' To say nothing 
 of my disappointment at not getting the 
 young birds to eat, I'm so very near the 
 vulture that even escape is impossible.' 
 
 15. Same phrase at 23 8 . 
 
 17. U.f. duram apasara (classical pres. 
 imv. Vsr+apa) : no ced, ban- (163). 
 
 20. ' Is any one ever punished (or) hon- 
 ored on account of mere rank ? ' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 28. 
 
 2. The lunar penance is described 65 5 ~ 8 . 
 
 3. U.f. acaran tisthami, see v'stha4. 
 U.f. yusman ( = vulture, respectful plu- 
 ral) object of stuvanti. dharma-jnana- 
 ratan, see v/ram3. 
 
 5-6. 'And you (it seems, are) such (eta- 
 drgas, q.v.) a jurisconsult that you (have)
 
 [323] 
 
 I NOTES TO 
 i PAOB 3O. 
 
 undertaken (Vyam + ud) to slay me a 
 guest ! ? ' 
 
 6. U.f. esas (see etad) refers forward 
 here ! On the duty of hospitality, see Manu 
 iii. 99f. Vir+sam-ud. 
 
 7. 'To an enemy (arau, 304) even, 
 should be shown.' So Plautus says, Trin. 
 679 and Rud. 438, that one does not withhold 
 fire and water even from a foe. 
 
 8. U.f. chettum api ag- na up-, 'even 
 (in the case of one = ) from one come to hew 
 (it) down .' 
 
 lO b . ' And joyous or kind (sunrta, as adj., 
 omitted in vocab.) words as a fourth thing.' 
 11. U.f. na uc-, Vchid+ud, 202. 
 13 b . See v'gam+abhy-a, and guru3. 
 
 14. Render loc. by ' towards.' Cf. 21 19 . 
 
 15. cand-, loc. as in 28 8 . 
 
 16-17. yasya limits grhat and refers to 
 tasmai (and to a tasmat, understood w. 
 ardaya). sa = atithis. dat-tva, 991 cf. 
 955c. See Vgaml. 
 
 21. First evam, ' so,' namely as at 27 17 . 
 
 21-22. Touching the feet (Nalaxxiv.) or 
 the head (Manu viii.114) was a kind of ordeal 
 used in solemn asseverations in order to call 
 down harm on the one touched in case of 
 falsehood ; at Hitopade9a, p. 122 5 = book iv., 
 fable 11 (cf. Pane, book i., fable 11), touch- 
 ing the ground and ears seems to be a sign 
 of detestation for a suggestion just made. 
 Here the touching seems to partake of both 
 significations. 
 
 23. U.f. -ragena idam adhy-ava- 
 sayitam, Vsa. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 29. 
 1-2. U.f. iti atra aika-: see atral. 'The 
 law-books, though contradicting (Vvadivi) 
 , have unanimity on this point, " ahinsa 
 paramo dharmas : " ' ahinsa is a cardinal 
 virtue among Buddhists. 
 
 3. See nivrtta. See ya3. 
 
 4. svarga- : for lingual n, see 193. 
 
 5. 'There is just one friend, virtue, 
 who ; : ' cf . 63 18 N. and 18 ; also 21 28 N. 
 
 6. U.f. sarvam anyad hi (163) 'for all 
 else' (but virtue). 
 
 7-8. See ya6, 2antara3, and Vmuc+vi. 
 9-1O. See iti2a and c,akya3. -Lit. 'What 
 
 sorrow (of a=) in a man arises at , by 
 this f orming-of-a-conception : ' we should 
 expect tad-anumanena as cpd, ' by forming 
 a conception of this (sorrow).' If we will 
 think how we should feel if we were in our 
 enemy's place and about to die, it is possible 
 that we may spare even his life. 
 
 11-12. Vlpr+pra, 770c. -kah kuryat 
 (714), rhetorical question, cf. IS 1 ?*. 
 
 13. vi-gvasya, grd of caus., 1051 and 8 . 
 
 15. U.f. yesam , tais vi-lapadbhis. 
 
 16. Vrabh, 160. -U.f. kotarat. 
 
 18. -asthini, 431. U.f. " anena ( = 
 grdhrena) eva khaditas " iti nic,citya, 
 V3ci+nis. 
 
 21-22. The story winds up with the dis- 
 tich given p. 23 end, cf. N. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 3O. 
 1. SELECTION VI. The ass, the dog, and 
 the thief. Hitopade9a, book ii., fable 3. 
 Weber thinks that the attribution of stupid- 
 ity to the ass in the Sanskrit fables is wholly 
 un-Indian and due to foreign (western) in- 
 fluences. 
 
 4. tj v.-m. -i in, 427. aha, 801a. See 
 tavant5. See iti2b. 
 
 5. See V3gr and 1020, and cf . 30 16 . 
 
 6. mama, Bohtlingk's suggestion; MSS. 
 read mama. janasi, 730. 
 
 7. See yatha7. etasya ( = rajakasya) 
 limits grha-, 1316. See yatas2 : correl. 
 tena. See Vlvr+nis. 
 
 8. Second mama (gen., 297a) depends on 
 -dane, 1316. 
 
 12. U.f. sam-bhavayet (caus. ) yas tu kar-, 
 'who honors them (only) in the time for 
 action, i.e. waits till he is in a strait before 
 he treats them well.' 
 
 13. SeeVri+a. Caesura here divides a 
 cpd ; this is very unusual. 
 
 15. U.f. paplyan (208,464) tvam (sc. asi). 
 
 16. Explained under yatha6. 
 
 17-18. U.f. sevayet, subject indef., cf. 
 25 21 N. -U.f. a-mayaya. -19. Readso'tiva. 
 
 2O. U.f. -kopat, abl. 291. 'Because of 
 anger at , he got up (992) and beat (Vtad, 
 1070) .' 
 
 22 and 31 1 . U.f. para^adhikara- 
 -icchaya. See Vsad+vi.
 
 NOTES TO i 
 PAGE 31. 1 
 
 [324] 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 31. 
 
 2. SELECTION VII. The lion, the mouse, 
 and the cat. Hitopac^a, book ii., fable 4. 
 
 3. See Vlgi+adM, 629, and 619. 
 
 4. buddhva, 991, 160. -4-5. 'Not 
 catching the hole-hidden mouse .' 
 
 6. U.f. bhavet yas tu, vikramat na , 
 lit. ' Who is a % he is not subdued by might/ 
 with a play on the name of the lion. 
 
 8-9. Note position of gerunds, each mark- 
 ing the end of its clause. ' A cat was kept 
 (dhrtas) by him (tena), reflecting, going, 
 
 satisfying, bringing.' mansa^adi- 
 ahara, 'flesh-etc.-food.' 
 
 9 end. U.f. tad-bhayat, ' from fear of it 
 (i.e. the cat).' 
 
 1O. \sr-r nis, Epic present, 734. U.f.asau. 
 
 13. U.f. samcaran, 208. 
 
 14. See kada end. 
 
 15. See 17"N. -U.f. tada (correl. of 
 yada) upayoga^abhavat tasya : the gen. 
 depends (297a) on -dane (1316); cf. 30 8 N. 
 
 18. 'A servant, making (=if he made) 
 
 , would be or fare (syat, 636) like D.' 
 
 19. SELECTION VIII. The crows and 
 the serpent. Hitopadefa, book ii., fable 10. 
 It is told by Damanaka to Karataka (see 
 p. 312, 29), and into it is inserted the story 
 of the lion, the old hare, and the well (selec- 
 tion Lx., see 32 12 N.), told by the crow to the 
 crow-hen. 
 
 Selection viii. answers to Pancatantra, 
 book i., fable 6, which is told in like manner 
 by Damanaka. He makes the crow and 
 crow-hen ask a jackal for advice, and the 
 latter tells them the inserted story of the 
 heron, the fishes, and the crab (= selection 
 xviii.). Damanaka then finishes his story 
 about the crows (= selection viii.), and fur- 
 ther enforces its moral by the story of the 
 lion (selection ix.). The motif of selection 
 viii. is analogous to that of selection xvi., 
 cf . 39 8 N. A few references for further 
 comparison : 
 
 Old Syriac version. Kalilag, p. 12, 13. 
 
 Arabic. Knatchbull, p. 113, 115. Wolff, 1.40, 44. 
 
 Later Syriac version, p. 23-26. 
 
 Anvar-i BuhailT, book i., story 11. 
 
 Directorium, Cap. II., p. 7 and p. 9 of signature c. 
 
 Buch der Beispiele, p. 353, sgie. 
 Benfey, i.167 f ; ii.57. Lancereau, p. 332. 
 
 U.f. kasmin cid tarau apatyani. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 32. 
 
 1. ' By a tree-hollow-abiding-black-serpent' 
 see v'stha+ava. 
 
 2. tyajyatam, 771.4. 
 
 3. U.f. tavat avayos (491) : see kada. 
 4-5. U.f. bhrtyas ca ut-. ca, cf . 21 20 N. 
 
 mrtyus is predicate. See eva. 
 
 6. etasya = sarpasya. 
 
 7. sodhas, v'sah, 954, 222 3 , 224b. -aha, 
 801a. anena, 501. 
 
 9. See alam w. instr. : anaya, 501. 
 
 10. Knowledge is power. ' Whose is wit, 
 might is his ; but of a witless one, whence is 
 the might ?' Repeated at the end, 33", as a 
 quod erat demonstrandum. 
 
 11. Just as before (23 21 , see N.), this line 
 announces the tale which serves as an 
 " example " to the aphorism of line 10. 
 
 12. SELECTION IX. The lion, the old hare, 
 and the well. Hitopade9a, book ii., fable 
 11. See31 19 N. 
 
 Selection ix. answers to Pancatantra, 
 book i., fable 8. The Buddhist version, the 
 Banyan Deer Jataka, has deep moral sig- 
 nificance as showing the beauty of self- 
 sacrifice and the excellence of loving "all 
 things, both great and small." This Jataka 
 is mentioned by name and illustrated on the 
 bas-reliefs of the tope or Stupa of Bharhut, 
 Cunningham, plate xxv, dating from 200 
 B.C. or earlier. In the Sanskrit forms, the 
 Jataka has developed into a simple story 
 that shows how the weak animals get the 
 better of a powerful tyrant, not by force, 
 but by cunning. Somadeva gives the story 
 at lx.91-107. Compare further 
 
 Pali. Jataka, no. 12: translation, i. p. 205. 
 
 Old Syriac version. Kalilag, p. 14. 
 
 Arabic. Kalila. Knatchbull, p. 117. Wolff, i.46. 
 
 Later Syriac version, p. 27. 
 
 Anvar-i Suhaill, book i., story 14. 
 
 Directorium, Cap. II., p. 10 of signature c. 
 
 Buch der Beispiele, p. 37 1 . 
 
 Benfey, i.179 ; ii.62. Lancereau, p. 333. 
 
 The first three phrases of this line (12) 
 are specimens of the regular conventional 
 way of introducing the fables. The myth-
 
 [325] 
 
 ( NOTES TO 
 i PAGE 34. 
 
 ical mount Mandara was used by the gods 
 as a churning-stick when they churned the 
 ocean to get the drink of immortality cf. 
 23 ! N. In this book, a real hill may be in- 
 tended, namely Mandara, a little south of 
 Bhagalpur, on the Ganges, east of Magadha. 
 
 14. See Vdha+vi5 and Vas3. Note that 
 the gerund krtva goes with the logical sub- 
 ject of the sentence. 
 
 15. See Vjna+vi, cas., and 1042d 2 . 
 
 17. 'If that is agreeable to you .' 
 
 18. v'klp+upa, caus. See Vas3. 
 2O-21. See hetu, ced, Ikal, and anu- 
 
 naya. " I would put on my good be- 
 havior, if I thought I had any chance of 
 my life." 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 33. 
 
 1. U.f. apa-raddhas (v'radh) dhrtas 
 agre. See 2antara 4. 
 
 2. Note use of ace. w. caus., ' to cause my 
 master to know : ' so mam, next line. 
 
 4. tam=sinham. grhitva, seeVgrahl, 
 and 254 8 . 
 
 5. U.f. " pagyatu svami " iti uktva. 
 tasmin kupa-j ale = tasya kupasya jale, 
 cf. 24 14 N. tasya (= sinhasya) eva, 'his 
 own.' 
 
 6. dare,-, 959, from caus. . U.f. asau 
 (= sinhas) darpa^a-dhmatas (Vdham) tasya 
 (= pratibimbasya) upari ('upon') . 
 
 7-8. ' Therefore I say (the proverb) 
 having yasya buddhir balarh tasya as its 
 beginning,' 32 10 N. See ity-adi. 
 
 9. The main story of the crows and the 
 serpent is here resumed : cf. 31 19 N. 
 
 10. .See vsad+a. a-gatya, 992. 
 
 11. Vtr+ava, ppl. of caus. U.f. cancva 
 dhrtva, aniya, 
 
 12. ni-rupyamane, loc. absolute, pass. 
 ppl. of denom. 
 
 13. Gerundives have future force. 
 
 14. 'That (plan) was carried out; that 
 being done, that (predicted result of the plan) 
 took place:' see under \stha ami _', and cf. 
 303b*. 
 
 16. U.f. kuryatConemaydo'J.yadna- 1 . 
 
 18. SELECTION X. The birds and the apes. 
 Hitopadeca, book iii., fable 2. 
 
 This story corresponds to Pancatantra, 
 book i., fable 18, which is itself only a sub- 
 sidiary form of fable 17. This latter is given 
 by Somadeva Ix. 205-210. Compare Jataka, 
 no. 321 (vol. iii.), and further 
 
 Old Syriac version. Kalilag, p. 28. 
 
 Arabic. Kalila. Knatchbull, p. 150. Wolff, 1. 91. 
 
 Later Syriac version, p. 55. 
 
 Anvar-i Suhaill, book i., story 24. 
 
 Directorium, Cap. II., p. 1, 2 of signature B. 
 
 Buch der Beispiele, p. 55". 
 
 Benfey, i.269-271 ; ii.112 and 111. 
 
 19. 'In the interior of constructed (\ma 
 +nis) nests.' 
 
 20. 'The sky being covered (a-vrte) with 
 cloud-veils, as it were with dark-garments, 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 34. 
 
 1-2. U.f. avasthitan (203) gltartan 
 kampamanan : 'by the birds, seeing , 
 it was said.' 
 
 3. ' We have constructed nests with straws 
 brought hither (-ahrtais) by the beak- 
 merely ' (see matra2, and references). 
 
 4. 'Endowed with hands, feet, and so 
 forth (see adi 2), why are you in distress 
 (Vsad+ava)?' 
 
 6. U.f. tavat (see tavant3) vrstes upa- 
 gamas, ' now there is a stopping of the rain.' 
 Better perhaps, without the punctuation- 
 bar after bhavatu: 'So let there be for a 
 while a stopping of the rain,' i.e. 'wait till 
 the rain stops a bit and we'll see about it.' 
 
 8. bhagnas, Vbhafij, 957c. U.f. andani 
 ca adhas. 
 
 10. U.f. vidvan eva upa- : caesura ; na 
 avid van tu. 
 
 11. U.f. upadigya ajrian , yayus 
 (Vya, 800c). 
 
 12. SELECTION XI. The ass in the tiger- 
 skin. Hitopade9a, book iii., fable 3. 
 
 This story corresponds to Pancatantra, 
 book iv., fable 7, which has been worked 
 over by Somadeva, lxii.19-23. Its oldest 
 Hindu form is the Lion-skin Jataka. It 
 seems to have been lacking in the Pehlevi 
 version. Plato makes Socrates say, " Since 
 I have put on the lion's skin, I must not be 
 faint of heart " Kratylos, 411 A. The tale
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 34. 
 
 [326] 
 
 appears in the Chinese Avadanas, vol.ii.,p. 
 59, no. 91. Compare also 
 
 Pali. Jataka, no. 189 (vol. ii.) ; transl., 1. p. v. 
 
 Fab. Aesop., 'Ovos \eovryv <t>fptov, no. 336, ed. 
 
 Lucian, Piscator, 32. [Halm. 
 
 La Fontaine, book v., no. 21; Regnier, i. p. 431. 
 
 Benfey, i.462-3; ii.308. 
 
 13-14. ' By the washerman, covering (him ) 
 with a tiger-skin, that one (asau=gardabhas) 
 was let loose .' pracchadya, see v'l chad 
 -t-pra, and 227. See v'muc, and 1051 8 . 
 
 15. Seebuddhi2. 
 
 16. See v'car3. -16-18. The instr. is 
 logical subject of the impers. pass, sthitam: 
 see sthita2 end, and 999. ' Having a-gray- 
 blanket-made body-cover (1293), i.e. having 
 covered himself with a gray blanket.' U.f. 
 sajji-kjtya (992), avanata-kayena (v'nam), 
 ekante. 
 
 18-19. ' The ass, seeing , thinking 
 " gardabhi iyam," making (714, ppl.) , 
 
 20. See iti 2a end. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 35. 
 
 1-2. See \'car3. See greyans and 464. 
 paricchannas, Vlchad, 957d. 
 
 3. SELECTION XII. The elephant, the 
 hares, and the moon. Hitopadefa, book iii., 
 fable 4. 
 
 This story corresponds to Pancatantra, 
 book iii., fable 1, and is given by Somadeva 
 at lxii.29-44. It is unquestionably of Hindu 
 rather than Greek origin, since it turns on 
 the Hindu belief that there is a hare in the 
 moon (36 3 N.). Compare 
 
 Old Syriac version. Ealilag, p. 63-65. 
 
 Arabic. Knatchbull, p. 223. Wolff, i.192. 
 
 Later Syriac version, p. 135-137. 
 
 Anvar-i Subaili, book iv., story 4. 
 
 Directorium, Cap. V., p. 10-11 of signature H. 
 
 Bucb der Beispiele, p. 104 23 . 
 
 Benfey, 1.348; ii.226. Lancereau, p. 337. 
 
 U.f. varsasu api, vrstes abhavat, 
 trsa_artas aha. 
 
 5-6. ' And we, who from want of bathing 
 are almost blind, where shall we go, or ? ' 
 
 7-8. U.f. tattira^avasthitas -ahatibhis 
 bahavas curnitas, ' were crushed in great 
 numbers by the (blows, i.e.) tread of .' 
 
 9-1O. a-huya, gerund. See sakulaya. 
 
 U.f. eva atra agant-, see Vgam-i-a end. 
 vinanksyati, see \lnag. 
 
 11. visidata, see ssad, and 185. 
 
 13. ' How shall I speak f ' See 
 yuthapa. 
 
 14. sprgann, etc., 210. See v'ghra. 
 16-17. See v ! las3 and Vstha-anu, end. 
 19. ucyatam, 769. 
 
 2O-21. ' Even when the weapons are 
 raised (udyatesu, \yarn), an envoy speaks 
 not falsely ; always, because he is inviolable 
 (sada eva avadhya-), he is, surely, the 
 speaker of pure-truth.' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 36. 
 1-2. The moon-god's message goes from 
 yad ete to prasiddhis. See yad2. 'As 
 for the fact that these hares, , by thee 
 have been driven away (\'sr+nis, caus. pass.), 
 therein not rightly (see Vyujo) hast thou 
 done.' 
 
 3. See prasiddhi, and cf. gaga, gaganka, 
 and gagin. The Jataka tells how the rabbit 
 offered up its own life for C, akra and how 
 C,akra in grateful recognition placed the 
 hare's image in the moon's disk as an en- 
 during memorial of the self-sacrifice see 
 Jataka, no. 316, vol. iii., p. 51, and S. Beal, 
 Si-yn-ki, ii. p. 60. 
 
 4. U.f. bhayat idam (rdSf, see idam) 
 aha: idam ( = 'my misdeed, just men- 
 tioned') . 
 
 5-6. See atral. pra-namya, 192a. 
 See v'gam 1. 
 
 6-7. tena (gagakena), nitva, etc. See 
 v'lkr, caus. Here the elephant is made to 
 worship the moon; but Pliny, Nat. Hist. 
 viii.l, gives a curious belief about the volun- 
 tary moon-worship and religious ablutions 
 of elephants. Fa-hian, the Chinese Buddhist 
 pilgrim, chap, xxiii., records a like story, 
 Beal, Si-yu-ki, i. p. Ii. 
 
 8-9. The rabbit is the elephant's spokes- 
 man : deva, ' O (moon-)god.' U.f. ajnanat 
 eva anena (=gajena) ; tad ksamyatam. 
 -pra-sthapitas, 1042d, 1051 3 . 
 
 12. SELECTION XIII. The blue jackal. 
 Hitopade9a, book iii., fable 7. 
 
 This story corresponds to Pancatantra,
 
 [327] 
 
 < NOTES TO 
 I PACK 37. 
 
 book i., fable 10. It is not found in the 
 Arabic version nor in Somadeva, and so was 
 probably not a part of the Indian original 
 Benfey, i. p. 223. But cf. Jataka, no. 188. 
 The motif is similar to that of the fable of 
 the whitewashed jackdaw among the doves, 
 KoXotbs Kal trfpiartpai, Fabulae Aesopicae col- 
 lectae, ed. C. Halm, no. 201 b . See La Fon- 
 taine, book iv., fable 9, Regnier, i.208f. 
 
 svecchaya bhraman: same phrase, 
 w. the other form (763), at 23 5 . 
 
 13. tatas (=bhandat, 1098), see tatas 1. 
 
 13-14. ' Kept priMi-nding to be dead : ' see 
 Vdrg+sam, caus., and sthita4. 
 
 14-15. U.f. -svamina asau (= srgalas) 
 utthapya (1051 5 , 1042d). The two gerunds 
 go witli the logical subject, -svamina. 
 
 15-16. Note how the gerunds, gatva, 
 avalokya, mark each the end of its little 
 clause. 
 
 16. uttama-varnas, w. double mg, 'of the 
 best color' (royal purple), and 'of the 
 highest caste' (cf. 28 18 ). See atman2, 
 and note how it is used as reflexive of all 
 three persons here ' myself .' 
 
 17-19. Construe: aham (asmi) abhisik- 
 tas (v'sic) -devataya aranya-rajye sarva_ 
 osadhi-rasena. 
 
 19-2O. U.f. adya arabhya (see v'rabh+a3 ) 
 asmad-ajnaya asmin . ' By our command 
 conduct must be made = you must do as I 
 command.' 
 
 20. vfgista-varnam, 1299. 
 
 21. U.f. pra-namya (192a) ucus (800e). 
 yatha ajnapayati devas, ' as the king com- 
 mands ' fsc. so will we do), is a common 
 response in the drama. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 37. 
 
 1. U.f. aranya-vasisu. tasya, pred. 
 poss. gen., see Vbhu. 
 
 1-3. Construe : svajnatayas durikrtas 
 avajnaya tena, (see -adi) prapya, 
 avalokya, 
 
 3. vi-sannan, Vsad, 185, 189. 
 
 4-6. U.f. evam ced anena anitijnena , 
 tad yatha ayam , ' if thus by this (we're 
 treated with contempt), then that this one 
 :' see Vldha+vi5 end. nagyati: for 
 mode, see 581c 2 and cf. yathaG. 
 
 6. ami, 501. varnamatra-vipralabdhas, 
 'fooled by (his) mere color,' see matra2, 
 and v'labh+vi-pra. 
 
 7. amum, 501. See V3ci+pariand 770a. 
 6-8. yatas kuruta: the sentence is 
 
 constructed like the sentence evam vidhe- 
 yam, lines 4-6. 
 
 8. See Vsthafanu2. 
 
 9-1O. tatas tena_api gabdas karta- 
 vyas, 'Then he too will raise a howl.' 
 
 11. U.f. syat, tasya asau (= svabhavas). 
 ' What inherent-nature anyone (yasya) 
 may have, that (nature asau) of Jiim is 
 hard to overcome : ' see ya6. 
 
 12. U.f. tad kim na agnati. ' If a dog 
 (427) is made well-fed, i.e. put on good 
 rations, will he not then gnaw a shoe ? ' 
 
 13. ' He'll be killed by (some) tiger, 
 recognizing (him) by his howl.' tatha 
 etc., cf . 33 U and N. and references : for sati, 
 see Vlas3. 
 
 16. 'And (consumes) destroys, as (does) 
 a hidden fire (antargatas analas) a dry 
 tree.' 
 
 18-19. ca, used loosely to connect ratas 
 with the logically, but not grammatically, 
 coordinate parityajya. See v'ram3. 
 mudhas, see 223 4 . -vat, see 1107. 
 
 20. SELECTION XIV. The two geese 
 and the tortoise. Hitopade9a, book iv., 
 fable 2. 
 
 This story appears in the Pancatantra, 
 book i., fable 13, and is given by Somadeva, 
 lx.169-177. The Pali form of the fable is 
 probably the oldest, and corresponds in moral 
 and incident with the Chinese form, Avaddnas, 
 vol. L.no.xiv. The Aesopian form, Xf\tavr) 
 Kal herds, Babrius, no. 115 of Schneidewin's 
 ed. (cf. no. 419 of Halm's collection), differs 
 in both these respects. Compare 
 
 Pali. Jataka, no. 215 (vol. ii.) ; transl., i. p. viii. 
 
 Old Syriac version. Kalilag, p. 24. 
 
 Arabic. Knatchbull, p. 146. Wolff, 1.85. 
 
 Later Syriac version, p. 49. 
 
 Anvar-i Suhaill, book i., story 23. 
 
 Direetorium, Cap. II., p. 10 of signature D. 
 
 Buch der Beispiele, p. 52 7 . 
 
 Benfey, 1.239; ii.90. Lancereau, p. 340. 
 
 La Fontaine, book x., fable 2. Regnier, iii. p. 12f. 
 
 21. mitram, nom. neuter: the name-adj., 
 kamb-. agrees in gender with kurmas.
 
 NOTES TO i 
 PAQE 38. ' 
 
 [328] 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 38. 
 1-2. yad, untranslatable, like on, intro- 
 ducing a direct quotation : cf . ol tie tiirov on 
 inavoi IfffjLtv ; so St. Luke viii.49, etc. U.f. 
 adya asmabhis atra usitva (see V3vas). 
 
 Lit. 'Now once by fishers, going there, it 
 was said, " By us, staying (over night to-day=) 
 over this night here, to-morrow the tortoises, 
 fishes, and so forth shall be killed." ' 
 
 4. ahatus, 801a. See tavant 3b. 'Let 
 the facts be ascertained first ; afterwards, 
 what is fitting (yad ucitam, Vuc), .' 
 
 5. U.f. ma evam. Tor I (am) having a 
 seen disaster here= (1308) have seen a .' 
 
 7-8. For the three names, see vocab. 
 The third is of a kind with which Biihler 
 compares the early Christian name ' Quod- 
 vult-dea,' and the Puritan ' Fight-the-battle- 
 of-faith,' etc. U.f. dvau edhete (Vedh). 
 
 'Both Forethought and who (is) Keadywit, 
 these two : ' the yas merely fills out the 
 metre, see ya3. 
 
 9. SELECTION XV. The three fishes. Hito- 
 pade^a, book iv., fable 3. 
 
 This story corresponds to Pancatantra, 
 book i., fable 14 ; see Benfey, ii. p. 137 and 
 91. Very similar is book v., fable 6. Soma- 
 deva gives a version at lx.179. An ex- 
 cellent version occurs in the MBh. xii.137. 
 1 = 4889. Cf . also 
 
 Pali. Jataka, no. 114, vol. i. 
 
 Ol'd Syriac version. Kalilag, p. 15. 
 
 Arabic. Knatchbull, p. 121. Wolff, i. 54. 
 
 Later Syriac version, p. 31. 
 
 Anvar-i SuhailT, book i., story 15. 
 
 Directorium, Cap. II., p. 12 of signature c. 
 
 Buch der Beispiele, p. 393'. 
 
 9-1O. U.f. pura etasmin eva evam- 
 vidhesu upasthitesu (303b) -trayena. 
 
 11. tatra = tesu matsyesu, see tatra 1. 
 
 12. See 2antara4. 
 
 13-14. See vldha+abhi. 'In a matter 
 (still) future, from lack of anything to judge 
 by, where shall I go? ' = since the danger is 
 vague and uncertain, I'll keep still for the 
 present. See s'pad+ud. 
 
 16-17. Explained in notes to p. 18, lines 
 9-10. 
 
 18. See v'dr+sam, and cf. 36 13 ' 14 . 
 
 19. U.f. apa-saritas (pass, of caus.) 
 ut-plutya. 
 
 21. U.f. -ityadi refers to lines 7 and 8 
 above. Cf. note to 33 ; - 8 . 
 
 22. SELECTION XIV., continued. 'There- 
 fore (tad), this to-day (tad adya) must be 
 brought about, that I reach (yatha prap- 
 nomi) : ' cf . passages cited under yatha') 
 end. 
 
 23. prapte, ' reached = in reaching,' see 
 17 18 N. Similarly gacchatas te, ' of you, 
 going = of your going.' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 39. 
 1. U.f . bhavadbhyam saha. Seevartman. 
 3. kastham is subject of avalamb-. 
 
 5. ' That is an expedient ; but .' 
 
 6. 'A wise man should consider the (ex- 
 pedient or) advantage (of a certain course), 
 and likewise the (inexpedient or) disadvan- 
 tage of it he should consider.' Note the 
 etymology of upaya and apaya, and the 
 contrast. 
 
 7 a . Gen. absolute, 300 2 . 
 
 8. SELECTION XVI. The herons, the ser- 
 pent, and the ichneumons. Hitopade9a, 
 book iv., fable 5. 
 
 This story corresponds to Pancatantra, 
 book i., fable 20. Cf. also introduction to 
 selection viii., 31 19 . Somadeva gives the 
 story very briefly at lx.235. Cf. also 
 
 Old Syriac version. Kalilag, p. 30. 
 Anvar-i Suhaill, book i., story 26. 
 Buch der Beispiele, p. 57 s4 . 
 
 9. Since this Vulture-peak is placed near 
 the Nerbudda, we can hardly identify it with 
 the one famed in Buddhist story (27 6 N.), 
 which was near the Ganges. 
 
 13-14. U.f. amya, arabhya (see 
 v'rabh+a 3), yavat (see yavant 3), 
 pankti-kraraena dhatta (668). 
 
 15. svabhava-dvesat : the enmity of ich- 
 neumons and serpents was proverbial : " They 
 fight like cats and dogs ; " cf . Pancatantra, 
 p. 110 22 f, ed. Kosegarten, = book ii., p. 7 u f, 
 ed. Bombay ; and selection xxi. 
 
 15-16. tatha etc. = 37 18 : cf. 33 W N. 
 
 17. U.f. tais (=nakulais) a-ruhya, 
 sarve .
 
 [329] 
 
 I NOTES TO 
 | PAGE 41. 
 
 18. avam, 491. -Cf. 33 7 -N. 
 
 19. SELECTION XIV., concluded. See 
 eva2 near mid. 
 
 2O- uttaram da : cf . uttara-dayaka, 32*. 
 
 21. U.f . sarvatha atra eva. See kim3. 
 
 22. U.f. evam anusthite sati, 803b*. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 4O. 
 
 1. sam-uhyate, Vvah, 769, 252. aha, 
 801a. 
 
 2. U.f. tada, atra eva paktva, khad-, 
 'Then he shall be eaten, with a cooking (of 
 him) right here ' = we'll cook and eat him 
 on the spot. Note that the gerund, as simple 
 instr. of accompaniment of an action-noun, 
 is generally the adjunct of the logical sub- 
 ject of the clause, although the latter (as 
 here) is not always expressed. 
 
 4. vismrta-samskaras, 1299. 
 
 5. vadann eva, cf. cintayann eva, s.v. 
 eva2. 
 
 7-8. Construe : yas na karoti iha vacas 
 suhrdam , sas etc. bhrastas, Vbhraruj. 
 -With line 7, cf. 25". 
 
 9. SELECTION XVII. The hermit, and the 
 mouse that was changed to a tiger. Hito- 
 pade9a, book iv., fable 6. 
 
 This story, and the one at MBh. xii.116. 
 1 = 4254, are ultimately identical with Pan- 
 catantra, book Hi., fable 12 (Benfey,ii.p.262, 
 281), although very different from their pro- 
 totype and inferior to it. Benfey traces the 
 connection in a most interesting way, i. p. 373. 
 To his references, add Somadeva, lxii.125, 
 Kalilag, p. 72, Later Syriac, p. 149, Beispiele, 
 p. 116. 
 
 9-1O. U.f. tena ag- drstas, 'he 
 saw.' 
 
 11-12. khaditum(981 3 ) anu-dhavan: inf. 
 hantum used similarly, 40 20 , 4l 2 . 
 
 12. tapah-prabhavat : the austerities of 
 the holy men gave them supernatural powers, 
 cf. 16"N. 
 
 13. bidalas, predicate. See Vlkr9. 
 kukkurat, 292a : so vyaghrat, next line. 
 See Vbhi and 643b. 
 
 15. ' Looks upon even the tiger as a 
 mouse.' 
 17-18. See Vni. -yavat etc., see 999. 
 
 19. U.f. svarupa^akhyanam, ' report 
 about my true-nature.' 
 
 20. Seevfyam+sam-ud. See v/lkr, desid. 
 20-21. U.f. " punar musikas bhava " iti 
 
 uktva. See eva. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 41. 
 
 3. SELECTION XVIII. The heron, the 
 fishes, and the crab. Hitopade9a, book iv., 
 fable 7. See note to 31i 9 . 
 
 The story occurs in the Pancatantra, 
 book i., fable 7. Somadeva has it at lx.79. 
 The Buddhist form appears in the Jataka. 
 A hypocrite is called ' one who acts like a 
 heron,' Manu iv.196 (cf. 20 8 N.). 
 
 Pali. Jataka, no. 38; translation, 1. p. 317. 
 
 Old Syriac version. Kalilag, p. 12. 
 
 Arabic. Kalila. Knatchbull, p. 113. Wolff, 1.41. 
 
 Later Syriac version, p. 24. 
 
 Anvar-i Suhaill, book i., story 12. 
 
 Directorium, Cap. II., p. 8 of signature c. 
 
 Buch der Beispiele, p. 35 1 *. 
 
 Benfey, i.174; 11.58. Lancereau, p. 344. 
 
 La Fontaine, book x., fable 3. Regnier, iii. p. 18. 
 
 Arabian Nights: Night 717 (Weil, iii.914). 
 
 4. U.f. tatha ud-vignam iva, ' so. as if 
 terrified.' See Vdrg, caus., and cf. sthita4. 
 
 5. prstas, 220. -See iti 2b. 
 
 7-8. U.f. te ca atra avagyam eva. ' And 
 these here very surely will be killed : I 
 heard (Vakarnaya) a plan to that effect 
 (iti).' 
 
 8-9. See itas3. U.f. -abhavat asmad- 
 maranam. krtas, 'am made = have be- 
 come.' 
 
 10-11. See iha and tavant4. -'This 
 (heron, ayam) appears to be actually (eva) 
 our benefactor ; therefore let him be asked 
 (Vprach, 768) .' 
 
 13-14. U.f. upakartra arina samdhis. 
 'Alliance (is proper cf. 22 20 N.) with a foe 
 who does us a service, not with a friend who 
 injures us (apakarina cf. 39N.); surely 
 service and injury are to be considered as 
 the essential characteristic of these two.' 
 The fact that one is called foe and the other 
 friend is of no account. laksyam agrees 
 with predicate. 
 
 18-19. U.f. kasmin cid dege, 'in a cer- 
 tain place.' -sthapitas, 1061 8 , 1042d. 
 
 2O-21. U.f. bakas api apurva-kulira- 
 mahsa^arthl kuliraa api : the api's m;iy
 
 NOTES TO i 
 PAGE 41. < 
 
 [330] 
 
 be rendered by ' and ' or ' but,' as the sense 
 requires cf. api5. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 42. 
 
 I. -akirnam, v'3kr+a. 
 
 3. ' One should/ear danger (bhayat, 292a) 
 so long (only) as the danger is future.' 
 
 5-6. U.f. pagyet na kim cid hitam (163). 
 mriyate, 773. ' Surely, if one sees not 
 any salvation for himself (in a non-fight =) 
 without a fight, then .' 
 
 9 b is one copulative cpd adj., utta-, 1257. 
 
 II. SELECTION XIX. The Brahman and 
 his jar. Hitopade9a, book iv., fable 8. Count 
 not your chickens before they be hatched. 
 
 This story corresponds to Pancatantra, 
 book v., fable 9. The history and literature 
 of the fable are treated at length by Max 
 Miiller, Chips, iv.145-209. 
 
 The tale recurs in the Arabian Nights, 
 Night 716 (Weil, iii.910) : and the Barber's 
 story of his fifth brother, Night 166 (Weil, 
 i.540: Lane, chap. V.) is essentially similar. 
 Ultimately dependent on the Indian original 
 are Grimm's Lazy Heinz and Haggard Liese, 
 Marchen, no's 164 and 168. Compare also 
 
 Old Syriac version. Kalilag, p. 53. 
 
 Arabic. Kalila. Knatchbull, p. 269. Wolff, ii.3. 
 
 Later Syriac version, p. 170. 
 
 Anvar-i Suhaill, book vi., story 2. 
 
 Directorium, Cap. VII., p. 7 of signature K. 
 
 Buch der Beispiele, p. 130". 
 
 Benfey, i.499; ii.345. Lancereau, p. 345. 
 
 La Fontaine, b'k vii., fable 10. Regnier, ii. 145,495. 
 
 For -garman in names, see 59 18 and N., 
 and see visnugarman in vocab. 
 
 11-12. The feasts of the winter and 
 summer solstices ( corresponding to Christmas 
 and Midsummer), originated in the worship 
 of the sun at his 'entrance' (samkranti) 
 upon his ' north-course ' and his ' south- 
 course' respectively, and were celebrated 
 with lavish alms-giving, as appears from the 
 Pancatantra, book ii., fable 2 (where Kose- 
 garten, 119 1 , reads uttarayana-, and the 
 Bombay ed., 14 21 , reads daksinayana- : see 
 this last in vocab.). 
 
 The vernal equinox was also the occa- 
 sion of great festivities, whence, doubtless, 
 the fulness of the Brahman's jar. This feast 
 survives as the Boll or Indian Carnival 
 described by H. H. Wilson, Works, ii.222-43. 
 
 12-14. U.f. tataa tarn (= garavamja daya, 
 asau (devagarma), gayya-niksipta-dehas 
 (1297) san (redundant, v'las3), ratrau acin- 
 tayat. The long cpd: 'in a dish-filled- 
 pot-maker's-shed-part ( ekadege ) .' 
 
 14-17. Construe: yadi aham. imam 
 vikriya, prapnomi, tada (introduces verb 
 of apodosis, karomi) tais (= kapardakais) 
 caravan tatas ghata^adin upakriya 
 vikriya, anekadha vrddhais -adikam 
 upakriya, utpadya, karomi. As a 
 help to the correct phrasing, note that the 
 interjected adverbial clauses end each with 
 its gerund, tatas, line 15, ' then,' equiv. 
 to ' and ' : ' dishes and jars and so forth.' 
 
 17-18. U.f. tasu ya adh-, tasyam : 
 'who among those wives (is) most beautiful, 
 on her I bestow .' 
 
 18-20. 'Thereupon, when her co-wives 
 (tat-sapatnyas), jealous, quarrel, then I 
 (will) beat them so' (ittham, said while he 
 throws the cudgel to show how). U.f. 
 abhidhaya utthaya. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 43. 
 1-2. 'By the potter, (who came = ) who 
 was brought by the noise of the breaking of 
 the pots, seeing that, the Brahman, scolded 
 (see tiras), was expelled (bahis-) .' 
 
 5. SELECTION XX. The Brahman with 
 the goat, and the three rogues. Hitopade9a, 
 book iv., fable 10. 
 
 This story occurs in the Pancatantra, 
 book iii., fable 3, and, as usual, in a more 
 elaborate and better form. Somadeva has 
 it at lxii.62. Of the frequent imitations, 
 Gesta Romanorum, Cap. 132 = 124 (see ed. of 
 H. Oesterley, p. 486 and 733) may be men- 
 tioned. Compare also 
 
 Old Syriac version. Kalilag, p. 67. 
 
 Arabic. Kalila. Knatchbull, p. 233. "Wolff, i.205. 
 
 Later Syriac version, p. 141. 
 
 Anvar-i SuhailT, book iv., story 7. 
 
 Directorium, Cap. V., p. 2 of signature I. 
 
 Buch der Beispiele, 109 2 . 
 
 Benfey, i.355; ii.238. Lancereau, p. 363. 
 
 6. U.f. grama^antarat (202) gacchan. 
 7-9. U.f. dhurtas"yadi esas (176a) 
 
 chagas (227) supply asmabhis, kena api 
 upayena (tarn chagam) prapya, khadyate,
 
 [331] 
 
 ( INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 ( KATHA-SABIT-SAGABA. 
 
 tada bhavati " iti alocya, upavigya, 
 
 sthitas (see sthita4). 
 
 1O-11. abhi-hitas, see v'ldha. See iti 
 
 2b. U.f. skandhena uhyate, 769 and 252. 
 12. tad eva, ' just that ' = ' the same thing.' 
 14. dolayamana- : Grierson, Bihar Peasant 
 
 Life, p. 45, gives a good picture of the dooly. 
 
 16. U.f. "nigcitam eva ayam k-" iti 
 matva. 
 
 17. snatva, to remove the supposed im- 
 purity arising from touching a dog. 
 yayau, 800c. Read cchagas for -go. 
 
 19-2O. See Vlvid4. vancyate, pass, 
 of caus. chagataa, see 1098c 3 . 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 44. 
 
 1. SELECTION XXI. The Brahman and 
 his faithful ichneumon. Hitopade9a, book 
 iv., fable 13. 
 
 This story corresponds to Pancatantra, 
 book v., fable 2. It is undoubtedly of Bud- 
 dhistic origin Beal, Academy, Nov. 1882, 
 p. 331. It is discussed by Benfey, i.479, 
 who gives a Mongol version and a Tamil 
 imitation. Somadeva has the story at lxiv.3. 
 Lancereau mentions numerous versions and 
 imitations, p. 384. Especially famous is a 
 parallel story, which is told of Llewellyn 
 the Great and his faithful hound Gellert, 
 and goes back to 1205. It is familiar to 
 English readers through the well-known 
 ballad of Wm. R. Spencer. A highly inter- 
 esting English version is found in Ye Seven 
 Wyse Maysters of Rome, printed by Wynkyn 
 
 de Worde, in 1520, reprinted London 1885, 
 ed. G. L. Gomme, p. 28. Compare also 
 
 Old Syriac version. Kalilag, p. 54. 
 
 Arabic. Kalila. Knatchbull, p. 268. Wolff, ii.l. 
 
 Later Syriac version, p. 169. 
 
 Anvar-i Suhaill, book vi., story 1. 
 
 Directorium, Cap. VII., p. 8 of signature K. 
 
 Buch der Beispiele, p. 131". 
 
 Benfey, i.479; ii.326. Lancereau, p. 384. 
 
 Through ujjayini ran the prime meri- 
 dian of Hindu astronomers. 
 
 2-3. 'For (see krte) the Br., from the 
 king, a call to offer a graddha came.' 
 graddha, see p. 402. 
 
 4. sahaja-daridryat, ' from connate pov- 
 erty = a born beggar as he was.' 
 
 6-7. 'Of receiving, , quickly, (if it is), 
 not done, Time drinks the juice of it : ' i.e. 
 if you have anything to receive or give or a 
 deed to do, do it quickly or it'll not be worth 
 doing. 
 
 9. U.f. cira-kala-palitam -raksartham. 
 
 11. Natural enemies cf. 39 15 N. 
 
 12-13. U.f. asau- ayantam. 'Having 
 blood-smeared snout-and-paws.' 
 
 14. See Vdhr-fava: his conclusion was 
 " mama bhaksitas : " anena = nakulena. 
 
 15-16. U.f . asau upasrtya. SeeVstha4. 
 
 16-17. ' Finding out that the ichneumon 
 was his benefactor, (and) possessing a dis- 
 covered (Vbhu+vi) deed (krtya), i.e. dis- 
 covering what he had done, with a pained 
 heart (418) .' 
 
 19-20. 'Who, without (a-vijnaya), 
 goes to or gets under (gatas) the power of 
 passion '.' 
 
 SELECTIONS XXII.-XXVII. 
 EXTRACTS FROM THE KATHA-SAKIT-SAGARA. 
 
 45. The work from which the following extracts are taken holds a rather 
 exceptional place in Hindu literary history, inasmuch as its date and authorship are 
 quite definitely known. According to the author's fancy, it unites in itself all 
 stories as does the ocean all rivers, and he therefore calls it the ' Ocean of the 
 Streams of Story ' or Katha-sarit-sagara. Following out the metaphor, he divides 
 the work into one hundred and twenty-four chapters, called tarangas or ' billows.' 
 By another division, independent of the one just mentioned, the work is broken into 
 eighteen books, called lambakas, which Brockhaus, without authority, conjectured 
 to mean 'surges.' The work contains about 22,000 distichs, that is, about one-
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 KATHA-SARIT-SAOAKA. 
 
 [332] 
 
 quarter as much as the Maha-bharata, and not quite twice as much as the Iliad and 
 Odyssey together. An analysis of its contents is given by H. H. Wilson, Works, 
 vol. iv. 109-159. 
 
 46. BIBLIOGRAPHY. The following discussions connected with the literary 
 history of this work should be mentioned. 
 
 Fitzedward Hall, the Vaaavadatta, Calcutta, 1859, 
 Introduction, pages 22, 23. 
 
 George Biihler, On the Vrihatkatha of Kshemen- 
 dra, Indian Antiquary, i.302f, Bombay, 1872. Cf. 
 Weber's Remarks, ibidem, ii.57. 
 
 George Biihler, Detailed Report of a tour in search 
 of Sanskrit MSS. made [in 1875] in Kacmir etc., pub- 
 lished at Bombay in 1877 as an Extra Number of the 
 Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic 
 Society, with vol. xii. Preliminary reports had ap- 
 peared in the Ind. Ant., v.27f, and vi.264f. 
 
 George Biihler, Ueber das Zeitalter des Kacmi- 
 rischen Dichters Soniadeva, SitzungsbericMe der 
 phi). -hist. Classe der Kais. Akademie der \Viss., 
 cx.545f, Vienna, 1885. 
 
 Sylvain Levi, La Brihatkathamafijari de Kshe- 
 tnendra, Journal Asiatique, 8.vi.397f, vii.!78f. Vol. 
 vi. contains chapters 1-8 in text and translation. 
 
 The text has been edited by H. Brockhaus, 
 Leipsic, 1839, 1862, and 1866. A complete trans- 
 lation has been given by C. H. Tawney, Calcutta, 
 1880-84. 
 
 47. The concluding verses of the work were printed from new and trustworthy 
 manuscript material by Biihler. a From them it appears that the author was named 
 Soma, i.e. Somadeva, and was the son of the virtuous Brahman Rama. Somadeva 
 says that he made this collection of stories to please the queen SuryavatI, and gives 
 some of the facts relating to the royal house of Kacmir then regnant. These facts 
 are supplemented and confirmed by the Rajataranginl or ' Chronicles of Kacmir,' 
 written by Kalhana, about 1148-1157 A.D. 2 Combining these sources, Biihler 
 reaches conclusions which may here be summarized briefly. 
 
 48. In the year 79, i.e. 4079, of loka-kala, 8 Saiiigramaraja, a descendant of 
 Satavahana (or C.ata-), succeeded to the throne of Kacmir. This was A.D. 1003. He 
 was followed in 1028 by his son Ananta. Anantadeva is described as weak-minded, 
 rash, and impetuous, but as brave even to fool-hardiness. He married SuryavatI, 
 daughter of the king of Jalandhar (jalamdhara). She brought him entirely under 
 her power, and induced him, in 1063, to abdicate in favor of his son Kala9adeva. 
 He soon repented his hasty step and got control of the government again. Mean- 
 time, Kalaca abandoned himself to every vice, and, in rage, his parents determined 
 to punish him, and give over the kingdom to his eldest son Harsa. In fact, Ananta 
 retired with his court to Vijayaksetra, the modern Bijbahar, in [41]55 = A.D. 1079, 
 and after two years of feud with Kalaca, took his own life in 1081, leaving the power 
 in the hands of Kalaca, who held it till 1089, when he was succeeded by Harsa. 
 SuryavatI burned herself on the funeral pile of her husband Ananta. Now since, 
 according to Somadeva, Kalaca was king when the work was finished, and since it 
 was written for SuryavatI, the date of the composition must fall between Ananta's 
 first abdication and bis wife's death, i.e. between 1063 and 1081 A.D. 
 
 49. The real source of the Katha-sarit-sagara is stated by Somadeva 4 to be 
 the Brhat-katha or ' Great Narration ' of Gunadhya. This work, according to 
 Biihler, 6 goes back to the first or second century of the Christian era ; but no manu- 
 script of it has yet been published. On the other hand, important evidence of its 
 general character and contents is afforded by the two works that have flowed from 
 
 1 Ueber das Zeitalter etc., pages 547-549. 
 
 4 Biihler's Report, p. 52f ; Zeitalter, p. 554, 557. 
 
 8 The popular calendar (loka-kala) of Kacmir 
 is counted from a date corresponding to 3076 B.C. 
 The era is connected in some real or fanciful way 
 with Ursa Major (saptarsayas see rst'2), and so 
 
 is called the Saptarshi era. It is still in use. In giv- 
 ing a date, the hundreds and thousands are usually 
 omitted. See Report, pages 59-60. 
 
 4 See Katha-sarit-sagara, i.3 and cxxiv.250, and 
 Reader 56". 
 
 * Report, p. 47. Cf. "Wilson, I.e., p. 119f.
 
 F3331 (INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 ,' KATHA-SAKIT-SAGARA. 
 
 it, the Brhat-katha-inanjari and the Katha-sarit-sagara. Each is a recast of Gun- 
 adhya's original. The former was made by Ksemendra Vyasa-dasa, a contemporary 
 of Somadeva. Its date is not far from the year 1037 A.D., and it is therefore some 
 thirty or forty years prior to Somadeva's work. 1 Both Ksemendra and Somadeva 
 distinctly assert that they translated from an original in the paigaci bhasa or 
 'Goblin dialect'; and internal evidence 2 confirms their assertions, and, further, 
 makes it certain that each worked independently of the other. But Somadeva seems 
 to have been well aware of the faults of his predecessor, and his work is a decided 
 improvement upon that of Ksemendra, whose recast is only about one-third as long 
 as Somadeva's, and sacrifices poetic merit in the effort to be brief. 
 
 50. Although Somadeva was a Brahman, there are yet many remaining traces 
 of the Buddhist character of his original, and even direct allusions 8 to the Buddhist 
 Birth Stories occur. Indeed, Weber maintained 4 that Gunadhya was a Buddhist. 
 The name paigaci bhasa seems to have covered a number of Low Prakrit dialects 6 
 spoken by the most ignorant and degraded classes in many different parts of India. 
 In one of these dialects the Brhat-katha is actually written. 
 
 51. It remains partly by way of introduction to selection xxvii. to com- 
 plete and summarize the half-mythical account there given of the origin of the stories. 
 
 In a retired spot on the Himalayan peak Kailasa, the god (/iva, to please his 
 wife ParvatI, w r as telling her (Katha-sarit-sagara, i.48) the adventures of the Seven 
 Fairy Kings. Unfortunately, he was overheard by his Gana or attendant (see gana), 
 Puspadanta. Puspadanta foolishly told the tale to his wife, and she recited it in 
 turn to ParvatI. This made it appear that Qiva had palmed off upon her an old 
 story. Even on learning the truth, she was still exceedingly enraged, and cursed 
 Puspadanta to be born as a mortal. She also inflicted the same curse on the Gana 
 Malyavant who interceded for him. 
 
 At their entreaty, however, she set a limit (anta) to the curse of each, speaking 
 (i.59) to this effect : " There is a Yaksa named Supratika, who, cursed to become a 
 mortal, is living in the Vindhya as a Pi9ca, under the name of Kanabhuti. When 
 thou, Puspadanta, shalt see him, and tell him the tale which thou overheardest Qiva 
 telling me, then thou shalt be released from thy curse. When Kanabhuti shall have 
 told it to thee, Malyavant, he shall be released. And when thou, Malyavant, shalt 
 have published it to the world, thou shalt be free also." 
 
 52. Puspadanta, accordingly, is born as Vararuci or Katyayana, meets Kana- 
 bhuti, narrates to him the seven stories of adventure in seven hundred thousand 
 stanzas (ii.26), and is released. 
 
 Kanabhuti, meantime, remained in the Vindhya, waiting the coming of Malya- 
 vant. The latter is duly born as a Brahman (vi.19, 20), with the name Gunadhya, 
 at Supratisthita (vi.8) in Pratisthana. 6 This is identified with Paithan on the 
 Godavarl (vi.72), about 150 miles from Bombay, east by north. After travelling in 
 the Deccan, Gunadhya returns to the splendid royal city of Supratisthita (vi.24) and 
 is appointed a minister (vi.70) of Satavahana, the king of whom the story in selec- 
 
 i! 3 .43f , esp. p. 48 and 50. Cf . also Jacobi, Ausgewahlte 
 
 Le>i, Journ. As., 8.vii.218-220. 
 
 * Ind. Ant., i.308-309. Journ. As., 8.vi.413. 
 
 8 E.g., at lxxii.120, to the Boar Jataka. See Weber, 
 Jndische Streifen, ii.367. 
 
 Ind. Ant., ii.57. 
 
 8 For the views of the Hindus and others concern- 
 ing these dialects, see Muir, Grig. Sanskrit Texts, 
 
 Erzahlungen in Maharashtrl, Einl. 2, 15. 
 
 Its Prakrit form la Paitthana; this is the II A I- 
 9ANA of the Utpiirkovt and the 'BaiOava of Ptolemy. 
 See McCrindle, Ancient India as described by Ptol- 
 emy, pages 175-6, and J. Burgess, Arch. Survey of 
 Western India, iii. (Bldar, etc.) p. 55.
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 KATHA-SABIT-SAGARA. 
 
 [334] 
 
 tion xxvi. is related. In consequence of a wager with his colleague Qarvavarman 
 (52 3 ), Gunadhya forswears the use of Sanskrit, Prakrit, and the local vernacular. 
 Since he knows no other language, he is forced to keep silence, and so to give up his 
 position as minister. With two pupils he retires to the Vindhya, and, falling in 
 with a host of Pi9acas (vii.26), learns their dialect. In this he addresses Kanabhuti, 
 who exists himself at the time as a Pi9aca. Kanabhuti tells the tales in ' his own 
 dialect' (svabhasaya, 53 4 ), i.e. Pai9aci, to Gunadhya. The hearer writes them down 
 in Pai9aci, and with his own blood, since he had no ink by him. Kanabhuti is then 
 released. 
 
 Gunadhya, in order to " publish the stories to the world," sends the manuscript 
 to Satavahana. The king, puffed up by his newly-acquired knowledge of Sanskrit 
 grammar (52 28 ), rejects the stories on account of their dialect. Gunadhya, overcome 
 with grief, reads aloud to his two pupils six hundred thousand distichs and casts the 
 manuscript, leaf by leaf, into the fire, while the beasts stand about in a circle and 
 listen with tears in their eyes. 1 One hundred thousand couplets Gunadhya keeps, 
 because they especially pleased his pupils. At last the king hears of the strange 
 proceeding, comes, and takes what is left, 1 namely the Brhat-katha. The pupils 
 expounded the poem to the king and he composed the first book or lambaka, called 
 Kathapitha (56 10 N.), to serve as a general introduction to the rest, after Gunadhya 
 had ascended to heaven (56 4 ), released. 2 
 
 1 Compare the stories of Orpheus and of the | 
 Sibyl. 
 
 2 According, then, to Somadeva (and to Kseinen- 
 dra, as well, Ind. Ant., i.307), the TrapdSocris of the 
 tones is, in turn, from 
 
 1. Civa, to 
 
 2. Puspadanta (= Vararuci, Katyayana), 
 
 3. Supratlka (= Kanabhuti), 
 
 4. Malyavant (= Gunadhya), 
 
 5. Satavahana, and 
 
 6. The world. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 45. 
 
 LINE 2. SELECTION XXII. King Putraka 
 and the seven-league boots. Katha-sarit- 
 sagara, Taranga iii.45. Ksemendra gives 
 the tale in his Brhat-katha-manjari, at ii.48. 
 Tawney, i.14, adduces many parallels, among 
 them, Grimm's Fairy Tales, no. 197, The 
 Crystal Ball. See also Jataka, no. 186 (vol. 
 ii.) ; transl., i. p. xvi.f. 
 
 2-3. Seeatral. King Putraka's uncles 
 had bribed assassins to kill him. By a 
 greater bribe and a promise to go far away, 
 the king induces the murderers to spare his 
 life : this in explanation of the " meantime," 
 the " promise," the " Vindhya," and the " dis- 
 gust." For Putraka, see 17 9 N. See 
 Vraj + vi. 
 
 4-5. The sense-divisions do not correspond 
 with the metrical divisions here as they do 
 in the Epos. U.f. bhraman ava_apa asau 
 -ekatatparau purusau dvau ; tatas tau etc. 
 see iti2. 
 
 6. U.f. maya_asura-sutau avam sc. svas. 
 
 8. 'On account of this (is) our fighting. 
 Who (is) mighty (= proves to "be the strong- 
 er), he may take it.* Brockhaus reads 
 tannimittam against the metre. 
 
 9. U.f. etad tad-vacanam pra^uvaca. 
 
 10. U.f. pumsas (394) ? tatas sam- 
 avocatam (see v'vac, and 854 and 847 
 end). 
 
 11. U.f. pari-dhaya ('by putting on') 
 ava^apyate. 
 
 12. U.f. yad (162) likhyate: see ya6. 
 
 13. SeeyaS. -'Is thought of.' 
 
 14. avadit, Vvad, 898, 899c. Aorists are 
 not very uncommon in this poem, though 
 very few have been met before in this 
 Reader. See 826. U.f. kim yuddhena? 
 astu ayam panas. See Ika 1. 
 
 15. U.f. sas eva etad (= dhanam) haret 
 (163). 
 
 16. See under iti2. -mudha, 223*. 
 
 17. U.f. adhy-asya, ud-apatat vyoma. 
 19. Vtr+ava, with abl.
 
 [335] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 48. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 46. 
 
 1. SELECTION XXIII. Story of Mousey, 
 the thrifty merchant. Katha-sarit-sagara, 
 Tarafiga, vi.28. It is introduced as a story 
 which Gunadhya hears on his return to 
 Supratisthita see p. 383, 52. It may be 
 called a kind of pendant to selection xix. 
 It is identical with the Cullaka-setthi Jataka, 
 no. 4(vol.L), transl., i.p.168. 
 
 2. 'By me, utterly without (vina eva) 
 capital, wealth was gained' (v'sad+a, caus.). 
 
 4. man-matus, abl., 'from my mother:' 
 man-, 161, 494. 
 
 5. tad-bhayat: tad- (494) =tebhyas, i.e. 
 gotrajebhyas. See garbha3. 
 
 7. 'And there was I born, (as the=) to 
 be the means of support of that excellent- 
 woman. 1 
 
 8. See Vvrdh, caus. kurvati, 714 5 . 
 9-1O. U.f. atha abhy-arthya. See 
 
 v'gakB 1. Lit., ' And then by her, the sad 
 one, having entreated a teacher, I was grad- 
 ually made to learn writing and ciphering 
 somewhat.' 
 
 13. For gen. w. v'da, 297a. 
 
 15-16. agamam, 846. so 'pi marks 
 beg. of new clause and is little more than a 
 6 df with vicjakhilah. 'Thus (i.e. as fol- 
 lows, lines 17-20) spake (854) to a certain / 
 
 17-18. See 1 idam, near end. panyena, 
 appositive to etena. 
 
 19. punar : the antithesis is between a 
 dead mouse and good hard cash. 
 
 The Roman denarius had long been 
 known to the Hindus. The borrowed word 
 appears, e.g., in an inscription of the time 
 of Kumiira Gupta (ca. 430 A.D., Ind. Ant. 
 xv. 192), given by Gen. Cunningham, Arch. 
 Survey of India Reports, iii. 54-56. 
 
 20. See \stha7. te 'pi (sc. dinaras), 
 ' even the principal.' 
 
 22. tvattas, 1098a. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 47. 
 
 1-2. Construe: asya sampute (see this) 
 tarn ( = ' mouse') likhitva, gato 'bhuvam 
 (829) aham, so 'pi ahasat. 
 
 3-4. -yugmena, instr. of price, 281b: 
 mul-, appositive. marj- depends on krte; 
 and the other genitives go w. dattas, 297a. 
 
 7-8. Construe : aham grantagataya 
 -samghaya adam (829) ambhas, etc. 
 
 9-1O. dve dve, see dva : ' two apiece,' 
 1260. -U.f. vikritavan (960) apane. 
 
 11-12. See tatas5 : the second is a mere 
 stop-gap. See Vhr+a. 
 
 13-14. maya, logical subject of kritam : 
 tebhyas, abl. 
 
 15-16. Loc. absolute. The rains made 
 the roads impassable for the wood-men, 
 -pan-, 486b. -gatais, 281b. 
 
 19-20. ' A golden mouse was sent (1042d) 
 by me, making (it), to that V.; and he gave 
 (adat) .' 
 
 21-22. See Vsidh-fpra. -U.f. laksmls 
 iyam. sata, ' being.' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 48. 
 
 1. SELECTION XXIV. King Cibi, the fal- 
 con, and the dove. Katha-sarit-sagara, Tar. 
 vii.88. This story is famous, old, and wide- 
 spread. It is of distinctly Buddhistic origin 
 and character see S. Beal, Si-yu-ki, i. p. 125 
 and note. Benfey, Pancatantra, i. p. 388 f, 
 gives a great many Buddhist and other 
 parallels. It occurs in the Jataka as no. 499 
 (vol. iv.). It is frequently figured on Bud- 
 dhist sculptures : so on the tope of Amarava- 
 ti see James Fergusson, Tree and Serpent 
 Worship, 2 plate Ixxxiii. 1, and p. 225, and 
 plate Ix. left, and p. 194 ; also on the great 
 Javan temple of Boro Boudour. The Ama- 
 ravati tope dates from about the beginning 
 of our era see J. Burgess, Arch. Survey of 
 Southern India (Amaravati, etc.), p. 12, 101. 
 
 In the Cariya-pitaka, Pali text, ed. 
 Morris, p. 77, C, ibi appears as an incarnation 
 of the Future Buddha. Sakka, in the form 
 of a blind old beggar, asks him for one of 
 his eyes, and he gladly gives up both of 
 them. This is represented in a mural paint- 
 ing of a cave at Ajanta J. Burgess, Cave 
 Temples of India, p. 315. Beal gives a 
 Chinese version of the story in his Buddhist 
 Literature in China, p. 31-41. And the tale 
 occurs in Mohammedan forms with Moses 
 in place of C, ibi, and Michael and Gabriel in 
 place of Indra and Dharma (or Agni). 
 
 In Sanskrit works the C,ibi-story is 
 common. We find it in the Southern Pan-
 
 NOTES TO i 
 PAGE 48. ' 
 
 [336] 
 
 catantra, French version by J.-A. Dubois, 
 p. 173. It occurs three times in the MBh. 
 It is told at iii. 130.21 = 10557, of Uclnara, 
 the father of Qibi (translated by P. E. Fou- 
 caux, Le MBh., Onze Episodes, p. 231); a^ 
 iii.!97.1 = 13274, of Qibi himself; and at 
 xiii.32.3 = 2046, of Vrsadarbha, the son of 
 
 C/ibi Asmara is the traditional author 
 of RV. x.l 79.1, and seems to be the heros 
 eponymos of a clan that dwelt between the 
 Indus and Akesines. See Zimmer, Altin- 
 disches Leben, p. 130, 431. 
 
 1. King Su9arman, having been deceived 
 by a Gana in the form of a Brahman, says, 
 " This is no Brahman, but a god come to 
 deceive me ; for such things are constantly 
 happening in this world ; and so (tatha ca 
 introducing the following story as a similar 
 instance), in old times, there was (abhtlt) a 
 king, etc." 
 
 2. U.f. sarva-sattva^abhaya-pradas, 
 ' giving a feeling of safety to all creatures : ' 
 see 29%. 
 
 3-4. The inf. denotes purpose: cf. 987 
 w. 982. ' Indra himself, having taken on 
 , pursued (anv-apatat) Dharma' see 
 dharma3. 
 
 5. U.f. ankam aQicriyat: see VgriS; for 
 aorist, 859, 864. 
 
 7. 'This (is my) proper food. Surrender 
 (758) to me (297a) .' 
 
 8. For Indra and the reader, who know 
 the secret of the dove's real nature, there is 
 a play upon the word dharmas. 
 
 9-1O. U.f. enam (274b) a-tyajyas; tad 
 ('therefore') dadami anyad tava (297a). 
 
 11. See evam. atma-, see 18 16 N. See 
 747. 
 
 13. See yathaS. Vkrt+ud. aropayat, 
 1042e end. 
 
 15-16. See Vruh+adhi. - U.f. " tu 
 etad " divya vak ud-abhut. ' " That in- 
 deed is equal"', referring to the promise 
 contained in line 10, etat-samam. 
 
 18-19. U.f. tustau aks- (pred. adj.) 
 dattva (991, 955c) ca anyan tau 
 iyatus (783b2). 
 
 2O. SELECTION XXV. Story of Ahalya. 
 
 Katha-sarit-sagara, Tar. xvii.137. C, aci is a 
 pattern of wifely virtue, but Indra does not 
 requite her with equal fidelity. His amours 
 are as notorious as those of Zeus. Indra is 
 invoked with the words ahalyayai jara, as 
 early as the QB. (iii.3.4 18 ). He is reproached 
 for his affair with Ahalya, at MBh. v.12.6 = 
 373; and this is narrated at length in the 
 Ramayana, i.48 Schlegel, or i.49 Gorresio. 
 His attempt upon Ruci is told at MBh. xiii. 
 40. 16 = 2262, excerpted by Muir, Texts, i 2 .466. 
 Later books smooth over these immoralities 
 by interpreting them allegorically see 
 Miiller, Ancient Skt. Lit., p. 529. So Holtz- 
 mann, ZDMG. xxxii.302 (cf. 294); Muir, 
 Texts, iv 2 .48. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 49. 
 
 2. U.f. -lubdhas (Vlubh) tarn. - See 
 Varthaya+pra, 959 and 960. 
 
 3. Construe : matis pra-, vibhuti-andha, 
 dhavati avisaye. 
 
 4-5. U.f. sa anu-mene (794e) ; tad 
 ('that occurrence') ca prabhavatas (1098, 
 291 2 ) buddhva (160), tatra agat . 
 
 6-7. SeeVlkr3. -See sthita4. 
 
 8-9. ' She answered her husband with a 
 speech, (provincially ambiguous, i.e.) am- 
 biguous on account of its dialect, (but yet) 
 having some regard for (verbal) truth, " This 
 is, of course, a cat or my lover"' see 
 majjao. Gautama takes it in the latter 
 sense and replies tvaj-jara. 
 
 11. ' He caused to fall on her a curse, 
 truth-regard-limited' (-klptantam), i.e. not 
 an endless curse, but one with a definite 
 limit, because she did not lie outright. 
 
 12. The curse. ava^apnuhi, 703. 
 
 13. The limit cf. p. 333, 51. -See 
 a 4 and 293c. -See 2antara 1. -'Until 
 forest-interior-wan dering-Raghava-sight, i .e. 
 till thou seest R. wandering in the wood.' 
 " Rama removed the guilt of Ahalya by 
 merely looking at her," says the Visnu- 
 purana, iv.4.42. 
 
 14. datta-capas, 1299, 1308. -yayau, 
 800c. 
 
 16. SELECTION XXVI. The king who 
 didn't know his Sanskrit grammar. Katlii-
 
 [337] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 I PAGE 58. 
 
 sarit-sagara, Tar. vi.108-164, omitting 111- 
 112, 124-133a, 154-158, 161-162. Ksemen- 
 dra gives this story in brief at vi.35-52, 
 Journ. As., 8.yi.446. The king is called 
 Satavahana ; but this is merely the family 
 name of a dynasty that reigned in the north- 
 west of the Deccan in the first and second 
 centuries of our era. See Oldenberg, Ind. 
 Ant., x.225 f. Carvavarman was a prote'ge' of 
 this family p. 334, 52. Somadeva, as 
 we saw, makes Harsa a descendant of C,ata- 
 vahana ; and for the last, he adds (vii.13), 
 C/arvavarman wrote the easy grammar called 
 Katantra Biihler, Report, p. 74. 
 
 16-17. Gunadhya, who had been inter- 
 rupted by Kanabhuti, resumes his story here 
 with tatas. adhy-asta, 620. tad, 
 'that' (garden), whose creation by Durga 
 (see deva2c), Gunadhya had narrated a little 
 before (vi.84). It was just outside of the 
 capital of Pratisthana (p. 333). 
 
 19. Vtr+ava, 957b. Inf. of purpose. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 6O. 
 2. ' C, irisa-delicate-limbed, i.e. having 
 limbs as delicate as a C. blossom.' U.f. 
 abhy-agat. 
 
 4. 'She said "Don't with water (ma 
 udakais cf. line 8) pelt me." ' He under- 
 stands it as " With comfits (modakais) pelt 
 me." 
 
 5. anayayat, \lni+a, caus. imf. 
 
 7. rajann, 210. See 2antara 1. 
 
 8. The order of the words is inverted to 
 remove the ambiguity. iti uktam tava 
 (297a), < Thus I said to thee.' 
 
 9. 'Knowest thou not the mere (matra2) 
 euphonic combination of the ma-word and 
 the udaka-word ? ' 
 
 12. hasati, present ppl., loc. absolute. 
 -akrantas, 955a. See jhat-iti. 
 
 13. ' Having abandoned-water-play,' 1308. 
 14-15. U.f. pra_avigat muhyan 
 
 aharadi-. 
 
 17-18. Construe: " garanam me ('sti) 
 p- va, mrtyus va" iti . 'Having 
 bed-thrown-limbs,' v'2as+pari-ni. 
 
 19-2O. Construe: parijanas, drstva, 
 abhavat sambhrantas, "kim etad" iti 
 (' saying " What's that ? " '). 
 
 21-23. aham, i.e. Gunadhya. tarn, 
 i.e. avastham. pary-ahiyata, 770b. 
 pratar avam (' I. and C/.'). 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 51. 
 
 1-2. sarvasya, subjective gen. w. pravege, 
 which is loc. absol. w. ruddhe. See ka- 
 tham. mama begins new clause. See 
 pagca. 
 
 3-4. Construe: nrpas vijnaptas (1042d 2 ) 
 maya, upavigya . See Vvrt7. 
 
 5-6. 'S., tho' he heard it, kept silent 
 (just so, tatha eva, i.e.) nevertheless.' See 
 Vlas4. U.f. tatas ca idam. 
 
 7-8. U.f . kuru " iti prak tena 
 adya nigi see adya. 
 
 9-1O. See svapna. U.f . nabhasas cyu- 
 tam (nom.) see Vcyu4. See Vkas+vi. 
 
 11-12. tasmat= ambujat. dhavala^ 
 ambara, like the one Socrates sees, Crito4A. 
 
 13. iyat (451) drstva. See vmanl. 
 
 15-16. ' Q. having thus announced his 
 vision' see \[lvid+ni and 1308- U.f. 
 asta-maunas avadat. 
 
 17-18. The question goes to pandityam. 
 
 See Vgak Bl, pass, of caus. of desid. 
 kalena: for instr., 281c. Similarly var- 
 sais, line 21. 
 
 19. tena = pandityena. esa, 'this' 
 that you see about me. na pratibhasate 
 = ' sordet.' 
 
 20. Observe caesura, and see Ika 1. 
 ' What pray has a fool to do with power, as 
 it were a block with ornaments ? ' i.e. he has 
 no more to do , than a block . 
 
 21-22. In the introduction to the PaS- 
 catantra, also, the time needed for learning 
 Sanskrit grammar is put at twelve years. 
 
 See muklin I. 
 
 23. See Vgak Bl, caus. tad = grammar. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 52. 
 
 2. kuryat, Vlkr 1. 
 
 5-7. Protasis ends w. ced : tatas begins 
 apodosis ; ' then by me are renounced (tyak- 
 tam) these three languages which pass cur- 
 rent ' (\/bhu-fsam3). See p. 334, 52. See 
 tadvat. Ksemendra (vi.52) has apa- 
 bhranga for Somadeva's degabhasa. Both 
 of these terms denote indeed a Prakrit
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 52. 
 
 [338] 
 
 dialect; but, in contrast with the word 
 prakrtam in this connection, they denote a 
 vernacular of a lower order than prakrtam. 
 
 8-9. U.f. na ced evam , -abdan (276) 
 vahami esas : esas, emphatic, ' I, this 
 one/ 'I, (y. here, (will) carry .' 
 
 10-11. tasminn=C.. agamam. 846. 
 
 See vman 1. 
 
 12. ca vihastah is Boehtlingk's emen- 
 dation for cavfhastah. 
 
 15. ' Without S., no other way of escape 
 appears.' She is led to look to S. or Kumara 
 for help, because a kumara (see this) opened 
 the lotus (51 10 ). Tawney. Weber con- 
 jectured that the war-god Skanda owed his 
 name and existence to Alexander the Great. 
 
 18. Caesura. 19. prapa, 783c 2 . 
 
 21. ' Showed (Vlkr 1) favor to him (tasya, 
 297a), i.e. to C. .' 
 
 22-23. ' Having magic power by K.'s gift.' 
 
 See cintitop- : for a like magic, see 45 13 . 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 53. 
 1-2. U.f. pradus asan ca tas (sciences) 
 tasya ( = dat.) tatksanam. hi (163). 
 
 3. SELECTION XXVII. The pathetic his- 
 tory of the stories. Katha-sarit-sagara, Tar. 
 viii. It forms Ksemendra's eighth chapter 
 (of only 16 couplets), Jour. As., 8.vi.449. 
 For a general explanation of the Taranga, 
 see p. 333, 51f . 
 
 3-4. 'So, by G's request (vii.113), that 
 tale was told by K. in his own (pigaca) 
 dialect.' 
 
 5-6. 'And by G., likewise in (lit. with) 
 that dialect, in (lit. with, 281c) seven years 
 (varsais), it (sa) was written down as seven 
 couplet-lacs' (appositively). 
 
 7-8. U.f. ma (580) harsus (882) iti : 
 ' Thinking " Let them not steal it," i.e. Fear- 
 ing lest they might.' 
 
 Both Somadeva and Ksemendra state 
 that the stories were written down in blood : 
 S. gives the lack of ink as a reason; K. 
 gives none. But the statement may rest on 
 a popular superstition like the Germanic 
 one which ascribes peculiar virtues to pure 
 spittle (cf. also St. Mark viii.23) and to 
 blood. Life rests in the blood, the " vital 
 
 fluid " ; from it a drink of immortality is 
 made; and with it pacts are made or sub- 
 scribed (cf. Faust, 1. 1383). 
 
 At present (1878), all available informa- 
 tion points to a Phoenician-Aramaic origin 
 of the Indian alphabets. Writing was prob- 
 ably introduced not earlier than 400 B.C., 
 and was, certainly, little used in India before 
 250 B.C. So says Burnell, Palaeography, 2 p. 9. 
 See also Whitney, 2. The material was 
 the palm-leaf, and in Ka9mir, birch-bark. 
 Paper was introduced by the Mohammedans, 
 i.e. not till after 1000 A.D. For ink, see 
 masi in vocab. 
 
 9-1O. ' The sky (ambaram) became filled 
 (nirantaram) with S. etc., who came (aya- 
 tais) to listen, [became filled or covered] as 
 if (iva) with a canopy.' 
 
 12. See v'gam4. K. was orig. a yaksa, 
 see p. 333, 51. gapa-muktas would be 
 better. 
 
 15-16. ' I must make my B. famous on 
 earth; and this business (of making it so) 
 was enjoined on (lit. announced to, ud-Iritas) 
 me by Durga when she told how my curse 
 would end (lit. in the declaration, -uktau, of 
 the end, -anta-).' See p. 333, 51. 
 
 19-20. The two nominatives in 1. 19 are 
 in partitive apposition to gisyau ubhau, 
 the subject of ucatus. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 54. 
 
 I. Explained under sthana6. 
 
 4. pra^ahinot, 192c. -dattva: cf . 991 
 w. 955c. 
 
 6. The garden mentioned at 49 17 see N. 
 
 7-8. ' That MS. was shown to S. (geni- 
 tive, 297 a 2 ) with the words "This is G's 
 work.'" The gender of the pred. deter- 
 mines that of the subject, esa. 
 
 II. See pramana. " The length of the 
 poem (700,000 distichs) is a weighty argu- 
 ment in its favor, but " This is quite in 
 accord with later Hindu taste. As if the 
 100,000 distichs of the extant MBh. were not 
 enough, the preface (MBh. i.l.!06a = 104c) 
 tells us that there was a version of 3,000,000 
 couplets for the use of the gods. Fortu- 
 nately their years were lengthened out so as 
 to give them plenty of time to hear it see
 
 [339] 
 
 I NOTES TO 
 I PAGE 56. 
 
 68 8 N. The Manes had to get along with a 
 version of 1,500,000. Gunadhya is said 
 (54- 2 , 56 1 ) to keep only one-seventh of his 
 poem ; but even this is an exaggeration (it 
 contains less than 22,000 couplets p. 331). 
 Similarly Manu is said to have been abridged 
 from 100,000 to 12,000 and then to 4,000. 
 It contains less than 3,000 strictly, 2685, 
 cf. p. 341, 56. 
 
 18. vivikta-ramya-, 1257 : Vvic+vi. 
 bhubhagam, in appos. w. gil-. 
 
 19-2O. Viks+vi. Mvac and gru, caus. 
 
 23. U.f. tasmin pathati, loc. absol. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 55. 
 
 1-3. These three lines and the preceding 
 line make one sentence ; the last word is the 
 subject. pari-tyakta-, ' having abandoned 
 grass-food, quitting their pasturage.' U.f. 
 asan abhyetya (Vi+abhy-a, 992) : cf. sam- 
 etya, line 10. 
 
 Compare the story of Orpheus. In the 
 MBh., iv.39.6 = 1290, horses shed tears. The 
 horses of Achilles lament the death of Pa- 
 troklos, II. 17.426 : cf. Pliny, Nat. Hist., viii. 
 42 = 64. 
 
 5. See Vvad4. Seeja. 
 
 8-9. U.f. ucus girau ko 'pi . 
 
 14-15. ' He saw him completely (abhitas) 
 overspread (V3kr) with tangled locks, (that 
 were) like (iva) the smoke of what was left 
 of the fire of his curse, which was [practi- 
 cally] extinguished ' [but still smouldering ; 
 for G. was almost, but not quite, released 
 from his ban p. 334]. 
 
 Lit., 'as it were, the smoke-of-extin- 
 guished-remaining-curse-fire.' The long cpd 
 receives a fern. pi. ending to conform w. 
 jatabhis; but it is a genitively dependent 
 subst. (1264 not adj.) cpd, whose prior 
 member, praganta-gesagapagni, is a descrip- 
 tive noun cpd (1280); gesa-gapagni, again, 
 is a descriptive noun cpd (1280) ; and gapa_ 
 agni, finally, is a descriptive noun cpd 
 (1280b),with a bold metaphor. Cf. Katha- 
 sarit-sagara, xix.104. 
 
 18 a . ' (The adventures) of himself as P.': 
 there is no objection to this grammatically 
 (cf. Tji ^ufj X e 'pl nauAoy) ; but G. and P. were 
 never identical see p. 334. The reading 
 puspadantasya ca svam ca would be correct 
 in sense and metre. 
 
 19. katha^avataram tarn is in apposition 
 w. -cestitam; 'the adventures (which were 
 that coming down, i.e.) which were the occa- 
 sion of that coming down of the divine story 
 from heaven to earth.' 
 
 20. See gana2. ' Recognizing him 
 as .' U.f. pada^anatas, \narn. See 
 p. 333, 61. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 56. 
 
 1. See lidam, end. ' But here are 100,000 
 (making) one story ; take that.' Compare 
 the story of the Sibyl. 
 
 3-4. See Vmantraya+a, and pada4. 
 
 5-6. Metre, arya, p. 316, 44. -U.f. 
 adaya agat (830) nija-. The long cpd 
 (q.v.) goes w. katham. 
 
 7-8. Metre, as before. The dual cpd 
 is in the accusative see Vbhaj +sam-vi 2. 
 For the long cpd, see 1253a. 
 
 9-1O. Metre, as before. ' And with 
 (the help of) those two, King S., having 
 comforted that Katha, in order to narrate 
 (vaktum) her or its descent-to-earth in that 
 (paigaci) dialect, composed (cakre) the 
 Kathapltha.' This is the name of the pre- 
 fatory lambaka ; but there is a double mg, 
 ' he made the pedestal of Katha (personified), 
 the next book being called ' head of K./ 
 Kathamukha. He consoles ( Vgvas + a, gerund 
 of caus.) Katha or Story, by studying it, 
 and so atoning for the indignity he had 
 offered it, 54 12 . 
 
 11-12. Metre, rathoddhata, p. 316, 43. 
 'And that Story, full of varied beauties, 
 made men forget the stories of the gods 
 [lit. (was) possessing forgotten god-stories], 
 by reason of its interest (kutuhalat, 291 2 ). 
 Then (atra3), after accomplishing that in 
 the city, it attained to uninterrupted fame 
 in the three worlds.'
 
 INTHODUCTION TO THE 
 
 MANAVA-DHABMA-9ASTKA. 
 
 [340] 
 
 SELECTION XXVIII. 
 EXTRACTS FROM THE MANAVA-DHARMA-C.ASTRA. 
 
 53. BIBLIOGRAPHICAL. The Manu literature is now very extensive, 
 several of the most important and recent works need be mentioned here. 
 
 Only 
 
 Arthur C. Burnell and Edward W. Hopkins. The 
 ordinances of Manu. Translated from the Sanskrit. 
 With an introduction. London, Triihner & Co. 
 1884. 8. Price 12 shillings. 
 
 George Biihler. The laws of Manu. Translated 
 with extracts from seven commentaries. [= SBE. 
 vol. xiv.] Oxford, at the Clarendon Press. 1886. 
 8. Price 21 shillings. The volume contains an 
 elaborate and valuable introduction. 
 
 Julius Jolly. Manava Dharma-castra, the code of 
 Manu. Original Sanskrit text, with critical notes. 
 London, Triibner & Co. May, 1887. 8. Price 10 
 shillings 6 pence. 
 
 Burnell's introduction contains an argument on 
 the date of our Manu text. Professor Hopkins has 
 summed up and criticised this argument (JAOS. 
 xiii. p. xxviii = PAOS. May, 1885), and concludes 
 that it brings us not one step nearer a solution of 
 the problem. 
 
 Biihler's introduction (p. civ-cxviii) givesalearned 
 discussion of the date. Of this, Hopkins makes a 
 resume (JAOS. xiii. p. cxcviii= PAOS. May, 1887). 
 He finds Biibler's conclusions probable, but does not 
 think them absolutely proved by .the proofs adduced. 
 
 The text-edition of Loiseleur Deslongchamps 
 (Paris, 1830) is hardly obtainable now. It is safe 
 
 to say that Jolly's robs all preceding ones of their 
 value, inasmuch as it is the result of far-reaching 
 critical studies. The principal places in which Jolly's 
 text varies from that of the Reader are i.97; ii.11,76, 
 125; xii.23,37,42,45,90,95,96. 
 
 The general theory of the origin of the Laws of 
 Manu was summed up and criticised by Whitney 
 (JAOS. xiii. p. xxx = PAOS. May, 1885). Meantime, 
 however, BUhler's Introduction has put the question 
 in a new light. 
 
 The relations of our text to the Maha-bharata are 
 ably discussed by Hopkins, JAOS. xi.239-275 (cf. 
 PAOS. Oct., 1883). Here may be found, conveniently 
 assembled, quotations from Manu in the Sutras and 
 inscriptions, the legendary material about him in the 
 Epic, and a careful discussion of the passages in the 
 Epic which profess to be the declarations of a per- 
 sonal Manu. 
 
 By way of calling attention to the interesting sub- 
 ject of the knowledge of the Greeks concerning India, 
 occasional citations are given. The references to 
 Strabo's TeiaypafaKa. (of which book xv., chap. 1, 
 1-73 describe India) follow Casaubon's paging. 
 
 The following introduction is in the main a brief 
 abstract of some of the more important points of 
 Biihler's introduction. 
 
 54. The native tradition respecting the origin of the Manava-dharma-castra 
 takes the book to be the work of an individual law-giver. In accordance with this 
 tradition, until quite recently, it has been usual for English writers to call the 
 treatise ' The Laws of Manu.' And this designation may still be used, provided 
 only it be used with an intelligent mental reservation, which takes due account of 
 the results of modern criticism. For in the light of critical study, the figure of 
 Manu, as a historical person, fades away ; but, on the other hand, we find that Manu 
 as a name is one of the greatest and most reverend of the Hindu antiquity. Ques- 
 tions thus arise : Whence the greatness of this name ? What was the real origin of 
 this law-book, and how came it to be called Manavan ? 
 
 55. The word manu originally means simply ' man ' (see vocabulary). As 
 we speak of human beings as the ' children of men,' so the Rig-veda speaks of them 
 as the 'offspring of man ' (manu) ; and in this way arose the conception of a personal 
 Manu, the father of mankind. He is, in fact, the heros eponymos of the human race. 
 
 In the Veda 1 he appears as ' Father Manu, child of the Sun,' as a holy seer, the 
 originator of prayer, praise, and sacrifice, and as the object of the special favor of 
 the gods. In the Brahmanas, Manu is the progenitor of the new race after the flood. 
 That he was regarded as a type of wisdom, is evidenced by the ancient saw, ' What- 
 ever Manu said, that is medicine ' (TS.ii.2.10 2 ). And again, that he was an eminent 
 type of goodness appears from the fact that his actions came to be looked upon as 
 
 1 For the Vedic legend of his birth, see 85 15 N. The 27-31. For ancient legends about Manu, see Buhler's 
 ancillary books make Manu the author of RV. viii. Manu, p. Iviif; Muir, i 2 .161f, and esp. 181f.
 
 P3411 I INTRODUCTION TO THB 
 
 L -I I MANAVA-DHARMA-fASTRA 
 
 examples highly worthy of imitation. Thus the Veda says (TS.iii.1.9 4 ), 'Manu 
 divided his property among his sons ' ; and this is quoted by Baudhayana in his 
 Dharma-sutra as such an example. Such simple beginnings are entirely natural ; but 
 they are also sufficient to show how, with the growth of legal literature, the authors 
 of law-books came to cite all kinds of (supposititious) sayings and doings of Manu as 
 authoritative precedent. For, after the custom of referring to Manu as authority 
 was once started, the oftener he was thus cited, the greater his factitious authority 
 and the temptation to cite him would become. Accordingly, if we examine the four 
 oldest Dharma-sutras, we find much more frequent reference to Manu in Vasistha, 
 the latest of them, than in Gautama, the oldest. And thus, at last, what had been 
 a mere name, a part of the traditional inheritance of the mythical past, attained to 
 greatness as a personal authority and actual law-giver. 
 
 56. Before proceeding to our other questions, let us rehearse briefly the native 
 account of the origin of the work. In Sanskrit, the book is entitled manava : and 
 this may mean either 'of Manu ' or ' of the Manavans.' The Hindus say, 'of Manu ' ; 
 and accordingly the opening stanzas represent the great sages as approaching ' Manu, 
 the son of the Self-existent,' and asking him to declare unto them the law. He 
 accedes ; but deems it necessary to go back to a time before the Creation, in order 
 to show how he derives his lineage (Manu i.33), and hence also his authority, 
 directly from the Supreme One, Brahmdn. 'He,' says Manu (i.58-60), 'composed 
 this law-book, and taught it to me alone in the beginning ; I taught it to Bhrgu ; 
 and Bhrgu will recite it to you.' 
 
 Bhrgu accordingly takes up Manu's cosmogonical discourse, continues with an 
 account of the Four Ages and of other matters, dwells on the excellence of Manu's 
 Laws, and ends book first with a table of contents of the twelve books of which 
 the treatise consists. And in order that we may not forget that it is all (or all but 
 i. 1-60) put into the mouth of Bhrgu, we are frequently reminded of the situation 
 by an ' I will next declare ' or the like, especially at the beginning of books v. and 
 xii., where Bhrgu is mentioned by name as the promulgator of the laws in question. 
 In accordance with all this, the work is entitled the Bhrgu-samhita of the Manava- 
 dharma-castra, and it may conveniently be so designated. It contains 2685 9lokas 
 or 5370 lines ; compare 54 U N. 
 
 57. For the incredibility of this native account the reasons are near at hand. 
 First, all the passages involving Bhrgu as promulgator of the work can be separated 
 from the rest as easily as a picture-frame from the canvas which it surrounds. 
 Indeed, the entire first book is a most palpable later addition. And, more than this, 
 Bhrgu himself is cited (at iii.16), with three others, as an authority on a disputed 
 point. Clearly, the later editors of the work were nodding here ; else they would 
 have expunged this stanza. And who knows how many more of a like sort they 
 may have expunged ? 
 
 Moreover, against the claim that Manu (to say nothing of the Supreme Spirit), 
 was the author and the first law-giver, the case is equally plain. For the work 
 appeals to the authority of Manu here and there, just as the other works of its class 
 do, thus showing that its earlier editors at least did not pretend that Manu was the 
 author of the whole. NOT .was he a law-giver without predecessors or rivals ; else 
 we should not find, as we do, divergent opinions of other ancient sages cited along 
 with what purports to be his. Moreover, the work itself (ii.6 = 58 14 f) admits that
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 MANAVA-DHABMA-CASTRA. 
 
 [342] 
 
 the law is based on the Veda, the usage of virtuous men, etc.; and it plainly men- 
 tions (at iii.232) Dharma-^astras, which must be either contemporaneous, or else 
 earlier than itself. 
 
 58. Secondly, then, What was the real origin of the work ? The first half of 
 the answer is as follows. The Vedic works, as explained below, fall into the three 
 classes of Samhita, Brahmana, and Sutra. Chief among the works of the last class is 
 the Kalpa-sutra, or ' Ceremony-rules.' No Kalpa work had catholic validity among 
 all Brahman families. On the contrary, many of the most important old families 
 had each its own Kalpa-sutra. In these clannish differences, doubtless, originated 
 the Caranas or ' Schools,' in which Brahman science was cultivated and sacred tradi- 
 tion handed down from generation to generation. Thus among the adherents of the 
 Black Yajur-veda, we find the family of Apastamba; and, bearing his name, we find 
 not only a Brahmana, but also a complete Kalpa-sutra in its three subdivisions 
 of Qrauta-sutra or ' Rules for the fire-sacrifices,' Grhya-sutra or ' Domestic usages,' 
 and Dharma-sutra or 'Sacred law.' The Kalpa-sutra of Baudhayana doubtless had 
 a similar make-up. Good editions of various Grhya- and Dharma-sutras are now 
 accessible in text and translation. They treat l of the sacraments, of the duties of a 
 Brahman in the various stages of his life, as student, householder, hermit, beggar, 
 of the duties of a king, of the law of inheritance, and so on. 
 
 Now these are the very subjects treated also in the Dharma-<;astras. But there 
 is one great difference, the difference of form. The Sutras are in mingled prose and 
 verse, the latter including both tristubh and anustubh stanzas; while the C.astras are 
 in the ordinary epic gloka. To a mind acquainted with the veriest rudiments of 
 criticism it is quite clear from their form and language alone that the Qastras are 
 later than the Sutras a view which is in entire accord with the stanza ii.6=58 14 , 
 cited above. The conclusion, then, that the Dharma-9astras, in general, as shown by 
 their contents and form, are the outgrowth, by a very natural process of evolution, 
 from the Dharma-sutras, is unimpeached. 
 
 59. The other half of our answer is that the Manava-dharma-9astra, in par- 
 ticular, is a later metrical recast of a lost Manava-dharma-sutra : in other words, that it 
 is the 'Law-book of the Manavans.' This is a particular thesis, quite different from 
 the general conclusion just stated ; and, although very widely accepted, it is not 
 universally so. The theory 2 of this connection proceeds as follows. Among the 
 schools of the Black Yajur-veda, especially among those of the Maitrayaniya branch 
 thereof, we find the school of the Manavans. 8 According to the investigations of 
 Dr. von Schroder, 4 the Maitrayaniya seems to have been one of the oldest and most 
 important of all the schools of the Yajus-period. 5 Of these Maitrayanlyas there are 
 .still some representatives surviving in Western India ; and their Sutras are entitled 
 Manava-sutras. Manuscripts of the Manava-crauta-sutra and the Manava-grhya- 
 sutra are still extant. 6 
 
 60. Unfortunately, the Manava-dharma-sutra, the link most important to 
 connect our Bhrgu-saihhita with the Vedic schools, is still missing. The researches 
 
 1 Compare p. 358, 96f, below. 
 
 2 This theory was hroached by "Weber (I8t. i.69) 
 and Miiller (see SEE. ii. p. zi) in 1849. It was con- 
 firmed or elaborated by Johantgen in 1863, Das 
 Gesetzbuch des Manu, p. lOOf ; by West and Buhler 
 in 1867, see Digest, p. 27; by Schroder in 1879, Mo- 
 natsberichte der Berliner Akad. for 1879, p. 700, and 
 
 in 1881, ed. of Maitrayanl-samhita, i. p. XVIII; and 
 finally by Buhler in 1887, in his Manu, p. xviii-xlv. 
 
 3 Bee Carana-vyuha, I8t. iii.258. 
 
 4 In the places just cited. 
 
 8 Compare p. 356, 90, below. 
 See ZDMG. ixxvi.442-48, where von Bradke 
 describes some of them, and states their contents.
 
 [343] 
 
 i INTBODUCTION TO THE 
 
 j MANAVA-UHAHMA-yASTUA. 
 
 of von Bradke, 1 too, failed to show any striking correspondences between the 
 Manava-grhya-sutra and our treatise. But, on the other hand, Buhler has dis- 
 covered 2 important correspondences between it and the Manava-^raddha-kalpa. 
 Moreover, as has been repeatedly pointed out, 8 the Dharma-sutra of Vasistha con- 
 tains a quotation (iv.5-8) which has every appearance of being a veritable fragment 
 of the original Manava-dharrna-sutra. In this quotation we have, first, the prose 
 rule (5) ; next, the stanzas which support it (6, 7), and which agree entirely or 
 nearly with Manu v. 41 and 48; and, last, a Vedic passage (8) to support both rule 
 and stanzas. This is the arrangement usual in the Dharma-sutras. And the prose 
 rule (5) is characterized by the words iti manavam as a quotation from the Sutra 
 of a special school ; for works valid for all Aryans are not so cited. 4 
 
 61. Other quotations 5 are found in Vasistha at iii.2, xiii.16, xix.37, and xx.18, 
 in close correspondence respectively with Manu ii.168, iv.117, x.120, and xi.152 of 
 our text, and introduced by the formula, ' And on this point they quote a Manavan 
 stanza.' From this, one might think that Vasistha was quoting from our Bhrgu- 
 saihhita. But this inference is barred by the evident posteriority of our text, as 
 shown by its form and by other general considerations, and in particular by the fact 
 that the stanza at xix.37 is in the tristubh metre. We conclude, then, that the 
 Manava-dharma-sutra known to Vasistha closely resembled our text, but was not 
 identical with it. 
 
 62. Now granting all that precedes, there is a very strong inherent probability 
 in the conclusion that our Bhrgu-samhita is a metrical recast of the Dharma-sutra 
 of the Manavan school. More than this cannot be said; for it is not a necessary 
 conclusion. Its probability, however, has been greatly increased by the considerations 
 respecting the occasion and method of the recast adduced by Buhler. 
 
 63. The occasion was the development (beside the sectarian schools which 
 studied exclusively a single branch of the Veda and the rudimentary works ancillary 
 thereto) of the non-sectarian schools of special sciences, whose teachings claimed 
 validity for all Aryans. In the old Vedic schools, the pupils had to learn the texts 
 of the Mantras and Brahmanas of their sect, and the short ancillary treatises, on 
 ritual, etymology, metre, etc., called Aiigas or 'Limbs' of the Veda. With the 
 development of these subjects to elaborate disciplines, it became impossible for a 
 student to master them all. He must either content himself with a thorough verbal 
 but unintelligent acquaintance with the texts and short treatises of his own sect ; or 
 else he must become a specialist in the ritual, the law, or some other subject, and 
 renounce an extensive knowledge of the sacred texts. 
 
 64. That this truly describes the course of things is shown by the present 
 state of learning in India. A good Vaidik is able to recite all the texts of his branch 
 of the Veda. But in order to have an elaborate sacrifice performed, there is need of 
 a Qrotriya specialist, who, though ignorant of the other Aiigas, is yet a master of 
 the ritual. In the case of two of the Angas, grammar and astronomy, the Vedic 
 schools possess no sectarian text-books of their own. These subjects, it would seem, 
 had been abandoned to the specialists at an early period. For a good while longer 
 the sacred law was cultivated in the Vedic schools, as appears from the existence of 
 
 1 In the ZDMG. xxxvi. 417-77 (1882). 
 
 2 Buhler's Manu, p. xlf. 
 
 3 See Buhler, 8BE. xiv. p. xviii f and esp. 26; 
 Manu, p. xxxi. 
 
 4 See BUbler's Manu, p. xxxvii. 
 * See Hopkins, JAOS. xi.242-43; and cf. Buhler, 
 8BE. xiv. p. xviii-xx.
 
 INTRODUCTION TO_ THE { F344T 
 
 MANAVA-DHAHMA-C ASTRA. ) L J 
 
 the numerous sectarian manuals on the subject. But even in these (see Biihler, 
 Manu, p. lii, p. xxv,N.3) we find mention of persons who know several different law- 
 books, that is, who were specialists in the law. And this fact alone would lead us 
 to infer the existence of special law-schools. 
 
 65. Granting the existence of these schools, we have precisely the combination 
 of circumstances which would lead to the production of such a work as our Manu- 
 text. The schools had before them plenty of Sutra-material, sectarian, of only local 
 validity, unsystematic, and incomplete. In the very nature of things, the schools 
 would tend to be non-sectarian, to widen their influence, and to systematize and com- 
 plete the work of their predecessors. And this is exactly what they have done in our 
 Manu-text. It is absolutely non-sectarian. As contrasted with its forerunners, it 
 emphasizes the practical rather than the moral side of the law, treating strictly legal 
 topics at much greater length. It shows the signs of being a school-book. And 
 finally, it aims at general validity among all Aryans. This explains the fact that 
 our Manu shows so little correspondence with the texts of the Vedic Manavan 
 schools. The recast was the work of men whose interest in their subject exceeded 
 their interest in a sect. 
 
 66. Finally, the greatness of the name of the legendary and semi-divine Manu 
 suggests the reason why a special law-school should have chosen the Manavan 
 Dharma-sutra rather than any other as the basis of their new manual. In con- 
 structing a treatise that aspired to universal acceptance, they must ipso facto with- 
 draw any claim thereto which rested on the high standing of the Sutra-original as a 
 sectarian work. The problem then was, in accomplishing this task, to avoid too 
 violent a break with tradition. Had they taken the Gautama-sutra, and recast it, 
 waiving for it all claim to general validity on the score of Gautama's authority, it 
 would indeed have been a bold proceeding to father it upon Vyasa or Manu or any 
 of the great sages of yore. By choosing the Manava-sutra, after their silent waiver 
 on the one hand, they had only, on the other, to interpret its title expressly as 
 meaning 'of Manu,' when, presto without the smallest offense to tradition or 
 grammar, they had a name of unsurpassed authority to commend their work to the 
 Aryan world. 
 
 67. A great deal of the recast Biihler, p. Ixxiii, thinks one half cannot 
 have been derived from the Sutra-original. The entire first book is most clearly such 
 a later addition ; and such is likewise the twelfth book, whose classification of actions 
 and existences according to the three gunas (66 8 f) is based on the teachings of the 
 Samkhya, Yoga, and Vedanta systems of philosophy. 
 
 What now is the source of these later additions ? The Maha-bharata offers very 
 many correspondences with our Manu-text. A comparative study of the two works 
 shows that the editors of the latter have not drawn on the former, but rather that 
 both works have drawn upon a common stock of popular metrical maxims (Hopkins, 
 JAOS. xi.268), which embodied much of the traditional legal lore, and were ascribed 
 (as is attested by extant inscriptions) now to one and now to another of the ancient 
 mythical sages Vyasa, Manu, and the rest. 
 
 68. As for the method of conversion of the Sutra into our Manu-text, Pro- 
 fessor Biihler is of opinion (p. xcii) that it took place at one time, and that our text 
 is not the result of many successive recasts. 
 
 69. Coming, finally, to the date of the recast, Professor Biihler concludes
 
 [345] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGB 57. 
 
 (p. cxiv, cxvii) that it existed in the second century A.D., and was made between 
 that time and circa 100 B.C. General considerations make this conclusion seem far 
 from improbable. Our Manu-text is doubtless the oldest of the class of secondary 
 law-books, like those of Yajnavalkya and Narada, to which it belongs (p. civ). And 
 again, while it is doubtless posterior to the older portions of the Maha-bharata, our 
 Manu-text in some form or other is probably prior to the later portions of the 
 great Epic, books xii. and xiii. But we do not know the time of Yajnavalkya nor 
 of the Epic; and at present it seems quite vain to seek for an accurate date. 
 
 SYNOPSIS. 
 
 Darkness. The Self-existent 56 
 
 Creation of light and of water 56 18 
 
 Mundane egg. The Vedas. The castes . . . 57 J 
 
 Divisions of time for men ; for Manes ; for gods 57 17 
 
 The four ages of the world 58 2 
 
 Age of the gods. Day of Brahman .... 58 s 
 
 Praise of Hrahmans 58' 
 
 Foundations of the Law 58 14 
 
 The Sacraments (see Note) 59 1 
 
 Name-giving. Names 59 9 
 
 The Brahman's staff. Begging S9 23 
 
 The student. Om. Savitrl 60* 
 
 Etiquette of salutations 60 16 
 
 Dignity of Veda-teacher. Story of Kavi . . 61 15 
 
 Terms of study. Marriage 61 23 
 
 The householder. Precepts and prohibitions . 62 8 
 
 Virtue is the only true friend 63 7 
 
 The struggle for existence 63 21 
 
 Wanton life-taking. Etymology of maftsa . 64 2 
 
 Women. The faithful widow 64 
 
 The forest-hermit. Self-castigation .... 64 16 
 
 The pious mendicant 04 22 
 
 The four orders 65* 
 
 The lunar penance 65 5 
 
 Classification of actions 65 B 
 
 Rewards and punishments 65 19 
 
 The three gunas. Acts classed thereby ... 66 s 
 
 Triple orders of transmigration 67 1 
 
 Transmigrations entailed by special sins . . . 67 19 
 
 Means of gaining bliss 68 s 
 
 Warning against heterodoxy 68 10 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 56. 
 
 15. This account of Creation (9lokas 5-18), 
 with others, is given and translated by Muir, 
 iv 2 . 30f. -See idam. -'Darkness ' cf. 
 RV. x.129.3. 
 
 16. adhya- 1, i.e. prathamo 'dhyayah. 
 
 17-18. ' He, (himself) not-manifest, mak- 
 ing manifest (vy-anjayann) this (universe), 
 the grosser elements and so forth, revealed 
 himself (u.f. pradus aait). 
 
 19-2O. U.f. yas aaau ati- etc., aaa 
 ud-babhau. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 57. 
 
 1-2. Join the ablatives w. siarksus. 
 U.f. apaa adau. Primeval waters: cf. 
 Muir, iv 2 . 24f ; also Strabo, xv.59, p. 713. 
 
 3-4. 'That (seed) became a golden (u.f. 
 haimam) egg, having sun -like splendor 
 
 (prabha).' Brahman is conceived as too 
 distant to be a father; cf. ZDMG.xxxii.295. 
 
 The idea of the mundane egg may be 
 traced to the Veda cf. 91 16 . It plays a 
 part in divers Indian cosmogonies : see 
 C,B. xi. 1.6 1 ; Chandogya Upanisad, iii. 19 
 (SEE. i.54) ; Vianu Parana, i.2.52f (see esp. 
 Wilson's Transl. 2 , i.39f and notes); these 
 passages are given by Muir, iv 2 .24f, 41f . Cf. 
 also Preller, Griech. Mythol., i 8 . 35f; and 
 Pott's Anti-Kaulen, 68f. 
 
 5-6. ' The waters are called " naraa," 
 (because) the waters are indeed the offspring 
 of the Primal Spirit (nara). Since these 
 were his ancient place of motion (ayana), 
 therefore is he called Narayana' ('having 
 the nara = naraa as his ayana,' 1302). This 
 oft-recurring etymology, as found in MBh. 
 and Puranas, is discussed at length by Wilson 
 and Hall in notes to Visnu Purana, i.4.6, 
 Transl. 2 , i.56-8. Cf . Lassen, IA. i 2 .769. For 
 correct derivation, see narayana. 
 
 7-8. 'What (was) that cause (etc. see 
 sadaaadatmaka), thence-created (was) the 
 Purusa, (and) in the world he is called 
 " Brahman." ' Cf . ZDMG. xxxviii.193-4, 206. 
 
 9-10. atmano dhyanat, 'by his medita- 
 tion' (291 2 ). -See Vlkr 10. 
 
 11-12. See Vlma+nia. -See di. 
 
 13-14. U.f. -ravibhyaa. See brahman 
 3. U.f. yajna-aiddhi-artham rc-yajus- 
 saman-laksanam. Cf. AB. v.32. 
 
 15-16. The -taa puts the whole aggrega- 
 tive cpd hi an ablative relation (1098b). 
 The older designation of the second caste 
 was rajanya, which term is used at RV. 
 x.90.12, of which stanza this <;loka is a para- 
 phrase. For many other mythical accounts 
 of the origin of the castes, see Muir, i 2 .7- 
 160, esp. p. 10 and p. 159. 
 
 18 b . ' Day (is) for performance of works.
 
 NOTBS TO j 
 
 PAGE 57. 1 
 
 [346] 
 
 19-2O. The dark and light lunar fort- 
 nights (= one human month) form respec- 
 tively the day and night of the Manes ; for 
 with them everything is reversed. See C. B. 
 ii.4.2 or AJP. iii.403. They are fed once a 
 month. The older Greek division of the 
 month was in two fortnights (cf. Hesiod, 
 Works and Days, 780): gukla = /*V lardnevos ; 
 krsna = priv <f>6iva>v. 
 
 21-22. U.f. ahas tatra (= ratry-ahnos) 
 udag-ayanam. 
 
 23 f. Lit. 'Attend ye to that (tan) which is 
 the extent both of a night-and-day of Brah- 
 man and of the ages.' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 58. 
 
 1. See tu 4. Respecting the ages, see 
 Roth, Ueber den Mythus von den funf Men- 
 schengeschlechtern bei Hesiod und die indische 
 Lehre von den vier Weltaltern, Tubingen, 1860. 
 The conception of a past golden age is com- 
 mon. The scheme of ages as here presented 
 is post-Vedic (see Roth, p. 24f ), and based 
 on the simple descending arithmetical pro- 
 gression, 4, 3, 2, 1. Description of the four 
 ages, MBh. iii.149.11 = 11234, f. Criticism 
 and numerical details : Whitney, JAOS. vi. 
 152f; Visnu Purana, i.S.lOf, Transl. 2 , i.49f; 
 Monier Williams, Indian Wisdom, 333. Gold- 
 en age described by the Brahman KoAacoy, 
 Strabo, xv.64, p. 715. 
 
 2-3. ' Four thousand of years, they say, 
 (is) the krta yuga (see krta). Its morning 
 twilight has just as many hundreds ; and its 
 evening twilight is similar.' 400+4000+400 
 =4800. 
 
 4-5. itaresu, sc. yugesu, i.e. the Treta, 
 Dwapara, and Kali, which last respectively 
 3600, 2400, and 1200. Total of all four, 
 12,000. See v'vrt2. 
 
 6-7. See adi 1. - ' What is that quad- 
 ruple-age, just now reckoned up completely, 
 that, consisting of 12,000 (years), is called 
 an age of the gods.' Cf . Whitney, I.e., 154 top. 
 
 8-9. sahasram etc., cf. Psalm xc.4; II. 
 Peter iii.8. brahmam ekam ahar: here 
 then are distinguished periods of Brahman's 
 repose (universal death) and of his activity 
 (" new heavens and a new earth ") ; see 
 ZDMG. xxxviii.191, 25. 
 
 1O-13 = MBh. v. 6. 1-2 = 109-110, with 
 variants. 
 
 14-15. No real difference between gfla 
 and acara. See also Biihler's Manu, p. Ixvii. 
 tad - vidam = veda - vidam. atmanas 
 tustis may decide in cases where no rule of 
 morals and no usage is involved. L. 14 
 agrees exactly with Gautama's Dharma- 
 fastra, i.1-2, except that it is in metrical 
 form. 
 
 16-17. -uditam, Vvad. See vi+pra. 
 
 18-19. Observe that gruti and smrti (see 
 these) or ' revelation ' and 'tradition' have 
 come to be important technical terms. Con- 
 cerning their significance, see M. Miiller, 
 Ancient Sanskrit Literature, 86f. dharma- 
 gastram, collectively : see Biihler's Manu, 
 p. xxv. U.f. sarva^arthesu am-. 
 
 2O-21. mule : Jolly reads tu_ubhe. 
 U.f. hetugastra^agrayat, 'from support of 
 or relying on hetugastras.' Such^ treatises 
 on dialectics are mentioned a number of 
 times in the Si-yu-ki (Beal), e.g. ii.218f. 
 
 22-23. ' What is agreeable to one's own 
 self ' same as atmanas tustis. See 
 laksana lend. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 59. 
 
 1-2. ' The body-consecration, having the 
 niseka as its first (rite), is to be performed 
 etc.' Samskara (see this) is here collective, 
 including the various single sacraments. 
 
 Observe that there are rites for all 
 stages of a Brahman's existence from before 
 his birth till after death. Megasthenes gives 
 an interesting account of the Brahmans (pre- 
 served by Strabo, xv.59, p. 712f ), and notes 
 that even from the time of conception in the 
 womb (^877 eii&vs Koi Kvofjitvovs) they are under 
 the care of wise men. 
 
 The samskaras or ' sacraments.' 
 
 1. garbha^adhana, ' conception.' 
 
 2. pum-savana, 'male-ceremony.' 
 
 3. simanta^unnayana, ' hair-parting.' 
 
 4. jata-kannan, ' birth-ceremony.' 
 
 5. nama-dheya, ' name-giving.' 
 
 6. niskramana, ' going out.' 
 
 7. anna-pragana, ' rice-feeding.' 
 
 8. cuda-karman, ' tonsure of scalp.' 
 
 9. upanayana, 'investiture.' 
 
 10. keganta, ' tonsure of beard.' 
 
 11. samavartana, 'return from study.' 
 
 12. vivaha, ' marriage.'
 
 [347] 
 
 ( NOTES TO 
 | PAGE 6O. 
 
 Most of these are described at length, 
 AGS. i.!3f or SEE. xxix.!79f or 46f or M. 
 Williams, Indian Wisdom, 246, 201. Number 
 2 is done to bring it about that the child 
 prove a male. No. 3 is a consecration of the 
 pregnant woman by the parting of her hair. 
 
 3-4. garbhais homais : ' the oblations 
 relating to pregnancy ' are involved in sacra- 
 ments 2 and 3. The ligation of the girdle 
 accompanies investiture (9). U.f. enas 
 apa-mrjyate. 
 
 5-6. See vrata4. U.f. ijyaya, 'offer- 
 ing ' to Gods, Rishis, and Manes, while he is 
 a student. sutais: procreation of sons is 
 a duty. ' A Brahman is born laden with 
 three debts. He owes Veda-study to the 
 Rishis ; sacrifice to the Gods ; and sons to 
 the Manes.' TS. vi. 3. 10 5 . - The ' great 
 sacrifices ' are five, to the Gods, Beings, 
 Manes, Brahman, and men : enumerated 
 QB. xi.5.6 1 or AGS. iii.l (= SEE. xxix.217) 
 orManuiii.69f. yajnais, such as a certain 
 Soma-ceremony called jyotistoma, says a 
 Scholiast. U.f. brahmi, 'holy, fit for 
 union with Brahman.' 
 
 7^8. See pranc3. 'Feeding of gold- 
 rubbings, honey, and ghee/ See AGS. i.15.1. 
 
 9. karayet : note that in Manu the pre- 
 scriptive use of the optative with indefinite 
 subject (' a man ' or ' one ') is very common. 
 
 10. Here the va's are = eva and mean 
 ' just.' Scholiast. 
 
 11-12. Subject, nama. See Vyuj 4 sam. 
 See Vgup. "Nomen, omen." This is 
 an old belief : cf . QB. iii.6.2 2 *. The QGS., 
 i.24.4-6, mentions two names, one of which 
 is kept secret by the parents to protect the 
 child from witchcraft. See Stenzler's note 
 to AGS. i.15.8. Cf. Weber's 2d Naksatra 
 essay, Abh. der Berliner Akad., 1861, p. 316f. 
 
 13-14. The scholiast Kulluka gives as 
 examples : Cubha-Qarman ; Bala-varman ; 
 Vasu-bhuti; Dina-dasa. 
 
 15-16. Sc. nama syat. See airv-. 
 
 17-18. U.f. yad va istam (see VI is) etc., 
 ' or what passes for auspicious in the family,' 
 sc. tat kartavyam. The rules allow some 
 latitude for diversities of customs in fam- 
 ilies, villages, etc. See 98 16 and note. Cf. 
 Manu viii.46. 
 
 21-22. See garbha 1. garbhastame = 
 garbhad astame. upanayanam . this 
 most important ceremony is described AGS. 
 i.19-22 or SEE. xxix.!87f. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 6O. 
 
 1. prad-, see 99*N. -U.f. pari^itya (992). 
 
 2-3. bhavatpurvam, see vocab. The for- 
 mulae are : bhavati, bhiksam dehi ; bhik- 
 sam, bhavati, dehi ; bhiksam dehi, bhavati. 
 Similar distinctions, 61 7 N. 
 
 4-5. vyatyasta-panina (V2as), 'by (sc. 
 the pupil) having crossed hands.' 
 
 6-7. adhy-esyamanam (Vi, 939) etc., 'To 
 (the pupil) about to recite, the teacher should 
 say, "Ho, recite (617)!" and should stop 
 (a-ramet) him with the words .' 
 
 India presents a thousand striking and 
 interesting contrasts with the Occident. So 
 especially in her way of handing down lore 
 from age to age. This is described by the 
 RV. Prati9akhya, chap. xv. ; and reported 
 by Weber, ISt. x.!28f; Zimmer, 210; Kaegi, 
 Fleckeisen's Jahrbiicher, 1880, p. 451. Or see 
 SEE. xxix.l!2f,119f. 
 
 8-9. brahmanas (see brahman 2) limits 
 adau and ante. See Vlkr7. sravati, 
 subject brahma. Vlgr+vi. 
 
 1O-11. a+u+m = om. Prajapati belongs 
 to the period succeeding the RV., and is later 
 supplanted by Brahman. nir-aduhat, 635. 
 Seeiti4. Compare 57 18 . 
 
 12-13. aduduhat (856) see vduh, caus. 
 ' Extracted one verse of the stanza begin- 
 ning with "tad" (74 14 ) from each of the 
 three Vedas.' U.f. tad iti rcas. 
 
 14. etam, sc. ream. 
 
 16. hi, ' for,' has pertinence only as con- 
 necting this 9loka with 119. U.f . sthavire 
 a-yati (619), loc. absol. 
 
 19. Hiatus, without combination, at cae- 
 sura: cf. 12 5 N. 
 
 2O-21. See param. ' Saying " I am so- 
 and-so by name," he should announce his 
 name.' The older one or the one superior 
 in station speaks or salutes first. Thus, when 
 the great Yayati is falling from heaven and 
 meets in mid-air Astaka and others, Astaka 
 asks him, " Who art thou ? " but not without 
 excusing himself, as the inferior, for bold
 
 NOTES TO i 
 PAGE 6O. ' 
 
 [348] 
 
 incivility in speaking first. MBh. i.88.10 = 
 3573. SoOd. 3.24: 
 
 aiSojj 5' o3 veov &vSpa ycpairepov QfpftffOai. 
 
 22-23. See abhivada. na janate, 
 from ignorance of Sanskrit. Cf. Burnell, 
 Introduction, p. xxvii. striyas : thus in 
 the prologue to act iv. of the Qakuntala, 
 Durvasas, behind the stage, cries out to the 
 women, ayam aham, bhoh, ' Ho there, it 
 is I.' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 61. 
 
 1-2. 'The word bhos one should repeat 
 (at the end of = ) after one's name in salu- 
 tation. For the use of bhos instead of a 
 person's real name is declared by the Rishis 
 (to be the same as) the use of the true form 
 of a person's name.' See bhobhava and 
 svarupabhava. The bhos is of course in 
 lieu of the name of the person addressed. 
 
 4. ' And the rowel a must be pronounced 
 (added) at the end of his name, with the 
 previous syllable protracted ' reading piir- 
 vaksaraplutah (see Buhler). Thus Deva- 
 datta and Harabhute are to be pronounced 
 Devadatta3a and HarabhutaSya see 
 Whitney, 78. 
 
 7-8. This rule is observed, e.g. in the 
 drama, by the Rishis and the king, Qakuu- 
 tala, mid. of act v. For other differences 
 in the modes of address used for or by the 
 different castes, see 60 2 N.; C.B. i.1.4 12 (or 
 SEE. xii.28 or Weber's Ind. Streifen, i.49). 
 The rule is disregarded in the Epos, e.g. at 
 MBh. 1.71.5 = 2899. 
 
 Analogous distinctions : E. W. Hopkins, 
 Mutual relations of the four castes, 6f ; Weber, 
 ISt. x.llf ; Manu, viii.88 and 113. 
 
 9-1O. 'A d- is not to be addressed by 
 name even if he is younger (cf. x. to 60 20 ) ; 
 but with bhos or (some case-form from the 
 stem) bhavant a dh- should speak to him 
 (enam).' Thus, bho diksita ! idam kuru! 
 or, bhavata yajamanena ! idam kriyatam ! 
 For the long adverb, see vocab. 
 
 11-12. U.f . " bhavati " iti evam : see iti4. 
 
 13-14. U.f. rtvijas. ' One should say [to 
 those in line 13] " asau aham," rising up to 
 meet (them, even if they are) the younger.' 
 
 15-16. The ' second ' or ' spiritual birth ' 
 
 of the 'twice-born' (see dvija) is the upa- 
 nayana. The teacher is the spiritual father. 
 See SEE. ii.3,174; xiv.9. 
 
 17-18. U.f. adhy-apayam asa (1042e, 
 1045) pitfn (see pitr 2) cjigus. See ha. 
 
 19-2O. 'They, (having arrived-anger=) 
 getting angry, asked the gods about the 
 matter. And the gods, assembling (sametya), 
 said (ucus) to them etc.' 
 
 22. See iti2f and 1102a 2 near end. 
 
 23. See sattringat and abdika. The 
 Brahmanical school-term lasted 4J months, 
 began with the upakarman and ended with 
 the utsarga see Biihler's Manu, p. xlvi, 
 and note to iv.95. See guru4. ' The 
 course (vrata) in the three Vedas is to be 
 followed, (lasting 36 = ) for 36 years.' 
 Twelve years for each Veda (see veda2), 
 AGS. i.22.3. This is sober earnest for a 
 Hindu. The idea would make a Greek laugh 
 cf., e.g., Lucian's 'Ep^Tjyuos, chap. i.f, and 
 esp. vi. 
 
 Not even mighty Indra can absolve 
 those who fain would know the Veda from 
 the necessity of studying it. See the charm- 
 ing tale of Yavakrita, MBh. iii.135.15-42 = 
 10706f, outlined at ZDMG. xxxii.318. 
 
 Caesar's account of the Druids (E.G. 
 vi.14) comes near the truth for the Brahmans 
 in several respects. Magnum ibi numerum 
 versuum ediscere dicuntur. Itaque annos 
 nonnulli vicenos in disciplina permanent. Etc. 
 Cf. also Roth, KZ. xxvi.53. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 62. 
 
 1. See 2antika: adjectives go w. vratam. 
 
 2-3. vedan (as contrasted w. dual and 
 sing. ) = ' 3 Vedas.' AV. not included. 
 yathakramam, first the Mantras, then the 
 Brahmanas, in order. Two principal ele- 
 ments characterize the ' course ' or vrata, 
 viz., study (adhy-ayana) and holy living 
 (brahma-carya). adhi^itya a-vaset: 
 cf. Megasthenes, in Strabo, xv.59, p. 712, 
 T77 5' tvra (!) Kal -rpuSuiovra. oSrtas ftffWTM 
 avaxwpeiv < r^v eavrov KTijffiv fKcurrov etc. 
 
 4-5. ' Him ( = the student), approved (on 
 account of [280] his = ) for doing his duty, 
 he ( =the "father," sc. pita) should pre- 
 sent with a cow.' pitus, ' from his father,'
 
 [349] 
 
 I NOTES TO 
 | PAGE 03. 
 
 meaning his spiritual " father," i.e. (61 15 N.) 
 his teacher, who may also be his natural 
 father. 
 
 6-7. See Vman+anu. snatva, techni- 
 cal, see s'sna. He thereby becomes a snataka. 
 sam-a-vrttas, technical see sacrament 
 no. 11, p. 340. savarnam : OVK ea-ri ya/j.f'iv 
 e aAAou yevous, Strabo, xv.49, p. 707. 
 laksana-, cf. 98 7 - 8 . 
 
 8-9. ' Let him give up all affairs which 
 hinder his study (296b), but (be) teaching 
 anyhow (see yathaS) ; for that is the con- 
 dition of having done his duty or of having 
 attained his end.' 'Teaching anyhow,' i.e. 
 'maintaining himself as best he can while 
 teaching.' 
 
 1O-11. uklambara3: 'Ivdovs iaOijri \tvi<fi 
 XfTJffOo-i Kal ffivSdffi Aeu/ccus /coi Kapirdffois etc., 
 Strabo, xv.71, p. 719. The castes wore 
 clothes of different colors. The priests 
 regularly wore white during religious cere- 
 monies. See yuj2. 
 
 12-13. There is so frequent need of water 
 for ceremonial purification that a Brahman 
 should never be without it (see Baudhayana, 
 i.6 and 7, esp. i.7.1, or SEE. xiv.!60f ) ; hence 
 the jar. See veda not v6da. 'Gold 
 ear-rings : ' xP u(TO< t >0 P " vra M eT P' ws ^" T0 ' s *'^ 
 Strabo, xv.59, p. 712. 
 
 14-15. U.f. na ikaeta ud-yantam. See 
 \fsrj +upa and 23 1 x. See gatal. 
 
 16-17. See Vvrs. Seerupal. 
 
 18-19. ' Let him make (to be) stand- 
 ing on the right' see 99%. Prad- is an 
 adj.; and is neuter, since sexless things are 
 among the substantives. Places where 
 four ways meet have been the object of awe 
 and of many superstitions : cf. W. Menzel, 
 Die vorchristliche Unsterblichkeitslehre, i.145, 
 163. vanaspatin : for an instance of tree- 
 worship, see Katha-sarit-sagara, xx.26. Cf. 
 also J. Fergusson, Tree and Serpent Worship, 
 passim. 
 
 20. U.f. vayu-agni-vipram. apas : a 
 similar respect for the waters (which are 
 divinities 83 1 ) was shown by the Persians 
 (Hdt. i.138; Strabo, xv.3.16, p. 733) and the 
 Greeks (Hesiod, Works and Days, 757 ) . 
 pagyans, ' facing.' 
 
 22-23. If the earth be regarded as a Sat 
 
 surface, under which the sun passes by night 
 in the same plane of motion as by day, the 
 sun will be to the north of the dwellers of 
 Northern India at night, just as it is to the 
 south of them in the day. 
 
 The point of the prohibitions is that the 
 parts of shame be not turned to the Sun-god 
 or (as at 62 20 ) any other sacred or venerable 
 thing. The prohibition recurs in very many 
 Sanskrit books (e.g. MBh.xiii.l04.75=5029,f ; 
 VP. iii.ll.10f ; for other parallel passages, 
 see SBE. vii.194), and may be traced, with 
 similar ones, back to the AV. (xiii.1.56). 
 
 Entirely identical is the Pythagorean 
 irpbs Tfi\Lov rfrpa.nij.fvos fa^i oSpn Frag, philos. 
 Graec., ed. Miillach, i. p. 506. This coinci- 
 dence, with others, is discussed by L. von 
 Schroder, Pythagoras und die Inder (Leipzig, 
 1884), 31-39. But Weber points out that 
 the same thing occurs in Hesiod, Works and 
 Days, 727. Cf. Pliny, Nat. Hist, xxviii.6 
 end = 19. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 63. 
 1-2. a-caksita, 616. 'Nor let him tell 
 
 (the fact that she is drinking V2dha) to 
 any body ' (297a). U.f . divi in-. 
 
 3-4. U.f. -dhvanau ('at the sound of) 
 rg-yajuai (1253a) na adhi^iyita (616) 
 adhi^itya va api antam etc. See va 1 end. 
 Respecting this and the next gloka (SV. 
 impure), see Muir, iii 2 .25f, Aufrecht, Rig- 
 veda^, i. p. xxxviii, and Hopkins's note to 
 Burnell's Manu, iv.124. 
 
 7-8. See go3. ' Like the earth, iniquity 
 done in the world does not bear fruit at 
 once; but etc.' See Vvrt+a. mulani: 
 same figure at Proverbs xii.3. Vkrt. 
 Cf. MBh. i.80.2 = 3333,f. 
 
 9-1O. ' If (punishment falls) not on (the 
 doer) himself, (it falls) on his sons, etc.' Cf. 
 the second command of the Mosaic deca- 
 logue. See tu3. 
 
 13. Lines 13-20: these and 29 5 - 6 (= Manu 
 viii.17) are translated by Muir, i 2 .380; and 
 (with classical parallels) in the same author's 
 Metrical Translations from Skt. Writers, p. 26. 
 
 17-18. See 2sama2. vimukhas, very 
 naturally ! but the rules also forbid looking 
 around (103 17 ).
 
 .NOTES TO | 
 
 PAGE 63. ' 
 
 [350] 
 
 21-22. See idam. 
 
 23 f. See api 2 beg. -"Thus gazelles 
 eat herbs ; tigers eat gazelles ; men eat fish ; 
 lions eat elephants." Scholiast. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 64. 
 
 2-3. U.f. kuryat, 59 9 N. - See sanga2. 
 -SeetuS. 
 
 6-7. U.f. bhaksayita (1050, cf. 944) 
 iha admi aham. ' Me eat in t'other world 
 will he, whose meat in this world eat do I. 
 That the wise declare to be the meatness of 
 meat = That is why meat is called meat.' 
 An example of Hindu etymologies, which 
 are often little better than mere puns as 
 here, mam sa and marisam. Hopkins notes 
 that this is given in varied form, MBh. xiii. 
 116.35=5714. Cf. Whitney, AJP. iii.402; 
 also 94 16 . 
 
 8-9. See uposita. See Vcru, desid. 
 
 See yena2. Cf. Strabo, xv.59, p. 712: 
 TCUS Se yvvai^l rats ya/j.frals (ify <rvfji<j>i\o(ro<t>e?v 
 rovs BpaxM"" aj etc. Notable exceptions to 
 this statement are found in the ancient 
 legends of Maitreyi and Gargi SEE. xv. 
 108,130,136. 
 
 1O-11. ' Any thing disliked of her husband 
 (296b), displeasing to him.' It is note- 
 worthy that widow-burning (see p. 382) is 
 quite ignored here. It is not mentioned 
 anywhere in Manu; and the same is true of 
 Yajnavalkya, Narada, Gautama, Apastamba, 
 and most of the others. Jolly, Sitzungs- 
 berichte der Bairischen Akad., 1876, p. 447. 
 He thinks it originated among the lower 
 classes. 
 
 12-13. See kamam, adv. V2ksi, caus. 
 
 See Vgraho. parasya limits nama. 
 14-15. U.f. asita (616) a maranat. 
 
 \ksam. 
 
 16-17. evam, ' so,' as described in book iii. 
 
 18-19. Prescriptions quite the reverse of 
 those at 62 10 . 
 
 2O-21. U.f. pancatapas (see vocab.) 
 varsasu abhra-. Compare, e.g., the penances 
 of Yayati after he retires to the forest, MBh. 
 i.86.11 = 3544,f ; and those exhibited to 
 Alexander, Strabo, xv.61, p. 714; and see 
 xv.63, p. 715. 
 
 22. vihrtya, 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 65. 
 
 2. pra-vrajan, technical (see vocab.), 
 describing the pravrajaka. 
 
 3. THE ORDERS. See acrama. Perhaps 
 the best English names are: 1. 'Student,' 
 for brahmacarin; 2. 'Householder,' for 
 grhastha; 3. 'Forest-hermit,' for vana- 
 prastha ; and 4. 'Ascetic ' or ' Pious mendi- 
 cant,' for yati. 
 
 The last is often called ' Beggar ' (bhiksu) 
 or 'Wanderer' (pra- or pari-vrajaka). 
 
 5-6. Lit. ' One should diminish one mouth- 
 ful at a time in the dark fortnight etc.,' i.e. 
 ' diminish one's food by one mouthful etc.' 
 See trisavana. This, the diminuendo- 
 crescendo form of the lunar fast, is called 
 pipilika-madhya or ' ant-middled.' 
 
 7-8. 'One should follow the same rule 
 entire, in (case of) the yava-madhyama 
 (see this), intent, performing (carancj the 
 lunar penance with the bright fortnight 
 first.' 
 
 These are fully described, e.g. by Gau- 
 tama, xxvii. (transl. SEE. ii.296f), and by 
 Baudhayana, iii.8 (SEE. xiv.303f). . 
 
 9f. Cf. below, p. 357, 90. -For a 
 summary of this schematic exposition of 
 the doctrine of metempsychosis, see Indian 
 Wisdom, 280. 
 
 9-1O. ' Resulting in weal or woe (is our) 
 karman, which originates in mind, voice, 
 and body.' Thus qualified, karman com- 
 prehends ' virtuous and sinful thoughts, 
 words, and deeds.' See gati4. 
 
 11-12. taaya, sc. karmanas. See api2 
 beg. See dehin. ' One should know 
 that the mind is the prompter in this world 
 (iha) of this (action) which is three-fold 
 [viz. best, worst, and middling, cf. 65 10 ] and 
 has three manifestations [viz. as thoughts, 
 words, and deeds, 65 9 ], is connected with 
 the body, (and) has ten kinds [3+4+3 kinds, 
 enumerated in 9lokas 5, 6, 7].' 
 
 17. avidhanatas : hereby are excluded 
 from this category injuries to sacrificial 
 victims when required by the ritual, or to 
 a man when inflicted as a lawful penalty. 
 
 19. U.f. manasa eva ayam (lit. 'this one 5 
 = ' a man ') upa-bhunkte. See v'2bhuj +upa2
 
 [351] 
 
 \ NOTES TO 
 I PAGE 68. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE O6. 
 
 1. 'And (ca) he [if he does right for the 
 most part and wrong a little] enjoys bliss in 
 heaven, invested (Vlvr+a) with those very 
 elements (see bhuta5), i.e. with a corporeal 
 body.' ' Those very ' before-mentioned at 
 Manu xii.16. 
 
 3. ' Deserted by the elements ' = ' after 
 death.' Scholiast. 
 
 4-5. See jiva. See the mention of the 
 five elements, Strabo, xv.59 end, p. 713. The 
 spirit, after purgation, takes on a human 
 form again. The purgatorial idea is promi- 
 nent in book xviii. of the MBh. 
 
 6-7. 'Considering (drstva) these gatis 
 (which result) from right-doing and from 
 wrong-doing' (1098). -See Vldha3. 
 
 8-9. See sattva2, rajas4, tamas-3, and 
 esp. guna3, and also atmano, and mahant2, 
 all technical terms here. ' One should 
 know goodness, passion, and darkness as 
 the atman's three qualities, with which the 
 mahant constantly pervades all these exist- 
 ent things without exception.' See p. 344, 
 67. Line 9 is explained under sthita4. 
 
 10-11. ca ca : the sense requires ' or 
 or.' '"As having the quality of darkness 
 as its attribute : ' tamasam modifies only the 
 prior member, guna-; the verbally strict 
 phrase would be tamo-guna-laksanam (cf. 
 line 15). 
 
 14-15. 'What (deed) one wishes (to be) 
 known by everybody etc.' jnatam: con- 
 jecture of BR. at vi.489. lajjati, metri 
 gratia, for -te. 
 
 18-19. See ya6 and sarva2c. ' But 
 the transmigrations which (a man) enters 
 upon by reason of any (quality of them=) 
 of these qualities, these (of all, i.e.) through 
 all this world in order I will briefly state.' 
 
 2O-23. A summary of the scheme fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 67. 
 
 1-18, clokas 42-60. Scheme of the nine 
 sets of gatis. On him who is governed by 
 it, each guna entails a gati : to wit, 
 
 I. tamas, the gati of a beast (42-44) ; 
 II. rajas, the gati of a man (45-47) ; 
 III. sattva, the gati of a god (48-50). 
 
 Each gati is of three kinds : 
 a. lowest; b. middling; c. highest. 
 
 The scheme is not strictly adhered to. In 
 line 1, for instance, 'plants' are put among 
 the beasts ; and in 15, the ' Vedas,' among 
 the gods. But we are not surprised to find 
 ' Qudras ' (line 3)among the beasts, and ' Brah- 
 mans' (line 13) among the gods (see 94 18 ). 
 
 6. U.f. tamasisu (sc. gatisu) uttama. 
 
 7-8. See jhalla. vsanj+pra. 
 
 11-12. ye merely fills out the verse see 
 ya3 beg. 'Likewise all Apsarases.' On 
 the Apsarases, see Holtzmann, ZDMG. 
 xxxiii.631f. 
 
 17. Technically used words see vocab. 
 
 19-2O. 'A Brahman-slayer enters the 
 womb of dogs (cjvan), swine, asses, camels, 
 cows, goats (aja), sheep (avi), etc.,' in order 
 to be born therefrom as dog, etc. 
 
 22-23. U.f. pretas antyastri- : pronounce, 
 pretantyastri-, in violation of 177. 'By 
 stealing grain, one becomes a mouse; (by 
 stealing) water, (one becomes) a duck; etc.' 
 The same construction runs on to 68 3 . Note 
 that some of the gatis have a special 
 appropriateness. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 68. 
 
 45. ' Women also in like manner (see 
 kalpa) by stealing would incur guilt. They 
 become mates of these very creatures (men- 
 tioned above).' 
 
 8-9. See pravrtta and nivrtta. eti, 
 'one attains to.' aty-eti etc., 'gets rid of 
 the five elements,' i.e. ' obtains final libera- 
 tion.' 
 
 10-11. ' And whatsoever heterodox philos- 
 ophies (there are).' See Ika2b: the first 
 ca = ' and.' 
 
 12-13. 'Whatsoever doctrines (yani kani 
 cid, sc. gastrani), differing (anyani) from 
 this (atas = vedat), spring up and come to 
 nought, these (tani) etc.' 
 
 14-15. See crestha and 2vara: and for 
 abl., 292b. vyava-, 'the resolute' who 
 practice what they learn. 
 
 16. SELECTIONS XXIX. and XXX. Two 
 
 specimens of vakrokti, ' play on words ' or
 
 Norss TO i 
 PAGE 68. ' 
 
 [352] 
 
 ' Calembourg/ Both come from the Subha- 
 sitarnava, and are taken by me from Bo'ht- 
 lingk's Indische Spriicke, 2d ed., no's 1428 
 and 6846. Other specimens are no's 4042 
 and 6389. 
 
 16-17. 'Nineteen wives went to the wood 
 to play. Twenty came home. The rest were 
 
 eaten by a tiger.' Solution : ekona vingatir 
 naryah = ' wives twenty lacking one ' (477a) ; 
 or, dividing eko na (stem nr ), ' one man (and) 
 twenty wives.' 
 
 18-19. U.f. mama ajnaya. Solution: 
 na tena, ' not by him,' when joined, gives 
 natena (v'nam), 'by him bending over.' 
 
 SELECTIONS XXXI.-LXXV. 
 
 EXTRACTS FROM THE VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 70. Selections xxxi. to Ixxv. comprise Mantra 
 (or " Veda" in its narrower sense), Brahmana, and 
 Sutra. They are taken for the most part from the 
 Rigvedic literature (or " Rigveda " in its broader 
 sense). Professor Kaegi's little work, entitled Der 
 Rigveda (2d ed.), and described above, Brief List, 
 p. zx, no. 23, is recommended as a most useful intro- 
 duction to Vedic study, on account of its general 
 excellence, and, in particular, on account of the ful- 
 ness of its bibliographical details. It is, moreover, 
 now easily accessible in an English version by Dr. 
 Robert Arrowsmith, published by Ginn and Co., 
 Boston, 1886, price $1.65. Kaegi's book will be fre- 
 quently cited in the sequel, as " Kaegi," with the 
 page-number of the translation first, followed by that 
 
 of the original in parenthesis. The Note-numbers 
 are alike in both. 
 
 71. For grammatical forms peculiar to the Veda, 
 reference to Whitney will be made when needful; 
 but the student should read systematically the sec- 
 tions that describe Vedic noun-inflection and verb- 
 conjugation. For the former subject, the small-print 
 lines of 330, 340, and 342 are important ; and for the 
 latter, the paragraphs on the subjunctive, 557-563, 
 736, 700, and those on the mode-forms of the different 
 aorists, chap. xi. The accent, explained by "Whitney, 
 80-86, is important for the exegesis and otherwise. 
 The accent-rules are given at 92-97, 314-320, 591-598, 
 1082-86. The notation of the accent is explained at 
 87-90. 
 
 72. The Vedic literature is based on the songs of the early Aryan tribes 
 immigrant into India. These tribes were life-loving, brave, and warlike, and show 
 their nature clearly in their songs. But they were remarkable above all for the 
 strength of their religious instinct. This is a cardinal fact the prime determinant 
 of the character of the early Indian literature ; for that literature is one of prevail- 
 ingly religious content. The Veda is thus distinguished from the later literature 
 of the Epic and the Classical periods by its contents, and also no less by its 
 language and style. But within itself, the Vedic literature (or "Veda" in the 
 broader sense of the word) shows differences which serve to divide it into three 
 great groups. 
 
 73. To assign a definite chronological period for each of these groups is 
 neither feasible nor necessary. 1 But it is interesting and quite possible to establish 
 an inner chronologic sequence among the groups themselves and the sub-groups, and 
 even among individual books and parts of books. To the first group belong the 
 ancient songs themselves, which are in metrical form and are known as the Vedic 
 hymns or Mantras. The term " Veda " is often used in a narrower sense to denote 
 them. To the second belong the Brahmanas, the oldest Indo-European prose extant, 
 which presuppose and are dependent on the Mantra-literature. The third group 
 comprehends the Sutras, collections of brief rules upon liturgical and other subjects, 
 which, in turn, presuppose both of the foregoing groups. 
 
 1 Indeed, to do so would give a very false impres- 
 sion. The periods overlap; and the styles of litera- 
 
 ture shade off from one into another so, for 
 example, in the Yajurveda.
 
 T3531 5 INTRODUCTION 
 
 L -I { TO THE VEDA. 
 
 74. A great mass of Mantra-material originated and was handed down by 
 memorial tradition orally from generation to generation long before the existence 
 of any such collections of Mantras as have come down to us. 1 The Mantras fall into 
 several different classes. To one belongs the hymn-stanza (fc) ; to another, the 
 sacrificial formula (yajus) ; and to another, the magic charm (brahman). From the 
 stock of Mantras of one class for example, the yajus a certain collection with 
 definite arrangement became established by popular usage in a certain community, 
 and thus arose a Veda, for example, a Yajurveda not a certain definite book, but 
 some one of many possible and probable collections of Mantras of a certain definite 
 class. From the same stock of the same class another collection was formed in 
 another community, and thus arose another Veda, for example, another Yajurveda. 
 The period in which the oldest hymns of the Rigveda originated may be set back 
 into the second pre-Christian millennium; 2 but this only on certain general con- 
 siderations not as a matter of precise argumentation. Geographically, the early 
 Vedic Aryans may be referred to Kabul and the Panjab. 8 
 
 75. The Mantras have come down to us, for the most part, in several collec- 
 tions, diverse in form and purpose. There was, besides, more or less Mantra-material 
 which was never embodied in any collection, 4 but of which we find remnants scattered 
 about in various books. The great collections of Mantras are the Rigveda, the 
 Samaveda, the Yajurveda, and the Atharvaveda. The text of the Mantras forms 
 what is often called a Sarhhita. To each Samhita is attached a body of dependent 
 or ancillary works of the Brahmana and Sutra groups : so that the oldest Indian 
 books are classed, first, according to the Veda to which they belong; and, secondly, 
 according to their character as Mantra, Brahmana, or Sutra. It is to be remembered 
 that "Veda" has a narrower and a broader sense, and that "Rigveda," for instance, 
 may mean either the Rigveda-samhita or also the entire body of works belonging to 
 that Veda. 
 
 76. The Sauihita of the Rigveda is a historical 6 collection. It consists of 
 1017 hymns, each containing on an average about ten double lines, 6 so that the text is 
 in volume somewhat less than that of the two Homeric poems together. There is 
 a purely external and mechanical division of the text into 'Eighths,' 'Lessons,' 7 
 ' Groups,' and ' Stanzas ' (astaka, adhyaya, varga, re) ; but this need not specially 
 concern us now. Of deep historical significance is the other division into ' Books,' 
 ' Chapters,' ' Hymns,' and ' Stanzas ' (mandala, anuvaka, sukta, re). 
 
 77. There are ten ' Books ' (literally, ' Circles '). And of these, books ii. to 
 viii. are the so-called "Family-books" that is, they contain each the hymns 
 ascribed to a single family or clan, in which they doubtless originated, and by which 
 they were handed down as a sacred inheritance. Thus, book ii. contains the hymns 
 of Grtsamada and his clan. Those of Vi9vamitra and his tribe follow in book iii.; 
 and then in order those of Vamadeva (book iv.), Atri (book v.), Bharadvaja (book 
 vi.), Vasistha (book vii.), and Kanva (book viii.). The ninth book is made up of 
 
 1 See Roth's Atharvaveda in KascJimir, p. 9-10. 
 
 2 See Whitney in The Century Magazine, 1887, 
 xxxiii. 921 ; or Kaegi, note 38. Cf . Ludwig, iii. 178f . 
 
 See Whitney, I.e., p. 913; Kaegi, note 39; Lud- 
 wig, iii. 198f. 
 
 The Hindus say that the Vedas are infinite. See 
 
 8 As distinguished from a liturgical collection 
 see 86. Respecting the purpose of the RV. collec- 
 tion, see Roth, KZ. xxvi. 56. 
 
 6 For the number of stanzas, words, and syllables, 
 and for some convenient tabular statements, see 
 Muller, ASL. p. 220f. 
 
 Ludwig, iii. 15; Muir, iii 2 . 17. " There are eight ' Lessons' in each ' Eighth.'
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 TO THE VEDA. ' 
 
 [354] 
 
 hymns addressed to the deified drink Soma. The tenth comprises hymns ascribed 
 to very different authors ; 1 while the first consists of fifteen 2 minor groups, each 
 attributed to some ancient poet-sage. 
 
 78. The general history of the text of the Rigveda was touched upon by Pro- 
 fessor Roth in a very instructive little essay 8 entitled Vedische Studien. Some of 
 his conclusions may be briefly stated. The assembling of the Mantras into a collec- 
 tion was accomplished by the aid of writing. 4 The first Rik collections were probably 
 single books and parts of books, each an aggregation of material of such moderate 
 compass as to be easily handled by a single collector. The small collections were 
 later united into one large collection, which, completed by the addition of books ix. 
 and x., and uniformly edited, constitutes our RV. Samhita. 
 
 79. Roth recognizes three stages in the tradition : 1. the oral transmission 
 from the authors to the time of the collectors ; 2. the reduction from the oral form 
 to the written form; and 3. the transmission of the written text to us. We may 
 admit that in the last stage the text carefully preserved as it was, see 98 has 
 suffered no very important corruptions. The collectors themselves, however, did 
 not by any means write down the texts precisely as they heard them. The reciters 
 from memory must have recited rhythmically. The collectors (writers redactors 
 or diaskeuasts) have often destroyed the rhythm by putting the texts into the 
 strait-jacket of the rules of grammar, and especially by writing the words accord- 
 ing to the later rules of samdhi. To the first stage are to be referred the many 
 mistakes which are ascribable to carelessness in listening, 5 and which may be called 
 blunders of the ear rather than of the eye. 
 
 80. That the hymns themselves are of diverse origin, both in respect of place 
 and of time, is probable a priori and is shown by internal evidence. 6 Accordingly, 
 if we find, for example, two hymns involving inconsistent conceptions of the same 
 deity or of different deities, this is to be deemed quite natural, inasmuch as they 
 originated among clans dwelling in diverse regions. Moreover, after the aggregation 
 of the small collections into the large one, interpolations and later additions were 
 still made. To discriminate between the different elements that now make up the 
 canonical Vedic text is therefore an important problem. 
 
 81. Again, in the course of time, and in part as a result of the wrangling 
 pedantry of narrow teachers, the stock collections became ramified into slightly 
 divergent recensions. These were called gakhas or ' branches,' because so related to 
 each other as are different branches from the same tree-stock. The (gakhas often 
 supply to criticism the various readings for which the classical philologist looks to 
 good and independent manuscripts. The community in which such a Qakha attained 
 definitive authority was called a carana or ' school.' There once existed, presumably, 
 many branches and schools 7 of the R\ r . The school of the Qakalas, 8 however, seems 
 
 1 The orthodox Hindu conception of the hymns is 
 that they had existed from eternity; it recognizes no 
 human authors. The Hindus do not call Atri, for 
 example, the "author" of a given hymn, hut rather 
 the " Rishi," i.e. the " seer," who was so fortunate 
 as to " see " it the last time it was revealed. Muller, 
 A8L. p. 95. 
 
 * Bergaigne, JA. viii.8.263 (= Tl). 
 
 s Published, 1883, in KZ. xxvi. 45-68. See espe- 
 cially p. 52-62. 
 
 1 This is entirely consistent with the facts that the 
 
 tradition in the schools was oral and by memory, and 
 that the open use of a written text was disgraceful. 
 Compare, e.g., Sarva-sammata Ciksha, ed. A. O. 
 Franke, rule 36. But this thesis 'of Roth is denied 
 by some scholars. 
 
 8 Such as ndmasa for mdnasa, etc., Roth, I.e., 
 p. 62. 
 
 6 Cf. Ludwig, iii. p. IX. 
 
 i See Muller, ASL. p. 368. 
 
 s See Muller, RV. Prati9akhya, Einleitung, p. 7.
 
 [355] 
 
 i INTRODUCTIOB 
 ! TO THE VEDA. 
 
 to have gained exclusive predominance, and the extant recension of the RV. Samhita 
 bears their name. The Qakha of the Baskalas is also mentioned. 
 
 82. The manuscripts of the RV. Saihhita exhibit almost no diversities of 
 reading ; so that, in the absence of akha-differences, the criticism of the text has 
 to rest on intrinsic evidence, and on a comparison of the other Samhitas, and on a 
 study of the RV. citations in the RV. Brahmanas and Sutras. Other criteria have 
 been brought to light by the study of the arrangement of the collection. Thus, 
 within each of the books ii.-vii., the hymns addressed to the same deity are grouped 
 together and arranged according to the decreasing number of stanzas of each hymn. 
 The same simple principle goes farther, governing, for example, the order of the 
 groups within a book. 1 Violations of the principle may arouse suspicion as to the 
 originality or genuineness of the passages concerned. 
 
 83. The first written form of the text would seem to have been the samhita- 
 patha or ' combined reading,' wherein the words are combined according to the more or 
 less artificial rules of grammar. 2 These combinations often admit of several different 
 resolutions. To obviate the resulting uncertainties, there was constructed the pada- 
 patha or ' word-reading,' which aims to give each word in its true independent form 
 without reference to any rules of combination. The Pada-text of the published RV. 
 is attributed to (^akalya, 8 and is the oldest conscious exegetical work upon the Veda 
 now known. It is far from infallible. 4 For its secondary use, see 98x. 
 
 84. The Samaveda is a Veda of samans. A saman is properly a 'tune* 
 not a text ; but in this connection the word means an re so modified 6 as to be better 
 adapted for chanting, especially during the ceremonies of the Soma-sacrifice. Of 
 the 1549 stanzas of the Samaveda, 1474 occur also in the Rigveda. 6 The SV. 
 exhibits many variations from the readings of the RV. Sarhhita, some of which 
 are of value for the criticism of the latter text. 7 In general, the relations of the 
 SV. to the RV. still present many difficult problems. 8 
 
 85. The Samhita of the Atharvaveda, as compared with that of the RV., 
 represents a lower plane of life and thought, as it is also later in respect of form 
 and language. It contains magic incantations for the warding off of the most 
 diverse malign influences, and prayers and charms for success in the various affairs 
 of life, as love, gaming, quarrels, journeys, and the like. It has a high degree of 
 interest for the student of popular superstitions. The Samhita has come down to us 
 in at least two recensions. The one is called the Paippalada Qakha. 9 The other was 
 published in 1856 by Roth and Whitney. 10 About a sixteenth part of the RV. stanzas 
 occur also with more or less interesting variants in books i. to xix. of this text. 
 Shankar P. Pandit of Bombay is now editing the AV. with Sayana's comment. 
 
 86. The Yajurveda belongs to the period 11 of the highly developed ritual, 
 and originated in the sacred and famous Madhyade9a. 12 The Sarhhitas contain the 
 
 1 For details see A. Bergaigne, Recherches sur 
 I'histoire de la samhita du RV., JA. 8.viiU93f 
 (esp. p. 199), and 8.ix.l91f. Cf. also Oldenberg, 
 ZDMG. xli.508f ; and Bergaigne, JA. 8.x.488f. 
 
 2 This is the text given in the Reader. 
 See Weber, HIL. p. 32f. 
 
 4 A critical estimate of its exegetical value is given 
 by Roth in the afore-mentioned essay, KZ. xxvi.45-52. 
 
 6 By protraction of vowels, insertion of sundry 
 sounds, repetitions, etc. Whitney, OLSt. i. 13-15. 
 
 6 See Whitney, ISt. ii.347-63. 
 
 7 Whitney, JAOS. xi. p. clxxxiv=PAO8. Oct. 1883. 
 
 8 See Oldenberg's interesting discussion, ZDMG. 
 xxxviii.439-80, and esp. 464-65. 
 
 Described by Roth, Der Atharvaveda in Kasch- 
 mir, Tubingen, 1875. 
 
 10 See Brief List, p. xix, no. 18. For bibliography 
 of translations, see Kaegi, note 13. 
 
 11 The civilization of this period is treated with 
 especial fulness in Schroder's Indiens Literatur und 
 Cultur eee below, 100. 
 
 " Cf. p. 297, 2 : also Schroder, ILuC. p. 163.
 
 INTRODUCTION j 
 TO THE VEDA, i 
 
 [356] 
 
 formulas (see yajus in vocab.) which accompanied the sacrificial ceremonials, and 
 are, as it were, the hand-books of the adhvaryus or priests who did the actual 
 manual labor of the sacrifices. 1 With the growth of ritualism and its spread over 
 a wide extent of territory 2 there naturally grew up many differing usages in con- 
 nection with the sacrifice, and many centres of ritualistic study. 8 In this wise it 
 happened that the sectarian schools of the Yajurveda were especially numerous and 
 flourishing. 
 
 87. The Black Yajurveda. The various schools of this, the older Yajurveda, 
 bear the names of men reputed to be the pupils directly or indirectly of Vai9am- 
 payana, a name great in the Epos. At least five schools 4 possessed special Sariihitas, 
 of which four are still extant : to wit, the Sariihita of the Kathas (Kaftuoi) or the 
 Katbaka; that of the Kapisthala-Kathas (Ka//./?i<T0oXoi) ; that of the Maitrayanlyas ; 
 and that of the school of Apastamba, a subdivision of the Taittiriyas. The one last 
 mentioned, the Taittiriya Samhita, was the first to be printed in a scholarly edition. 6 
 The Maitrayam Samhita has recently been published by Dr. L. von Schroder, Leip- 
 zig, 1881-86. The others are still unedited. In all these texts of the old Yajus 
 Samhitas, the sacred formulas are commingled with prose passages, explanatory and 
 prescriptive. A single such passage is a Brahmana, 6 ' the dictum of a brahman or 
 priest,' ' a priestly discourse.' 
 
 88. The White Yajurveda. To remedy this confusion, a new school of 
 Adhvaryus, called the Vajasaneyins, arranged a Samhita of ' clear formulas ' (guklani 
 yajunsi), i.e. a text in which the formulas or Mantras were separated from the 
 priestly discourses or Brahmanas. 1 Not without some little animus, doubtless, they 
 turned to account the double meaning of gukla, 'clear' or 'white,' and fixed the 
 name of "Dark" (krsna, 'dark' or 'black') upon the mingled or uncleared texts of 
 their older rivals. The Samhita of the White Yajurveda or Vajasaneyi Saiiihita has 
 come down to us in the recension of the Kanvas and in that of the Madhyaihdinas, 8 
 and was published by Weber, Berlin, 1849-52. 
 
 89. The separate collections of the formulas naturally suggested a similar 
 treatment of the priestly discourses. In the school of the Vajasaneyins, the result 
 of this treatment was a collection of the formerly detached Brahmanas, which collec- 
 tion is itself also called a Brahmana, 9 and is practically an encyclopedic digest of the 
 wisdom of their school. 10 
 
 90. The oldest collection of Mantras, the Rigveda, is in the main the reflex 
 of the life of a vigorous, active, and healthy people a people that prayed most for 
 length of days, for sturdy sons, abundant cattle, doughty retainers, and victory over 
 their enemies ; a people whose religion was a simple worship of the deified powers 
 of nature. But even during the Vedic period, there comes a profound change. The 
 Yajurveda represents a turning-point in the development of the Hindu character. 
 The centre of Vedic life is shifted to Madhyadeca; and here were made the first 
 
 Ludwig, iii.27. 
 
 1 Schroder, ILuC. p. 164-5. 
 
 Cf. Schroder, ILuC. p. 88-89: also Eggeling, 
 SEE. xii. p. xxv f. 
 
 * Schroder, Einleitung to his ed. of MS., book i. 
 p. IXf. Of. ILuC. p. 89. 
 
 By Weber, as vol's xi. and xii. of ISt., 1871-72. 
 
 See this in vocab. and cf . it with brahmand. 
 
 7 See Eggeling, SEE. xii., p. xxvii; also CB. xiv. 
 9.4> or SEE. xv.226. 
 
 Or HaStavSivoi: see HIL. p. 106. 
 
 8 Specifically, the Catupatlia Brahmana. It was 
 published by Weber, Berlin, 1855. Books i.-iv. 
 have been translated by Eggeling, SEE. xii. and 
 xx vi. 
 
 10 Eggeling, SEE. xii. p. xxiif.
 
 [357] 
 
 ( INTRODUCTION 
 j TO THE VEDA. 
 
 great advances in the arts and institutions of civilization, in trade, and in science. 
 Here also priestly families and warrior-families attained to such importance as to 
 assert their independence of the people, and so bring about the strongly marked 
 class-distinctions that grew into the rigid system of caste. And here, with the 
 waxing power of the priesthood, the old Vedic religion was converted into an 
 infinitely complex system of sacrifices and ceremonies. To this period belohgs the 
 belief in metempsychosis a dreadful and universal reality to the Hindu mind. 
 With the growing tendency of the Hindu character towards introspection comes the 
 system of hermit-life and the asceticism which are so prominent in -the Hindu 
 Middle Age, and which in turn led naturally to the habit of theosophic speculation. 
 The sultry air of Ganges-land has relaxed both the physical and the mental fibre of 
 the Hindu, and he has become a Quietist. 
 
 91. The Hindu character has been transformed almost beyond recognition. 
 The change is wonderful. It would be also incomprehensible, but for the literature 
 of the Brahmanas. 1 As a whole and by themselves, they are puerile, arid, inane. 
 But as the sole and faithful reflex of an immensely important phase in the develop- 
 ment of an ethnic type, they have a great interest an interest heightened by the 
 fact that the annals of human evolution hardly present another type whose history 
 can be studied through so many centuries in unbroken continuity. 
 
 92. The sacerdotal class, ever magnifying its office, has invested the sacrifice 
 with a most exaggerated importance and sanctity. The sacrifice has become the 
 central point of the Brahman's life and thought. About it he has spun a flimsy web 
 of mystery, and in each of its events he sees a hidden symbolism. 2 Everything is 
 not only that which it is but also that which it signifies. So lost is the Brahman in 
 these esoteric vagaries that to him the line of demarcation between " is " and " signi- 
 fies " becomes almost wholly obliterated. 8 What we deem the realities of life are as 
 pale shadows. The sacrifice and its events are the real facts, and to fathom their 
 mysteries 4 is omnipotence and salvation. 
 
 93. It must not be forgotten that the phases of development represented by 
 the Mantras and Brahmanas are not separated by hard and fast lines. The oldest 
 Yajus texts are of the transition type. They are called Saihhitas, and contain 
 indeed Mantras in abundance ; but the Mantras are mingled with prose passages 
 which are the first Brabmanas. Descriptions of the sacrificial ceremonies, attribu- 
 tions to them of hidden meanings, accounts of their origin, legends to illustrate their 
 efficacy such are the contents of the older Brahmanas. Conscious philosophic 
 speculation plays a subordinate part : its beginnings we can trace to the RV. 
 Samhita; 5 but the great mass of it is contained in the later Brahmana literature. 
 
 94. In this, the later Brahmana period, the descriptions of the ritual are 
 relegated to systematic treatises ( 95) ; and the theosophic and philosophic passages 
 become more lengthy and important, and receive as containing material appro- 
 priate for the meditations of the vX6/3ioi or Forest-hermits the special names of 
 Aranyakas 6 or ' Forest-treatises ' and Upanisads. 7 Some of the best of these have 
 
 1 Characterized by Eggeling, SEE. xii. p. ix f, esp. See selection Ixll. and N. 
 
 p. xxii-xxv. Enumerated by Kaegi, note 14 a. 8 See Deussen, System des Vedanta, p. 8; Miiller, 
 
 2 See Oldenberg, Buddha, 19(20)f. ASL. 313f; or Kaegi, note 16. 
 
 3 A point of prime importance in reading the end- " Upanisad : lit. ' a sitting at the feet of another,' 
 less identifications of the Brahmanas. and then ' the hidden doctrine taught at such 
 
 4 Hence the constant refrain, ya evam veda cf. session.'
 
 IHTBODUCTION J fSoS"! 
 
 TO THE VEDA. ) L J 
 
 been handed down by tradition as separate works with separate names ; and other 
 tracts of the same general style and contents have been written ; but it must be 
 remembered that the original Aranyakas and Upanisads were integral parts of the 
 digested Brahmanas. 1 
 
 Brahmanical speculation culminates in pessimistic Pantheism, in the doctrine of 
 the misery of all earthly existence, from which we can hope for redemption only 
 through reabsorption into the universal All-in-One. This is the result of Brahmanical 
 thought, on which as a foundation was built up the doctrine and order of Buddha ; 
 this the link that unites the Brahmanic and the Buddhistic chains of development. 2 
 
 95. The Brahmanas presuppose a thorough acquaintance with the course and 
 details of the sacrifice, and do not undertake a systematic exposition thereof. But 
 when the ceremonies had grown to tremendous length and complexity, it became 
 necessary to have manuals giving full and orderly directions for the use of the 
 celebrant. Such works are the ' Rules for the sacrifices ' or Qrauta-sutras, so called 
 because they stand iu most intimate relation to the Veda or ' sacred texts ' (gruti), 
 and continually cite these texts, and prescribe the manner and the occasions of their 
 employment with the various ceremonies. 
 
 96. Usage and observance, crystallized into sacred ceremony, invest the whole 
 life of an Aryan Hindu nay, even his pre-natal and post-mortem existence. These 
 usages differed considerably in different localities, and in the lesser details among 
 the different families of the same locality. In part, perhaps, to counteract the 
 tendency to diversity, books were made describing the observances recognized as 
 normal in a certain school or community. They are called Grhya-sutras, or ' Rules 
 of domestic usages.' Here, too, as well as in the sacrifice, everything proceeds with 
 the recitation of Mantras ; so that these books also attach themselves to certain 
 Vedas or Vedic schools. The legitimate subjects of these Rules are the ' Sacraments' 
 (samskaras), and the 'Simple-sacrifices' (paka-yajnas) of the householder. 
 
 97. There is also a third class of Sutras, called Dharma-sutras, which pre- 
 scribe rules for the every-day life of those who would conform to the example of the 
 virtuous. Since they have to do with ' agreement-conduct,' i.e. the ' conduct ' (acara) 
 which has for its norm the 'agreement' (sam-aya, lit. ' con-vention ') of those who 
 know the law, they are also called Samayacarika-sutras. The matters belonging 
 more properly to the Grhya-sutras are sometimes treated also in the Dharma-sutras. 
 But the legitimate subjects of the latter are far more varied than those of the former. 
 They embrace all sorts of injunctions and restrictions relating to etiquette, to 
 eating and sleeping, to purification and penance, and to the details of the daily life 
 of the student and householder and hermit, and even extend to the duties of the 
 king and to the beginnings of civil and criminal law. In the order of development 
 they are plainly posterior to the Grhya-sutras. 
 
 98. As the sacred texts of the Mantras grew in sanctity, their dialect and 
 style of thought became obsolescent. For the transmission of the sacred lore, a 
 learned apparatus became necessary. To preserve the written text of a given 
 'branch' (gakha) of the Veda from any change in "one jot or one tittle," by 
 establishing the relations of the samhita and pada pathas ( 83) of that branch, 
 there were composed the phonetic treatises, which, because attaching each 'to a 
 
 1 See Whitney, AJP. vii.1-2. I manism is admirably sketched by Oldeuberg,Buddha, 
 
 1 The genetic relationship of Buddhism to Brah- , Introd., chap's ii.-iii.
 
 [359] 
 
 t INTRODUCTION 
 ( TO THE VEDA. 
 
 (certain) branch' (prati-gakham), are called Prat^akhyas. 1 These give with the 
 utmost minuteness of detail the rules for the retroversion of the pada to the samhita 
 readings, and thus enable us to establish with great accuracy the text as it was 
 in their day. 2 
 
 99. To preserve the knowledge of the sense of obsolescent words, there were 
 made collections of synonyms and of hard words (yA.o><r<nu), called the Nighantavas, the 
 oldest Vedic Glossary. Upon the Glossary there was written, by the ancient sage 
 Yaska, a comment called Nirukta, which is the oldest extant work of formal Vedic 
 exegesis, but which itself acknowledges a number of predecessors. Among its 
 successors, the most famous is the great commentary of Sayana 8 Acarya, ca. 1350 A.D. 
 The Anukramams are little works which give the divinity, the "seer," and the 
 metre of each hymn of a Samhita. 
 
 1 See Whitney, JAOS. vii.339-40; iv.259-60. 
 
 2 The word -texts were thus converted "from in- 
 struments more especially of exegesis, into a com- 
 
 plete and efficient apparatus for securing the 
 preservation of textual purity." L.c. iv.260. 
 3 Weber, HIL. p. 41-42. 
 
 100. It remains to give a brief bibliography of the literature of the Rigveda 
 Samhita with mention of the principal ancillary works appertaining to it. For the 
 bibliography of the other Saihhitas, reference may be made to Kaegi, notes 8-26, 
 or to Weber's History of Indian Literature. 
 
 1. Rigveda. Saiiihita. a. Text-editions. The 
 first complete edition was issued by Aufrecht, 1861- 
 63, as vol's vi. and vii. of the ISt. Miiller's great 
 six-volumed quarto, with the full Sarahita and Pada 
 texts, Sayana's commentary, an index, etc., was 
 begun in 1849 and completed in 1874. Then came 
 the editions mentioned at the beginning of this 
 Reader, in the Brief List, no's 11 and 12. 
 
 b. Exegesis. The greatest achievements in Vedic 
 exegesis must be ascribed to Roth. They are con- 
 tained principally in the St. Petersburg Lexicon, 
 Brief List, no. 5. Grassmann's Dictionary and his 
 Translation are described in the List, no's 13 and 14. 
 Professor Alfred Ludwig of Prague has published a 
 large work in five volumes (Prag, Tempsky, 1876-80) , 
 entitled Der Rigveda. Vol's i. and ii. contain a 
 translation of the hymns arranged according to deities 
 and subjects. Vol. iii. contains an introduction to 
 the translation, entitled Die Mantra-litteratur und 
 das alte Indien. Vol's iv. and v. contain a com- 
 mentary on the translation. 
 
 c. General "Works. Abel Bergaigne's work en- 
 titled La religion vedique (Paris, Vieweg, 1878-83. 
 3 vol's) is a systematic and encyclopedic exposition 
 of the religious and mythological conceptions of the 
 RV. The work of Geldner and Kaegi (List, no. 15), 
 and those of Weber, Zimmer, and the rest (no's 21- 
 26) , all bear more or less directly on the study of the 
 Veda. Whitney's Oriental and Linguistic Studies 
 (New York, Scribner, Armstrong, & Co. 1st series, 
 1873) contain among other things valuable essays on 
 the history, interpretation, and contents of the RV. 
 Very recently has appeared a book by L. von Schro- 
 der, Indiens Literatur und Cultur in historischer 
 Entwicklung (Leipzig, 1887), the first third of which 
 is devoted to the Veda, and especially to the period 
 of the Yajurveda. 
 
 2. Rigveda. Brahmanas etc. The .Aitareya 
 Brahmana was edited by Aufrecht see List, no. 16. 
 
 Haug had already published the text with a trans- 
 lation (Bombay, 1863), criticised and corrected by 
 Weber, ISt. ix.177-380. 
 
 The Aitareya Aranyaka is associated with the 
 Brahmana of the same name. It has five books and 
 was edited with Sayana's comment by R. Mitra in 
 the Bibliotheca Indicd, 1876. See 8BK. i. p. xci f. 
 
 Aitareya Upanisad is the name borne by certain 
 parts of the Aranyaka, viz. book ii., chap's 4, 5, 6 
 see SEE. i. p. xcvi. The text was edited and trans- 
 lated by Roer, BL, 1849-63. Miiller gives another 
 translation, SEE. i.200f. 
 
 The (pahkhayana or Kausltaki Brahmana was 
 edited by Bruno Lindner (Jena, Costenoble, 1887). 
 A translation is soon to follow. 
 
 The Kausitaki Brahmana Upanisad was edited 
 (with amkara's comment) and translated by Cowell, 
 BI., 1861. Another translation, by Miiller, SEE. 
 i.271f ; introduction, ibidem, p. xcviii. 
 
 3. Rigveda. Sutras etc. Afvalayana's rauta- 
 sutra was edited by R. Vidyaratna, BI., 1874. 
 
 A9valayana's Grhya-sutra was edited (with trans- 
 lation) by Stenzler see List, no. 17. English ver- 
 sion by Oldenberg, SEE. xxix. 
 
 ankhayana's Qrauta-sQtra was edited by Alfred 
 Hillebrandt, BI., 1886. 
 
 ankbayana's Grhya-sutra was edited in 1878 by 
 Oldenberg, ISt. xv.1-166, with translation. English 
 version by Oldenberg, SEE. xxix. 
 
 No Dharma-sutra is certainly known to be attached 
 especially to the RV. Samhita. 
 
 The RV. Prati9akhya was edited by Regnier (JA., 
 1856-58), and by Muller (Leipzig, 1856-69). Each 
 editor gives a translation . 
 
 The Nirukta, with the Nighaijtavas, was edited 
 and elucidated by Roth (Gottingen, 1848-52). 
 
 The Anukramani of Katyayana was edited with 
 valuable accessories by Arthur A. Macdonell in the 
 Anecdota Oxoniensia, Oxford, 1886.
 
 NOTES TO { 
 PAGE 69. { 
 
 [360] 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 
 
 Selection XXXI. KV. i. 1. Hymn to 
 Agni, the Fire-god. Translated by "Whit- 
 ney, Century Magazine, 1887, xxxiii. 915. 
 Respecting Agni, see Kaegi, p.35(50)f, and 
 
 N.119f. 
 
 THE METRE is gayatri. Each stanza 
 (re) consists of three octosyllabic padas with 
 iambic cadence see Kaegi, p.24(34) and 
 N.85. Observe that, if the stanza be a triple 
 one, the strophe usually consists of three 
 stanzas and the hymn of a multiple thereof. 
 
 In respect of frequency, the order of 
 the metres in the RV. is : first the tristubh 
 (about | of RV.); then the gayatri (about 
 J) ; then the jagati (about \ ) see Haskell, 
 JAOS. xi.p.lx = PAOS. May, 1881. 
 
 LINES 1-2. ile, v'ld : accentless, 592 : for 
 the new letter, see p. 291 If 8, and Whitney, 
 5 end. RV.x.2.5 plays on the etymology 
 of rtv-ij thus : agnlr devan rtu-g6 yajati. 
 For superl., 471. 
 
 3. purvebhis, 330, Vedic instr. : for r 
 final w. initial r, Whitney, 14 end. 
 
 4. U.f. devans a ihd. This interesting 
 combination is really the result of a historic 
 survival, and is fully explained at 209. 
 Observe that an, though transliterated with 
 two letters, is a simple nasalized vowel, 209 a. 
 
 a vaksati : position of prefix, 1081 ; 
 accent of verb form, 1082 ; v'vah, aor. sub., 
 893 1 . 
 
 5-6. agnavat, 700: use of mode, 576: 
 subject indefinite, dive-dive, 1260. 
 yagasam, 1151.2a. 
 
 7-8. agne, acct, 314 3 . asi, acct, 595 a. 
 
 Position of clauses, 512a. Locative, 
 304 a. 
 
 1O. a gamat, true aor. subjunctive (836 2 ), 
 corresponding to the ind. agan (833): see 558. 
 
 11-12. tvam may be read tuam. Observe 
 that in the Veda, when rhythmically read, 
 hiatus is common 113 3 . agne is at the 
 beg. of a new pada, 314 3 . U.f. tava id 
 tad satyam. Lit. 'Just what pleasant 
 thing thou wilt ( wiliest to) do for the 
 pious man, of thee' indeed that (is) real or 
 unfailing ' i.e. ' Whatever blessing thou 
 
 dost purpose to grant, that thou never fail- 
 est to bestow/ 
 
 13-14. U.f. upa tva (491 3 ) agne (accent- 
 less) a imasi (548 1 ), Vi+upa^a. 
 
 15-16. The accusatives are to be taken 
 w. tva. We may pronounce adhvaranaam 
 (113 3 ), or leave the pada catalectic. U.f. 
 gopam. In pada c, we must pronounce 
 sue, in order to produce an iambic cadence. 
 
 17-18. S& bhava, see ta 2. - U.f. 
 sunave agne: for treatment of the acct in 
 combination, see 135, example 4. 
 
 Observe that as the metre here shows 
 padas a and 6 are always independent of 
 each other as regards euphonic combination, 
 and that as here the written text, with 
 perverse consistency, always combines them 
 when this is possible. 
 
 sacasva, pada, sacasva, 248 c. Pro- 
 nounce su-astaye. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 7O. 
 SELECTION XXXII. RV. i. 32. Indra 
 slays the dragon. Respecting Indra and 
 the natural significance of the myths about 
 his battles, see Kaegi, p. 40(57)f, N.141f; 
 and Perry, JAOS. xi.H7f. 
 
 The "hymn" appears to consist of two 
 separate pieces see N. to 70 20 . The catenary 
 structure is noticeable in some pairs of stan- 
 zas (1-2; 3-4) see Kaegi, p. 24(34). 
 
 THE METRE is tristubh. The old Vedic 
 tristubh is much more free than that of the 
 classical Sanskrit; but its most important 
 feature, the cadence, is the same see p. 
 316, 43. 
 
 For statistics, see Haskell, JAOS. xi.p.lxii 
 = PAOS. May, 1881. For a discussion of 
 its development, see Oldenberg, ZDMG. 
 xxxvii.55f. 
 
 1. Pronounce viriani and (line 3) svariam, 
 and see Whitney, 84 b. pra vocam, aug- 
 mentless aorist (847 end), as improper sub- 
 junctive (563), with future mg (576). 
 
 2. U.f. ahan (637) ahim; anu apas ta- 
 tarda. Note juxtaposition of perf. w. impf. 
 and see 823 2 . -pri abhinat, vlrtiid, 692.
 
 [361] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 7O. 
 
 3. gigriyanam, 807. Indra's special 
 attribute is his " beloved thunderbolt," of 
 which the Epos fables much, ZDMG. xxxii. 
 296. 
 
 4. ' Like lowing kine, flowing suddenly 
 to a sea, down came the waters.' The point 
 of comparison is the noise. samudrdm, 
 perhaps ' to a gathering of water, so as to 
 form one ' not necessarily ' to the ocean.' 
 
 5 a . Pronounce avrmta, 135 4 (important): 
 in the AV., ii.5.7, the augment is written. 
 Cf. 70 17 N. -s6mam: see Kaegi, p. 72(99), 
 and notes 288-94 ; also Roth, ZDMG. xxxv. 
 680f and xxxviii.!34f. 
 
 5 b . Pronounce trikadrukesu a-, and ob- 
 serve that final -u is almost never to be 
 pronounced as -v when so written. Cf. RV. 
 ii.15.1, which seems to consist of reminis- 
 cences of the beg. of this hymn. 
 
 6. ' The Rewarder took the missile bolt 
 smote him, the first-born of dragons.' 
 ahan (593) has for direct object the enclitic 
 enam, ' him,' or, more correctly, ' im,' since 
 the English pronoun him loses its h when 
 enclitic. The enam is then explained by an 
 appositive. So 79 7 . 
 
 7-8. U.f . yad indra ahan , at mayinam 
 aminas pra uta . ' When, O Indra, thou 
 smotest , and (uta) thereupon broughtest 
 to nought the wiles of the wily, thereupon 
 bringing forth the sun, the day, the dawn, 
 then soothly foundest thou no enemy.' 
 
 The first at continues the force of yad 
 through pada b, as the acct (595a) of aminas 
 (\/2mi) shows. Position of pra, 1081 2 . 
 Order in pada c is unnatural : expect ' dawn, 
 sun, (full) day.' Pronounce suriam. 
 dyam, 361d: vocab., under div. usasam 
 and kf la : see references in vocab. ; the pro- 
 longations are in the even syllables of the 
 cadence. vivitse, 798a. 
 
 9. Pronounce viansam : cf . Whitney, 84a. 
 
 10. kuligena, 248b. vi-vrkna, nom. pi. 
 neut., common in Veda, for -and: Vvragc. 
 gay-a-te, transition-form (749) from root- 
 class, for ge-te (629). 
 
 11. a hi juhv-e (alternative form for 
 juhuv-e), Vhu+a: acct, 595d: subject, Vritra. 
 
 12 a . ' He (Vritra) did not escape (Vtr, 
 899a) the shock of his (Indra's) weapons.' 
 
 12 b . 'The (cloud-) rifts he crushed 
 together, who had Indra as his conqueror.' 
 That is, the monster, in his retreat or his 
 fall, crushed into a shapeless mass his 
 already riven cloud-castles. This is forced. 
 If we dared emend the air. \. rujanas to 
 rujanas (840 3 ), we might render, ' Broken, 
 he was (then) completely crushed* (998b). 
 
 indra-gatru: later books, e.g. C,Br. i.6. 
 3 10 , lay great stress on the correct accentu- 
 ation of this word ; indra-gatrtL, ' conqueror 
 of I.,' would be blasphemy. See Indische 
 Studien, iv.368 ; or Roth, Nirukta, p. xix. 
 
 13 b . U.f. a asya jaghana, see Vhan+a. 
 Subject here is Indra. 
 
 14. See vfsan. See \bliu, desid. 
 agayat, 629. Pronounce vi-astas, Whit- 
 ney, 84a. 
 
 15. 'Over him, lying so, crushed like 
 (na) a reed, the waters go, flowing for man- 
 kind (lit. the waters of man, flowing, do go).' 
 So Pischel, ZDMG. xxxv.717-24. P. thinks 
 that the original text was manoriihanaati, 
 i.e. manos (cf. 73 19 ) uhanas (Vvah4, pres. 
 mid. ppl., 619 8 ) ati, and that the author of 
 the pada text divided it wrongly, mano 
 ruhanas, changing, of course, n to n. 
 
 If manas, like anjas, could pass for an 
 instr., we might render ' (With a will, i.e.) 
 Lustily rising, the waters overwhelm him.' 
 amuya, 'so,' w. a sneer: cf. atra, 89*N. 
 
 16. pari-atisthat, acct, 595a, 1083. 
 tasam limits only the first member of the 
 foil. cpd. 
 
 17. Note relation of acct and mg in 
 vrtraputra. U.f. indras asyas: observe 
 the accordance between the written and 
 spoken form here see 135 4 , and cf . TO 5 *!*. 
 vadhar, 'weapon' of V's mother, not of 
 Indra. 
 
 18. Translated, 777b. danus, fem.,= 
 V's mother. gaye, see 613 : similarly 
 duhe, 80 16 , ige, 92 8 . 
 
 19-2O. ' The waters overwhelm V's hid- 
 den body, that was put down in the midst 
 of . In long darkness lay (a^agayat, 
 629) he who was vanquished by Indra.' 
 
 Here the narration comes to an end, 
 Stanzas 1-10 form a brief but complete epic. 
 The same general theme is treated again by
 
 N'OTES TO | 
 
 PAGE 7O. i 
 
 [362] 
 
 stanzas 11-14. Rik 15 seems to be a later 
 addition 
 
 21. dasapatnis: after I's victory, the 
 waters are called (x.43.8) arya-patnis, ' hav- 
 ing the Aryans as masters,' or ' having a 
 gracious (god) as master.' panineva 
 gavas (see g6) : the rain-giving clouds are 
 often called ' cows.' These are pent up by 
 a malicious demon (Pani), and their milk, 
 the refreshing water of heaven, is withheld 
 from man. 
 
 Curiously, the natural basis of this simple 
 myth is so far forgotten that the myth itself 
 is here made to furnish a simile for the very 
 phenomenon from which it is the poetic 
 outgrowth. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 71. 
 
 1. 'The orifice of the waters which was 
 closed up he who slew (805, 209) Vritra 
 opened that.' Waters conceived as if pent 
 up in some mighty cask. 
 
 2-3. ' A horse's tail becamest thou then , 
 O Indra, when on his lance he (V.) impaled 
 thee. As god alone, thou conqueredst . 
 Thou didst let loose the seven streams (but 
 see sapta) to flow' (lit. 'for flowing,' v'sr, 
 970b, 982). 
 
 In fighting with demons, Indra some- 
 times gets roughly handled for a while (so 
 iv.18.9). Such I conceive to be the situa- 
 tion here. Pada a is the crux. Possibly a 
 magic transformation is intended. V. im- 
 pales I. on his lance; but straightway the 
 god becomes a great sweeping trail of vapor. 
 Very differently Bergaigne, Eel. Vd. iii. 
 61-62. 
 
 It seems unavoidable to join deva ekas 
 withe: cf.i.33.4andi.!65.6 = 73 1 *. -Second 
 ajayas begins a new clause : hence acct, 593" 2 . 
 
 4. Explained under ya4 : asmai means 
 Vritra. -akirad dh-, 163. -Cf. what is 
 said of Yahve at Psalm xviii.13,14. 
 
 5. yuyudhate, 800a. U.f. ut apari- 
 bhyas (see apara). vi jigye, 787. 
 ' Indra was victor (both for the time) while 
 he and Ahi fought and (utd) for the future.' 
 
 6-7- ' What avenger of Ahi sawest thou, 
 Indra, when in the heart of thee having slain 
 (him) fear did come when nine and ninety 
 
 streams as an affrighted hawk the skies thou 
 didst cross 1 ' This may refer to a time 
 when after all the aerial commotion (i.e. 
 Indra's battling) the rain refused to fall 
 and the uncleared heaven signified Indra's 
 retreat. Reminiscences of this legend occur 
 at TS. ii.5.3: cf. MBh. v.9.27 = 255 and 
 10.43 = 334,f. -jaghnusas, 805. 
 
 8-9. See \ya 1 and \sa. U.f. sas id u 
 (176b) aran na . -Gen., 297c. - 
 Tenses, 823 2 . 
 
 SELECTION XXXIII. RV. i.50. To Surya, 
 the Sun-god. Respecting Surya, see Kaegi, 
 p. 54(76). The hymn is rubricated at 106 3 . 
 It is still used in India, at the Midday Ser- 
 vice. It was made the text of a linguistic- 
 mythological comment of 225 pages by W. 
 Sonne, KZ. vol's xii.-xv. ! 
 
 In the textus receptus, the hymn has 13 
 stanzas. I have given only 1-9. In the 
 first strophe, stanzas 1-3, the god is men- 
 tioned only in the 3d person. In the second 
 strophe, he is addressed in the 2d person; 
 and so also in the third strophe, excepting 
 as often the final stanza (9). 
 
 That stanzas 10-13 are later additions is 
 proved by their contents and language and 
 their (differing) metre. This proof is con- 
 firmed by the fact that the corresponding 
 passage of the AV., xiii.2.16-24, has only 
 stanzas 1-9 ; and also by the fact that only 
 1-9 are prescribed to be used in the ritual 
 see Bezzenberger's Beitrage, viii.198, ZDMG. 
 xxxviii.475, JAOS. xi.p.cxcii = PAOS. May, 
 1884, and AGS. ii.3.13 and comment, and cf. 
 87 10 N. Moreover, the addenda are at the end 
 of an anuvaka cf. JA. S.viii. 207=15. 
 
 1O. See u2. jatavedasam, see vocab. : 
 although 'All-possessor' was very likely the 
 primary mg (Whitney, AJP. iii.409), yet the 
 mg 'All-knower' also seems to have been 
 associated with the word early and commonly 
 (Eggeling, SEE. xxvi.p.xxxi). For analogous 
 cases, see h6tr and yama in vocab. 
 
 In the present very unusual applica- 
 tion of the epithet to Surya, 
 
 &s ira.vr' e'cpopa /cal KO.VT' tiranovfi, 
 the latter phase of mg predominates.
 
 [363] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 72. 
 
 11. ' That every man may see the sun, 
 lit. for every one for beholding the sun.' 
 See dig and read 969, 970a, and 982. - 
 vigvaya, 524-. 
 
 12-13. ty6 belongs logically with nak- 
 satra ni;, but is conformed in gender to 
 tayavas. With this simile, cf. RV. x. 
 189.2. See yatha4. yanti, no acct, 
 595a 2 . suraya, 'for the sun, i.e. to make 
 way for the sun.' Render: 
 
 Off like as robbers slink away 
 Yon constellations with their beams 
 Before the all-beholding Sun. 
 
 14. adrgram (834b end) vi (1081 2 ) 
 passively, 998b : equiv. to vy-adrksata, 882. 
 janan, 209. 
 
 18-19. See pratyancS. Pronounce de- 
 vanaam, 113 3 . pratyann, 210. Pro- 
 nounce siiar (Whitney, 84b) : reg. written 
 siivar in TS. siiar drge, 'a light to be- 
 hold' (cf. 6av/j.a Itieadai), here equiv. to 'a 
 glorious light.' 
 
 2O and 72 1 . yena, 509 end. pavaka: 
 see ref "s in vocab. ; this word the redactors 
 persist in miswriting ; it is a typical mistake 
 belonging to the second stage of the tradi- 
 tion see p. 354, 79, and KZ. xxvi.60. 
 
 janan anu : if joined w. ppl., render 
 'stirring or busy among (so RV. viii.9.2b) 
 his fellows;' if w. pagyasi (acct, 595a), 
 'over the peoples thou dost look on busy 
 man.' Pronounce tuam. 
 
 STROPHE 2, stanzas 4, 5, 6. Some join 
 6 with 7 possible, but very hard. It is 
 better to regard 6 as a parenthesis in which 
 the poet turns suddenly from Surya to 
 Varuna. The latter is the personified vault 
 of heaven, and the sun is naturally his eye 
 (RV. vii.63.1), and to mark the deeds of 
 restless man is his proper function [Kaegi, 
 p.65(90)]. Yena then refers to stiar, and 
 cakaasa is in explanatory apposition w. 
 yena. We may render 4, 5, 6 thus : 
 
 Thou goest onward, all-beheld. 
 Thou makest light, god Suria. 
 Thou shinest to the end of heaven. 
 Turning thy face upon the folk 
 Of gods, of men, or all the world, 
 Thou risest up, thou glorious light 
 With which, as eye, bright Varuna, 
 Over the peoples thou dost look, 
 To mark the deeds of restless man. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 72. 
 
 2-3. U.f. vi dyam (see div) esi, rajas 
 (171*) prthri, aha (425d) mimanas (Vlma4: 
 see 661, 655) aktiibhis ('with beams'), 
 pagyan (202 2 ). 'Beholding (in pregnant 
 sense) the generations, i.e. while generations 
 come and go.' 
 
 4-5. J. Burgess, Arch. Survey of Western 
 India, Kdthidwdd and Kacch, p. 216, men- 
 tions temple-images of Surya with a halo 
 (cf. gociskega) and borne by 'seven steeds,' 
 see plate lxv.2. Cf. Kaegi, N. 205. 
 
 6-7. ayukta (834b), 'hath just yoked.' 
 See 356 and 356*. svayuktibhis, Sayana 
 rightly, svaklya-yojanena. 
 
 SELECTION XXXIV. RV. i.97. To Agni. 
 See Preface, p. v, note 4. Rubricated at 
 106 3 . Recurs AV. iv.33. The refrain or 
 burden, pada c, of each stanza, is a mere 
 repetition of pada a of stanza 1 ; it has no 
 necessary connection with the rest of each 
 stanza, although it happens to fadge well 
 enough in the first and in the last three. 
 
 Grassmann and Ludwig make apa 
 g6gucat of the refrain a 3d s. subjunctive 
 (1008 2 ) ' let him drive ' ; but this would 
 require an accentless gogucat. 
 
 We may therefore disregard the refrains 
 entirely and group the remaining eight 
 couplets [each consisting of two octosyllabic 
 verses], two and two, into four stanzas of 
 four verses each. 
 
 8-11. See Vguc+apa and guc+a: apa 
 g6gucat is pres. ppl. of intensive conjuga- 
 tion (1012) no nasal, 444. U.f. gugugdhi 
 a, perf. impv. of primary conjugation, 813. 
 Three instrumentals (line 10), 365.1. 
 
 STANZA 1 [made by grouping stanzas 1,2] 
 may be rendered: 
 
 Driving away with flames our sin, 
 Airni, bring welfare with thy light. 
 
 {Driving away with flames our sin.] 
 With prayer for fertile fields, for wealth, 
 And prayer for good, we sacrifice 
 
 [Driving away with flames our sin.] 
 
 12. With pra, supply jayeta in a and 
 jayeran in 6. bhand-isthas (superl. to 
 bhad-ra, v/bhand, 467) ,' brightest, luckiest ' * 
 asmakasas, 330 end.
 
 NOTBS TO i 
 
 PAGE 73. i 
 
 [364] 
 
 14. pr& yat sc. jayeran (760.3), 'that 
 they may be propagated = that offspring 
 may go forth from them ' and so in the 
 other clauses of lines 12 and 14. 
 
 In lines 12 and 14, the yad's seem to 
 introduce final clauses expressing the pur- 
 pose of yajamahe, line 10. In line 16, 
 Whitney makes yad= ' as, just as.' For all 
 the yad-clauses, Grassmann seeks principal 
 clauses in the refrains. 
 
 STANZAS 3^ and 5$. ' [We sacrifice,] in 
 order that (offspring may go) forth from 
 the luckiest of them (?) ; and forth from our 
 patrons ; that offspring may go forth from 
 thy patrons, Agni, forth from us (who 
 are) thine, 
 
 'As forth from mighty Agni on all sides 
 go the rays. For thou, (God) who hast a 
 face on all sides, on all sides dost protect.' 
 
 2O. ' Bring us across the (stream of) foes 
 as with a boat.' See nad and v'2pr+ati. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 73. 
 2. Pronounce B& nah sindhviva navdya, 
 w. elision of -m and combination : instance 
 of a text-error of the second stage of the 
 tradition see p. 354, 79 and KZ. xxvi.61, 
 and cf. 78 7 . See i&2 end. ati parsa 
 (248c), >/2pr, impv. of s-aor., 896. 
 
 SELECTION XXXV. KV. i.165. Indra 
 and the Maruts. Respecting the Maruts 
 and their relations to Indra, see Kaegi, p. 39 
 (56), and Bergaigne, La religion ve"dique, ii. 
 369f, 392, and esp. the interesting article of 
 Oldenberg, Akhydna-hymnen im R V., ZDMG. 
 xxxix.60-65. The hymn is the first of a col- 
 lection of eight Marut hymns (165-172), 
 concerning whose arrangement, see Olden- 
 berg, I.e. We have here the beginnings of 
 poetry in epic-dramatic form cf . Preface, 
 p. iy, note 7. This hymn has been admi- 
 rably translated by Roth, ZDMG. xxiv.302 
 (or Siebenzig Lieder, p. 84) ; English version 
 by Whitney, North American Review, 1871, 
 cxiii.182 = OLSt. i.144. It is also translated 
 with comments by Max Miiller, R V. Sanhita, 
 translated, etc., i.!62f. I give the "story of 
 the hymn " abridged from Roth-Whitney. 
 
 STANZAS 1-2. The poet inquires whither 
 
 the Maruts are going and how they are to 
 be detained at the sacrifice. The implicit 
 answer is ' With praise.' This then is accom- 
 plished in the dialogue, where, although 
 greatest glory is given to Indra, the god in 
 turn lauds them generously. 
 
 STANZAS 3-4. The Maruts ask why Indra 
 is going alone, without them, his usual com- 
 panions. Indra answers evasively that he 
 is on the wa}- to a sacrificial feast. 
 
 STANZAS 5-6. The Maruts are eager to 
 go with him. He retorts that they were 
 not so eager when he went, alone, and slew 
 the dragon. 
 
 STANZAS 7-8. The Maruts remind him 
 that they have helped him do great things 
 and can be most useful allies in the future. 
 
 Not inclined to share his glory with them, 
 he boasts again of his exploits. 
 
 STANZAS 9-12. The Maruts acknowledge 
 his might this time without reserve and to 
 his satisfaction. Indra, vaunting himself 
 once more (10), thanks them for their hom- 
 age (11), and declares that the sight of them 
 delights his heart (12). 
 
 STANZAS 13-15. The poet (Agastya) turns 
 to the Maruts directly and asks them to 
 recognize and reward his skill and devotion. 
 
 4. v'myaks+sam, perf. (785, 794b) as pre- 
 terito-present. Lit. ' With what common 
 course (? ) have they kept together ? i.e. upon 
 what common journey are they together 1 ' 
 
 5. mat!, Classic matya, 340. U.f . 
 kiitas a_itasas (v'i, 330 end) ete ? arcanti 
 (accent-combination, 135 2 ) usmam ace. 
 as in aytavi^fffOai ira\T]v. vasuya, as at 72 10 . 
 
 7. See manas2. Vram4 : read 869, 
 864, and 856. 
 
 8. Pronounce tuam indra, as 5 syllables. 
 
 mahinah sann, 'being (usually) gay': 
 Roth-Whitney, 'though (else so) blithe'; 
 concessive force doubtful: perhaps they 
 mean a gentle reproach for his slighting 
 their company ' Why go'st thou alone, 
 and so merry withal ? ' 
 
 9. 'Thou talkest (usually), when going 
 along with (us) moving onward.' See 
 Vr+sam. Both ppls are of the root-aorist, 
 840 3 . voces, 854. harivas, 454b. 
 yat te asme (loc. 492 2 ), 'which (is) to thee
 
 [365] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 
 PAOK74. 
 
 on our score, lit. on us,' i.e. 'which thou hast 
 against us.' 
 
 10". gam, ' (are) a joy," pred. to all three 
 subst. 
 
 lO b . See 9\isma2. iyarti, v'r, 643c. 
 pra-bhrtaa, ' (is) ready,' begins a clause. 
 
 11. ' They [men] are making supplication 
 (to me) ; they are enticing (me) with invo- 
 cation (uktha, as instr. s.). These two 
 (ima, 501 end) coursers here are carrying 
 me (lit, us) unto (iccha) them ' (ta = tani, 
 495 end: the good things mentioned in 
 pada a). 
 
 12. vayam, ' we,' i.e. the few who are 
 conceived as speaking for the whole troop. 
 
 See Vyuj3 : cf . 840 3 . Pronounce tamiah 
 gumbh- : notation explained by Whitney, 
 90b-. See tana under tanii and see \f2c_ubh. 
 
 The spokesmen designate their ' compan- 
 ions ' as ' free ' in order to magnify the value 
 of their readiness to follow Indra. 
 
 13. U.f. etan (not etan) : the Maruts 
 drive a dappled team of does or mares. 
 
 See Vyuj+upa: yujmahe is a root-class 
 present (612a), used with future mg (Ilia.). 
 -U.f. mi | indra (314 8 ). -See IsvadhaS. 
 babhutha, 798b. 
 
 14. kv& sya, Whitney, 90b 2 : pronounce 
 kiia sia svadhasid. sya, 'that' (wish 
 for my company), just mentioned, line 13. 
 They did leave him in the lurch once see 
 82 1 N. U.f. ydd sam-adhatta : see 
 Vldha+sam and 668. 
 
 15. Pada-text aham hi ugrdh. See 
 under v'nam : for gen., see 297c end, and cf . 
 77 8 . 
 
 16. bhuri, ace. n., may be either pi. (340) 
 or sing. Pischel shows that asme may be 
 used as instr. (or gen.) also. 'With (=in 
 company of) us combined, (and) by our 
 united prowess.' Pronounce yiijiebhis, 
 pauhsiebhis. 
 
 17. krnavama (248c), pres. subjunctive 
 (700) of v'kr, 71-5. -kratva, Classic kra- 
 tuna, 342. maruto, voc. : the spokesmen 
 call on their companions to bear them wit- 
 ness. But the reading maruto, nom., has 
 been suggested. Seeyad4end. vagama, 
 614. 
 
 18. vadhim, 904a. -babhuvan, 802. 
 
 19. Compare 70 15 N. 
 
 20. See a-nutta and dnu-tta in vocab. 
 -Seea3. -See V2vid3and 619 3 . -Either, 
 'Entirely invincible for thee is surely nothing. 
 Not (one) like thee is found among the 
 gods ' ; or, ' Entirely granted thee is (the 
 fact) that' surely no one (nakis mi, double 
 neg. = single) like thee etc.' Cf. KZ. xxvi. 
 611 and JAOS. xiii.p.c = PAOS. May, 1886. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 74. 
 
 1. nigate: acct, 596 and 597, cf. 89 9 N.; 
 the object (tva) is to be understood from 
 what precedes. Roth emends to karisyah, 
 see 938. 
 
 2. Pronounce ekasya cin me vibhii astu 
 6jas. ya=yani. See nd3. 'Whatsoever 
 things (I am) having ventured, (those) I will 
 accomplish (subjunctive = fut. ind., 576) 
 wisely (365.1).' 
 
 3. This vidanas may be referred to Vivid. 
 cyaVam, 563, 743. ige, as 1st pers. here. 
 What things I may undertake, just T, 
 Indra, am master of tliCm.' 
 
 4. U.f. amandat ma marutas st-, 17oa : 
 cf. 74 12 N. yad brdhma cakra, a subject- 
 clause co-ordinate with st6mas. 
 
 5. mdhyam, appositive to me. sakhye, 
 343a. taniie tanubhis, 'for myself, by 
 yourselves (vestra sponte), i.e. for me, spon- 
 taneously or heartily.' 
 
 6. See evd 1 end. Roth suggests the 
 emendation anedyah (anediah), as nom. pi. 
 m. ; or else anedyagravah. U.f. a isas 
 dadhanas. 
 
 7. sam-caksia, 993a. acchanta (cch, 
 227 ), for a-chant-s-ta, 883, 233b. See V2chad. 
 -chadayatha (248c), subjunctive, 1043.2. 
 
 'In very truth these (are) appearing 
 good unto me, blameless, putting on glory 
 (and) strength. Ye of shining hue have 
 delighted me, upon looking at (you), O 
 Maruts, and delight ye me now.' 
 
 8. See s'mah. pr& yatana, 618. 
 sakhlnr, 209. 
 
 9. See Vvat. bhuta, 835. navedas, 
 415e, as nom. pi. m. 
 
 The accent-rules for the oblique cases 
 of the pron. root a (cf. 502) are simple and 
 entirely natural. Thus :
 
 NOTES TO i 
 PAGE 74. ' 
 
 [366] 
 
 A. If the form is used adjectively, dis- 
 tinguishing ' this ' thing from others, it is 
 accented (74 9 ; 92 8 , 79 18 ). B. So also if used 
 as an emphatic substantive pron. (83 15 , 103 4 
 asmat). 
 
 C. But if used as an unemphatic sub- 
 stantive pron., 'his, her, him, their, them/ 
 it is accentless (83 16 , 70 3 , 71", 74 3 , 88 17 , and 
 very often). In this case the form cannot 
 stand at beg. of pada. 
 
 10. The a has pregnant mg (cf. Vguc+a 
 and -rapa) and goes w. both duvasyat (562 2 ) 
 and cakre. Both verbs depend (595) on 
 yad. Pronounce maaniasy a. ' When 
 the singer entices (you) hither as to an 
 oblation, (and when) the wisdom of Mana's 
 son has brought us hither .' 
 
 Roth would expunge one d and read 
 duvasya, instr. (365.1) of duvasya (1149 6 ), 
 ' with an honoring, i.e. reverently.' The 
 passage is a desperate one. 
 
 11. U.f. a u su vartta (irreg.. 839) 
 accha. See su 1 and Vvrt+a. ima = 
 imani. arcat, 743. 
 
 12. va st6mo, u.f. vaa st6mas, 173a: 
 similar combinations at 79 17 , vipras st-; 
 81 17 , ajayas sp- ; 87 1 ; 92 8 ; 74* ; per contra, 
 47 U . iyam here refers back see 1 idam. 
 See gir. 
 
 13. U.f. a isa yasista (914 3 ) vidyama 
 (\2vid, a pres. opt. of the root-class) isa-m. 
 Pronounce vayaam ? ' Hither with re- 
 freshment come ye. For ourselves as a 
 strengthening may we get refreshment (and) 
 a well-watered dwelling-place.' 
 
 It would seem that the poet Agastya 
 was the son of Mana, of the race of Mandara. 
 This entire final stanza recurs at the end of 
 hymns 166-168. The awkward repetition of 
 ' refreshment ' leads Roth to suspect that the 
 original pada d of the stanza is lost and 
 replaced by the one in the text, which is a 
 stock-verse recurring at the very end of 
 twenty subsequent hymns. 
 
 SELECTION XXXVI. RV. iii. 62. To 
 Savitar. Respecting Savitar, see Kaegi, p. 
 56(79). The last " hymn " (62) of the third 
 mandala is really a collection of six short 
 hymns to various divinities. Each hymn 
 
 contains three stanzas, and the triad to 
 Savitar is the fourth of the six. 
 
 The first stanza of this triad is the most 
 celebrated stanza of the RV., and is called 
 the savitri (sc. fk), or the gayatri tear' 
 f^ X^ v - I f nas held, and holds even now, 
 the most important place in the worship of 
 the Hindus. In the Proceedings of the 
 International Congress of Orientalists (1881) 
 at Berlin, ii. 2.160-187, and in Beligious 
 Thought and Life in India, p. 399f, Monier- 
 Williams discusses the place of the RV. in 
 the religious services of the Hindus of the 
 present day. 
 
 He says that the worshipper must first 
 bathe, then apply ashes to his limbs and 
 forehead, bind his hair, sip pure water, and 
 inhale pure air and retain it in his lungs for 
 a while. The worshipper then utters RV. 
 iii.62.10, which like the Lord's Prayer 
 among Christians and like the Fatihah 
 among Muhammadans takes precedence 
 of all other forms of supplication. [Cf. 
 Manu ii.lOlf.] Later on, the gayatri is 
 muttered 108 times with the help of a rosary 
 of Tulsi wood. 
 
 Much has been fabled about the stanza 
 and its virtues. See, for example, Manu 
 ii.77-83. And it recurs frequently in the 
 other Vedas; thus, four times in the VS., 
 twice in the TS., and once in the SV. "No 
 good and sufficient explanation of the pe- 
 culiar sanctity attaching to this verse has 
 ever been given." Whitney, reprinted in 
 Kaegi, N.222. The stanza has naturally been 
 imitated a great deal : so even in the RV. 
 (v.82) we find verses run in the same mould. 
 And it is interesting to find the RV. stanzas 
 iii.62.10 (gayatri) and v.82.1 repeated in 
 juxtaposition in the Taittiriya aranyaka at 
 i.11.2 and i.11.3. After the pattern of the 
 gayatri have been made a good many wooden 
 and halting stanzas: so TA. x.1.5,6. 
 
 14-15. dhimahi, root-aor. opt. mid. (837) 
 of Vldha see VldhaS. See also Whitney 
 in Kaegi, N.222. -y6 pracodayat (1043. 
 2), 'and may he inspire.' 
 
 16-17. puramdhia, perhaps ' with exalta- 
 tion (of spirit ) .' imahe. see v'i and reference. 
 
 18. naras, nom. pi. of nf.
 
 [367] 
 
 I NOTES TO 
 I PAGE 75. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 75. 
 
 SELECTION XXXVII. RV. iv. 42. Indra 
 contests the supremacy of Varuna. Re- 
 specting Varuna, see Hillebrandt, Varuna 
 und Mitra, 1877, and Kaegi, p. 61(85), notes 
 241f. This hymn has ten stanzas ; but the 
 last three have nothing to do with the rest. 
 
 Varuna is by far the noblest and loftiest 
 character of the Vedic pantheon, and seems 
 to have held the most prominent position in 
 the earliest period. Later as appears if 
 we consider the RV. as a whole the war- 
 like and national god Indra is plainly most 
 prominent. The gradual supersession of 
 Varuna by Indra 1 is reflected in a consider- 
 able number of passages among them, this 
 hymn and especially in x.124. 
 
 In stanzas 1-4 of this hymn, Varuna 
 claims the godhead, supreme and from the 
 beginning, in virtue of his creating and sus- 
 taining the world. Indra responds (5-6) 
 by asserting his irresistible might as god 
 of battle. And the hymn ends with an 
 acknowledgment on the part of the poet 
 (st. 7) of the claims of Indra. This is essen- 
 tially the interpretation of most of the 
 authorities. 2 
 
 But the general drift of the hymn has 
 been no less than its details the subject 
 of very much discussion and difference of 
 opinion. Bergaigne 3 considers stanzas 1-6 
 as a monologue of Indra. Barth 4 rejects 
 the theory of the decadence of the Varuna- 
 cultus and regards RV. x.124 as one of the 
 few survivals of a class of myths in which 
 Varuna is not the god of a smiling and 
 gracious heaven, but a malignant divinity. 
 Finally, Whitney urges that this is not a 
 question of supremacy and subordination, 
 but rather of comparative prominence. 
 This selection, I confess, is out of place in 
 a Reader. 
 
 1 Discussed by Muir, O8T. v.H6f; and, in con- 
 nection with RV. x.124, by Hillebrandt, p. 107-111. 
 See also Grassmann's introduction to x.124 and his 
 translation of it. 
 
 2 80 GKR., p. 26; Grassmann, Translation; and 
 Hillebrandt, esp. 72(159), 104-105. 
 
 3 La religion vedique, Hi. 142, printed 1877. 
 
 4 The religions of India, p. 18. 
 
 I. mama : note that every one of the 
 stanzas 1-6 begins with an emphatic form 
 of the first personal pron. dvita, if ren- 
 dered ' equally,' means ' as well as thou, O 
 Indra, who disputest my sovereignty/ or 
 else ' as well over all creatures as over 
 gods ; ' but Kern defines dvita as ' from 
 everlasting ' or ' to everlasting : ' the mg is 
 uncertain and has been so since the time of 
 the nighantavas (cf. Nirukta, v.3). Pro- 
 nounce rastram. See vigvayu in vocab. 
 Grassmann would emend yatha nah to 
 yatanah, root-aor. ppl. of Vyat, ' joining 
 themselves together, united:' 'mine (are) 
 all immortals together.' Otherwise we must 
 take nah as plural of majesty and equiv. to 
 mama. 
 
 'To me, the ruler, forever (belongs) the 
 sovereignty over all creatures, just as all 
 immortals (are) ours, i.e. our vassals.' 
 
 2 b . Taking vavri in mg 1, ' I am king of 
 the folk's highest cover, i.e. king of heaven,' 
 or else ' I am king of the folk of the highest 
 cover, i.e. king of the folk of heaven, or king 
 of the gods.' GKR. quite otherwise. 
 
 3. raja as pred. prathama(ni), 'first' 
 in order of time. See Vdhr5. 
 
 5. Indro : excellent authorities emend, 
 and read indra. 16 urvi (342) etc. are 
 accusatives dual neuter, object of the verbs 
 in next line. mahitva (330) ' by might.' 
 
 6. sam airayam, vir, 585. dharayam 
 ca makes a new clause, hence acct, 593 2 . 
 
 7-8. ' I made the dropping rains to stream. 
 I uphold heaven in the place of eternal order. 
 And in accordance with eternal order, the 
 sacred son of Aditi (i.e. Varuna) spread out 
 the threefold world.' The sending of rain 
 is a function proper to Varuna cf. Hille- 
 brandt, p. 85-86. In the assignment of this 
 stanza the authorities differ and waver most. 
 
 9. Pronounce maam suagvas. vrtas, 
 'the chosen ones, 7rptf/uax<>' (v'2vr), or else 
 'hemmed in, sore beset' (Vlvr2) : opinion 
 about equally divided. \hu. 
 
 10. maghava^aham indras may make a 
 sentence by itself or be taken appositively 
 with the subject of krn6mi. See vr and 
 reference. 
 
 II. cakaram, 817, 818 2 . -nakis begins
 
 NOTES TO i 
 
 PAGE 75. ' 
 
 [368] 
 
 new clause. varate, \flvr3, rootaor. subj. 
 (836). 
 
 12. mamadan, perf. subj., 810a. yad 
 uktha(ni) sc. ma mamadan. rajasii, 138a. 
 
 13. U.f. vidiis (790a) te, 188b: similarly 
 80 15 . ' All beings have knowledge of thee 
 as such a one (tasya). These things thou 
 proclaimest to Varuna, O true one.' 
 
 14. Pronounce tuam, both times. 
 grnvise, 699 2 end, see v'c,m2. ' Tu hostium 
 interfector clues.' jagh-, 805: cf. 71 1 . 
 vrtan, v'lvr2. arinas, 725. 
 
 SELECTION XXXVIII. RV. iv. 52. To 
 Usas, the Dawn-goddess. See Kaegi, p. 
 52(73). The monograph by Brandes, Ushas 
 og Ushas-hymnerne i Rigveda, Copenhagen, 
 1879, gives translations of all the 21 hymns 
 in juxtaposition. Cf. also Easton, JAOS. 
 x.p.lxix = PAOS. Oct. 1873. 
 
 -Stanzas 1, 2, 3 (= SV. ii.1075-7) form a 
 strophe. Stanzas 5, 6, 7 seem to form a 
 second. Stanza 4 seems to be an addendum 
 to the prior strophe. 
 
 15-16. U.f. sya, 188a. -Vlvas+vi. - 
 svasus, cf. RV. i. 113.3. prati adargi 
 (844), note force of prati. 
 
 17-18. citra as pred. mata, cf . Hesiod, 
 Theogony, 378-82. -gavam, 361c. The 
 ' kine ' are the fleecy morning-clouds, the 
 children of Dawn cf. Kaegi, note 197. 
 Seertavan: the idea in Job xxxviii.!2 b 
 or Psalm civ.!9 b is similar. "The sun 
 knoweth his going down." 
 
 Bright as a ruddy steed became 
 The faithful mother of the kine, 
 Usas, the friend of Agvin* twain. 
 
 19. Note how all three padas of this 
 stanza begin with uta. Pronounce sa- 
 khasi, u.f. sakha asi. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 76. 
 
 1. ILf. uta usaa (voc.). vasv-as, 342, 
 297c. Igise, 630. 
 
 3. prati abhutsmahi (Vbudh), 882 and 
 155 : ' we have awaked with praises to meet 
 thee (tva) ' vocab. wrong. 
 
 4-5. prati adrksata (Vdrg), 879b, 882, 
 218. -U.f. a usaa apras (889). 
 
 Gladsome before our eyes appear 
 
 Her beams like herds of kine let loose. 
 
 The wide expanse of air she fills. 
 
 6-7. a-paprusi, sc. jrayas, or with Sayana, 
 jagat, 'the world,' 'all': the stems of this 
 perf. ppl. are paprivans- and paprus-, cf. 
 803 and 459. Pronounce vi avar (Vlvr, 
 831 2 , 585 2 ). -'According to thy wont.be 
 gracious.' 
 
 8-9. dyam, see div. U.f. a^antarik- 
 sam, sc. tanosi (Vltan+a, 698B). See 
 priya3. Note the radical connection of 
 the assonant words and render by ' radiant 
 ray,' ' effulgent flame,' or the like. 
 
 SELECTION XXXIX. RV. v. 24. To Agni. 
 The stanzas are dvipada, i.e. consist of 
 two padas, one of 8 and one of 11 or 12 
 syllables. Most nearly like this hymn in 
 metre is RV. x.172 ; but the stanzas of RV. 
 viii.12,13,15, and 18 are essentially similar 
 (8+8+12). 
 
 It is very worthy of note that three of 
 the stanzas occur in immediate juxtaposition 
 in the other samhitas, and as follows: in 
 the order 1, 2, 4, at SV. ii.45t,458,459, at 
 VS. xv. 48 a ,48 b ,48 c , and at VS. iii.25 a ,25 b ,26 
 (here stanza 3 follows as 26 b ) ; and in the 
 order 1, 4,2 at TS. i.5.6 and iv.4.4. Finally, 
 to judge from the legend given below, and 
 from the prescriptions of the ritual of the 
 sacrifice to the Manes, for example this 
 hymn would appear to be a trca or triad of 
 riks (see Sayana to RV. v.24 and to PB. 
 xiii.12.5). 
 
 Tradition (Katyayana) ascribes this 
 hymn and also x. 57-60 to the Gaupayana 
 brothers, Bandhu, Subandhu, C.rutabandhu, 
 and Viprabandhu. In his comments to x. 
 57-60, Sayana gives the pertinent legendary 
 material taken from ancient sources ; and 
 this, with other matter, is given in transla- 
 tion, in JRAS. NS.ii.441f, by Max Miiller, 
 who discusses the legend at length. 
 
 The Brhaddevata says that king Asa- 
 mati sent away the four brothers who were 
 his priests, and put in their stead two Brah- 
 man wizards. These took shape as doves, 
 bewitched Subandhu, and plucked out his 
 soul. In order to cause the spirit to return,
 
 [369] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PACK 76. 
 
 the three remaining brothers recited x.58 etc., 
 and ' praised Agni with the dvipada hymn 
 as it is among the Atris,' i.e. in the book of 
 the family of Atri, the fifth. Then Agni 
 gave back to Subandhu his soul, and the 
 brothers, delighted, sang the rest of x.60 
 (7-12) and laid their hands (cf. 91 2 N.) on the 
 one thus resuscitated. 
 
 10. agne, acct, 314 8 . Pronounce tuam. 
 bhava, 248c : so urusya and grudhi, line 
 12. 
 
 11. accha, 248a. - naksi, V2na, 624. 
 -Superl., 471. -das, 835. 
 
 12. sa, see ta2 end. nas, 297b. 
 bodhi, see 839 end : here from Vbudh, see 
 Vbudh3. grudhi for grudhi: aoristimpv., 
 839 : acct, 593 2 mid. - no, u.f . nas, 194. 
 aghayatas, pres. ppl. ablative, 290: acct, 
 316, 318a. -See Isama. 
 
 13. See under ta2. didivas, Vdi, perf. 
 ppl., voc., 462a. imahe, see Vi. 
 
 SELECTION XL. RV. v. 40. Indra and 
 Atri, and the sun eclipsed by the demon. 
 For a critical analysis of the hymn, see 
 Grassmann, Translation, i.190 and esp. 540. 
 Stanzas 6, 7, 8, here given, are quite inde- 
 pendent of the rest. 
 
 Ludwig identifies the eclipse here re- 
 ferred to with that of April 20, 1001 B.C., 
 O.S. see Sitzungsberickte d. bohmischen 
 Gesell. d. Wiss., 1885. His argument is 
 reported by Whitney, JAOS. xiii.p.lxif = 
 PAOS. Oct. 1885, and by Bergaigne, JA. 
 8.vi.372f . No fair interpretation of the text 
 furnishes data precise enough for an exact 
 identification. 
 
 Stanzas 6 and 8 are spoken by the poet; 
 stanza 7, by the Sun. The Sun's foe, Suar- 
 bhanu (accent!), is 'he who has the sun's 
 beams,' and is later identified with Rahu, 
 the demon who ' swallows,' ' devours/ or 
 'seizes' (\f2gr, \fgras cf. 23%., Vgrah) the 
 sun or moon, and so causes eclipses. The 
 Sun is in terror, and implores Atri for help : 
 and the latter rescues the orb by prayer and 
 praise. 
 
 Atri's mythical exploit is often men- 
 tioned in the Brahmanas (see texts in Lud- 
 
 wig, v.508; and cf. SEE. xxvi.346). Thus 
 the PB., at vi.6.8,11, narrates how, at the 
 request of the gods, Atri restored to bright- 
 ness the sun, which the demon had smitten 
 with darkness. On this account, it continues, 
 a present of gold, the symbol of brightness, 
 is made to a descendant of Atri at a sacrifice 
 now-a-days. 
 
 Interesting are the Greek ideas about 
 the TrdyKoivov rtpas that bringeth to nought 
 men's strength and wisdom see Pindar's 
 Fragments [74], Bergk 4 i.411f and notes. 
 
 14. ava^ahan (593), cf. 70 7 and note. 
 
 15. gulham, Vguh. apa-vrata, ' having 
 action off, i.e. baffling,' or, as in vocab. 
 ' The sun, hidden , Atri found (avindat) 
 by the fourth prayer.' 
 
 Ludwig reasons thus : The other priests 
 had a regular liturgy of three prayers for 
 combating eclipses. On this occasion, these 
 proved ineffectual. Atri knew a fourth, and 
 that brought the sun out. Hence the totality 
 must have been very long. This matter is 
 discussed in full by Whitney, I.e., p. lxv(=xxi). 
 Bergaigne, I.e., p. 383(=14), says it is a 
 mere case of the use of a sacred number 
 plus one cf. Rel. ve'dique, ii.128. 
 
 16. mam (pronounce maam) imam, ' me 
 here, i.e. in this plight ; ' Sayana, Idrg-avas- 
 tham. U.f. atre : the Sun is addressing 
 Atri. irasya, 365.1. bhiyds-a, ' (me, 
 who am thine) with fear, i.e. who am thine, 
 (but) sore in terror : ' or, the word may be 
 taken actively, as the accent (1151.2c) and 
 Say ana's gloss ('fear-inspiring') suggest, 
 and joined with the subject ' with a 
 frightening.' ma ni garit: V2gr; aor., 
 899a ; combination w. ma, 679. 
 
 17. Pronounce tuam mitr6 asi tad 
 mehavatam. mitr6, 'friend.' U.f. tad 
 (see ta2 end) ma iha avatam: 'so do ye 
 two help me here, (thou) and V.' With the 
 peculiar omission of tvam compare that of 
 aham, 79 10 N. So RV. viii.1.6. 
 
 18 and 77 1 . brahma= atris of next line. 
 yuyujanas (807), see \fytij2. kiri may 
 rather mean ' praise. ' upagiksan, see 
 Vgak+upa. U.f. caksus a_adhat (830). 
 - apa aghuksat, v'guh, 920, 916.
 
 NOTES TO I 
 PAOB 77. \ 
 
 [370] 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 77. 
 
 SELECTION XLI. RV. vii. 55. Magic 
 spells to produce sleep. Ascribed to Vas- 
 istha. The hymn consists of three parts 
 differing in metre and disconnected in con- 
 tents. For a general discussion of it, see 
 Colebrooke's Essays 2 i.27, and Whitney's 
 note, ibid. p. 112; JAOS. iii.336f ; and esp. 
 Aufrecht, ISt. iv.337f. Sayana reports the 
 native traditions about the hymn. Thus : 
 
 Vasistha came by night to the house of 
 Varuna to sleep, say some ; to steal grain, 
 say others. He was assailed by the watch- 
 dog, which bayed at him, and fain would 
 have bitten him; but he laid the hound 
 asleep with the stanza beginning, 
 
 When, silv'ry Sararaeya, thou, 
 
 and the one following. Later superstition 
 uses the hymn to quiet uncanny creatures 
 at night : see Rigvidhana, ii.26. 
 
 FIRST PART. The hymn next preceding 
 this in the RV., vii.54, is to Vastospati, the 
 Lar familiaris, and consists of three stanzas. 
 The first part of our hymn, vii.55.1, is a mere 
 addition to these three stanzas, and belongs 
 accordingly to vii.54 rather than to vii.55, 
 as appears from the fact that the four 
 stanzas are all recited together in the cere- 
 mony of moving into a new house. See 
 (^GS. iii.4, AGS. ii.9.9, and esp. PGS. iii.4.7 
 all in SEE. xxix.; and cf. MS. i.5.13. 
 
 The joining of this stanza to hymn 55 is a 
 simple misdivision of which the NT. shows 
 many parallel instances. Thus Mark ix.l 
 belongs to viii. ; chap. ix. should begin with 
 the Transfiguration. A converse misdivision 
 is at AV. vi.63-64 as compared with RV. 
 x.191. 
 
 SECOND PART. Stanzas 2-4 are part of 
 a scene at the entrance to Yama's kingdom 
 or the regions of the blessed. Yama's two 
 watch-dogs (cf. 83 17 N. and introd.) guard the 
 pathway and keep out the wicked. Here 
 one of them barks at some who would come 
 in; and these, in turn, protest that they 
 are godly men, and so have a right to 
 enter in peace. See Kaegi, N.274 ; Zimmer, 
 p. 421. 
 
 THIRD PART. Stanzas 5-8 are the in- 
 cantations by which the entire household is 
 put to sleep. According to Aufrecht, I.e. 
 (or Zimmer, p. 308), it is while a maid is 
 receiving the visit of her lover; but that 
 seems a little doubtful because \ve have 
 plurals nas and sam hanmas and vayam, 
 lines 12, 13, 15, and not duals. 
 
 With stanzas 5, 6, 7, 8 correspond respec- 
 tively stanzas 6, 5, 1, 3 of AV. iv.5, and the 
 variants are interesting. The third part has 
 nothing to do with the second ; but the dia- 
 skeuasts have juxtaposed them because in 
 both a dog is put to sleep. 
 
 2-3. vastospate, see above : for s, see 
 187. vigva for vfgvani, 330. edhi, 636. 
 
 Yaska, Xirukta x.17, says yad yad rupam 
 kamayate devata, tat tad devata bhavati. 
 Sayana quotes him from memory thus, yad 
 yad rupam kamayante, tat tad deva 
 viganti. 
 
 4-5. See dant. viva, accent !, 128 end : 
 cf. 83 15 . U.f. vi iva bhrajante rstayas. 
 See iipa2. - See vbhas and 678. - ' They 
 (the teeth) shine like spears, in the jaws of 
 the devouring one.' ni su (188a) svapa 
 is a refrain. 
 
 The dog here addressed is partly white 
 and partly reddish brown, as Sayana rightly 
 observes ; and this is in accord with the adj. 
 gabala, 'brinded,' applied to both of them 
 at 83 17 . 
 
 6-7. punahsara: for the mg, see vocab. 
 and cf . Hamlet i.4.51-53. kim. ' why ? ' 
 
 8. For the genitives, see 297c end, and 
 cf. 73 15 . -See v'ldr and 1010 and 1011. 
 
 Probably the swine as a domestic animal 
 is meant here. In that case, this stanza is 
 a later addition to 2 and 3, and is based on 
 a conception of the situation such as the 
 native tradition presents. 
 
 10. Quoted at 593 2 , which see. 
 
 11. In the Veda, ' complete ' is sarva and 
 'all or every' is vigva. Later, vigva dies 
 out and sarva does double duty. In the 
 Veda, the use of sarva in the proper mg of 
 vigva (as here, 77 17 , 85 20 , 91 1 ) marks the 
 passage as late. See vocab. under sarva. 
 
 ayam etc., 'these here people on all 
 sides, all the people around here.'
 
 [371] 
 
 ! NOTE s TO 
 PAGE 78. 
 
 STANZA 5 may be spoken by maid or by 
 lover or by both. With the AV. reading, 
 svapantu asyai jnatayah (see 365.3), it must 
 be spoken by the lover. Stanzas G-8 may 
 be spoken by both. 
 
 12-13. nas, expect nau see above. 
 See under yatha2 and cf. ya2. 
 
 14-15. See vrsabha 1. tena sahas- 
 yena (248b), ' by (aid of) this mighty one.' 
 vayam, expect avam ? Vsvap+ni, caus., 
 648. 
 
 16-17. naris, nom. pi., 365.2. Pada c 
 may be read as catalectic. 
 
 SELECTION XLII. RV. vii. 56. To the 
 Maruts or gods of the storm-winds. Com- 
 pare selection xxxv. (73 4 ) and introduction. 
 The hymn consists of two parts, of which 
 the first, here given, ends with stanza 10. 
 Number 11 is only the fragment of a stanza. 
 The rest (12-25) is in an entirely different 
 metre. 
 
 The metre of the ten stanzas is without 
 doubt a secondary one, being simply a form 
 of the tristubh syncopated at the sixth place, 
 i.e. with the prevailingly light sixth syllable 
 left out (cf. JAOS. xi.p.lxiii = PAOS. May, 
 1881). Thus, 
 
 Each of the parts into which the verse is 
 broken is a ' syllable-pentad ' or aksara- 
 pankti; and each is an independent pada, 
 since verbs at the beginning of the even 
 pentads are accented, e.g., at vii.34.3 b , 3 d , 4 b , 
 6 b . A pentad-couplet is sometimes joined 
 with a simply broken but unsyncopated 
 tristubh verse to form a half-stanza or 
 stanza (e.g. i.67.8 cd ; 70.4 cd , 10 cd ; x.46.1 h ); 
 and this fact seems to suggest the derivative 
 character of the pentads. 
 
 The gayatri-stanza has 3 verses of 8 
 syllables ; and the strophe has 3 stanzas, a 
 multiple of the number of verses. The 
 pentad-stanza has 4 or 8 verses of 5 syl- 
 lables ; and the hymn has 6, 10, or 20 stan- 
 zas, a multiple of the number of syllables. 
 The hymns RV. i.65-70 have "each 5 stanzas 
 of 8 pentasyllabic verses ; while vii.34A and 
 vii.56A and ix.109 probably consisted origi- 
 
 nally each of 10 or 20 stanzas of 4 penta- 
 syllabic verses. Compare Bollensen, ZDMG. 
 xxii.572f. 
 
 18. U.f . ke im viaktas adha suagvas. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 78. 
 
 1. U.f. nakis hi esam : cf . John iii.8, OVK 
 olSas Trd&fv tpx^rat (rb irvev/.ia). vidre, 
 790b, 798a. 
 
 2. sva-pubhis, ' with their (sva-) wings,' 
 taking -pii in the sense of pavana. Pavana, 
 lit. ' a cleaner,' from Vpu, sometimes means 
 a 'sieve' or a 'fan.' At 104 13 (see note), 
 the pavana used to clean or winnow the 
 ashes from the bones of a cremated corpse 
 may perhaps be a ' wing-like winnowing-f an ; ' 
 and observe that German Schwinge means 
 ' winnowing-f an ' and ' wing.' abhi va- 
 panta, ' bestrew, cover.' asprdhran, see 
 v'sprdh and 834b end. 
 
 Here the storm-gods are pictured as 
 lusty eagles, each sportively striving with 
 the others for precedence, and spreading his 
 wings over them in turn, to put them down 
 and master them. 
 
 Ludwig interprets, 'They vie in over- 
 whelming each other with their blasts' 
 (pavana has also the mg 'wind'). This 
 view accords with the character of the play- 
 ful, boisterous, and roaring gods, but not 
 with the conception of them as eagles ; and 
 it would seem to require the reading abhi 
 * vapantah. 
 
 Roth, and after him the vocab., suggests 
 that svapu is a ' besom (that raises the dust)': 
 ' they bestrew each other (in sport) with 
 dust.' At best, the line is doubtful. 
 
 3. ciketa, 787, Vcit3. -See yad2. - 
 The storm-gods are cloud-born, i.e. children 
 of the cloud conceived under the figure of a 
 dapple cow, pfgni. This stanza (4) ought 
 to come immediately after the second. 
 
 4. See vig2. sahanti, active : the forms 
 are usually middle. See Vpusii. 'The 
 host heroic, with the Maruts (as a part of it 
 or as allies), must be ever victorious, display- 
 ing deeds of manhood. ' Similarly stanza 7. 
 The vit seems to mean the Maruts in 
 alliance with Indra (cf. p. 364) or with some 
 mortal prote'ge (cf. vii.66.23, i.64.13).
 
 NOTES TO i 
 PAGE 78. ! 
 
 [372] 
 
 5. Lit. ' As to going, the best-going ; most 
 adorning themselves with adornment ; united 
 with beauty; terrible with strength.' Their 
 abundant ornaments are much spoken of 
 (e.g. v.54.11). Note the radical connection 
 of 6jas and ugra. 
 
 6. ' Terrible is your strength ; steadfast 
 your power; therefore (adha) is a troop, 
 with the Maruts (as allies), mighty.' 
 
 7. knidhmi, nom. n. pi., 340. Pro- 
 nounce miiniva (cf. 73 2 N.) or miinir 'va. 
 'Clear is your whistling. Your hearts 
 are wrathful as the wild onward-rush of a 
 doughty troop.' Otherwise Bergaigne, Me- 
 langes Renter, p. 85. 
 
 8. yuy6ta: irreg. impv. (654) of V2yu; ac- 
 cented, as standing at the beg. of a pada (see 
 above). pranan nah, u.f. pra-nak (192a, 
 161) nas: nak, for nak-t, v^nag, 833, 218 3 ; 
 augmentless aor. as subjunct., w. ma. 
 
 9. Classic, priyani namani (425d). 
 huve: we should expect huve. U.f. ayad 
 trpan (3d pi., 848 end : pada-patha wrongly 
 trpat). See yad3 and \lva,q2. We have 
 here an unsyncopated verse see above. 
 Grassmann emends. ' I invoke the dear 
 names of you the mighty, in order that they 
 (among you) who desire (our praise) may 
 be gladdened, O Maruts.' 
 
 SELECTION XLIII. KV. vii. 86. To Va- 
 runa. Respecting Varuna, see vocab. and 
 cf . p. 367. The hymn is rendered by GKR., 
 p. 6. The comments of Ludwig, vol.iv.p.88, 
 deserve careful attention. 
 
 The poet is ill and deems his sickness 
 a punishment sent by Varuna for some sin. 
 He acknowledges the wisdom of the majestic 
 god; but ventures to approach him with 
 confession of sin and prayer for forgiveness 
 and renewed self-consecration to the divine 
 service. Compare Kaegi, p. 66(92). 
 
 10-11. dhira-dhirani. -See tti2. - 
 mahina, poss. like colloquial Eng. ' mightily, 
 i.e. very.' urv-f, acc.du.f. paprathat, 
 classed doubtfully as an augmentless re- 
 duplicated aor., 869 s . Note how the accent 
 or the lack of accent of the verb-forms 
 affects the exegesis. 
 
 ' Wise in sooth is his nature (with 
 
 might) and mighty [? or Stable in sooth 
 are the creatures by his might], who propped 
 asunder the two wide worlds, even. He set 
 the great lofty firmament in motion, the stars 
 (collectively) for ever [or the stars as well, 
 cf. 75 1 N.] ; and he stretched out the earth.' 
 -Biblical parallels, Kaegi, p. 62(86). 
 
 12-13. Accent-marks, Whitney, 90b 2 : 
 taniia sam nu antar. bhuvani, 836 1 ' 3 . 
 See kim3. abhi khyam, 847 middle. 
 
 'And with my (svaya) self I say this 
 (take counsel thus), " When pray am I to 
 be in Varuna's presence 1 " etc.' 
 
 14. tad enas, rb a/xdprr;yua, ' the (admitted) 
 sin.' U.f. didrksu | upa u emi see u2 
 end. Ludwig takes didfk-su as loc.pl.m. of 
 didfc,, ' seer.' Thus case-form, stem-form 
 (see 1147b), and construction (cf. German 
 bei Jemand anfragen) are entirely regular. 
 Others take didrksupa for didrksus upa 
 (nom.s.m. with elision and crasis, cf. 78 17 x.); 
 but the acct is wrong see vocab. 
 
 'And unto the wise (\'cit, 787, 802) I go 
 to find out by inquiry' (Vprach+vi, 970a, 
 981 3 ). 
 
 lo. kavaya cid not my conscience only. 
 U.f. ahus, 801a. -V2hr. 
 
 16. ' What was, Varuna, the sin most 
 grievous (lit. principal) ? ' See yad3. 
 See Vhan and 1028 e and f. 
 
 17. pra vocas, 'tell,' 848 3 , 847 end. - 
 U.f. svadhavas | ava (135 2 ) tva anenas 
 namasa turas iyam (616 3 ). Pronounce, 
 with elision and combination, tureyam. 
 
 18-19. See v'srj+ava 3 and 2. Note 
 prolongations of finals in srja, srja, and 
 cakrma. With the second ava, supply 
 srja tani : ya = yani. Pronounce damano 
 (425f end), abl. Vasistha, the seer to 
 whose family all the hymns of this seventh 
 book are ascribed. 
 
 2O. ' It was not my own will, it was in- 
 fatuation .' Note how the pronouns con- 
 form in gender with the predicates. 
 ' Liquor, dice ' ancient and perennial sources 
 of crime : cf . Tacitus, Germania, xxiv. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 79. 
 1. 'The older is in the transgression of 
 the younger. Not even (canal) sleep itself
 
 [373] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 1 I 'A. . K 8O. 
 
 (id) excludes wrong.' I, Vasistha, have not 
 entirely overcome the sins of my youth. 
 Thoughts of malice or impurity trouble even 
 my sleep. Interpretation doubtful. 
 
 2-3. aram (not aram) karani, ' I will 
 serve,' root-aor. subjunctive (836 1 ) of VI kr. 
 
 anagas, now that my sin has been, as I 
 hope, forgiven. ' Made the unknowing to 
 know.' 'The wise (man) unto wealth the 
 still wiser (god) doth speed' (Vju). 
 
 4-5. ay am st6mas, referring back to 
 the hymn just ending see idam. See 
 Vcri+upa. See ks6ma2. See ul end. 
 
 ' Ye gods, keep us evermore with bless- 
 ings ' refrain of the Vasistha-hymns ; see 
 Kaegi, note 83c, and Ludwig, iii.129. 
 
 SELECTION XLIV. EV. vii. 88. To Va- 
 runa. Translated by GKR., p. 10. Like 
 enough stanza 7 is a later addition. 
 
 The poet, forsaken by Varuna on ac- 
 count of some sin, calls sadly to mind the 
 by-gone days when he walked so happily 
 with the god, and also the scene when, 
 gliding over the waters with the god of the 
 waters, he received the sacred appointment 
 of Rishi. He asks forgiveness and restora- 
 tion to divine favor. See Kaegi, p. 68(94). 
 It is not unnatural that Vasistha should 
 address himself (cf. Ps. ciii.l) or speak of 
 himself as a third person. 
 
 6-7 . Pronounce pray-istham and cf . 470 3 . 
 Im, enclitic pron., with which vfsanam is 
 in epexegetical apposition cf. 70 6 N. 
 karate, root-aor. subjunctive, 836. See 
 vfsan3, and cf. the Hebrew conception of 
 the sun that "rejoiceth as a strong man to 
 run a race," Ps. xix.5. 
 
 8. mansi, vman2, s-aor. mid. 1st pers. s., 
 882. ' So now, having come (805) to the 
 sight of him, as Agni's face I deem Varuna's.' 
 When I contemplate Varuna, his face seems 
 to me like blazing fire. 
 
 9. agmann, 210, 425c. abhi niniyat 
 (accentless), put doubtfully as a present opt. 
 of the reduplicating class, 651. ' The 
 light which in heaven [is], and the dark, let 
 the lord unto me bring, a wonder to see.' 
 The beauty of the heaven by night no less 
 than by day was a wonder. 
 
 10. a ruhava implies the subject avam, 
 i.e. (aham) varunag ca : see 76 17 N. At KZ. 
 xxiii.308 is adduced the AS. parallel, vit 
 Stilling song dhofon, ' we two, Scilling (and I) 
 raised a song.' See VIr+pra. See 
 madhya3. 
 
 11. adhi aparn sniibhis, ' iir (evpta) vSna. 
 6a\dffa"ns : ' pronounce sanubhis. U.f. 
 prenkhe. prd, inkhayavahai (1043.2) 
 is apodosis, as the accent shows. See 
 1 giibh and kam. 
 
 12. U.f. navf a^adhat (829). -Pro- 
 nounce su-apa(s). 
 
 13. sudinatv6 ahnam (430a) : cf. (hare 
 vr||jLcp(as TJ|ic pav tTriTe\oir), ' if ever he makes 
 a jolly day of it,' Alkiphron's Letters, i.21. 
 -U.f. yat (see this) nu dyavas (361d) 
 tatdnan (810a), yat usasas (tatanan). Cf. 
 Psalm lxxii.5,7,17. 
 
 14. Pronounce kiia tyani nau sakhia 
 and see kva. sdcavahe : tense, see 778a ; 
 depends on yad. See yad3. Muir com- 
 pares Psalm lxxxix.49. 
 
 15. jagama (248c, 793b), 'I had access 
 to : ' we might expect jagama, accented, and 
 so co-ordinate with sac-. V's golden house 
 is built (AV. vii.83.1) on the waters: 
 
 apsti te raj an varuna 
 grb.6 hiranyayo mitah. 
 
 16-17. See explanation under ya7. 
 Pronounce tuam. krnavat, 715, 700. 
 ' Doeth sins against thee.' sakha te, 
 ' (he is yet) thy friend,' as apodosis to the 
 concessively taken yas krnavat. So Lud- 
 wig. -See V2bhuj5. -U.f. yandhi (617, 
 212) sma (188a, 248a) vlpras (see 74 12 x.) 
 stuvat6 (619). 
 
 18-19. GKR. transpose padas 6 and c. 
 tvasu: u.f., as given rightly by the pada- 
 patha, tva (object of vanvanas) asd (loc. 
 pi. fern. 501). 'In these fixed or secure 
 dwellings dwelling, thee we (are) beseeching 
 (Vvan, 713, 705) for grace from the lap of 
 Aditi.' vi mumocat, 809, 810a. 
 Refrain as before, 79N. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 8O. 
 Selection XLV. RV. vii. 89. To Va- 
 runa. The hymn has been often translated :
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 8O. 
 
 [374] 
 
 so by Miiller, ASL. p. 540; Muir, v.67 ; GKR. 
 p. 12 ; Hillebrandt, Varuna und Mitra, p. 64 ; 
 Bergaigne, Religion Vedique, iii.155. 
 
 It is the prayer of a man who is varuna- 
 grhlta, 'seized by Varuna, i.e. afflicted with 
 the dropsy.' V. is god of the waters (cf. 
 7 10 N., 79 15 x.), and the disease is supposed to 
 come from him and as a punishment for sin : 
 see AV. iv.16.7; also AB. vii.15, atha 
 ha^aiksvakam varuno jagraha; tasya 
 ha^udaram jajne; and C,B. ii.5.2 2 . Cf. 
 Hillebrandt, p. 63-65, 54. Ludwig's interpre- 
 tation is quite different : see his notes, vol. 
 iv. p. 91. 
 
 1-2. m6, see u2. -su, 188a. -grham, 
 Kaegi, note 329 : cf . also the AS. poem in 
 Thorpe's Analecta, p. 142, entitled The Grave, 
 and familiar through Longfellow's transla- 
 tion. gamam, 833, 835: with ma, 579. 
 mrla, 248c, vmrd. 
 
 3-4. ' When I go, tottering along, like a 
 bag, puffed up, have mercy.' v'sphur 
 implies quick or vigorous motion see vocab. 
 Here the iva is not a particle of comparison ; 
 it modifies the mg of the root to that of a 
 languid shake or wabble such as is character- 
 istic of a dropsical person. So pra-hasan, 
 ' laughing out ; ' pra-hasann iva, ' smiling.' 
 
 dhmatas, 'puffed up' (with wind) or 
 'bloated' (with serum), has reference not 
 only to the bag, but also to the understood 
 aham. Grassmann, ' schnaufend,' i.e. ' blown, 
 winded, puffing.' Otherwise Bergaigne, iii. 
 155u. adrivas (454b), always of Indra, 
 except here, and at ix.53.1 (of Soma) ! 
 On this stanza the exegetes differ much. 
 
 5-6. kratvas, gen., 342. -dinata, 365.1. 
 jagama, 79 15 x. 
 
 7-8. Line 7 has trochaic cadences. 
 'On (me, thy) singer, (though) standing 
 (803) in the midst of water, thirst has got 
 hold ' (avidat, v'2vid2). See Horace's descrip- 
 tion, Odes, ii.2, Crescit indulgens, etc. 
 
 9-10. See ydd5. -See 2idam. -See 
 jana: for loc., 303a. dharma, 425d. 
 yuyopima, 793e. See Vris : caus. aorist, 
 1046, 859; augmentless form as subjunctive 
 w. ma, 579. 
 
 'If we mortals do anything (kim ca, 
 neut.) here (that proves to be) an offense 
 
 (masc.) against the gods, if with folly thy 
 steadfast decrees we have thwarted, do not 
 (cause us to take harm from this sin = ) 
 chastise us for this sin.' 
 
 METRE, jagati. This stanza is not a 
 part of the hymn. The stanza is an oft- 
 recurring one Schroeder, MS. iv. p. 290. 
 Its repetition daily for a year is prescribed 
 at Manu xi.253 : cf. Rigvidhana, ii.29.1. 
 The interesting stanza at RV. iv.54.3 = TS. 
 iv.1.11 1 is probably a reminiscence of this. 
 The AV., at vi.51.3, modernizes dcitti (340) 
 yad to acittya ced. 
 
 SELECTION XL VI. RV. viii. 14. To In- 
 dra. Indra and Namuci. For the intro- 
 duction to the Namuci-myth, see 81 16 x. For 
 the later forms of the myth, see selection 
 Ixxii., p. 97 6 N. 
 
 Division into five strophes of three 
 stanzas is possible. In respect of contents, 
 the first three stanzas and the last three 
 make very good strophes. Stanzas 1, 2, 
 and 3 form a strophe at SV. ii.1184-6 ; but 
 5, 7, and 8 form another at 989-91. The 
 hymn is unsymmetrically divided into three 
 at AV. xx.27-29. 
 
 11-12. igiya : form, 616 ; acct, 628 ; mode, 
 581b, note the second example. Similar idea 
 at 87 20 f, and often in RV., e.g. viii.19.25,26. 
 vasvas, gen. 342. 
 
 13-14. See v'cak B2 and 1030. -dit- 
 seyam, 1030; accented at beg. of clause, 
 though not at beg. of pada, 593 2 . Xote 
 the old mg of caci-pati (vocab.), whence was 
 evolved the later 'Mrs. Might' (see c_aci). 
 
 15-16. U.f. dheniis te, 188b : similar com- 
 binations at 87 19 , 84 15 . -siinrta, cf. 28 lob N. 
 sunvate, v'l su, 705; acct, 318. ' Kine 
 and horses,' see under g6 1. pi-py-us-I, vpi, 
 802 end, 459. -dune, 613, and 70 18 N. 
 
 17-18. ' Nor god nor mortal is a restrainer 
 of thy blessing, when .' 
 
 19. U.f. yad ('when ') bhumim vf avar- 
 tayat : cf . " He taketh up the isles as a very 
 little thing," Isaiah xl.15 ; also 12. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 81. 
 1. cakrands, VI kr8, and 807. 'Putting 
 his plume in the heaven = touching the
 
 [375] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 88. 
 
 heaven with his plume.' Just so, RV. x. 
 125.7 d . 
 
 2-3. See VvrdhS and 807 2 . -ji-gy-iis-as 
 (787 strong stem ji-gi-vans) goes also with 
 te. U.f. indra a vrnimahe (718). 
 
 4-5. U.f. vi antariksam (Whitney, 90b 2 ) 
 atirat (Vtr). -abhinat, v"bhid, 692. - 
 valam, cf. Indra's epithet, 5 17 . 
 
 6-7. U.f. lid gas (361c) ajat (Vaj). - 
 avis-krnvan, 187, 1078. 
 
 8-9. drlhani drnhitani ca, ' (were) made 
 stable and (were) established,' both from 
 v'drh. para-nude : form of inf., 192a, 970a : 
 use of inf., 982c. ' Steady, not for thrust- 
 ing away = so steadfast they may not be 
 moved.' Cf. Ps. xciii.lor2; xcvi.10. 
 
 1O-11. See under v'mad 1. See Vraj+vi 
 and 902. 
 
 12-13. Pronounce tuam. U.f. indra_ 
 asi: acct, 595d. stotf nam (acct, 372), 
 objective gen. w. bhadrakrt, which has noun 
 construction rather than verbal. 
 
 14-15. U.f. indram Id kegina (441). - 
 vaksatas, ' let them bring,' 893' 2 . See 
 iipa2. suradhasam might be joined with 
 either indram or yajnam. 
 
 16-17. NAMUCI-MYTH. ' With foam of 
 the waters, Namuci's head, O Indra, thou 
 didst cause to fly asunder, when thou wast 
 conquering all thy foes.' It appears to me 
 likely that the natural phenomenon to which 
 this refers is a water-spout ('Trombe') on 
 an inland lake. This fear-inspiring thing 
 may well be personified as a demon. The 
 verb lid avartayas means ' didst cause to 
 move out or fly asunder with a gyratory or 
 centrifugal motion.' This accords well with 
 the facts of the not infrequent phenomenon 
 as seen by unscientific eyes. See Major 
 Sherwill on Bengal waterspouts, JASB. 1860, 
 xxix.366f, with good pictures, and Th. Reye, 
 Die Wirbelsturme 2 , p. 17f. The line MBh. 
 v. 10.37 = 328 seems to favor my view. The 
 whole passage is a reminiscence of the 
 Namuci-myth. 
 
 The head of the column is twisted and 
 made to burst asunder and scatter itself 
 (phenena, instr. of accompaniment, lit. ' with 
 foam,' i.e. ) in abundant foamy masses. Then, 
 with the dispersion of the column, often 
 
 comes (Sherwill, 370; Reye, 32) a heavy 
 rain. All this is set forth as gracious Indra's 
 prowess. U.f. ajayas spfdhas, see 74 12 N. 
 
 Bergaigne's discussion, ii.346-7, may be 
 compared and also RV. v. 30.7 ,8 and vi.20.6. 
 
 The form of the myth as it appears in 
 the Brahmanas originates in a misconception 
 of the case-relation of phenena (see above), 
 which they take as an instr. of means, i.e. 
 as the weapon by means of which Indra 
 slew Namuci. So Say ana : phenena vajri- 
 bhutena; see vocab., \'sic3. Cf. notes to 
 selection Ixxii., p. 97. 
 
 18-19. ut-sisrpsatas (v'srp) and a-ruruk- 
 satas (v'ruh), acc.pl.m. of ppl., 1027, 1029. 
 dyam, 361d. dasyunr, u.f. dasyun, 
 prop, dasyuns, see 209 and b and 338 2 . 
 See Vdhu+ava and 706. Cf. the legend 
 at Odyssey xi.305-20, and see Eggeling, 
 SEE. xii.286. 
 
 2O-21. visiiclm (408), 'so that it was 
 parted asunder or scattered,' as factitive 
 predicate of vi-anagayas (v'l nag). See 
 littara 1. ' Becoming victorious (after or as 
 result of) quaffing the Soma.' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 82. 
 
 SELECTION XL VII. RV. viii. 85. 7, 8, 9. 
 Indra and the Maruts, and Vrtra. For the 
 corresponding Brahmana legend, see selec- 
 tion Ixvii., p. 94*. Cf. also Muir, v.93. 
 
 All three stanzas are addressed to In- 
 dra ; and might be put in the mouth of the 
 Maruts, were it not for havisa, st. 8 d . If, 
 on the other hand, they are put in the mouth 
 of the worshippers, then lipa a_imas cannot 
 serve as verb to mariitas nor govern tva of 
 st. 8 a . I therefore suspect that either pada 
 6 or d of stanza 8 is a foreign intrusion. If 
 it is the former, the original may have con- 
 tained anu yanti or the like. 
 
 1. See Vis. vigve devas, other than the 
 Maruts ; for here, presumably, they are not 
 included among the friends who desert In- 
 dra ; and the Brahmana says expressly that 
 they do not desert. But at RV. viii.7.31 the 
 contrary is affirmed; cf. p. 364. ajahus, 
 \f2ha (661, 657) : its object is tva. 
 
 2. Explanation under atha2. Similarly 
 atha is used after an impv. implying a con-
 
 NOTES TO ) 
 PAGE 82. { 
 
 [376] 
 
 dition (572*), at 96 17 , 97 10 . -jayasi, 736. 
 -Half -line, cf. 88 15 . 
 
 3-4. Numerical construction, 486b. 
 vavrdhanas (807 2 ), 'growing strong, rejoic- 
 ing in strength.' upa tvemah (acct!) u.f. 
 tipa tva a^imas (127, end). krdhi, 839. 
 ' Thy impetuosity = thee, the impetuous.' 
 -ena, 5022. 
 
 ' Thrice sixty Maruts, in their strength 
 rejoicing, (do follow?) thee, like hosts of 
 morning, reverend. Unto thee come we. 
 Grant thou us a blessing.' Etc. 
 
 5-6. ayudham and anikam are best made 
 co-ordinate with vajram. See asura2. 
 
 SELECTION XLVIII. RV. viii.91. To 
 Agni. Stanzas 7,8,9 and 13,14,15 form 
 strophes in the SV. The rest of the hymn 
 (16-22), after rejection of one stanza, forms 
 two strophes : 16,17,18 may be safely grouped 
 together ; and of the remaining four, I have 
 followed Grassmann in rejecting st. 21, on 
 account of the contents and language. More- 
 over, the tense of idhe is proper to a final 
 stanza cf. Delbriick, Tempuslehre, p. 106-7. 
 On the other hand, it must be admitted that 
 stanzas 20 and 21 occur in juxtaposition at 
 MS. ii.7.7, TS. iv.1.10 1 , VS. xi.73-4, and else- 
 where. 
 
 7-8. Four explanations of dhiti. 1. Grass- 
 mann, for diti, q.v. ; instances of the con- 
 fusion of dhi and di are adduced. 2. Lud- 
 wig, ' durch die kiinstlichen mittel des ghrta,' 
 see 2dMti. 3. Sayana takes it from \dha, 
 ' put,' and renders by nidhanais, ' with the 
 deposits' of ghee. 4. Best taken as 
 'draughts,' \dha, 'drink,' see 1 dhiti and 
 reference, and cf. RV. x.115.1. 
 
 tepanas, 794e, 807. vaksi, v'vah, 624 : 
 so yksi (Vyaj); accented, 593 2 middle, cf. 
 761 2 , 771, 78", 80 13 , etc. 
 
 9-10. tarn tva : see examples under ta2. 
 Sayana renders tarn by prasiddham, ' ilium ; ' 
 similarly tas, at 83 1 , he glosses by tadrgyas. 
 ajananta (a-class and mid. !), classic ajan- 
 ayan. - See matf : cf. RV. iii.29.1-3. 
 
 11-12. Pronounce tua. ni sedire (185), 
 see \ sad -ni2 ; subject, ' men.' Cf . 88 17 . 
 
 13-14. Pronounce asti (595d) aghnia. 
 Perhaps, 'There is no ax (with me) de- 
 
 siring (it), i.e. I have no ax by me, = own 
 none.' See etadrg. 
 
 I have no cow from whose milk I might 
 make ghee for an oblation, nor an ax to 
 cut sticks for the sacrificial fire. So I offer 
 thee such as I have, i.e. gathered bits of 
 wood. ' One should sacrifice, if only a 
 bit of wood,' says tradition : cf . the widow's 
 mites; and see ASL. p.204 and Bhagavad- 
 gita, ix.26. 
 
 15-16. VS., kani kani cid; MS. and TS.. 
 yani kani ca; AV., yani kani cid; see 
 Ika2d. Vdha-ra2; ending, 548. Pro- 
 nounce yavisthia : the anomalous ending is 
 solely for the sake of the metre, since 
 yavistha makes just as good a catalectic 
 diiambus as yavisthya. ' Youngest,' for he 
 starts into life anew every day. 
 
 In old times Agni would not devour fuel 
 that was not ax-hewn. The Rishi Prayoga, 
 who was too poor to own an ax and had to 
 pick up his wood, made it toothsome for 
 Agni with this stanza, yad ague yani kani 
 ca. So TS. v.1.10 1 . 
 
 Note how the other texts make 20 and 
 21 into two anuatubh stanzas by inserting 
 21 C in the one and adding 20 C to the other. 
 
 17-18. See v'idh or indh. See manas 1. 
 idhe, ' I have enkindled,' tense, see above. 
 Perfect used to state a thing to some one 
 who has just seen it transpire. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 83. 
 SELECTION XLIX. RV. x.9.1-3. To the 
 Waters. Rubricated at 105 21 , funeral ser- 
 vice. This hymn in the RV. has nine stan- 
 zas; but the first three form a strophe which 
 recurs very often in other texts : so TS., 
 thrice ; MS. and VS., twice ; K., SV., AV., 
 and TA. 
 
 The Grhya-sutras prescribe the use of 
 this strophe, with the pouring or sprinkling 
 of water, at the wedding-ceremony, QGS. 
 i.14, in the choosing of a house-site, AGS. 
 ii.8.12, in the consecration of a new dwelling, 
 ib. ii.9.8, and in certain funeral rites, ib. iv.6. 
 14 = 105 21 . Indeed, so frequent is their use 
 that they have a name and are called the 
 "three apohisthiya stanzas" cf. 1215a. 
 The modern Hindus use them daily in thei*
 
 [377] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 83, 
 
 marjana, see Monier-Williams, as cited at 
 p. 366. 
 
 1-2. stha, u.f. stha, 188a, 248c. -tas, 
 see 82 9 N. -Vldha2 and 669. -caksase, 
 Vcaks, 970e. Lit. 'Bring us to vigor, to 
 great gladness, to behold:' attraction, 
 982a. 
 
 3-4. See Vbhaj, caus. u gat is, fern, 
 ppl., Vvag. 
 
 5-6. U.f. tasmai, the master of the new 
 dwelling. gamama, 848 3 . janayatha 
 (248c), 'produce, i.e. bring:' for aught the 
 accent shows, it may be co-ordinate with 
 jinvatha (595) or also not (see 594a). 
 
 ' For him may we satisfy you, to whose 
 dwelling ye hasten, Waters, and bring us ' 
 whatever that may mean. It seems to have 
 pertinence only as said by officiating priests 
 in performing the above-mentioned conse- 
 cration. 
 
 SELECTION L. RV. x.14.1-2, and 7-12. 
 Funeral-hymn. Kubricated at 102 1 - 21 , 103 12 
 see p. 402. See Whitney's essay, On the 
 Vedic doctrine of a future life, OLSt.i. 46-63 
 (= Bibliotheca Sacra, 1859, xvi.404f ) ; also 
 Zimmer, p. 408-22. On immortality as an 
 Indo-European belief, see Kaegi, N. 265 and 
 literature there cited, and x. 283a. On the 
 funeral rites, see introduction to selection 
 Ixxv. and literature there cited. Translations 
 of this hymn: Muir, v.292; GKR. p. 146; 
 and Whitney, I.e., p. 68. 
 
 Although mandala x. on the whole is 
 late, it yet contains antique passages ; and 
 among these the following seems to belong : 
 so Roth. The hymn contains 16 stanzas, of 
 which 13-16 are palpably later additions. 
 Only 7-12 are actually prescribed by A.9va- 
 layana for use in the funeral service ; but 1 
 and 2, although not rubricated, are given 
 for their intrinsic interest. 
 
 The passage as it stands consists of an 
 introductory summons to the assembled 
 mourners (1-2); and of an address to the 
 departed (7-8); then, after bidding the 
 mourners disperse (stanza 9), the spokesman 
 implores the favor of the kimlly-disposed 
 hounds of Yama, for the departed (11) and 
 for the company (12). 
 
 In stanza 10, on the other hand, these 
 hounds are conceived as ill-disposed crea- 
 tures standing guard to keep the departed 
 out of bliss see p. 370 ; and possibly the 
 stanza which originally belonged with 9 has 
 been displaced by the one in our text. Or 
 is stanza 9 itself the intruder ? See Bezzen- 
 berger's Beitriige, viii.202. 
 
 The stanzas of RV. x.14 recur else- 
 where, with more or less interesting variants. 
 Those in the Reader correspond respectively 
 with AV. xviii.l. 49,50,54; 3.68; 1.55; 2.11, 
 12,13. Compare also MS. iv.14.16 ; ii.7.11 ; 
 TA. vi.1.1; 4.2; 6.1; 3.1,2. For st. 9, see 
 note thereto, 83 15 . 
 
 7-8. para^yivansam, Vi, 803, 783b 2 . 
 'Along after (ami) i.e. unto the mighty 
 heights,' i.e. to the other world. anu- 
 paspaganam, VI pag, 807. vaivasvatam, 
 cf. 85 18 N. So also in the Avesta, Yima is 
 Vs son. ' Gatherer of the peoples ; ' pre- 
 cisely so in the Avesta, Vd. ii.21, Yima makes 
 a gathering (hanjamanem) of mortals. Cf. 
 "AiS-ns a.ynffi\os, Preller, Gr. Myth? i.660, 
 Kaegi, N. 276. Note that Yama is a king, 
 and not, like Varuna (line 12), a god. 
 
 Yama is the first mortal (see yama in 
 vocab.); the first to reach the other world 
 (AV. xviii.3.13); the leader of the endless 
 train of them that follow him ; and so the 
 king of the blessed (see yama-rajan). The 
 comparison of Yama with the Avestan Yima 
 is very interesting: see Roth, die Sage von 
 Dschemschid, ZDMG. iv.417-431 ; and SEE. 
 iv.p.lxxv., and p.10-21. 
 
 We read at AV. xviii.4.7, 
 
 tirthais taranti pravato mahir iti, 
 By passes pass they to the mighty heights, 'tis said. 
 
 This is most interesting as a reminiscence of 
 the same traditional material of which RV. 
 x.14.1 is another outgrowth. 
 
 9-10. ' Yamus nobis perf ugium primus 
 repperit : ' gatum, q.v., pregnantly, like r6irov 
 at John xiv.2. esa gavyutis, i.e. the gatti, 
 just mentioned. apa-bhartava u: the 
 pada-patha reads -tavai u (133); form of 
 inf., 972 2 ; use of inf., 982c. -For the 
 thought, see an Avestan parallel, Kaegi, N. 
 270. -yatra, 248a. -para^iyiis, 783b 2 .
 
 NOTES TO i 
 PAGE 83. ' 
 
 [378] 
 
 jajnanas, vjan2, 807, ' (their) children,' sc. 
 para yanti. 
 
 11-12. pra^ihi, 617, see vocab. The 
 AV. modernizes the forms a little, reading 
 rajanau, madantau. pagyasi, subjunctive 
 (760.2), w. future mg, as in Homer. Note 
 the appropriate connection of this stanza 
 with st. 2 and observe the identical padas. 
 
 13-14. The derivation and mg of ista- 
 purta are discussed most carefully by Win- 
 disch, Festgruss an Bohtlingk, 1888, p. 115f. 
 hitvaya, v2ha, 993b. piinar astam 
 ajhi, ' Go back home,' as if the soul had 
 come from heaven. Illustrative material in 
 Kaegi, N. 275. Cf . zu Gott heimkehren = ' die.' 
 Pada d is metrically defective: te tanua, 
 ' with thy (new) body,' is suggested, Kaegi, 
 N. 278, which see; te tanua suvarcasa is 
 suggested by Sayana's comment. Cf. the 
 Christian conceptions at Philippians iii.21, 
 I. Cor. xv.40f. 
 
 15-16. U.f. apa_ita, vi^ita, vi ca sar- 
 pata^atas. asmai (accent, 74 9 N.) etam . 
 ahobhis adbhis vi-aktam (v'afij). vita, 
 acct, 128 end; so viva, 77 5 N. akran, 831. 
 Second asmai, accentless, cf. 74 9 N\ 
 
 Pada c. '(A place of rest) adorned 
 with days, with waters, with nights:' i.e. 
 where the delights of earth are found again, 
 the change of day and night, cooling waters, 
 etc. Note the especial mention of waters in 
 the enumeration of the joys of heaven at 
 RV. ix.113.7f, and in the description of the 
 ' Assembly-hall ' of Yama Vaivasvata, MBh. 
 ii.8.7 = 317. And observe how very frequent 
 are the allusions to the waters in the men- 
 tions of Paradise in the Koran, e.g. xlvii. 
 10-20; lxxvi.5; xiii.35. 
 
 This pada at best is bad. It is avoided 
 by the noteworthy, but not very helpful, 
 variants of the Yajurveda. VS. xii.45 reads 
 
 apeta vita vi ca sarpatato 
 y6 atra stha purana ye ca nutanah. 
 adad yam6 avasanam prthivya 
 akrann imam pitaro lokam asmai, 
 
 and substantially so read MS., TS., TB. The 
 scholiast to VS. takes this as an address to 
 ' Yama's men.' It is a little forced to refer 
 it to the mourners. 
 
 17-18. In this stanza, these dogs, the off- 
 spring of Sarama, are ill-disposed (dur- 
 vidatra) see introduction. Pronounce 
 guanau. ' Four-eyed : ' later this is taken 
 to mean ' with two eyes and two round spots 
 above the eyes.' Note the Parsi custom of 
 having such a dog (cf. Vd. viii.16) view the 
 corpse before exposure Monier- Williams, 
 Mod. India, 173-6, ed. 1878. 
 
 Respecting Sarama, see Kaegi, x. 149. 
 Respecting the dogs, see ib., N. 274, 274a, 
 and Muir, v.294. Homer mentions the ' dog 
 of Hades,' Od. xi.623f, II. viii.368. Not till 
 later is he called ' many-headed ' and KtpBepos. 
 With KepBepos is identified Cabala see Ben- 
 fey, Gottingische Nachrichten, 1877, p. 8f = 
 Vedica, i.!49f. In Avestan belief (Vd. 
 xiii.9), dogs guard the entrance of the other 
 world. These beliefs are compared, SEE. 
 iv.p.lxxxvii. 
 
 19. In this stanza and the following, the 
 dogs are kindly creatures. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 84. 
 
 1. Pronounce tabhiam. Verbs, 668. 
 
 2-3. U.f. asutfpau : admits several ex- 
 planations see vocab., and Bergaigne, iii. 
 72. These messengers go about to con- 
 duct to the other world those who have 
 received the summons of Yama. suryaya, 
 attraction, explained at 982a. U.f. piinar 
 datam (839) asum adyd_iha : ' may the two 
 give back again ,' for the mourners have 
 been in the shadow of death. 
 
 SELECTION LI. RV. x. 16. Funeral-hymn, 
 used at the ceremony of cremation. Rubri- 
 cated are only stanzas 1-9 and 14 see p. 
 402. The rubricated stanzas are translated 
 by Max Miiller, ZDMG. ix.p.viiif, and the 
 whole hymn by Zimmer, p. 402. Most of 
 the stanzas are addressed to Agni ; but 3, 6, 
 and 7, to the dead man. The hymn has two 
 parts, clearly sundered by the metre. 
 
 In the first, Agni is to burn the corpse, 
 not rudely, but gently, just enough to " make 
 it done." To this end, a sacrificial goat 
 (st. 4) is provided, and (st. 7) the corpse is 
 covered with a caul, in order that Agni may 
 spend his fury on these things and spare the
 
 [379] 
 
 j NOTES TO 
 ) PAGE 84. 
 
 corpse from too severe a burning. The 
 original purpose of this custom may have 
 been different. The Greeks had the custom 
 see II. xxiii.!65f , Od. xxiv.65f. 
 
 Moreover, Agni is to carry up the departed 
 to the Fathers or Manes, who have their seat 
 in the 'fore-heaven' (AV. xviii.2.48, Whit- 
 ney, OLSt. i.59). Perhaps st. 8-10 did not 
 belong originally to the first part. 
 
 The second part consists of heterogene- 
 ous material, vagrant stanzas, having some 
 connection, verbal or logical, real or apparent, 
 with the words or ideas of the first. 
 
 Every stanza of the hymn, save st. 11, 
 appears in the AV., and some elsewhere also, 
 and with interesting variants. 
 
 4-5. enam: the minds of all present are 
 so exclusively upon the departed, that the 
 first reference to him may be made by 
 an accentless and gestureless word without 
 unclearness. Similarly asya. vi dahas, 
 abhi gocas, 748, 579. The AV. reads gugucas 
 (869). -ciksipas, 869, 579. -krnavas, 
 700. U.f. atha im enam. prahinutat: 
 n, 192c; form, 570, 704, cf. 91 5 ; mg, 571. 
 
 6-7. Pada d = atha devan vagam nesya- 
 ti, ' he shall bring the gods into his control ' 
 (cf. RV. x.84.3), i.e. 'win their favor.' 
 
 8-9. Note the combination of tristubh 
 and jagati padas (11, 12, 12, 11). Pronounce 
 diam. See dharman. apds, 6sadhisu, 
 cf. x.58.7. Seehita2. garirais, Sayana, 
 ' garira^avayavais ' ( ' members ' ) . 
 
 For this stanza there is abundant and 
 interesting illustrative material. See Muir, 
 v.298,319; Kaegi, N. 275,275a. Man is a 
 microcosm. Each element in him comes 
 from some element in nature with which it 
 has most affinity and thereto it returns (cf. 
 Eurip. Suppl. 532f). These affinities are 
 pointed out with much detail in C,B. xiv. 
 6.2 13 . 
 
 yatra^asya purusasya mrtasya^ agnim 
 vag apyeti, vatam pranag, caksur adityam, 
 manag candram, digah grotram, prthivim 
 gariram, akagam atma^, osadhir lomani, 
 vanaspatin kega, apsu lohitam ca retag ca 
 nidhiyate, kva^ayam tada puruso bha- 
 vati ? ' In case the dead man's soul goes 
 to the ether, the hair of his body to the 
 
 plants, the hair of his head to the trees, and 
 his blood and seminal fluid in the waters are 
 put, what then becomes of this spirit 1 ' 
 
 Cf. the formula recited at the slaughter of 
 the sacrificial victim, AB. ii.6.13, 
 
 suryam caksur gamayatat, 
 vatam pranam anvavasrjatat, 
 antariksam asum, 
 digah grotram, 
 prthivim gariram. 
 
 Dissolution into the five elements (see bhiita) 
 is later the stereotyped phrase for death (see 
 pancatva). Cf. the four elements t Siv 
 ffvfj.ireTT7iyf rb ffw/j.a, yijs irvpbs vSarSs rf Kal 
 atpos, Plato, Timaeus, p. 82. 
 
 The affinity of the eye and the sun is 
 universally palpable : cf ., for example, Plato, 
 Repub. 508, rtKioeib(<rrar6v yf oZ/xcu [rJ i/'/x/^a] 
 TaJc irepl rb.s alff6r)fffis opydvuv. Not less SO 
 is that of breath and wind. Bones and earth, 
 Timaeus, 73s ; blood and plants, ib.80E. Cf . 
 Darmesteter, SBE. iv.187, who cites Iliad 
 vii.99 and Empedocles, 378-82 (ed. Mullach). 
 
 10-11. 'The goat [laid limb by limb on 
 the corpse on the fire] (is thy) portion. 
 Burn it with burning; that let thy heat 
 burn ; that, thy flame.' But deal gently 
 with the dead man. Note the emphatic 
 position of the last two tarn's. The goat 
 is the animal most fit for sacrifice see the 
 legend, AB. ii.8. Later; aja is taken as a-ja, 
 the ' unborn ' part : so Sayana ; cf . Ludwig, 
 iii.p.435-6; Pancatantra, book iii., fable 2; 
 MBh.xii.338.3(= 12820) fol.255 1 >; ISt. i.428. 
 
 Agni has 'dreadful forms' (ghoras 
 tamias) as well as 'kindly' ones. See 
 lokd 2b and sukrt. The Hindus regard u 
 as a particle ; but it may be part of a word 
 uloka, which combination appears in old 
 texts, and even at the head of a pada, where 
 u (as enclitic) could not stand. 
 
 12-13. See Vhu+a. 'Who, offered to 
 thee, goes freely.' The corpse may have 
 been conceived now as yielding easily to 
 the devourer, and now as struggling against 
 it. Otherwise Zimmer, p. 403N. 
 
 'Putting on life (as a garment), let him 
 seek after offspring.' Where is to be found 
 expressed the wish for children in the new 
 ife ? It is repulsive. But that carnal inter-
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 84. 
 
 [380] 
 
 course was by no means excluded from the 
 (doubtless later) ideas of heaven would 
 appear from the material gathered by 
 Muir, v.307-9, esp. from AV. iv.34.2 and 
 xiv.2.32. Add AB. i.22.14, and cf. Zimmer, 
 413. 
 
 After all, may not g6sas here mean 
 simply 'those whom we leave behind us,' 
 viz. at the grave (see 63 17 ' 18 ), in order to 
 continue the journey of life without them, 
 i.e. ' those who have gone before 1 ' These 
 the dead man is now to rejoin. 
 
 -Padad: cf. 83 1 * and x. 
 
 14-15. krsnah gakunas is one of ill- 
 omen. uta va: function of ut like that 
 of atha in atha va, see athaG. U.f. agnis 
 tad (80 15 Jf.) vigva^at. See brahmana : 
 no necessary allusion to caste here. If 
 unclean creatures have done any harm to 
 the corpse, Agni is to remove from it the 
 traces of such imperfections, i.e. ' make it 
 whole.' The ' soma ' seems to stand for some 
 purifying sacrifice at which it was used in 
 conjunction with the fire. 
 
 16-17. Rubricated at 102 2 '\ Cutting out 
 the caul of the anustarani, the celebrant 
 covers the head and face of the dead man 
 with it, for the purpose mentioned in the 
 introduction. g6bhis, see g62 : the caul, 
 suet, and fat are meant. Vvya+pari: see 
 the orig. mg of v'vya. U.f. sam pra^ 
 urnusva (712) : acct, 1083-84. See n6d 
 and references. Vhrs, intens., 1012. 
 vi-dhaksyan, Vdah, fut. ppl. Subjunctive 
 form, 1068, cf. 736. 
 
 Lit., then, 'Wind a protection (varma) 
 from the fire (abl.) around thyself by means 
 of the caul etc., i.e. envelop thyself with the 
 caul as a protection from the fire [addressed 
 to the dead man, although the celebrant 
 actually does the enveloping] ; cover thyself 
 completely with suet and fat : in order that 
 the bold one (Agni), very impatient, may 
 not with his grip firmly clasp thee around, 
 to devour thee.' 
 
 18-19. vi jihvaras, Vhvr, 858 1 , in form 
 and use like ciksipas, line 4. Pada c : 
 metre faulty ; read esa u or esd id ? See 
 \'mad, caus. 2. This stanza seems to have 
 pertinence only as an accompaniment of the 
 
 ritual (103 1 ). The hymn proper may have 
 ended with st. 7. 
 
 2O. For n, 192c. -yamarajnas, cf. 83 8 x. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 80. 
 
 1. U.f. iha_eva_ayam itaras, jatavedas, 
 ' Right here is this other one, Jatavedas,' i.e. 
 agni havya-vahana, as distinguished from 
 agni kravya-vahana. The cremation has 
 now proceeded far enough ; so the corpse- 
 consuming Agni is dismissed to the Manes, 
 and the oblation-bearing Agni summoned. 
 
 2-3. This continues the thought of st. 9. 
 In the presence of the Manes (who don't 
 mind the heat), the dismissed Agni may 
 burn as fiercely as he likes and drive his 
 flames in or to the highest place. ' Him I 
 remove or dismiss (v'lhrS) to the pitryajfia : ' 
 this Ludwig, v.p.423, takes to be a sacrifice 
 to the gods conducted by the Manes ; other- 
 wise vocab. invat: form, 736; quasi- 
 root inv. 
 
 4-5. The diaskeuasts have put this stanza 
 here on account of the mention of kravya- 
 vahana and the Manes. yaksat, 893 3 , 
 Vyaj. U.f. prA id u . 'Both to the 
 gods and to the Manes ' so Sayana, Mahl- 
 dhara (to VS. xix.65), and vocabulary under 
 a2. But Ludwig (see transl.) says 'to the 
 gods also, from the Manes.' 
 
 6-7. See Vva. tva, the sacred fire. 
 ni dhimahi (cf. 74 14 ) and sam idhimahi, 
 837. ' Gladly would we set thee down, 
 gladly make burn brightly* (sam gives to 
 idh this intensive force). The optative does 
 not imply that they do not suit the action 
 to the word. ' Glad, bring thou hither 
 the glad Fathers, to the oblation (982a) to 
 eat' (\fad, 970b). 
 
 8-9. ' Him cool thou off (see VI va+nis), 
 i.e. let him whom thou wast consuming cool 
 off again.' And let the burning-place be 
 so cool and moist that even water-plants 
 (padas c d) may grow there. 
 
 1O-11. Rubricated at 104 11 . -The four 
 words in line 10 may be either voc's s.f. or 
 loc's s.m.n. : accent, indecisive ; the i before 
 k (1222d) favors the first view. sam 
 gamas (active !), 848 8 . The stanza seems 
 to be meaningless rubbish.
 
 [381] 
 
 j NOTES TO 
 J PAGE 85. 
 
 SELECTION LIL RV. x.17.1-2 and 3-6. 
 Funeral-hymn. Under x.17 are included 
 divers elements : A. the fragmentary legend 
 of the Children of the Sun (1-2); B. the 
 funeral-hymn proper (3-6) ; C. a prayer to 
 Sarasvati (7-9) ; D. sundry fragments. 
 
 A. STANZAS 1-2. This famous fragment 
 begins a new anuvaka and has nothing to 
 do with the funeral-hymns. It smacks of 
 antiquity ; and it has become the nucleus of 
 later legends. Of these, the oldest is that 
 reported by Yaska, in the Nirukta, xii.10; 
 and the next is that of Qaunaka, in the 
 Brhaddevata, vi.33 to vii.2. C/s version is 
 quoted in full by Sayana, in his comment to 
 RV. vii.72.2, in order to prove that the Rishi 
 Vasistha was a relative (first cousin) of the 
 A9vins. Both legends are given in the 
 original and in translation by Muir, v.227-9 ; 
 also by Kuhn, KZ. i.440-43; L. Myrian- 
 theus, Die Acvins oder arischen Dioskuren, 
 Munich, 1876, p. 1-4 ; and in substance by 
 Max Miiller, Lectures, 2d series, no. xi., p. 
 501 Am. ed. of 1865 = 628 Eng. ed. of 1873. 
 Late form of legend, VP., b'k iii., chap. 2. 
 
 The verbal exegesis of the two stanzas 
 is beset with uncertainties : see Roth, in the 
 essay cited above (83 8 N.), ZDMG. iv.425; 
 Grassmann, Transl., ii.p.466; Bergaigne, ii. 
 318 ; and the very suggestive discussions by 
 Ludwig, iii .332-5 and v.391-2. 
 
 As for their interpretation from the 
 mythological point of view, see Roth, I.e. 
 p.425 (reported by Miiller, I.e., p.503= 530); 
 ISt. xiv.392f ; Kuhn, I.e., p.443f; Miiller, I.e., 
 p.528 = 556, and 502 = 529 ; Grassmann, I.e.; 
 Bergaigne, ii.506-7 ; and esp. Ludwig, iii. 
 332-5 and v.391-2. 
 
 12. U.f. iti^idam. Note that pari- 
 uhyamana is from the same root as vah- 
 atiim. Tvastar, a god, gives the wedding; 
 yet it takes place on the earth ! 
 
 13. yamdsya mata : proleptically; prop., 
 she who afterwards became Y's mother. 
 
 14. krtvi, 993b. -adadus, 668. 
 
 15. U.f. uta^agvinau abharat yad td,d 
 asit 1 ajahat (2hal) u. dva mith-, 'two 
 pairs' (Yama, Yami; Acvins): Yaska, 'the 
 two (Y. and Y.) that formed a pair' ('she 
 forsook'). 
 
 " Tvas.tar'8 making a wedding for his daughter " 
 At this news all the world here comes together. 
 Yama's mother, during her wedding, 
 The wife of mighty Vivasvant, vanished. 
 They hid away the immortal from mortals. 
 Making a like one, they gave her to Vivasvant. 
 And she bare the two Ac,vins when that happened, 
 And left two pairs behind her Saranyu. 
 
 " A braw story, but unco short." The 
 actual text is tantalizingly fragmentary. We 
 can hardly hope to recover the legend with 
 any satisfactory completeness. Yaska gives 
 it thus : 
 
 Tvastar's daughter, Saranyu, bare twins 
 (Yama and Yami) to Vivasvant. She foisted 
 upon him another female of the same appear- 
 ance (savarnam), and, taking on the form 
 of a mare, fled forth. Vivasvant took on 
 the form of a horse, followed her, and 
 coupled with her. From that were born the 
 two A9vins or ' Horse-men.' Of the savarna 
 was born Manu. 
 
 That is Vivasvant, the Sun, and Saranyu, 
 were the parents of Yama and Yami (83 8 , 
 92 14 ), the first human pair. But there was 
 a coexisting belief in Manu (see manu in 
 vocab., and cf. SBE. xxv.p.lvii) as the father 
 of mankind. Are not RV. x.17.1-2 the frag- 
 ment of a legend which attempted to recon- 
 cile the two beliefs by fabling a savarna 
 who should give birth to Manu, so that, 
 according to either myth, the human race 
 are the Children of the Sun ? 
 
 Yaska tells more than does the text ; yet 
 we are not sure that he (to say nothing of 
 C/aunaka) knew anything more than is con- 
 tained in the two stanzas. We are therefore 
 not obliged to interpret the stanzas so as to 
 fadge with Yaska's story. 
 
 A possible rendering of line 14 is (see 
 Ludwig): 'They disclosed (airfKd\v^/av) the 
 immortal to mortals (dat.). Endowing her 
 with visible form, they gave her to V.' 
 Lit. 'making her (to be) sd-varna,' i.e. (see 
 2sa and 1304c) 'making her (to be) having 
 an accompanying varna or making her (to 
 be) endowed with external appearance.' 
 
 B. STANZAS 3-6. The funeral -hymn 
 proper, addressed esp. to Pusan v|<ux < " ro >" r< kf 
 and rubricated at 103 13 . Respecting Pusan, 
 see Kaegi, p. 65(77), and notes 209-12. As 
 sun-god and heavenly herdsman, he knoweth
 
 JN OTE8 TO 
 
 PAGE 85. 
 
 [382] 
 
 well the ways through the heaven and the 
 spaces, and so is a safe guide to conduct 
 the souls of the dead to the regions of the 
 blessed. Translation by Muir, v.173. 
 
 16-17. U.f. tva (=the dead man) itas 
 cyavayatu prd (goes with cyav-, 1081 2 ) 
 vidvan. pari dadat, 650 3 . 
 
 18-19. pari pasati, V2pa, 893 2 . -See 
 prapatha. U.f. yatra asate (628). 
 See sukft. 
 
 2O. U.f. imas aas. See VI vid+anu. 
 
 sarvas, see 77 U N. nesat, Vni, 893 s 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 86. 
 2-3. ajanista, 902, Vjan2; as we say, 'he 
 was " born and bred " there, i.e. is at home.' 
 
 ' On the distant-way of ways : on the 
 distant-way of heaven ; etc.' No matter how 
 long or where the journey is, P. is at home 
 on it. 
 
 'Unto the two most wonted places 
 both to and from, he goes, knowing the way.' 
 The construction is faulty and yet plain 
 enough : abhl sadhasthe harmonizes with a 
 carati ; but para carati requires sadhasthe- 
 bhyas (abl.). 
 
 SELECTION LIU. RV. x.18. Funeral- 
 hymn. Rubricated, all except the last stan- 
 za, in the later ritual see p. 402. The 
 simple ceremonies originally used are in- 
 ferrible from the hymn. Very different are 
 those of the later ritual. For illustrations 
 of these differences, see Roth, ZDMG. viii. 
 471f. The hymn is given, with the concord- 
 ants and variants of the AV., TB., TA., and 
 VS., and the scholia of Sayana and Mahi- 
 dhara to the concordant passages, by Win- 
 disch, in his Zwb'lf Hymnen (see p. xviii, 
 no. 10 of my Brief List). 
 
 The hymn has been translated by Roth, 
 ZDMG. viii.467f (reprinted by Zimmer, 404f ); 
 Max Miiller, ZDMG. ix., appendix; H. H. 
 Wilson, JRAS. xvi.201f = Works, ii.270f; 
 Whitney, Bibliotheca Sacra, xvi.409 = OLSt. 
 i.46f ; GKR. p. 150; Ludwig, no. 943; Grass- 
 mann, no. 844; Rajendralala Mitra, Indo- 
 Aryans, ii.!22f; and most of it by Kaegi, 
 76(105)f. Roth, Whitney, GKR., and Kaegi 
 give " the action " of the hymn. 
 
 The hymn is remarkable for its intrinsic 
 interest and beauty. And it has acquired 
 great notoriety in connection with the dis- 
 cussions of Suttee (=satl) or Hindu widow- 
 burning. Properly, sati (see sant4)means 
 a 'virtuous wife.' Improperly, but more 
 commonly, it has come to be used of the 
 rite of self-immolation which she practised. 
 See the admirable article Suttee in Col. H. 
 Yule's Anglo-Indian Glossary, with some forty 
 pertinent extracts. 
 
 That Suttee is an ancient custom appears 
 from many references to it in classical au- 
 thors. See Cicero, Tusc. disp. v.27.78; Pro- 
 pertius, iv.12.15; Plutarch, Moralia, p.499; 
 Nicholas of Damascus, fr. 143 = frag. hist, 
 graec., ed. Miiller, iii.463; Strabo, xv.30, p. 
 699; 62, p. 714; and esp. the story in Diodo- 
 rus Siculus, xix.33-34, according to which 
 the rite is authenticated for 316 B.C. These 
 passages are given in full by J. Grimm, in 
 his masterly essay, Ueber das Verbrennen der 
 Leichen, Abh. der Berliner Akad., 1849, p. 261f 
 = Kleinere Schriften, ii.298f . And Peter von 
 Bohlen, in Das alte Indien (1830), i.293-302, 
 cites a great deal of interesting pertinent 
 literature. 
 
 The custom was abolished by the British 
 during the administration of Lord William 
 Bentinck, in 1829. The story of the aboli- 
 tion is well told by H. H. Wilson, in his con- 
 tinuation of James Mill's History of British 
 India, vol.iii.(=ix.), 185-192. For descrip- 
 tions, statistics, etc., see Parliamentary Doc's, 
 1821.xviii.; 1823.xvii.; 1824.xxiii.; 1825.xxiv.; 
 and esp. the Calcutta Review, 1867, vol. xlvi. 
 p.221-261. Other descriptions in Quarterly 
 Review, lxxxix.257f ; Shib Chunder Bose, The 
 Hindoos as they are, chap. xxi. ; Das Ausland, 
 for 1857, p. 1057f. 
 
 From Miiller's Essay on Comparative 
 Mythology, Chips, ii.34f, or Selected Essays, 
 vol. i. (ed. of 1881), p. 333f, it would appear 
 that the seventh stanza of our hymn had 
 played a great role in Hindu history. At 
 any rate, this idea is current, and seems 
 traceable to the Essay. Here it is stated 
 that the stanza was purposely falsified by an 
 unscrupulous priesthood, and that a garbled 
 version of it, reading agn6h for gre, was
 
 [383] 
 
 I NOTES TO 
 ? PAGE 86. 
 
 directly responsible for the sacrifice of thou- 
 sands of innocent lives. That the author is 
 in error on these points is argued with great 
 detail by Fitzedward Hall, JRAS. N8.iii.I83- 
 192. He shows that the misreading can be 
 traced to Raghunandana, ca. 1500 A.D., and 
 no further; and that Suttee was deemed to be 
 amply justified by warrants other than those 
 of the Vedic samhita, which was by no 
 means the ultimate appeal for the mediaeval 
 Hindu. 
 
 In the literary discussions of Suttee, on 
 the other hand, the stanza has indeed played 
 a role. There is probably no other stanza 
 in the Veda about which so much has been 
 written. It was first cited, in mangled form 
 and as sanction for Suttee, by Colebrooke, 
 in 1794, On the duties of a faithful Hindu 
 widow, Asiatick Researches, 1795, iv.209-219 
 = Essays, i. 133-140. It was discussed by 
 Wilson, in 1854, in his paper On the supposed 
 Vaidik authority for Suttee, JRAS. xvi.201- 
 14 = JFor/ts. ii.270-92. In answer to this, 
 Raja Radhakanta Deva, in 1858, endeavored 
 to adduce good Vedic authority for the rite, 
 JRAS. xvii.209-17 (reprinted in Wilson's 
 Works, ii.293-305). The most exhaustive 
 treatment of the various readings of the 
 stanza is that by Hall, I.e. Finally must 
 be mentioned the paper read by Rajendralala 
 Mitra in 1870, On the funeral ceremonies etc., 
 JASB. xxxix.1.241-264 (reprinted in his In- 
 troduction to the TA., p. 33-58, and with 
 additions in his Indo-Aryans, ii.114 155); see 
 esp. p. 257f (=60f=147f). 
 
 The Rigveda gives no warrant for the 
 custom. C/aunaka, in the Brhad-devata, 
 furnishes important positive evidence against 
 it (see Chips, ii.37); and likewise Manu, v. 
 166-8(= 64 10 f, see N.). Cf. Kaegi, N.51. 
 
 The hymn was originally used at a 
 burial which was not preceded by cremation. 
 The situation and action are as follows. The 
 corpse lies on a raised place ; and by it is 
 the widow. 
 
 STANZAS 1-2. The spokesman adjures 
 Death to remove, and to harm not the 
 living (1) ; and pronounces for them absolu- 
 tion from impurity (2). 
 
 STANZAS 3-4. The conductor of the cere- 
 
 mony dwells with joy on the fact that, 
 thanks to the efficacy of their prayers, they 
 have not joined the company of the dead (3). 
 Now, for the better safety of the survivors, 
 and wishing them long life, he sets a stone 
 near the grave as a symbolic boundary of 
 the domain of Death, as a barrier, so that 
 he may not pass to the space beyond or 
 domain of the living. 
 
 STANZAS 6-6. The wish and prayer for 
 long life is here continued. 
 
 STANZAS 7-8. The women are now sum- 
 moned to make their appearance together, 
 and, provided with ointments, ' to go up to 
 the place,' i.e. of course, where the dead 
 man and the widow are (7). 
 
 Here we must infer that they adorn the 
 widow (as a sign that she is to re-enter the 
 world of life), and that the dead man's 
 brother (devf, 'levir') then takes her hand 
 in token of the levirate marriage. 
 
 The priest then bids her leave her lifeless 
 spouse, and makes solemn declaration of the 
 new relation into which she has entered (8). 
 
 STANZA 9. The bow is now taken from 
 the dead man's hand, in order that the power 
 and glory of which the weapon was the 
 symbol may remain with the survivors ; and 
 a closing benediction is said for them and 
 for the departed. 
 
 STANZAS 10-13. "And now, with gentle 
 action and tender words, the body is com- 
 mitted to the earth." 
 
 4-5. Vi r anu-para. te suaa, cf. 65 18 N. 
 itara, w. abl., like anya, 3 4 . devayanat, 
 'going or leading to the gods/ sc. pathaa, 
 abl. U.f. ma ririsas (80 10 N.), ma uta. 
 Note how ut& follows the repeated portion 
 of the second clause. 
 
 6-7. See pada3. Discussions of Vyup, 
 Ludwig, v.514, Whitney, AJP. iii.402, Roth, 
 Festgruss an Bdhtlingk, 1888, p. 98-99. 
 aita, 620. -See vlldha7. -Vpya+a. 
 
 6 a . Either ' Clogging Death's foot [by a 
 bundle of brush (kiidi) or a billet of wood, 
 tied to the corpse's foot], as ye came;' or 
 else, 'Effacing Death's foot-print' [by the 
 same means]. I confess, I incline to the 
 former view. But, whichever way we take 
 padam yop-, the simple symbolism amounts
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 86. 
 
 [384] 
 
 to the same thing. The clog is attached to 
 the foot of the corpse, which represents 
 Death, in order that Death may not get 
 back or find his way back so easily to harm 
 the living. See AV. v.19.12 (explained by 
 Roth, I.e.) in connection with xii.2.29. Roth 
 adduces the device of Hermes, in the Homeric 
 Hymn to Hermes, 80-84. 
 
 8-9. U.f. vi mrtais (283 2 ) a^avavrtran 
 (Vvrt+vy-a): Whitney takes the form as a 
 3d pi. (550 4 ) impf. mid. of the redup. class, 
 present-stem vavrt, irreg. like cakr (expect 
 vivrt). -bhut, ' hath been,' 928. -Padac 
 refers not to " mirth in funeral," but rather 
 to a fresh start on a new stretch of life, 
 in which, leaving the dead behind, they look 
 for much joy. 
 
 10-11. Note radical connection of pari- 
 dhim and dadhami. U.f. ma_esam nu 
 gat aparas ('an other'). 'A hundred 
 autumns, numerous, may they live.' Prayers 
 like this are frequent. The love of long life 
 is very clear in the Vedic texts as contrasted 
 with those of the later period. We must not 
 think of 'hundred' as just '99+1.' See 
 VI dha+antar, and note carefully the develop- 
 ment of the mg. ' May they hide Death by 
 a mountain, i.e. put a mountain (symbolized 
 by the rock or paridhi) betwixt themselves 
 and Death.' See parvata 2 and 4. 
 
 There is much evidence that the age of 
 a hundred years was deemed entirely normal. 
 This appears from RV. i.89.9. Again, to a 
 question about a funeral lustration, Paras- 
 kara (PGS. iii.10.14,15) prescribes the use of 
 a special answer " in case the departed was 
 not yet a hundred years old." Weber, ISt. 
 xvii.500. SEE. xxix. 356. The ' tenth decade 
 of life 'has a name, dac_ami(seeBR.). In the 
 Jataka (Fausboll, vol.ii.p.16), the Bodhisat 
 says to his father, when the latter sneezes, 
 
 O Gagga, live a hundred years, 
 And twenty others added on. 
 Live thou a hundred autumns yet. 
 
 See also Bhartrhari's fine stanza, ayur 
 varsaqatam nrnam etc., Vairagya-fataka, 
 50 Bohlen = 107 Telang. Among Semitic 
 peoples, the sacred age was 120 years ; while 
 the pious Egyptian prayed to Osiris that he 
 might live to be 110. Krall. 
 
 Very interesting are the classical stories 
 of Hindu longevity. Sometimes, according 
 to Onesikritos, they capped a hundred with 
 thirty more Strabo, xv.34,p.701. The Uttara 
 Kurus are said, MBh. vi.7.11 = 264, to live 
 1000 or 10,000 years, and to this fable is prob- 
 ably due the report of Megasthenes -n-tpl riav 
 X^ifruv "Tirfpfiopfwv in Strabo, xv.57,p.711 
 
 see McCrindle's Megasthenes, p.79N., or 
 Lassen, LA. i 2 .613. 
 
 Note that years are counted, now by 
 winters, now by autumns, and now by rainy 
 seasons (see hima and varsa in vocab.), and 
 that these differences correspond in general 
 with differences of habitat of the people. 
 ISt. xvii.232, Zimmer, 371-2. 
 
 12-13. U.f. yatha ahani, yatha rtavas 
 (see 127-) : pronounce yathahani | ydth- 
 artava. 'As a following one deserts not 
 the former one, i.e. as each season lacks not 
 a successor/ See ev41: contrast 18 18>19 . 
 
 See Vklp : ' so dispose their lives, i.e. make 
 them move on in the same unbroken way.' 
 
 14-15. yati stha (188a), 'quot estis.' 
 karati, true root-aor. subjunctive, 836 1 . 
 jivdse, 970c, 982. 'Attain ye to (long- 
 life, ayus, i.e.) fulness of days, old age your 
 portion making, one after another, in turn 
 (yatamanas) all of you' (ydti sthaj. Other- 
 wise OLSt. i.53. 
 
 16-17. STANZA 7. See introduction, and 
 Kaegi, x.328. naris, classical naryas, 365. 
 2. See v'vig+sam. Pada d : 'Let the 
 wives ascend to the (raised) place (on which 
 the corpse lies), to begin with' (agre). 
 After which, they are to do their errand, see 
 introduction to stanzas 7-8. It does not 
 mean, 'Let them go (away from the bier) 
 up to a sacrificial altar first, i.e. before 
 others ; ' for this we should expect pra- 
 thamas rather than agre. 
 
 18-19. U.f. ud irsva (sir) nari . 
 gatasum etdm upa gese, lit. ' With this one 
 whose life is gone liest thou.' U.f. a^ihi. 
 ' To take the hand ' is the essential pre- 
 liminary of wedding see 89 5 N. U.f. 
 didhis6s tava ida.ni. See 2idam. patyus 
 (343b) janitvAm means 'condition of being 
 jam of a piti;' and the whole line 19 (see 
 bhu+abhi-sam) means simply ' Thou hast
 
 [385] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 87. 
 
 entered into the state of being wife of a 
 spouse (who was) a hand-grasper (and is) 
 tiiy suitor now.' 
 
 -Hillebrandt, at ZDMG. xl.708f, shows 
 plainly that this stanza, RV. x.18.8, belonged 
 originally to the ritual of the human sacri- 
 fice. Weber describes the ceremony at 
 ZDMG. xviii.269f = Indische Streifen, i.65f. 
 The king's first queen was obliged to lie 
 with the dead victim. The situation is evi- 
 dent from the connection in which RV. x. 
 18.8 occurs at AV. xviii.3.1-4. She is bidden 
 to rise with our stanza, lid irsva nari see 
 Qankhayana C,rauta-siitra, xvi.13.13. 
 
 In this light, the logical connection of 
 paclas a b with padas c d becomes clear. She 
 is to forsake the corpse and " come hither " 
 to the king. 
 
 Rise up, woman, to the world of the living. 
 Fled is the soul of him with whom thou hest. 
 
 Come hither. 
 
 Quitting the embrace of hateful Death, the 
 queen rises and approaches him who had 
 already once taken her hand in wedlock and 
 now stands waiting for her as a suitor once 
 more. Upon thus resuming her proper rela- 
 tion of wife again, she is greeted with the 
 words : 
 
 To him who grasped thy hand, thy suitor now, 
 As wife to husband art thou become related. 
 
 As appears from AGS. iv.2.18 = 102 7 , 
 this stanza was at an early date appropriated 
 for the funeral-service, where as an accom- 
 paniment of the levirate marriage it fits 
 very well (didhisii means also ' a second 
 husband '). Regarding leviration, see Kaegi, 
 N.51. Its existence in Vedic times is proved 
 by RV. x.40.2. Compare also Deuteronomy 
 xxv.5-10. 
 
 2O. U.f. dhanus hdstat a-dadanas (668) 
 mrtasya 1 asm6 (dat., 492 2 ) ksatraya etc. 
 ' (I, the spokesman,) taking from the dead 
 man's hand the bow, for us for power i.e. 
 that ours may be the power, glory, might ' . 
 Here the construction breaks off short, but 
 without a jot of uuclearness. Note that 
 the bow is left in his hand till the very last. 
 This was their noblest and chiefest weapon : 
 cf. RV. vi.75; the stories of Arjuna's bow, 
 Gandiva; and Strabo, xv.66,p.717. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 87. 
 
 1. U.f. Atra^evd tvam ('thou,' the de- 
 parted sc. jayes) ; ih& . See atra2. The 
 adverbs are contrasted as in fvSat^ovfffrfpol 
 (Iff iv ol 4it*i ruv tvOddf, Plato, Ap. 41c. 
 U.f. vigvas, cf. 74 12 N. abhfmatis, as adj., 
 'plotting against (us) ' cf. Vman+abhi2. 
 
 2-3. Addressed to the departed. The 
 earth, ' a maid soft as wool to a pious man 
 (daksinavate) she shall protect thee from 
 destruction's lap.' Pada c has 12 syllables. 
 
 4-5. Vgvanc+ud : note mg of gvanc and 
 its concinnity with the metaphor of yuvati. 
 ma ni badhathas (743) : compare the 
 formulae 
 
 Bit tibi terra levis ! 
 
 ne gravis ease velis ! 
 tu levis ossa tegas ! 
 
 etc., cited by J. Grimm, I.e., p. 193 = 214. 
 asmai and enam, cf. 84 4 N. U.f. bhunie. 
 -Vlvr+abhi, 712. 
 
 6-7. mlt-as, nom. pi. : cf. 486b. 
 grhasas : cf . 80 1 and N., and Kaegi, N.329. 
 Pronounce santu air a. The like beauti- 
 ful conception of committal to a place of 
 security pervades the Eng. word bury, the 
 Old High Ger. bi-felan, and Goth, ga-filhan. 
 
 8-9. Pronounce tudt pari : see pari. 
 U.f. ni-dadhat. -See u and 1122a 2 . - 
 risam, 848 s . i& 'tra, u.f. te I atra: te is 
 accentless (135 2 ) and so belongs of course to 
 pada c. 
 
 Pada b: 'And laying down this clod 
 may I not get harm.' This seems to refer 
 to the glebam in os inicere (a custom which 
 still accompanies the " earth to earth, ashes 
 to ashes, dust to dust" of Christian burial), 
 and to betray the natural " uncanny feeling 
 at having to do with a corpse." Cf. Kaegi, 
 N.330. 
 
 Pada c. The ' pillar ' or ' prop ' may be 
 a rude beam or tree, laid over the corpse so 
 as to keep the earth from caving in on it : 
 cf . AV. xviii.2.25, 
 
 " Let not the tree press hard on thee, 
 Nor yet the earth, the great, divine." 
 
 Sometimes the tree was hollowed out as a 
 coffin (AV. xviii.3.70): cf. the Germanic 
 Todtenbaum of sacred oak Weinhold, Alt- 
 nordisches Leben, 497, 491.
 
 NOTES TO i 
 PAGE 87. i 
 
 [386] 
 
 10-11. U.f. ahani i isvas a dadhus. 
 'On a fitting day me, as the plume of an 
 arrow, have they set.' The stanza seems 
 to express the poet's satisfaction at having 
 made a good hymn at the right time and 
 place and with as good skill as a skilful 
 horseman has. Whitney renders, 
 
 They've set me in a fitting day, 
 As one the plume sets on the shaft. 
 I've caught and used the fitting word, 
 As one a steed tames with the rein. 
 
 The stanza is fully discussed, JAOS. xi. 
 p.cxci = PAOS. May, 1884. It is interesting 
 as illustrating the varieties of cumulative 
 evidence that may be brought to bear on 
 the criticism of the Veda. Thus : 1. The 
 stanza is at the end of the hymn and out of 
 connection. 2. It is in a different kind of 
 metre. 3. The metre is bad of its kind. 
 4. The form isvas is bad Vedic for isos ; 
 and 5. praticim is a late form for praticlm. 
 6. The stanza is ignored by Afvalayana ; 
 and 1. by Sayana. 
 
 SELECTION LIV. RV. x.33.4-9. The 
 aged priest to the young prince. The hymn 
 has nine stanzas. The first three have nothing 
 to do with the rest. The rest (4-9) forms 
 two trca's. This passage has more than 
 common freshness, and also directness of 
 connection with the life of Vedic time. The 
 situation would seem to be somewhat as 
 follows. 
 
 The old priest stood well with the gods, 
 so that the efficacy of his intercession with 
 them was of unusually good repute. Accord- 
 ingly, the foes of king Kuru9ravana had 
 once tried to win the Rishi over to their side 
 and away from his master, Kurucravana; 
 but in vain. He had remained faithful to 
 the royal family in whose service he long 
 had been. 
 
 Now at last king Kuni9ravana has passed 
 away, leaving Upama9ravas as his son and 
 heir. And in presence of the young prince, 
 the priest tells with pride and pleasure of 
 the old times, and speaks with regret of the 
 loss of his departed patron. 
 
 Ludwig, iii.182, has called attention to 
 the genealogical series of the RV. These 
 cover oftenest, of course, only three genera- 
 
 tions, since memory, unaided by records, 
 does not easily go further back. But for 
 preserving that amount of genealogical tra- 
 dition there was frequent need (Weber, ISt. 
 x.78-88, esp. 82): thus, at the offering to 
 the Manes, the priest has to address by name 
 the father, grandfather, and great-grand- 
 father of the sacrificer; see QB. ii.4.2 16 or 
 SEE. xii.365 or OLSt. i.60 : similarly at 
 the pravara ; cf . ISt. ix .322-3 or x.78-9 or 
 Miiller, ASL. 886. 
 
 In the present instance, however, we have 
 a series of five at least. Trasadasyu is a 
 prince of the Puru tribe, and of the line of 
 Purukutsa (he is not necessarily the latter's 
 son RV. vii.19.3), and is often mentioned 
 for his generosity and for the special favors 
 shown him by the gods. The series is 
 Purukutsa 
 
 Trasadasyu 
 
 Mitratithi 
 
 Kurucravana 
 
 Upamacravas. 
 
 Compare Bergaigne, JA. 8.vi.373-4, and 
 Kaegi, 80(110), and N.340. The Purus were 
 one of several tribes that were ultimately 
 fused together in the famous Kurus Olden- 
 berg, Buddha, 403 = 411. 
 
 12-13. avrni : augment, 585 2 ; impf . mid. 
 (725), 1st sing. 'I, the Rishi, preferred 
 king K.' (to his enemies) ; i.e. I chose to 
 keep him as my master, in order to go out 
 to battle with him, etc. A choice was in- 
 evitable. It would appear that priests who 
 sacrificed for many or for a village were 
 despised (Yajnavalkya, i. 161, 163, Manu, iv. 
 205). The purohitas inarched out with their 
 kings to battle (AGS. iii.12), as did the 
 fidvreis, e.g. to the battle of Plataea (Hdt. 
 ix.33,37), and for similar motives fj.e/j.t- 
 a6(a/j.fvoL OVK oKiyov Kara, rb KfpSos. 
 
 14-15. tisras, 482c. -stavai (626, 617), 
 ' I will praise,' sc. tarn, meaning Kuru- 
 9ravana. sah-, sc. yajne. K's horses 
 (triga) still come to fetch the priest in state 
 to the sacrifice. 
 
 16-17. yasya: K. is still meant. 
 ucuse, 803, v'vac. 'Of whom, (namely) 
 of U's father, the words (were) highly pleas-
 
 [387] 
 
 ( NOTES TO 
 I PAGE 88. 
 
 ing to (me) the intercessor, as a lovely home.' 
 [1 The text is awkward and unclear.] Time 
 was, when king K., to offset the overtures 
 of his enemies, had to make very persuasive 
 offers to the priest. No false delicacy re- 
 strains the latter now from alluding to these 
 with satisfaction in the presence of his future 
 patron. The mention of K. as 'father of 
 U.' is peculiar. Somewhat analogous is the 
 Semitic fashion : cf . Abd-allah, ' Gott-schalk.' 
 18-19. adhi goes w. ihi, v'i, q.v. U.f. 
 napat pitiis te (80 15 N.). pitiis limits 
 vandita as a possessive (not objective) geni- 
 tive. The objective gen. would be devanam. 
 
 asmi: the present does not necessarily 
 imply that K. is still alive. 
 
 2O. ydd igiya, cf. 80 n N. "Had it de- 
 pended on me, my maghavan K. should have 
 lived. But ." But for utd, the va 
 would have to follow martianaam cf. 
 atha6. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 88. 
 
 1. U.f. id. See maghavan 1. 
 
 2-3. See vratd 1. Passage explained 
 under cana2. ' Accordingly, with my 
 yoke-fellow (K.) I have parted* Vvrt+vi. 
 
 SELECTION LV. RV. x.40.10. " Wedding- 
 stanza." Rubricated at 100 12 and QGS. i. 
 16.2. Recurs with variants at AV. xiv.1.46. 
 The ritual prescribes that it be recited, if, 
 on the way from the wedding to the groom's 
 home, the bride chance to weep. For such 
 an occasion, its relevance lies solely in the 
 fact that it contains the word ' weep.' 
 
 4-5. See V2ma or mi+vi: form made 
 after the model of nayante. dnu didhiyus 
 (AV. dldhyus), 786 3 . -U.f. y6 idam sam- 
 erire (AV. correctly, sam-irire), 'who have 
 come together here : ' Irir6, perf . of primary 
 conj. (not caus. vocab. wrong) of v'ir. 
 
 Vsvaj+pari, 970a. 
 
 The import of the very obscure (if not 
 hopelessly corrupt) stanza is possibly this. 
 The first half tells what happens at the 
 burial of a wife. While the rest lament 
 aloud, the men show their sorrow for the 
 bereaved husband by pensive silence. The 
 second half contains reflections on the joys 
 
 of wedlock, whose appositeness is clear, if 
 we assume that they are uttered in the tone 
 of mournful regret. [But cf. ISt. v.200.] 
 
 'They weep for the living one (the 
 widower). They cry aloud at the service. 
 The men thought over the long reach (of 
 his happy wedded life now past). 
 
 ' A lovely thing for the fathers who have 
 come together here, a joy to husbands, 
 are wives to embrace.' 
 
 SELECTION LVI. RV. x.52. The gods 
 install Agni as oblation-bearer. The motif 
 is akin to that of the much superior hymn 
 x.51, given by Bohtlingk (no. 30), and also 
 by GKR. (no. 43), who add a translation of 
 the Brahmana form of the legend of Agni's 
 hiding (selection Ixvi.). The hymn is in 
 dramatic form. 
 
 STANZAS 1-2. Agni asks the gods for 
 directions concerning his service at the sacri- 
 fice (1); and, with the help of the A9vins 
 and with everything in readiness, he pro- 
 poses to resume his work (2). 
 
 STANZA 3. Some gods raise doubts as to 
 his fitness (padasafi). Others answer that 
 he is ready whenever needed (pada c). 
 
 The poet accordingly announces Agni's 
 installation, in narrative form (pada d). 
 
 STANZA 4. Agni accepts the office (padas 
 a b) ; and the gods bid him set about his 
 duties (c d). 
 
 STANZA 5. Agni promises due performance. 
 
 STANZA 6. The poet adds a kind of envoi 
 in narrative form. 
 
 6-7. vigve devas : see devd, 2b ; note 
 accentual unity, 314 4 (JAOS. xi.61). as- 
 tana: acct, 594a ; form, 618. manavai: 
 v'manS; form, 713, 700. yd seems super- 
 fluous. See Vsad+ni. 
 
 'Teach me (the way) in which, chosen 
 here as h6tr, I am to be minded (= what I 
 am to have in view), when (sic) having taken 
 my place. Declare to me (the way) in which 
 your portion, the path by which your obla- 
 tion, I am to bear unto you.' 
 
 8-9. U.f. dhar-ahar, 1260. - ' Every day, 
 O Afvins, the office of adhvarytL (adhv-) is 
 yours.' U.f. samit, nom. s. of samidh. 
 bhavati, 'is on hand.' U.f. sa_ahutis.
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 88. 
 
 [388] 
 
 1O-11. Explained under ya3. As Yama 
 is king of the blessed Fathers (83 8 N.), Yama's 
 hotr must be competent to satisfy them at 
 the monthly graddha (p. 402). 'Has he 
 (see kam2) grasped (V2uh+api), i.e. does he 
 know, (that) which the gods take (see Vanj 
 -rsam4, and Bohtlingk's smaller dictionary, 
 s.v.), i.e. does he know what they like ? ' 
 Is he equal to both sets of duties ? 
 
 In pada c the objections are met. Agni 
 is born anew every day for the agnihotra 
 (ISt. x.328), at which the gods take their 
 food; and anew every month, when the 
 Manes take theirs. 
 
 12-13. Pronounce maam. See VI dhao. 
 Vmluc+apa : ' hidden ' in the waters see 
 93 16 . Classic, bahiini krcchrani : see 
 v'carS. -kalp- (1043.2), 'let him.' - 
 Pada d (= RV. x.!24.1b) : The victims of 
 the animal sacrifice were five, ' man, horse, 
 ox, sheep, goat' (see AV. xi.2.9 or ISt. xiii. 
 292) ; and its later surrogate is called 'five- 
 fold ' as containing the ' essence ' of all these 
 victims (C.B. i.2.3 6 see Eggeling's note). 
 But it may be ill-judged to try to attach 
 special significance to these numbers. ' Three ' 
 and ' seven ' are of course sacred numbers. 
 
 14-15. a yaksi: see Vyaj+a; form, s-aor. 
 mid. 1st sing., 882. At first the gods were 
 mortal (96 3 f). See yathaG. Pronounce 
 bahu6r. -a dheyam, 837 2 . -U.f. atha_ 
 imas: atha jayati, 'then (if I do), he 
 shall win,' cf. 82 2 and N. 
 
 16-17. See 486 for construction. '3339 
 gods.' Vuks, 585. astrnan, 725. 
 U.f. asmai | at id h6taram. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 89. 
 
 SELECTION LVII. RV. x.53.6 and 8. 
 Burial and wedding-stanzas. Rubricated as 
 burial stanzas at 105 9 and 105 18 . The eighth 
 is also used (100 11 ) as a wedding-stanza, in 
 case the bride has to embark and disembark 
 on her wedding-journey. See also AB. iii. 
 38. Interesting variants of the stanza and 
 reminiscences of its traditional material at 
 AV. xii.2.26,27,28. 
 
 1. tanvan (705), see Vtan4. The meta- 
 phor is frequent. rajasas appears to be 
 abl. and to refer backwards as well as for- 
 
 wards, i.e. to tanvan as well as to anv-ihi. 
 Note that raksa and Eng. keep coincide in 
 having the mgs 'guard' and (as here) 'not 
 quit.' 
 
 2. vayata, see V2va. See J6gii and 
 352. manu, here as the typical originator 
 of prayer, praise, and sacrifice see vocab., 
 and cf. C.B. i.5.1", manur ha va agre 
 yajnena^ije; tad anukrtya^imah praja 
 yajante. Note again that janaya and 
 Eng. produce coincide in having the mgs 
 ' generate ' and (as here cf. i.31.17, a vaha 
 daiviam janam, and 82 8 ) 'fetch along or 
 bring to view.' 
 
 STANZA 6 is really a prayer to Agni and 
 his flames to help in the work of devotion. 
 As the immortal messenger (see Muir, v.201) 
 between men and gods, he is to go from 
 earth, traverse the atmosphere (see rajas in 
 vocab.), and pursue his way to the gods 
 through the siiar. Here he is to keep to 
 the paths (cf. TS. v.7.7) which are made by 
 the prayers and oblations that go up to the 
 gods, the devayanas or ' god-paths,' as 
 the AB. at iii.38 calls them, on which the 
 gods descend to man. Pada c, continuing 
 the metaphor of a, is addressed to Agni's 
 flames ; and d, to Agni. 
 
 Stretching devotion's weft from gloom to light go on. 
 Keep to the radiant pathways which our prayers have made. 
 Without a blemish weave ye now the singers' work. 
 Be Manu thou. Bring to our sight the heavenly race. 
 
 3-4. ' It (sc. nadi) flows stony,' the logi- 
 cal predicate being agmanvati cf. frcovtri 
 fj.eyd\oi, Hdt. ii.25 ; cum flueret lutulentus, 
 Horace, Sat. i.4.11. Others, not so well, 
 make agin- a proper name (die Stein-ach), 
 or refer it to the stream from the press- 
 stones, i.e. the Soma. Note that \ftr has 
 special reference to water: thus, ava-tr, 'go 
 down into the water' (49 19 ); ut-tr, 'come 
 up out of it;' pra-tr, 'advance in crossing 
 it.' atra, ' there,' with a sneer : cf . amuya, 
 70 16 N. ye asann (636 3 ) agevas, 'qui in- 
 felices sint:' not so well the vocab. lit- 
 tarema^.abhf, see Vtr+abhy-ud. 
 
 STANZA 8. The situation is perhaps 
 this. A band of men, hotly pursued by their 
 enemies, are in the middle of a stream, which 
 they hope soon to have put betwixt them- 
 selves and the foe. They call out to each
 
 [389] 
 
 I NOTES TO 
 | PAGE 89. 
 
 other encouragingly the words of the stanza. 
 The famous hymn RV. iii.33 involves a situ- 
 ation which is similar (Muir, i 2 .338), and, 
 indeed, familiar elsewhere (Hebrews xi.29; 
 Hdt. viii.138). 
 
 The stream is stony. Hold ye well together. 
 
 Your footing keep. On ! make your crossing, comrades I 
 
 There let us leave them in a mood unhappy, 
 
 While we go out and on to happy conquests. 
 
 SELECTION LVIII. RV. x.85.36, 24-26, 
 32-33, 27, 43-47. The wedding-hymn. The 
 stanzas are here given in the order in which 
 they are rubricated at 98 19 f see p. 398. 
 Their uses in the ritual are discussed by 
 Haas in his treatise on the ancient wedding 
 customs of India, ISt. v.267-412. 
 
 The hymn is called the surya-sukta or 
 "The marriage of Soma and Surya," and 
 has received at the hands of Dr. J. Ehni, 
 ZDMG. xxxiii.166-176, a mythological inter- 
 pretation, briefly summarized in AJP. L211. 
 The hymn has 47 stanzas, with an appendix 
 given by Aufrecht, Rigveda 2 ii.682, and com- 
 prises somewhat heterogeneous matter (ISt. 
 v.269). Most of the hymn occurs in AV. 
 xiv.l and 2, with many variants. Partial 
 concordance : 
 
 RV. x.8i 
 36 = 
 
 24 = 
 
 25 = 
 
 26 = 
 
 32 = 
 
 33 = 
 
 AV. xiv. 
 1.50 
 1.19,58 
 1.18 
 1.20 
 2.11 
 2.28 
 
 RV. x.85. 
 27 = 
 
 43 = 
 
 44 = 
 45 
 46 = 
 47 
 
 AV. xiv. 
 1.21 
 2.40 
 2.17 
 
 1.44 
 
 Besides the translations of Ludwig and 
 of Grassmann, there is one of hymn and 
 appendix by Weber, ISt. v.177-195. This 
 is followed by one of AV. xiv. (pages 195- 
 217) and of the other wedding-stanzas of the 
 AV. (pages 218-266) see also Ludwig, iii. 
 p. 469-76. Most of the Reader-stanzas are 
 translated, with explanations, by Zimmer, 
 311-313. See also Kaegi, 74(102), and notes 
 317-325. 
 
 STANZA 36. Said to the bride by the 
 groom in the very act of taking her hand in 
 token of wedlock. 
 
 STANZAS 24-26 and 32-33. Said just be- 
 fore the bride's departure for her new home. 
 Stanzas 24 and 32 are said by a third person ; 
 25, 26, and 33 may be put in the mouth of 
 the groom. St. 33 may, as the Sutra says, 
 
 be spoken on the way, when people come 
 out of their dwellings to gaze. 
 
 STANZA 27. Padas a, b, and c are said to 
 the bride, and d to the couple, on their 
 arrival. 
 
 STANZAS 43-47. The groom first prays 
 to Prajapati on behalf of himself and his 
 bride (43 a b), and addresses the latter with 
 good wishes and solemn benedictions (43 c d, 
 44) ; prays to Indra that the bride may be 
 fruitful (45) ; bids her hold her own with her 
 new relatives (46) ; and, finally, beseeches 
 the gods, on behalf of himself and his wife, 
 that they two may dwell in unity (47). 
 
 5-6. grbhnami hastam : this, the dex- 
 trarum iunctio, is the essential feature of 
 the simplest wedding-ritual, see Haas, 277, 
 316; cf. hasta-grabha (86 19 ) and pani-graha 
 (64 10 ); the AV. modernizes, reading, grhnami. 
 With the concordant stanza of the AV. are 
 grouped several others (48, 49, 51) of like 
 import. ' With me as husband ' (343b). 
 yatha^asas, 'ut sis.' U.f . mahyam 
 tva^adus (829). garh-, 'for (our) being 
 heads of a household, i.e. that we may 
 establish a family.' 
 
 7-8. abadhnat, 730. -Seerta2. -See 
 Ioka2b and cf. sukrta with sukft. This 
 phrase is equiv. in form to the older one 
 (84 11 ), but refers here rather to the 'world 
 of the pious ' on earth. 
 
 I loose thee from Varuna's bond, 
 With which kindly Savitar bound thee. 
 At the altar, in the company of the good, 
 I put thee unharmed with thy husband. 
 
 The first half-stanza is an allegorical, 
 and the second a literal address to the bride. 
 In the allegory, the bond of Varuna is night 
 (Hillebrandt). Savitar is the ' Impeller,' not 
 only of the rising, but also of the setting sun 
 (RV. i.35.3 a ). He brings rest (ii.38.3,4) by 
 sending night, whose gentle bond he lays 
 (Muir, v. 235-7) upon his daughter, Surya, 
 ' The Sun,' till she is released for her bridal 
 with Soma, 'The Moon' (masc.), a union 
 which is the prototype (cf. Haas, 328) of 
 human marriages. 
 
 From the more literal point of view, 
 the bond of Varuna, as the upholder of the 
 established order of things, is (not night
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 89. ' 
 
 [390] 
 
 still less sickness but) the tie by which a 
 maid is bound to her father till a man come 
 to loose and take her. See the discussions 
 of Haas, 319-20, 277-8, and of Hillebrandt, 
 Varuna, p. 59. 
 
 9-1O. pra muncami: acct! 596, 597; 
 similar cases at 74 1 and 92 16 ; supply either 
 imam, or (since a change of address to Indra 
 is quite natural) tvam. U.f. amutas (171 4 ) 
 karam (831 2 ) | yatha^iyam asati, ' ut 
 haec sit.' mldhvas, 462a. 
 
 Sayana comments thus : itah pitr-kulat 
 pra muncami tvam; na^amuto bhartr- 
 grhat pramuncami. amuto bhartr-grhe 
 subaddham karam. 
 
 11-12. Said to the bride as she gets into 
 the wagon. Pusan is the best of guides for 
 earthly travellers also cf. p. 381-2. See 
 grha, pi. U.f. yatha^asas. See \vad-ra. 
 
 13-14. Said just as the wedding-train 
 starts. V2vid, 848. AV. modernizes, 
 reading sugena. ati^itam, 617. Pro- 
 nounce apa drantu (617). 
 
 15-16. imam sam-a_ita, pagyata ' come 
 near to this one together, i.e. crowd around 
 her, (and) take a look.' Cf. note to 100 15 . 
 dat-tvaya, 993, from the quasi-root dad 
 (955c). U.f. &tha^astam vi para^itana 
 (618). 
 
 17-18. priyam (priya 2b), subject of 
 sam-rdhyatam. ena (502 2 , here = an6na) 
 etc.: 'with this (man) as husband unite 
 thyself.' adha jivri etc., said to both. 
 ' Old,' i.e. until ye become so. 
 
 19. This stanza (43) has interesting vari- 
 ants in AV., and at MS. ii.13 end. Pro- 
 nounce sam-anaktu (689). 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 9O. 
 
 1. patilokam, ' husband's home : ' not till 
 later, ' husband's heaven.' 
 
 2-3. edhi, 636. Pronounce virasuur 
 siona. AV. reads devr-kama. 
 
 Note that 44a, 6, and c are of 11 syllables, 
 while 44rf (= 43o?) is of 12. Although this 
 discrepancy is not very rare, it yet helps to 
 bring out the character of d as & formula 
 sollennis : 
 
 ' Be a blessing to our bipeds, a blessing 
 to our quadrupeds.' It is most interesting 
 
 to note that a similarly comprehensive for- 
 mula occurs elsewhere : in the Avesta, Yasna 
 xix.8(18-19), Vd. xv.!9(59), see KZ. xxv. 
 195 ; and on the Iguvine Tables, VI b 10-11, 
 see Bre'al's ed., pages XL, 125. 
 
 4-5. U.f. daga^asyam putran a dhehi 
 (668). There is no end of evidence (e.g. 
 Zimmer, p. 319) to show that the desire for 
 male children was very strong, and that the 
 birth of daughters was unwelcome. A wife 
 who bears only daughters may be put away 
 Manu ix.81. -krdhi, 839. -'Put ten 
 sons in her. Make her husband an eleventh.' 
 The logical incongruity is paralleled by Para- 
 dise Lost, iv. 323-4, and by the Greek classics. 
 
 6-7. Pronounce gvagruam: specimen of 
 a very rare form of transition to the devi- 
 declension, see 358. Pronounce nanandri : 
 AV. reads nanandus. See adhi. 
 
 This throws an interesting light on 
 ancient family-life. Note that of the Ger. 
 correspondents to gvagura and gvagru, viz. 
 Schwdher and Schwieger, the former has died 
 out and given place to the term Schwieger- 
 vater. The mothers-in-law have thus made 
 their mark in the language see Kluge. 
 
 8-9. U.f. sam (sc. anjantu) apas hfda- 
 yani (note neglect of dual) nau (gen.). A 
 real anointing of both took place. In line 
 9, a dadhatu goes with each sam, and nau is 
 ace. Dhatf is esp. the deity who 'puts' 
 fruit in the womb EV. x.184.1. See 
 u 1 end. 
 
 SELECTION LIX. RV. x.137. Exorcism 
 for- a sick person. Tradition assigns each 
 stanza to one of the Seven Rishis as author. 
 Stanza 4 is spoken by the Wind, personified ; 
 the rest, by the exorcist. Respecting the 
 general character of the hymn, see Kaegi, 
 85-86(115). See also the beautiful essay of 
 Kuhn, KZ. xiii.49-74 and 113-157, who com- 
 pares similar Vedic and Germanic spells. 
 Nearchus says (Strabo,xv.45,p.706) that the 
 Hindus trust to wandering enchanters ( tirc/iSol) 
 for cures, and that this is about all their 
 larpiK-fi amounts to. The hymn is translated 
 by Aufrecht, ZDMG. xxiv.203. It corre- 
 sponds in general to AV. iv.13 ; but see note 
 to stanza 6.
 
 [391] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 91. 
 
 1O-11. Note the accentless and accented 
 vocatives. See vnl+ud and 248c. U.f. 
 uta^agas cakrusam (= cakrvarisam, 462c). 
 The disease is a punishment for sin, cf . p. 374. 
 
 12-13. See 1 idam end. Zimraer queries, 
 p. 45, whether the two Monsoons are here 
 meant, a sindhos, see a4. 'Away let 
 the other blow what infirmity (there is/ 512b). 
 
 15. Pronounce tuam. See Vi. 
 
 16-17. a agamam and a^abharsam 
 (882): note use of aorists (928) 'I have 
 just come and brought,' says the Wind. 
 atho, 1122a 2 , 138c. -V2su+para. 
 
 18-19. Pada c, bad metre. ay am, the 
 sick man. 
 
 2O. U.f. id vai, see vai. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 91. 
 1. ' The waters are healers (lit. healing) 
 of everything.' On use of sarva, see 77 n N. 
 The AV.-concordants of this stanza are at 
 AV. vi.91.3 and iii.7.5 and read vigvasya. 
 
 STANZA 6. In place of this stanza the 
 AV. has interpolated RV. x.60.12, evidently 
 because it has to do with the laying on of 
 hands see the following. 
 
 2-3. That the laying on of hands has 
 especial virtue is a wide-spread belief cf . 
 Acts viii.!7f, and above, p. 369 a top. The 
 Greeks attributed to each of the AOKTUAOI 
 'iSawi a name and a particular healing power. 
 The finger next to the little finger (see note 
 to 104 11 ) is called, digitus medicus by Pliny, 
 and medicinalis, in the laws of Henry I. of 
 England ; and it has a special and beneficent 
 magic power. W. Grimm, Kleinere Schriften, 
 iii.440f, 442. 
 
 ' With hands, ten-fingered (the tongue 
 is leader of the charm), healing, thee with 
 these thee we touch.' The parenthesis may 
 mean that the tongue brings out a charm to 
 precede the laying on of hands. Text prob- 
 ably corrupt ; AV. variants interesting. 
 
 SELECTION LX. RV. x.154. To Yama. 
 Funeral-hymn. Rubricated at 103 13 , see p. 
 402. Recurs at AV. xviii.2.14-18, with inter- 
 esting variants. Translated, Muir, v.310. 
 To judge from the ritual, the subject of dpi 
 gacchatat in each stanza is the spirit of the 
 
 departed. He is to go and join the Fathers 
 saints, warriors, poet-sages, a descrip- 
 tion of whom makes up most of the hymn. 
 In stanzas 4 and 5, gacchatat (see 570) is a 
 3d sing., ' O Yama, let him go ; ' in the rest, 
 it may be a 2d or a 3d. Ludwig, ii.394, 
 v.311, interprets otherwise, taking madhu as 
 subject of dpi gacchatat ( \lgam +api). 
 
 4-5. ' Some others ' (eke), i.e. of the 
 Fathers, "who revel in bliss with Yama" 
 (83 18 ). SeeVas+upa. 'For whom madhu 
 flows : ' Yama and the Fathers are the eager 
 recipients of sweet drink-offerings cf. AV. 
 xviii.2.1-3, and RV. x.15 passim. tang 
 cid = ' those : ' tang cid eva = ' just those.' 
 
 6-7. Pronounce siiar. ' Who made 
 tapas their glory.' Heaven can be won 
 only by the pious and (stanza 3) the brave: 
 cf. MBh. iii.43.4 = 1759, and 42.35= 1748f. 
 
 1O-11. See cid2. U.f. purve rtasapas. 
 -Cf. 85*. 
 
 12-13. 'Who keep (= confine themselves 
 to) the sun, i.e. who hover about the sun' 
 The righteous after death are transformed 
 into rays of the sun or into stars (Muir, v. 
 319f ; see 100 8 N.). Thus QB. i.9.3 10 , ya eaa 
 tapati, tasya ye ragmayas, te sukrtaa. So 
 MBh. iii.42.38 = 1751f : 
 
 ete sukrtinah, Partha, 
 yan drstavan asi, Vibho, 
 tararupani bhutale. 
 
 SELECTION LXI. RV. x. 155.5. Burial- 
 stanza. Rubricated, 105 21 . The preceding 
 four stanzas are a deprecatio addressed to 
 Arayi, a vile and murderous witch. This 
 stanza, the last, dwells upon the safety of 
 the godly. 
 
 14-15. pari anesata and pari a-hr- 
 sata, 882 ; akrata, 834a. Note the use of 
 the aorists, 928 where all is translated, 
 a dadharsati, perf. subj., 810b. 
 
 SELECTION LXII. MS. ii.13.23. Hiranya- 
 garbha. The god Ka or Who (see notes to 
 selection Ixviii.). The RV. version (x.121) 
 of this famous hymn has been translated by 
 Max Miiller, ASL. 569, and Chips, i.29 ; by 
 Ludwig, no. 948; and by Muir, with com- 
 ments, iv 2 .15-18.
 
 NOTES TO i 
 PAGE 91. I 
 
 [392] 
 
 STRUCTURE of the hymn. The seven 
 stanzas here given (or perhaps only 2-6) 
 constitute the original stock of the hymn. 
 To this is added, in the MS.-version, an 
 eighth stanza, quite impertinent to the rest ; 
 and in the RV.-version, three stanzas (8, 9, 
 10), whose character is determinable by 
 various and interesting criteria. 
 
 Tuda d of each stanza is a refrain, ' Whom 
 as god shall we worship with oblation ? i.e. 
 Who is the god that we are to worship with 
 oblation ? ' The later Vedic texts under- 
 stand it, ' We will worship the god Who or 
 Ka,' making of the interrogative pronoun a 
 deity whom they identify with Prajapati 
 (selection Ixviii.). The oth'er padas of stan- 
 zas 2-6 are relative clauses with yds, yasya, 
 yena, yasmin. These may refer 
 
 A. To devaya: 'Who (interrog.) is the 
 god, who (relative) became king, etc. etc., 
 that we are to worship ? ' Ludwig : ' Ka, 
 the god, who is become king, etc. etc., 
 we would wait upon with havis.' Better, 
 perhaps, 
 
 B. To hiranyagarbhas, although stanza 
 1 (and 7 as well) looks as if it might have 
 been an afterthought. This leaves the con- 
 nection of the refrain with the rest of each 
 stanza very loose; but this is perhaps just 
 what it ought to be. 
 
 The hymn corresponds to RV. x.121. 
 The comparative study of the differing ver- 
 sions of the same traditional material, as it 
 appears in different Vedic texts, is interest- 
 ing and instructive ; and there is no better 
 opportunity for it than this (see Preface, 
 p. v, N.2). 
 
 The hymn occurs also at TS. iv.1.8 ; in the 
 VS., with the stanzas scattered, at xiii.4, 
 xxiii.3, xxv.13, xxv.12, xxxii.6,7, xxvii.25; 
 and at AV. iv.2. The TS. version follows 
 that of the RV. most nearly. Disregarding 
 the order, the same is true of the VS. The 
 AV. version looks like an unsuccessful 
 attempt at writing down a half-remembered 
 piece. 
 
 ACCENT-MARKS, etc. The vertical stroke 
 designates the acute accent ; the horizontal 
 hook, the circumflex. Details in L. von 
 Schroeder's ed., book i., preface, p. XXIX. 
 
 Phonetic peculiarities, ibidem, XXVIII. 
 Final m before sibilants, y, r, and v, is 
 marked by the 'dot in the crescent,' e.g. 
 pragisam, line 4. See also Preface to this 
 Reader, p. v, note 7. 
 16. Cf. 57 3 x. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 92. 
 
 1. dyam imam, see div3. 
 
 2-3. pra^anatas (192b), gen. s., pres. ppl. 
 -190: form, 613, cf. 70 18 N.; acct, 628. - 
 asy&, acct!, 74 9 N. dvipadas etc., see 90%. 
 RV.-reading better in this stanza. 
 
 4-5. ' On whose command all wait, on 
 whose (command) the gods (wait) .' 
 chaya etc. : cf . Bhagavad Gita, ix.19. 
 
 6-7. mahitva, as instr. sing., 280. Muller's 
 rendering ' Whose greatness (as ace. n. pi.) 
 the mountains and sea (neuter, as at vi.72.3) 
 with the Rasa proclaim ' would require 
 pra^ahiis. devis, as adj. (see devd, 1), 
 ' heavenly ;= of heaven,' not 'divine.' 
 
 Pada c: dig, q.v., is 'a point of the sky : ' 
 of these there are usually four; sometimes 
 are mentioned 5, 6, 7, 8, and 10 (explained 
 by BR. s.v. dig). When five are mentioned, 
 we may understand them as N., E., S., W., 
 and the zenith : cf . AB. vf.32, panca va ima 
 digag : catasras tiragcya, eka^urdhva. 
 Occurring with digas, the word pradigas 
 may mean 'intermediate points,' and, with 
 the zenith, count as five. But considering 
 the (faulty) concordant of RV., TS., and VS., 
 
 yasya imah pradlgo ydsya bahu, 
 
 further, RV. ix.86.29 b , AV. i.30.4 c , and esp. 
 iii.4.2 b , 
 
 tuam imah pradlgah p&nca devih, 
 
 I am inclined to deem the pada before us 
 a jingle of incoherent reminiscences. 
 
 Whose (are) all these mountains, by reason of (his) greatness ; 
 Whose (possession) thev call the ocean, with the Rasa; 
 The points, whose are the five fore-points of heaven; . 
 
 8-9. drdha, spondee, 224a. -U.f. suar, 
 see 178 and 173a, and 74*%. The adjec- 
 tives ugra and drdha may be attributives, 
 and stabhita or stabhitas supplied as pred- 
 icate for the substantives of line 8. 
 Pada c = RV. ii.!2.2 c . vi-mam6, v'l ma. 
 Respecting the tripartite world, see under
 
 [393] 
 
 I NOTES TO 
 j PAGE 93. 
 
 rajas, and Kaegi, 34(49) and notes 117-8. 
 
 antariksam: C.B. i.2.1 16 , antariksena 
 hi_ime dyava-prthivi vistabdhe ; cf ., at 
 Od. i.54, the K(OVO.S 
 
 /j.a.Kpas, at ya.la.v Tf ical ovpavbv a/j,<f>l$ UXOVITI. 
 
 1O-11. Pronounce -prthvi. See adhi 
 and v'tan+vi. U.f. suras eti: in the MS., 
 final -as and -e if accentless, become -a 
 before an accented initial vowel. So 93 12 . 
 
 12-13. U.f. yad mahatis vivam ayan 
 (620). See viva Ic. -The RV., TS. [with 
 nir for sam], and VS. read 
 
 tato devanam sam avartata^asur ekah. 
 
 The athetesis of the hypermetric ekah, made 
 by Bollensen, Orient und Occident, ii.485 
 (1864), and again by Grassmann, is here 
 beautifully confirmed by the MS. 
 
 SELECTION LXIII. MS. i.5.12. Legend 
 of Yama and Yami. The creation of night. 
 
 Respecting Yama and Yami, see notes to 
 85 12 f. 
 
 The prose of the Brabmanas is not difficult. In 
 reading it, the chief thing is some familiarity with 
 the style, i.e. ability to divide up the discourse aright 
 into the little clauses and choppy sentences with 
 which it proceeds. As a help to this it is important 
 to observe that the particle dthu marks the beginning 
 of a new clause, and that the postpositive vat marks 
 the foregoing word as the first of its clause. Analo- 
 gous is the use of nama to distinguish a proper name 
 from an identical appellative. Cf. Pliny, Epp. vi.31, 
 evocatus in consilium ad centum cellas (hoc loco 
 nomen) . 
 
 As my colleague, Professor A. P. Peabody, has 
 observed in his translations of Cicero's Offices and 
 Tusculans, there are certain connectives and illatives 
 which are employed as mere catchwords for the eye. 
 In manuscripts (Greek, Latin, Sanskrit) written with 
 letters of one size, with no separation of words, and 
 with very few stops, these particles serve the pur- 
 pose effected now-a-days by capitals, by division or 
 spacing, and by punctuation. In spoken language it 
 is often wrong to render them otherwise than by 
 inflection or by stress of voice. 
 
 14. U.f. val. See Vbru+apa. 
 
 14-15. U.f. tarn ydd aprchan (207), sa 
 abravit : " adya amrta " iti. t6 abruvan : 
 " n& vai iyam etc." Difference between 
 imperf. amriyata and aor. amrta (834a) 
 illustrated at 928 3 . Accent of te, Whit- 
 ney 84d, 135. 
 
 15-16. Lit. 'Not (if things keep on) in 
 this way (ittham) does she forget him.' 
 
 16. Note the fine distinction. The gods 
 use the solemn old Vedic form ratrira ; the 
 narrator, the later and more colloquial 
 
 ratrim. Similar distinction at QB. xi.5.4 4 : 
 cf. 982N., 103 14 N. Not uncommon is the 
 assumption that the gods have words or a 
 dialect peculiar to themselves. Thus na 
 with the gods means the same as iva, AB. 
 ii.2.14,15. Cf. Iliad i.403, ii.814, xiv.291, 
 xx.74, Od. x.305; and A. F. Pott's Anti- 
 kaulen, p. 71. 
 
 srjavahai, faulty reading for -mahai .' 
 U.f. ahar vava tarhi aslt, na ratris 
 verb-acct, cf. 89 9 N. 
 
 'Yama died. The gods sought to console Yami 
 for the loss of Yama. When they asked her, she 
 said, To-day hath he died. They said, In this way 
 she will never forget him. Night let us create. Only 
 day in those times existed not night. The goda 
 created night. Then came into being the morrow. 
 Then she forgat him. Therefore they say, 'Tis days 
 and nights make men forget sorrow.' 
 
 SELECTION LXIV. MS. i.10.13. Legend 
 of the winged mountains. The myth is 
 often alluded to by the later poets: see 
 Stenzler's note to Kumara-sambhava, i.20, 
 and Bollensen's to Vikramorva9i, str. 44. 
 BR. observe that it is often difficult to dis- 
 tinguish between the mgs 'mountain' and 
 ' cloud ' which belong to parvata. In letting 
 loose the heavenly waters, Indra splits open 
 the ' mountains ' as well as the ' clouds.' 
 The Maruts house on the ' heights ' or in the 
 ' clouds,' etc. 
 
 19. Explained under ya3. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 93. 
 
 1. U.f. para-patam (995) asata, yatra- 
 yatra (1260 see yatra) ak-. iyam, see 
 1 idam, middle : so imam, line 2. 
 
 2. t6sam = parvatanam. achinat, 692. 
 tais = parvatais, used evidently in the 
 manner of paper-weights. adrnhat, \drh. 
 The like achievement at RV. ii.12.2. 
 
 3. Explained under ya3. 
 
 4. U.f. y6nis hi esam (accentless, 74 9 N.) 
 esas, ' For this is the'r place-of-origin.' 
 
 SELECTION LXV. MS. ii.1.12. The potency 
 of the sacrifice. A passage much resembling 
 this occurs at TS. ii.4.13 = Muir, 1 2 .21. Re- 
 specting the myths of Indra's birth and 
 Aditi's motherhood, see Hillebrandt, Aditi, 
 p. 43; Perry, JAOS. xi.127f.148f; and Lib 
 eratur-Blatt fur Orient. Philol, ii.4.
 
 NOTES TO , 
 PAGE 93. ' 
 
 [394] 
 
 5. ' The Aindrabarhaspatyan oblation he 
 should offer (nir-vapet), who, as a sovereign, 
 shouldn't exactly succeed in his attacks.' 
 This is a typical Brahmana passage. It 
 invents a legend showing the efficacy of 
 some ritual observance in former times, to 
 prove the usefulness of repeating the same 
 rites in analogous circumstances. Peculiar 
 interest attaches to this occurrence of the 
 Vstigh see Schroeder's ed. of MS., Intro- 
 duction, p. XIV; also ZDMG. xxxiii.!94f, 
 where the substance of the passage is 
 given. 
 
 6. U.f. odanam apacat. iinistam, see 
 this : final t (= d) before becomes n in MS. 
 agnat, s2ag. 
 
 6-7. U.f. tarn vai Indram antar eva 
 santam apa^aumbhat (Vubh; augment, 
 585) : ' Indra, being (yet) an embryo, within 
 (her), she bound with an iron bond.' 
 apa_ubdhas, 160. 
 
 8. ayajayat, see v'yaj, caus. 
 
 9-1O. tasya = indrasya. vyapadyata 
 = of course, vl-apadyata : cf. Whitney, 84a. 
 -U.f. abhi-pary-a^avartata, 1080, 1083. 
 
 10. U.f. yas ', tarn et6na yajayet , 
 ' One should teach him to sacrifice with this 
 Aindrabarhaspatyan (oblation), who etc.' 
 
 11. esas, same as y6 and tarn, line 10. 
 12-13. U.f. nir-upyate, impers. 'it is 
 
 offered : ' combination, 92 n N. ; form, Vvap, 
 769 ; accent !, 596. kriyate, VI kr 12, ' it is 
 sacrificed.' ' Offering is made to B., sacri- 
 fice is made to I. : (then) on all sides (the 
 god) releases him' (enam). 'Him,' i.e. the 
 sin-bound king of lines 10-11, who is also 
 the subject of abhi-pary-a-vartate. 
 
 SELECTION LXVI. TS. ii.6.6. Legend of 
 Agni the oblation-bearer, and of the fish. 
 This is the Brahmana form of the myth which 
 is the subject of RV. x.51, and is adverted 
 to in x.52 = selection Ivi. To their version 
 of x.51, GKR. add on p. 106 a translation of 
 the selection before us (Ixvi.). It is also 
 rendered by Muir, v.203, and by Eggeling, 
 SBE. xii.452. Ludwig, v.504-5, gives other 
 Brahmana forms of this myth : cf. esp. QB. 
 i.2.3 1 = SBE. xii.47. For Epic forms of the 
 same, see Ad. Holtzmann, Agni nach den 
 
 Vorstellungen des MBh., p. 11, and esp. MBh. 
 iii.222.7 = 14214f. 
 
 14-15. trayas, 482c. V2mi+pra, 770a. 
 
 15-16. ' Agni feared, (thinking,) " In this 
 way, surely, he (syas) will get into trouble, i.e. 
 if things keep on in this way, I shall get into 
 trouble." ' He speaks of himself here (as 
 also at x.51.6 a ) in the 3d person (syas). Xote 
 the common root of a^artim and a^arisyati. 
 
 16. nilayata : in strictness, to be divided 
 thus, nil-ayata, ' lie went out, took himself 
 off, hid.' This is for nir a-ayata, an imperf. 
 mid. of vi (after the model of a-jayata from 
 Vji) with the prefix nis or nir; for accord- 
 ing to Panini (viii.2.19), the r of a preposi- 
 tion with forms of the verb-stem aya is 
 regularly changed to 1 cf. 1087c. 
 
 In the Hindu mind, these forms of the 
 verb-stem nil-aya were evidently confused 
 with those of ni-laya, which yield a like mg 
 see BR. under vli+ni. On this account, 
 doubtless, the pada-patha, which usually 
 gives the division of compound verbs, re- 
 frains here. The confusion is further at- 
 tested by the analogous passage of the (/B., 
 which has, in the Madhyamdina text (i.2.3 1 ), 
 ni-lilye, and in the Kanva text, ni-layam 
 cakre see SBE. xii.p.xlvi. The proper 
 form from vli in the passage before us would 
 of course be ny-alayata. 
 
 16-17. U.f. pra_6sam (see V2is+pra2 and 
 ref.) aicchan (VI is, 585). In the metaphor, 
 Agni is implicitly likened to a hunted beast. 
 
 17-18. tarn agapat etc., 'Him (the fish) 
 he (Agni) cursed (as follows): "dhiya -- 
 pra^avocas." ' See dhll. vadhyasus 
 (form! 924) and ghnanti (637) have as sub- 
 ject ' people.' The loose use of sas, tarn, 
 etc., is one of the chief stylistic faults of the 
 Brahmanas. 
 
 19. anv-avindan: V2vid; subject, 'the 
 gods.' See Vvrfc+upa_a. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 94. 
 1-2. U.f. grhitasya (sc. ghrtasya) a-hutas- 
 ya (see Vhu) skandat (736), tad me 
 asat. bhratrnam: the TS. reg. has short 
 r in the gen. pi. of these words. ' He said : 
 " Let me make a condition (v ; 2vr) : Just what 
 of the (sc. ghee) (when) taken (into the
 
 [395] 
 
 ) NOTES TO 
 / PAGE 95. 
 
 sacrificial ladle, but) not (yet) poured into 
 the fire (a-hutasya), may fall outside the 
 enclosure, let that be the portion of my 
 brothers." ' 
 
 SELECTION LXVII. AB. iii.20. Legend 
 of Indra and the Maruts, and Vrtra. Trans- 
 lated, Muir, v.93. In selection xlvii. = RV. 
 viii.85.7f, the Maruts are praised because 
 they stood by Indra when all the other gods 
 forsook him. The passage before us is an 
 expansion of that myth, a " reproduction 
 plus ou moins amplifie'e d'un cliche emprunte' 
 au livre des hymnes." 
 
 From other passages, it would appear that 
 the Maruts also were faithless, cf. Muir, v. 
 92 and 82 a N. Both views are involved in the 
 explanation of the Mid-day Soma Feast, QB. 
 iv.3.3 6 f, where the Maruts first withdraw 
 from Indra and afterwards help him (SBE. 
 xxvi.334f). 
 
 4-5. hanisyan, 948' 2 . U.f. "ami ma 
 upa tisthadhvam; upa ma hvayadhvam" 
 (vhu). Note the free position of the pre- 
 fixes (1081). -tathajti, '"Yes," said 
 they.' 
 
 5-6. U.f. saa (Vrtra) avet (see \[1 vid3, 
 and 620): "mam etc.; hanta! iman bhi- 
 sayai" (vbbi, caus., 1042f, 1043.2). 
 
 7. v'vas+abhi-pra: imperf., 631. 
 adravan : simple root dru, without prefix ; 
 note that the prefix a with v'dru exactly 
 reverses its meaning ; so with \\da, hr, and 
 muc. 
 
 8-9. U.f. m- ha enam na ajahus (V2ha, 
 661,656) : "prahara bhagavas! (454b) jahi! 
 (637 2 ) vlrayasva!" iti eva enam upa_ 
 atisthanta. See vac. 
 
 9-1O. tad etad (see etad) = ' this.' See 
 Vvac + abhy-anu. 'The Hishi, seeing this 
 (occurrence), described (it) in the Vedic 
 words, "At Vrtra's snorting, thee."' These 
 words are a quotation of the beginning of 
 RV. viii.85.7f, and illustrate the way in 
 which the Vedic stanzas are cited in the 
 secondary literature. 
 
 1O-11. U.f. sas (Indra, this time) avet: 
 " ime ; ime ; hanta ! iman asmin ukthe 
 a bhajai." See v'bhaj+a: the subjunctive 
 has the force of a future. 
 
 SELECTION LXVIII. AB. iii.21. Legend 
 of Indra and the god Ka or Who. Com- 
 pare selection Ixii. and see Miiller, ASL. 432f . 
 The identification of Prajapati with Ka is very 
 common : see, e.g. QB. i.1.1 18 , vii.4.1 M ,xL&4 1 . 
 
 13-14. U.f. vi-jitya, abravit praja- 
 patim: "aham etad asani (636), yad tvam 
 (sc. asi) ; aham mahan asani." 
 
 15. U.f. "yad eva etad avocas." The 
 etad, q.v., goes appositively with yad, mark- 
 ing the thing designated by yad as something 
 preceding, and so may be rendered by 'just' 
 or ' a moment ago.' P. asks, ' " Who am I, 
 then? " "Exactly what thou just saidst,"' 
 replied Indra. 
 
 15-16. ' Then P. became Ka by name = 
 got the name of Ka. (For) P. is Ka by 
 name = has the name Ka.' Note that the 
 predicate cornes first. 
 
 16-17. See yad2. '' As for the fact that 
 Indra became great, therein (lies) Great- 
 Indra's Great-Indra-ness ' (cf. QB. ii.5.4 9 ). 
 This is a specimen of the verbal and ety- 
 mological explanations of the Brahmanas : 
 cf. 64 7 N. 
 
 SELECTION LXIX. QB. ii.2.2 6 . The two 
 kinds of deities, the gods and the Brahmans. 
 A little oratio pro domo of an oft-recur- 
 ring kind (see ISt. x.35). Translated by 
 Muir, i 2 .262 (he quotes TS. i.7.3 1 by way of 
 illustration), and Eggeling, S3E. xii.309. 
 
 18. U.f. devas (predicate) aha eva devas 
 (subject): 'The gods of course are gods.' 
 So martya ha va agre deva asuh, ' In the 
 beginning, the gods were mortals' (not 'The 
 mortals were gods '). Delbriick, Altindische 
 Wortfolge, p. 26. 
 
 18f. ' Then (they) who are the Brahmans, 
 the learned (Vgrul), the scholars (see Vvac 
 -l-anu, and 807), they are the human gods.' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 95. 
 
 2-3. 'For (lit. of) the gods, (the sacrifice 
 is) just the oblations; for the human-gods, 
 the B., the learned, the scholars, (it is) the 
 daksina.' prinati, subject indefinite. 
 
 4. U.f. brahmanan guruvusas, 203. 
 Note the fond repetition, enam, same 
 as subject of prinati.
 
 NOTES TO ) 
 PAGE 95. 4 
 
 [396] 
 
 SELECTION LXX. QB. ii.2.2 19 f. Truth, 
 untruth, and silence. Translated by Del- 
 bruck, Wortfolge, 29,79 ; Eggeling, SEE. xii. 
 312,452. 
 
 6-8. abhi-sincet, 758. ' Of this fire- 
 consecration a (concomitant) duty is TRUTH. 
 He who speaks the truth, as (if) the en- 
 kindled fire, it with ghee he should besprinkle, 
 so he makes it blaze up ; of him greater and 
 greater the dignity becomes; from day to 
 day better he becomes.' Note the childish 
 verbal anticipations and repetitions, esp. of 
 pronouns. 
 
 11-12. U.f . tad u ha api : Eggeling ren- 
 ders all four particles by a simple ' Now.' 
 ' " Thou'rt old (enough). Establish thy two 
 fires."' See VI dha-i-a3. This ceremony was 
 an essential preliminary to matrimony and 
 to setting up in life as a householder. 
 Described at ISt. v.28Sf, x.327f. 
 
 12-14. U.f. sas ha uvaca : " te ma etad 
 brutha : ' vacamyamas eva edhi.' na vai 
 vaditavyam; na vadan jatu, na anrtam 
 vadet. etc." ' He said : " What ye say to 
 me, then, amounts to this : ' Just hold thy 
 peace.' By no means by an ahitagni may 
 untruth be spoken. By not speaking at all, 
 one would not speak untruth. (I.e. Only by 
 silence can one wholly avoid untruth.) To 
 such an extent (of silence, namely), is truth 
 a duty."' See ha end. See ta2. Lit. 
 'Ye, those, to me this are saying.' See 
 tavant2. 
 
 SELECTION LXXL QB.x.4.3 1 f. How the 
 gods got immortality and how Death got his 
 share. Translated, Muir, iv 2 .57f ; in part, 
 v.316f . Cf. iv.54f and v.!2f. Metrical para- 
 phrase by Monier- Williams, Indian Wisdom, 
 34, = Hinduism, 35, = Religious Thought and 
 Life in India, 24. On the symbolism of the 
 Brahmanas, see p. 357, 92; Oldenberg's 
 Buddha, 19(20)f ; Schroeder, ILuC. p. 127f. 
 
 15-18. 'Death (subject) is this thing 
 (esas, predicate, masc. to conform in gen- 
 der with mrtyns cf. 78 20 and N.), what the 
 Year is. For this one, by means of days 
 and nights, exhausteth the life of mortals. 
 So they DIB. Therefore 'tis this one that is 
 called DEATH. The man who knoweth this 
 
 Death to be the Year, not of him doth this 
 one before old age by days and nights ex- 
 haust the life. To perfectly complete dura- 
 tion of life attaineth he.' U.f. sarvam 
 ha eva ayns : cf . 86 U N. 
 
 19. U.f. aynsas antam gacchati, see 
 v'gam3. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 96. 
 
 3-5. U.f. antakat bibhayam cakrus 
 (1071d) yad (see 38%.) etc. ' The gods were 
 afraid of this Ender, Death, the Year, Pra- 
 japati, [hoping] "May this one by days and 
 nights not get at the end of our (no) life." ' 
 Similar construction (yad na and optative) 
 after verb of fearing, QB. iv.3.3 11 . 
 
 5. U.f. te yajnakratun tenure (794e). 
 
 5f. THE SACRIFICES are described by 
 Weber, ISt. x.321f. The Hindus did not 
 class them according to their purpose, as 
 thank-offerings, expiatory offerings, etc. 
 They grouped them 
 
 A. according to the MATERIAL used, as : 
 1. oblations of milk, ghee, corn; 2. animal 
 sacrifices ; 3. libations of Soma. And again 
 
 B. according to the TIME, as : 1. at the 
 beginning (x.328) of each day and of each 
 night (agnihotra) ; 2. at the beg. (x.329) of 
 the lunar half -month; 3. at the beg. (x.337) 
 of the three seasons, spring, rains, autumn ; 
 4. at the beg. (x.343) of the two harvests. 
 The offering of first-fruits or nava-sasya^ 
 isti; in the spring, of barley; in the autumn, 
 of rice; 5. at the beg. (x.344) of the solar 
 half-year, the pagu-bandha ; 6. at the beg. 
 (x.352) of the new year, the Soma-sacrifice. 
 
 With this last, often occurs the elaborate 
 ceremony of building the fire-altar of bricks, 
 ISt. xiii.217-292. This ceremony is called 
 the Tire-piling,' agni-cayana (see v'l ci), or 
 briefly agni. 
 
 Schroder gives in brief compass a sketch 
 of a specimen-sacrifice, ILuC. p. 97-109. 
 
 7. U.f. na amrtatvam ana5ire(788 4 ). te 
 ha api agnim (= agni-cayanam) cikyire 
 (787). That the gods were once mortal' 
 (94 18 N.) is doubtless a late notion. The path 
 of Death is itaro devayanat, 86 4 : cf . also 
 ZDMG. xxxii.300. 
 
 8-9. See Vldha+upa. Ui. yathaidam
 
 [397] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 97. 
 
 (see 2idam) api etarhi eke upa-dadhati : 
 "A polemical hit aimed by the author of 
 the Brahmana at some contemporaries who 
 followed a different ritual from himself." 
 Muir. Cf. Chandogya Upanisad, i.!2.4=; 
 SEE. i.21. -Seeitil. 
 
 1O-11. Ppls w. cerus, see Vcar2 and 1075b. 
 See Vlrudh+ava, desid., 1027. 
 
 11-13. U.f . " na vai upa dhattha : 
 ati va eva ; na va ; tasmat na ." 
 
 13-14. See ha end. See explan. under 
 ta2. See yatha6. 
 
 15-18. The protasis-clauses begin with 
 sastim and sastim and atha lokamprnas: 
 the apodosis-clauses, with atha me and atha 
 amrtas. The second protasis-clause has an 
 appendix, adhi sattringatam, see adhi. 
 For impv. with conditional nig, cf. example 
 under atha2, and 82%. For daga etc., 
 see 480. 
 
 - ' Put ye on 360 P's ; 360 Y's, and 36 be- 
 sides ; then 10,800 L's. Then (if ye do) shall 
 ye etc.' The days of the year number 360 ; 
 and 360 x 30 = 10,800. But see also Weber, 
 ISt. xiii.254-5. Note that 108 = 2 2 X 3 8 . 
 
 18-19. The acquisition of immortality is 
 otherwise related, C, B. ii.2.2 8 f, Muir, ii 3 .372. 
 
 21-23. U.f. "na atas asat (636 3 ) : 
 yada eva harasai (736), etc." See atas3. 
 ' " From this time on, not any other with his 
 body shall be immortal : just when thou this 
 (thy) allotted-portion shalt seize, then parting 
 with his body he shall be immortal, who is 
 to be immortal either by knowledge or by 
 works." ' 
 
 23f . See yad2 end. ' As for their saying 
 that, " Either by knowledge or by works," 
 this is that knowledge, (lit. which is agni=) 
 namely agni; and these are those works, 
 namely agni.' Here agni = agni-cayana. 
 -Cf. 6623. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE O7. 
 
 1-2. U.f. te, ye evam etad vidus, ye va 
 etad karma kurvate, etc. Promises to them 
 " who have this knowledge " recur times un- 
 numbered in the Brahmanas. As between 
 'knowledge' and ' works,' knowledge is the 
 better : C, B. xiv.4.3 24 = SEE. xv.96. On this 
 passage, see Oldenberg, Buddha, 46 = 47. 
 
 4. U.f. te etasya (=mrtyos) eva annam. 
 
 SELECTION LXXII. QB. xii.7.3 1 !. Legend 
 of Indra and Namuci. For the origin of 
 this story, see 81 16 f and notes. Translated, 
 Muir, v.94. Other forms of the story : Muir, 
 iv 2 .261 ; Ludwig, v.145. The MBh. has it at 
 ix.43.33 = 2433f ; see ZDMG. xxxii.311. 
 
 6-7. 'N. stole I's strength etc., along with 
 his sura.' 
 
 7-1O. U.f. sas (Indra) upa^adhavat: 
 "gepanas asmi (see u'gap, as) namucaye, 
 ' na tva na ardrena ; ' atha me idam 
 aharsit. idam me a jihirsatha ? " iti. 
 Note the difference (029, 928) between aharat 
 and aharsit. Note reversal of mg (94 7 N.) 
 effected by a with jihirsatha (1028b): ' " Are 
 ye willing to fetch it back for me ? " ' 
 
 10. " astu nas atra api ; atha a harama : " 
 '"Let there be of us in this also (a share) ; 
 in that case, we'll fetch (it) back." ' 
 
 1O-11. ' " Together ours (is) that ; so 
 fetch it back." Thus said he.' 
 
 11. iti (the one before tau agvinau) = 
 ' on the strength of that agreement.' 
 
 12. a sine an : see Vsic3. 
 
 13. vy-ustayam (VI vas) ratrau, 303b. 
 So an-udite aditye. 
 
 14. V3vas+ud a queer verb to use for 
 this mg. U.f. rsina abhy-anu^uktam 
 "apam phenena" (81 18 ) iti. 
 
 SELECTION LXXIII. Nirukta ii.16. Ex- 
 planation of KV. i.32.10, selection x.xxii., 
 page 70 19 - 20 . See Roth, Erlduterungen, 21f, 
 and Muir, ii 8 .174f. 
 
 15-16. The iti marks anivigamananam 
 as a gloss to the quoted " atisthantinam." 
 So asthavaranam is a gloss to the "ani- 
 vegananam " of the sacred text ; and in like 
 manner, meghas to " gariram." 
 
 16. Starting from the 3d pers. s. pres. 
 ind. act. of a verb-root (e.g. gamnati from 
 V3gam), and treating it as a declinable noun- 
 stem, like mati, the Hindu forms an ablative 
 sing., e.g. gamnates, to express " derivation 
 from a root." Render: 'garira is from the 
 root gr break, or from the root gam harm.' 
 So with draghati and the following two. 
 
 19f. After the verbal explanations, comes 
 the mythological discussion. ' Who then is 
 Vrtra? "A cloud" say the etymologists.
 
 NOTES TO j 
 PAGE 97. ' 
 
 [398] 
 
 "An Asura descended from Tvastar" say 
 the tellers of old legends.' There were, then, 
 already schools of conflicting opinions. Cf . 
 Muir, ii.170f. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 98. 
 
 1. The genitives limit migribhava-, 1316. 
 
 2-3. -karmanas is abl. ' In this pro- 
 cess (tatra), battles, so to speak, take 
 place.' 
 
 3. ahivat etc. : ' The m- and b- (sc. speak 
 of V.) as a dragon.' 
 
 4. VI vr+ni (1045) : subject, Vrtra. 
 
 5. U.f. tadabhivadini esa rk bhavati. 
 
 SELECTION LXXIV. Wedding-customs 
 and the wedding-service. A^valayana Grhya- 
 sutra, book i., chap's 5, 7, 8. Stenzler pub- 
 lished the text in the Abhandlungen fur die 
 Kunde des Morgenlande.s, vol. iii., 1864 ; and 
 the translation, vol. iv., 1865. Cf. Weber, 
 Indische Streifen, ii.296f. The text appeared 
 with a Hindu comment in the Bibliotheca 
 Indica, 1866-69. English translation by 
 Oldenberg.'SBE. xxix.!59f. 
 
 On the subject-matter of this selection, 
 the following essays and books may be con- 
 sulted. The most important is the essay of 
 Haas, with additions by Weber, ISt. v.267- 
 410; cf. esp. the synoptic index, 410-12. 
 Haas gives the text and an annotated trans- 
 lation of our selection at pages 289f, 362f . 
 
 See also notes to selection Iviii., p. 389. 
 Further, Kaegi, 74(102), and notes ; Zimmer, 
 309f ; Kaegi in Fleckeisen's Jahrbucher, 1880, 
 456f ; and Colebrooke's Essays, i.217-38. 
 
 Birth, reproduction, and death are the three 
 great facts of all organic life. It is therefore natural 
 that the customs connected with marriage and burial 
 should take so important a place in the traditions 
 of primitive peoples. It can hardly be doubted that 
 a considerable body of these customs have their root 
 in Indo-European antiquity. For we find, as between 
 the various members of this family, many and most 
 striking coincidences of usage. T^he systematic ex- 
 position and criticism of these coincidences form one 
 of the most interesting chapters of comparative phij- 
 ology. It is not feasible to point them out in detail 
 here. In lieu of this may be cited 
 
 For purposes of comparative study : Joa- 
 chim Marquardt, Privatleben der Homer, i 2 . 
 28f ; A. Rossbach, Die Rdmische Ehe, Stutt- 
 gart, 1853 ; G. F. Schomann, Griechische 
 Alterthumer*, ii.529-36; K. Weinhold, Die 
 
 Deutschen Frauen (Wien, 1851), p.190-274, or 
 Altnordisches Leben (Berlin, 1856), 238-59; 
 Spiegel, Eranische Alterthumskunde, iii. 676-81. 
 
 SYNOPSIS of the subject-matter (with 
 references to passages in vol. v. of the ISt., 
 where Haas and Weber treat of the Hindu 
 customs or cite analogous ones) : 
 
 CHAPTER v. Test of the bride by means 
 of exorcised lumps of earth. See ISt. v.288f. 
 
 CHAP. vii. The marriage ceremony. 
 Dextrarum iunctio (v.277,311). Bride led 
 around the fire and water (v.318N.2, 396N.). 
 Amo 'ham asmi (v.216). Mounting the stone 
 (v.318N.l). Oblation (V.318N.3). Loosing 
 braids (v.320). Seven steps (v.320f, 321x.). 
 
 CHAP. viii. Wedding journey (v.327f). 
 Arrival at new home (v.329). Pellis lanata 
 ( Rossbach, 1 13f , 324 ; Marquardt, 50 ) . Con- 
 tinence (v.325f,331). 
 
 VEDIC CITATIONS. If the entire first pada 
 of a stanza is quoted, the entire stanza is 
 meant. If only part of the first pada of 
 a hymn is quoted, the entire hymn is meant. 
 If more than a complete pada is quoted, then 
 three stanzas are meant. Stenzler, note to 
 AGS. i.20.9. 
 
 SYNOPSIS of RV.-mantras 
 cited at 
 
 98 19 grbhnami te = 89 s 
 
 99' 22 pra tva muncami = 89 7 
 
 99 22 ' The following ' = 89 9 
 
 100 10 pusa tveto = 89 11 
 
 100 U agmanvati (i stanza) = 89 3 
 
 100 12 ' The following ' ( stanza) = 89* 
 
 100 12 jivam rudanti = 88* 
 
 100" ma vidan = 89 18 
 
 100 15 snmangalir = 89 15 
 
 100 15 iha priyam = 89 1T 
 
 100 18 a nah prajam (4 stanzas) = 89 19 
 
 100 19 sam anjantu = 90 8 
 
 6. ' The family (of the intended bride or 
 groom) in the first place one should con- 
 sider, according to the rule, " Who on the 
 mother's and on the father's side, " as 
 aforesaid/ 
 
 The rule referred to is in Afvalayana's 
 Qrauta-sutra, :x.3.20 (p. 714, Bibl. Ind.), and 
 continues thus, 
 
 for ten generations back, are endowed 
 with knowledge, austerity, and works of 
 merit." See Weber's interesting discussion 
 of ancestor-tests, ISt. x.84-8.
 
 [399] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 99. 
 
 8-11. U.f. astau pindan krtva (127 2 ), 
 pindan abhimantrya, kumarim bruyat, 
 "esam ekam grhana" (722J. 'Making 
 eight lumps (of earth), conjuring the lumps 
 with the mantras " rtam dr^yatam," he 
 should say to the girl, " Take one of these." ' 
 Germanic bride-tests cited, ISt. V.288N. 
 
 11-12. U.f. ksetrat ced ubhayatah- 
 sasyat grhmyat, " annavati asyas praja 
 bhavisyati," iti vidyat. 'If she take (the 
 lump made) from the field that bears two 
 crops a year, " Rich in food will her children 
 be," that he may know.' 'Two crops:' cf. 
 Megasthenes, as preserved by Diodorus (ii. 
 35,36) and Strabo (xv.20, p. 693). 
 
 12-15. Most of the remaining seven con- 
 ditional periods are abbreviated to two 
 words : thus gosthat answers to ksetrat and 
 pac_umati to annavati; and the rest is to 
 be supplied from the first period. No's 4, 
 5, and 7 begin respectively with avidasinas, 
 adevanat, and irinat. But patighni is pred- 
 icate to a supplied kumari rather than to 
 praja. 
 
 14. dvi-pravrajim: to be preferred, per- 
 haps, is the reading vipravrajini (\/vraj+vi- 
 pra), 'wandering hither and thither;' but 
 the mg amounts to the same thing. 
 
 16. In order of extent stand dec,a, 
 country,' janapada, 'district,' nagara, 
 'town,' grama, 'village,' kula, 'family.' 
 But at weddings and funerals, village- 
 customs stand first in importance PGS. 
 i.8.11,13 or SEE. xxix.285. On conflicts, cf. 
 Stenzler's note to AGS. i.7.2, and 59 18 N. 
 tan begins new clause. prati^iyat, 616. 
 
 17-21. drsadam agmanam, ' a millstone 
 (which is) stone' (not, e.g. burnt clay). Ap- 
 position, cf. 101 12 . See Vrabh+sam-anv-a : 
 sc. kumaryam, loc. absol. Note how the 
 quoted sacred text has grbhnami, while the 
 later one has grhnlyat: cf. 92 16 N. kama- 
 yita (1043.3), as if of the 1st gen'l conj., 
 instead of kamayeta. So vacayita, 101 2 , 
 106 4 ; kalpayiran, 105 1 . pumansas etc.; 
 tivvaffdai ' ' iroLtlv Ka\ appevoydvovs nal 6rj\v- 
 yAvovs etc., Megasthenes, in Strabo, xv.60, 
 p. 713; also gB. xiv.9.4 14 f or SEE. xv.219f. 
 
 ' To the west of the fire, a millstone 
 setting, to the north-east, a water-jar, while 
 
 she touches him, he, offering, standing facing 
 west, of her, facing east, seated, with RV. x. 
 85.36, the thumb only should grasp, in case 
 he should desire " pumansas jayeran." ' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 99. 
 
 1. pari-nayam : we should read pari-nay- 
 an or (BI.) -an, pres. ppl. ' Leading (her) 
 thrice to the right around the fire and the 
 water-jar. 5 The analogies are remarkable : 
 cf. ^7rt5f{ia, the Roman dextratio, the Gaelic 
 " walking the deasil," etc. Consult SEE. 
 xii.37, 45, 272, 442; Rossbach, 231, 314f: 
 Marquardt, i 2 .51 and N.I. Circumambula- 
 tions followed the course of the sun on 
 occasions of joy; and were reversed (104 21 ) 
 on occasions of sorrow. 
 
 2-3. Pronounce : sa tvam asi ; amo 
 aliam. These interesting formulae occur 
 at AV.xiv.2.71; gB. xiv.9.4 19 ; PGS. i.6.3; 
 AB. viii.27 ; gGS. i.13.4. For pada d, the 
 first three have samaham asmi ; rk tuam. 
 
 The saman is conceived, as male (gB. 
 iv.6.7 11 ), and as sprung from the re (as it is), 
 or as husband of it (gB. viii.1.3 5 ). But to 
 the Hindu mind this lugging in of sama has 
 a charming mystic significance, inasmuch as 
 sa plus ama makes sama (see AB.iii.23; 
 and SBE. i.13). The conception of heaven 
 as male and of earth as female is common 
 see Preller, Gr.. Mythologie*, i.37f . 
 
 The Vedic formula has a general sig- 
 nificance not unlike that of the ancient 
 quando (or ubi) (it Gains ego Gaia and the 
 German Wo ich 'Mann bin, da bist du Frau, 
 und wo du Frau l>ist, da bin ich Mann. For 
 the Latin formula, see Rossbach, p. 351 ; 
 ISt. v.216; Fleckeisen, 1880, p. 457; and 
 esp. the discussion by Marquardt, i 2 .49N.2. 
 For the German, see ISt. v.216. Another 
 use of the Vedic formula, ISt. x.160. 
 
 4-5. ehi, used just like &ye or <ptpe; but 
 cf. the variants noted ISt. v.332*. -If we 
 could read priyau, the metre would be in 
 order (8+8+11+8); but cf. TS. iv.2.5 1 . 
 
 6. Force of repetition ' With each lead- 
 ing-around ' (1260). She mounts the stone 
 or puts her foot on it as a symbol of the 
 way in which she is to put her foot on her 
 enemies.
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 99. 
 
 [400] 
 
 9. U.f. vadhv-afijalau (134 end) upa- 
 stirya (see vstr+upa). The loc. is adjunct 
 of a-vapati as well as of the gerund. 
 
 9-11. The first pouring (upastarana) of 
 ajya and the two strewings of parched grain 
 on the bride's hands, and the second sprin- 
 kling (pratyabhigharana) of ajya, constitute 
 the four portions "cut off" or separated 
 from the havis or sacrificial food. The first 
 is done by the groom ; the rest by the brother. 
 The descendants of Jaraadagni used to "cut 
 off" five such portions (ISt. v.366; x.95) 
 and so had to strew grain three times. 
 Oldenberg's note. esas, refers back. 
 
 ' (The groom) having poured the sacri- 
 ficial butter on the bride's hollowed-and- 
 joined-hands, her brother or brother's repre- 
 sentative strews parched grain (on her hands) 
 twice [Thrice (is the custom) of the Jamad- 
 agnians.], sprinkling again (sc. ajya) over 
 the havis (= what he has left of the grain in 
 the basket) and over the avatta ( = what grain 
 he has strewn on her hands). This (as just 
 stated) is the cutting-off-usage.' 
 
 12-17. ayaksata, 882. pra muncatu 
 (cf.89 9 ), impv., w. lengthening (ISt. v.340s.): 
 so nuclatu, svadatu. These stanzas are 
 mere adaptations of blank forms, so to say. 
 For examples of the changes (called uhas) 
 which circumstances demand, see AB. ii.6.6 ; 
 cf. AGS. iii.8.7. The forms are filled out 
 (see nigama in BR.) with a deity-name, 
 which, as here, does not always fit the metre. 
 
 18. ' With the above mantras (uttered 
 by the groom), she, not-parting (fern.) her 
 joined-hands, should offer (the grain in 
 them), as with a srnc.' The nose of the 
 sruc is at the side. She is therefore to pour 
 out the grain so, not over her finger-tips. 
 
 For the case of families who do not 
 strew grain but twice, we must assume that 
 the bride, when making her second oblation, 
 does not offer all the grain in her joined- 
 hands, but leaves some for her third oblation. 
 Her fourth is from the basket. 
 
 18-19 ( 14). 'Without (any) leading 
 around (on the part of the groom), (the 
 bride should offer grain) with the nose of 
 the basket towards herself in silence the 
 fourth time ' The "silence" refers of course 
 
 to the groom. The bride does not say any 
 thing at any time (cf. SBE. xxix.37). 
 
 As prescribed above, the rites are per- 
 formed in the order following : 
 
 I. II. First and second rounds : 
 
 a. leading around, 6; 
 
 b. mounting stone, 7; 
 
 c. strewing grain, 8; 
 
 d. oblation w. mantra 1 or 2, 13. 
 HI. Third round : 
 
 a. leading around; 
 6. mounting stone: 
 
 c. sprinkling ajya, 10; 
 
 d. oblation w. mantra 3, 13. 
 IV. Fourth time : 
 
 a, b, and c fall out; 
 d. oblation in silence. 
 
 19-2O. U.f. a^upya a^upya (127 end) 
 ha (see ha) eke etc. ' Some lead her around 
 after each strewing (of) the grain. In this 
 way (tatha) the last two oblations do not 
 fall together.' That is, some do the rites in 
 the order: 
 
 c. strewing or sprinkling; 
 
 d. oblation w. mantra; 
 
 a. leading around ; 
 
 b. mounting stone. 
 
 In this way, the fourth oblation comes directly 
 after the third mounting of the stone. 
 
 2O-21. asyai, 365.3. 'Then he loosens 
 her two braids, if they are made ; (i.e. if) 
 two braids of wool at her two temples are 
 tied.' 
 
 22. He loosens the right one with RV. 
 x.85.24. uttaram (sc. gikham) uttaraya 
 (sc. rca) : see uttaraS, 4. 
 
 23. The AB. at i.!4.5f tells why the NE. 
 is called a-parajita. See also A. Kuhn, 
 Entwicklungs-stufen der mythenbildung,Abh. der 
 Berliner Akad., 1873, p. 126f. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 1OO. 
 
 1-3. U.f. ise ekapadi (sc. bhava), etc., 
 ' be taking one step for strength = take one 
 step for strength ; two for vigor ; ' and so on. 
 The body consists of five elements. At 
 one period, the seasons are reckoned as 
 six : gigira, vasantd, grisma, varsa, garad, 
 hemanta. 
 
 4. See saptapada in vocab. Seven, as a 
 sacred number, became the symbol for 
 ' many ' or ' all.' Doubtless the word always 
 suggested both the literal and the trans- 
 ferred mgs. Orig., sakha saptapado bhava.
 
 [401] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 101. 
 
 Be a constant friend,' was a mere general 
 formula, used on sealing a friendship, e.g. 
 between two men, who would take seven 
 steps together hand in hand by way of rati- 
 fying their bond. Saptapadam maitram, 
 'Friendship (if genuine) is constant,' be- 
 came a common proverb. 
 
 The application of the formula to the 
 wedding-ceremony is prob. only a secondary 
 and special use ; although it came to be 
 exceedingly important. Here saptapadi 
 being taken with strict literalness, it became 
 necessary to lead up to it by six other 
 formulae as in the text. The matter is 
 explained at length and illustrated, by Haas 
 and Weber, ISt. v.320-22 : cf. BE. s.v. 
 saptapada; and AV. v.11.10. 
 
 6. The two gerunds seem to go with the 
 subject of abhy-ut-kramayati, i.e. the groom. 
 
 8. vaset : subject, the bride. sapta 
 rain, l'2~' 2 . See iti 3. 
 
 8-9. dhruvam, as symbol of fixity and 
 constancy (see PGS. i.8.19 and QGS. i.17.3). 
 For the legend of Dhruva's translation to 
 the skies, see Visnu Purana, book i, chap. 12. 
 arundhatim : cited, with many other ex- 
 amples of faithful and happy wifehood, at 
 MBh. i.199.6 = 7352 and v.117.11 = 3970; cf. 
 also ISt. v.195. There was a superstition 
 that one whose life was near its close could 
 not see these stars (ISt. v.325: Indische 
 Spriiche, 2d ed., no. 2815). rain: here, as 
 so often, the heavenly lights are the souls of 
 pious sages and saints departed see note 
 to 91 12 . The bride has nothing to say 
 during the ceremony, and keeps silence after 
 it until (cf. 103 20 ) starlight. 
 
 1O. U.f. prayane (loc.303b), the wedding- 
 journey, from the bride's village to the 
 groom's. See ISt. v.327f. 
 
 11-12. Rules 2 and 3 are for the case 
 that they have to cross a stream. 
 
 12. rudatyam, ' if she weeps,' loc. abs. 
 
 13. So in Rome a boy went ahead with a 
 nuptial torch. Cf. Rossbach, 362-3. 
 
 14-15. ' At every dwelling ' as the wed- 
 ding-train passes it. The procession called 
 out eager gazers then, as now. Indeed, to 
 judge from AV. xiv.2.73, even the Manes 
 were supposed to crowd about for a look ;it 
 
 the bride (ISt.v.277). -U.f. iti iksakan 
 ikseta. 
 
 17. U.f. anaduham carma a-stirya : com- 
 pare the pellis lanata (Rossbach, 112, 324). 
 tasminn = carmani. The two foil, words 
 are loc's s. fern., supply kumaryam (303b). 
 
 18-19. catasrbhis, sc. rgbhis. 
 
 19-20. dadhnaa (431) etc.: 'Partaking 
 of curds, he should offer (them) in turn (to 
 her) ; or, with the rest of the ajya, he anoints 
 (anakti, Vafij) his and her heart.' hrdaye: 
 better as dual, on account of the nau (dual, 
 90 8 ) in the stanza which accompanies the 
 action. 
 
 2O-21. See urdhvam. brahma-cari- 
 nau: see ISt. V.326N.3, 331. -U.f. alam- 
 kurvanau, 714. 
 
 22. Counting of time by nights : see Kae- 
 gi, N.68* and citations, and Zimmer, p. 360. 
 'Or, " (They should be continent) a year," 
 (say) some : a Rishi is born in this way 
 (iti).' ' In this way' = 'on condition and as 
 reward of such self-restraint.' 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 1O1. 
 
 1. Marital intercourse is declared by Apa- 
 stamba to be a duty resting on the authority 
 of Holy Writ (brahmana-vacanac ca sam- 
 veganam, ii.l.!9 = SBE. ii.101). The Scrip- 
 ture-passage, ace. to BUhler, is TS. ii.5.1 5 , 
 kamam a vijanitoh sam bhavama, 'Let us 
 have intercourse after our heart's desire till 
 a child be begotten.' Explicit is Baudhayaha, 
 iv.1.17 = SEE. xiv.315 ; MBh. xii.21.12 = 626. 
 Cf. Ludwig, v.549 (N. to RV. i.179.2), and iv. 
 315 : also Exodus xxi.lOf, and I Cor. vii.3. 
 
 2. See Vvac, caus.: form, cf. 98 20 N. 
 
 SELECTION LXXV. The customs and 
 ritual of cremation and burial. Acvalayana 
 Grhya-sutra, b'k iv., chap's 1-6. Text and 
 translations as at the beginning of intro- 
 duction to selection Ixxiv. Roth compares 
 the ceremonies here described with those 
 implied by the text of RV. x.18 in his essay, 
 die Todtenbestattung im indischen Alterthitm, 
 ZDMG. viii.467-76, reprinted in part by Zim- 
 mer, p. 404f. The same subject is treated 
 at length by Max Miiller, ZDMG. ix.p.I- 
 LXXXII. We may mention also Colebrooke's
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 1O1. 
 
 [402] 
 
 Essays, i. 172-95; the papers of Wilson and 
 of Rajendralala Mitra, cited above, p. 382f ; 
 and especially Monier- Williams, in Religious 
 Thought and Life in India, chap, xi., Death, 
 Funeral Rites, and Ancestor-worship, and in 
 Ind. Ant. v.27. Cf. also in general the intro- 
 duction to selection liii., p. 382f. 
 
 The ceremonies in question have three 
 main parts : the cremation ; the gathering 
 and burial of the bones ; and the expiation. 
 These are followed by the graddha, de- 
 scribed at AGS. iv.7, SEE. xxix.250f, 106f. 
 
 
 SYNOPSIS of RV.-mantras 
 
 
 
 cited at 
 
 
 1021 
 
 apeta vita = 
 
 8315 
 
 102 7 
 
 ud irsva nari = 
 
 86 i8 
 
 102 8 
 
 dhanur hastad = 
 
 86 2 ^ 
 
 1022) 
 
 agner varma = 
 
 8416 
 
 10221 
 
 ati drava = 
 
 83" 
 
 103 1 
 
 imam agne 
 
 84i 8 
 
 10312 
 
 prehi prehi 
 
 83U 
 
 
 and 23 others, see note 
 
 
 103" 
 
 ime jiva = 
 
 86 8 
 
 104" 
 
 gitike = 
 
 85W 
 
 104i* 
 
 upa sarpa = 
 
 872 
 
 1041 5 
 
 'The following* = 
 
 87* 
 
 10415 
 
 'The following' = 
 
 87 6 
 
 104 16 
 
 ut te stabhnami = 
 
 87 8 
 
 1042) 
 
 kravyadam (i stanza) = 
 
 84-20 
 
 105 5 
 
 ihaivayam ( \ stanza) ' = 
 
 85i 
 
 105 9 
 
 tantum tanvan = 
 
 89i 
 
 105" 
 
 a rohataynr = 
 
 86" 
 
 10512 
 
 imam jivebhyah = 
 
 86io 
 
 105" 
 
 par am mrtyo (4 stanzas) = 
 
 86* 
 
 105 15 
 
 yathahani 
 
 8612 
 
 105" 
 
 ima narir = 
 
 86i 6 
 
 10518 
 
 agmanvati = 
 
 S9 3 
 
 105^1 
 
 apo hi stha (3 stanzas) = 
 
 83i 
 
 105 2 i 
 
 parime gam = 
 
 91" 
 
 108* 
 
 ' Sun-hymns,' see note 
 
 
 106 
 
 ' Blessings,' see note 
 
 
 1063 
 
 apa nah (8 stanzas) = 
 
 72" 
 
 For purposes of comparative study 
 (cf. p. 398) we cite : Joachim Marquardt, 
 Privatleben der Romer, i 2 .340f; Schomann, 
 Griechische Atterthumer 2 , ii.539f; K. Wein- 
 hold, Altnordisches Leben (1856), 474-504; 
 the same author's Heidnische Todtenbestattunrj 
 in Deutschland (with illustrations), Sitzungs- 
 berichte der Wiener Akad., 1858, 1859 ; Spiegel, 
 Erdnische Alterthumskunde, iii. 701-6 ; Geiger, 
 Civilization of the Eastern Iranians, i.84f ; and 
 finally the masterly essay of J. Grimm, Ue- 
 ber das Verbrennen der Leichen, Abh. der Berlin- 
 er Akad., 1849, p. 191f = Kleinere Schriften, ii. 
 
 21 If, who treats of the custom among almost 
 all peoples of Indo-European stock. See p. 
 230 = 261f for the custom among our Anglo- 
 Saxon forefathers, a remembrance of which 
 lives in the modern English Bale-Jire. Cre- 
 mation is common throughout the MBh. 
 Holtzmann, Ac/ni, p. 10. 
 
 3-4. Protasis, ced upa-tapet ; apodosis, 
 ud-ava-syet (ssa). 
 
 5. enam, the sick householder. 
 
 6. U.f. paguna istya istva (v'yaj), 
 ava-syet. See Stenzler's note to 4. See 
 vstha + sam. 
 
 7-8. The quarter and the slope are in 
 general to the south, the region of the dead 
 (cf. QB. i.2.5"). 
 
 9. ity eke, see iti 2c. tavad-ayamam 
 (sc. khatam syat), ' tlie trench should be 
 having so much length.' 
 
 10. vitasty-avak, ' span-deep ' : or, for 
 vitasti-matram avak. ' On all sides, the 
 gm- should be an open space.' 
 
 11. '"But thorn-plants and milk-plants " 
 as aforesaid' [viz. at AGS. ii.7.5, "he should 
 dig out with their roots and remove them "]. 
 Cf . 98%. 
 
 12. gm- is both a burning-ground and a 
 burial ground : here, the former, as is shown 
 by adahanasya. For a similar definitive 
 apposition, cf. 98". 
 
 13. ' This has been stated above ' at 
 Qrauta-sutra, vi.10.2, given in Stenzler's note. 
 
 14. Rule 17, sc. 'should be." 
 
 16. etam dicam, ' to that quarter,' men- 
 tioned 101 7 . 
 
 16-18. Rules 2-7 : nayanti may be re- 
 peated w. the accusatives. Rule 2, cf. 104 9 . 
 
 20. The cord is usually worn over the 
 shoulder; cf. Stenzler's note to AGS. iv.2.9. 
 On returning (103 2 i), the order of march 
 is reversed. 
 
 21. evam, in the order named. karta, 
 subject of pra^uksati, next line. pra- 
 savyam, cf. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 1O2. 
 
 2-3. The oblation-fire, the householder's 
 
 fire, and the southern fire are the three 
 
 sacred fires which are to be started and 
 
 maintained in every family. Here they are
 
 [403] 
 
 NOTES TO 
 PAGE 1O3. 
 
 set respectively in the SE., NW., and SW. 
 parts of the sacred place. 
 
 3-4. enam, ' for him,' i.e. the dead man 
 (Oldenberg), or the conductor of the cere- 
 mony (see Stenzler). This second accusative 
 with (idhmacitim) cinoti is strange. 
 
 4-6. The first tasmin, masc., refers to 
 -citim, fern. ! ; the second, neuter, to -ajinam. 
 'On it they set the dead man, carrying 
 (hrtva) him to the north of the g-, with his 
 head towards the a-.' 
 
 6. 'To the north (of the corpse) they set 
 the wife ; and a bow for a Ksatriya.' 
 
 7-8. U.f. tarn (= patnim) ut-thapayet 
 va, " ud irsva nari etc." See 86 18 N. 
 
 8. ' The conductor of the ceremony should 
 repeat (the stanza) in case of a Qiidra (=in 
 case a Q. raises her up from the pile).' 
 
 9. dhanus, sc. apa-nayet. Rule 21 = 
 exactly ' Ditto in case of a Qudra.' 
 
 9-1O. ' Having strung it, without (= be- 
 fore) piling the pile (of things mentioned 
 below), breaking (VI gr) it, he should throw 
 it on the fuel-pile.' 
 
 11 f. Miiller gives pictures of these various 
 implements, ZDMG. ix.p.VIIf, LXXVIIIf. 
 
 14. bhittva ca ekam, 'and breaking (it 
 in two pieces, in case there is only) one 
 (sruva).' 
 
 18. asec-, sc. patrani. See VI pr. 
 putras, the dead man's. 
 
 19. : And the metallic ware (and) pottery.' 
 21-22. U.f. vrkkau (134 end) ud-dhrtya 
 
 (VI hr). daksine (sc. panau) daksinam 
 (sc. vrkkam a-dadhyat), etc. 
 
 22-23. ' " And two meal-cakes," (say) 
 some [, he should put on the hands of the 
 corpse]. "(Only) in the absence of the 
 kidneys," (say) others.' sarvam, sc. 
 anustaranim. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 1O3. 
 
 1-2. See Vmantraya+anu : 'accompanies 
 the fetching w. the stanza " imam etc." ' 
 
 2-4. U.f. janu a^acya, juhuyat, 
 " agnaye svaha etc." pancamim (sc. 
 ajya^ahutim juhuyat) urasi pretasya 
 
 1-5. U.f. " asmat (accent,- asmat, 74 9 N.) 
 vai (see vai) tvat adhi (see adhi) 
 jayatam," a metrical mantra, substantially 
 
 identical with VS. xxxv.22. asau, voc., 
 ' O so-and-so.' 
 
 6. See V2is+pra3. 
 
 6-8. ' If the ah- should reach v the corpse) 
 first, " In the heaven-world it has reached 
 him" this may one know. Happy will 
 that one be in that world : so (will) this one, 
 that is, the son, in this (world).' U.f. 
 ratsyati (v'radh) asau amutra : evam ay am 
 asmin, iti putras. The last iti marks 
 putras as an explanation of ayam. 
 
 8-11. Rules 3-4 are counterparts of 2. 
 
 11-12. Rule 5 : loc. = ' in case of.' 
 rddhim vadanti, see Vvad3. "The higher 
 the smoke of the pyre rises, the more dis- 
 tinguished will the departed be in the other 
 world." Weinhold, Altnord. Leben, 480-1. 
 
 12. tarn, like sas (line 13) and esas (16), 
 refers to the departed. 
 
 12-13. iti samanam, ' with the man- 
 tras "prehi prehi etc." in the same way' 
 as indicated, namely, in the Qrauta-sutra, at 
 vi. 10.19-20 (p. 505-6), i.e. with the 24 stan- 
 zas there enumerated. They are RV. x.14. 
 7,8,10,11; x.16.1-6; x.17.3-6; x.18.10-13; 
 x.154.1-5 ; and x.14.12. The text of all these 
 stanzas is given in the RV. order in the 
 Reader, pages 83-91. 
 
 14. svargam lokam: note the fine dis- 
 tinction between this and the later svarga- 
 lokam (as cpd). The old two-word form is 
 used in lines 14 and 16, as virtual quotations 
 from an older text ; and above, at line 5, a 
 quoted mantra ; but the cpd is used in the 
 Sutra proper, line 7. Cf. 92 18 N. 
 
 15. U.f. avakam, gipalam iti (marks gi- 
 as a gloss to avakam) ava-dhapayet. tatas 
 (= gartat) ha (see ha) vai etc. 
 
 17. With regard to the pertinence of the 
 mantra, see Roth, ZDMG. viii.472, 468. - 
 savyavrtas, cf. 99 J N. 
 
 18-20. The end of each clause is marked 
 by a gerund. U.f. udakam a-vahat 
 un-majjya, grhitva, ut-tirya, enani 
 (= vasansi, i.e. the ones they had on before 
 changing) a-pidya, asate. See a4. 
 Similarly, the bride keeps silence till star- 
 light, 100%. 
 
 See naman2. Each of the relatives, 
 facing southward, performs the lustration,
 
 NOTES TO / 
 PAGE 1O3. > 
 
 [404] 
 
 saying to the departed, " O thou of the family 
 of the Kayyapans, O Devadatta, this water is 
 for thee " (kagyapagotra, devadatta, etat 
 te udakam). Scholiast. 
 
 21. 'Or, while (a bit) of the sun is (still) 
 seen, they may go home.' Rule 12: cf. 
 
 101 2 N. 
 
 22. U.f. prapya agaram, a-ksatan, 
 tilan, apas etc. 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 1O4. 
 
 1. More fully, kritena va, utpannena va 
 (sc. annena) : see Vpad+ud. 
 
 3f. Render the locatives by ' in case of,' 
 i.e. here 'in case of the death of.' dana_ 
 adhyayane, ace. dual n., 1253a. 
 
 8. See urdhvam. 'Tenth' (see daaini) 
 counting from the day of death, 
 krsnapaksasya ayujasu, sc. tithisu. See 
 eka-naksatra. Of the 28 lunar mansions, 
 six form three pairs, named 'former' and 
 Matter' Phalguni (9-10), Asadha (18-19), 
 and Bhadrapada (24-25). Accordingly, 
 under these asterisms, or in the lunar months 
 named after them, the gathering is forbidden. 
 
 See Whitney, OLSt. ii.351f, 360. But cf. 
 Weber, Abh. dcr Berliner Akad., 1861, p. 322. 
 
 9. ' In a plain male urn (they put) a man 
 (i.e. his bones); in a plain female (urn sc. 
 kumbhyam), a woman.' If the urn has pro- 
 tuberances on it, like a woman's breasts, it 
 is regarded as a female urn. Many such 
 have been found by Schliemann see his 
 Ilios, numbers 986, 988-93. A male urn is 
 one without these breasts. 
 
 9-10. 3, cf. 101 17 . -prasavyam, 99 1 *. 
 
 11-12. U.f. angustha_upakanisthika- 
 bhyam (cf. 105 lfi ) ekaikam asthi a- etc. 
 Even the Brahmanas give evidence of a well- 
 developed body of popular beliefs about 
 the fingers: cf. C.B. iii.1.3 25 ; iii.S^ 2 - 18 ^ and 
 Eggeling's Index, SBE. xxvi.461, s.v. fingers. 
 See the beautiful essay of W. Grimm, Ueber 
 die bedeutung der deutschen Jingernamen, Klein- 
 ere Schriften, iii.425 50. 
 
 But with the finger next the little one is 
 associated -now something mysterious, now 
 something uncanny (as here) : this appears 
 from the fact that it is the ' nameless ' one 
 
 not only in Sanskrit (a-namika), but also 
 with Tibetans, Chinese, Mongols, Lithua- 
 nians, Finns, and North American Indians. 
 See Grimm, I.e. 441-47 ; and 91 2 x. 
 
 13. The scholiast takes pavana as a 
 ' winnowing-basket ' used to sift out the 
 small bones yet remaining among the ashes, 
 and not picked up by hand. Is it not rather 
 a 'fan to blow the ashes from the carefully 
 gathered bones in the urn ' ? 
 
 13-14. U.f. yatra na abhi-syanderan, 
 anyas varsabhyas s tatra (sc. kumbham) 
 ava-dadhyus. ' Whereunto from all sides 
 no water other than rain would flow.' 
 
 15-16. Rule 8: uttaraya (sc. rca) = RV 
 x.!8.11 = 87 4 . -ava-kiret, \3kr. -Rule 9 
 uttaram (=RV. x. 18.12 = 87 6 ), sc. japet. 
 
 16-17- U.f. kapalena (sc. kumbham) 
 api-dhaya, atha an-aveksam praty-a- 
 vrajya, apas etc. asmai, the deceased. 
 
 18. See v'lmr-i-abhi. For the force of 
 the prefix, cf. what was said by a little 
 newsboy, a*s reported by my colleague, 
 Professor Lane, " My mother died on me and 
 my father runned away." See \'2ksi-fapa. 
 
 19. U.f. pura udayat. 
 
 2O-22. tam = agnim. ny-upya, \2vap. 
 See under yatra. prasavyam: the left 
 is associated with evil or sorrow (see 99 ] N.); 
 cf. Latin laevum omen or numen. U.f. 
 savyan urun a-ghnanas (637). 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE lOo. 
 
 1. upa-kalpayiran (for -yeran, see 98' 20 x.), 
 'they should provide': the verb has 11 
 objects (lines 1 to 4). 
 
 2-3. U.f. c,amimayyau arani. A legend 
 explaining why the sacred fire is made with 
 sticks of garni (see this) is given at MBh. 
 ix. 47.14 = 2741 f. 
 
 4-5. agni-velayam, 'at the time of the 
 (evening) agnihotra': cf . 96 5 N. 
 
 6. U.f. asate etc., similarly 103' 20 . 
 
 7. U.f. itihasa-purana ni iti (see iti3) 
 a-khyapayamanas (1042d). Story-telling 
 followed the cremation in Germanic anti- 
 quity also cf. Weinhold, Altnord. Leben, 
 482, and the very end of the Beowulf. 
 
 7-1O. 'When sounds are hushed (s'ram)
 
 [405] 
 
 ( NOTES TO 
 j PAGE 1O6. 
 
 or when (the others) have gone home or to 
 bed, starting (pra-kramya) from the south 
 side of the door, a continuous water-stream 
 (the conductor of the ceremony) should 
 offer, with the words " ," (going round) 
 to the north (side of the door u.f. iti a 
 uttarasmat).' 
 
 1O-12. Rule 8: cf. 100 16 f. 
 
 13-15. uttaratas, with agnes. U.f. 
 amatyan ikseta. 
 
 17. U.f. aksini (343f) a^ajya (Vanj) 
 paracyas (407 3 ) vi-srjeyus (so. tarunakani). 
 
 18. anjanas (sc. yuvatis) ikseta (subject, 
 'the conductor,' karta). 
 
 19-22. 'Then, standing off (ava-sthaya) 
 in the NE., while (the others) circumambu- 
 late (pari-kramatsu) with fire, and bull's 
 dung, and a continuous water-stream, with 
 the trca " apo hi stha etc.," he should re- 
 peat " parime gam etc." ' ud-a-haranti, 
 compare 101 4 . 
 
 NOTES TO PAGE 1O6. 
 
 1. U.f. yatra abhi-ransyamanas (vram, 
 939) bhavanti, 'where they are about (=: 
 intending) to tarry ' : not so well the vocab. 
 See ahata. Respecting the Hindu washer- 
 man, his work, and tools, see G. A. Grierson, 
 Bihar Peasant Life (Triibner, 1885), p. 81 f. 
 
 2. U.f. a udayat. udite etc. 
 
 3. The scholiast to AGS. ii.3 end, enu- 
 merates the "Sun-hymns" and the "Bless- 
 ings." The "Sun-hymns" are RV. x.158; 
 i.50.1-9; i.115; and x.37. The "Blessings" 
 are RV. i.89; v.51. 11-15; and x.63. Cf. 
 SBE. xxix.114. Of all these, only the second 
 is given in the Reader see Preface, page v, 
 note 4. 
 
 3-4. U.f. annam samskrtya (1087d), 
 "apa nas gogucat agham" (= RV. i.97 = 
 72 8 f ) iti pr- hutva. Cf . Preface, p. v, N.4. 
 
 4-5. vacayita (see Vvac, cans.) : we 
 should expect -yeta cf. 98 20 N. 
 
 POSTSCRIPT. 
 
 Not without grave misgivings can a Vedic commentary be put forth. The hard places 
 are very hard. Nevertheless, an unsatisfactory bit of exegesis may .be a valuable 
 approximation to the truth or may even suggest the correct solution of a difficulty. 
 
 Inasmuch as Professor Whitney has been so kind as to look over the manuscript of 
 the Notes, it ought to be said that there are various things in the Vedic part of the work 
 of which he does not approve. 
 
 The earliest English version of the Fables of Bidpai, The Morall Philosophic of Doni t 
 by Sir Thomas North (see above, p. 313), has just been reprinted, with a valuable intro- 
 duction by Joseph Jacobs, and published by David Nutt, London, 1888. 
 
 The second edition of Whitney's Grammar may soon be looked for. The section- 
 numbers are substantially unchanged ; but the subsections are marked with a, b, c, etc. 
 The references in the Notes (see p. 289, above) are to the first edition of the Grammar. 
 Users of the second edition will often have to seek, e.g., 844 2 under 844a, 371 12 under 
 371k, and the like. 
 
 In addition to the lexicons mentioned above, page xviii, there has recently appeared a 
 Sanskrit -Worterbuch nach den Petersburyer \Vorterbuchern bearbeitet von Carl Cappeller 
 (Strassburg, Karl J. Triibner. 1887. Royal 8, pages 541. Price 15 Mark). This is so 
 excellent, cheap, and convenient as to deserve the warmest commendation. An English 
 version is in progress. 
 
 C. B L. 
 
 Hoi. i. is HALL, HARVARD COLLEGE, 
 
 CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
 
 August, 1S83.
 
 HARVARD ORIENTAL SERIES 
 
 Harvard Oriental Series. Edited, with the cooperation of various scholars, by Cn ARLKS 
 ROCKWELL LANMAN, A.B. and LL.D. (Yale), LL.D. (Aberdeen), Wales Professor of 
 Sanskrit at Harvard University; Honorary Member of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, 
 the Socie'te" Asiatique, the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, and 
 the Deutsche Morgenlandische Gesellschaft ; Member of the American Philosophical 
 Society ; Fellow of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences ; Foreign Member of 
 the Royal Bohemian Society of Sciences; Honorary Correspondent of the Archaeological 
 Department of the Government of India ; Corresponding Member of the Institute of 
 Bologna, of the Royal Society of Sciences at Gottingen, of the Imperial Russian Academy 
 of Sciences, and of the Institute of France (Acade"mie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres). 
 
 Published by Harvard University, Cambridge, Massachusetts, U. S. A. To be bought, in 
 America, of GINN & COMPANY, 29 Beacon Street, Boston, Mass. ; in England, of 
 GINN & Co., 9 St. Martin's Street, Leicester Square, London, W.C. ; in Continental 
 Europe, of O. Harrassowitz, Leipzig. The price of volume 3 is fl.20 ; the price of 
 each of the volumes 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 9, and 11 to 17 is $1.50. Price of volumes 7 and 8 (not 
 sold separately) is $5. Price of volume 10 is $6. All these, post-paid. One dollar 
 (fl.OO) = Marks 4-18 = francs or lire 5.15 = 4 shillings and 1 penny = 3 rupees. 
 Volume 10 is royal 4 (32 cm.) ; volumes 7 and 8 are super-royal 8 (28 cm.); the 
 rest are royal 8 (26 cm.). A\l are now bound durably in full buckram with gilt top. 
 
 Volume 1. Jataka-Mala, by Arya Ciira. Edited in Sanskrit (Nagari letters) by Pro- 
 fessor H. KERN, University of Leiden, Netherlands. 1891. Pages, 270. (North 
 Buddhistic stories. Translated by Speyer, London, 1895, Frowde.) 
 
 Volume 2. Sankhya-Pravachana-Bhashya, or Commentary on the exposition of the 
 Sankhya philosophy, by Vijiiana-Bhikshu. Edited in Sanskrit (Roman letters) 
 by Professor R. GARBK, University of Tubingen, Germany. 1895. Pages, 210. 
 (Translated by Garbe, Leipzig, 1889, Brockhaus.) 
 
 Volume 3. Buddhism in Translations. By the late HENRY CLARKE WARREN, of 
 Cambridge, Mass. 1896. Fifth issue, 1909. Pages, 540. (Over 100 extracts 
 from the sacred books of Buddhism, so arranged as to give a connected account 
 of the legendary life of Buddha, of his monastic order, of his doctrines on karma 
 and rebirth, and of his scheme of salvation. The work has been widely circulated 
 and has been highly praised by competent authorities.) 
 
 Volume 4. Karpura-Manjari. A drama by the Indian poet Rajagekhara (900 A.D.). 
 Critically edited in the original Prakrit (Nagari letters), with a glossarial index 
 and an essay on the life and writings of the poet, by STEN KONOW, of the University 
 of Christiania, Norway; and translated into English with notes by C. R. LANMAN. 
 1901. Pages, 318. 
 
 Volumes 5 and 6. Brihad-Devata (attributed to Caunaka), a summary of the deities and 
 myths of the Rig-Veda. Critically edited in the original Sanskrit (Nagari letters) 
 with an introduction and seven appendices (volume 5), and translated into English 
 with critical and illustrative notes (volume 6), by Professor A. A. MACDONELL, 
 University of Oxford. 1904. Pages, 234 + 350 = 584. 
 
 1
 
 Volumes 7 and 8, Atharva-Veda. Translated, with a critical and exegetical com- 
 mentary, by the late Professor W. I). WIIITNKY, of Yale University; revised and 
 brought nearer to completion and edited by C. R. LANMAN. 1905. Pages, 1212. 
 (The work includes critical notes on the text, with various readings of European 
 and Hindu mss. ; readings of the Kashmirian version ; notices of corresponding 
 passages in the other Vedas, with report of variants ; data of the scholiasts as to 
 authorship and divinity and meter of each verse ; extracts from the ancillary litera- 
 ture concerning ritual and exegesis ; literal translation ; elaborate critical and his- 
 torical introduction.) 
 
 Volume 9. The Little Clay Cart (Mrcchakatika), a Hindu drama attributed to King 
 Shudraka. Translated from the original Sanskrit and Prakrits into English prose 
 and verse by A. W. RYDKK, Instructor in Sanskrit in Harvard University. 1905. 
 Pages, 207. 
 
 Volume 10. Vedic Concordance : being an alphabetic index to every line of every stanza 
 of the published Vedic literature and to the liturgical formulas thereof, that is, an 
 index to the Vedic mantras, together with an account of their variations in the 
 different Vedic books. By Professor MAURICE BLOOMFIELD, of the Johns Hopkins 
 University, Baltimore. 1906. Pages, 1102. 
 
 Volume 11. The Panchatantra : a collection of ancient Hindu tales, in the recension 
 (called Panchakhyanaka, and dated 1199 A.D.) of the Jaina monk, PQrnabhadra, 
 critically edited in the original Sanskrit (Nagarl letters) by DR. JOHANNES HERTEL, 
 Professor am koniglichen Realgymnasium, Doebeln, Saxony. 1908. Pages, 344. 
 
 Volume 12. The Panchatantra-text of Purnabhadra : critical introduction and list of 
 variants. By Professor HERTEL. 1912. Pages, 245. (Includes an index of 
 stanzas.) 
 
 Volume 13. The Panchatantra-text of Purnabhadra, and its relation to texts of allied 
 recensions as shown in Parallel Specimens. By Professor HERTEL. 1912. (Nine- 
 teen sheets, mounted on guards and issued in atlas-form. They give, in parallel 
 columns, four typical specimens of the text of Purnabhadra's Pauchatantra, in order 
 to show the genetic relations in which the Sanskrit recensions of the Panchatantra 
 stand to one another, and the value of the manuscripts of the single recensions.) 
 
 Volume 14. The Panchatantra : a collection of ancient Hindu tales, in its oldest recen- 
 sion, the Kashmirian, entitled Tantrakhyayika. Sanskrit text, reprinted from the 
 critical editio major by Professor HERTEL. Editio minor. AVith a brief history 
 of the Panchatantra. (In Press.) 
 
 Volume 15. Bharavi's poem Kiratarjumya or Arjuna's combat with the Kirata. Trans- 
 lated from the original Sanskrit into German and explained by CARL CAPPELLER, 
 Professor at the University of Jena. 1912. Pages, 231. (Introduction, notes, 
 and various other useful additions.) 
 
 Volume 16. The Cakuntall, a Hindu drama by Kalidasa : the Bengali recension criti- 
 cally edited in the original Sanskrit and Prakrits by RICHARD PISCHEL, late Pro- 
 fessor of Sanskrit at the University of Berlin. (Nearly ready.) 
 
 Volume 17. The Yoga-system of Patanjali, or the ancient Hindu doctrine of concentra- 
 tion of mind : being the Mnemonic rules (Yoga-sutras) of Patanjali, the Comment 
 (Bhashya) attributed to Vyasa, and the Explanation (Vyakhya) of Vachaspati- 
 Mic.ra : translated from the original Sanskrit by Dr. JAMES HAUGHTON WOODS, 
 Assistant Professor of Philosophy at Harvard University. (Nearly ready.) 
 
 2
 
 Books for the Study of Indo- Iranian Languages 
 (Sanskrit, Prakrit, Pali, Avestan) 
 
 Literatures, Religions, and Antiquities 
 Published by Messrs. Ginn & Company 
 
 Boston, New York, Chicago, and London 
 
 Whitney's Sanskrit Grammar. A Sanskrit Grammar, including 
 both the classical language, and the older dialects, of Veda and Brahmaha. By 
 WILLIAM DWIGHT WHITNEY, [late] Professor of Sanskrit and Comparative Phi- 
 lology in Yale University. Third (reprinted from the second, revised and ex- 
 tended) edition. 1896. 8vo. xxvi + 552 pages. Cloth: Mailing price, $3.20. 
 Paper: $2.90. 
 
 Cappeller's Sanskrit-English Dictionary. A Sanskrit-English Dic- 
 tionary. Based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. By CARL CAPPELLER, Professor 
 at the University of Jena. Royal 8vo. Cloth, viii + 672 pages. By mail, $6.25. 
 
 Lanman's Sanskrit Reader. A Sanskrit Reader: with Vocabulary 
 and Notes. By CHARLES ROCKWELL LANMAN, Professor of Sanskrit in Harvard 
 University. For use in colleges and for private study. Royal 8 vo. Complete: 
 Text, Notes, and Vocabulary, xxiv + 405 pages. Cloth: Mailing price, $2.00. 
 Text alone, for use in examinations, 106 pages. Cloth: Mailing price, 85 cents. 
 Notes alone, viii + 109 pages. Cloth: Mailing price, 85 cents. 
 
 This Reader is constructed with special reference to the needs of those who have to use it with- 
 out a teacher. The text is in Oriental characters. The selections are from the Maha-bharata, 
 Hitopadeca, Katha-sarit-sagara, Laws of Manu, the Rigveda, the Brahmanas, and the Sutras. 
 The Sanskrit words of the Notes and Vocabulary are in English letters. The Notes render 
 ample assistance in the interpretation of difficult passages. 
 
 Sanskrit Text in English Letters. Parts of Nala and Hitopadeca 
 in English Letters. Prepared by CHARLES R. LANMAN. Royal 8vo. Paper, vi + 44 
 pages. Mailing price, 30 cents. 
 
 The Sanskrit text of the first forty-four pages of Lanman's Reader, reprinted in English char- 
 acters. 
 
 Perry's Sanskrit Primer. A Sanskrit Primer: based on the Leit- 
 faden fur den Elementarcursus des Sanskrit of Prof. Georg Biihler of Vienna. 
 By EDWARD DELAVAN PERRY, Professor of Greek in Columbia University, New 
 York. 1885. 8vo. xii + 230 pages. Mailing price, $1.60.
 
 Kaegi's Rigveda. The Rig veda: the Oldest Literature of the Indians. 
 By ADOLF KAEGI, Professor in the University of Zurich. Authorized translation 
 [from the German], with additions to the notes, by ROBERT ARROWSMITH, Ph.D. 
 1886. 8vo.. Cloth, viii + 198 pages. Mailing price, $1.65. 
 
 Hopkins's Religions of India. The Religions of India. By EDWARD 
 WASHBURN HOPKINS, Professor of Sanskrit in Yale University. 1895. 12mo. 
 Cloth, xvi + 612 pages. Mailing price, $2.20. 
 
 This is the first of Professor Morris Jastrow's Series of Handbooks on the History of Religions. 
 The book gives an account of the religions of India in the chronological order of their devel- 
 opment. Extracts are given from Vedic, Brahmanic, Jain, Buddhistic, and later sectarian lit- 
 eratures. 
 
 Jackson's A vesta Reader. Avesta Reader: First Series. Easier texts, 
 notes, and vocabulary. By A. V. WILLIAMS JACKSON. 1893. 8vo. Cloth, viii + 112 
 pages. Mailing price, $1.85. 
 
 The selections include passages from Yasna, Visparad, Yashts, and Vendidad, and the text 
 is based on Geldner's edition. The book is intended for beginners.
 
 University of California 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
 
 Return this material to the library 
 
 from which it was borrowed. 
 
 I 
 
 ,, Ubra ( y 
 
 REC'D LD-URL 
 
 TitvclVEL) 
 
 MAR21199& 
 REC'D LD-URL 
 
 MAR 24 095 
 
 C( 
 
 L9 -Series 444